PDF

NOTICE INVITING TENDER
FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF
RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR AND
PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIES
AT TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA
NIT NO. : PNPM/PC-150/E/112/NCB
PREPARED AND ISSUED BY
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD.

(A Govt. of India Enterprise)
PDIL BHAWAN, A-14, Sector-1,
NOIDA-201301, U.P., India
December, 2019
TENDER DOCUMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF PC-150/E/112/MI 0
RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, DOC. NO. REV.
PUMP HOUSE & SERVICES
MASTER INDEX Page 1 of 1

MASTER INDEX
NIT NO. : PNPM/PC-150/E/112/NCB
NIT DESCRIPTION : TENDER DOCUMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER &

FIRE WATER RESERVOIR AND PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED
FACILITIES, AT TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA
Section-I Invitation for Bid [IFB]
Section-II BID EVALUATION CRITERIA [BEC] & Evaluation methodology
Instructions to Bidders [ITB]
Section-III Annexure
Forms & Format
Section-IV General Conditions of Contract [GCC]
Section-V Special Conditions of Contract [SCC]
Section-VI Specifications, Scope of Work and Drawing
Section-VII Schedule of Rates

 
FORM NO: 02-0000-0021 F 2 REV 3 All rights reserved

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-I 0
DOC. NO. REV.

PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED
Page - 1 - of 102
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF
RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR
AND
PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIES
AT TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL,
ODISHA
NIT NO.:PNPM/PC-150/E/112/NCB
(OPEN DOMESTIC COMPETITIVE BIDDING)

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-I 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR DOC. NO. REV.
AND PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIESAT
TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA Page - 2 - of 102
SECTION-I
INVITATION FOR BID (IFB)
‐ 2 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-I 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
SECTION-I
"INVITATION FOR BID (IFB)”
Ref No:______________________________ Date:
To,
PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS
SUB: TENDER DOCUMENT FOR ____________________________________
Dear Sir/Madam,
1.0 Projects and Development India Limited (PDIL), hereinafter referred to as

CONSULTANT on behalf of M/s Talcher Fertilizers Ltd. (TFL), hereinafter referred as
OWNER, has the pleasure of inviting eligible bidders to submit Bid ONLINE through
Central Public Procurement (CPP) Portal (https://eprocure.gov.in) in Single Stage Two
Bid System, for the subject Project.
The entire set of Bidding documents is also placed on the website at TFL website
(http://tflonline.co.in), PDIL website www.pdilin.com, GAIL website
(www.gailtenders.in), RCF websitewww.rcfltd.com and CIL websitewww.coalindia.in.
2.0 The brief details of the tender are as under:
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER & FIRE

NAME OF WORK / BRIEF SCOPE OF WATER RESERVOIR AND PUMP HOUSE &
(A)
WORK/JOB ALLIED FACILITIES
(B) TENDER NO. & DATE PNPM/PC-150/E/112/NCB Dated 23.12.2019
SINGLE BID
SYSTEM
(C) TYPE OF BIDDING SYSTEM
TWO BID
SYSTEM √
E-TENDER
(CPP PORTAL) √
(D) TYPE OF TENDER
MANUAL
‐ 3 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-I 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

20(Twenty) Months from date of issuance of
(E) COMPLETION PERIOD
‘FAX OF ACCEPTANCE’
120 days from the date of Techno-

(F) BID VALIDITY
commercial Bid opening
APPLICABLE
√
NOT APPLICABLE
BID SECURITY / EARNEST MONEY
(G)
DEPOSIT (EMD)
Amount: INR 48,86,000/- (Rupees Forty
Eight Lakhs Eighty Six Thousand only)
(Also refer clause no.16 of ITB)
From 23.12.2019 (09:00 Hrs, IST) to

22.01.2020 (15:00 Hrs, IST) on following
websites:
AVAILABILITY OF TENDER (i) Govt. CPP Portal https://eprocure.gov.in

(H)
DOCUMENT ON WEBSITE(S) (ii) TFL Website - http://tflonline.co.in
(iii) PDIL website - www.pdilin.com
(iv) GAIL website - www.gailtenders.in
(v) RCF website -www.rcfltd.com
(vi) CIL website -www.coalindia.in
DATE, TIME & VENUE OF PRE-BID

(I) 31.12.2019 (14:30 Hrs. IST) at PDIL, NOIDA
MEETING
START OF BID SUBMISSION ON

(J) 03.01.2020 at 9:00 AM
CPP PORTAL
Date : 22.01.2020
DUE DATE & TIME OF BID- Time : 15:00 Hrs (IST)
(K)
SUBMISSION
Date : 23.01.2020
Time :15:30 hrs (IST) Onwards
DATE AND TIME OF UN-PRICED BID Venue:
OPENING (IN PRESENCE OF M/s Projects & Development India Limited,
(L)
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE (Project Management Department)
OF BIDDERS) P.D.I.L Bhawan, A-14, Sector-1, Noida,
(PIN 201301)
Dist. Gautam Budh Nagar (UP). (India)
Projects & Development India Limited,
(Project Management Department)
ADDRESS FOR COMMUNICATION
(M) P.D.I.L Bhawan, A-14, Sector-1,
WITH PDIL
Noida , (India)
Fax no.:0120-2529801
‐ 4 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-I 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
Kind Attention: Mr. R.R.Kumar/Kailash Joshi

Addl. General Manager & HOD (PM)
Tel no. : +91-120-2529842/43/47/51/53/54
Extn. 314/304
Fax no. : +91-120-2529801
E-mail : rrkumar@pdilin.com
kjoshi@pdilin.com
GAIL INDIA LIMITED, PLOT NO. 24,
FILM CITY, SECTOR 16A,
NOIDA- 201301
ADDRESS FOR COMMUNICATION
(N) WITH OWNER (TFL) AT PROJECT Kind Attention : Mr. Manas K Mahapatra-
OFFICE DGM (TFL)
Tel No. : 9818804063
E-mail : mm02484@gail.co.in
ADDRESS FOR COMMUNICATION Mr. Panchanan Haldar-GM (P & E)
(O) WITH OWNER (TFL) AT SITE FOR Mob No. :8360677410
SITE VISIT E-mail : phaldar@GAIL.CO.IN
In case the days specified above happens to be a holiday in TFL/PDIL, the next
working day shall be implied.
3.0 Bids must be submitted strictly in accordance with Clause No. 11 of ITB depending
upon Type of Tender as mentioned at Clause no. 2.0 (D) of IFB. The IFB is an integral
and inseparable part of the bidding document.
4.0 The following documents in addition to uploading in the bid on CPP portal shall also be
submitted in Original (in physical form) within 7 (seven) days from the bid due date
provided the scanned copies of the same have been uploaded in along with e-bid
within the due date and time to the address mentioned in Bidding Data Sheet(BDS):-
i) EMD/Bid Security (if applicable)

ii) Power of Attorney
iii) Integrity Pact
5.0 Bidder(s) are advised to quote strictly as per terms and conditions of the tender
documents and not to stipulate any deviations/exceptions.
6.0 Any bidder, who meets the Bid Evaluation Criteria (BEC) and wishes to quote
against this Tender Document, may download the complete Tender Document
alongwith its amendment(s) if any from websites as mentioned at 2.0 (H) of IFB and
submit their Bid complete in all respect as per terms & conditions of Tender
Document on or before the Due Date & Time of Bid Submission.
7.0 Bid(s) received from bidders to whom tender/information regarding this Tender
Document has been issued as well as offers received from the bidder(s) by
downloading Tender Document from above mentioned website(s) shall be taken into
consideration for evaluation & award provided that the Bidder is found responsive
subject to provisions contained in Clause No. 2 of ITB.
‐ 5 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-I 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
The Tender Document calls for offers on single point “Sole Bidder” responsibility
basis (except where JV/Consortium bid is allowed pursuant to clause no. 3.0 of ITB)
and in total compliance of Scope of Works as specified in Tender Document.
8.0 Amendments/Clarification(s)/Corrigendum(s) if any shall also be available on above

referred websites. Any revision, Amendment, clarification, addendum, corrigendum,
time extension, etc. to this Tender Document will be hosted on the
abovementioned website(s) only. Bidders are requested to visit the website
regularly to keep themselves updated.
9.0 All the bidders including those who are not willing to submit their bid are required to
submit F-6(Acknowledgement cum Consent letter) duly filled within 7 days from
receipt of tender information.
10.0 The bidder shall submit the bid ONLINE through Central Public Procurement (CPP)
Portal. Bids complete in all respects should be uploaded in the CPP portal on or
before the Bid Due Date and time mentioned in at Sl No. 2(K) above. Bids through
Post/ Fax / E-mail /CD/ any other mode other than that specified in ITB will not be
accepted
11.0 TFL/PDIL reserves the right to reject any or all the bids received at its discretion
without assigning any reason whatsoever.
This is not an Order.
For & on behalf of

(Projects & Development India Limited)
R. R. Kumar
(Authorized Signatory)
Name : R. R. Kumar
Designation: Addl. GM
E-mail ID :rrkumar @pdilin.com
Contact No. :0120-2529839
‐ 6 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-I 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
‐ 7 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-II 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA
Page - 8 - of 102
SECTION-II
BID EVALUATION CRITERIA & EVALUATION METHODOLOGY

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-II 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
Page - 9 - of 102

SECTION-II
BID EVALUATION CRITERIA (BEC) & EVALUATION METHODOLOGY
Bidder shall submit bid subject to meeting the Bid Evaluation Criteria as
stated here. Evaluation of Technical and Commercial offers shall be carried
out for only those Bidders who shall meet the Bid Evaluation Criteria.
1. Technical Criteria
1.1 Bidder must have successfully completed at least one similar work (*) of value not
less than INR 28.83 Crore in previous seven (07) years, to be reckoned from the
bid due date:
(The above value of completed works is inclusive GST/ Service Tax).
*Similar Works means: “Similar work” under a single work order is defined as
work Completed under a single work order for
Construction of RCC/PCC Lined Earthen Water Reservoir alongwith

associated Civil/ Mechanical/ Electrical works.
OR
Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) works pertaining to water retaining
structures in Dams/ Barrage/ Canals alongwith associated Civil/ Mechanical/
Electrical works
Note:
(a) Eligibility criteria in case bid is submitted on the basis of technical experience of
FOREIGN BASED ANOTHER COMPANY(SUPPORTING COMPANY) which holds
more than fifty percent of the paid up share capital of the bidder company or vice
versa
Offers of those bidders (not under consortium arrangement) who themselves do not
meet the technical experience criteria as stipulated in the BEC and are quoting
based on the experience of Foreign based another company (Supporting Company)
can also be considered. In such case the supporting company should hold more
than fifty percent of the paid up share capital of the bidding company or vice versa.
However, the supporting company should on its own meet the technical experience
as stipulated in the BEC and should not rely on any other company or through any
other arrangement like Technical collaboration agreement.
In that case as the bidding company is dependent upon the technical experience of
another company with a view to ensure commitment and involvement of the
companies involved for successful execution of the contract, the participating bidder
‐ 9 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-II 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
Page - 10 - of 102

should enclose the following Agreements/ Guarantees/ Undertakings along with the
techno-commercial bid:
(i) An Agreement (as per format enclosed at Appendix- A1) between the bidder
and the supporting company.
(ii) Guarantee (as per format enclosed at Appendix- A2) by the supporting
company to GAIL for fulfilling the obligation under the Agreement.
(iii) Undertaking by Supporting Company to provide a Performance Bank

Guarantee (as per format and instructions enclosed at Appendix- A3),
equivalent to 50% of the value of the PBG which is to be submitted by the
bidding company, in case of being the successful bidder.
In cases where foreign based supporting company does not have Permanent
Establishment in India as per Indian Income Tax Act, the bidding company
can furnish Performance Bank Guarantee for an amount which is sum of PBG
amount to be submitted by the bidder and additional PBG amount required to
be submitted by the supporting company subject to the condition that
supporting company have 100% paid up equity share capital of the bidder
either directly or through intermediate subsidiaries or vice versa.
In such case bidding company shall furnish an undertaking that their foreign
based supporting company is not having any Permanent Establishment in
India in terms of Income Tax Act of India.
(iv) Undertaking from the supporting company to the effect that in addition to
invoking the PBG submitted by the bidding company, the PBG provided by
supporting company shall be invoked by GAIL due to non-performance of the
bidding company.
Note:
In case Supporting company fails to submit Bank Guarantee as per (iii) above,
EMD/SD submitted by the bidder shall be forfeited.
The Financial BEC of tender is to be met by bidder on their own.
(b) Job executed by a Bidder for its own plant/ project cannot be considered as
experience for the purpose of meeting BEC of the tender. However, jobs
executed for Subsidiary/ Fellow subsidiary/ Holding company will be
considered as experience for the purpose of meeting BEC subject to
submission of tax paid invoice(s) duly certified by Statutory Auditor of the
Bidder towards payments of statutory tax in support of the job executed for
Subsidiary/ Fellow subsidiary/ Holding company. Such Bidders to submit these
documents in addition to the documents specified to meet BEC
(c) To meet the job experience criteria as mentioned above, the bidder shall submit
documentary proof such as Copy of Work Order clearly specifying scope of work /
relevant Extract of Work Order such as BOQ/SOR and Completion / Acceptance
‐ 10 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-II 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
Page - 11 - of 102

Certificate issued by end user/ owner (or their consultant who has been duly
authorized by them to issue such certificate) showing reference no. & date of work
order/ contract agreement, date of completion. Awarded & executed value of work
etc.
(d) The bidder must submit the completion certificate issued by end user/ owner (or
their consultant who has been duly authorized by them to issue such certificate)
only after completion of work/supply in all aspects
(e) Only documents (Work order, completion certificate, execution certificate etc.)
which have been referred /specified in the bid shall be considered in reply to the
queries during evaluation of bids
(f) Experience of bidder acquired as a subcontractor can be accepted against

submission of certificate from end user by such bidder along with other
specified documents.
2. Financial Criteria
2.1 Annual financial turnover in any of the last three (03) preceding financial years i.e.
2018-19, 2017-18 and 2016-17 or Calendar years 2018, 2017 & 2016 of the bidders
should be at least INR 17.30 Crore.
2.2 Net Worth of the Company should be positive as per last audited financial year (F.Y.
2018-19 or Calendar year 2018).
2.3 Bidder should have minimum working capital equal to Rs. 3.46 Crores as per last
audited financial year (F.Y. 2018- 2019 or Calendar year 2018). However, if the
bidder’s working capital is negative or inadequate, the bidder shall submit a letter
from their Bank having Net worth of the bank not less than Rs. 100.0 Crores (or
equivalent USD), confirming the availability of line of credit for Rs. 3.46 Crores. The
line of credit from bank shall be submitted strictly as per prescribed format at F-9
Note:
(a) To meet the criteria mentioned at Sl. No. 2.1 above, bidder shall submit Audited
Annual Financial Statements of the company for the immediate any one of the
preceding three (03) financial years/ Calendar years that meets BEC Sl. No. 2.1.

(b) To meet the criteria mentioned at Sl. No. 2.2 & 2.3 above, bidder shall submit
Audited Annual Financial Statements for financial year 2018-19 or calendar year
2018 along-with Bank’s letter for 2.3 (if applicable).
‐ 11 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-II 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
Page - 12 - of 102
3. DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR COMPLIANCE TO BEC

(i) Technical Criteria of BEC:
To meet the criteria (1.1) above, Bidder shall submit documentary proof such
as Copy of Work Order / relevant Extract of Work Order and Completion /
Acceptance Certificate.
The Completion/Acceptance Certificate shall clearly indicate the LOA / Work
Order no., Name of Work, Contract Value, Scope of Work, Contract period
and actual Date of Completion.
(ii) Financial Criteria of BEC:
(a) To meet the criteria mentioned at Sl. No. 2.1 above, bidder shall
submit Audited Annual Financial Statements of the company for the
immediate any one of the preceding three (03) financial years/
Calendar years that meets BEC Sl. No. 2.1.
(b) To meet the criteria mentioned at Sl. No. 2.2 & 2.3 above, bidder shall
submit Audited Annual Financial Statements for financial year 2018-19
or calendar year 2018 along-with Bank’s letter for 2.3 (if applicable).
(c) In case the tenders having the bid closing date up to 30th September
of the relevant financial year, and audited financial results of the
immediate 3 preceding financial year is not available, the bidder has
an option to submit the audited financial results of the 3 years
immediately prior to that year will be considered as last financial year
for Annual turnover and Working Capital calculation. Wherever the
closing date of the bid is after 30thSeptember of the relevant financial
year, bidder has to compulsorily submit the audited financial results for
the immediate three (03) preceding financial years i.e. 2017-18, 2016-
17 and 2015-16.
4. AUTHENTICATION OF DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED IN SUPPORT OF BEC:
i. Technical Criteria of BEC:

All documents in support of Technical Criteria of BEC to be furnished by the
Bidder shall necessarily be duly certified/ attested by Chartered Engineer and
Notary Public with legible stamp.
Note: All charges of the verification and certification shall be borne by

the Bidder.
ii. Financial Criteria of BEC:

Bidder shall submit “Details of financial capability of Bidder” in prescribed
format (F-10) duly signed and stamped by a Chartered Accountant.
Further, copy of audited annual financial statements submitted in bid shall be
duly certified/ attested by Notary Public with legible stamp.
‐ 12 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-II 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
Page - 13 - of 102

5. BEC for START-UPS
The Technical and Financial BEC as stipulated above shall also be applicable for
start-ups. However, the Startups are exempted from submission of EMD. For availing
the relaxation of EMD, bidder is required to submit requisite certificate towards
Startup enterprise registration issued by Department of Industrial Policy and
Promotion, Ministry of Commerce & Industry and the certificate should be certified by
the Chartered Accountant (not being an employee or a Director or not having any
interest in the bidder’s company/firm) and notary public with legible stamp.”
Except for exemption of EMD, there will be no relaxation for experience and turnover
for start-ups. Accordingly, the BEC as stipulated at para A (1.0) and para A (2.0)
mentioned above shall be applicable for start-ups also.
6. EVALUATION METHODOLOGY:
The financial comparison for selection of Lowest (L-1) Bidder / Contractor shall be
arrived at “Total Quoted Price inclusive of all Taxes and Duties plus GST (including
cess if any)” as indicated by the bidder in the format of “SUMMARY OF
SCHEDULEOF RATES at Sl. No. “G” (Section VII, of tender document)
The comparison shall be on the summation of the TOTAL PRICE in SCHEDULE OF
RATES (i.e. the Sl. No. “G” of Summary of Schedule of Rates, Section- VII of
tender document). Correction of error, if any shall be done as per clause no. 30.0 of
ITB
Note:
The subject work is indivisible and same shall be awarded to single successful
overall lowest bidder unless stated otherwise elsewhere in the tender document.
Hence, evaluation of bids shall be done on overall L-1 basis considering all
applicable taxes & duties including GST as under:
(i) Total quoted price as per SOR inclusive of all taxes & duties including GST
after arithmetic correction of errors (if any)
(ii) In case any cess on GST is applicable, same shall also be considered in
evaluation.
(iii) In case any unregistered bidder is submitting their bid, their prices will be
loaded with applicable GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) while evaluation
of bid (if applicable as per Govt. Act/Law in vogue). Where TFL is entitled for
input credit of GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST), the same will be
considered for evaluation of bid as per evaluation methodology of tender
document.
‐ 13 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-II 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
Page - 14 - of 102
‐ 14 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
SECTION-III
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
[TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH BIDDING DATA SHEET (BDS)]
‐ 16 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
SECTION-III
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
INDEX
[A] GENERAL:
1. SCOPE OF BID
2. ELIGIBLE BIDDERS
3. BIDS FROM CONSORTIUM / JOINT VENTURE
4. ONE BID PER BIDDER
5. COST OF BIDDING
6. SITE-VISIT
[B] BIDDING DOCUMENTS:

7. CONTENTS OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
8. CLARIFICATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
9. AMENDMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
[C] PREPARATION OF BIDS:

10. LANGUAGE OF BID
11. DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID
12. SCHEDULE OF RATES / BID PRICES
13 GST (CGST & SGST/ UTGST or IGST )
14. BID CURRENCIES
15. BID VALIDITY
16. EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT
17. PRE-BID MEETING
18. FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID
19. ZERO DEVIATION & REJECTION CRITERIA
20. DELETED
[D] SUBMISSION OF BIDS:

21. SUBMISSION,SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS
22. DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS
23. LATE BIDS
24. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
[E] BID OPENING AND EVALUATION:

25. EMPLOYER'S RIGHT TO ACCEPT ANY BID AND TO REJECT ANY
OR ALL BIDS
26. BID OPENING
27. CONFIDENTIALITY
28. CONTACTING THE EMPLOYER
29. EXAMINATION OF BIDS AND DETERMINATION OF
RESPONSIVENESS
30. CORRECTION OF ERRORS
31. CONVERSION TO SINGLE CURRENCY FOR COMPARISON OF
BIDS
32. EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS
33. COMPENSATION FOR EXTENDED STAY
34. PURCHASE PREFERENCE

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
[F] AWARD OF CONTRACT:

35. AWARD
36. NOTIFICATION OF AWARD / FAX OF ACCEPTANCE [FOA]
37. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
38. CONTRACT PERFORMANCE SECURITY / SECURITY DEPOSIT
39. PROCEDURE FOR ACTION IN CASE
CORRUPT/FRAUDULENT/COLLUSIVE/COERCIVE PRACTICES
40. DELETED
41. AHR ITEMS
42. VENDOR EVALUATION PROCEDURE
43. INCOME TAX & CORPORATE TAX
44. SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES BETWEEN GOVERNMENT
DEPARTMENT AND ANOTHER AND ONE GOVERNMENT
DEPARTMENT AND PUBLIC ENTERPRISE AND ONE PUBLIC
ENTERPRISE AND ANOTHER
45. DELETED
46. INAM-PRO (PLATFORM FOR INFRASTRUCTURE AND MATERIALS
PROVIDERS)
47. PROMOTION OF PAYMENT THROUGH CARDS AND DIGITAL
MEANS
48. CONTRACTOR TO ENGAGE CONTRACT MANPOWER BELONGING
TO SCHEDULED CASTES AND WEAKER SECTIONS OF THE
SOCIETY
49.QUARTERLY CLOSURE OF THE CONTRACT
50.PROVISION FOR STARTUPS
51.PROVISION REGARDING INVOICE FOR REDUCED VALUE OR
CREDIT NOTE TOWARDS PRS
[G] ANNEXURES:
1. ANNEXURE-I: PROCEDURE FOR ACTION IN CASE
2. ANNEXURE-II: VENDOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION PROCEDURE
3. ANNEXURE-III : ADDENDUM TO INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
(INSTRUCTION FOR PARTICIPATION IN E-TENDER)
4. ANNEXURE-IV: BIDDING DATA SHEET (BDS)

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS [ITB]
[TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH BIDDING DATA SHEET (BDS)]
[A] – GENERAL
1 SCOPE OF BID
1.1 The Employer as defined in the "General Conditions of Contract [GCC]", wishes to
receive Bids as described in the Bidding Document/Tender document issued by
Employer. Employer/Owner/TFL occurring herein under shall be considered
synonymous.
1.2 SCOPE OF BID: The scope of work/ Services shall be as defined in the Bidding
documents.
1.3 The successful bidder will be expected to complete the scope of Bid within the period
stated in Special Conditions of Contract.
1.4 Throughout the Bidding Documents, the terms 'Bid', 'Tender'& ‘Offer’ and their
derivatives [Bidder/Tenderer, Bid/Tender/Offer etc.] are synonymous. Further, 'Day'
means 'Calendar Day' and 'Singular' also means 'Plural'.
2 ELIGIBLE BIDDERS
2.1 The Bidder shall not be under a declaration of ineligibility by Employer for Corrupt/
Fraudulent/ Collusive/ Coercive practices, as defined in "Instructions to Bidders [ITB],
Clause No. 39” (Action in case Corrupt/ Fraudulent/ Collusive/ Coercive Practices).
2.2 The Bidder is not put on ‘Holiday’ by any of the JV partners of OWNER (viz. GAIL,
RCF, CIL) or Public Sector Project Management Consultant (like PDIL, EIL, Mecon
only due to “poor performance” or “corrupt and fraudulent practices”) or
banned/blacklisted by Government department/ Public Sector on due date of
submission of bid.
If the bidding documents were issued inadvertently/ downloaded from website, offers
submitted by such bidders shall not be considered for opening/ evaluation/Awardand
will be returned immediately to such bidders.
In case there is any change in status of the declaration prior to award of contract, the
same has to be promptly informed to TFL/PDIL by the bidder.
It shall be the sole responsibility of the bidder to inform TFL/PDIL in case the bidder
is put on ‘Holiday’ by JV partners of OWNER (viz. GAIL, RCF, CIL) or Public Sector
Project Management Consultant (like PDIL, EIL, Mecon. only due to “poor
performance” or “corrupt and fraudulent practices”) or banned/blacklisted by
Government department/ Public Sector on due date of submission of bid and during
the course of finalization of the tender. Concealment of the facts shall tantamount to
misrepresentation of facts andshall lead to action against such Bidders as per clause
39 of ITB.
2.3 The Bidder should not be under any liquidation court receivership or similar
proceedings on due date of submission of bid.

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

In case there is any change in status of the declaration prior to award of contract, the
same has to be promptly informed to TFL/PDIL by the bidder.
It shall be the sole responsibility of the bidder to inform TFL/PDIL in case the bidder
is under any liquidation court receivership or similar proceedings on due date of
submission of bid and during the course of finalization of the tender. Concealment of
the facts shall tantamount to misrepresentation of facts and shall lead to action
against such Bidders as per clause no.39 of ITB.
2.4 Bidder shall not be affiliated with a firm or entity:
(i) that has provided consulting services related to the work to the Employer
during the preparatory stages of the work or of the project of which the
works/services forms a part of or
(ii) That has been hired (or proposed to be hired) by the Employer as an
Engineer/ Consultant for the contract.
2.5 Neither the firm/entity appointed as the Project Management Consultant (PMC) for a
contract nor its affiliates/ JV’S/ Subsidiaries shall be allowed to participate in the
tendering process unless it is the sole Licensor/Licensor nominated agent/ vendor.
2.6 Pursuant to qualification criteria set forth in the bidding document, the Bidder shall
furnish all necessary supporting documentary evidence to establish Bidder’s claim of
meeting qualification criteria.
2.7 Power of Attorney (POA):
Power of Attorney to be issued by the bidder in favour of the authorized employee(s),in

respect of the particular tender, for purpose of signing the documents including bid, all
subsequent communications, agreements, documents etc. pertaining to the tender and
act and take any and all decision on behalf of the bidder (including Consortium). Any
consequence resulting due to such signing shall be binding on the Bidder (including
Consortium).
In case of a single Bidder, the power of Attorney shall be issued (as per format F-15)
as per the constitution of the bidder as below:
a) In case of Proprietorship: By Proprietor

b) In case of Partnership: by all Partners or Managing Partner.
c) In case of Limited Liability Partnership: by any bidder's employee
authorized in terms of Deed of LLP.
d) In case of Public /Limited Company: POA in favour of authorized
employee(s) by Board of Directors through Board Resolution or by the designated
officer authorized by Board to do so. Such Board Resolution should be duly
countersigned by Company Secretary / MD / CMD / CEO.

The Power of Attorney should be valid till award of contract/order to successful

bidder.

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
3 BIDS FROM "JOINT VENTURE"/"CONSORTIUM"
Not applicable for this tender.
4 ONE BID PER BIDDER
4.1 A Bidder shall submit only 'one [01] Bid' in the same Bidding Process either as single
entity or as a member of any consortium (wherever consortium bid is allowed). A
Bidder who submits or participates in more than 'one [01] Bid' will cause all the
proposals in which the Bidder has participated to be disqualified.
4.2 More than one bid means bid(s) by bidder(s) having same Proprietor / Partners /
Limited Liability Partner in any other Bidder(s). Further, more than one bids shall also
include two or more bidders having common power of attorney holder.
Failure to comply this clause during tendering process will disqualify all such
bidders from process of evaluation of bids.
4.3 Alternative Bids shall not be considered.
4.4 The provisions mentioned at sl. no. 4.1 and 4.2 shall not be
applicable wherein bidders are quoting for different Items /Sections / Parts / Groups/
SOR items of the same tender which specifies evaluation on Items / Sections /
Parts / Groups/ SOR items basis.
Further, the Details of Partner(s) / Proprietor / Power of Attorney holders of bidder

are to be necessarily sought in Format for ‘Bidder’s General Information’ in the
tender document.
‐ 21 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
5 COST OF BIDDING
The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of the
Bid including but not limited to Bank charges all courier charges including taxes &
duties etc. incurred thereof. Further, TFL/PDIL will in no case, be responsible or
liable for these costs, regardless of the outcome of the bidding process.
6 SITE VISIT
6.1 The Bidder is advised to visit and examine the site of works and its surroundings and
obtain for itself on its own responsibility all information that may be necessary for
preparing the Bid and entering into a Contract for the required job. The costs of
visiting the site shall be borne by the Bidder.
6.2 The Bidder or any of its personnel or agents shall be granted permission by the
Employer to enter upon its premises and land for the purpose of such visits, but only
upon the express conditions that the Bidder, its personnel and agents will release
and indemnify the Employer and its personnel, agents from and against all liabilities
in respect thereof, and will be responsible for death or injury, loss or damage to
property, and any other loss, damage, costs, and expenses incurred as a result of
inspection.
6.3 The Bidder shall not be entitled to hold any claim against TFL/PDIL for non-
compliance due to lack of any kind of pre-requisite information as it is the sole
responsibility of the Bidder to obtain all the necessary information with regard to site,
surrounding, working conditions, weather etc. on its own before submission of the
bid.
‐ 22 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
[B] – BIDDING DOCUMENTS
7 CONTENTS OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
7.1 The contents of Bidding Documents / Tender Documents are those stated below,
and should be read in conjunction with any 'Addendum / Corrigendum' issued in
accordance with "ITB: Clause-9":
 Section-I : Invitation for Bid [IFB]

 Section-II : BID EVALUATION CRITERIA [BEC] & Evaluation methodology
 Section-III : Instructions to Bidders [ITB]
Annexure
Forms & Format
 Section-IV : General Conditions of Contract [GCC]
 Section-V : Special Conditions of Contract [SCC]
 Section-VI : Technical Specifications, Scope of Work and Drawings
 Section-VII : Schedule of Rates
*Request for Quotation’, wherever applicable, shall also form part of the Bidding
Document.
7.2 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms & conditions in the
Bidding Documents. The "Request for Quotation [RFQ] &Invitation for Bid (IFB)"
together with all its attachments thereto, shall be considered to be read, understood
and accepted by the Bidders. Failure to furnish all information required by the
Bidding Documents or submission of a Bid not substantially responsive to the
Bidding Documents in every respect will be at Bidder's risk and may result in the
rejection of his Bid.
8 CLARIFICATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
8.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification(s) of the Bidding Documents may
notify PDIL in writing or by fax or email at PDIL's mailing address indicated in the
BDS no later than 02 (two) days prior to pre-bid meeting (in cases where pre-bid
meeting is scheduled) or 05 (five) days prior to the due date of submission of bid in
cases where pre-bid meeting is not held. TFL/PDIL reserves the right to ignore the
bidders request for clarification if received after the aforesaid period. TFL/PDILmay
respond in writing to the request for clarification. TFL/PDIL's response including an
explanation of the query, but without identifying the source of the query will be
uploaded on web sites as indicated at SlNo. 2.0 (H) IFB / communicated to
prospective bidders by e-mail/ fax.
‐ 23 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

8.2 Any clarification or information required by the Bidder but same not received by the
Employer at clause 8.1 (refer BDS for address) above is liable to be considered as
"no clarification / information required".
9 AMENDMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
9.1 At any time prior to the 'Bid Due Date', Owner may, for any reason, whether at its
own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by a prospective Bidder,
modify the Bidding Documents by addenda/ corrigendum.
9.2 Any addendum/ corrigendum thus issued shall be integral part of the Tender
Document and shall be hosted on the websites as provided at clause no. 2.0 (H) of
IFB. Bidders have to take into account all such addendum/ corrigendum before
submitting their Bid.
9.3 The Employer, if consider necessary, may extend the date of submissions of Bid in
order to allow the Bidders a reasonable time to furnish their most competitive bid
taking into account the amendment issued thereof.
‐ 24 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
[C] – PREPARATION OF BIDS
10 LANGUAGE OF BID:
The bid prepared by the Bidder and all correspondence, drawing(s), document(s),
certificate(s) etc. relating to the Bid exchanged by Bidder and PDIL shall be written in
English language only. In case a document, certificate, printed literature etc.
furnished by the Bidder in a language other than English, the same should be
accompanied by an English translation duly authenticated by the Chamber of
Commerce of Bidders Country, in which case, for the purpose of interpretation of the
Bid, the English translation shall govern.
11. DOCUMENTS COMPRISING THE BID
11.1 In case the Bids are invited under the Manual two Bid system(Not applicable for
this Tender]:
The Bid prepared by the Bidder shall comprise the following components sealed in 2
different envelopes:
11.1.1 ENVELOPE-I: "TECHNO-COMMERCIAL / UN-PRICED BID"shall contain the

following:
(a) 'Covering Letter' on Bidder's 'Letterhead' clearly specifying the enclosed

contents.
(b) 'Bidder's General Information', as per 'Form F-1'.
(c) 'Letter of Authority’ on the Letter Head, as per 'Form F-3'
(d) 'Agreed Terms and Conditions', as per 'Form F-5'
(e) 'ACKNOWLEDGEMENT CUM CONSENT LETTER', as per 'Form F-6'
(f) Duly attested documents in accordance with the "BID EVALUATION
CRITERIA [BEC]" establishing the qualification as per SECTION II of tender
document.
(g) Power of Attorney as per Format F-15 /copy of Board Resolution, in favour of
the authorized signatory of the Bid, as per clause no.2.7 of ITB
(h) EMD in original as per Clause 16 of ITB
(i) All forms and Formats including Annexures
(j) Copies of documents defining constitution of legal status of firm, place of
registration and principal place of Business of the firm.
(k) ‘Integrity Pact’ as per ‘Form F-13’
(l) ‘Indemnity Bond’ as per ‘Form F-14’
(m) Tender Document duly signed/ digitally signed by the Authorized Signatory
(as applicable).
‐ 25 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

(n) Copies of document related to ESI No., EPF No., GST No. and PAN No. of
Company
(o) Additional Documents specified in Bidding Data Sheet.
(p) Any other information / details required as per Bidding Document.
Note:
1. All the pages of the Bid must be duly signed / digitally signed by the "Authorized
Signatory" of the Bidder.
2. Forms F-4 & F-16 are not to be filled-up / submitted at this stage as these will be
executed only with the successful bidder. However, successful bidder will have
to submit the formats strictly as per the prescribed content without any deviation.
11.1.2 ENVELOPE-II: Price Bid
i) The Prices are to be submitted strictly as per the Schedule of Rate of the
bidding documents. TFL/PDIL shall not be responsible for any failure on the
part of the bidder to follow the instructions.
ii) Bidders are advised NOT to mention Rebate/Discount separately, either in
the SOR format or anywhere else in the offer. In case Bidder(s) intend to offer
any Rebate/Discount, they should include the same in the item rate(s) itself
under the “Schedule of Rates (SOR)” and indicate the discounted unit rate(s)
only.
iii) If any unconditional rebate has been offered in the quoted rate the same shall
be considered in arriving at evaluated price. However no cognizance shall be
taken for any conditional discount for the purpose of evaluation of the bids.
iv) In case, it is observed that any of the bidder(s) has/have offered suo-moto
Discount/Rebate after opening of unpriced bid but before opening of price
bids such discount /rebate(s) shall not be considered for evaluation. However,
in the event of the bidder emerging as the lowest evaluated bidder without
considering the discount/rebate(s), then such discount/rebate(s) offered by
the bidder shall be considered for Award of Work and the same will be
conclusive and binding on the bidder.
v) In the event as a result of techno-commercial discussions or pursuant to
seeking clarifications / confirmations from bidders, while evaluating the un-
priced part of the bid, any of the bidders submits a sealed envelope stating
that it contains revised prices; such bidder(s) will be requested to withdraw
the revised prices failing which the bid will not be considered for further
evaluation.
vi) In case any bidder does not quote for any item(s) of “Schedule of Rates” and
the estimated price impact is more than 10% of the quoted price, then the bid
will be rejected. If such price impact of unquoted items is 10% or less of his
quoted price, then the unquoted item(s) shall be loaded highest of the price
quoted by the other bidders. If such bidder happens to be lowest evaluated
bidder, price of unquoted items shall be considered as included in the quoted
bid price.
11.2 In case the bids are invited through CPP portal, bidders are requested to refer
instructions for participating in CPP portal enclosed herewith as Annexure-III. Bids
submitted manually shall be rejected. The bids must be submitted on CPP portal only
as follows :-
‐ 26 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

11.2.1 PART-I: “TECHNO-COMMERCIAL/UN-PRICED BID” comprising all the above
documents mentioned at 11.1.1 along withEMD/Bid Bond, copy of Power of Attorney
and copy of integrity pact should be uploaded in the area earmarkedin the CPP
portal.
Further, Bidders must submit the original, EMD, Power of Attorney and Integrity
Pact and any other documents specified in the Tender Document to the address
mentioned in IFB, in a sealed envelope, superscribing the details of Tender
Document (i.e. tender number & tender for) within 7 days from the date of un-priced
bid opening.
Bidders are required to submit the EMD in original by Due Date and Time of Bid
Submission or upload a scanned copy of the same in the Part-I of the Bid. If the
Bidder is unable to submit EMD in original by Due Date and Time of Bid Submission,
the Bidder is required to upload a scanned copy of the EMD in the e-bid, provided
the original EMD, copy of which has been uploaded, is received within 7 days from
the Due Date of Bid Opening, failing which the Bid will be rejected irrespective of
their status/ranking in tendering process and notwithstanding the fact that a copy of
EMD was earlier uploaded by the Bidder.
11.2.2 PART-II: PRICE BID
The Prices are to be filled strictly in the “Schedule of Rates” of the bidding
documents and provision mentioned at para 11.1.2 hereinabove and to be uploaded
in CPP portal.
11.3 In case of bids invited under single bid system, a single envelope containing all
documents specified at Clause 11.1.1 & 11.1.2 of ITB above form the BID. All
corresponding conditions specified at Clause 11.1.1 & 11.1.2 of ITB shall become
applicable in such a case.
12. SCHEDULE OF RATES / BID PRICES
12.1 Unless stated otherwise in the Bidding Documents, the Contract shall be for the
whole works as described in Bidding Documents, based on the rates and prices
submitted by the Bidder and accepted by the Employer. The prices quoted by the
Bidders will be inclusive of all taxes except GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST).
12.2 Prices must be filled in format for "Schedule of Rates [SOR]" enclosed as part of
Tender document. If quoted in separate typed sheets and any variation in item
description, unit or quantity is noticed; the Bid is liable to be rejected.
12.3 Bidder shall quote for all the items of "SOR" after careful analysis of cost involved for
the performance of the completed item considering all parts of the Bidding
Document. In case any activity though specifically not covered in description of item
under "SOR" but is required to complete the works as per Specifications, Scope of
Work / Service, Standards, General Conditions of Contract (“GCC"), Special
Conditions of Contract ("SCC") or any other part of Bidding Document, the prices
quoted shall deemed to be inclusive of cost incurred for such activity.
‐ 27 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

12.4 All duties, taxes and other levies [if any] payable by the Contractor under the
Contract, or for any other cause except final GST (CGST & SGST/ UTGST or IGST)
shall be included in the rates / prices and the total bid-price submitted by the Bidder.
Applicable rate of GST (CGST & SGST/ UTGST or IGST) on the contract value shall
be indicated in Agreed Terms & Conditions (Format-F5) and SOR.
12.5 Prices quoted by the Bidder, shall remain firm and fixed and valid until completion of
the Contract and will not be subject to variation on any account. Any new taxes &
Duties, if imposed by the State/ Govt. of India after due date of bid submission but
before the Contractual Delivery Date, shall be reimbursed to the contractor on
submission of documentary evidence for proof of payment to State/ Govt. Authorities
and after ascertaining it’s applicability with respect to the contract.
12.6 The Bidder shall quote the unit rates in 'figures' & words. There should not be any
discrepancy between the prices indicated in figures and the price indicated in words.
In case of any discrepancy, the same shall be dealt as per clause no. 30 of ITB.
12.7 Further, Bidder shall also mention the Service Accounting Codes (SAC) /
Harmonized System of Nomenclature (HSN)at the designated place in SOR.
13. GST (CGST & SGST/ UTGST or IGST)
13.1 Bidders are required to submit copy of the GST Registration Certificate while
submitting the bids wherever GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) is applicable.
13.2 Quoted prices should be inclusive of all taxes and duties, except GST (CGST &
SGST or IGST or UTGST). Please note that the responsibility of payment of GST
(CGST & SGST or IGST or UTGST) lies with the Supplier of Goods / Services only.
Supplier of Goods / Services (Service Provider) providing taxable service shall issue
an Invoice/ Bill, as the case may be as per rules/ regulation of GST. Further, returns
and details required to be filled under GST laws & rules should be timely filed by
Supplier of Goods / Services (Service Provider) with requisite details.
Payments to Service Provider for claiming GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST)
amount will be made provided the above formalities are fulfilled. Further, OWNER
may seek copies of challan and certificate from Chartered Accountant for deposit of
GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) collected from Owner.
13.3 The bidder confirms that it has included all taxes, duties, levies etc., as applicable at
prevailing rates, in its CONTRACT PRICE. In case, bidder has not included any such
taxes, duties, levies etc., at all and/or at prevailing rates (deliberately or otherwise)
and it becomes leviable during execution of the contract, then such bidder has to pay
all such taxes, duties, levies etc. and OWNER shall not be liable for payment of such
liabilities and/or OWNER shall not reimburse such taxes, duties, levies etc. to the
CONTRACTOR.
‐ 28 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

13.4 In case CBEC (Central Board of Indirect Taxesand Customs)/ any equivalent Central
Government agency/ State Government agency brings to the notice of OWNER that
the Supplier of Goods / Services (Service Provider) has not remitted the amount
towards GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) collected from OWNER to the
government exchequer, then, that Supplier of Goods / Services (Service Provider)
shall be put under Holiday list of OWNER for period of six months as mentioned in
Procedure for Evaluation of Performance of Vendors/ Suppliers/Contractors/
Consultants. This action will be in addition to the right of recovery of financial
implication arising on TFL.
13.5 In case of statutory variation in GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST), other than
due to change in turnover, payable on the contract value during contract period, the
Supplier of Goods / Services (Service Provider) shall submit a copy of the
'Government Notification' to evidence the rate as applicable on the Bid due date and
on the date of revision.
Beyond the contract period, any increase in the rate of GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST
or IGST) beyond the contractual delivery period shall be to Service Provider’s
account whereas any decrease in the rate GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST)
shall be passed on to the Owner.
Claim for payment of GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST)/ Statutory variation,
should be raised within two [02] months from the date of issue of 'Government
Notification' for payment of differential (in %) GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST),
otherwise claim in respect of above shall not be entertained for payment of arrears.
The base date for the purpose of applying statutory variation shall be the Bid Due
Date.
Owner/TFL will reimburse GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) to the Service
Provider at actuals against submission of Tax Invoices as per format specified in
rules/ regulation of GST subject to the ceiling amount of GST (CGST &
SGST/UTGST or IGST) as quoted by the bidder, subject to any statutory variations,
except variations arising due to change in turnover. In case of any variation in the
executed quantities (If directed and/or certified by the Engineer-In-Charge) the
ceiling amount on which GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) is applicable will be
modified on pro-rata basis.
13.6 OWNER will prefer to deal with registered supplier of goods/ services under GST.
Therefore, bidders are requested to get themselves registered under GST, it not
registered yet.
However, in case any unregistered bidder is submitting their bid, their prices will be
loaded with applicable GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) while evaluation of bid
(if applicable as per Govt. Act/ Law in vogue).
13.7 In case OWNER is required to pay entire/certain portion of applicable GST (CGST &
SGST/UTGST or IGST) and remaining portion, if any, is to be deposited by Bidder
directly as per GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) laws, entire applicable
rate/amount of GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) to be indicated by bidder in
the SOR.
‐ 29 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

Where OWNER has the obligation to discharge GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or
IGST) liability under reverse charge mechanism and OWNER has paid or is liable to
pay GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) to the Government on which interest or
penalties becomes payable as per GST laws for any reason which is not attributable
to TFL or ITC with respect to such payments is not available to OWNER for any
reason which is not attributable to OWNER, then OWNER shall be entitled to
deduct/ setoff / recover such amounts against any amounts paid or payable by
OWNER to Contractor / Supplier.
13.8 Contractor shall ensure timely submission of invoice(s) as per rules/ regulations of
GST with all required supporting document(s) within a period specified in Contracts/
LOA to enable OWNER to avail input tax credit. Further, returns and details required
to be filled under GST laws & rules should be timely filed by supplier with requisite
details.
If input tax credit with respect to GST (CGST & SGST/ UTGST or IGST) is not
available to OWNER for any reason which is not attributable to OWNER, then
OWNER shall not be obligated or liable to pay or reimburse GST (CGST &
SGST/UTGST or IGST) charged in the invoice(s) and shall be entitled to / deduct/
setoff /recover the such GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST UTGST) thereupon
together with all penalties and interest if any, against any amounts paid or payable by
OWNER in future to the Service Provider under this contract or under any other
contract..
13.8 RECONCILIATION BETWEEN GSTR2A AND INPUT TAX CREDIT
Supplier shall ensure timely submission of correct invoice(s), as per GSTrules/

regulation, with all required supporting document(s) within a periodspecified in
Contract to enable TFL to avail input credit of GST (CGST &SGST/UTGST or IGST).
Further, returns and details required to be filledunder GST laws & rules should be
timely filed by Supplier of Goods/ Services with requisite details.
If input Tax credit is not available to TFL for any reason not attributableto TFL, then
TFL shall not be obligated or liable to pay or reimburseGST (CGST & SGSTIUTGST
or IGST) claimed in the invoice(s) and shallbe entitled to deduct/ setoff/ recover such
GST amount (CGST &SGSTIUTGST or IGST) or Input Tax Credit amount together
with penaltiesand interest, if any, against any amounts paid or becomes payable by
TFL in future to the Supplier/Contractor under this contract or under any
othercontract.
In case CBIC (Central Board of Indirect Taxes and Customs)/ any taxauthority/ any
equivalent government agency brings to the notice of TFL that the Supplier has not
remitted the amount towards GST (CGST &SGSTIUTGST or IGST) collected from
TFL to the government exchequer,then, that Supplier shall be put under Holiday list
of TFL.
13.9 Anti-profiteering clause
As per Clause 171 of GST Act it is mandatory to pass on the benefit due to reduction
in rate of tax or from input tax credit to the consumer by way of commensurate
reduction in prices. The Supplier of Goods / Services may note the above and quote
their prices accordingly.
‐ 30 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

13.10 In case the GST rating of vendor on the GST portal / Govt. official website is negative
/ black listed, then the bids may be rejected by OWNER. Further, in case rating of
bidder is negative / black listed after award of work for supply of goods / services,
then OWNER shall not be obligated or liable to pay or reimburse GST to such vendor
and shall also be entitled to deduct / recover such GST along with all penalties /
interest, if any, incurred by OWNER.
13.11 GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) is implemented w.e.f. 01.07.2017 which
subsumed variousindirect taxes and duties applicable before 01.07.2017.
Accordingly, the provisions of General Condition of Contract relating to taxes and
duties which are subsumed in GST are modified to aforesaid provisions mentioned in
clause no. 12 and 13 of ITB.
14. BID CURRENCIES:
Bidders must submit bid in Indian Rupees only.
15. BID VALIDITY
15.1 Bids shall be kept valid for period specified in BDS from the final Due date of
submission of bid'. A Bid valid for a shorter period may be rejected by OWNER as
'non-responsive'.
15.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original 'Bid Validity Period', the
Employer may request the Bidders to extend the 'Period of Bid Validity' for a
specified additional period. The request and the responses thereto shall be made in
writing or by fax/email. A Bidder may refuse the request without forfeiture of his
EMD. A Bidder agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to modify his
Bid, but will be required to extend the validity of its EMDfor the period of the
extension and in accordance with "ITB: Clause-16" in all respects.
16. EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT
16.1 Bid must be accompanied with earnest money [i.e Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)
also known as Bid Security]in the form of ‘Demand Draft’ / ‘Banker’s Cheque’[in
favour of TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED payable at place mentioned in BDS] or
‘Bank Guarantee’strictly as per the format given in form F -2 of the Tender
Document. Bidder shall ensure that EMD submitted in the form of ‘Bank
Guarantee’should have a validity of at least ‘two [02] months’ beyond the validity of
the Bid. EMD submittedin the form of ‘Demand Draft’ or ‘Banker’s Cheque’ should
be valid for three months.
Bid not accompanied with EMD, or EMD not in requisite format shall be liable for
rejection. The EMD shall be submitted in Indian Rupees only.
16.2 EMD shall not be accepted in case the same has reference of ‘remitter’ / ‘financer’
other than bidder on the aforementioned financial instrument of EMD submitted by
the bidder and bid of such bidder will be summarily rejected.
‐ 31 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

16.3 OWNER shall not be liable to pay any documentation charges, Bank charges,
commission, interest etc. on the amount of EMD. In case EMD is in the form of a
‘Bank Guarantee’, the same shall be from any Indian scheduled Bank or a branch of
an International Bank situated in India and registered with ‘Reserve Bank of India’ as
Scheduled Foreign Bank. However, in case of ‘Bank Guarantee’ from Banks other
than the Nationalized Indian Banks, the Bank must be commercial Bank having net
worth in excess of Rs. 100 Crores [Rupees One Hundred Crores] and a declaration
to this effect should be made by such commercial Bank either in the ‘Bank
Guarantee’ itself or separately on its letterhead.
16.4 Any Bid not secured in accordance with “ITB: Clause-16.1 & Clause-16.3” may be
rejected by OWNER as non-responsive.
16.5 Unsuccessful Bidder’s EMD will be discharged/ returned as promptly as possible, but
not later than ‘thirty [30] days’ after finalization of tendering process.
16.6 The successful Bidder’s EMD will be discharged upon the Bidder’s acknowledging
the ‘Award’ and signing the ‘Contract Agreement’ (if applicable) and furnishing the
‘Contract Performance Security (CPS)/ Security Deposit’ pursuant to clause no. 38 of
ITB.
16.7 Notwithstanding anything contained herein, the EMD may also be forfeited in any of
the following cases:
(a) If a Bidder withdraws his Bid during the ‘Period of Bid Validity’
(b) If a Bidder has indulged in corrupt/fraudulent /collusive/coercive practice
(c) If the Bidder modifies Bid during the period of bid validity (after Due Date and
Time for Bid Submission).
(d) Violates any other condition, mentioned elsewhere in the Tender Document,
which may lead to forfeiture of EMD.
(e) In the case of a successful Bidder, if the Bidder fails to:
(i) to acknowledge receipt of the “Notification of Award” / Fax of
Acceptance[FOA]”,
(ii) to furnish “Contract Performance Security / Security Deposit”, in
accordance with “ITB: Clause-38”
(iii) to accept ‘arithmetical corrections’ as per provision of the clause 30 of
ITB.
16.8 In case EMD is in the form of ‘Bank Guarantee’, the same must indicate the Tender
Document No. and the name of Tender Document for which the Bidder is quoting.
This is essential to have proper correlation at a later date.
16.9 MSEs (Micro & Small Enterprises) are exempted from submission of EMD in
accordance with the provisions of PPP-2012 and Clause 40 of ITB. However,
Traders/Dealers/ Distributors /Stockiest /Wholesaler are not entitled for exemption of
EMD. The Government Departments/PSUs are also exempted from the payment of
EMD. Further, Startups are also exempted from the payment of EMD.
16.10 In case forfeiture of EMD/Bid Security, the forfeited amount will be considered
inclusive of tax and tax invoice will be issued by TFL. The forfeiture amount will be
subject to final decision of TFL based on other terms and conditions of
order/contract.
‐ 32 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
17. PRE-BID MEETING (IF APPLICABLE)
17.1 The Bidder(s) or his designated representative are invited to attend a "Pre-Bid
Meeting" which will be held at address specified in IFBSl No. 2.0 (I) of IFB. It is
expected that a bidder shall not depute more than 02 representatives for the
meeting.
17.2 Purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer questions on any
matter that may be raised at that stage.
17.3 Text of the questions raised and the responses given, together with any responses
prepared after the meeting, will be uploaded on websites as mentioned at Sl No.
2.0(H) of IFB. Any modification of the Contents of Bidding Documents listed in "ITB:
Clause-7.1", that may become necessary as a result of the Pre-Bid Meeting shall be
made by the Employer exclusively through the issue of an Addendum / Corrigendum
pursuant to "ITB: Clause-9", and not through the minutes of the Pre-Bid Meeting.
17.4 Non-attendance of the Pre-Bid Meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of
Bidder.
18 FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID
18.1 The original and all copies of the Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink [in the
case of copies, photocopies are also acceptable] and shall be signed by a person or
persons duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder (as per POA). The name and
position held by each person signing, must be typed or printed below the signature.
All pages of the Bid except for un-amended printed literature where entry(s) or
amendment(s) have been made shall be initialed by the person or persons signing
the Bid.
18.2 The Bid shall contain no alterations, omissions, or additions, unless such corrections
are initiated by the person or persons signing the Bid.
18.3 In case of e-tendering, digitally signed documents to be uploaded as detailed in

addendum to ITB.
19 ZERO DEVIATION AND REJECTION CRITERIA
19.1 ZERO DEVIATION: Deviation to terms and conditions of "Bidding Documents" may
lead to rejection of bid.OWNER will accept bids based on terms & conditions of
"Bidding Documents" only. Bidder may note OWNER will determine the substantial
responsiveness of each bid to the Bidding Documents pursuant to provision
contained in clause 29 of ITB. For purpose of this, a substantially responsive bid is
one which conforms to all terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents without
deviations or reservations. OWNER's determination of a bid's responsiveness is
based on the content of the bid itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence. OWNER
reserves the right to raise technical and/or commercial query(s), if required, may be
raised on the bidder(s).
‐ 33 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

The response(s) to the same shall be in writing, and no change in the price(s) or
substance of the bids shall be sought, offered or permitted. The substance of the bid
includes but not limited to prices, completion, scope, technical specifications, etc.
Bidders are requested to not to take any deviation/exception to the terms and
conditions laid down in this "Tender Documents", and submit all requisite documents
as mentioned in this "Tender Documents", failing which their offer will be liable for
rejection. If a bidder does not reply to the queries in the permitted time frame then its
bid shall be evaluated based on the documents available in the bid.
19.2 REJECTION CRITERIA: Notwithstanding the above, deviation to the following

clauses of Tender document shall lead to summarily rejection of Bid:
(a) Firm Price
(b) Earnest Money Deposit / Bid Security
(c) Specifications & Scope of Work
(d) Schedule of Rates / Price Schedule / Price Basis
(e) Duration / Period of Contract/ Completion schedule
(f) Period of Validity of Bid
(g) Price Reduction Schedule
(h) Contract Performance Security
(i) Guarantee / Defect Liability Period
(j) Arbitration / Resolution of Dispute/Jurisdiction of Court
(k) Force Majeure & Applicable Laws
(l) Integrity Pact, if Applicable
(m) Any other condition specifically mentioned in the tender document elsewhere
that non-compliance of the clause lead to rejection of bid
Note:Further, it is once again reminded not to mention any condition in the Bid which
is contradictory to the terms and conditions of Tender document.
20 PAYMENT
OWNER has initiated payments to Suppliers and Contractors

through RTGS / NEFT. The successful bidder should give the details of his
bank account as per the E-Banking Mandate Form (F-12).
‐ 34 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
[D] – SUBMISSION OF BIDS
21 SUBMISSION, SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS
21.1 Bids shall be submitted through CPP portal in the manner specified in tender
document. No Manual/ Hard Copy (Original) offer shall be acceptable.
21.2 DELETED
21.3 All the bids shall be addressed to the Consultant at address specified in IFB.
21.4 Bids submitted under the name of

AGENT/CONSULTANT/REPRESENTATIVE/RETAINER/ASSOCIATE etc. on
behalf of a bidder/affiliate shall not be accepted.
22 DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS
22.1 Bids must be submitted through CPP portal not later than the date and time specified
in the tender documents/BDS.
22.2 DELETED
22.3 OWNER may, in exceptional circumstances and at its discretion, extend the deadline
for submission of Bids (clause 9 of ITB refers), in which case all rights and
obligations of OWNER and the Bidders, previously subject to the original deadline
will thereafter be subject to the deadline as extended. Notice for extension of due
date of submission of bidwill be uploaded on website/ communicated to the bidders.
23 LATE BIDS
23.1 Any bids received after the notified date and time of closing of tenders will be treated
as late bids.
23.2 Tender on CPP portal shall close immediately after the due date for submission of
bid and no bids can be submitted thereafter.
Where the bid bond/physical documents have been received but the bid is not
submitted by the bidder in the CPP portal, such bid bond/ physical documents shall
be returned immediately.
23.3 Unsolicited Bids or Bids received to address other than one specifically stipulated in
the tender document will not be considered for evaluation/opening/award if not
received to the specified destination within stipulated date & time.
24 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
24.1 Modification and withdrawal of bids shall be as follows:-
24.1.1 IN CASE OF BIDS THORUGH CPP PORTAL
‐ 35 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

The bidder may withdraw or modify its bid after bid submission but before the due
date and time for submission as per tender document.
24.1.2 IN CASE OF MANUAL BIDDING (NOT APPLICABLE FOR THIS TENDER)
The bidder may withdraw or modify its bid after bid submission but before the due
date for submission as per tender document provided that the written notice of the
modification/ substitution/ withdrawal in received by OWNER prior to the deadline for
submission of bid.
24.2 The modification shall also be prepared, sealed, marked and dispatched in
accordance with the provisions of the clause 11 & 22 of ITB with relevant ‘Cut-Out
Slip’ duly pasted and mentioning on top of the envelope as “MODIFICATION”. In
case of withdrawal of bid, the Envelope containing withdrawal letter duly
superscribing the envelope as “WITHDRAWAL” and “Tender Document number
:….”/ communication regarding withdrawal of bid with “Tender Document number
:….”/ must reach concerned dealing official of OWNER within Due date & Time of
submission of Bid. No bid shall be modified/ withdrawn after the Due Date & Time for
Bid submission.
24.3 Any withdrawal/ modification/substitution of Bid in the interval between the Due Date
& Time for Bid submission and the expiration of the period of bid validity specified by
the Bidder in their Bid shall result in the Bidder’s forfeiture of EMD pursuant to clause
16 of ITB and rejection of Bid.
24.4 The latest Bid submitted by the Bidder shall be considered for evaluation and all
other Bid(s) shall be considered to be unconditionally withdrawn.
24.5 In case after price bid opening, the lowest evaluated bidder (L1) is not awarded the
job for any mistake committed by him in bidding or withdrawal of bid or modification
of bid or varying any term in regard thereof leading to re-tendering, OWNER shall
forfeit EMD paid by the bidder and such bidders shall be debarred from participation
in re-tendering of the same job(s)/item(s). Further, such bidder will be put on holiday
for a period of six months after following the due procedure.
25 EMPLOYER'S RIGHT TO ACCEPT ANY BID AND TO REJECT ANY OR ALL

BIDS
OWNER reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid, and to annul the Bidding
process and reject all Bids, at any time prior to award of Contract, without thereby
incurring any liability to the affected Bidder or Bidders or any obligations to inform the
affected Bidder or Bidders of the ground for OWNER's action. However, bidder, if so
desires, may seek the reason (in writing) for rejection of their Bid to which OWNER
shall respond quickly.
‐ 36 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
[E] – BID OPENING AND EVALUATION
26 BID OPENING
26.1 Un-priced Bid Opening :
OWNER will open bids, in the presence of bidders’ designated representatives who
choose to attend, at date, time and location stipulated in the BDS. The bidders’
representatives, who are present, shall sign a bid opening register evidencing their
attendance.
26.2 Priced Bid Opening:
26.2.1 OWNER will open the price bids of those bidders who meet the qualification
requirement and whose bid is determined to be technically and commercially
responsive. Bidders selected for opening of their price bids shall be informed about
the date of price bid opening. Bidders may depute their authorized representative to
attend the bid opening. The bidders’ representatives, who are present shall sign a
register evidencing their attendance and may be required to be present on a short
notice.
26.2.2 The price bids of those Bidders who were not found to be techno-commercially
responsive shall not be opened.
26.3 In case of bids invited under the single bid system, bid shall be opened on the
specified due date & time.
27 CONFIDENTIALITY
Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of

Bids, and recommendations for the award of a Contract, shall not be disclosed to
Bidder(s) or any other persons not officially concerned with such process.
28 CONTACTING THE EMPLOYER
28.1 From the time of Bid opening to the time of award of Contract, if any Bidder wishes to
contact the Employer on any matter related to the Bid, it should do so in writing.
Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation & recommendation
for award shall not be disclosed.
28.2 Any effort by the Bidder to influence the Employer in the Employer's 'Bid Evaluation',
'Bid Comparison', or 'Contract Award' decisions may result in the rejection of the
Bidder's Bid and action shall be initiated as per procedure in this regard.
29 EXAMINATION OF BIDS AND DETERMINATION OF RESPONSIVENESS
29.1 The owner’s determination of a bid’s responsiveness is based on the content of the
bid only. Prior to the detailed evaluation of Bids, the Employer will determine whether
each Bid:-
(a) Meets the "Bid Evaluation Criteria" of the Bidding Documents;

‐ 37 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

(b) Has been properly signed;
(c) Is accompanied by the required 'Earnest Money / Bid Security';
(d) Is substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding Documents;
and
(e) Provides any clarification and/or substantiation that the Employer may require
to determine responsiveness pursuant to "ITB: Clause-29.2"
29.2 A substantially responsive Bid is one which conforms to all the terms, conditions and
specifications of the Bidding Documents without material deviations or reservations
or omissions for this purpose employer defines the foregoing terms below:-
a) “Deviation” is departure from the requirement specified in the tender
documents.
b) “Reservation” is the setting of limiting conditions or withholding from complete
acceptance of the requirement in the tender documents.
c) “Omission” is the failure to submit part or all of the information or
documentation required in the tender document.
29.3 A material deviation, reservation or omission is one that,
a) If accepted would,
i) Affect in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of the
job as specified in tender documents.
ii) Limit, in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Tender Document,
the Employer’s rights or the tenderer’s obligations under the proposed
Contract.
b) If rectified, would unfairly affect the competitive position of other bidders
presenting substantially responsive bids.
29.4 The employer shall examine all aspects of the bid to confirm that all requirements
have been met without any material deviation, reservation or omission.
29.5 If a Bid is not substantially responsive, it may be rejected by the Employer and may
not subsequently be made responsive by correction or withdrawal of the of material
deviation, reservation or omission.
30 CORRECTION OF ERRORS
Arithmetic Correction of Errors (if any) in multiplication to derive the total cost of an
individual item shall be done by the Consultant based on the quoted Unit Price by the
Bidder. If the bidder does not accept the corrected amount of bid, its bid will be
rejected, and the Bid security shall be forfeited.
31 CONVERSION TO SINGLE CURRENCY FOR COMPARISON OF BIDS
Not Applicable. All bids submitted must be in the currency specified at clause 14 of
ITB.
32 EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS
‐ 38 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

Bid shall be evaluated as per evaluation criteria mentioned in Section-II of bidding
documents.
In case of a tie at the lowest bid (L1) position between two or more startup/non-
startup bidders, the order/LOA will be placed on the bidder who has higher/ highest
turnover in last audited financial year.
33 COMPENSATION FOR EXTENDED STAY [FOR APPLICABILITY OF THIS

CLAUSE REFER BDS]:-
33.1 In the event of the time of completions of work getting delayed beyond the time
schedule indicated in the bidding document plus a grace period equivalent to 1/5th of
the time schedule or 2 months whichever is more, due to reasons solely attributable
to Employer, the Contractor shall be paid compensation for extended stay (ESC) to
maintain necessary organizational set up and construction tools, tackles, equipment
etc. at site of work.
33.2 The bidder is required to specify the rate for ESC on per month basis in the “PRICE
PART” of his bid, which shall be considered for loading on total quoted price during
price bid evaluation. The loading shall be done of a period of 1/5th of the time
schedule or 1 month whichever is less. In case bidder does not indicate the rate for
ESC in price part of his bid, it will be presumed that no ESC is required by the bidder
and evaluation shall be carried out accordingly.
34 PURCHASE PREFERENCE
Purchase preference to Central government public sector Undertaking and Micro and
Small Enterprises (MSEs) shall be allowed as per Government instructions in vogue.
‐ 39 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
[F] – AWARD OF CONTRACT
35 AWARD
Subject to "ITB: Clause-29", OWNER will award the Contract to the successful
Bidder whose Bid has been determined to be substantially responsive and has been
determined as the lowest provided that bidder, is determined to be qualified to
satisfactorily perform the Contract.
“OWNER intent to place the order/contract directly on the address from where
Goods are produced/dispatched are Services are rendered. In case, bidder
wants order/ contract at some other address or supply of Goods/ Services from
multiple locations, bidder is required to provide in their bid address on which
order is to be placed”.
36 NOTIFICATION OF AWARD / FAX OF ACCEPTANCE
36.1 Prior to the expiry of ‘Period of Bid Validity’, Notification of Award for acceptance of
the Bid will be intimated to the successful Bidder by OWNER either by Fax / E - mail
/Letter or like means defined as the “Fax of Acceptance (FOA)”. The Contract shall
enter into force on the date of FOA and the same shall be binding on OWNER and
successful Bidder (i.e. Contractor/Service Provider). The Notification of Award/FOA
will constitute the formation of a Contract. The “Detailed Letter of Acceptance
(DLOA)” shall be issued thereafter incorporating terms & conditions of Tender
Document, Amendments, Corrigendum, Clarification(s), Bid and agreed
variation(s)/acceptable deviation(s), if any. OWNER may choose to issue Notification
of Award in form of detailed Letter of Acceptance without issuing FOA and in such
case the Contract shall enter into force on the date of detailed Letter of Acceptance
only.
36.2 Contract period shall commence from the date of "Notification of Award" or as
mentioned in the Notification of Award. The "Notification of Award" will constitute the
formation of a Contract, until the Contract has been effected pursuant to signing of
Contract Agreement as per "ITB: Clause-37".
Upon the successful Bidder's / Contractor's furnishing of 'Contract Performance

Security / Security Deposit', pursuant to "ITB: Clause-38", OWNER will promptly
discharge his 'Earnest Money / Bid Security', pursuant to "ITB: Clause-16"
36.3 The Order/ contract value mentioned above is subject to Price Reduction Schedule
clause.
37 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
37.1 OWNER will award the Contract to the successful Bidder, who, within 'fifteen [15]
days' of receipt of the same, shall sign and return the acknowledged copy to
OWNER.
‐ 40 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

37.2 The successful Bidder/Contractor shall be required to execute an 'Agreement' in the
proforma given in this Bidding Document (Format F-16) on a 'non-judicial stamp
paper' of appropriate value [cost of the 'stamp-paper' shall be borne by the
successful Bidder/Contractor] and of 'state' specified in Bidding Data Sheet
(BDS)only, within 'fifteen [15] days' of receipt of the "Fax of Acceptance [FOA]" of the
Tender by the successful Bidder/Contractor failure on the part of the successful
Bidder/Contractor to sign the 'Agreement' within the above stipulated period,shall
constitute sufficient grounds for forfeiture of EMD/Security Deposit.
38 CONTRACT PERFORMANCE SECURITY / SECURITY DEPOSIT
38.1 Within 30 days of the receipt of the notification of award/ Fax of Acceptance from
OWNER, the successful bidder shall furnish the Contract Performance Security
(CPS) in accordance with ‘General Conditions of the Contract’. The CPS shall be in
the form of either Banker’s Cheque or Demand Draft or Bank Guarantee as per
Form F-4and shall be in the currency of the Contract.However, CPS shall not be
applicable in cases wherein the individual order/contract value as specified in
Notification of Award is less than INR 5 Lakh (exclusive of GST).
38.2 The contract performance security shall be for an amount equal to specified in
Bidding Data Sheet (BDS)towards faithful performance of the contractual obligations
and performance of equipment. For the purpose of CPS, Contract/order value shall
be exclusive of GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST).
Bank Guarantee towards CPS shall be from any Indian scheduled bank or a branch
of an International bank situated in India and registered with Reserve Bank of India
as scheduled foreign bank in case of Indian bidder as well as foreign bidder.
However, in case of bank guarantees from banks other than the Nationalized Indian
banks, the bank must be a commercial bank having net worth in excess of Rs 100
crores and a declaration to this effect should be made by such commercial bank
either in the Bank Guarantee itself or separately on its letterhead. This bank
guarantee shall be valid for a period ofthree months beyond the DLP specified in
Bidding Data Sheet (BDS).
38.3 Failure of the successful bidder to comply with the requirements of this article shall
constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the
EMD.
38.4 CPBG/Security Deposit will not be accepted in case the same has reference of
‘remitter’ / ‘financer’ other than bidder on the aforementioned financial instrument of
CPBG/ Security.
38.5 The CPS has to cover the entire contract value including extra works/services also. As
long as the CPS submitted at the time of award take cares the extra works/ services
executed and total executed value are within the awarded contract price, there is no
need for additional CPS. As soon as the total executed value is likely to burst the
ceiling of awarded contract price, the contractor should furnish additional CPS.
38.6 In case of forfeiture of Contract Performance Security/ Security Deposit, the forfeited
amount will be considered inclusive of tax and tax invoice will be issued by TFL.
The forfeiture amount will be subject to final decision of TFL based on other terms
and conditions of order/ contract.
‐ 41 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
39 PROCEDURE FOR ACTION IN CASE CORRUPT/ FRAUDULENT/COLLUSIVE/

COERCIVE PRACTICES
39.1 Procedure for action in case Corrupt/ Fraudulent/Collusive/Coercive Practices is

enclosed at Annexure-I.
39.2 DELETED
39.3 NON-APPLICABILITY OF ARBITRATION CLAUSE IN CASE OF BANNING OF

VENDORS/ SUPPLIERS / CONTRACTORS/BIDDERS/ CONSULTANTS
INDULGED IN FRAUDULENT/ COERCIVE PRACTICES
Notwithstanding anything contained contrary in GCC and other "CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS", in case it is found that the Vendors/ Suppliers / Contractors/Bidders/
Consultants indulged in fraudulent/ coercive practices at the time of bidding, during
execution of the contract etc., and/or on other grounds as mentioned in OWNER’s
“Procedure for action in case Corrupt/Fraudulent/Collusive/Coercive Practices”
(Annexure-I), the contractor/bidder shall be banned (in terms of aforesaid procedure)
from the date of issuance of such order by OWNER, to such Vendors/ Suppliers /
Contractors/Bidders/ Consultants.
The Vendor/ Supplier / Contractor/ Bidder/Consultant understands and agrees that in

such cases where Vendor/ Supplier / Contractor/ Bidder/Consultant has been
banned (in terms of aforesaid procedure) from the date of issuance of such order by
OWNER, such decision of OWNER shall be final and binding on such Vendor/
Supplier / Contractor/ Bidder/Consultant and the ‘Arbitration clause’ in the GCC and
other "CONTRACT DOCUMENTS" shall not be applicable for any consequential
issue /dispute arising in the matter.
40 PUBLIC PROCUREMENT POLICY FOR MICRO AND SMALL ENTERPRISES
40.1 Following provision has been incorporated in tender for MSEs, in line with notification
of Government of India, vide Gazette of India No. 503 dated 26.03.2012 proclaiming
the Public Procurement Policy on procurement of goodsand services from Micro and
Small Enterprises (MSEs)
i) Issue of tender document to MSEs free of cost.

ii) Exemption to MSEs from payment of EMD/Bid Security.
40.2 In case bidder is a Micro or Small Enterprise under the Micro, Small and Medium
Enterprises Development Act, 2006, the bidder shall submit the following:
a) Documentary evidence that the bidder is a Micro or Small Enterprises registered
with District Industries Centers or Khadi and Village Industries National Small
Industries Corporation or Directorate of Handicrafts and Handloom or any other
body specified by Ministry of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises or Udyog
Aadhaar Memorandum.
The above documents submitted by the bidder shall be duly certified by the
Chartered Accountant (not being an employee or a Director or not having any
interest in the bidder’s company/firm) and notary public with legible stamp.
‐ 42 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

If the bidder does not provide the above confirmation or appropriate document or any
evidence, then it will be presumed that they do not qualify for any preference
admissible in the Public Procurement Policy (PPP) 2012.
Further, MSEs who are availing the benefits of the Public Procurement Policy (PPP)
2012 get themselves registered with MSME Data Bank being operated by NSIC,
under SME Division, M/o MSME, in order to create proper data base of MSEs which
are making supplies to CPSUs.
40.3 If against an order placed by TFL, successful bidder(s) (other than Micro/Small
Enterprise) is procuring material/services from their sub-vendor who is a Micro or
Small Enterprise registered with District Industries Centres or Khadi and Village
Industries Commission or Khadi and Village Industries Board or Coir Board or
National Small Industries Corporation or Directorate of Handicrafts and Handloom or
any other body specified by Ministry of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises with
prior consent in writing of the purchasing authority/Engineer-in-charge, the details like
Name, Registration No., Address, Contact No. details of material & value of
procurement made, etc. of such Enterprises shall be furnished by the successful
bidder at the time of submission of invoice/Bill.
40.4 The benefit of policy is not extended to the traders/dealers/

Distributors/Stockiest/Wholesalers.
40.5 NSIC has initiated a scheme of “Consortia and Tender Marketing Scheme” under
which they are assisting the Micro & Small enterprises to market their products and
services through tender participation on behalf of the individual unit or through
consortia.
Accordingly, if the MSEs or the consortia, on whose behalf the bid is submitted by
NSIC, is meeting the BEC and other terms and conditions of tender their bid will be
considered for further evaluation. Further, in such cases a declaration is to be
submitted by MSE/ consortia on their letter head (s) that all the terms and conditions
of tender document shall be acceptable to them.
Further, in such cases a declaration is to be submitted by MSE/ consortia on their
letter head (s) that all the terms and conditions of tender document shall be
acceptableto them.
41 AHR ITEMS
In item rate contract where the quoted rates for the items exceed 50% of the estimate
rates, such items will be considered as Abnormally High Rates (AHR) items and
payment of AHR items beyond the SOR stipulated quantities shall be made at the
lowest amongst the following rates:
I) Rates as per SOR, quoted by the Contractor/Bidder.
II) Rate of the item, which shall be derived as follows:
a. Based on rates of Machine and labour as available from the contract

(which includes contractor’s supervision, profit, overheads and other
expenses).
‐ 43 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

b. In case rates are not available in the contract, rates will be calculated
based on prevailing market rates of machine, material and labour plus
15% to cover contractor’s supervision profit, overhead & other
expenses.
42 VENDOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Shall be as stipulated Annexure II to ITB herewith.
43 INCOME TAX & CORPORATE TAX
43.1 Income tax deduction shall be made from all payments made to the contractor as per
the rules and regulations in force and in accordance with the Income Tax Act
prevailing from time to time.
43.2 Corporate Tax liability, if any, shall be to the contractor’s account.
43.3 TDS, wherever applicableshall be deducted as per applicable act/law/rule.
43.4 Wherever TDS under GST Laws has been deducted from the invoicesraised/
payments made to the vendors, as per the provisions of the GSTlaw/ Rules, Vendors
should accept the corresponding GST-TDS amountpopulated in the relevant screen
on GST common portal (www.gst.gov. in).
Further, Vendors should also download the GST TDS certificate from GSTcommon
portal (reference path: ꞏ Services > User Services >View/Download Certificates
option).
43.5 MENTIONING OF PAN NO. IN INVOICE/BILL

As per CBDT Notification No. 95/2015 dated 30.12.2015, mentioning of PAN no. is
mandatory for procurement of goods/ services/works/consultancy services exceeding
Rs. 2 Lacs per transaction.
Accordingly, supplier/ contractor/ service provider/ consultant should mention their

PAN no. in their invoice/ bill for any transaction exceeding Rs. 2 lakhs. As provided in
the notification, in case supplier/ contractor/ service provider/ consultant do not have
PAN no., they have to submit declaration in Form 60 along with invoice/ bill for each
transaction.
Payment of supplier/ contractor / service provider/ consultant shall be processed only

after fulfillment of above requirement
44. SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES BETWEEN GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENT AND

ANOTHER AND ONE GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENT AND PUBLIC ENTERPRISE
AND ONE PUBLIC ENTERPRISE AND ANOTHER
‐ 44 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

In the event of any dispute or difference relating to the interpretation andapplication
of the provisions of commercial contract(s)between CentralPublic Sector Enterprises
(CPSEs) inter se and also between CPSEs andGovernment Departments I
Organizations (excluding disputes concerningRailways, Income Tax, Customs &
Excise Departments), such dispute ordifference shall be taken up by either party for
resolution through AMRCDas mentioned in DPE OM No. 4(1)12013-DPE (GM) I
FTS-1835 dated22.05.2018.
45 DELETED
46.0 INAM-PRO (PLATFORM FOR INFRASTRUCTURE AND MATERIALS

PROVIDERS)
INAM-Pro (Platform for infrastructure and materials providers) is a web based

platform for infrastructure provides and materials suppliers and was developed by
Ministry of Road Transport and Highways (MoRT&H) with a view to reduce project
execution delays on account of supply shortages and inspire greater confidence in
contractors to procure cement to start with directly from the manufacturers. Presently,
numerous cement companies are registered in the portal and offering cement for sale
on the portal with a commitment period of 3 years. These companies have bound
themselves by ceiling rates for the entire commitment period, wherein they are
allowed to reduce or increase their cement rates any number of times within the
ceiling rate, but are not permitted to exceed the said ceiling rate.
MoRT&H is expanding the reach of this web-portal by increasing both the product
width as well as the product depth. They are working on incorporating 60 plus
product categories. The product range will span from large machineries like Earth
Movers and Concrete Mixers, to even the smallest items like road studs. MoRT&H
intend to turn it into a portal which services every infrastructure development related
need of a modern contractor.
OWNER’s contractors may use this innovative platform, wherever applicable. The
usage of web – Portal is a completely voluntary exercise. The platform, however, can
serve as a benchmark for comparison of offered prices and products.
47 PROMOTION OF PAYMENT THROUGH CARDS AND DIGITAL MEANS
To promote cashless transactions, the onward payments by Contractors to their

employees, service providers, sub-contractors and suppliers may be made through
Cards and Digital means to the extent possible
48 CONTRACTOR TO ENGAGE CONTRACT MANPOWER BELONGING TO

SCHEDULED CASTES AND WEAKER SECTIONS OF THE SOCIETY
While engaging the contractual manpower, Contractors are required to make efforts
to provide opportunity of employment to the people belonging to Scheduled Castes
and weaker sections of the society also in order to have a fair representation of
these sections.
‐ 45 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

49. QUARTERLY CLOSURE OF THE CONTRACT[FOR APPLICABILITY OF THIS
CLAUSE REFER BDS]:-
During execution of contracts/orders, various issues may arise. In order to timely

detect and to address the contractual issue (s) during the execution of contracts,
OWNER has introduced a mechanism of quarterly closure of the contract, under
which all the issues related to the contract execution will be monitored on quarterly
basis for resolution.
Vendors/Contractors are required to co-operate with EIC for proper implementation

of this mechanism for smooth execution of the contract.
50. PROVISIONS FOR STARTPUS (AS DEFINED IN GAZETTENOTIFICATION NO.

D.L-33004/99 DATED 18.02.2016 AND 23.05.2017 OFMINISTRY OF COMMERCE
AND INDUSTRY AND AS AMENDED FROMTIME TO TIME) [FOR APPLICABLITY
REFER BDS]
As mentioned in Section-II, Technical BEC and Financial BEC are also applicable for
Start-ups. However, the Startups are also exempted from submission of EMDs.For
availing the relaxation of EMD, bidder is required to submit requisite certificate
towards Startup enterprise registration issued by Department of Industrial Policy and
Promotion, Ministry of Commerce & Industry (DIPP). Further, all the documents
should be certified by the Chartered Accountant (not being an employee or a Director
or not having any interest in the bidder’s company/firm) and notary public with legible
stamp.”
If a Startup emerge lowest bidder, the LoA on such Startup shall be placed for entire
tendered quantity/group/item/part (as the case may be). However, during the Kick of
Meeting monthly milestones/ check points would be drawn. Further, the performance
of such contractor/ service provider will be reviewed more carefully and action to be
taken as per provision of contract in case of failure/ poor performance.
51. PROVISION REGARDING INVOICE FOR REDUCED VALUE OR CREDIT

NOTE TOWARDS PRS
As mentioned in GCC, PRS is the reduction in the consideration / contract value for
the goods / services covered under this contract. In case of delay in executionof
contract, contractor should raise Tax invoice for reducedvalue as per Price Reduction
Schedule Clause (PRS clause). If contractor has raised the Tax invoice for full value,
then contractor should issue Credit Note towards the applicable PRS
amountwithapplicabletaxes.
In such cases if contractor fails to submit the Tax invoice withreduced value or does
not issue credit note as mentioned above, Owner will release thepayment to
contractor after giving effect of the PRS clausewith corresponding reduction of taxes
charged on vendor’s Tax invoice, to avoid delay in delivery/ collection of material.
In case any financial implication arises on Owner due to issuance of Tax invoice
withoutreduction in price or non-issuance of Credit Note, the same shall be to the
account ofcontractor. Owner shall be entitled to deduct / setoff /
‐ 46 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

recover such GST amount (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) together with penalties
and interest, if any, against any amounts paid or becomes payable by Owner in
futureto the Contractor under this contract or under any other contract.
‐ 47 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

ANNEXURE-I
PROCEDURE FOR ACTION IN CASE

A Definitions:
A.1 “Corrupt Practice” means the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting, directly or
indirectly, anything of value to improperly influence the actions in selection process or
in contract execution.
“Corrupt Practice” also includes any omission for misrepresentation that may mislead
or attempt to mislead so that financial or other benefit may be obtained or an
obligation avoided.
A2 “Fraudulent Practice” means and include any act or omission committed by a agency
or with his connivance or by his agent by misrepresenting/ submitting false
documents and/ or false information or concealment of facts or to deceive in order to
influence a selection process or during execution of contract/ order.
A3 “Collusive Practice amongst bidders (prior to or after bid submission)” means a

scheme or arrangement designed to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive
levels and to deprive the Employer of the benefits of free and open competition.
A.4 “Coercive practice” means impairing or harming or threatening to impair or harm

directly or indirectly, any agency or its property to influence the improperly actions of
an agency, obstruction of any investigation or auditing of a procurement process.
A.5 “Vendor/Supplier/Contractor/Consultant/Bidder” is herein after referred as “Agency”
A.6 ”Appellate Authority” shall mean Board of Directors.
A.7 “Competent Authority” shall mean the authority, who is competent to take final decision
for Suspension of business dealing with an Agency/ (ies) and Banning of business
dealings with Agency/ (ies) and shall be the “Director” concerned.
A.8 “Allied Agency” shall mean all the concerns within the sphere of effective influence of
banned/ suspended agencies. In determining this, the following factors may be taken
into consideration:
(a) Whether the management is common;

(b) Majority interest in the management is held by the partners or directors of
banned/ suspended firm.
(c ) substantial or majority shares are owned by banned/ suspended agency and
by virtue of this it has a controlling voice.
A.9 “Investigating Agency” shall mean any department or unit of OWNER investigating
into the conduct of Agency/ party and shall include the Vigilance Department of the
OWNER, Central Bureau of Investigation, State Police or any other agency set up by
the Central or state government having power to investigate.
‐ 48 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

B Actions against bidder(s) indulging in corrupt /fraudulent/ collusive/ coercive
practice
B.1 Irregularities noticed during the evaluation of the bids :
If it is observed during bidding process/ bids evaluation stage that a bidder has
indulged in corrupt/fraudulent /collusive/coercive practice, the bid of such Bidder (s)
shall be rejected and its Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) shall be forfeited.
Further, such agency shall be banned for future business with OWNER for a period
specified in para B 2.2 below from the date of issue of banning order.
B.2 Irregularities noticed after award of contract
(i) During execution of contract:
If an agency, is found to have indulged in corrupt/fraudulent/

collusive/coercive practices, during execution of contract, the agency shall be
banned for future business with OWNER for a period specified in para B 2.2
below from the date of issue of banning order.
The concerned order (s)/ contract(s) where corrupt/fraudulent/collusive

practices areobserved, shall be suspended with immediate effect by
Engineer-in-Charge (EIC)/ Employer whereby the supply/ work/ service and
payment etc. will be suspended. The action shall be initiated for putting the
agency on banning.
After conclusion of process, the order (s)/ contract (s) where it is concluded
that such irregularities have been committed shall be terminated and Contract
cum Performance Bank Guarantee (CPBG)/ Contract Performance
Security(CPS) submitted by agency against such order (s)/ contract (s) shall
also be forfeited. The amount that may have become due to the contractor on
account of work already executed by him shall be payable to the contractor
and this amount shall be subject to adjustment against any amounts due
from the contractor under the terms of the contract.
No risk and cost provision will be enforced in such cases.
(ii) After execution of contract and during Defect liability period (DLP)/
Warranty/Guarantee Period:
If an agency is found to have indulged in corrupt/fraudulent/ collusive/coercive

practices, after execution of contract and during DLP/ Warranty/Guarantee
Period, the agency shall be banned for future business with OWNER for a
period specified in para B 2.2 below from the date of issue of banning order.
Further, the Contract cum Performance Bank Guarantee (CPBG)/Contract

Performance Security (CPS) submitted by agency against such order (s)/
contract (s) shall be forfeited.
(iii) After expiry of Defect liability period (DLP)/ Warranty/Guarantee Period
‐ 49 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

If an agency is found to have indulged in corrupt/fraudulent/ collusive/coercive
practices, after expiry of Defect liability period (DLP)/ Warranty/Guarantee
Period, the agencyshall be banned for future business with OWNER for a
period specified in para B 2.2 below from the date of issue of banning order.
B.2.2 Period of Banning
The period of banning of agencies indulged in

Corrupt/Fraudulent/Collusive/Coercive Practices shall be as under and to be
reckoned from the date of banning order:
S. Description Period of banning from

No. the date of issuance of
Banning order
1 Misrepresentation/False information other 02 years
than pertaining to BEC of tender but having
impact on the selection process.
For example, if an agency confirms not

being in holiday/ banning list of PSUs/
Govt. Dept., liquidation, bankruptcy & etc.
and subsequently it is found otherwise,
such acts shall be considered in this
category.
2 Corrupt/Fraudulent (pertaining to BEC of 03 years
tender) /Collusive/Coercive Practices
2.1 If an agency again commits

Corrupt/Fraudulent (pertaining to BEC of
tender) /Collusive/ Coercive Practices in
subsequent cases after their banning, such
situation of repeated offense to be dealt
with more severity and following shall be the
period of banning:
(v) Repeated once 7 years (in addition to the

period already served)
15 years (in addition to the

(vi) Repeated twice or more period already served)
3 Indulged in unauthorized disposal of 7 years
materials provided by OWNER
4 If act of vendor/ contractor is a threat to the 15 years
National Security
C Effect of banning on other ongoing contracts/ tenders
C.1 If an agency is put on Banning, such agency should not be considered in ongoing
tenders/future tenders.
‐ 50 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

C.2 However, if such an agency is already executing other order (s)/ contract (s) where
no corrupt/fraudulent/ collusive/coercive practice is found, the agency should be
allowed to continue till its completion without any further increase in scope except
those incidental to original scope mentioned in the contract.
C.3 If an agency is put on the Banning List during tendering and no irregularity is found in
the case under process:
C.3.1 after issue of the enquiry /bid/tender but before opening of Technical bid, the bid
submitted by the agency shall be ignored.
C.3.2 after opening Technical bid but before opening the Price bid, the Price bid of the
agency shall not be opened and BG/EMD submitted by the agency shall be returned
to the agency.
C.3.3 after opening of price, BG/EMD made by the agency shall be returned; the offer of
the agency shall be ignored & will not be further evaluated. If the agency is put on
banning list for fraud/ mis-appropriation of facts committed in the sametender/other
tender where errant agency emerges as the lowest (L1), then such tender shall also
be cancelled and re-invited.
D. Procedure for Suspension of Bidder
D.1 Initiation of Suspension
Action for suspension business dealing with any agency/(ies) shall be initiated by
Corporate C&P Department when
(i) Corporate Vigilance Department based on the fact of the case gathered
during investigation by them recommend for specific immediate action against
the agency.
(ii) Corporate Vigilance Department based on the input from Investigating

agency, forward for specific immediate action against the agency.
(iii) Non performance of Vendor/Supplier/Contractor/Consultant leading to

termination of Contract/ Order.
D.2 Suspension Procedure:
D.2.1 The order of suspension would operate initially for a period not more than six
months and is to be communicated to the agency and also to Corporate Vigilance
Department. Period of suspension can be extended with the approval of the
Competent Authority by one month at a time with a ceiling of six months pending
a conclusive decision to put the agency on banning list.
D.2.2 During the period of suspension, no new business dealing may be held with the
agency.
D.2.3 Period of suspension shall be accounted for in the final order passed for banning
of business with the agency.
‐ 51 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

D.2.4 The decision regarding suspension of business dealings should also be
communicated to the agency.
D.2.5 If a prima-facie, case is made out that the agency is guilty on the grounds which
can result in banning of business dealings, proposal for issuance of suspension
order and show cause notice shall be put up to the Competent Authority. The
suspension order and show cause notice must include that (i) the agency is put
on suspension list and (ii) why action should not be taken for banning the agency
for future business from OWNER.
The competent authority to approve the suspension will be same as that for
according approval for banning.
D3 Effect of Suspension of business:
Effect of suspension on other on-going/future tenders will be as under:
D.3.1 No enquiry/bid/tender shall be entertained from an agency as long as the name

of agency appears in the Suspension List.
D.3.2 If an agency is put on the Suspension List during tendering:
D.3.2.1 after issue of the enquiry /bid/tender but before opening of Technical bid, the bid
submitted by the agency shall be ignored.
D.3.2.2 after opening Technical bid but before opening the Price bid, the Price bid of the
agency shall not be opened and BG/EMD submitted by the agency shall be
returned to the agency.
D.3.2.3 after opening of price, BG/EMD made by the agency shall be returned; the offer
of the agency shall be ignored & will not be further evaluated. If the agency is put
on Suspension list for fraud/ mis-appropriation of facts conducted in the
sametender/other tender where errant agency emerges as the lowest (L1), then
such tender shall also be cancelled and re-invited.
D.3.3 The existing contract (s)/ order (s) under execution shall continue.
D.3.4 Tenders invited for procurement of goods, works and services shall have
provision that the bidder shall submit a undertaking to the effect that (i) neither
the bidder themselves nor their allied agency/(ies) are on banning list of OWNER
or the Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas and (ii) bidder is not banned by
any Government department/ Public Sector.
F. Appeal against the Decision of the Competent Authority:
F.1 The agency may file an appeal against the order of the Competent Authority for
putting the agency on banning list. The appeal shall be filed to Appellate Authority.
Such an appeal shall be preferred within one month from the receipt of banning
order.
F.2 Appellate Authority would consider the appeal and pass appropriate order which shall
be communicated to the party as well as the Competent Authority.
‐ 52 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
F.3 Appeal process may be completed within 45 days of filing of appeal with the
Appellate Authority.
G. Wherever there is contradiction with respect to terms of ‘Integrity pact’, GCC and
‘Procedure for action in case of Corrupt/Fraudulent/ Collusive/Coercive Practice’, the
provisions of ‘Procedure for action in case of Corrupt/Fraudulent/ Collusive/Coercive
Practice’ shall prevail.
‐ 53 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

ANNEXURE-II
PROCEDURE FOR EVALUATION OF PERFORMANCE OF VENDORS/ SUPPLIERS/

CONTRACTORS/ CONSULTANTS
1.0 OBJECTIVE
The objective of Evaluation of Performance aims to recognize, and develop reliable

Vendors/ Suppliers/Contractors/ Consultants so that they consistently meet or
exceed expectations and requirements.
The purpose of this procedure is to put in place a system to monitor performance of

Vendors/ Suppliers/Contractors/ Consultants associated with OWNER in Projects
and in O&M so as to ensure timely completion of various projects, timely receipt of
supplies including completion of works & services for operation and maintenance of
operating plants and quality standards in all respects.
2.0 METHODOLOGY
i) Preparation of Performance Rating Data Sheet
Performance rating data Sheet for each and every Vendor/

Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant for all orders/Contracts with a value of Rs. 7
Lakhs and above is recommended to be drawn up. These data sheets are to
be separately prepared for orders/ contracts related to Projects and O&M.
Format, Parameters, Process, responsibility for preparation of Performance
Rating Data Sheet are separately mentioned.
ii) Measurement of Performance
Based on the parameters defined in Data Sheet, Performance of concerned

Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant would be computed and graded
accordingly. The measurement of the performance of the Party would be its
ability to achieve the minimum scoring of 60% points in the given parameters.
iii) Initiation of Measures:
Depending upon the Grading of Performance, corrective measures would be

initiated by taking up the matter with concerned Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/
Consultant. Response of Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant would be
considered before deciding further course of action.
iv) Implementation of Corrective Measures:
Based on the response of Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant,

concerned Engineer-in-Charge for the Projects and/or OIC in case of O&M
would recommend for continuation or discontinuation of such party from the
business of OWNER.
v) Orders/contracts placed on Proprietary/OEM basis for O&M will be evaluated

and, if required, corrective action will be taken for improvement in future.
‐ 54 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

3.0 PROCESS OF EVALUATION OF PERFORMANCE OF VENDORS/ SUPPLIERS/
CONTRACTORS/ CONSULTANTS
3.1 FOR PROJECTS
i) Evaluation of performance of Vendors/ Suppliers/Contractors/ Consultants in

case of PROJECTS shall be done immediately with commissioning of any
Project.
ii) On commissioning of any Project, EIC (Engineer-in-charge)/ Project-in-charge

shall prepare a Performance Rating Data Sheet (Format at Apendix-1) for all
Orders and Contracts.
iii) Depending upon the Performance Rating, following action need to be initiated
by Engineer-in-charge/Project-in-charge:
Sl.No. Performance Action

Rating
1 POOR Seek explanation for Poor performance
2 FAIR Seek explanation for Fair performance
3 GOOD Letter to the concerned for improving
performance in future
4 VERY GOOD No further action
iv) Reply from concerned Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant shall be

examined. In case of satisfactory reply, Performance Rating data Sheet to be
closed with a letter to the concerned for improving performance in future.
v) When no reply is received or reasons indicated are unsatisfactory, the

following actions need to be taken:
A) Where Performance rating is “POOR”:
Recommend such defaulting Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant

for putting on Holiday for a period from one to three years as given
below:
(i) Poor Performance due to reasons other than Quality : One

Year
(ii) Poor Performance on account of Quality (if any mark obtained
against Quality parameter is less than 30): Two Years
(iii) Poor Performance leading to termination of contract or
Offloading of contract due to poor performance solely
attributable to Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant or
Repeated Offence: Three Years
Non performance of a Vendor/Supplier/Contractor/Consultant leading

to termination of Contract/ Order, such Vendor/ Supplier/
Contractor/Consultant are also to be considered for Suspension.
‐ 55 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

In all such cases, concerned site will put up recommendation for
issuance of SCN and putting the party on suspension list as per
process defined for suspension in “Procedure for Action in case of
Corrupt/ Fraudulent/ Collusive/ Coercive Practices”
(B) Where Performance rating is “FAIR”:
Recommend for issuance of warning to such defaulting Vendor/

Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant to improve their performance.
3.2 FOR CONSULTANCY JOBS
Monitoring and Evaluation of consultancy jobs will be carried out in the same way as
described in para 3.1 for Projects.
3.3 FOR OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
i) Evaluation of performance of Vendors/ Suppliers/Contractors/ Consultants in

case of Operation and Maintenance shall be done immediately after
execution of order/ contract.
ii) After execution of orders a Performance Rating Data Sheet (Format at

Apendix-2) shall be prepared for Orders by Site C&P and for
Contracts/Services by respective Engineer-In-Charge.
iii) Depending upon Performance Rating, following action need to be initiated by

Site C&P:
Sl. No. Performance Action

Rating
1 POOR Seek explanation for Poor performance
2. FAIR Seek explanation for Fair performance
3 GOOD Letter to the concerned for improving
performance in future.
4 VERY GOOD No further action
iv) Reply from concerned Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant shall be

examined. In case of satisfactory reply, Performance Rating data Sheet to be
closed with a letter to the concerned for improving performance in future.
v) When no reply is received or reasons indicated are unsatisfactory, the

following actions need to be taken:
A) Where performance rating is “POOR”
Recommend such defaulting Vendor/Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant

for putting on Holiday for a period from one to three years as given
below:
(i) Poor Performance due to reasons other than Quality : One

Year
‐ 56 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

(ii) Poor Performance on account of Quality (if any mark obtained
against Quality parameter is less than 30): Two Years
(iv) Poor Performance leading to termination of contract or
Offloading of contract due to poor performance solely
attributable to Vendor/Supplier/Contractor/Consultant or
Repeated Offence: Three Years
Non-performance of a Vendor/Supplier/Contractor/Consultant leading

to termination of Contract/ Order such Vendor/ Supplier/
Contractor/Consultant are also to be considered for Suspension.
In all such cases, concerned site will put up recommendation for

issuance of SCN and putting the party on suspension list as per
process defined for suspension in “Procedure for Action in case of
Corrupt/ Fraudulent/ Collusive/ Coercive Practices”
(B) Where Performance rating is “FAIR”
Recommend for issuance of warning to such defaulting

Vendors/Contractors/Consultants to improve their performance.
4.0 EXCLUSIONS:
The following would be excluded from the scope of evaluation of performance of
Vendors/ Suppliers/Contractors/ Consultants:
i) Orders/Contracts below the value of Rs. 7 Lakhs.

ii) One time Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant.
iii) Orders for Misc./Administrative items/ Non stock Non valuated items.
However, concerned Engineer-in-Charge /OICs will continue to monitor such cases

so as to minimize the impact on Projects/O&M plants due to non performance of
Vendors/ Suppliers/Contractors/ Consultants in all such cases.
5.0 REVIEW & RESTORATION OF PARITES PUT ON HOLIDAY
5.1 An order for Holiday passed for a certain specified period shall deemed to have been
automatically revoked on the expiry of that specified period and it will not be
necessary to issue a specific formal order of revocation.
Further, in case Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant is put on holiday due to

quality, and new order is placed on bidder after restoration of Vendor/
Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant, such order will be properly monitored during
execution stage by the concerned site.
6.0 EFFECT OF HOLIDAY
6.1 If a Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant is put on Holiday, such Vendor/

Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant should not be considered in ongoing tenders/future
tenders.
‐ 57 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

6.2 However, if such Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant is already executing any
other order/ contract and their performance is satisfactory in terms of the relevant
contract, should be allowed to continue till its completion without any further increase
in scope except those incidental to original scope mentioned in the contract. In such
a case CPBG will not be forfeited and payment will be made as per provisions of
concerned contract. However, this would be without prejudice to other terms and
conditions of the contract.
6.3. Effect on other ongoing tendering:
6.3.1 after issue of the enquiry /bid/tender but before opening of Technical bid, the bid
submitted by the party shall be ignored.
6.3.2 after opening Technical bid but before opening the Price bid, the Price bid of the party
shall not be opened and BG/EMD submitted by the party shall be returned to the
party.
6.3.3 after opening of price, BG/EMD made by the party shall be returned; the offer of the
party shall be ignored & will not be further evaluated. If errant party emerges as the
lowest (L1), then such tender shall also be cancelled and re-invited.
7.0 While putting the Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant on holiday as per the
procedure, the holding company, subsidiary, joint venture, sister concerns, group
division of the errant Vendor/ Supplier/Contractor/ Consultant shall not be considered
for putting on holiday list.
Any bidder, put on holiday, will not be allowed to bid through consortium route also in
new tender during the period of holiday.
8.0 If an unsuccessful bidder makes any vexatious, frivolous or malicious complaint

against the tender process with the intention of delaying or defeating any
procurement or causing loss to OWNER or any other bidder, such bidder will be put
on holiday for a period of six months, if such complaint is proved to be vexatious,
frivolous or malicious, after following the due procedure.
9. APPEAL AGAINST THE DECISION OF THE COMPETENT AUTHORITY:
(a) The party may file an appeal against the order of the Competent Authority for
putting the party on Holiday list. The appeal shall be filed to Appellate
Authority. Such an appeal shall be preferred within one month from the date
of receipt of Holiday order.
(b) Appellate Authority would consider the appeal and pass appropriate order
which shall be communicated to the party as well as the Competent Authority.
(c) Appeal process may be completed within 45 days of filing of appeal with the
Appellate Authority.
(d) “Appellate Authority” shall mean Board of Directors of OWNER.
‐ 58 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

10. ERRANT BIDDER
In case after price bid opening the lowest evaluated bidder (L1) is not awarded the
job for any mistake committed by him in bidding or withdrawal of bid or modification
of bid or varying any term in regard thereof leading to re-tendering, OWNER shall
forfeit EMD paid by the bidder and such bidders shall be debarred from participation
in re-tendering of the same job(s)/item(s).
Further, such bidder will be put on holiday for a period of six months after following
the due procedure.
11. In case CBIC(Central Board of Indirect Taxesand Customs)/ any equivalent Central
Government agency/ State Government agency brings to the notice of OWNER that
the Supplier of Goods / Services (Service Provider) has not remitted the amount
towards GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) collected from OWNER to the
government exchequer, , then party will be put on holiday for a period of six months
after following the due procedure.
‐ 59 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

Apendix-1
TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED
PERFORMANCE RATING DATA SHEET
(FOR PROJECTS/ CONSULTANCY JOBS)
i) Project/Work Centre :
ii) Order/ Contract No. & date :
iii) Brief description of Items :

Works/Assignment
iv) Order/Contract value (Rs.) :
v) Name of Vendor/Supplier/ :
Contractor/ Consultant
vi) Contracted delivery/ :

Completion Schedule
vii) Actual delivery/ :

Completion date
Performance Delivery/ Completion Quality Reliability Total

Parameter Performance Performance Performance#
Maximum Marks 40 40 20 100
Marks Allocated
Note:
Remarks (if any)
PERFORMANCE RATING (**)
Note :
(#) Vendor/Supplier/Contractor/Consultant who seek repeated financial assistance or
deviation beyond contract payment term or seeking direct payment to the sub-
vendor/sub-contractor due to financial constraints, then ‘0’ marks should be allotted
against Reliability Performance.
(*) Allocation of marks should be as per enclosed instructions
(**) Performance rating shall be classified as under :
Sl. Range (Marks) Rating

No.
1 60 & below POOR
2 61-75 FAIR
3 76-90 GOOD
4 More than 90 VERY
GOOD
Signature of
Authorised Signatory:
Name:
Designation:
‐ 60 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

Instructions for allocation of marks
1. Marks are to be allocated as under :
1.1 DELIVERY/ COMPLETION PERFORMANCE 40 Marks
Delivery Period/ Delay in Weeks Marks

Completion Schedule
a) Upto 3 months Before CDD 40

Delay upto 4 weeks 35
” 8 weeks 30
” 10 weeks 25
” 12 weeks 20
” 16 weeks 15
More than 16 weeks 0
b) Above 3 months Before CDD 40

” 8 weeks 30
” 10 weeks 25
” 16 weeks 20
” 20 weeks 15
” 24 weeks 10
1.2 QUALITY PERFORMANCE 40 Marks
For Normal Cases : No Defects/ No Deviation/ No failure: 40 marks
i) Rejection/Defects Marks to be allocated on 10 marks

prorata basis for acceptable
quantity as compared to total
quantity for normal cases
ii) When quality - Failure of severe nature 0 marks
failure endanger - Moderate nature 5 marks
system integration - low severe nature 10-25 marks
and safety of the
system
iii) Number of 1. No deviation 5 marks
deviations 2. No. of deviations < 2 2 marks
3. No. of deviations > 2 0 marks
1.3 RELIABILITY PERFORMANCE 20 Marks
A. FOR WORKS/CONTRACTS
i) Submission of order acceptance, agreement, 4 marks

PBG, Drawings and other documents within time
‐ 61 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

ii) Mobilization of resources as per Contract and in 4 marks
time
iii) Liquidation of Check-list points 4 marks
iv) Compliance to statutory and HS&E requirements 4 marks
or
Reliability of Estimates/Design/Drawing etc. in

case of Consultancy jobs
v) Timely submission of estimates and other 4 marks

documents for Extra, Substituted & AHR items
B. FOR SUPPLIES
i) Submission of order acceptance, PBG, Drawings 5 marks

and other documents within time
ii) Attending complaints and requests for after sales 5 marks

service/ warranty repairs and/ or query/ advice
(upto the evaluation period).
iii) Response to various correspondence and 5 marks

conformance to standards like ISO
iv) Submission of all required documents including 5 marks
Test Certificates at the time of supply
‐ 62 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
Apendix-2
PERFORMANCE RATING DATA SHEET
(FOR O&M)
i) Location :
ii) Order/ Contract No. & date :
iii) Brief description of Items :

Works/Assignment
iv) Order/Contract value (Rs.) :
v) Name of Vendor/Supplier/ :
Contractor/ Consultant
vi) Contracted delivery/ :

Completion Schedule
vii) Actual delivery/ :

Completion date
Performance Delivery Quality Reliability Total

Parameter Performance Performance Performance#
Maximum Marks 40 40 20 100
Marks Allocated
(*)
Remarks (if any)
PERFORMANCE RATING (**)
Note :
(#) Vendor/Supplier/Contractor/Consultant who seek repeated financial assistance or
deviation beyond contract payment term or seeking direct payment to the sub-
vendor/sub-contractor due to financial constraints, then ‘0’ marks should be allotted
against Reliability Performance
(*) Allocation of marks should be as per enclosed instructions
(**) Performance rating shall be classified as under :
Sl. Range (Marks) Rating

No.
1 60 & below POOR
2 61-75 FAIR
3 76-90 GOOD
4 More than 90 VERY
GOOD
Signature of
Authorised Signatory:
Name:
Designation:
‐ 63 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

Instructions for allocation of marks (For O&M)
1. Marks are to be allocated as under :
1.1 DELIVERY/ COMPLETION PERFORMANCE 40 Marks
Delivery Period/ Delay in Weeks Marks

Completion Schedule
a) Upto 3 months Before CDD 40

” 8 weeks 30
” 10 weeks 25
” 12 weeks 20
” 16 weeks 15
b) Above 3 months Before CDD 40

” 8 weeks 30
” 10 weeks 25
” 16 weeks 20
” 20 weeks 15
” 24 weeks 10
1.2 QUALITY PERFORMANCE 40 Marks
For Normal Cases : No Defects/ No Deviation/ No failure: 40 marks
i) Rejection/Defects Marks to be allocated on 10 marks

prorata basis for acceptable
quantity as compared to total
quantity for normal cases
ii) When quality - Failure of severe nature 0 marks
failure endanger - Moderate nature 5 marks
system integration - low severe nature 10-25 marks
and safety of the
system
iii) Number of 1. No deviation 5 marks
deviations 2. No. of deviations < 2 2 marks
3. No. of deviations > 2 0 marks
1.3 RELIABILITY PERFORMANCE 20 Marks
A. FOR WORKS/CONTRACTS
i) Submission of order acceptance, agreement, 4 marks

PBG, Drawings and other documents within time
‐ 64 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

ii) Mobilization of resources as per Contract and in 4 marks
time
iii) Liquidation of Check-list points 4 marks
iv) Compliance to statutory and HS&E requirements 4 marks
or
Reliability of Estimates/Design/Drawing etc. in

case of Consultancy jobs
v) Timely submission of estimates and other 4 marks

documents for Extra, Substituted & AHR items
B. FOR SUPPLIES
i) Submission of order acceptance, PBG, Drawings 5 marks

and other documents within time
ii) Attending complaints and requests for after sales 5 marks

service/ warranty repairs and/ or query/ advice
(upto the evaluation period).
iii) Response to various correspondence and 5 marks

conformance to standards like ISO
iv) Submission of all required documents including 5 marks
Test Certificates at the time of supply
‐ 65 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

ANNEXURE-III
ADDENDUM TO INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

(INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICIPATION IN CPP PORTAL)
Instructions to the Bidders to submit the bids online through the Central Public
Procurement Portal for e-Procurement at https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app
1) Possession of valid Digital Signature Certificate (DSC) and enrolment/registration of the

contractors/bidders on the e-procurement / e-tender portal is a prerequisite for e-
tendering.
2) Bidder should do the enrolment in the e-procurement site using the “Click here to Enroll”
option available on the home page. Portal enrolment is generally free of charge. During
enrolment/registration, the bidders should provide the correct/true information including
valid email id. All the correspondence shall be made directly with the contractors/bidders
through email id provided.
3) Bidder need to login to the site thro’ their user ID/ password chosen during
enrolment/registration.
4) Then the Digital Signature Certificate (Class II or Class III Certificates with signing key
usage) issued by SIFY / TCS / nCode / eMudra or any Certifying Authority recognized by
CCA India on eToken / SmartCard, should be registered.
5) The DSC that is registered only should be used by the bidder and should ensure safety of
the same.
6) Bidder may go through the NIT / tenders published on the site and download the required
NIT documents/schedules for the tenders he/she is interested.
7) After downloading / getting the NIT/ Tender document/schedules, the Bidder should go
thru’ them carefully and then submit the documents as asked, otherwise bid will be
rejected.
8) If there are any clarifications, this may be obtained online thro’ the tender site, or thro’ the
contact details. Bidder should take into account the corrigendum published before
submitting the bids online.
9) Bidder then logs in to the site through the secured log in by giving the user id/ password
chosen during enrolment/registration and then by giving the password of the e-Token /
Smart Card to access DSC.
10) Bidder selects the tender which he/she is interested in by using the search option & then
moves it to the ‘my tenders’ folder.
11) From my tender folder, he / she selects the tender to view all the details indicated.
12) It is construed that the bidder has read all the terms and conditions before submitting their
offer. Bidder should go through the tender schedules carefully and upload the documents
as asked otherwise, the bid will be rejected.
‐ 66 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

13) Bidder, in advance, should get ready the bid documents to be submitted as indicated in
the tender document/schedule and generally, they can be in PDF/xls/rar/zip/dwf formats.
If there is more than one document, they can be clubbed together and can be provided in
the requested format. Each document to be uploaded through online for the tenders
should be less than 2 MB. If any document is more than 2MB, it can be reduced through
zip/rar and the same can be uploaded, if permitted. Bidders Bid documents may be
scanned with 100 dpi with black and white option. However of the file size is less than 1
MB the transaction uploading time will be very fast.
14) If there are any clarifications, this may be obtained through the site, or during the pre-bid
meeting if any. Bidder should take into account the corrigendum published from time to
time before submitting the online bids.
15) The Bidders can update well in advance, the documents such as certificates, annual
report details etc., under My Space option and these can be selected as per tender
requirements and then send along with bid documents during bid submission. This will
facilitate the bid submission process faster by reducing upload time of bids.
16) Bidder should submit the EMD as specified in the tender. The original should be
posted/couriered/given in person to the Tender Inviting Authority, within the bid
submission due date & time for the tender. Scanned copy of the instrument should be
uploaded as part of the offer.
17) While submitting the bids online, the bidder reads the terms & conditions and accepts the
same to proceed further to submit the bid packets.
18) The bidder has to select the payment option as offline to pay the Tender Fee/ EMD as
applicable and enter details of the instruments.
19) The details of the DD/any other accepted instrument, physically sent, should tally with the
details available in the scanned copy and the data entered during bid submission time.
Otherwise submitted bid will not be acceptable.
20) The bidder has to digitally sign and upload the required bid documents one by one as
indicated. Bidders to note that the very act of using DSC for downloading the bids and
uploading their offers shall be deemed to be a confirmation that they have read all
sections and pages of the bid document including General conditions of contract without
any exception and have understood the entire document and are clear about the
requirements of the tender requirements.
21) The bidder has to upload the relevant files required as indicated in the cover content. In
case of any irrelevant files, the bid will be rejected.
22) If the price bid format is provided in a spread sheet file like BoQ_xxxx.xls, the rate offered
should be entered in the allotted space only and uploaded after filling the relevant
columns. The Price Bid / BOQ template must not be modified/ replaced by the bidder;
else the bid submitted is liable to be rejected for this tender.
23) The bidders are requested to submit the bids through online e-tendering system to the
Tender Inviting Authority (TIA) well before the bid submission end date & time (as per
Server System Clock). The TIA will not be held responsible for any sort of delay or the
difficulties faced during the submission of bids online by the bidders at the eleventh hour.
‐ 67 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
24) After the bid submission (i.e. after Clicking “Freeze Bid Submission” in the portal), the
acknowledgement number, given by the system should be printed by the bidder and kept
as a record of evidence for online submission of bid for the particular tender and will also
act as an entry pass to participate in the bid opening date.
25) The time settings fixed in the server side & displayed at the top of the tender site, will be
valid for all actions of requesting, bid submission, bid opening etc., in the e-tender
system. The bidders should follow this time during bid submission.
26) All the data being entered by the bidders would be encrypted using PKI encryption
techniques to ensure the secrecy of the data. The data entered will not viewable by
unauthorized persons during bid submission & not be viewable by any one until the time
of bid opening.
27) Any bid document that is uploaded to the server is subjected to symmetric encryption
using a system generated symmetric key. Further this key is subjected to asymmetric
encryption using buyers/bid openers public keys. Overall, the uploaded tender documents
become readable only after the tender opening by the authorized bid openers.
28) The confidentiality of the bids is maintained since the secured Socket Layer 128 bit
encryption technology is used. Data storage encryption of sensitive fields is done.
29) The bidder should logout of the tendering system using the normal logout option available
at the top right hand corner and not by selecting the (X) exit option in the browser.
Note: A bidder shall submit only one bid in the same bidding process. A Bidder who submits
more than one bid will cause all their bids disqualified in the said bidding process.
‐ 68 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

ANNEXURE-IV
BIDDING DATA SHEET (BDS)
ITB TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE FOLLOWING:
A. GENERAL
ITB clause Description
1.2 The Invitation for Bids/ Tender no is : PNPM/PC-150/E/112/NCB
1.1 The Employer/Owner is: TALCHER FERTILIZERSLIMITED
2.1 The name of the Works/Services to be performed is:

CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR
AND PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIES AT TALCHER FERTILIZERS
LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA
3 BIDS FROM CONSORTIUM/ JOINT VENTURE
APPLICABLE
NOT APPLICABLE
√
B. BIDDING DOCUMENT
8.1 For clarification purposes only, the communication address is:
P.D.I.L Bhawan, A-14, Sector-1,
Noida , (India)
Fax no.:0120-2529801
Kind Attention: Mr. R.R.Kumar/ Mr. Kailash Joshi

Tel no. : +91-120-2529842/43/47/51/53/54
Extn. 314/304
Fax no. : +91-120-2529801
E-mail : rrkumar@pdilin.com
kjoshi@pdilin.com
C. PREPARATION OF BIDS

(if required please provide the document list)
12 Additional Provision for Schedule of Rate/ Bid Price are as under:
[Please refer Section VII, Schedule of Rate]
14 The currency of the Bid shall be INR
15 The bid validity period shall be 120 days from final 'Bid Due Date'.
‐ 69 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

16.1 In case 'Earnest Money / Bid Security' is in the form of 'Demand Draft'
or 'Banker's Cheque', the same should be favor of TALCHER
FERTILIZERSLIMITED, payable at NOIDA.
Details of OWNER’s Bank:
STATE BANK OF INDIA

Current Account No. 37088269547
Sector-2, GautamBudh Nagar
Noida - 201301
IFSC CODE: SBIN0005936
D. SUBMISSION AND OPENING OF BIDS

22.3 and 4.0 For bid submission purposesonly (Manual) or the submission of
of IFB physical document as per clause no. 4.0 of IFB, the address to which
documents are to be sent is :
P.D.I.L Bhawan, A-14, Sector-1,
Noida , (India)
Fax no.:0120-2529801
Kind Attention: Mr. R.R.Kumar / Mr. Kailash Joshi

E. EVALUATION, AND COMPARISON OF BIDS
32 Evaluation Methodology is mentioned in Section-II.
33 Compensation for Extended Stay:
APPLICABLE
NOT APPLICABLE
√
F. AWARD OF CONTRACT

37 State of which stamp paper is required for Contract Agreement: Uttar
Pradesh / State where Bidder’s registered office is located
38 Contract Performance Security/ Security Deposit
APPLICABLE
√
‐ 70 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
NOT APPLICABLE
Contract Performance Security @ 10% of Total Order/ Contract Value

(excluding GST) within30 days of FOA/ notification of award.
OR
Initial Security Deposit (ISD) @ 5% of Total Contract Value (excluding
GST) within 30 days of FOAlnotification of award and deduction @ 10%
(excluding GST) of the RA bill subsequently from RA bills till the total
amount of security deposit including SD and deducted amount) reaches
10% of Total Contract Value (excluding GST)
40 Whether tendered item is splittable or divisible :
YES
NO
√
41 Provision of AHR Item :
APPLICABLE
√
NOT APPLICABLE
49 Quarterly Closure of Contract
APPLICABLE √
NOT APPLICABLE
Clause no. Bonus for Early Completion:

27.3 of GCC
APPLICABLE
NOT APPLICABLE
√
‐ 71 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

FORMS & FORMAT
LIST OF FORMS & FORMAT
Form No. Description

F-1 BIDDER’S GENERAL INFORMATION
F-2 PROFORMA OF "BANK GUARANTEE" FOR "EARNEST MONEY /
BID SECURITY"
F-3 LETTER OF AUTHORITY
F-4 PROFORMA OF "BANK GUARANTEE" FOR "CONTRACT
PERFORMANCE SECURITY / SECURITY DEPOSIT"
F-5 AGREED TERMS & CONDITIONS
F-6 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT CUM CONSENT LETTER
F-7 BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE
F-8 CHECK LIST
F-9 FORMAT FOR CERTIFICATE FROM BANK
IF BIDDER’S WORKING CAPITAL IS INADEQUATE
F-10 FORMAT FOR CHARTERED ACCOUNTANT CERTIFICATE FOR
FINANCIAL CAPABILITY OF THE BIDDER
F-11 BIDDER'S QUERIES FOR PRE BID MEETING
F-12 E-BANKING FORMAT
F-13 INTEGRITY PACT
F-14 INDEMNITY BOND
F-15 POWER OF ATTORNEY
F-16 PROFORMA OF CONTRACT AGREEMENT
F-17 FAQ
‐ 72 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

F-1
BIDDER'S GENERAL INFORMATION
To,
M/s TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED

NOIDA
TENDER NO.:
1 Bidder Name
2 Status of Firm Proprietorship Firm/Partnership firm/
Limited/Others
If Others Specify:_________________
[Enclose certificate of Registration]
3 Name of Proprietor/Partners/Directors
of the firm/company
4 Number of Years in Operation
5 Address of Registered Office:

*In case of Partnership firm, enclose
letter mentioning current address of City:
the firm and the full names and District:
current addresses of all the partners State:
of the firm. PIN/ZIP:
Bidder’s address where

6 order/contract is to be placed
City:
District:
State:
PIN/ZIP:
7 Address from where Goods/ Services
are to be dispatched/ provided along
with GST no. City:
(In case supply of Goods/Services District:
are from multiple locations, State:
addresses and GST no. of all such PIN/ZIP:
locations are to be provided). GST No.:
8 Telephone Number of address where _____________________

order is to be placed (Country Code) (Area Code) (Telephone
No.)
9 E-mail address
10 Website
11 ISO Certification, if any {If yes, please furnish details}
‐ 73 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

12 PAN No.
[Enclose copy of PAN Card]
13 GST No.(refer sl. no. 8 above)

[Enclose copy of GST Certificate]
14 EPF Registration No.

[Enclose copy of EPF Registration Certificate]
15 ESI code No.

[Enclose copy of relevant document]
16 Whether Micro or Small Enterprise Yes / No

(If Yes, Bidder to submit requisite documents as
specified it ITB: Clause No. 40)
Whether MSE is owned by SC/ST Yes / No
Entrepreneur(s) (If Yes, Bidder to submit requisite documents as
Whether MSE is owned by Women Yes / No
(If Yes, Bidder to submit requisite documents as
17 Bidder’s Offer no. and date
18 Type of Entity Corporate/ Non-Corporate (As per

CGST/SGST/UTGST Act).
(In case of Non-Corporate Entity, bidder will
submit documentary evidence for same).
19 Whether Bidder is Startups or not Yes / No
(If Yes, Bidder to submit requisite documents
as specified it ITB: Clause No. 50)
20 In case of Start-up confirm the
following:
(i) Date of its incorporation/

registration
(ii) Whether turnover for any
financial years since
incorporation/ registration has
exceed Rs.25 Crores.
Place: [Signature of Authorized Signatory of Bidder]

Date: Name:
Designation:
Seal:
‐ 74 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

FORMAT F-2
PROFORMA OF "BANK GUARANTEE"

FOR "EARNEST MONEY / BID SECURITY"
(To be stamped in accordance with the Stamp Act)
Ref............... Bank Guarantee No.........

Date......................
To,

NOIDA
SUB:
TENDER NO:
Dear Sir(s),
In accordance with Letter Inviting Tender under your reference No. __________________ M/s.
________________________________________ having their Registered / Head Office at
_____________ (hereinafter called the Tenderer), wish to participate in the
said tender for_________________________________________________________
As an irrevocable Bank Guarantee against Earnest Money for the amount of ______________
is required to be submitted by the Tenderer as a condition precedent for participation in the said
tender which amount is liable to be forfeited on the happening of any contingencies mentioned
in the Tender Document.
We, the ____________________________________ Bank at

_____________________________having our Head Office
________________________________________________________ (Local Address)
guarantee and undertake to pay immediately on demand without any recourse to the tenderers
by TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED., the amount ________________
____________________ without any reservation, protest, demur and recourse. Any such
demand made by OWNER, shall be conclusive and binding on us irrespective of any dispute or
difference raised by the Tenderer.
This guarantee shall be irrevocable and shall remain valid up to ____________ [this date
should be two (02) months beyond the validity of the bid].If any further extension of this
guarantee is required, the same shall be extended to such required period on receiving
instructions from M/s. _____________________________________________ whose behalf
this guarantee is issued.
In witness whereof the Bank, through its authorized officer, has set its hand and stamp on this
___________day of ____________ 20__ at ____________.
WITNESS:
(SIGNATURE) (SIGNATURE)
(NAME) (NAME)
‐ 75 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

Designation with Bank Stamp
(OFFICIAL ADDRESS) Attorney as per

Power of Attorney No. ________
Date: ________________________
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FURNISHING "BID SECURITY / EARNEST MONEY" BY "BANK

GUARANTEE"
1. The Bank Guarantee by Bidders will be given on non-judicial stamp paper as per
"Stamp Duty" applicable. The non-judicial stamp paper should be in the name of the
issuing Bank. In case of foreign Bank, the said Bank's Guarantee to be issued by its
correspondent Bank in India on requisite non-judicial stamp paper
2. The expiry date should be arrived at in accordance with "ITB: Clause-15.1".
3. The Bank Guarantee by bidders will be given from Bank as specified in "ITB".
4. A letter from the issuing Bank of the requisite Bank Guarantee confirming that said
Bank Guarantee / all future communication relating to the Bank Guarantee shall be
forwarded to the Employer at its address as mentioned at "ITB".
5. Bidders must indicate the full postal address of the Bank along with the Bank's E-mail
/ Fax / Phone from where the Earnest Money Bond has been issued.
6. If a Bank Guarantee is issued by a commercial Bank, then a letter to Employer
confirming its net worth is more than Rs. 1,000,000,000.00 [Rupees One Hundred
Crores] or equivalent alongwith documentary evidence.
‐ 76 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

F-3
LETTER OF AUTHORITY
[Proforma for Letter of Authority for Attending Subsequent 'Negotiations' / 'Pre-Bid Meetings'
/'Un-priced Bid Opening' / 'Price Bid Opening']
Ref: Date:
To,

NOIDA
SUB:
TENDER NO:
Dear Sir,
I/We, _____________________________________ hereby authorize the following
representative(s) for attending any 'Negotiations' / 'Meetings [Pre-Bid Meeting]', 'Un-priced
Bid Opening', 'Price Bid Opening' and for any subsequent correspondence / communication
against the above Bidding Documents:
[1] Name & Designation ____________________ Signature ___________________

Phone/Cell:
Fax:
E-mail: ………………………………….. @ ………………………………
[2] Name & Designation ____________________ Signature ___________________

Phone/Cell:
Fax:
E-mail: ……………………………………….. @ ………………………………
We confirm that we shall be bound by all commitments made by aforementioned authorised

representative(s).

Date: Name:
Designation:
Seal:
Note: This "Letter of Authority" should be on the "letterhead" of the Firm / Bidder and
should be signed by a person competent and having the 'Power of Attorney' to bind
the Bidder. Not more than 'two [02] persons per Bidder' are permitted to attend
"Techno-commercial / Un-priced" & "Price Bid" Openings. Bidders authorized
representative is required to carry a copy of this authority letter while attending the
un-priced and priced bid opening, the same shall be submitted to OWNER.

‐ 77 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

F-4
PROFORMA OF "BANK GUARANTEE" FOR "CONTRACT PERFORMANCE SECURITY /

SECURITY DEPOSIT"
(ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)
Ref............... Bank Guarantee No.........

Date......................
To,

NOIDA
Dear Sir(s),
M/s. __________________________________________________________________ having

registered office at _______________________ (herein after called the “contractor/supplier”
which expression shall wherever the context so require include its successors and assignees)
have been placed/ awarded the job/work of
_______________________________________________ vide PO/LOA/FOA No.
_______________________________dated______ for TALCHER FERTILIZERS
LIMITEDhaving registered office at Plot 2/H, Kalpana Area, BJB Nagar, Khorda, Bhubaneswar
– 751014 (herein after called the “OWNER” which expression shall wherever the context so
require include its successors and assignees).
The Contract conditions provide that the SUPPLIER/CONTRACTOR shall pay a sum of Rs.
____________________ (Rupees _________________________________________) as full
Contract Performance Guarantee in the form therein mentioned. The form of payment of
Contract Performance Guarantee includes guarantee executed by Nationalized
Bank/Scheduled Commercial Bank, undertaking full responsibility to indemnify TALCHER
FERTILZERS LIMITED, in case of default.
The said M/s._______________________________________________ has approached us

and at their request and in consideration of the premises we having our office at
______________________________ have agreed to give such guarantee as hereinafter
mentioned.
1. We _________________________________________________________________
hereby undertake to give the irrevocable & unconditional guarantee to you that if default
shall be made by M/s. __________________________________ in performing any of
the terms and conditions of the tender/order/contract or in payment of any money
payable to TALCHER FERTILZERS LIMITED we shall on first demand pay without
demur, contest, protest and/ or without any recourse to the contractor to OWNER in
such manner as OWNER may direct the said amount of Rupees
_____________________________ only or such portion thereof not exceeding the said
sum as you may require from time to time.
‐ 78 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

2. You will have the full liberty without reference to us and without affecting this guarantee,
postpone for any time or from time to time the exercise of any of the powers and rights
conferred on you under the order/contract with the said
M/s. _______________________________ and to enforce or to forbear from endorsing
any powers or rights or by reason of time being given to the said
M/s.__________________________ and such postponement forbearance would not
have the effect of releasing the bank from its obligation under this debt.
3. Your right to recover the said sum of Rs.

______________________________________ (Rupees
_______________________________________) from us in manner aforesaid is
absolute & unequivocal and will not be affected or suspended by reason of the fact that
any dispute or disputes have been raised by the said M/s.
___________________________ and/or that any dispute or disputes are pending
before any officer, tribunal or court or arbitrator or any other authority/forum and any
demand made by you in the bank shall be conclusive and binding. The bank shall not
be released of its obligations under these presents by any exercise by you of its liberty
with reference to matter aforesaid or any of their or by reason or any other act of
omission or commission on your part or any other indulgence shown by you or by any
other matter or changed what so ever which under law would, but for this provision,
have the effect of releasing the bank.
4. The guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or
winding up dissolution or changes of constitution or insolvency of the said
supplier/contractor but shall in all respects and for all purposes be binding and operative
until payment of all money due to you in respect of such liabilities is paid.
5. This guarantee shall be irrevocable and shall remain valid upto ___________________
(this date should be 90 days after the expiry of defect liability period/ Guarantee period)
_______________. The bank undertakes not to revoke this guarantee during its
currency without your previous consent and further agrees that the guarantee shall
continue to be enforceable until it is discharged by OWNER in writing. However, if for
any reason, the supplier/contractor is unable to complete the supply/work within the
period stipulated in the order/contract and in case of extension of the date of
delivery/completion resulting extension of defect liability period/guarantee period of the
supplier/contractor fails to perform the supply/work fully, the bank hereby agrees to
further extend this guarantee at the instance of the supplier/contractor till such time as
may be determined by OWNER. If any further extension of this guarantee is required,
the same shall be extended to such required period on receiving instruction from M/s.
___________________________________________________ (contractor) on whose
behalf this guarantee is issued.
6. Bank also agrees that OWNER at its option shall be entitled to enforce this
Guarantee against the bank (as principal debtor) in the first instant, without
proceeding against the supplier/contractor and notwithstanding any security or other
guarantee that OWNER may have in relation to the supplier’s/contractor’s liabilities.
7. The amount under the Bank Guarantee is payable forthwith without any delay by
Bank upon the written demand raised by OWNER. Any dispute arising out of or in
relation to the said Bank Guarantee shall be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of
courts at New Delhi.
‐ 79 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

8. Therefore, we hereby affirm that we are guarantors and responsible to you on behalf
of the Supplier/Contractor up to a total amount of __________(amount of guarantees
in words and figures) and we undertake to pay you, upon your first written demand
declaring the Supplier/Contractor to be in default under the order/contract and
without caveat or argument, any sum or sums within the limits of (amounts of
guarantee) as aforesaid, without your needing to prove or show grounds or reasons
for your demand or the sum specified therein.
9. We have power to issue this guarantee in your favor under Memorandum and Articles
of Association and the undersigned has full power to do under the Power of Attorney,
dated ___________ granted to him by the Bank.
Yours faithfully,
_______________
Bank by its Constituted Attorney
Signature of a person duly

Authorized to sign on behalf of the
Bank
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FURNISHING

"CONTRACT PERFORMANCE SECURITY / SECURITY DEPOSIT" BY "BANK
GUARANTEE"
1. The Bank Guarantee by successful Bidder(s) will be given on non-judicial stamp

paper as per 'stamp duty' applicable. The non-judicial stamp paper should be in
name of the issuing bank. In case of foreign bank, the said Bank Guarantee to be
issued by its correspondent bank in India on requisite non-judicial stamp paper and
place of Bid to be considered as Delhi.
2. The Bank Guarantee by Bidders will be given from bank as specified in Tender.
3. A letter from the issuing bank of the requisite Bank Guarantee confirming that said
Bank Guarantee and all future communication relating to the Bank Guarantee shall
be forwarded to Employer.
4. If a Bank Guarantee is issued by a commercial bank, then a letter to Employer and
copy to Consultant (if applicable) confirming its net worth is more than Rs.
100,00,00,000.00 [Rupees One Hundred Crores] or its equivalent in foreign currency
alongwith documentary evidence.
‐ 80 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

F-5
AGREED TERMS & CONDITIONS
To,
M/s TALCHER FERTILZERS LIMITED

NOIDA
SUB:
TENDER NO:
This Questionnaire duly filled in, signed & stamped must form part of Bidder’s Bid and
should be returned along with Un-priced Bid. Clauses confirmed hereunder need not be
repeated in the Bid.
Sl. DESCRIPTION BIDDER'S

CONFIRMATION
1 Bidder's name and address
2. Please confirm the currency of quoted prices is in Indian

Rupees.
3. Confirm quoted prices will remain FIRM AND FIXED till
complete execution of the order.
4 Rate of applicable GST (CGST & SGST/ UTGST or IGST ) CGST: …………… %
Plus SGST/UTGST………
%
Total: ………………..%
Or
IGST:…………. %
4.1 Whether in the instant tender services/worksare covered in Yes/ No
reverse charge rule of GST (CGST & SGST/UTGST or
IGST) In case of Yes, please
specify GST (CGST &
SGST/UTGST or
IGST)payable by:
OWNER:………….%
Bidder:…………..%
4.2 Service Accounting Codes (SAC)/ Harmonized System of
Nomenclature (HSN)
4.3 We hereby confirm that the quoted prices is in compliance
with the Section 171 of CGST Act/ SGST Act as mentioned
as clause no. 13.10 of ITB
5. Bidder confirms acceptance of relevant Terms of Payment

specified in the Bid Document.
6. Bidder confirms that Contract Performance Security will be
furnished as per Bid Document.
7. Bidder confirms that Contract Performance Security shall be
from any Indian scheduled bank or a branch of an
International bank situated in India and registered with
Reserve bank of India as scheduled foreign bank. However,
in case of bank guarantees from banks other than the
‐ 81 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

CONFIRMATION
Nationalized Indian banks, the bank must be a commercial
bank having net worth in excess of Rs 100 crores and a
declaration to this effect shall be made by such commercial
bank either in the Bank Guarantee itself or separately on its
letterhead.
8. Bidder confirms compliance to Completion Schedule as

specified in Bid document. Confirm contract period shall be
reckoned from the date of Fax of Acceptance.
9. Bidder confirms acceptance of Price Reduction Schedule
(PRS)for delay in completion schedule specified in Bid
document.
In case of delay, the bills shall be submitted after deducting

the Price Reduction Schedule due to delay (refer PRS
Clause).
10. a) Confirm acceptance of all terms and conditions of Bid
Document (all sections).
b) Confirm that printed terms and conditions of bidder are
not applicable.
11. Confirm your offer is valid for period specified in BDS from
Final/Extended due date of opening of Techno-commercial
Bids.
12. Please furnish EMD/Bid Security details :

a) EMD/ Bid Security No. & date
b) Value
c) Validity
13. As per requirement of tender, bidder (having status as Pvt.
Ltd. or Limited company) must upload bid duly digitally
signed on e-portal through class-3B digital signature (DS).
Incase, class of DS or name of employee or name of
employers not visible in the digitally signed documents, the
bid digitally signed as submitted by the person shall be
binding on the bidder.
14. Bidder confirms that (i) none of Directors (in Board of Confirmed
Director) of bidder is a relative of any Director (in Board of
Director) of Owner or (ii) the bidder is not a firm in which Not
any Director (in Board of Director) of Owner or their relative confirmed
is not a partner.
15. All correspondence must be in ENGLISH language only
16. Bidder confirms the contents of this Tender Document have

not been modified or altered by them. In case, it is found
that the tender document has been modified / altered by the
bidder, the bid submitted by them shall be liable for
rejection.
‐ 82 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

CONFIRMATION
17. Bidder confirms that all Bank charges associated with
Bidder’s Bank shall be borne by Bidder.
18. No Deviation Confirmation:
It may be note that any 'deviation / exception' in any form may
result in rejection of Bid. Therefore, Bidder confirms that they
have not taken any 'exception / deviation' anywhere in the
Bid. In case any 'deviation / exception' is mentioned or
noticed, Bidder’s Bid may be rejected.
19. If Bidder becomes a successful Bidder and pursuant to the
provisions of the Tender Document, award is given to them
against subject Tender Document, the following
Confirmation shall be automatically enforceable:
"We agree and acknowledge that the Employer is entering

into the Contract/Agreement solely on its own behalf and
not on behalf of any other person or entity. In particular, it is
expressly understood & agreed that the Government of
India is not a party to the Contract/Agreement and has no
liabilities, obligations or rights there under. It is expressly
understood and agreed that the Purchaser is authorized to
enter into Contract/Agreement, solely on its own behalf
under the applicable laws of India. We expressly agree,
acknowledge and understand that the Purchaser is not an
agent, representative or delegate of the Government of
India. It is further understood and agreed that the
Government of India is not and shall not be liable for any
acts, omissions, commissions, breaches or other wrongs
arising out of the Agreement. Accordingly, we hereby
expressly waive, release and forego any and all actions or
claims, including cross claims, VIP claims or counter claims
against the Government of India arising out of the
Agreement and covenants not to sue to Government of
India as to any manner, claim, cause of action or things
whatsoever arising of or under the Agreement."
20. Bidder to ensure all documents as per tender including
clause 11 of Section III and all Formats are included in their
bid.
21. Bidder understands that Tender Document is not

exhaustive. In case any activity though specifically not
covered in description of 'Schedule of Rates' but is required
to complete the work as per Scope of Work, Conditions of
Contract, or any other part of Bidding document, the quoted
rates will deemed to be inclusive of cost incurred for such
activities unless otherwise specifically excluded. Bidder
confirms to perform for fulfillment of the contract and
completeness of the supplies in all respect within the
scheduled time frame and quoted price.
‐ 83 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

CONFIRMATION
22. Bidder hereby confirms that they are not on ‘Holiday’ by
OWNER or any of the JV partners of OWNER (viz. GAIL,
RCF, CIL, FCIL) or Public Sector Project Management
Consultant (like PDIL, EIL, Mecon only due to “poor
performance” or “corrupt and fraudulent practices”) or
banned by Government department/ Public Sector on due
date of submission of bid.
Further, neither bidder nor their allied agency/(ies) (as

defined in the Procedure for Action in case of
Corrupt/Fraudulent/Collusive/ Coercive Practices) are on
banning list of TFL or any of the JV partner of OWNER viz.
GAIL, RCF, CIL, FCIL.
Bidder also confirms that they are not under any liquidation,
court receivership or similar proceedings or 'bankruptcy'.
In case it comes to the notice of TFL/PDIL that the bidder

has given wrong declaration in this regard, the same shall
be dealt as ‘fraudulent practices’ and action shall be initiated
as per the Procedure for action in case of
Corrupt/Fraudulent/Collusive/Coercive Practices.
Further, Bidder also confirms that in case there is any

change in status of the declaration prior to award of
contract, the same will be promptly informed to TFL/PDIL by
them.
23. Bidder confirms that, in case of contradiction between the

confirmations provided in this format and terms & conditions
mentioned elsewhere in the offer, the confirmations given in
this format shall prevail.

Date: Name:
Designation:
Seal:
‐ 84 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF

F-6
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT CUM CONSENT LETTER
(On receipt of tender document/information regarding the tender, Bidder shall

acknowledge the receipt and confirm his intention to bid or reason for non-
participation against the enquiry /tender through e-mail/fax to concerned executive in
OWNER issued the tender, by filling up the Format)
To,

NOIDA
SUB:
TENDER NO:
Dear Sir,
We hereby acknowledge receipt of a complete set of bidding document along with

enclosures for subject item/job and/or the information regarding the subject tender.
 We intend to bid as requested for the subject item/job and furnish following details
with respect to our quoting office:
Postal Address with Pin Code : ....................

Telephone Number : ....................
Fax Number : ....................
Contact Person : ....................
E-mail Address : ....................
Mobile No. : ....................
Date : ....................
Seal/Stamp : ....................
 We are unable to bid for the reason given below:
Reasons for non-submission of bid:

_____________________________________________________________________
Agency’s Name : ....................

Signature : ....................
Name : ....................
Designation : ....................
Date : ....................
Seal/Stamp : ....................
‐ 85 ‐

PC-150/E/ 112 /S-III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
AND PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIESAT TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD.,
ANGUL, ODISHA Page 86 of 102

F-7
BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE
To,
M/s TALCHER FERTILZERS LIMITED, NOIDA
SUB:
TENDER NO:
Sl. No Description LOA /WO Full Postal Address Value of Date of Scheduled Date of Reasons for
of the No. and & phone nos. of Contract/Or Commenceme Completion Actual delay in
Services date Client. Name, der nt of Services Time (Months) Completion execution, if
designation and (Specify any
address of Engineer/ Currency
Officer-in-Charge Amount)
(for cases other than
purchase)
(1) (2) (3) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

Date: Name:
Designation:
Seal:
Note:
1. The documents (Work Order/DLOA/FOA, Completion certificate, Execution Certificate etc.) which have been referred/
specified/indicated/submitted in above tabulation format and/or along with bid shall be taken into consideration in reply to
queries (if any) during evaluation of Bids. Hence, bidder in his own interest should invariably fill-up this format.

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR DOC. NO.
.
TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA Page 87 of 102

F-8
CHECK LIST
Bidders are requested to duly fill in the checklist. This checklist gives only certain important items
to facilitate the bidder to make sure that the necessary data/information as called for in the bid
document has been submitted by them along with their offer. This, however, does not relieve the
bidder of his responsibilities to make sure that his offer is otherwise complete in all respects.
Please ensure compliance and tick (√) against following points:
S. No. DESCRIPTION CHECK REFERENCE PAGE NO.

BOX OF THE BID
SUBMITTED
1.0 Digitally Signing (in case of e-bidding)/ Signing
and Stamping (in case of manual bidding) on each
sheet of offer, original bidding document
including SCC, ITB, GCC,SOR drawings,
addendum (if any)
2.0 Confirm that the following details have been
submitted in the Un-priced part of the bid
i Covering Letter, Letter of Submission
ii Bid Security
iii Digitally Signing / Signingand Stamping ofbidding
document along with drawings andcorrigendum (if
any)
iv Power of Attorney in the name of person signing
the bid (Format F-22).
v Copies of documents defining constitution or legal
status, place of registration and principal place
of business of the company
vi Details and documentary proof required against
Bid Evaluation Criteria (BEC) along with
complete documents establishing ownership of
equipment as per SCC are enclosed
vii Confirm submission of document alongwith un-
priced bid as per bid requirement.
3.0 Confirm that all format duly filled in are
enclosedwith the bid duly Digitally Signed / Signed
and Stamped by authorised person(s)
87

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 88 of 102

4.0 Confirm that the price part as per Price Schedule
format submitted with Bidding Document/
uploaded in case of e-bid.
5.0 Confirm that annual reports for last three financial
years & duly filled in Format F-10are enclosed in
the offer for financial assessment (where financial
criteria of BEC is applicable).

Date: Name:
Designation:
Seal:
88

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 89 of 102

F-9
FORMAT FOR CERTIFICATE FROM BANK
IF BIDDER’S WORKING CAPITAL IS INADEQUATE/NEGATIVE
(To be provided on Bank’s letter head)
Date:
To,

NOIDA
Dear Sir,
This is to certify that M/s ………………………………….. (name of the bidder with address)
(hereinafter referred to as Customer) is an existing customer of our Bank.
The Customer has informed that they wish to bid for OWNER’s RFQ/Tender no.
.................................................. dated …………… for ……………………………………..(Name of
the supply/work/services/consultancy) and as per the terms of the said RFQ/Tender they have to
furnish a certificate from their Bank confirming the availability of line of credit.
Accordingly M/s ………………………….. (name of the Bank with address) confirms availability of
line of credit to M/s …………………….. (name of the bidder) for at least an amount of Rs.
_________
It is also confirmed that the net worth of the Bank is more than Rs. 100 Crores (or Equivalent
USD) and the undersigned is authorized to issue this certificate.
Yours truly
for …………………………… (Name & address of Bank)
(Authorized signatory)
Name of the signatory :
Designation :
Stamp
89

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 90 of 102

F-10
FORMAT FOR CHARTERED ACCOUNTANT CERTIFICATE/ CERTIFIED PUBLIC
ACCOUNTANT (CPA) FOR FINANCIAL CAPABILITY OF THE BIDDER
We have verified the Audited Financial Statements and other relevant records of
M/s……………………………… (Name of the bidder) and certify the following:
A. AUDITED ANNUAL TURNOVER* OF LAST 3 YEARS:
Year Amount (Currency)

Year 1:
Year 2:
Year 3:
B. NETWORTH* AS PER LAST AUDITED FINANCIAL STATEMENT:
Description Year _____

Amount (Currency)
1. Net Worth
C. WORKING CAPITAL* AS PER LAST AUDITED FINANCIAL STATEMENT :
Description Year _____

Amount (Currency)
1. Current Assets
2. Current Liabilities
3. Working Capital (Current
Assets-Current liabilities)
*Refer Instructions
Note: It is further certified that the above mentioned applicable figures are matching with
the returns filed with Registrar of Companies (ROC) [Applicable only in case of Indian
Companies]
Name of Audit Firm: [Signature of Authorized Signatory]

Chartered Accountant/CPA Name:
Date: Designation:
Seal:
Membership No.:
Instructions:
1. The Separate Pro-forma shall be used for each member in case of JV/ Consortium.
90

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 91 of 102

2. The financial year would be the same as one normally followed by the bidder for its
Annual Report.
3. The bidder shall provide the audited annual financial statements as required for this
Tender document. Failure to do so would result in the Proposal being considered as non-
responsive.
4. For the purpose of this Tender document:
(i) Annual Turnover shall be “Sale Value/ Operating Income”

(ii) Working Capital shall be “Current Assets less Current liabilities” and
(iii) Net Worth shall be Paid up share capital plus Free Reserves & Surplus less
accumulated losses, deferred expenditure and miscellaneous expenditure not
written off, if any.
5. Above figures shall be calculated after considering the qualification, if any, made
by the statutory auditor on the audited financial statements of the bidder including
quantified financial implication.
6. This certificate is to be submitted on the letter head of Chartered Accountant/CPA.
91

PC-150/E/ 112/S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
AND PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIESAT TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD.,
ANGUL, ODISHA
Page 92 of 102
F-11
BIDDER'S QUERIES FOR PRE BID MEETING
To,
Sub :
Tender No :
SL. REFERENCE OF BIDDING DOCUMENT BIDDER'S QUERY OWNER'S REPLY

NO. Subject
SEC. NO. Page Clause
No. No.
NOTE: The Pre-Bid Queries may be sent by fax and also by e-mail before due date for receipt of Bidder's queries.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER: ___________________________
NAME OF BIDDER : ___________________________
92

PC-150/E/ 112 /S
0
III
CONSTRUCTION OF
AND PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIESAT TALCHER
FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA
Page 93 of 102

F-12
E-Banking Mandate Form
(To be issued on bidder’s letter head)
1. Vendor/customer Name :
2. Vendor/customer Code:
3. Vendor/customer Address:
4. Vendor/customer e-mail id:
5. Particulars of bank account

a) Name of Bank
b) Name of branch
c) Branch code:
d) Address:
e) Telephone number:
f) Type of account (current/saving etc.)
g) Account Number:
h) RTGS IFSC code of the bank branch
i) NEFT IFSC code of the bank branch
j) 9 digit MICR code
I/We hereby authorize TALCHER FERTILZERS LIMITED to release any amount due to me/us
in the bank account as mentioned above. I/We hereby declare that the particulars given above
are correct and complete. If the transaction is delayed or lost because of incomplete or incorrect
information, we would not hold the TALCHER FERTILZERS LIMITED responsible.
(Signature of vendor/customer)
BANK CERTIFICATE
We certify that --------------------------- has an Account no. ---------------------------- with us and we

confirm that the details given above are correct as per our records.
Bank stamp
Date (Signature of authorized officer of bank)
93

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 94 of 102

F-13
INTEGRITY PACT
Pre-signed Integrity Pact attached
94

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 95 of 102

F-14
INDEMNITY BOND
WHEREAS TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED (hereinafter referred to as “TFL”) which

expression shall, unless repugnant to the context include its successors and assigns, having its
registered office at Plot 2/H, Kalpana Area, BJB Nagar, Khorda, Bhubaneswar – 751014 has
entered into a contract with M/s*…………………………. (hereinafter referred to as the
“Contractor”) which expression shall unless repugnant to the context include its
representatives, successors and assigns, having its registered office at *………………….. and
on the terms and conditions as set out, inter-alia in the ……………. [mention the work
order/LOA/Tender No.]and various documents forming part thereof, hereinafter collectively
referred to as the ‘CONTRACT’ which expression shall include all amendments, modifications
and / or variations thereto.
TFL has also advised the Contractor to execute an Indemnity Bond in general in favour of TFL
indemnifying TFL and its employees and Directors including Independent Directors from all
consequences which may arise out of any prospective litigation or proceedings filed or may be
initiated by any third party, including any Banker / financial institution / worker(s) /vendor(s)/
subcontractor(s) etc. who may have been associated or engaged by the Contractor directly or
indirectly with or without consent of TFL for above works.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the promises aforesaid, the Contractor hereby

irrevocably and unconditionally undertakes to indemnify and keep indemnified TFL and all its
employees, Directors, including Independent Directors, from and against all/any claim(s),
damages, loss, which may arise out of any litigations/ liabilities that may be raised by the
Contractor or any third party against TFL under or in relation to this contract. The Contractor
undertakes to compensate and pay to TFL and/or any of its employees, Directors including
Independent Directors, forth with on demand without any protest the amount claimed by TFL for
itself and for and on behalf of its employees, Directors including Independent Directors together
with direct/indirect expenses including all legal expenses incurred by them or any of them on
account of such litigation or proceedings.
AND THE CONTRACTOR hereby further agrees with TFL that:
(i) This Indemnity shall remain valid and irrevocable for all claims of TFL and/or any of its
employees and Directors including Independent Directors arising out of said contract
with respect to any such litigation / court case for which TFL and/or its employees and
Directors including Independent Directors has been made party until now or here-in-
after.
(ii) This Indemnity shall not be discharged/revoked by any change/

modification/amendment/assignment of the contract or any merger of the Contractor with
other entity or any change in the constitution/structure of the Contractor’s firm/Company
or any conditions thereof including insolvency etc. of the Contractor, but shall be in all
respects and for all purposes binding and operative until any/all claims for payment of
95

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 96 of 102

TFL are settled by the Contractor and/or TFL discharges the Contractor in writing from
this Indemnity.
The undersigned has full power to execute this Indemnity Bond for and on behalf of
theContractor and the same stands valid.
SIGNED BY :
For [ Contractor]
Authorised Representative
Place:
Dated:
Witnesses:
1.
96

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 97 of 102

F-15
POWER OF ATTORNEY
(to be submitted on the Non-Judicial stamp paper)
Tender No.:
Description of work:
Name of Bidder:___________________________________________
“The undersigned _________________________ (Name of LEGAL PERSON, i.e.

CEO/MD/ CHAIRMAN /C&MD/Company Secretary/Partners/Proprietor) is lawfully
authorized to issue this POA* on behalf of the company M/s
__________________________________________ (Name of bidder) whose
registered address is ______________________________________________
_____________________ and does hereby appoint Mr./Ms
_________________________________ (name of authorized person signing the bid
document) ______________________________ (Designation) of
M/s _________________________________________________ (Name of bidder)
whose signature appears below to be the true and lawful attorney/(s) and authorize
him/her to sign the bid, conduct negotiation, sign contracts and execute all the
necessary matter related thereto, in the name and on behalf of the company in
connection with the tender no. __________________________________________.
The signature of the authorized person/(s) herein constitutes unconditional obligations

of M/s _____________________________________________ (Name of bidder).
This Power of Attorney (POA) shall remain valid and in full force and effect before we
withdraw it in writing (by fax, or mail or post). All the documents signed (within the
period of validity of the Power of Attorney) by the authorized person herein shall not be
invalid because of such withdrawal.
(*)
1. In case of a Limited Company, if the POA is issued by other than CEO/MD/
CHAIRMAN /C&MD/Company Secretary, then the POA must be accompanied
by a “Board Resolution” of the bidder’s company authorizing the “Legal Person”
to issue POA.
2. For a Partnership Firm, the POA must be signed by all Partners and a copy of
Partnership Deed of the Company must be enclosed with bid.
3. For a Proprietorship firm, if the bid is signed by any person other than the
Proprietor, then legal person shall be the Proprietor of the firm.
97

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 98 of 102

SIGNATURE OF THE LEGAL PERSON
_______________________________________
(Name of person with Company seal)
SIGNATURE OF THE AUTHORIZED PERSON

(FOR SIGNING THE BID)
__________________________
(Signature)
Name of person: _________________________
E-mail id:
98

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 99 of 102

F-16
PROFORMA FOR CONTRACT AGREEMENT
DLOA No. ……………. dated ---------

-
TFL’s PAN No. …………….
Contract Agreement for the work of ----------------- of TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED made
on ---------- between (Name and Address)------------- , hereinafter called the “CONTRACTOR”
(which term shall unless excluded by or repugnant to the subject or context include its
successors and permitted assignees) of the one part and TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED
hereinafter called the “EMPLOYER” (which term shall, unless excluded by or repugnant to the
subject or context include its successors and assignees) of the other part.
WHEREAS
A. The EMPLOYER being desirous of having provided and executed certain work
mentioned, enumerated or referred to in the Tender Documents including Letter Inviting
Tender, General Tender Notice, General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of
Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Plans, Time Schedule of completion of jobs, Schedule
of Rates, Agreed Variations, other documents has called for Tender.
B. The CONTRACTOR has inspected the SITE and surroundings of WORK specified in the
Tender Documents and has satisfied himself by careful examination before submitting his
tender as to the nature of the surface, strata, soil, sub-soil and ground, the form and
nature of site and local conditions, the quantities, nature and magnitude of the work, the
availability of labour and materials necessary for the execution of work, the means of
access to SITE, the supply of power and water thereto and the accommodation he may
require and has made local and independent enquiries and obtained complete information
as to the matters and thing referred to, or implied in the tender documents or having any
connection therewith and has considered the nature and extent of all probable and
possible situations, delays, hindrances or interferences to or with the execution and
completion of the work to be carried out under the CONTRACT, and has examined
and considered all other matters, conditions and things and probable and possible
contingencies, and generally all matters incidental thereto and ancillary thereof
affecting the execution and completion of the WORK and which might have influenced
him in making his tender.
C. The Tender Documents including the Notice Letter Inviting Tender, General Conditions of
Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, Schedule of Rates, General Obligations,
SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, PLANS, Time Schedule for completion of Jobs, Letter of
Acceptance of Tender and any statement of agreed variations with its enclosures copies
of which are hereto annexed form part of this CONTRACT though separately set out
herein and are included in the expression “CONTRACT” wherever herein used.
99

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 100 of 102

AND WHEREAS
The EMPLOYER accepted the Tender of the CONTRACTOR for the provision and the execution
of the said WORK at the rates stated in the schedule of quantities of the work and finally
approved by EMPLOYER (hereinafter called the "Schedule of Rates") upon the terms and subject
to the conditions of CONTRACT.
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH AND IT IS HEREBY AGREED AND DECLARED AS

FOLLOWS:-
1. In consideration of the payment to be made to the CONTRACTOR for the WORK to be

executed by him, the CONTRACTOR hereby covenants with EMPLOYER that the
CONTRACTOR shall and will duly provide, execute and complete the said work and
shall do and perform all other acts and things in the CONTRACT mentioned or described
or which are to be implied there from or may be reasonably necessary for the completion
of the said WORK and at the said times and in the manner and subject to the terms and
conditions or stipulations mentioned in the contract.
2. In consideration of the due provision execution and completion of the said WORK,
EMPLOYER does hereby agree with the CONTRACTOR that the EMPLOYER will pay
to the CONTRACTOR the respective amounts for the WORK actually done by him and
approved by the EMPLOYER at the Schedule of Rates and such other sum payable to
the CONTRACTOR under provision of CONTRACT, such payment to be made at such
time in such manner as provided for in the CONTRACT.
AND
3. In consideration of the due provision, execution and completion of the said WORK
the CONTRACTOR does hereby agree to pay such sums as may be due to the
EMPLOYER for the services rendered by the EMPLOYER to the CONTRACTOR,
such as power supply, water supply and others as set for in the said CONTRACT
and such other sums as may become payable to the EMPLOYER towards the
controlled items of consumable materials or towards loss, damage to the EMPLOYER'S
equipment, materials construction plant and machinery, such payments to be made at
such time and in such manner as is provided in the CONTRACT.
It is specifically and distinctly understood and agreed between the EMPLOYER and the
CONTRACTOR that the CONTRACTOR shall have no right, title or interest in the SITE
made available by the EMPLOYER for execution of the works or in the building,
structures or work executed on the said SITE by the CONTRACTOR or in the goods,
articles, materials etc., brought on the said SITE (unless the same specifically belongs
to the CONTRACTOR) and the CONTRACTOR shall not have or deemed to have any
lien whatsoever charge for unpaid bills will not be entitled to assume or retain
possession or control of the SITE or structures and the EMPLOYER shall have an
absolute and unfettered right to take full possession of SITE and to remove the
CONTRACTOR, their servants, agents and materials belonging to the CONTRACTOR
and lying on the SITE.
100

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 101 of 102
The CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to enter upon the SITE for execution of the
WORK only as a licensee simpliciter and shall not have any claim, right, title or interest
in the SITE or the structures erected thereon and the EMPLOYER shall be entitled to
terminate such license at any time without assigning any reason.
The materials including sand, gravel, stone, loose, earth, rock etc., dug up or excavated
from the said SITE shall, unless otherwise expressly agreed under this
CONTRACT, exclusively belong to the EMPLOYER and the CONTRACTOR shall
have no right to claim over the same and such excavation and materials should be
disposed off on account of the EMPLOYER according to the instruction in writing
issued from time to time by the ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE.
In Witness whereof the parties have executed these presents in the day and the year first above
written.
Signed and Delivered for and on Signed and Delivered for and
on behalf of EMPLOYER on behalf of the CONTRACTOR.
TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED NAME OF CONTRACTOR

_______________________________ ____________________________
Date :___________ Date :____________
Place:___________ Place:____________
IN PRESENCE OF TWO WITNESSES
1.___________________________ 1. ________________________
2.___________________________ 2. ________________________
___________________________ ______________________
___________________________ _______________________
101

PC-150/E/ 112 /S III 0
CONSTRUCTION OF
REV
.
Page 102 of 102

F-17
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQs)
SL.NO. QUESTION ANSWER

1.0 Can any vendor quote for subject Yes. A Vendor has to meet Bid Evaluation
Tender? Criteria given under Section II of Tender
document in addition to other requirements.
2.0 Should the Bid Evaluation Criteria Yes. Please refer Section II of Tender
documents be attested? document
3.0 Is attending Pre-Bid Meeting No. Refer Clause No. 17 of Instruction to

mandatory. Bidders of Tender Document. However
attending Pre Bid Meeting is recommended
to sort out any issue before submission of
bidby a Bidder.
4.0 Can a vendor submit more than 1 offer? No. Please refer Clause No. 4 of“Instruction
to Bidders” of Tender Document.
5.0 Is there any Help document available Yes. Refer Annexure III to “Instruction to
for e-Tender. Bidders” of Tender Document and FAQs as
available on OWNER E-Tender portal.
6.0
Are there are any benefits available to Refer Clause No. 50 of Instructions to
Startups? Bidders of Tender Document
7.0
Are there are any MSE (Micro & Small Yes. Refer Clause No. 40 of Instructions to
Enterprises) benefits available? Bidders of Tender Document.
All the terms and conditions of Tender remain unaltered.
102

PC-150 / E / 112 /S-V 0
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED DOC. NO. REV.
Page 1 of 29
SECTION-V
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
ORM NO: 02-0000-0021F2 REV1 All rights reserved

CONSTRUCTION OF PC-150 / E / 112 /S-V 0
AND PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIES AT DOC. NO. REV.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT Page 2 of 29
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION: .............................................................................................. 4

2.0 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT SITE ................................................................... 4
3.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 4
4.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY: ......................................................................................... 5
5.0 OWNERS OBLIGATIONS:.................................................................................. 5
6.0 POWER & WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER PURPOSES ..................... 5
7.0 RATES ............................................................................................................. 6
8.0 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................. 6
9.0 GATE PASSES ................................................................................................. 7
10.0 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ............................................................................ 7
11.0 ISSUE OF WORKING DRAWINGS ...................................................................... 7
12.0 COST OF TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS ISSUED BY OWNER .............................. 7
13.0 ROLE OF OWNER/ CONSULTANT ..................................................................... 7
14.0 SERVING OF NOTICES ..................................................................................... 7
15.0 CONTRACTOR’S GUARANTEE ......................................................................... 8
16.0 NOTHING EXTRA FOR ADVERSE SUB-SOIL CONDITION .................................... 8
17.0 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE MANNER OF EXECUTION OF WORK8
18.0 NO WORK SHALL BE UNDERTAKEN WITHOUT APPROVED WORKING DRAWINGS 8
19.0 CONTRACTOR SHALL KEEP FOUNDATION PITS/TRENCHES DRY ..................... 8
20.0 NOTHING EXTRA FOR INTRICATE CONCRETE SHUTTERING OR REINFORCEMENT
WORK...................................................................................................................... 9
21.0 NOTHING EXTRA FOR REBATING ETC. ............................................................. 9
22.0 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS .................................................................................. 9
23.0 SUBMISSION OF BILL ...................................................................................... 9
24.0 PROVISION FOR MULTIFARIOUS CHECKING OF WORK .................................. 11
25.0 DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD ............................................................................ 11
26.0 CLEARING, FILLING AND LEVELING OF SITE .................................................. 11
27.0 CONTRACTOR TO COMPLY ALL LAWS........................................................... 11
28.0 CONTRACTOR TO USE THE MATERIALS ONLY AFTER THE APPROVAL OF OWNER
11
29.0 COMPLIANCE OF ENTIRE PROVISIONS IS OBLIGATORY TO CONTRACTOR..... 12
30.0 GENERAL ...................................................................................................... 12
31.0 DELIVERY AND DOCUMENTS ......................................................................... 12
32.0 INCIDENTAL SERVICES .................................................................................. 12
33.0 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP GUARANTEE ...................................................... 13
34.0 WEATHER CONDITIONS ................................................................................. 13
35.0 TIME SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTING .............................................. 14
36.0 INSTRUCTIONS, DIRECTIONS AND CORRESPONDENCE ................................. 14
37.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL .................................................. 15
38.0 HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT ........................... 16
FORM NO: 02-0000-0021F2 REV1 All rights reserved

39.0 SUSPENSION OF WORKS ............................................................................... 16

40.0 INCOMING MATERIAL REPORT ...................................................................... 16
41.0 SECURITIES OF MATERIALS / EQUIPMENTS ON RENT .................................... 17
42.0 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL AT SITE: ............................................................. 17
43.0 SETTING OUT THE WORKS ............................................................................ 18
44.0 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY AND INSURANCE ................................................. 19
45.0 COMPLIANCE WITH LABOUR/INDUSTRIAL LAWS ........................................... 19
46.0 SECURITY ..................................................................................................... 20
47.0 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT DUE TO SUBMISSION OF FALSE/FORGED
DOCUMENT: .......................................................................................................... 21
48.0 TIME SCHEDULE ............................................................................................ 21
49.0 TERMS OF PAYMENT ..................................................................................... 21
50.0 DISPATCH, TRANSPORTATION/SHIPPING ........................................................ 24
51.0 WORK CONTRACT SERVICES ......................................................................... 24


1.0 INTRODUCTION:
1.1. Talcher Fertilizers Ltd. (TFL), hereinafter also referred to as “OWNER”, A joint venture
company of four major Public Sector Units – M/s. Gas Authority India Limited (GAIL),
M/s. Rastriya Chemicals & Fertilisers Ltd. (RCF), M/s. Coal India Ltd. (CIL) and M/s.
Fertilizers Corporation of India Ltd. (FCIL) has decided to build a world class Coal based
fertilizer complex. The fertilizer complex is to be built at Talcher, Angul District, Odisha
(India) and will consist of Coal Gasification Plant, Ammonia Plant and Urea Plant, along
with Offsite and Utility Plants. Talcher Fertilizers Ltd. intend to invite quotations from
eligible Contractors for Construction of Raw Water & Fire Water Reservoir and Pump
house & allied facilities at Talcher Fertilizers Ltd., Angul, Odisha.
1.2 Projects & Development India Ltd. (PDIL) has been retained as Consultant for providing
Engineering Consultancy Services and Project Management Services for the aforesaid
project.
2.0 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT SITE
A brief description of infrastructure at Talcher Fertiliser Plant Site is furnished

below:
 The proposed project will be located within the premises of existing closed coal
based Ammonia-Urea complex of FCI Ltd. Talcher Unit.
 The total land area of the site is 904.53 acres out of which lease hold land from
Government of Odisha is 894.207 acres and land purchased from private parties is
10.33 acres.
 The area is not falling under coal bearing zone up to a depth of 200-250 meter.
 Talcher site is located at Vikrampur in Angul district of Odisha on the Cuttack-
Sambalpur National Highway NH-42. NH-42 is passing at about 8 km from the site.
The nearest railway station is Talcher at about 7 km from the site. Nearest air port
Bhubaneswar is 150 km, 3 hours journey by road/ rail. Nearest sea port is
Paradeep, 200 km by rail/road from the site. Talcher is situated at 21º 10” N
Latitude and 82º 5” E Longitude.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1 Special Conditions of Contract shall be read in Conjunction with the General conditions
of Contract, specification of work, Drawings and any other documents forming part of this
Contract wherever the context so requires.
3.2 Notwithstanding the sub-division of the documents into these separate sections and
volumes, every part of each shall be deemed to be supplementary to and complementary
of every other part and shall be read with and into the Contract so far as it may be
practicable to do so.
3.3 Where any portion of the General Condition of Contract is repugnant to or at variance
with any provisions of the Special Conditions of Contract, unless a different intention

appears, the provisions of the special Conditions of Contract shall be deemed to over-
ride the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract and shall to the extent of such
repugnancy, or variations, prevail.
3.4 Wherever it is mentioned in the specifications that the Contractor shall perform certain
work or provide certain facilities, it is understood that the Contractor shall do so at his
cost and the value of contract shall be deemed to have included cost of such
performance and provisions, so mentioned.
3.5 The materials, design, and workmanship shall satisfy the relevant Indian Standards and
CPWD specifications, the Job Specifications contained herein and Codes referred to.
Where the job specification stipulate requirements in addition to those contained in the
standard codes and specifications, these additional requirements shall also be satisfied.
3.6 It will be the Contractor's responsibility to bring to the notice of Engineer-in-Charge any
irreconcilable conflict in the contract documents before starting the work (s) or making
the supply with reference which the conflict exists.
3.7 In the absence of any Specifications covering any material, design of work (s) the same
shall be performed / supplies / executed in accordance with Standard Engineering
Practice as per the instructions / directions of the Engineer-in-Charge, which will be
binding on the Contractor.
4.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
All materials (Equipments/Items, cement, reinforcement steel, structural steel etc.) required for
the completion of the work are to be supplied by the contractor unless mentioned otherwise.
The contractor shall have to make necessary arrangements for proper storage of materials
brought for the execution of work. The contractor is required to make all arrangements for
barricading the site as all the site for new buildings is in the existing township which is
occupied. Necessary arrangements for storage of material, preventing dust pollution, ensuring
proper barricading with entry gates and security arrangement to ensure no unauthorized entry
etc are in the scope of the contractor.
5.0 OWNERS OBLIGATIONS:
The owner’s obligations are limited to the following:

a) Handing over the site.
b) Supply of construction drawings.
c) Payment to the contractor for performance of work under the contract as per the terms
and conditions specified therein.
d) A piece of land for setting up temporary office, Godown, etc., if available.
6.0 POWER & WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER PURPOSES

Availability of water & power at site is very limited. Contractor shall have to make his own
arrangements for Construction work.
7.0 RATES
7.1 The rates shall be deemed to allow for all minor extras and constructional details which are
not specifically shown on drawings or given in the specifications but are essential in the
opinion of the Owner/ Consultant to the execution of work to conform to good workmanship
and sound engineering practice. The Owner / Consultant reserve the right to make any
minor changes during the execution without any extra payment.
7.2 The Owner / Consultant decision to classify any item ‘minor changes’, ‘minor extras’ and
‘constructional details’ shall be final conclusive and binding on the Contractor.
7.3 Rates quoted shall include for payment of royalties for obtaining earth, morrum, sand,
aggregates, stones, etc. Nothing extra shall be paid to the Contractor on this account.
7.4 Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary approach roads to the sites of
execution for taking his rigs, cranes & equipments. No extra claim in this regard shall be
entertained.
7.5 Schedule of rates submitted by the Tenderer shall be the true copy of the schedule of rates
enclosed with the tender documents
7.6 Without prejudice to stipulation in General Conditions of Contract, the Bidder should quote
firm prices inclusive of all taxes, duties and other levies on which no variation will be
allowed.
7.7 The quantities and items of work given in the Schedule of Rates are tentative and
approximate. The OWNER reserves the right to order variation of work during the
currency of the contract of its original contract value within the stipulated variation as per
clause no. 60.2 of GCC.
The contractor shall not be entitled to any increase whatsoever on the SOR rates on
account of any variation in the quantities and/or omission/addition of items vis-à-vis the
quantities mentioned in the “Schedule of Rates (Section VII)” as long as the contract
value finally determined on the basis of the certified final quantities and the contract item
rates is within the stipulated variation as per clause no. 60.2 of GCC.
8.0 SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 If specification for an item of work is not covered by CPWD/ BIS specifications or Technical
Specifications, the same shall be decided by the Owner/ Consultant and shall be binding on
the Contractor.
8.2 The Owner/ Consultant shall have the right to cause the Contractor to purchase and use
such materials of particular make or from a particular source which may in his opinion be
necessary for proper and reasonable compliance with the specifications and execution of
work.
8.3 (a) As and when required by the Owner/ Consultant, the Contractor shall provide all facilities
at site or at manufacture’s works or in approved laboratory for testing of materials and/or
workmanship. All the expenditure in respect of this shall be borne by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall, when required to do so by the Owner/Consultant, confirm that the
materials have been tested in accordance with requirements of the specifications.

(b) Neither the omission by the Owner/ Consultant to test the materials nor the production
of manufacturer(s) certificate, etc. shall affect the right of the Owner/Consultant to reject,
after delivery, the materials found not in accordance with the specifications.
9.0 GATE PASSES
All tools, plant and materials shall be brought by the Contractor to the works site through a
covering note to be submitted in 3 copies. One copy of the covering note will be delivered
to the security staff and one copy to the Owner/Consultant. The third copy shall be retained
by the Contractor. The Contractor shall follow all rules and regulations for entry / exit of
their men and materials in/from project site as framed by Owner/Consultant.
10.0 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
If at any time, the Owner/Consultant is of opinion that the Contractor has fallen behind the
approved construction schedule, the Owner/ Consultant may, without any cost to Owner/
Consultant, require the Contractor to take such steps as may be necessary to improve his
progress, especially require him to employ overtime operations, increase the number of
shifts, work on holidays and Sundays or increase the capacity of his construction plant and
equipment and require him to submit evidence demonstrating the manner in which the
Contractor proposes to comply with the construction schedule. Failure of the Contractor to
comply with the above will be considered a failure to execute the work with due diligence.
11.0 ISSUE OF WORKING DRAWINGS
Approved working drawings marked “Good for execution/ construction” shall be issued by
Owner/ Consultant to the Contractor progressively during the pendency of the contract.
Sufficient quantum of workings drawings will be issued at the beginning. The Contractor on
this account shall not be entitled to put forth any claim whatsoever.
12.0 COST OF TRANSPORT OF MATERIALS ISSUED BY OWNER
Cost of transport, loading, unloading etc. from Owner’s stores to work site etc., will be on
Contractor’s account.
13.0 ROLE OF OWNER/ CONSULTANT
The Owner/ Consultant reserve the right to suspend the work or part thereof at any time
and no claim whatsoever on this account shall be entertained. In case of any clarification
the Contractor may appeal to the Owner whose decision shall be final and binding
thereupon.
14.0 SERVING OF NOTICES
The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner/ Consultant the name, designation and address
of his authorized Agent for the purpose of service of notice(s) regarding all complaints,
communications and references and shall be deemed to have been duly given to the
Contractor if delivered to the Contractor or his authorized agent or left at or posted to the
address so given and shall be deemed to have reached such address in the ordinary

course of post or on the day on which they were so delivered or left. In the case of contract
by partnership firm, any change in the constitution of the firm shall be forthwith informed by
the Contractor to the Owner/ Consultant.
15.0 CONTRACTOR’S GUARANTEE
The Contractor agrees to give the guarantee of his works in the following manner which
shall remain valid till the validity of performance guarantee.
i. All materials incorporated in the work shall be new and both workmanship and
materials shall be of good quality.
ii. Should, at a subsequent date, any materials or fittings or workmanship or any

element be detected as of sub-standard quality he shall either remove the same and
shall re-do at his own cost or shall accept an equitable deduction in the contract price
should the Owner/ Consultant deemed it inexpedient to correct the work.
16.0 NOTHING EXTRA FOR ADVERSE SUB-SOIL CONDITION
There may be variation in nature of sub-soil both horizontally and vertically. The Contractor
shall have to take necessary precaution during excavation against any happening like
collapsing of sides etc. Any slip or fall in excavation shall have to be cleared by the
Contractor at his own cost. In case of excessive heaving, it shall have to be cut and refilled
with lean concrete by the Contractor at his own cost. The Contractor shall have to adopt
underwater work in case of occurrence of piping/quick conditions without any cost to
Owner/Consultant.
17.0 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE MANNER OF EXECUTION OF WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the manner and the method of executing the work.
The work shall be subject to the approval of Owner/ Consultant from time to time for
purposes of determination of the question whether the work is executed by the Contractor
in accordance with the contract.
18.0 NO WORK SHALL BE UNDERTAKEN WITHOUT APPROVED WORKING DRAWINGS
No work shall be undertaken at Site by the Contractor until detailed approved working
drawings marked “Good for execution/ construction” for the same is issued by Owner/
Consultant. Any work done without the aforesaid working drawing shall be at the
Contractor’s own risk and costs.
19.0 CONTRACTOR SHALL KEEP FOUNDATION PITS/TRENCHES DRY
The Contractor, during the pendency of contract, shall keep in dry condition of pits,
trenches, which are not yet back filled due to technical reasons, if not shall be Bail-
out/Pump-out all accumulation at his own cost for the safety of the structure / element.
During pumping, the Contractor shall have to ensure that ‘Loss of Ground’ does not occur.
Other approved methods shall be undertaken by the Contractor to avoid ‘Loss of Ground’ if
occurred, at his own cost.

20.0 NOTHING EXTRA FOR INTRICATE CONCRETE SHUTTERING OR REINFORCEMENT

WORK
Nothing extra shall be paid for any intricate concrete, shuttering or reinforcement work for
foundations of equipment and machinery and for other foundation/superstructure works or
for any delay inherent in concreting in small and thin sections in concrete or RCC works
etc.
21.0 NOTHING EXTRA FOR REBATING ETC.
Nothing extra shall be paid in concrete/RCC works for all rebating, chamfering, grooving,
sinking, trotting weathering, moulding, etc. to accord with the details shown on the working
drawings.
22.0 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
22.1 In case of execution of massive concrete elements both in foundation and in

superstructure and in some other locations as would be permitted except where specified
in the working drawings, the work shall be carried out in one single operation without any
break in concreting within time limit that would be specified by the Owner / Consultant
without any additional cost to Owner/ Consultant.
22.2 All specified construction joints, either horizontal or vertical, in any element of concrete
member shall be provided with shear keys of such dimensions as would be determined by
the Owner/Consultant. Before adopting the next operation for the other half of the element
these shear keys along with the entire surface of the joint shall be roughened and
deepened to above 20 mm by chipping, washing and cleaning thoroughly. The Contractor
shall provide cement slurry in sufficient quantity over the cleaned surface for proper bond
as per the direction of Owner/Consultant. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any
extra/payment; on this account.
23.0 SUBMISSION OF BILL
Contractor is to submit the bills and record of measurements in three (3) copies on
approved proforma of Owner for works executed by him.
23.1 FOR R/A BILLS:
Contractor is to submit the bills and record of measurements complete in all respect duly
certified by Owner/Consultant in three copies on approved proforma of Owner for works
executed by him progressively.
23.2 MEASURMENT OF WORKS
Measurement of work shall be made in the units mentioned in the schedule of rates. The
abbreviations used in the schedule of rates are mentioned in Schedule of Rates.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall, except as otherwise stated ascertain and determine by

measurement the value of Work done, in accordance with the Contract and as per actual

Work done. The Engineer-in-Charge shall, when he requires any part or parts of the Works
to be measured, give notices to the Contractor's authorized agent or representative who
shall forthwith attend or send a qualified agent to assist the Engineer-in-Charge in making
such measurement and shall furnish all particulars required by either of them. Should the
Contractor not attend or neglect or omit to send such representative then the measurement
made by the Engineer- in-Charge shall be taken to be the correct measurement of the Work.
For all measurements, figured dimensions given in the drawings shall be followed.
Measurement of all hidden items shall be carried out by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
Contractor or his representative who attends may at the time of measurement take such
notes and measurements as he may desire.
Where Works have to be measured for any purpose whatsoever, it shall be in accordance
with item specifications as per relevant Indian Standards unless otherwise specifically
indicated in the Contract Specifications. All measurements will be recorded in metric units
only. In case of absence of mode of measurement of any item not covered by both the
methods mentioned above, the Engineer-in-Charge's decision shall be final and binding. The
required number of bills, registers, bill forms, level/field books, materials/ account registers,
testing registers, site order books and any other stationary item pertaining to this contract
shall be printed and provided for by the contractor, at his own cost in the format prescribed
and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge in writing. The Measurement book will have three
copies in different colour pages and the book will be in measurement book format in a bound
form and pages will be printed so that proper referring and record of complete measurement
is maintained. Original sheet will be retained in the book and will be returned to Owner on
completion of Work.
23.3 DISPUTE IN MODE OF MEASUREMENT
Where Works have to be measured for any purpose whatsoever, it shall be in accordance
with item specifications as per relevant Indian Standards unless otherwise specifically
indicated in the Contract Specifications. All measurements will be recorded in metric units
only. In case of absence of mode of measurement of any item not covered by both the
methods mentioned above, the Engineer-in-Charge's decision shall be final and binding. The
required number of bills, registers, bill forms, level/field books, materials/ account registers,
testing registers, site order books and any other stationary item pertaining to this contract
shall be printed and provided for by the contractor, at his own cost in the format prescribed
and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge in writing. The Measurement Sheet will have three
copies in different colour pages and will be printed so that proper referring and record of
complete measurement is maintained. Original sheet will be retained in the book and will be
returned to Owner on completion of Work.
23.4 SUBMISSION OF FINAL BILL
The final bill complete in all respect shall be submitted after certified completion of work.
The bill should be accompanied with the following documents:
i. Job completion certificate.

ii. No claim certificate on TFL’s prescribed proforma.
iii. Site clearance certificate.

iv. Performance guarantee duly amended to cover certified maintenance period.

v. Indemnity certificate towards labours payment and all other statutory payments.
No claim shall be entertained after receipt of final bill. Settlement of final bill shall be made
within 1 (one) month period subject to furnishing of all required documents / clarification
and extension of time, if any, by TFL’s competent authority.
In case any claim with regard to the wages of any labour employed by Contractor for
the subject job is pending/ reported, TFL shall be fully entitled to withhold payment
of final bill pending finalisation of such claims.
24.0 PROVISION FOR MULTIFARIOUS CHECKING OF WORK
Before commencement of the actual concreting operation the position and layout of
foundations, pedestals, inserts, pockets, recess, reinforcement and form work shall be
checked repeatedly by Owner/Consultant. No claim whatsoever shall be entertained on
this account. The level of foundations shall be accurately maintained as shown in the
drawings or as directed by the Owner/Consultant. No padding, plastering or chipping shall
be allowed for achieving the results.
25.0 DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD
Defect Liability Period shall be 12 months from the date of certified Final
completion.
26.0 CLEARING, FILLING AND LEVELING OF SITE
The site shown on the layout plan shall be cleared by the Contractor of all obstructions,
loose stones, materials, rubbish of all kinds of bushes, trees, grass as well as brush wood.
All holes/hollow, whether originally existing or produced by removal of loose stones or
brush wood, shall be carefully filled up with earth, well rammed and levelled off as directed
by the Owner/ Consultant. The Contractor will not be entitled to any payment in his regard.
27.0 CONTRACTOR TO COMPLY ALL LAWS
27.1 The contract shall be governed by the law in force in the Republic of India.
27.2 The Contractor shall comply with all laws etc. The Contractor shall be responsible to secure
compliance with the Central and States Laws as well as the Rules, Regulations, by-laws
and orders of the legal authorities and statutory bodies which are in force or as may be in
force from time to time. He shall give to the Municipal Corporation Committees, police and
other relevant authorities all such notices, etc. as may be required by law and obtain all
requisite license for temporary constructions, enclosures, etc. and pay all fees, taxes and
such other dues or charges which may be leviable on account of any of his operations in
executing the works under this contract. Owner/Consultant shall not pay anything extra to
the Contractor on this account. The Contractor shall also make good at his own cost, any
damage done by him to any adjoining property, during execution of work.
28.0 CONTRACTOR TO USE THE MATERIALS ONLY AFTER THE APPROVAL OF OWNER

The Contractor shall use the materials only after the approval of Owner/ Consultant, before
incorporation of the same in the works.
29.0 COMPLIANCE OF ENTIRE PROVISIONS IS OBLIGATORY TO CONTRACTOR
It shall always prevail, unless otherwise specifically stated, that the entire provisions of the
Tender Document have been accepted for compliance by the Contractor without any
reservation.
30.0 GENERAL
30.1 The location and general information regarding site on which the proposed work is to be
executed is furnished in Attachment-I hereto.
30.2 Contractor shall acquaint himself with access to site, availability of local facilities such as
railway siding, transport facilities, materials and labour and shall provide suitable
allowances in his Bid, Contractor’s quoted price being firm, it should take into account all
expenses likely to arise in this regard.
30.3 Contractor shall be deemed to have visited site and familiarized himself thoroughly with
site conditions before submitting his Bid. Non-familiarity with site conditions will not be
considered a reason either for extra claims or for not carrying out work in strict conformity
with drawings and specifications.
31.0 DELIVERY AND DOCUMENTS
Delivery of the Goods shall be made by the Contractor in accordance with the terms
specified by the Owner/Consultant in the schedule of requirements in Technical
Specifications. and the special conditions of purchase, if any and the Goods shall remain
at the risk of the Contractor until Delivery has been completed.
32.0 INCIDENTAL SERVICES
32.1 As specified in the special conditions of purchase, the Contractor may be required to
provide any or all of the following services:
i) Supervision of on-Site assembly and/or of the supplied Goods.
ii) Performance or supervision or maintenance and/ or repair of the supplied Goods,

for a period of time agreed by the parties, provided that this service shall not relieve
the Contractor of any warranty obligations under this Purchase Order, and
32.2 Price charged by the Contractor for the preceding incidental services, if not included in the
contract price for the Goods shall be agreed upon in advance by the parties and shall not
exceed the prevailing rates charged to other parties by the Contractor for similar services.
32.3 At the request of Consultant or Owner, Contractor shall at his expense, dismiss from work
and replace any such employee as Owner/ Consultant, may deem incompetent or
careless or whose continued employment is deemed inimical to the interest of the Owner/
Consultant or against public interest.

32.4 Other conditions of work at Site shall be mutually discussed and settled.
33.0 WORK AND WORKMANSHIP GUARANTEE
33.1 Contractor shall make arrangements to provide at no extra charge all temporary
approaches to and within the site, after obtaining prior approval of Owner/
Consultant of the layout of such approaches.
33.2 To determine the acceptable standard of workmanship, Owner/ Consultant may order
Contractor to execute certain portions of work and services such as wall, flooring, joinery,
finishes, roads and the like under the close supervision of Owner/Consultant. On
approval, these items shall be labeled as guiding samples and work shall be executed to
conform to these samples. These samples shall be prepared at the cost of Contractor.
33.3 Workmanship shall be of best possible quality and all the work shall be carried out by
skilled workmen except for those which normally require unskilled persons. If the laws of
local government, municipal or other authorities require employment of licensed or
registered workmen of various trades, Contractor shall arrange to have the work done by
such registered or licensed persons.
33.4 Workmanship shall be in accordance with the specifications, standards and codes which
are part of this tender as well as the established engineering practices for this type of
work. For any portion of work executed by Contractor and considered defective by
Owner/ Consultant, the Contractor shall have to take necessary remedial measures, to
the complete satisfaction of Owner/Consultant, to make the defective good in order at his
own cost without any liability to Owner/Consultant.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper workmanship and shall not be relieved
of his obligation in this regard just because no objection was raised by Owner/ Consultant
during the progress of work. The workmanship guarantee period will be 12 months from
the date of final completion as a whole, certified by Owner.
If any defects are found due to bad workmanship during this period, the Contractor shall
undertake to rectify the same at his cost, most expeditiously. The workmanship guarantee
for rectified portion of work shall commence from the date of rectification for a subsequent
period of 12 months. The decision of Owner/Consultant regarding bad workmanship shall
be final binding and conclusive.
The Contractor shall be required to submit the performance guarantee accordingly.
34.0 WEATHER CONDITIONS
Owner/Consultant may order Contractor to suspend any work which in the opinion of
Owner/Consultant may be subject to damage by prevailing weather conditions. No claim
whatsoever on this account shall be entertained.
“It is presumed that the Contractor has familiarized himself with the weather conditions
prevailing in the area therefore in such weather parameters if it appears to the Engineer –in
–charge (EIC) that certain weather condition may damage the work or specified quality of
the work can be achieved without stoppage of the work, the EIC in such conditions may

require the Contractor to stop the work till such time as he thinks fit and appropriate. It is
understood by the contractor that no compensation will be admissible on this count.
However in exceptional circumstances at the recommendation of the EIC,
Consultant/owner may grant reasonable extension of Time.
35.0 TIME SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTING
35.1 Time schedule network/ bar chart.
35.1.1 Together with the Work Order/ Contract confirmation, Contractor shall submit to Owner/
Consultant, his time schedule regarding the documentation, supply of materials as well as
information about of his Subcontracts to be placed with their parties, including the dates
on which Contractor intends to issue such Subcontracts.
35.1.2 The time schedule will be in the form of a network or a bar chart clearly indicating all main
or key events regarding documentation, supply of materials, delivery and site fabrication,
erection, inspection, testing and completion.
35.1.3 The original issue and subsequent revisions of Contractor's time schedule and or Sub-
contractor's time schedules shall be sent to Consultant in two copies (of which one shall
be in Soft copy) and two copies to Owner.
35.1.4 The time schedule network/bar chart shall be updated at least every fortnight.
35.2 Progress Trend Chart/ Monthly Report
35.2.1 Contractor shall report weekly to Owner/ Consultant the progress of the execution of Work
Order/ Contract and achievement of targets set out in time bar chart.
35.2.2 The progress will be expressed in percentages shown in the progress trend chart.
35.2.3 The first issue of the progress trend chart will be forwarded together with the time bar
chart along with the Work Order confirmation.
35.2.4 The fortnightly reporting will bear the updating of the progress trend chart.
35.2.5 All reporting will be done on e-mails and hard copies wherever required will follow.
36.0 INSTRUCTIONS, DIRECTIONS AND CORRESPONDENCE
36.1 The work described in Work Order is to be executed according to the standards, data
sheets, tables, Specifications and Drawings attached hereto and/or enclosed with the
Work Order itself and according to all conditions both general and specific enclosed with
the Work Order, unless any or all of them shall have been modified or cancelled in
writing as a whole or in part.
i) All instructions and orders to Contractor shall, excepting what is herein provided, be
given by Owner/Consultant.
ii) All the work shall be carried out under the direction of and to the satisfaction of
Owner/Consultant.

iii) All communications including technical/commercial clarifications and/or comments

shall bear reference to the Work Order /Contract.
iv) Invoice for payment against Work Order /Contract shall be addressed to Owner/
Consultant.
v) The WORK Order/Contract number shall be shown on all invoices, communications,

packing lists, containers and bills of lading etc.
36.2 All correspondence from Contractor shall be forwarded in duplicate (2 copies) to

CONSULTANT and 02 copies to OWNER at following addresses:
CONSULTANT OWNER
Mr. R.R.Kumar/ Kailash Joshi Mr. Manas K Mahapatra
Addl. General Manager & HOD (PM) DGM (TFL)
Tel No. : 9818804063
Mob. : +91 /9718762091 E-mail : mm02484@gail.co.in
Tel no. : +91-120-2529842/43
Extn. 304/314
E-mail : rrkumar@pdilin.com /
kjoshi@pdilin.com
36.3 Correspondence on technical and commercial matters shall be dealt with in separate
letters for each Work Order /Contract and each copy of the letter shall be complete with all
Annexure. Wherever possible, correspondence should be through e-mail to the above
personnel so as to save time.
36.4 Correspondence for expediting and inspection shall be done directly with inspector with a
copy to consultant & owner at above mentioned address.
37.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL
37.1 After the award of the contract detailed quality assurance programme shall be prepared by
the Contractor for the execution of contract for various works which will be mutually
discussed and agreed to.
37.2 The Contractor shall establish document and maintain an effective quality assurance
system outlined in recognized codes.
37.3 Quality Assurance System plans/procedures of the Contractor shall be furnished in the
form of a QA manual after award of job. This document should cover details of the
personnel responsible for the Quality Assurance, plans or procedures to be followed for
quality control in respect of Design, Engineering, Procurement, Supply, Installation,
Testing and completion in all respect till final acceptance by Owner. The quality assurance
system should indicate organizational approach for quality control and quality assurance
of the construction activities, at all stages of work at site.
37.4 The Owner/ Consultant or their representative shall reserve the right to inspect/ witness,
review any or all stages of work at shop/site as deemed necessary for quality assurance.

37.5 The Contractor has to ensure the deployment of quality Assurance and Quality Control
Engineer(s) depending upon the quantum of work.
This QA/QC group shall be fully responsible to carry out the work as per standards and all
code requirements. In case Engineer-in-charge feels that Contractor's QA/QC Engineer(s)
are incompetent or insufficient, Contractor has to deploy other experienced Engineer(s) as
per site requirement and to the full satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.
37.6 In case Contractor fails to follow the instructions of Engineer-in-charge with respect to
above clauses, next payment due to him shall not be released unless until he complies
with the instructions to the full satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge.
37.7 The Contractor shall adhere to the approved quality assurance system
38.0 HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT
The Contractor, during entire duration of the Contract, shall adhere to HSE requirement as
per Specification enclosed in the Bidding Document as per Attachment-I (Annexure to
Special Conditions of Contract)
39.0 SUSPENSION OF WORKS
a) The Contractor shall, on receipt of the order in writing of the Engineer-in-Charge,

suspend the progress of the Works or any part thereof for such time in such manner
or the Engineer-in-Charge may consider necessary for any of the following reasons.
i) On account of any default on part of the Contractor, or;
ii) For proper execution of the Works or part thereof for reasons other than the
default of the Contractor, or;
i) For safety of the Works or part thereof.
The Contractor shall during such suspensions properly protect and secure the Works
to the extent necessary and carry out the instructions given in that behalf by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
b) If the suspension is ordered for reasons (ii) & (iii) in sub-para (a) above:
i) The Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time equal to the period of
every such suspension.
ii) If the suspension is ordered for reasons (I) in sub-Para (a) above, the Engineer-
in-Charge shall without prejudice to any other right of remedy be at liberty to
forfeit the Earnest Money absolutely.
40.0 INCOMING MATERIAL REPORT
All material entering the site shall be properly recorded by contractor’s representative with
detail of challan, bill and quantity.
a) All equipment shall be inspected and tested as per an agreed quality Assurance Plan
before the same is packed and dispatched from the Contractor's Works. The Contractor
shall carry out tests as specified/ directed by Engineer.

b) Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary to meet requirements of
Local Authorities, Municipal or other statutory laws/ bye-laws in force. No extra shall be
paid for these.
c) The Engineer may, at his sole discretion, carry out inspection at different stages during
manufacturing and final testing after manufacturing.
d) Approvals or passing of any inspection by the engineer or his authorized representative
shall not however, prejudice the right of the Engineer to reject the plan if it does not
comply with the specification when erected or give complete satisfaction in service.
e) All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and the whole work again
tested to meet the requirements of the specifications, at the cost of the contractor.
Contractor has to obtain a performance certificate/approval for the complete layout of
piping/equipment erected.
41.0 SECURITIES OF MATERIALS / EQUIPMENTS ON RENT

Contractor shall be solely responsible for the security of the material at site and TFL/
Consultant shall not be responsible for any loss/theft of the materials.
a) Materials required for the works, whether brought by the Contractor shall be stored by the
Contractor only at places approved by the Technical consultant/Project-in-charge, as storage
and safe custody of material shall be responsibility of the Contractor.
b) TFL,’s officials concerned with the Contract shall be entitled at any time to inspect and
examine any materials intended to be used in or on the works, either on the site or at factory
or workshop or other place(s) where such materials are assembled, fabricated,
manufactured or at any place(s) where these are lying or from which these are being
obtained and the Contractor shall give such facilities as may be required for such inspection
and examination.
c) The contractor shall be the OWNER of all bought out items and materials and shall be
responsible for the safety, security, insurance and care and custody of all the materials lying
at site. TFL will have lien on all the items including those brought by the contractor for the
purpose of Erection, testing, and commissioning of the work. For all Equipments/Materials,
the title of Ownership shall pass on to at the time of acceptance of entire work.
However, in case of termination of contract the transfer of title shall pass automatically to
OWNER.
d) CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT used by the CONTRACTOR and its SUB-CONTRACTORS

in connection with the execution of works shall remain the property of CONTRACTOR or its
SUB- CONTRACTORS. All duties, levies, taxes etc payable on account of
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR
shall indemnify the OWNER on this count.
42.0 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL AT SITE:
List of persons employed by Contractor for the subject work mentioning there residential
address shall be submitted to TFL. In case of any revision, the same shall be informed to

TFL from time-to-time. If required necessary verification from Police / Gram Pradhan shall
have to be submitted by the contractor.
The Contractor shall be directly responsible for any/all disputes arising between him and
his personnel and keep indemnified against all losses, damage and claims arising thereof.
Within the TFL’s premises, the Contractor’s personnel shall not do any private work other
than their normal duties.
The personnel engaged by the Contractor shall be subject to security check by the TFL’s
security staff while entering/leaving the premises. The contractor & his personnel shall be
required to follow the rules and regulations of TFL in force from time-to-time. The
contractor may also be required to provide photo passes to the personnel required by him,
for security and safety reasons and furnished the details of the same when asked for.
No other person except Contractor’s authorized representative shall be allowed to enter

TFL premises Contractor shall also not entertain any outsider or extend any service
beyond TFL’s premises. Entry of Contractor’s persons shall be regulated with proper
identity/gate pass.
Contractor shall be fully responsible for theft, burglary, fire or any mischievous deeds by
his staff and any loss to TFL shall be recovered from the immediate bill of the Contractor.
Contractor shall provide all necessary tools and tackles, equipments, safety belt, wheel
burrow, scaffolding, ladders, drilling m/c & safety equipment etc. required to carry out job
at his cost and material used by Contractor shall be of standard make and approval of
Engineer-In-Charge shall be taken for the same.
TFL also reserves the right to ask the Contractor to remove particular person(s) from site
with immediate effect if in the opinion of TFL, his behaviour/ performance is not up to the
mark and/or found indulging in unlawful activities, Contractor shall immediately comply
with such instructions.
It will be the responsibility of contractor’s engineer to ensure that their personnel behave in
a proper manners and behaviour and not to undergo the argument with the employees. It
will be the responsibility of the Contractor’s Engineer to deal with such complaints or co-
ordinate with the TFL Engineer.
43.0 SETTING OUT THE WORKS
The Technical consultant/Project-in-charge shall supply dimensioned drawings, levels and

other information necessary to enable the Contractor to set out the works and the
Contractor shall set out the works and be responsible for the accuracy of the same. He
shall rectify at his own cost and to the satisfaction of the Technical consultant/Project-in-
charge any error found at any stage which may arise through in accurate setting out
unless such error is based on incorrect data furnished in writing by the Technical
consultant/Project-in-charge, in which case the cost of rectification shall be borne by the
TFL. The Contractor shall protect and preserve all bench marks used in setting out the
works till end of the Defects Liability Period unless the Technical consultant/Project-in-
charge direct their earlier removal.

44.0 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY AND INSURANCE
After award of work, the contractor is required to take Workmen compensation policy and
Comprehensive all risk policy for the works for the full duration of the contract and for
periods when the contract is extended for any reason
45.0 COMPLIANCE WITH LABOUR/INDUSTRIAL LAWS

RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR AND COMPLIANCE WITH LABOUR/
INDUSTRIAL LAWS:
a. The contractor shall have his own PF code no. with the RPFC as required under
Employee PF & Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 and ESI code No. required under
Employee State Insurance Act 1948 before commencement of work.
b. The contractors shall periodically submit the challans / receipts / proof for the depositing
PF contribution with RPFC and ESIC.
c. The contractor is require to obtain labour license under the provisions of Contract
Labour (R&A) Act, 1970 from the office of ALC (Central), Ministry of Labour, Govt. of
India.
d. The contractor is liable to abide by all necessary licenses / permissions from the
concerned authorities as provided under the various labor legislations
e. The contractor shall discharge obligations as provided under various statutory enactment
including the employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952, Contract
Labour (R&A) Act, 1970, Minimum Wages Act, 1948, Payment of wages act 1936,
Workman Compensation Act 1923, Employees’ State Insurance Act 1948 and other
relevant acts, rules and regulations enforced from time to time.
f. The contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment of wages and other dues to the
personnel, if any, deployed by him latest by 7th day of the subsequent month.
g. The contractor shall be solely responsible and indemnify the TFL against all charges,
dues, claim etc. arising out of the disputes relating to the dues and employment of
personnel, if any, deployed by him.
h. The contractor shall indemnify TFL against all losses or damages, if any, caused to it on
account of acts of the personnel, if any, deployed by him.
i. All personnel deployed by the contractor should be on the rolls of the contractor.
j. The contractor shall ensure regular and effective supervision and control of the personnel,
if any, deployed by him and gives suitable direction for undertaking the contractual
obligations.
k. The personnel to be deputed by the contractor shall observe all security, fire and safety
rules of TFL while at the site. His Work/Services will be supervised by the supervisors of
contractor. Contractor has to be strictly adhere to guidance, instruction when required.
l. Contractor shall provide proper identification cards for his employees to be deputed by him
for Work/Services, duly signed by the contractor or authorized person on behalf of

contractor. Also the contractor should obtain entry passes from Security Dept. through
OPERATION-IN-CHARGE for his employees.
m. Contractor has to deploy the personnel with no past criminal records. Reformed people,
names of such persons should be clearly indicated in case of. Also the contractor has to
provide police verification for all the persons deployed by him.
n. While confirming to any of these conditions, the contractor should ensure that no law of
state regarding labour, their welfare, conduct etc, is violated. The contractor shall
indemnify TFL for any action brought against him for violation, non-compliance of any act,
rules & regulation of centre / state / local statutory authorities.
o. All existing and amended safety / fire rules of TFL are to be followed at the work site.
p. Contractor shall ensure payment of wages to the personnel employed and meet all
statutory obligations of payment as per Minimum Wages act 1948 and payment of wages
Act 1936.
q. Special safety equipment e.g. safety belts, helmets, hand gloves, goggles, safety shoes
etc shall be provided to the personnel engaged by the contractor.
r. Suitable site office space may be provided by TFL if required and available.
s. In case of accident, injury and death caused to the employee of the contractor while
executing the Work under the contract, the contractor shall be solely responsible for
payment of adequate compensation, insurance money etc. to the next kith & kin of injured
/ diseased. Contractor shall indemnify TFL from such liabilities.
t. The contractor shall also undertake to obtain necessary group insurance coverage
covering all risks connected with the job to be undertaken by him under the contract from
insurance company and pay the premium accordingly.
u. The contractor shall not employ or permit to be employed any person suffering from any
contagious, loathsome or infectious disease. The contractor shall get examined his
employees / persons deployed from a civil govt. doctor.
v. No employees or person of contractor (including contractor) be allowed to consume

alcoholic drinks or any narcotics within the plant premises. If found under the influence of
above, the owner / TFL will terminate the contract immediately and may refer the case to
police.
w. The contractor hereby agrees to indemnify owner / TFL and harmless from all claims,
demands, actions, cost and charges etc brought by any court, competent authority /
statutory authorities against owner/TFL.
46.0 SECURITY
The contractor shall have total responsibility for all equipment and materials in his custody
stores loose, semi-assembled and/or erected by him at site. All materials of the contract
shall enter or leave the site only with the written permission of Engineer-in-Charge.

47.0 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT DUE TO SUBMISSION OF FALSE/FORGED

DOCUMENT:
a) Bidder is required to furnish the complete and correct information / documents required for
evaluation of their bids. If the information / documents forming basis of evaluation is found to
be false / forged, the same shall be considered adequate ground for rejection of the Bids
and forfeiture of Earnest Money Deposit.
b) In case, the information / document furnished by the contractor forming basis of evaluation
of his bid is found to be false /forged after the award of the contract, TFL shall have full right
to terminate the contract and get the remaining job executed at the risk & cost of such
contractor without any prejudice to other rights available to TFL under the contract such as
forfeiture of Security Deposit, withholding of payment etc.
c) In case this issue of submission of false document comes to the notice after execution of
work, TFL shall have full right to forfeit any amount due to the contractor along with forfeiture
of Security Deposit furnished by the contractor.
Further, such contractor / bidder shall be blacklisted for future business with TFL/
Consultant
48.0 TIME SCHEDULE

48.1 Bidder shall be required to complete the WORK under the CONTRACT so as to
achieve the GUARANTEED COMPLETION DATE in accordance with the following:
20 (Twenty) Months from Effective Date of

Completion Period
Contract
48.2 The “Effective Date of Contract” shall be the date of issuance of FOA (Fax of
Acceptance) by the Owner.
48.3 The basic consideration and essence of the Contract is the strict adherence to the
Time schedules for performing the specified works as stipulated in the Contract.
49.0 TERMS OF PAYMENT

Following terms of payment shall be released after submitting valid Tax Invoice. GST no. of
Contractor as well as Owner should be mentioned by Contractor on Invoice.
49.1 Mobilization Advance: Not Applicable

49.2 Running on Account Payment
A) For Civil & Structural Works: 90% against the value of actual work done shall be paid
against running bills certified by OWNER/CONSULTANT after recovery of following

payments. Balance 10% shall be treated as retention money and shall be released at the
time of settlement of final bill
a) Value of chargeable materials issued by OWNER/CONSULTANT, if any

b) Mobilization advances if any.
c) Statutory deductions like income tax, etc. as applicable.
d) Any other recovery if becomes due.
e) Value of Chargeable Service provided by owner/Consultant, if any
Payment shall not be released against 1st R/A bill until submission of following documents
by contractor to the indenting department.
1. Financial Guarantee for Performance

2. Labour License (as per statutory requirements)
3. EPF Code Registration number
4. Insurance Contractor All Risk (CAR) Policy
5. Workmen compensation policy
- Balance 10% (Retention Money) shall be released along with final bill.
B) SUPPLY PORTION (Other than Civil items)
a) 10 % upon submission of un-priced copy of P.O. and Approval of QAP/

Drawings/documents in Code-1.
b) 70 % upon receipt of material at site and Preliminary inspection /acceptance of

equipment/ materials and test certificates.
c) 10% after successful completion of the Installation/erection.
- Balance 10% (Retention Money) shall be released along with final bill.
49.3 Payment in RA bills shall based on quantity of work executed at site (as per the item of work)
& verified by Owner/ Consultant as per the item rate in work orders. Owner/ Consultant is
authorized to allow part rate/ reduced rate for any item of work. The engineer in charge TFL/
Consultant shall specify the reason for the part rate payment in the RA bill. Payment has
been made in RA bill for any item of work but later on some defect is noticed Owner/
Consultant is authorized to disallow the payment in successive bill till rectification of the work.
49.4. RELEASE OF 1st R/A BILL
Payment will be released against 1st R/A bill only on submission of following documents by
contractor to the EIC
i. Financial Guarantee for Performance
ii. Labour License (as per statutory requirements)
iii. EPF Code Registration number with RPFC/ARPFC
iv. Insurance Contractor All Risk (CAR) Policy
v. Workmen compensation policy
49.5 Balance 10% (Retention Money) shall be released along with final bill subject to the
following:

The status of the contractor as L-1 bidder shall be ensured keeping in view the final
executed Bill of Quantity. All the valid tenders considered in evaluation at the time of award
of work shall be re-evaluated at the respective quoted rate with a view to assess whether
L-1 contractor’s price of completed works continues to be the lowest. In case after such re-
evaluation, final contract value is not the lowest, the contractor shall reimburse to Owner the
difference in the amount between the re-evaluated tender and the lowest tendered amount.
This difference of amount shall be adjusted from their final bill.
If the amount recoverable exceeds the amount payable in final bill, the balance amount shall
be recovered by the Owner, from the retention money and or performance bank
guarantee/any other moneys or bank guarantees available with the owner for any other job
being done by the contractor. The contractor shall restore the performance guarantee to the
requisite value to the extent of 10% of contract price in such case where recovery is
required to be affected by the encashment of full amount or a part of the performance bank
guarantee as soon as the contractor receives such intimation from the owner/ consultant.
49.6 The contractor shall raise invoices on fortnightly basis. Bidder shall enclose all documents
as per check list issued by PMC/TFL. However, EIC may authorize payments for bills more
frequently i.e. periodicity of less than fortnight, depending on site requirements.
After receipt of complete RA Bill as per terms and conditions of the contract and duly
certified by Engineer-in-Charge (EIC) / PMC, on-account payment equivalent to seventy
percent (70%) of the net payable certified amount of the RA Bill will be released to the
Contractor within a period of seven (07) working days from submission of certified bill by
PMC to TFL. The balance amount will be released within a period of 15 days from
submission of certified bill by PMC to TFL.
49.7 The final bill complete in all respect shall be submitted by the contractor within three (3)
months of certified completion of work. The bill should be accompanied along with the
following documents.
1. Job completion certificate.
2. No claim certificate on Owner’s prescribed proforma.
3. Site clearance certificate.
4. Performance bank guarantee duly amended to cover certified maintenance period.
5. Material reconciliation statement (statement of material issued by Owner or
consultant to be got certified from stores dept.).
6. Indemnity certificate towards labour payment and all statutory payments.
No claim shall be entertained after receipt of final bill. Settlement of final bill shall be
made subject to settlement of all disputes and furnishing of all required
documents/clarifications and grant of extension of time, if any, by Owner’s competent
authority.
49.8 Price
The prices shall be firm during the entire contract period including all extensions
granted on whatsoever ground may be.
The Order Value/ Contract Value shall be subject to Price Reduction Clause.

49.9 Issue of Credit Note or Invoice of reduced value for PRS Clause
PRS is the reduction in the consideration/ contract value for the goods/ services
covered under this contract. In case of delay in supply/ execution of contract, supplier/
contractor/ service provider should raise invoice for reduced value as per Price
Reduction Schedule Clause (PRS clause). If supplier/ contractor/ service provider has
raised theꞏ invoice for full value, then supplier/ contractor/ service provider should issue
Credit Note towards the applicable PRS amount with applicable taxes.
In such cases if supplier/ contractor/ service provider fails to submit the invoice with
reduced value or does not issue credit note as mentioned above, TFL will release the
payment to supplier/ contractor/ service provider after giving effect of the PRS clause
with corresponding reduction of taxes charged on vendor's invoice, to avoid delay in
delivery/collection of material.
In case any financial implication arises on TFL due to issuance of invoice without
reduction in price or non-issuance of Credit Note, the same shall beꞏ to the account of
supplier/ contractor/ service provider. TFL shall be entitled to deduct/ set off/ recover
such GST amount (CGST & SGST/UTGST or IGST) together with penalties and
interest, if any, against any amounts paid or becomes payable by TFL in future to the
Supplier/Contractor under this contract or under any other contract. "
50.0 DISPATCH, TRANSPORTATION/SHIPPING
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for dispatch of EQUIPMENT by sea/ rail/ road/air

after proper packing and protection. The consignment shall be dispatched after inspection
by OWNER unless otherwise agreed to in writing however such inspection shall not
constitute waiver of the CONTRACTOR’s obligations, responsibilities for the EQUIPMENT
including care, safety and preservation in any way and manner and the CONTRACTOR’s
responsibility and obligation in this behalf shall continue till ACCEPTANCE OF ENTIRE
WORK
The Consignee for all bought-out material shall be CONTRACTOR.
50.1 There will be no materials under the scope of Contract which will be consigned to Owner,
unless otherwise specifically mentioned elsewhere in the tender. The Owner will not issue
/ provide Road permits/e-way bill to the Contactor except in respect of material directly
purchased by the Owner.
51.0 WORK CONTRACT SERVICES
51.1 The award of work shall be on ‘Work Contract Service’ basis. The contractor shall be
responsible for payment of any tax levied on the transfer of property and goods involved
with relevant GST act and rules made there under including amendments, if any. The
contractor shall be liable to ensure to have registered with the respective tax authorities
and to submit self-attested copy of such registration certificate(s) and any taxes/ duties/
levies being charged by the Contractor would be claimed by issuing proper tax
invoice/challan indicating details/ elements of all taxes charged and necessary

requirements as prescribed under the respective tax laws and also to mention correct and
valid registration number(s) on all tax invoices raised to TFL.
51.2 No variation on account of taxes and duties, statutory or otherwise, shall be payable by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR except for GST. However, any statutory variation for GST shall
be payable up to GUARANTEED COMPLETION DATE against documentary evidence. Any
reduction in the amount of GST resulting from a reduction in the rate of GST or remission or
exemption from GST with respect to Goods and Services provided to the OWNER shall be
refundable to the OWNER at actual within the GUARANTEED COMPLETION DATE and
also during the delayed contractual Project completion, if any.
51.3 Any new taxes, duties, cess, levies notified or imposed after the submission of Bid but
before GUARANTEED COMPLETION DATE shall be to OWNER’s Account.
51.4 In case the GUARANTEED COMPLETION DATE is extended for reasons solely
attributable to OWNER, then any increase on account of statutory changes in GST
during the extended period shall be borne by OWNER. Further, any new taxes, duties,
cess, levies notified or imposed after the submission of Price Bid /Supplementary Price
Bid during such the extended GUARANTEED COMPLETION DATE shall be to
OWNER’s Account.
51.5 Irrespective of single or separate insurances, the CONTRACTOR shall take the same
in the joint name of OWNER and CONTRACTOR, with OWNER as Primary Beneficiary
and CONTRACTOR as Joint Beneficiary, to cover all risk including marine cum erection
insurance (MCE), workmen compensation / Employees State Insurance (ESI) under ESI
Act 1948 for Contractor’s personnel, fire risk policy etc. till handing over of PLANT to
OWNER duly commissioned and tested. However, for CONTRACTOR‟s EQUIPMENT,
CONTRACTOR can be the sole beneficiary. Further, OWNER shall have the first right
over the claim amount for all insurance claims, where owner has made part or full
payment to the contractor
51.6 CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for pursuing and settling all claims under the
underwriters. In the event of accident, injury, damage or loss likely to form a claim under
the above insurance policies, CONTRACTOR shall, as quickly as possible submit the
insurance claims by underwriters under intimation to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall also
keep OWNER fully informed about progress of each such case. CONTRACTOR shall
undertake immediate repair and replacement of the equipment lost in transit, storage,
assembly, erection and COMMISSIONING of PLANT pending settlement of claim
thereafter by the underwriters.
51.7 The CONTRACTOR at his cost shall arrange, secure and maintain all insurance as may
be pertinent to the works and obligatory in terms of law to protect his interest and
interest of OWNER in the project, against all perils detailed herein. The Form and the
limit of such insurance as defined herein together with the under-writer in each case
shall be acceptable to the OWNER and OWNER´s acceptance shall not be
unreasonably withheld. However, irrespective of such acceptance, the responsibility to
maintain adequate insurance coverage at all times including third party liability during
the period of contract shall be as of CONTRACTOR alone. The contractor’s failure in
this regard shall not relieve him of any of his contractual responsibilities and obligations.
The insurance covers to be taken by the CONTRACTOR shall be in the joint names of
OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall, however, be authorized to
deal directly with insurance company or companies and shall be responsible in regard to
maintenance of all insurance covers.

51.8 Any loss or damage to the equipment during handling, transportation, storage, erection,
putting the equipment into satisfactory operation and all activities to be performed till the
successful completion of trial operation of the plant shall be to the account of the
CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for reference of all claims
and make good the damages or loss by way of repairs and/or replacement of the
equipment, damaged or lost. The transfer of title shall not in any way relieve the
CONTRACTOR of the above responsibility during the period of CONTRACT. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with copies of all insurance policies and
documents taken out by him in pursuance of the CONTRACT. Such copies of documents
shall be submitted to the OWNER immediately after such insurance coverage. However, if
Marine cargo insurance or Third party liability Insurance is a part of their global policies;
insurer certificate (including the main terms of policy) shall be submitted by
CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall also inform the OWNER in the writing at least
thirty (30) days in advance regarding the expiry/ cancellation and/or change in any of such
documents and ensure revalidation, renewal etc. as may be necessary well in time.
However adequacy, credibility and maintenance of Insurance policies is the sole
responsibility of CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR shall keep the OWNER indemnified
against any such failure.
51.9 If the material/ equipment or any portion thereof is damaged or lost during transit and
handling, storage, erection, commissioning at site, the replacements of such material /
equipment shall be effected by the CONTRACTOR within a reasonable time to avoid
unnecessary delay in the COMMISSIONING of the EQUIPMENT and without waiting for
realisation of cost of damages from the insurance company, appointed by him for this
purpose. This will not alter the schedule of commissioning & guarantee tests in any way.
51.10 All works and operations necessary to lift and to remove the material from port, ware-
house, railway or other siding, factory or other places of delivery, loading, handling,
transporting and unloading and safely stacking, placing or storing the same at approved
godowns, yards or other place(s) of storage including lashing or other-wise securing or
protecting the same in transit and during and in storage.
51.11 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a day-to-day account of all materials indicating the
daily receipt(s), consumption(s) and balance of each material and category thereof.
Such account shall be in the format, if any, prescribed by the PROJECT MANAGER and
shall be supported by all documents necessary to verify the correctness of the entries in
the account. Such account shall be maintained at the CONTRACTOR MANAGER‟s
office and site(s) and shall be open for inspection and verification (by verification of
documents in support of the entry as also by feasible verification of the stock) at all
times by the PROJECT MANAGER with authority at all times without obstruction to enter
into or upon any godown or other place(s) or premise(s) where the materials or any part
of them are lying or stored and to inspect the same himself and or through his
representative(s).

51.12 The CONTRACTOR shall at all times be exclusively responsible for any and all losses,
damages, deterioration, misuse, wastage, theft, or other application or misapplication or
disposal of the materials or any of them contrary to the provisions hereof and shall keep
the OWNER indemnified from and against the same and shall forthwith at its own cost
and expenses replace any such material, lost, damaged, deteriorated, misused, wasted,
stolen, applied, mis-applied and/or disposed as aforesaid with other material of
equivalent quality and quantity delivered to site at the CONTRACTOR‟s risks and costs
in all respects.
51.13 Notwithstanding anything herein provided, the CONTRACTOR shall be and remain
solely and exclusively liable to repair, restore or replace, as the case may be, the
materials damaged or destroyed as a result of any act or omission, notwithstanding the
existence or otherwise of any policy(ies) of insurance aforesaid, with the intent that any
policy(ies) of insurance aforesaid taken out by the CONTRACTOR or by the OWNER, on
default by the CONTRACTOR, shall not anywise absolve the CONTRACTOR from his
full liability up to and until issue of the Completion Certificate as provided for herein in
respect of the works, the work(s) and all materials incorporated therein shall be and
remain at the risks of the CONTRACTOR in all respects, including (but not limited to)
accident, lightning, earth-quake, fire, storm, flood, tempest, riot, civil commotion and/or
war or otherwise with respect to the materials, but shall constitute merely an additional
security and not a substitution of liability.
51.14 If the CONTRACTOR shall default in replacing at the job site, free of any cost to the
OWNER, any material lost, damaged, deteriorated, misused, wasted, short, stolen,
misapplied or disposed of within the provisions hereof above, or shall fail to return to the
OWNER any surplus material or empties within the provision hereof above, the
CONTRACTOR shall be liable to pay to the OWNER the cost of such materials or
empties delivered at OWNER‟s stockpile/ godown.
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT, TOOLS AND TACKLES

DEPLOYMENT

The equipments to be mobilized by the contractor during execution of the

construction of Raw Water & Fire Water Reservoir and other Allied works at Talcher
Fertilizer Ltd., Angul Odisha of M/s TFL
1. The details of key construction equipment in good condition, required to be mobilized by the
contractor, to complete the work within the schedule
2. Contractor to confirm that the above equipments are available with him in good working condition
and shall be timely mobilized on this project site. Contractor has the option to hire some these
equipments from equipment hiring agencies also
3. Owner/consultant reserve the right to physically check& verify the availability of these equipments
prior to award of work
4. Contractor shall replace any defective /damaged equipment promptly to complete the work
without any time & cost implication to the owner/consultant
5. Followings are the tentative list of required equipments to complete the job. The actual
deployment of equipments shall be finalized or approved by Engineer-in-charge.

Sl. No. Equipment Description

1 Hydraulic Crane
2 Hydraulic Excavator
3 Dumper
4 Tractor Trailer
5 Power Roller
6 Water Tanker
7 Total Station
8 Dumpy level
9 Welding Machine
10 Dewatering Pump
11 Holiday Tester
12 Electrical tool Kit
13 Breaker
14 Any, other equipments to complete the job

PC-150 / E / 112 /S-V 0
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED DOC. NO. REV.
Page 1 of 19
ANNEXURE - I
TO
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HEALTH, SAFETY AND
ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT

HEALTH, SAFETY AND Page 2 of 19

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE................................................................................................................................ 3
2.0 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM TO BE COMPILED BY BIDDERS ....................................................................... 3
4.0 DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR ..................................... 7
ANNEXURES: -
1. ANNEXURE-1 A : RELEVANT I.S. CODES

2. ANNEXURE-1 B : REPORTING FORMATS


1.0 SCOPE
This Specification establishes the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE)

management requirement to be complied with by the Contractors during construction.
Requirements stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirements of
HSE Management given in relevant Act (s)/ legislations. General Conditions of
Contract (GCC), Special Conditions of Contract (SCC), and Job Specifications.
Where different documents stipulate for different requirements, the most stringent
shall be adopted.
2.0 REFERENCES
This document should be read in conjunction with following:
- General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

- Special Condition of Contract (SCC)
- Job Specifications
- Relevant IS Codes (Refer Annexure-IA)
- Reporting Formats (Refer Annexure-IB)
3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM TO BE COMPILED BY BIDDERS
3.1 MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILTY
The contractor should have a documented HSE policy to cover commitment of their
organization to ensure health, safety and environment aspects in their line of
operation.
3.1.2 The HSE management system of the Contractor shall cover the HSE requirements
including but not limited to what is specified under Para 1.0 and Para 2.0 above.
3.1.3 Contractor shall be fully responsible for planning and implementing HSE
requirements. Contractor as a minimum requirement shall designate/deploy the
following to coordinate the above.
No. of workers deployed - Deploy one qualified and experienced

Upto 250 safety Engineer/Officer
Above 250 & Upto 500 - One additional safety engineer/officer,

as above


Above 500 - One additional safety engineer/officer,

(For every 500 or less) for each 200 workers.
Contractor shall indemnify & hold harmless Owner/Consultant & their representatives
free from any and all liabilities arising out of non-fulfillment of HSE requirements.
3.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE)
requirements are clearly understood & faithfully implemented at all levels at site.
3.1.5 The Contractor shall promote and develop consciousness for Health Safety and
Environment among all personnel working for the Contractor. Regular awareness
programs and fabrication shop/work site meetings shall be arranged on HSE activities
to cover hazards involved in various operations during construction.
3.1.6 Arrange suitable First-Aid measures such as First Aid Box, trained personnel to First
Aid, Standby Ambulance or Vehicle and install fire protection measures such as
adequate number of steel buckets with sand and water and adequate extinguishers to
the satisfaction of Consultant/Owner.
3.1.7 The Contractor shall evolve a comprehensive planned and documented system for
implementation and monitoring of the HSE requirements. This shall be submitted to
Consultant/Owner for approval. The monitoring for implementation shall be done by
regular inspections and compliance to the observations thereof. The Contractor shall
get similar HSE requirements implemented at his sub-contractor(s) work site/office.
However, compliance of HSE requirements shall be the sole responsibility of
Contractor. Any review/approval by Consultant/Owner shall not absolve contractor of
his responsibility / liability in relation to all HSE requirements.
3.1.8 Non-Conformance on HSE by Contractor (including his Sub-contractors) as brought

out during review/audit by Consultant/Owner representative shall be resolved
forthwith by Contractor. Compliance report shall be provided to Consultant/Owner.
3.1.9 The Contractor shall ensure participation of his Resident Engineer/ Site-in-Charge in
the Safety Committee / HSE Committees. Meetings arranged by Consultant/Owner.
The compliance of any observations shall be arranged urgently. He shall assist
Consultant/Owner to achieve the targets set by them on HSE during the project
implementation.
3.1.10 The Contractor shall adhere consistently to all provisions of HSE requirements. In
case of non-compliance or continuous failure in implementation of any of HSE
provisions; Consultant/Owner may impose stoppage of work without any Cost & time
implication to Owner and/or impose a suitable penalty for noncompliance with a
notice of suitable period upto a cumulative limit of 1.0% (one percent) of Contract


Value with a ceiling of Rs 10 lakhs. This penalty shall be in addition to all other
penalties specified else where in the contract. The decision of imposing stoppage
work, its extent & monitory penalty shall rest with Consultant/Owner & binding on the
Contractor.
3.1.11 However fatal accident may lead to termination of the Contract. The personnel
accidents shall be investigated by a team of Contractor's senior personnel for root
cause & recommend corrective and preventive actions. Findings shall be documented
and suitable actions taken to avoid recurrences shall be communicated to
Consultant/Owner. Owner/Consultant shall have the liberty to independently
investigate such occurrences and Contractor shall extend all necessary help and co-
operation in this regard.
3.2.0 HOUSE KEEPING
3.2.1 Contractor shall ensure that a high degree of house keeping is maintained and shall ensure
interracial the followings:
a. All surplus earth and debris are removed/disposed off from the working areas
to identified location(s).
b. Unused / Surplus Cables different places within location(s).Steel items and

steel scrap lying scattered at the working areas are removed to identified
c. All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible packing
materials, shall be removed from work place to indemnified location(s).
d. Roads shall be kept clear and materials like pipes steel sand, boulders
concrete, chips and bricks etc shall not be allowed on the roads to obstruct
free movement of men & machineries.
e. Fabricated steel structural, pipes & piping materials shall be stacked properly
for erection.
f. Water logging on roads shall not be allowed.
g. No parking of trucks/trolleys, cranes and trailers etc shall be allowed on roads

which may obstruct the traffic movement.
h. Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and proper upkeep of
the working areas.
i. 'Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverized materials etc shall be covered
while moving within the plant area.
3.3.0 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT


3.3.1 The Contractor shall provide safe means of access to any working place including
provisions of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various stages during all operations
of the work for the safety of his workmen, and, Consultant/Owner. Contractor shall
ensure deployment of appropriate equipment and appliances for adequate safety and
health of the workmen and protection of surrounding areas.
3.3.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff and workers including their
subcontractor(s) shall wear Safety Helmet and Safety shoes. Contractor shall also
ensure, use of safety belt protective goggles, gloves etc. by the personnel as per job
requirements. All these gadgets shall conform to relevant IS specifications or
equivalent.
3.3.3 Contractor shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System shall be used at appropriate
locations. The safety net shall be located not more than 30 feet (9.0 meters) below
the working surface at site to arrest or to reduce the consequences of a possible fall
of persons working at different heights.
3.3.4 Contractor shall ensure that flash back arrester shall be used while using Gas
Cylinders at site. Cylinders shall be mounted on trolleys.
3.3.5 The Contractor shall assign to his workmen tasks commensurate with their
qualification experience and state of health for driving of vehicles, handling and
erection of materials and equipments. All lifting equipments shall test certified for its
capacity before use. Adequate and suitable lighting at every work place and approach
there to, shall be provided by the contractor before starting the actual operations at
night.
3.3.6 Hazardous and/or toxic materials such as solvent coating or thinners shall be stored
in appropriate containers.
3.3.7 All hazardous materials shall be labeled with the name of materials the hazards
associated with its use and necessary precautions to be taken.
3.3.8 Contractor shall ensure that during performance of the work, all hazards to the health
of personnel have been indemnified, assessed and eliminated.
3.3.9 Chemical spills shall be contained & cleaned up immediately to prevent further,
contamination.
3.3.10 All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing or non-ionizing radiations
ultraviolet rays or similar other physical agents shall be provided with adequate
shielding or protection commensurate with the type of exposure involved.


3.3.11 Where contact or exposure of hazardous materials could exceed limits or could
otherwise have harmful affects, appropriate personal protective equipments such as
gloves, goggles, aprons chemical resistant clothing and respirator shall be used.
3.3.12 Suitable facilities for toilet, drinking water, proper lighting shall be provided at site and
labor camps, commensurate with applicable Laws/Legislation.
3.3.13 Contractor shall ensure storage and utilization methodology of materials that are not
detrimental to environment. Where required, Contractor shall ensure that only the
environment friendly materials are selected.
3.3.15 All persons deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply with the
environment laws, rules & regulations relating to the hazardous materials substances
and wastes. Contractor shall not dump release or otherwise discharge or dispose off
any such materials without the express authorization of Consultant / Owner.
4.0 DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR
4.1 On Award of Contract
The Contractor shall prior to start of work submit his Health, Safety and Environment
Manual or procedure and HSE Plans for approval by Consultant/Owner. The
contractor shall participate in the pre-start meeting with Consultant/Owner to finalize
HSE Plans including the following.
 Job procedure to be followed by Contractor for activities covering handling of

equipments, Scaffolding, Electric Installation, describing the risks involved,
actions to be taken and methodology for monitoring each activity.
 Consultant/Owner review /audit requirements.
 Organization structure along with responsibility and authority records/ reports
etc on HSE activities.
4.2 During job execution
4.2.1 Implement approved Health, Safety and Environment management procedure

including but not limited to as brought out under Para 3.0. Contractor shall also
ensure to:
 Arrange workmen compensation insurance registration under ESI Act third
party liability insurance etc, as applicable:
 Arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable) like hot work,
confined space, work at heights, storage of chemicals/explosive materials and
its use and implement all precautions mentioned their in.


 Submit timely the completed checklist on HSE activities, Monthly HSE reports,
accident reports, and investigation reports etc as per Consultant/Owner
requirements. Compliance of instructions on HSE shall be done by contractor
and informed urgently to Consultant /Owner.
 Ensure that resident Engineer/Site-In-Charge of the Contractor shall attend all
the Safety Committee/HSE meetings arranged by Consultant/Owner. Only in
case of his absence from site that a second senior most person shall be
nominated by him in advance and communicated to Consultant/Owner.
 Display at site office and work locations caution boards list of hospitals
emergency services available.
 Provide posters, banners for safe working to promote safety consciousness.
 Carry out audits/inspection at sub-contractor works as per approved HSE
document & submit the reports for Consultant/Owner review.
 Assist in HSE audits by Consultant /Owner and submit compliance reports
 Generate & submit HSE records/report as per HSE Plan.
 Appraise Consultant /Owner on HSE activities at site.


ANNEXURE -1A
RELEVANT IS - CODES FOR PERSONAL PROTECTION
IS: 2925 - 1984 Industrial Safety Helmets

IS: 4770 - 1968 Rubber gloves for electrical purposes
IS: 6994 - 1973 (Part-I) Industrial Safety Gloves (Leather & Conon Gloves)
IS: 1989 - 1986 (Part -I & III) Leather safety boots and shoes
IS: 3738 - 1975 Rubber knee boots
IS: 5557 - 1969 Industrial and Safety rubber knee boots
IS: 6519 - 1971 Code of practice for selections, care and repair of
Safety footwear
IS: 11226 - 1985 Leather Safety footwear having direct mounding sole
IS: 5983 - 1978 Eye protectors
IS: 9167 -1979 Ear protectors
IS: 3521 -1983 Industrial Safety belts and harness
NOTE:
For necessary Codes for safety/Environmental requirement, concerned statutory

authorities may be consulted.


ANNEXURE –1B
1.0 HEALTH SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) PLAN
Audit function
review/audit
Customer
Contractor: …………………………….
Owner: ………………………………..
Approver
HEALTH SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) PLAN
(To be prepared by each construction Agency )
Performing function
Checker
Perform
er
Conformance
Code of
Project: ……………………..
Date: ……………………….
Procedure
guide
/w.i./
lines
description
Activity


2.0 MONTHLY HSE CHECKLIST CUM COMPLIANCE REPORT (1/6)
PROJECT: CONTRACTOR:
DATE: OWNER:
INSPECTION BY:
NOTE: Write N.A. where the item is not applicable.
ITEM Yes No Remarks Action
HOUSEKEEPING
Waste containers provided and used
Sanitary facilities adequate and clean
Passageways and walkways clear
General neatness of working areas
Other
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENTS
Goggles, Shields
Face protection
Hearing protection
Safety shoes provided
Hand protection
Respiratory mask etc.
Safety belts
Other
EXCAVATION / OPENINGS
Opening properly covered or barricaded
Excavation shored
Excavation barricaded
Overnight lightening provided
Other


MONTHLY HSE CHECKLIST CUM COMPLIANCE REPORT (2/6)
WELDING ,CUTTING
Gas cylinders chained upright
Cables and hoses not obstructing
Screens or shields used
Flammable materials protected
Fire extinguisher (s) accessible
other
SCAFFOLDING
Fully decked platforms
Guard and intermediate rails in place
Toe boards in place
Adequate shoring
Adequate access
Other
LADDERS
Extension side rails 1 m above
Top of landing
Properly secured
Angle ±70º from horizontal


Other
MONTHLY HSE CHECKLIST CUM COMPLIANCE REPORT (Contd. 3/6)
HOISTS, CRANES AND DERRICKS
Condition of cables and sheaves OK
Condition of slings, chains hooks and eyes

O.K.
Inspection and maintenance logs maintained
Outriggers used
Sign/l barricades provided
signals observed and understood
Qualified operators
Other
MACHINERY, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Proper instruction
Safety devices
Proper cords
Inspection and maintenance
Other
VEHICLE AND TRAFFIC
Rules and regulations observed


Inspection and maintenance
Licensed drivers
Others

TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Emergency instructions posted
Fire extinguisher provided
Fire-aid equipment available
Secured against storm damage
General neatness
In accordance with electrical requirements
Other
FIRE PREVENTION
Personnel instructed
Fire extinguishers checked
No smoking in prohibited areas.
Hydrants Clear
Other
ELECTRICAL
Proper wiring
ELCB's provided
Ground fault circuit interrupters
Protection against damage
Prevention of tripping hazards
Other



HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Properly Stored or stacked
Passageways clear
Other
FLAMMABLE GASES AND LIQUIDS
Container clearly identified
Proper storage
Fire extinguishers nearby
Other
WORKING AT HEIGHT
Erection plan
Safety nets
Safety belts and lanyards: chute lines
Other
ENVIRONMENT
Chemical and other Effluents properly
disposed
Cleaning liquid of pipes disposed off properly
Sea water used for hydro-testing disposed
off as per agreed procedure
Lubricant waste/Engine oils properly
disposed
Waste from Canteen, offices, sanitation etc
disposed properly
Disposal of surplus earth stripping materials

Oily rags and combustible materials done
properly
Green belt protection


MONTHLY HSE CHECK LIST CUM COMPLIANCE REPORT (Contd. 6/6)

HEALTH CHECKS
Hygienic conditions at labour camps O.K.
Availability of first Aid facilities
Proper sanitation at site ,office and labour
camps
Arrangement of medical facilities
Measures for dealing with illness
Availability of potable drinking water for
working and staff
Provision of crèches for children
(Signature of Resident Engineer with Seal)


3.0 ACCIDENT CUM FIRE REPORT
STANDARD TFL FORMAT SHALL BE SUPPLIED AT SITE


4.0 SUPPLEMENTRY ACCIDENT & INVESTIGATION REPORT
STANDARD TFL FORMAT SHALL BE SUPPLIED AT SITE


5.0 MONTHLY HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) REPORT

(To be submitted by each Contractor)
Actual work start Date: For the Month of:

Project: Report No:
Name of the Contractor: Status as on:
Name of work: Name of safety officer:
ITEM THIS MONTH CUMMULATIVE

Total Strength (Staff + Workmen)
Number of HSE meetings organized at site
Number of HSE awareness programs conducted at
site
Whether workmen compensation policy taken
Whether workmen compensation policy is valid
Whether workmen registered under ESI Act
No. of fatal accidents
Number of Loss time accidents(other than fatal)
Other accidents (Non Loss Time)
Total No. of Accidents
Total man-hours worked
Man-hour loss due to fire and accidents
Compensation cases raised with Insurance
Compensation cases resolved and paid to workmen
Remarks
Date:
Safety Officer / Resident Engineer
(Signature and name)
To:
OWNER..................... 1 Copy
RCM/SITE-IN-Charge (CONSULTANT) 1 Copy

PNPM/PC150/E/112/S-VI 0
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD DOCUMENT NO REV.
PAGE 1 OF 1
SECTION: VI
TECHNICAL SECTION OF TENDER DOCUMENT
PLANT: CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER RESERVOIR, FIRE

WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES
PROJECT: INTEGRATED COAL BASED FERTILISER COMPLEX

AT TALCHER, ANGUL DISTRICT, ODISHA (INDIA)
0 11.12.2019 16.12.2019 ISSUED FOT IMPLEMENTATION SK SS UPT

P3 25.09.2019 25.09.2019 FOR REVIEW SK SS UPT
P 25.02.2019 25.02.2019 FOR REVIEW SK SS UPT
REV REV DATE EFF DATE PURPOSE PREPD REVWD APPD
PNPM/PC150/E/112 0
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD. DOC. NO. REV.

Page 1 of 1

MASTER INDEX
NIT NO. : PNPM/PC150/E/112/NCB
NIT DESCRIPTION: CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER RESERVOIR, FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP
HOUSE AND SERVICES TFL, TALCHER

SECTION-VI TECHNICAL
SECTIONS-VI TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS & DRAWINGS
1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION & SCOPE OF WORK
2.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
2.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF EARTH WORKS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CIVIL STRUCTURAL & ALLIED
2.2
WORKS
3.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – PROCESS
4.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – ROTATING / EOT
5.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – PIPING
6.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – ELECTRICAL
7.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – INSTRUMENTATION
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – CONSTRUCTION, ERECTION,
8.0
PRECOMMISSIONING, COMMISSIONING & START-UP
9.0 SPARE PARTS
10.0 VENDOR LIST
ANNEXURE
ANNEXURE- 1 PLOT PLAN AND PIPING LAYOUT
ANNEXURE- 2 P & ID DRAWING FOR PUMPS CONFIGURATION
ANNEXURE- 3 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING FOR EARTHEN RAW WATER
RESERVOIR ( 2 SHEETS)
ANNEXURE- 4 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING FOR FIRE WATER RESERVOIR
ANNEXURE- 5 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING FOR PUMP HOUSE
ANNEXURE- 6 LAND DEVELOPMENT DRAWING
ANNEXURE- 7 TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY DRAWING
SECTION-VII SCHEDULE OF RATES

FORM NO: 02-0000-0021 F 2 REV 3 All rights reserved

PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC-VI-1.0 0
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD DOCUMENT NO REV
SHEET 1 OF 7
SECTION: VI-1.0
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS & SCOPE OF WORKS
PLANT: CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER RESERVOIR, FIRE

WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES
PROJECT: INTEGRATED COAL BASED FERTILISER COMPLEX

AT TALCHER, ANGUL DISTRICT, ODISHA (INDIA)

PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC-VI-
0
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER 1.0
RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND ALLIED FACILITES DOCUMENT NO REV
AT TFL, TALCHER
SHEET 2 OF 7
1. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Talcher Fertilizers Ltd. (TFL), a joint venture company of four major Public Sector Units – M/s GAIL
(India) Limited (GAIL), M/s Rastriya Chemicals & Fertilisers Ltd. (RCF), M/s Coal India Ltd. (CIL) and M/s
Fertilizers Corporation of India Ltd. (FCIL) is in process of establishing a world class Coal based fertilizer
complex at Talcher, Angul District, Odisha (India).
The plant will be consisting Coal Gasification Plant, Ammonia Plant and Urea Plant, along with Offsite
and Utility facilities, various offices for functional & administrative requirements, canteen / cafeteria, rest
rooms etc. Besides above plants & facilities, TFL shall also have its own township complex.
To establish above facility, huge quantity of water will be required. This requirement will be met by
drawing water from Brahmni river flowing approximately 14 km away from proposed plant. Water should
be first collected at river bank by training the river through intake channel & storing water in the intake
well. Intake well having facilities of screens, sluice gates, pumps shall pump out required volume of
water from intake well to raw water reservoir in the plant through underground pipeline.
This NIT comprises the requisite job related to the detail design and construction of the following:
1. Earthen Raw water reservoir,
2. RCC Fire water reservoir,
3. RCC Pump house,
4. Allied Electrical, Mechanical, Piping and Instrumentation services
5. Geo Technical tests for Soil investigation
The detail scope of work has been described in following sections.
2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall inspect and examine the site and its surrounding and shall satisfy himself before
submitting his bid as to the nature of the ground and subsoil, the form and nature of the site, the
quantum and the nature of work and material necessary for successful completion of the works and the
means of access to site and in general shall himself obtain all necessary information as to risks,
contingencies and other circumstances which may influence or affect his Tender. Under no
circumstances, extra payment consequent on any misunderstanding or otherwise on the part of the
Contractor shall be allowed.
The Contractor shall have to take all safety precaution to protect all the existing equipment, structures,
facilities and buildings etc. from damage. In case, any damage occurs due to the activities of the
Contractor on account of negligence, ignorance, accidental or any other reasons whatsoever, the
damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Owner /
Consultant. The Contractor shall have to take also all necessary safety measure, at his own cost, to
avoid any harm/ injury to his workers and staff and facilities of the existing plant.
The work to be performed under the Scope of Work consists of providing all labour, materials except if
indicated in Schedule of Rates, supervision, scaffolding, construction equipment, tools, tackles and

0
AT TFL, TALCHER
SHEET 3 OF 7
plants, supplies, transportation, all incidental items though not indicated or specified, but reasonably
implied or necessary for successful completion of the work including Contractor's supervision.
Sampling & testing of material & equipment shall be done as per relevant clauses of BIS & shall not be
paid extra. The contractor shall preferably establish a laboratory at site for all relevant site tests as per
BIS requirements.
3.0 BROAD SCOPE OF WORK
“Basic Design, Detailed Engineering, Procurement, Supply, Manufacture, Fabrication, Transportation of

all equipment & material to site including Loading, Unloading, Storage, Maintenance, Construction and
Erection of all Civil & structure (earthen Raw Water Reservoir , Fire water Reservoir and Pump house
etc.), Mechanical (Piping and Machinery), Electrical and allied Instrumentation works, Installation,
obtaining all necessary statutory approvals from concerned Government authorities as applicable,
Testing, Mechanical completion, Pre-commissioning, Commissioning, Sustain load test run,
Performance guarantee test runs etc.”
Following Tender Drawings are attached as Annexure for reference and guidance to the Bidders:
1. Plot Plan and Piping Layout
2. P & ID drawing for pumps configuration
3. General arrangement drawing for Earthen raw water reservoir ( 2 sheets)
4. General arrangement drawing for Fire water reservoir
5. General arrangement drawing for Pump House
6. Land development drawing of the plant area
7. Topographical Survey drawing
These drawing are tentative and sizing/design may change during detail engineering by the Contractor.
3.1 SCOPE OF WORK - CIVIL
3.1.1 Earthen Raw water Reservoir & Pump house
The water from Intake well at Brahmani River has to be stored in the proposed earthen raw water
reservoir. The proposed tentative size of raw water reservoir shall be approx. 280 x 270 m having
storage capacity of approx. 340,000 cubic m. The proposed reservoir should have two compartments
with isolation facilities for maintenance purpose.
Provision for suitable pumping should be also provided from at common point of both the reservoirs
through building Pump house having facilities of Vertical turbine pumps. Pumps should have lifting
facilities (EOT cranes) for maintenance. Location of pump sump should to be finalised in consideration of
minimum piping required for transferring water to raw water treatment Plant and Fire Water Reservoir.
The reservoir should have provision of outlet pipes to feed the plant. Ramps and staircases should be
provided at various locations to approach for cleaning of reservoir. Marking of level is to be done in both
the compartments of reservoir. Mild steel hand railings should also be provided all around the
embankments of reservoir.

0
AT TFL, TALCHER
SHEET 4 OF 7
Base of raw water reservoir shall comprise of compacted earth over which 75 mm thick sand filing layer,
then 1.0 mm Smooth HDPE Geo-membrane Liner conforming to Indian code of practice to make the
under layer of reservoir; and finally 100 mm thick PCC (M20). Sloped embankments of the reservoir shall
be having similar layers shall include appropriate reinforcement for slope protection.
Tender drawings of raw water reservoir and Pump house can be used for reference purpose attached as
Annexure 3 and Annexure 5 respectively. The configuration of piping and pumping facilities shall be in
accordance with P & ID diagram and Piping layout attached in the Annexure.
3.1.2 Fire water Reservoir
Fire water reservoir shall be (open to sky) having approx. Storage capacity of 25000 cubic metre. It shall
be of reinforced Concrete (M30 design mix concrete) construction having two compartments with
isolation facilities for maintenance purpose.
Tender drawings of fire water reservoir can be used for reference purpose attached as Annexure 4. The
configuration of piping and pumping facilities shall be in accordance with P & ID diagram and Piping
layout attached in the Annexure.
3.1.3 Soil Investigation
Bidders are requested to visit the site and execute preliminary soil investigation and firm up their basis of
foundation design for bidding purpose. The successful bidder shall have to carry out detailed soil
investigation for the proposed job afresh.
3.1.4 Detailed Engineering
1. The CONTRACTOR shall carryout Analysis and Design of the structures required for this
document as per the relevant IS codes and shall prepare all the required Architectural, Civil and
Structural drawings needed for correct and accurate construction as per the Design
Specifications given in this document.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a Detailed Schedule for release of documents and drawings for
review / approval to PMC/OWNER, within 2 weeks/or mutually period of date of award of the
Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall strictly adhere to the approved schedule. The Format of
Submission of the above mentioned schedule shall be mutually discussed and finalized after
award of the job.
3. Construction of various structures / facilities, whose designs and / or drawings are specially
identified in the Project Schedule for approval by PMC/OWNER, shall not be taken up for
construction at site till they are approved by PMC/OWNER and comments given are
incorporated.
4. For minor other structures / facilities, the CONTRACTOR shall directly submit the Approved for
Construction (AFC) drawings to PMC for information before, taking up construction.
5. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to accommodate all the functional

requirements such as access, cutouts, clearances, interference etc. while designing / detailing of
various structures / facilities.
0
AT TFL, TALCHER
SHEET 5 OF 7
6. Complete analysis, design and all drawings of each independent structure / facility shall be
submitted in one lot so as to facilitate overall systematic review by PMC.
7. Only after the necessary architectural drawings are approved by the OWNER / PMC to their
satisfaction, then the design drawings shall be reviewed and approved by PMC.
8. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the OWNER / PMC informed of any major design revisions
simultaneously in progress.
3.1.5 Design calculations

1. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare the design calculations based on the standard
accepted practice and guidelines from PMC / OWNER.
2. All design calculations shall be written systematically in excel, legibly and submitted for
approval as per standard accepted practice.
3. For structures, analysis and design shall be done on latest version of STAADPRO
SOFTWARE.
4. For other miscellaneous works Excel and Word shall be used. Design calculations shall
be done on A4 size sheet only.
3.1.6 Drawings
The CONTRACTOR shall prepare Civil & structural design & construction drawings, architectural
drawings based on the standard accepted practice and guidelines from PMC / OWNER.
 Detail Engineering Drawings
 Bar bending schedules.
 Fabrication drawings.
 As-built drawings.
 Detailing / drafting shall be done on AUTOCAD Latest Version only. Drawing size used shall be
preferably of A1 size only. For foundation layout, drainage plans and paving plans, A0 size
drawings can be used if necessary.
3.1.7 Construction
1. Construction of all civil and structural works including all procurement of material, labour,
Supervision, tools and tackles; dewatering of working area, diversion of nalah/drains if any, area
grading etc. shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR.
2. Procurement and supply of all materials viz. cement, reinforcement, structural steel etc. shall be
in the scope of CONTRACTOR.
3. All materials shall be procured in consultation with the Owner or as per the approved vendor list
given elsewhere in this document. All materials of construction must be of ISI approved brands.
4. All materials and construction shall confirm to the specification given elsewhere in this document.
0
AT TFL, TALCHER
SHEET 6 OF 7
5. Materials of construction, construction methodology etc. shall be such, so as to protect the

structures and foundations against the harmful effect of chemical, fumes etc. present in the plant,
its vicinity, in ground and / or subsoil water.
6. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining the statutory approval from local
authorities such as Inspector of Factories, Development Authorities, Municipal Corporation and
other concerned authorities before starting the work.
7. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the facilities are constructed in accordance with the
APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION drawings and specifications.
8. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain and operate an adequate system of control of availability of
latest drawings and specifications, at all the places where work is performed.
9. Construction shall include excavation in all types of soils / rock inclusive of necessary dewatering
as applicable.
10. The CONTRACTOR shall redo / repair all the existing facilities viz. roads, paving, drainage etc.
which are damaged during transportation, construction and erection activities performed by him.
11. Rain water harvesting is mandatory for buildings as per Factory Act of State.
3.1.8 Material of Construction

 Concrete-
Design mix M20, M25 & M30 grade design mix concrete or otherwise as specified in SOR.
 Cement - OPC 43 grade / OPC 53 grade cement shall be used in all works for foundations, Sub-
structure & Super-structure.
 Reinforcement Steel
The reinforcement shall be of hot rolled, cold twisted, weldable high yield deformed CRSD
(Corrosion Resistance Steel with Fe500D properties) rebar having Characteristic yield strength
500N/mm²,in accordance with table I of IS:1786. Binding wire used for tying the reinforcement
shall conform to IS: 280 unless specifically mentioned herein or in engineering drawings.
 All materials shall be procured from approved Vendor list.
4.0 SCOPE OF WORK - MACHINERY
Bidder’s scope of work shall include complete basic & detailed engineering, procurement, supply,
manufacturing, fabrication, transportation, loading, unloading, insurance during transit, storage,
construction, erection/ installation of all Mechanical Rotating Equipment with allied electrical,
instrumentation and civil works, obtaining all necessary statutory approvals from concerned government
authorities as applicable, testing, mechanical completion, pre-commissioning, commissioning,

0
AT TFL, TALCHER
SHEET 7 OF 7
performance guarantee test runs including total project management and handing over of Raw Water
Reservoir and allied services of prescribed capacity for M/s Talcher Fertilizer Limited ( TFL).
4.1 Bidder’s scope of Work shall include but not be limited to following:
a) Complete design of rotating equipment (i.e. Pumps, EOT Crane).

b) Detailed engineering of equipment including all mountings, accessories & bought-out
items.
c) Procurement of all materials & bought out items.
d) Shop fabrication (as applicable) & assembly.
e) Inspection, testing (including hydro testing)
f) Surface preparation, painting, insulation, pickling and Passivation etc.
g) Packing, forwarding, transportation, loading & unloading, etc.
h) Storage and preservation at site.
i) Statutory approvals.
j) Stage wise and final inspection by appointed TPIA and by Owner.
k) Any other requirement for safe and smooth operation.
l) Spare parts as enlisted in NIT/ ITB.
m) Submission of engineering drawing & document, for Owner/PMC review & Approval.
All drawing submitted to owner/PMC shall be thoroughly checked by contractor
before submission.
n) Supply of “As Built documentation and QC dossiers”.
5. Detailed Scope of work for Electrical, Instrumentation & Mechanical works has been provided
in respective sections.

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - VI-2.0
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER DOC. NO. REV.
RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES AT TFL,
TALCHER Page 1 of 22
SECTION - VI-2.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
(CIVIL & STRUCTURAL)
FORM NO: 02-0000-0021 F2 REV3 All rights reserved

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

1.0 GENERAL 4
1.1 SCOPE 4
1.2 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT 4
1.3 DEFINITIONS 4
1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS 4
2.0 DESIGN LOADS 6
2.1 DEAD LOADS 6
2.2 EQUIPMENT LOADS 6
2.3 LIVE LOADS 7
2.4 WIND LOADS 9
2.5 SEISMIC LOADS 9
2.6 IMPACT & VIBRATORY LOADS 9
2.7 CONTINGENCY LOADS 9
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS LOADS 10
2.9 LOAD COMBINATIONS 10
3.0 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR FOUNDATIONS 10
3.1 GENERAL 10
3.2 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS 10
3.3 MACHINE FOUNDATIONS 12
3.4 CONCRETE GRADE 13
3.5 FOUNDATION BOLTS 13
3.6 PEDESTAL HEIGHTS 13
3.7 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR REINFORCED 13
CONCRETE STRUCTURES
3.8 GENERAL 14
3.9 LIQUID RETAINING R.C.C. STRUCTURES 14
AND BASEMENTS
4.0 CONCRETE GRADE 14
4.1 REINFORCEMENT BARS 15
4.2 MINIMUM COVER TO REINFORCEMENT 15
4.3 EXPANSION JOINT 16
4.4 DEFLECTIONS 16

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
4.5 MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS 17

5.0 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR STEEL 18
STRUCTURES
5.1 GENERAL / DESIGN METHOD 18
5.2 EXPANSION JOINTS 19
5.3 STEEL GRADE 19
5.4 LIMITING PERMISSIBLE STRESSES 19
5.5 LIMITING DEFLECTION 19
5.6 MINIMUM THICKNESS 20
6.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC 20
APPLICATIONS
6.1 PIPERACK 20
6.2 CULVERTS 22

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This engineering design basis defines the minimum design criteria that shall form the
basis for carrying out detailed structural design and engineering of all plant and non-
plant structures and buildings. All data required in this regard shall be taken into
consideration for acceptable, satisfactory and trouble-free engineering of the structures.
Compliance with this design basis and / or review of any of CONTRACTOR documents
shall in no case relieve the CONTRACTOR at the contractual obligations. All structures
shall be designed for the satisfactory performance of the functions for which they are
being constructed.
1.2 Units of Measurement
Units of measurement in design shall be in metric system.
1.3 Definitions
1. CCE Chief Controller of Explosives
2. TAC Tariff Advisory Committee
3. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
4. IS Indian Standards
1.4 Codes and Standards
The design shall be in accordance with established codes, sound engineering practices
and shall conform to the statutory regulations applicable to the country.
The main codes and standards and statutory regulations considered as minimum
requirements are as follows Latest revision of these shall be followed:
IS:456 Code of practice for plain & reinforced concrete
SP:34 Handbook on concrete reinforcement and detailing
IS:800 Code of practice for general construction in steel
IS 801 Code of practice for use of cold formed light gauge steel structural members
in general building construction.
IS:802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead transmission line
towers
IS:806 Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building construction
IS:816 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction
IS:875 Code of practice for design loads
IS:1080 Code of practice for design & construction of shallow foundations on soil

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
IS:1161 Specification for steel tubes for structural purpose

IS:1597 Code of practice for construction of stone masonry
IS:1838 Filters for expansion joints
IS:1893 Criteria for earth quake resistant design of structures
IS:1904 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations in soils, General
requirements
IS:1905 Code of practice for structural use of un-reinforced masonry
IS:2185 Concrete masonry units
IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron and steel
IS:2633 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles
IS:2911 Code of practice for design and construction of pile foundations
IS:2950 Code of practice for design & construction of raft foundations
IS:2974 Code of practice for design & construction of machine foundations
IS:3370 Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids
IS:4091 Code of practice for design and construction of foundation for transmission
line tower and poles
IS:4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and construction of
buildings
IS:4925 Specification for Concrete Batching and Mixing Plant
IS:4991 Criteria for blast resistant design of structures for explosions above ground
IS:5249 Determination of dynamic properties of soil
IS:6403 Code of practice for determination of bearing capacity of shallow foundations
IS:6745 Method for determination of mass of zinc coating
IS:8009 Code practice for calculation of settlements of foundations
IS:9595 Recommendations for metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese
steel
IS:11089 Code of practice for design and construction of ring foundation
IS:12118 Two parts polysulphide based sealant
IS:13920 Code of practice for ductile detailing of reinforced concrete structures
subjected to seismic forces.
National Building Code
Factory Rules
PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
In case of any difference between Codal provision and this design basis, the stringent
one should govern the design.
In case of any conflict / deviations amongst various documents, the order of
precedence shall be as follows:
1. Statutory Regulations
2. Job Specifications
3. Engineering Design Basis
4. Standard Specifications
2.0 Design Loads

The following design loadings shall be considered:
1. Dead loads including self weight
2. Live load
3. Wind load
4. Seismic load
5. Equipment load
6. Dynamic load
7. Load from lifting appliances
8. Erection loads / maintenance loads
9. Thermal load
10. Earth pressure / Hydrostatic Loads
11. Any other load not mentioned above, but applicable
These loadings shall be applicable to all structures irrespective of the material
employed for construction.
2.1 Dead Loads
Dead load shall comprise of the weight of all permanent construction including walls,
fire proofing, floors, roofs, partitions, stairways and fixed services.
2.2 Equipment Loads
The empty / operating / test weight of process equipment including all fixtures,
platforms, ladders and attached piping but excluding contents, shall be considered. If
piping weight is not indicated separately or not included in the weight of the equipment,
the same shall be taken as 10% of the weight of the equipment.
1. Bundle Pull
Bundle pull forces for different types of exchangers shall be taken as under:
a. Fixed type - Nil
b. Kettle type - 0.30 × Bundle weight

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
c. All other types - 0.86 × Bundle weight or 30 N/mm of diameter

Whichever is greater
Total Bundles Pull shall be considered on fixed pedestal alone
2. Thermal Expansion
Horizontal force due to thermal expansion of horizontal vessels / exchangers shall
be relieved by using slotted holes and slide plates and remaining force derived
from the product of the sliding saddle ‘gravity load’ and the coefficient of friction
shall be applied to each support. the coefficient of friction shall be taken as under:
a. teflon to teflon : 0.08
b. stainless steel to teflon : 0.10
c. steel to steel : 0.30
d. steel to concrete : 0.45
3. Non-Static Loading
Foundations and structures supporting vessels subject to surge loading, such as
Deaerators shall be designed with sufficient stiffness and rigidity to resist a notional
horizontal forces of 10% of those derived from the Vessel’s operating weight or the
given surge load whichever is greater. The forces shall be applied at the vessel’s
centre of gravity and act longitudinally or transversely. Consideration shall be given
to bracing these structures.
The design of foundations and structures supporting agitated vessels, centrifuges,
reactors and other variable load equipment shall take full account of all the loading
data provided by the equipment vendors. Where no loads are available,
consideration shall be given to applying force at 10% of operating weight. In
addition, for dynamic effect loads will be increased by 50% of steam agitated
equipment and 25% for mechanical agitated vessels.
Where two or more similar items of such equipment are supported on a common
foundation or structure, the design must be based on the assumption that these
items will resonate in phase.
4. Rotating Equipment
Comprehensive loading data of mechanical equipment, such as, fans, blowers, pumps,
compressors, D.G. Sets, turbines, motors engines etc., as furnished by the equipment
vendor shall be considered.
2.3 Live Loads
Live loads shall, in general, be as per IS:875. However, the following minimum live
loads shall be considered in the design of structures to account for maintenance and
erection phases; if equipment layout / vendor drawings indicate loads of greater
magnitude, the same shall be adopted.
1. Process Building / Technological Structure (Open / Enclosed type)
Operating area - 5.0 kN/m²
PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
Maintenance area - 7.5 kN/m²

Ground floor - 10.0 kN/m²
2. Compressor House/TG House
Operating area - 7.5 kN/m²
Maintenance area - 7.5 kN/m²
3. Service Platform
Vessel / Tower - 3.0 kN/m²
Isolated platform - 2.5 kN/m²
(for valve operation)
Access way - 2.5 kN/m²
Cross over - 2.0 kN/m²
Piperack walkways - 2.5 kN/m²
Gantry girder walkway - 3.0 kN/m²
4. Substation / Control Room
Panel floor - 10.0 kN/m²
Miscellaneous partition - 1.0 kN/m²
Other areas - 5.0 kN/m²
5. Office building
Office area - 3.0 kN/m²
Entrance lobby - 5.0 kN/m²
Exit way - 5.0 kN/m²
Miscellaneous partition - 1.0 kN/m²
Document Storage area - 10.0 kN/m²
6. Laboratory
Upper floors - 4.0 kN/m²
7. Cooling Tower
Operating platform /cover - 3.0 kN/m²
Slab of hot water basin &
Sump
8. GT Building / DM Plant /ETP
Operating platforms - 3.0 kN/m²
9. Staircase
Process Building - 5.0 kN/m²
Technological structure - 5.0 kN/m²
Office - 5.0 kN/m²
Substation/Control Room - 3.0 kN/m²
Laboratory - 4.0 kN/m²
Service platform - 2.5 kN/m²
Loads on account of equipment and incidental loads shall be taken over and above the
loads indicated in the table.
For all other buildings not covered in above Table, the imposed loads shall be taken as
specified in IS:875 (Part II)
PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
1 kN/m² allowance shall be made for services supported from below the floor.
Live load on various types of roofs shall be as per the requirements given in IS:875.
2.4 Wind Loads
Wind loads for structural design shall be as per IS-875 (Part-3) except for switchyard
structures and transmission towers for which IS:802 shall be applicable. Basic wind
speed shall be 47 M/s . Definition of basic wind speed shall be peak gust velocity
averaged over 3 second time interval at 10 m height above mean ground level with 50
years mean return period. The design life span of all structures, except temporary
structures, and boundary wall shall be taken as 50 years. Life span of temporary
structures and boundary wall can be lesser and shall be as per IS:875.
To account for surface area of piping, platforms and other attachments fixed to the
equipment, the surface area of the equipment (vessel/column) exposed to wind shall be
increased by 20% or as specified in the mechanical data sheets of the equipment.
2.5 Seismic Loads
The site falls in Seismic zone-IV. Seismic loads shall be as per IS:1893 (Latest
Revision) .
2.6 Impact and Vibratory Loads
Structures subjected to impact or vibratory loads shall be designed as per the provision
of IS:875 & IS:2974. Requirements for monorails and overhead cranes shall be as per
IS:800, IS:875 or manufacturer’s data, whichever is more stringent.
2.7 Contingency Loads
2.7.1 RCC Structures

All floor slabs and beams shall be designed for a concentrated load of 10 KN acting
simultaneously with the uniform live load, but not with actual concentrated loads from
equipment, piping etc. This load shall be placed to result in maximum moment and / or
maximum shear.
This load shall not be considered for the design of columns, foundations and in overall
frame analysis. For floor slabs, the load shall be considered to be distributed over an
area of 0.75 m x 0.75 m.
2.7.2 Structural Steel

For process plants, the following contingency additional loading shall be applied to
individual beam elements, these shall be applied as point loads to produce worst shear
and bending stresses:
1. Platform Walkways 3 kN
2. Secondary Floor Trimmers 5 kN
3. Primary / Grid beams 10 kN

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
2.8 Miscellaneous Loads

Apart from the specified live loads, possible overloading during construction / hydro-test
maintenance / erection shall also be considered in the design Job specifications and
shall also be referred to, for any specific loading.
Hydrostatic pressure shall be adequately accounted for, in the design of structures,
below ground water table.
All the handrails, parapets, parapet walls, balustrades shall be designed for horizontal
load mentioned in Table 3 of IS-875 (Part-2).
2.9 Load Combinations
Structure & its member shall be designed for worst combination of the above loads.
3.0 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR FOUNDATIONS

3.1 General
Foundation sizing shall be based on working loads without any factor.
3.2 Shallow Foundations
3.2.1 For gravity loading, allowable net bearing capacity of soil shall be based on the
following settlement criteria:
Foundation Type Allowable Settlement(mm)

 Foundations in unit areas, utility areas and 25
Foundations for plant buildings including
substation, Compressor house, control room,
technological structures
 Machine foundations and critical equipment with 25
interconnected piping
 Foundations supporting non-plant buildings 40
3.2.2 For transient loadings, such as wind / seismic, allowable net bearing capacity based on
shear criteria may be considered.
3.2.3 For load combinations including wind/Earthquake, the Safe Soil Bearing Pressure may
be increased by 25%.
3.2.4 Allowable Loss of contact area between underside of foundation and soil (due to
resultant Overturning Moment) under different loading conditions shall be as given
below.
Load Combination description Allowable % Loss of Contact Area

A. Operating Load case ( Plant operating, 0 % to 10%
with or without Live Loads, for worst
cases)

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
Operating Load Case with Wind or up to 25%

Earthquake (with or without Live Loads,
for worst cases)
B. Operating Load case (Plant operating, 0 % to 20%
with or without Live Loads, for worst
cases)
Operating Load Case with Wind or up to 30%
Earthquake (with or without Live Loads,
for worst cases)
Where A = Foundations on Soil , B = Foundations on Rock
3.2.5 Soil and hydrostatic pressure on walls below grade

In the design of walls below grade, provision shall be made for the lateral pressure of
adjacent soil. Due allowance shall be made for possible surcharge from fixed or moving
loads. When a portion or whole of the adjacent soil is below a free water surface,
computations shall be based on the weight of the soil, diminished by buoyancy, plus full
hydrostatic lateral pressure.
The lateral pressure from surcharge loads shall be taken in addition the lateral earth
pressure loads.
3.2.6 Stability of foundations

Foundations shall be checked for stability against overturning, sliding & uplift. While
checking against uplift, the following shall be considered.
Foundation Design – Factors of Safety
Type of Minimum factor of safety Minimum factor of % Weight of

Structures against overturning safety against Sliding Overburden
over projected
With wind Without With wind Without
plan area of
or seismic wind or or wind or
footing
seismic seismic seismic
All Buildings/ 1.5 2.0 1.5 1.5 100
Structures /
Eqpt. In Units
Pipe Rack 1.5 2.0 1.5 1.5 50
Flood Light 1.5 - 1.5 1.5 50**
Mast
Retaining Wall 1.5 2.0 1.5 1.75 100
Flare 1.5 - 1.5 - 50**
supporting
Structures

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
** In case area is paved, overburden shall be based on NGL (for area under filling) or
600 mm below HPP, whichever is lower. In case of unpaved area, it shall be w.r.t. FGL.
Minimum factor of safety against uplift shall be 1.2 for all structure. (Note: In case of
sumps, lining weight shall not be included). Beneficial load of backfill can be included
on in circumstances where it will never be removed.
Buoyancy from high ground water levels shall be taken into account in investigating
stability against uplift.
3.3 Piled Foundations
Piles shall be designed as per IS: 2911 . However, pile capacity shall be proven by a
sufficient number of initial load tests before preparing piling plans.
The increase in Safe Working Load permitted as per codal provisions, under load
combinations including wind / earthquake shall apply equally to uplift and sheer
conditions, subject to confirmations by the piling CONTRACTOR with respect to the
particular piling system. Pile capacity may be similarly increased in blast condition to
1.5 times the permissible capacity under compression, tension and shear modes.
When any major machinery is to be supported on piles, behaviour of the piles under
dynamic, loading conditions, as established by necessary field test, shall be
considered.
The capacity of pile groups shall be obtained by applying appropriate group efficiency
factors. Where piles pass through filed ground, the available pile safe working load shall
be suitably reduced to account for negative skin friction caused by settlement of fill.
Where suitable, consideration shall be given to reducing drawdown effects by slip
coating the piles.
While computing horizontal capacity, piles shall be treated as fixed head or free head
depending on the degree of fixity at the top.
3.4 Machine Foundations
Machine / Mechanical equipment foundations shall satisfy the requirements of IS:2974
and any other parameters as per machine vendors.
Generally, foundations and structures supporting rotating machinery shall be so
proportioned that their natural frequency shall not fall within the range of 0.8 to 1.2 of
normal operating speed of the equipment. Further for major rotating machinery such as
main compressor, the amplitude of foundation of structure during normal operation shall
not exceed the allowable amplitude specified by the equipment manufacturer. The
above consideration may be omitted for centrifugal pumps and fans and other minor
rotating equipment weighing less than 1 ton or if the mass of the rotating parts are less
than 1/100th of the mass of foundation installed directly on concrete provided that the
weight of foundation is not less than 3 times of the equipment weight. In such cases,
dynamic analysis is not necessary.

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
When dynamic analysis is called for, the combined centre of gravity of the machine and
foundation system shall, as far as possible, pass through the centre of area of the
foundation raft or centroid of the pile group. Wherever unavoidable, eccentricity shall be
less than 5% for block foundations and 3% for frame foundations. However, in highly
compressible soils, no eccentricity shall be permitted.
Foundations shall be so designed that natural frequency of the foundation system shall
not resonate with the following:
a) Operating speed of the motor / turbine
b) Operating speed of the machine
c) 2 x Operating speed of the machine
d) Critical speed of the machine (for centrifugal machines)
It shall be ensured that there is no transfer of vibrations from machine foundations to
any part of the adjoining structures. In case such machine are sitting on building floors,
approved damping pads shall be used with prior approval of OWNER / CONSULTANT.
Where deviations (resulting from inaccuracies in soil parameter measurements,
approximations in design method, etc.) from calculated natural frequencies, leading to
amplitudes in excess of specified limits are foreseen, provision for increasing the
foundation mass without removal of the machine and without affecting surrounding
space availability or connected piping shall be made, if possible.
3.5 Concrete Grade
Grade of concrete to be used in foundation shall in general be as per the philosophy
adopted for the entire structure. However, minimum cement content, type of cement
and any remedial actions, if required for foundations due to aggressiveness of subsoil
water, shall be as stated elsewhere in this document. Minimum grade of reinforced
concrete shall be M25. For underground & water retaining structures, such as,
manholes, cooling tower etc. M 30 grade reinforced concrete shall be used.
3.6 Foundation Bolts
3.6.1 Minimum cover to Foundation Bolts

Minimum distance from the center line of foundation anchor bolt to edge of pedestal
shall be as per standard drawings.
3.6.2 All equipment foundation bolts / templates shall be designed and supplied by
equipment vendor.
Foundation bolts for steel structures shall be designed and supplied by CONTRACTOR
as per standard drawings or approved equivalent.
3.7 Pedestal Heights
Building plinth : 450 mm above finished ground level
Pedestals for structural columns:
Open paved area : 300 mm (min.) OR as indicated in
PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
Equipment layout drawing

Open unpaved area : 300 mm
Covered area(building etc.) : 300 mm (min.) OR as indicated in drawing
Storage tank foundation : As per equipment layout
All equipment supporting foundations / pedestals
Open area : As required but not less than 300 mm
Covered area : As required but not less than 150 mm
Stair Pedestals : 300 mm (min.) OR as indicated in equipment
Layout drawing.
Ladder pedestals : 300 mm
3.8 Design Criteria for Reinforced Concrete Structures

3.9 General
1) All buildings, structures retaining storage structures, trenches, pits etc. shall be of
RCC and designed based on the following IS codes (latest revision with all
amendments, issued there to) in general, and other relevant IS codes applicable :
IS:456, 875, 1893, 1904, 2911, 2950, 2974, 3370, 4326, 4991, 4998, 5249, 6403,
8009, 13920.
2) Only limit state method as per IS:456 shall be followed for the design unless
otherwise specified elsewhere in this document for special structures.
3) All skeletal structures shall be of frame type construction, and detailing shall be as
per provision of IS:13920.
4) Where the specified design depth of groundwater table so warrants, all
underground pits, tunnels, basements, etc. shall be leak-proof R.C.C. construction
using water proofing compounds.
3.10 Liquid Retaining R.C.C. Structures and Basements
3.10.1 All liquid retaining / storage R.C.C. structures shall be leakpoof and designed as
uncracked section in working stress method as per IS:3370. However, the parts of such
structures not coming in contact with the liquid, shall be designed according to IS:456
except ribs of beams of suspended floor slabs and counterforts of walls (located on the
side remote from liquid) and roof of liquid retaining structures which shall be designed
as uncracked section. Hot/cold water basin, and other primary framing members of
Cooling Towers and similar liquid retaining structures, which remain constantly in
contact with water (stored / sprayed) shall be designed as uncracked sections. No
increase in permissible stresses in concrete and reinforcement shall be made under
wind or seismic conditions for such structures.
3.10.2 All liquid retaining / storage structures shall be designed assuming liquid up to the full
height of wall, irrespective of provision of any overflow arrangement. Pressure relief
valves or similar pressure relieving devices shall not be considered in underground
water retaining RCC structures. Hot water basin in cooling tower shall be designed for
the weight of water up to top of parapet wall.
3.10.3 The walls and base slabs of liquid retaining storage structures shall be provided with
reinforcement on both faces for thicknesses greater than 150 mm.

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
3.10.4 In all liquid retaining structures, PVC water bars (230 mm wide, 6 mm thick) shall be
provided at each construction joint. PVC water bars shall be of minimum 150/230 mm
width and 6 mm thickness, and generally shall be riffed/serrated type with a central bulb
Kicker type PVC water bars shall be used for the base slab and in other areas where it
is required to facilitate concreting.
4.0 Concrete Grade
The minimum M25 grade of reinforced cement concrete shall be used for all structures
and foundations except for grade slabs / paving for which M20 may be used. From
durability consideration the minimum cement content and maximum water-cement ratio
shall be as follows :
Type of Plain concrete Reinforced concrete Remarks

Cement Exposure
Condition
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
cement water- cement water-
content cement content cement
(kg/m³) ratio (kg/m³) ratio
43 Grade-OPC 240 0.55 330 (for 0.45 Moderate
shallow
fdns)
-400 (for
piles)
Maximum cement content shall not exceed 450 kg/m³. If soil investigation report
recommends high cement content and / or specified type of cement, the same shall
have precedence.
75 mm thick lean concrete of grade M10 (nominal mix) shall be provided under all RCC
foundations except under base slab of liquid retaining structures where 100 thick
concrete of mix M10 (nominal mix) shall be used. The lean concrete shall extend 75
mm beyond the foundation for normal foundations and 100 mm under liquid retaining
structures.
Concrete for encasing shall be M20 with 10 mm down aggregate.
Plain cement concrete (PCC) of grade M15 (nominal mix) of minimum 150 mm
thickness shall be provided under all masonry wall foundations.
Plain cement concrete of grade M20 of minimum 40 mm thickness shall be provided as
damp proof course, at plinth level of all masonry walls and to be coated with 3 mm thick
bitumen emulsion.
4.1 Reinforcement Bars
High yield strength deformed TMT steel bars of grade Fe500D conforming to IS:1786
shall be used.

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
4.2 Minimum Cover to Reinforcement

Minimum clear cover shall be provided to all steel reinforcement as per IS:456 &
IS:3370.
4.3 Expansion Joints
Concrete structures
Expansion points in concrete structures shall be provided at 30-35 m centers. The
expansion joint shall be provided preferably by way of twin columns on a common
foundation. Sliding joints shall be avoided as far as possible.
4.4 Deflections
4.4.1 Deflections in concrete structures shall in general be limited by adherence to the limits
on span by depth ratio for beams and slabs and length to lateral dimension ratios for
columns as prescribed in IS:456. Where special functional / serviceability requirements
or large spans demand actual deflections and / or crack widths shall be calculated and
the following limits adhered to:
 Total deflection due to all loads including the : Span/250
Effects of temperature creep and shrinkage
 Crack width (for non-liquid retaining structure) : 0.3 mm
 Total horizontal deflection between two floors : Storey height/200
4.5 Miscellaneous Applications
4.5.1 Admixtures
Admixtures shall conform to IS:9103 and to be mixed with concrete (if required) strictly
as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.5.2 Plinth protection

Each building shall be provided with 1.0 m wide concrete M15, 100 thick laid on 75 mm
thick M7.5 concrete with 8 Tor @ 250 c/c both ways Reinforcement bars all round as
plinth protection. A surface drain to be provided along-with plinth protection which shall
be connected to the drainage system.
4.5.3 Ramps
Ramps for building entrance shall be cast in situ R.C.C. designed as a grade slab and
the slope of ramps shall not be less than 1 in 10. Minimum thickness of the slab shall
be 150 mm.
4.5.4 Hot Bitumen Paint

All underground structures including top surface of foundations shall be painted with
two coats of hot bitumen paint of grade 20/30 with quantity of bitumen at least 1.2 kg/m²
per coat.
4.5.5 Masonry Wall

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
a) All masonry walls from ground floor shall be placed on R.C.C. grade beams.
However, light internal partitions may be placed on ground floor slab.
b) All brick masonry (M 7.5 grade) walls shall be considered as 230mm thick, except
for partition walls which will be 115 mm thick. However, for fire barrier walls
minimum thickness shall be considered as 350 mm.
c) All in-filled brick (M7.5 grade) panels shall be designed to transfer horizontal loads
from wind and seismic to the structural frameworks without damage and the extent
of brick panel dimensions shall be as per the recommendations in IS. All half
masonry wall shall be provided with reinforcement consisting of 2 Nos. of 8mm
diameter bars at every fourth layer.
4.5.6 CRITERIA FOR MASONRY WORKS

4.5.6.1 General
All masonry works shall be designed in accordance with IS:1905, IS:1597, IS:2185,
IS:4326 and other relevant IS Codes as applicable. All external brick, stone and hollow
concrete block masonry walls shall be of minimum 230, 350 and 250 mm thickness
respectively. ES 2516, enclosed with the tender may be referred for details. Masonry
shall be plastered with CM 1:6, 12 mm thick on inside surfaces and 20 mm thick on
outside surfaces.
4.5.6.2 Cement Mortar
All masonry work shall be constructed in 1:6 cement sand mortar except half brick
partition walls which shall be constructed in 1:4 cement sand mortar with 2 nos.8mm
dia. M.S bars provided at every fourth course properly anchored with cross walls or
pillars.
5.0 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR STEEL STRUCTURES

5.1 General / Design Methods
5.1.1 Design, fabrication and erection of the above work shall be carried out in accordance
with the following IS Codes as applicable to the specific structures, viz, IS:800, 801,
802, 806, 814, 816, 875, 1893, 6533, 9595, etc. Basic consideration of structural frame
work shall primarily be stability, ease of fabrication/erection and overall economy,
satisfying relevant Indian Standard Codes of Practice. Steel structures adequately
braced in vertical and horizontal planes, consistent with functional requirements, shall
be preferred over structure having moment connections. Moment connections, if
adopted, shall be fully rigid as per IS:800. Where fully rigid joints are adopted they shall
generally be confined to the major axis of the column member. Flare stack supporting
structure shall be adequately braced on all four faces.
Structural elements, continuously exposed to temperatures above 200º C, shall be
designed for reduced stress as per Table-4 of IS:6533 (Part-2). The expected
temperature of steel components shall not be allowed to exceed 400 º C. The
structures connected to column, heater vessels working at high temperatures shall not
PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
be rigidly connected with staircase and adjoining structures, which are on ambient
temperatures.
5.1.2 Crane gantry girders shall generally be of welded construction and of single span
length. Chequered plate shall be used for gantry girder walkway flooring.
5.1.3 Steel staircases shall have channels provided as stringers with minimum clear width of
1000 mm. The vertical height between successive landings shall not exceed 4.0
meters. Treads shall be minimum 250 m wide made of grating (with curved chequered
plate nosing) spaced equally so as to restrict the rise to maximum 150 mm. If relevant
local by-laws or applicable Factory Act Rules stipulates more stringent requirements in
this regard, the same shall be adhered to.
5.1.4 Electro-forged galvanized MS gratings grating shall be minimum 30 mm deep. The
maximum size of voids in the grating shall be limited to 34 mm x 65 mm. The minimum
thickness of galvanizing shall be 86 microns. Gratings shall be suitable for the operation
and maintenance loads for the floors.
5.1.5 Bolted connections shall be adopted as far as practicable, except for cases where
welded connections are required viz. (Galvanized) electrical switchyard structures and
transmission towers. Structural connections shall have minimum two bolts of 16 mm
dia. unless otherwise limited by the size of members
5.1.6 Lock nuts shall be provided for anchor bolts of tall structures, tall process columns,
vibrating equipment, etc.
5.1.7 Minimum two nuts shall used for all anchor bolts except for ladder, stair and hand rail.
5.2 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be provided at 80 – 100 m centres, where possible, column
bracing shall be provided at the center of a longitudinal frame, rather than at the ends
so as to avoid constraints on free expansion.
5.3 Steel Grade
Structural steel shall be of yield stress of 250 Mpa conforming to grade B of IS:2062.
Tubular steel shall conform to Yst 310 of IS:1161 & 4 IS: 4923.
5.4 Limiting Permissible Stresses
Permissible stresses in structural members shall be as specified in various codes.
IS:800 - Hot rolled sections (excluding transmission towers and
Switchyard structures).
IS:801 - Cold formed light gauge sections
IS:802 - Transmission towers & switchyard structures
IS:806 - Tubular Structures
Permissible stresses in bolts shall be as specified in:
IS:800 - Hot rolled sections
IS:802 - Transmission towers & switchyard structures
PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
IS:806 - Tubular Structures

Permissible stresses in welds shall be as specified in:
IS:806 - Metal Arc Welding
5.5 Limiting Deflection
a) The limiting permissible vertical deflection for structural steel members shall be as
specified below :-
 Gantry girder for electric overhead crane (Capacity up : L/750
to 50T)
 Gantry girder for electric overhead crane (Capacity : L/1000
over 50T)
 Gantry girder for manually operated crane : L/500
 Girder beam for supporting dynamic equipment/hoist : L/450
 Grating / Chequered plate : L/200 or 6mm
Whichever is
less
 Purlins supporting any type of roofing material : L/200
 Under (dead load + live load) or (dead load + wind :
Load ) conditions
 Other structural components : As specified in
relevant IS,
Where “L”
represents the
span
 The limiting permissible horizontal deflection for : Height/325
multistoried steel structure/ building including flare
stack
5.6 Minimum Thickness
5.6.1 Structural Components

The minimum thickness of various structural components (Hot rolled sections) shall be
as given:
a. General Construction
 Trusses, Purlins, Side Girts, Bracings : 6 mm
 Columns, beams : 7 mm
 Gussets in trusses & girders
i. Upto and including 12 m span : 8 mm
PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
ii. Above 12 m span : 10 mm

 Flare Trestles, Stiffeners : 8 mm
 Base plates : 10 mm
 Chequered plate : 6 mm (on plain)
 Grating : 3 mm.
6.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS

6.1 Pipe rack/Cable rack
For designing the piperack superstructure and foundation the following loads shall be
considered:
6.1.1 Vertical Loading

Actual weights of pipes coming at each tier shall be calculated. In calculating the actual
weight of pipe, the class of pipe, material content and insulation, if any, shall be taken
into consideration. Insulation density shall be taken as 2600 N/m³ minimum. In case of
gas / steam carrying pipes, the material content shall be taken as one-third volume of
pipe filled with water. The total actual weight thus calculated, shall then be divided by
the actual extent of the span covered by the pipes to get the uniformly distributed load
per unit length of the span. To obtain the design uniformly distributed load, over the
entire span, the u.d.l. obtained as above, shall be assumed to be spread over the entire
span. However, minimum loading for any piperack shall not be less than 1.25 kN/m². In
case, the calculated loading is higher than 1.25 kN/m², this shall be rounded off to the
nearest multiple of 0.25 (i.e., 1.50, 1.75 kN/m²)
Vertical loads of flare pipe shall be taken as one third full of water for piping within units
& one sixth full for outside unit battery line. All flare line independent support shall be of
four legged braced open lower type construction.
In addition to piping load, gravity loads due to encasement, if any, shall be considered.
6.1.2 Friction Force (Longitudinal & Transverse)

Where the pipes are of similar diameter and service conditions, the friction force at
each tier on every portal both in longitudinal and transverse directions, shall be 10% of
the design vertical loading of the pipes for four or more pipes supported on a tier and
30% of the design vertical loading of the pipes, for single to three pipes supported on a
tier. Longitudinal friction force shall be considered as uniformly distributed over the
entire span of the beam at each tier and transverse friction force shall be considered as
a concentrated load at each tier level. Friction forces on T-supports and trestles shall be
taken as 30% of the vertical loading. Both longitudinal and transverse friction forces
shall be considered to be acting simultaneously.
For two-phase fluid flow/transfer lines frictional force shall be minimum 50% of the
weight of pipe including contents & insulation, acting simultaneously in transverse &
longitudinal direction.
PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
6.1.3 Anchor and Guide Force (Thermal Load)

Anchor and guide force (thermal load) in transverse and longitudinal direction shall be
as per piping data.
6.1.4 Loading on intermediate Beam at Tier Level

Intermediate beam at tier level shall be designed for 25% of load on main portal beams
in transverse direction. A reduction of 10% in vertical loading shall be considered for
main portal beams, if intermediate beams are provided.
6.1.5 Loading on Longitudinal beams

Longitudinal beams connecting portal columns shall be sufficiently strong to sustain
25% of the load on the transverse beams. The total load shall be assumed as two equal
concentrated loads acting at 1/3rd span. Other longitudinal axial forces coming on it
from the design of the supporting system shall also be simultaneously taken into
account in the design of the longitudinal beam. Friction & anchor forces, if specifically
given by the Piping Specialist, shall also be catered for in the design. Loads from
monorails, when supported from these beams, shall also be considered to be acting
simultaneously along with all other loads mentioned above.
6.1.6 Cable Tray and Walkway Loads

The estimated actual load from electrical, instrumentation trays shall be considered at
the specified locations, together with walkways, platforms for valve operation, wherever
provided.
6.1.7 Wind Force

Transverse wind loading shall be calculated depending on the width of the piperack as
per the following table. This force shall be considered irrespective of the height between
two tiers.
Width of Piperack Wind Force at each Tier level(N)

 Upto 4 m 1.25 x p x s
 Above 4 m but upto 6 m 1.50 x p x s
 Above 6 m but upto 10 m 2.00 x p x s
 Above 10 m projected height x p x s
Where p = Horizontal wind pressure as per IS:875 (N/m²)
s = Spacing of portals (m)
For pipe racks of width greater than 10 m, the projected height shall be lesser of the
following two:

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
P2
NIT FOR SEC - 2
1. 0.8 X (diameter of largest pipe including insulation (m) + tan 10º × (width of rack (m).
2. Height between consecutive tiers
6.1.8 For flare header or any other line supported on extended leg of piperack, the wind force
shall be considered separately.
6.1.9 Seismic Loads

Seismic loads shall be as per IS:1893(Latest Revision) .
6.1.10 Pipe racks should be adequately braced in all possible directions, consistent with
function requirements.
6.1.11 Limiting permissible horizontal deflection for piperack shall be height / 325.
6.2 Culverts
Culverts shall be designed as per the following IRC codes of practices and manual.
Where crane access is specified, the culverts shall be designed for the crane loads.
1. Standard specifications and code of practice for Road IRC 5

Bridges (Section – I - General features of design)
2. Standard specifications and code of practice for Road IRC 6

Bridges (Section-II – Load and Stresses)
3. Guidelines for Evaluation of Load Carrying Capacity of SP 37
Bridges

PNPM/PC150/E/112/
NIT FOR SEC – VI-2.1 0
TALCHER PAGE 1 of 14
SECTION - VI-2.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
EARTH WORKS
0 25.09.19 ISSUED FOR TENDER PURPOSE SK SS UPT

P 18.02.19 ISSUED FOR REVIEW SK SS UPT
REV REV DATE PURPOSE PREPD REVWD APPD
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC – VI-
0
2.1
FOR EARTH WORKS DOCUMENT NO REV.
PAGE 2 OF 14
ABBREVIATIONS:
Cms CENTIMETERES
DGMS DIRECTOR GENERAL OF MINES SAFETY
Gm/cc GRAM PER CUBIC CENTIMETRE
M METRE
M² SQUARE METRE
mm MILIMETRE
sqm SQUARE METRE

0
2.1
PAGE 3 OF 14
CONTENTS
Sl. No. Description Sheet Number
1. SCOPE
2. CODES & STANDARDS
3. GENERAL
4. MATERIAL FOR EARTHWORK
5. CUTTING TREES
6. CLEARING AND STRIPPING
7. EARTH WORK IN EXCAVATION CUTTING
8. EARTH WORK IN-FILLING
9. REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH
10. EXCAVATION IN ROCK

0
2.1
PAGE 4 OF 14
1.0 SCOPE
This specification and the method of measurements described thereon are applicable
for earthwork involved in Site Grading & Rock Cutting.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS

IS:2720 Part-IV Methods of tests for soils.
IS:2720 Part-V Methods of tests for soils- Part 5, Determination of liquid &
plastic limit.
IS:2720 Part-VII Methods of tests for soils-Part 6, Determination of shrinkage
factors.
6-65-0016 Std. Specification for classification of soil for earthwork in the
grading.
NOTE:- Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1 CONTRACTOR shall maintain adequate drainage facilities at SITE at all times during
the execution of work. Additional ditches, drains & such other temporary means to
achieve this, over and above what is shown in the drawings, shall be provided and
maintained by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
3.2 Adequate dewatering facilities like dewatering pumps and piping etc. shall also be
provided by the CONTRACTOR for this work, including dewatering during excavation
etc. as required, at his own cost.
4.0 MATERIAL FOR EARTHWORK
4.1 Only soil considered suitable by the Engineer-in-charge shall be deployed for the
construction and that considered unsuitable shall be disposed off, as directed by
Engineer-in-charge, at his own cost and no claim for compensation will be
entertained.
4.2 The CONTRACTOR shall give the samples of soil he proposes to use for filling, along
with the following characteristics of the samples, to Engineer-in-charge for approval,
prior to collection and use. The tests for these characteristics shall be done in a
laboratory / test house as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
i. Mechanical analysis or grain size analysis as per IS: 2720 Part-IV.

ii. Liquid limit as per IS: 2720 Part-V.
iii. Plastic limit as per IS: 2720 Part-V.
iv. Moisture density relationship as per IS: 2720 Part-VII.

0
2.1
PAGE 5 OF 14
4.3 The soil used for filling shall be free from boulders, lumps, tree roots, rubbish or any
organic deleterious matter.
4.4 Soil having plasticity index less than 20 shall be used, for filling purpose.
4.5 Soil having laboratory maximum dry density of less than 1.5 gms/cc shall not be used.
4.6 Care shall be taken to see that unsuitable waste material is disposed off in such a
manner that there is no likelihood of its getting mixed with the material, proposed to
be used, for filling.
4.7 The work shall be so planned and executed that the best available soil are reserved
for the top portion of Embankments.
5.0 CUTTING TREES
5.1 All trees having girth above 30 cms, which are not marked for preservation, shall be
Cut down and their roots dug up to a depth of 1 metre from the existing ground level.
Further, Relevant statutory approval shall be obtained in the name of owner by the
contractor without affecting completion schedule. However, all necessary assistance
shall be provided by owner.
5.2 All holes or hollows produced by digging up roots shall be carefully filled with
approved soil, including all leads and lifts, rammed and compacted to obtain 90% of
maximum laboratory dry density of soil and levelled as directed.
5.3 All uprooted trees shall be stacked or disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
5.4 Payment
Cutting of trees above 30 cms girth shall be paid per number. The rate quoted shall
include cutting, uprooting removing the trees within plant boundary as directed,
including filling holes or hollows produced by removal of roots etc. as per
specifications.
.
6.0 CLEARING AND STRIPPING
6.1 All the areas, including depressions, where filling or cutting is to be carried out shall
be cleared and stripped completely of bushes, roots, vegetation, plantation trees,
shrubs, trees up to 30 cms girth, organic and other objectionable materials. All these
shall be completely uprooted and virgin soil exposed and not merely scrapped at the
surface. The roots of trees of girth up to 30 cms shall be removed to a minimum depth
of 1M below existing ground level and holes, hollows filled up with selected approved
available soil within all leads and lifts and compacted to obtain 90% of laboratory dry
density of soil as per IS: 2720, Part VII and levelled as directed by Engineer-in-
charge. All soft patches must be worked out to remove soft soil and selected
approved earth must be filled back and the areas (areas coming under filling)
compacted to obtain 90% of maximum laboratory dry density of soil, as per IS: 2720
Part VII. The depth of stripping shall be generally 50 to 150 mm as decided by
0
2.1
PAGE 6 OF 14
Engineer-in-Charge.
6.2 Material obtained from clearing shall be stacked or disposed off as directed by
Engineer-in-charge within a lead as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.3 Payment
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping and disposal of materials
obtained from clearing. This shall be considered as part of cutting work in areas of
cutting and filling work in areas of filling and the rates quoted under the respective
items of
i.. Earthwork in Excavation/ Cutting
ii. Earthwork in filling (both with available earth & earth obtained from
approved borrow areas); shall be inclusive of clearing and stripping with all
operations described above in clause no.6 in respective areas of cutting
and filling.
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping .and disposal of materials
obtained from clearing of borrow areas for earth. This shall be considered as part of
filling work in area of filling and the rate quoted under the respective items.
7.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION/CUTTING
7.1 After clearing and stripping of areas as specified above in clause No.6, spot levels at
intervals and pattern as decided by the Engineer-in-charge, shall be taken jointly by
CONTRACTOR and Engineer-in-charge. Excavation / cutting shall commence only
after the levels are signed by the contractor as a token of his acceptance.
7.2 Excavation / cutting shall be carried out strictly as per the instruction of Engineer-in-
charge.
7.3 If the contractor excavates / cuts beyond the required level, additional quantity of
earthwork shall not be paid for. The excavation taken below the specified level shall
be made good by filling with approved material, to the required compaction, at
Contractor's cost.
7.4 The final bed and sides of excavation, must be levelled, dressed and compacted. In
case of areas under excavation for site grading, the final surface shall be levelled,
dressed and consolidated by means of sheep foot' power driven rollers to obtain
maximum compaction. However, no test control is required in such areas.
7.5 Shoring and strutting shall be adopted only with the permission of Engineer-in-charge
in writing. Such shoring and strutting shall follow the necessary specification.
7.6 Provisions for dewatering shall be governed by the relevant clauses.

0
2.1
PAGE 7 OF 14
7.7 Payment
Payment for Excavation shall be on the basis of volume of excavation calculated on
the basis of joint level taken as per clause 7.1 and the final finished grade levels, the
volume being calculated by the Trapezoidal rule including dewatering, if required.
Intermediate payment will be on the basis of volume calculated based on spot levels
taken during the time of the billing. Reference is also invited to clause 7.3.
8.0 EARTHWORK IN FILLING
8.1 After clearing, stripping and consolidation of areas as specified in clause 6, spot
levels at intervals and pattern as decided by Engineer-in-charge shall be taken jointly
by the CONTRACTOR and Engineer-in-Charge and filling shall commence only after
the levels are signed by the CONTRACTOR as a token of his acceptance. Approved
fill Material shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 30 cms in loose depth.
The contractor has to make his own approach and access roads from the borrow area
to the demarcated filling areas. While the CONTRACTOR may .make use of such
short cuts as may be available to him for earth movement from borrow areas to the
filling areas, the OWNER does not guarantee any passage way or right of way for the
CONTRACTOR's work other than available at site. No claim shall also be admissible
to the CONTRACTOR on account of his having to take longer leads or routes for
earth movement, than envisaged by him, either due to any road cuttings, non-
availability of routes, or any other grounds whatsoever.
In case total filling required in any area consists of soil both from borrow areas and
available approved excavated material from within plant area, then joint levels, shall
be taken before commencing filling with earth from borrow area.
However, earth available from borrow areas required for filling can be used only after
the available earth from excavation within demarcated area has been utilised and
clearance to this effect obtained from the Engineer-in-charge.
8.2 All clods, lumps etc, shall be broken before compaction.
8.3 Successive layers of filling shall not be placed until the layer below has been
thoroughly compacted and tested to satisfy the requirements laid down in this
specification.
8.4 Prior to rolling, the moisture content of material shall be brought to within plus or
minus 2% of the Optimum Moisture Content as described in IS: 2720 Part VII. The
moisture content shall preferably be on the wet side for potentially expansive soil.
8.5 After adjusting the Moisture Content as described in clause 8.4, the layers shall be
thoroughly compacted by either sheep foot roller or power driven roller or vibratory
roller, as approved by Engineer-in-charge, till the specified maximum laboratory dry
density is obtained.
0
2.1
PAGE 8 OF 14
8.6 Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by Engineer-in-charge,
subject to achieving the required density, before laying the next layer. A minimum of
one test per 500m2 for each layer shall be conducted.
8.7 If the layer fails to meet the required density, it shall be reworked or the material shall
be replaced and method of construction altered as directed by Engineer-in-charge to
obtain the required density.
8.8 The filling shall be finished in conformity with the alignment, levels, cross-section and
dimensions as shown in the drawing.
Earthen embankment shall be filled 300mm more on both sides, where height is more
than 1M and this extra filling shall be dressed, after compaction, in conformity with
alignment, level, cross-section and dimension as shown in the drawing, to achieve
proper compaction in the slope. No extra payment shall be made in this regard.
8.9 Extra material shall be removed and disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.
8.10 Tolerances
General site grading, including cutting and filling in depressions, shall be carried out
to within up down tolerance of ±5 cms of final lines, grades and slopes.
8.11 Earth Work in Filling in Open Lined / Unlined Wells
For earth work in filling in open lined/unlined wells, only locally available coarse sand
shall be used, in layers of 500 mm thickness. Each layer shall be thoroughly wetted
by sprinkling water, before next layer is filled up. Filling shall be done up to 1m depth
below NGL as above. Layers from a depth of 1m below NGL, up to NGL, shall also
comprise of locally available coarse sand and compacted with suitable Mechanical
manual means, to obtain same level of compaction as required for filling above NGL.
Filling above NGL shall be done as per Cl. 8.1 to 8.10 above.
8.12 Payment
8.12.1 Payment for filling shall be made on cubic metre of volume calculated on the basis of
cross section plotted from the levels of ground, where filling is to be carried out and
the levels reached after filling is duly consolidated, volume being calculated by
Trapezoidal method.
8.12.2 In case of simultaneous cut and fill operation, wherever specified, payment shall be
made on the basis of one composite rate for cutting and filling.All other details about
measurement etc. remaining same as above.
8.12.3 Payment for filling in open wells, lined or unlined, shall be made on the basis of
volume calculated on the basis of average area mult6iplied with depth of open well.
8.12.4 No extra payment shall be made towards testing.

0
2.1
PAGE 9 OF 14
9.0 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH
9.1 Surplus earth and soil from excavation and general site grading shall be removed
from the construction areas to the area demarcated by the Engineer-in-charge.
9.2 Payment
Payment shall be made only for lead beyond initial lead from construction area. Rate
shall include loading, transportation, dumping, stacking the surplus earth and soil in
the area demarcated by the Engineer-in-charge.
Payment shall be made on cubic metre basis of the difference of measurements of

the volumes of the excavation and the measurement of the filling with the excavated
earth. However, the contractor's entitlement to payment shall be restricted to the
actual quantity of earth removed. Quantity generated due to void in back filled volume
of earth shall also be removed by the contractor at no extra cost and this disposal of
earth shall not be measured and paid under any item.
10.0 EXCAVATION IN ROCK.
10.1 Blasting operations shall be carried out with the prior permission and in the presence
of the Engineer-in-charge or his authorised representative and during fixed time hours
of the day. Blasting operations shall be carried out as per Indian Explosive Rules
1983, amended up to date. The contractor shall obtain license from Controller of
explosives to carry out blasting operations as well as for obtaining and storing the
explosives as per Indian Explosive Rules (latest). All safety precautions such as
providing safety nylon netting etc. shall be carried out as per instructions of the
Engineer-in-charge.
10.1.1 The contractor shall ensure that all workmen and the personnel at site except those
who have actually to light the fuse are evacuated from the unsafe area to be
determined by the Engineer and warned by loud speaker in local language to safe
distance, not less than 200 metres at least 15 minutes before firing time by sounding
warning siren. The area shall be encircled by red flags. The contractor shall be
responsible for any accident to workmen, public or property due to blasting operation.
10.1.2 Gunpowder, gelatine and other safe explosives only shall be used wherever possible.
Explosives with nitro-glycerine shall be used only under exceptional circumstances,
with prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
10.1.3 All fuses shall be cut to the length required, before being inserted into the holes.
10.1.4 The no. of charges to be fired and the actual no. of shots heard shall be compared
and the person responsible must satisfy himself by examination that all the charges
have exploded before work people are permitted to approach the scene. The
withdrawal of a charge, which has not exploded shall under no circumstances be
permitted, such charges shall be flooded with water and the hole marked into a
distinguishing manner. The next hole to be fired shall be at a distance of about 500
mm from the unexploded hole and fired in the usual way.

0
2.1
PAGE 10 OF 14
The contractor or any .of his competent authorised person shall be in charge of the
blasting operations and shall be held responsible for strictly observing the safety
rules, .particularly applicable to blasting operations, in addition to other safety rules.
10.1.5 For blasting rocks with dynamite, the following general principles shall be observed.
In general, the following diameter of drills shall be used for different depth of
borehole's.
From 1-2 metres 25mm diameter

From 2-3.25 metres 37-50mm diameter
From 3.25-4.75metres 50-65mm diameter
The boreholes should generally be not more than 1.5m'deep and the distance apart
should be from one and a half to twice their depth.
Cracks and fissures in the rock to be blasted shall be carefully studied to ascertain the
best position for the boreholes. The charge shall always be placed in a sound piece of
rock, if possible not nearer than 300mm from the crack.
10.2 Rules for Blasting with Dynamite and other High Explosives
10.2.1 The Person-in-charge must show that he is thoroughly acquainted with the blasting
operations and that he understands the rules laid down herewith. He will be held
responsible for any accident that may occur. He must be a licenced blaster with a
valid licence from DGMS.
10.2.2 Boreholes must be of such a size and uniform that the cartridges can easily pass
down them.
10.2.3 The position of all holes to be drilled must be marked out with white paint and the
person in-charge must take particular note of these positions.
10.2.4 The drilling operation after being finished, the person-in-charge must make a second
inspection and satisfy himself that the boreholes marked out by him have been drilled
and cleaned properly.
10.2.5 The person-in-charge must prepare all charges necessary for boreholes.
10.2.6 Number of holes to be loaded and fired at one time shall be as per explosive rules.
Boreholes must be thoroughly cleared before a cartridge is inserted.
The loading is to be done by the person-in-charge himself and the position of the
charge holes' carefully noted by him. Circular wooden 'tamping rods only to be used
in charging holes with flat bottom, (one cartridge at a time must be inserted) and
cartridge gently pressed with the tamping rod.

0
2.1
PAGE 11 OF 14
10.2.7 Immediately before firing a blast, due warning must be given and the person-in-
charge must see that all the labours have retired to safety.
10.2.8 The safety fuses of the charged holes are to be lighted in the presence of the person-
in-charge, who must see that the fuses of the holes charged have properly ignited.
After the blast, the person-in-charge must carefully inspect the work and satisfy
himself that all the charges have exploded.
10.3 Misfires
10.3.1 Misfires are a source of great danger. If it is suspected that part of the blast to fire is
delayed, sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse before entering the danger zone.
When fuse and blasting caps are used, a safe time of at least an hour should be
allowed.
10.3.2 None of the drillers are to work near these holes until the three following operations
have been done by the person-in-charge.
a. The Person-in-charge .should very carefully extract the tamping with a wooden
scrapper and withdraw the fuse with the primer and detonator attached, after
which a fresh primer and detonator with fuse should be placed in this hole and
fired; or
b. The hole may be cleared of 300mm of tamping and the direction then
ascertained by placing a stick in the hole. Another hole may then be drilled
150mm away and parallel to it: this hole to be then charged and fired when the
other charge should explode.
c. Drilling in holes not completely exploded by blasting shall not be permitted.
10.4 Precautions against Misfire
10.4.1 The safety fuse should be cut in an oblique direction with a knife.
10.4.2 All saw dust must be cleared from the inside of the detonator; this can be done by
blowing down the detonation and tapping the. open end. No instrument shall be
inserted into the detonator for this purpose.
10.4.3 After inserting the fuse in the detonator, it shall be fixed by means of nippers.
10.4.4 If there is water present, or if the boreholes be damp, the junction of the fuse and
detonator must be made water tight by means of grease, white lead or tar.
10.4.5 The detonator should be inserted into the cartridge, so that about one third of the
copper tube is left exposed outside the explosives. The safety fuse outside the
detonator, should be necessarily tied in position in the cartridge. Waterproof fuse only
to be used in the damp boreholes, or when water is present in the borehole.

0
2.1
PAGE 12 OF 14
10.4.6 If a misfire has been found to be due to defective fuse, detonator or dynamite, the
whole quantity or box from which the detective article was used shall be rejected.
10.4.7 Storage of materials for blasting shall be as per statutory regulations / stipulations of
the concerned authorities.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to arrange for proper storage of explosives

and obtain required permissions from concerned authorities. No separate payment
shall be payable for the above.
10.4.8. Cleaning of Excavation
Excavation shall be cleaned, ttimmed to exact shape and all disturbed material 'and
other debris shall be removed. When the excavation have been taken out to the lines
specified as shown on the drawings and the surface cleaned as specified, the
contractor shall notify the Engineer that the excavation is ready for inspection and no
further work shall be done with concrete or backfill until it has been inspected and
approved by the Engineer. Cost of this work is deemed to have been included in the
unit rates for excavation.
10.4.9. Use of Excavation Material
Where any material obtained from the excavation is, in the opinion of the Engineer,
suitable for use in a particular section of the work as fill or backfill, such material shall
be selected and if necessary, loaded, hauled, placed, spread and used to construct
the fill or backfill with respect to the lines and grades specified for the work. As far as
possible the most suitable of the materials excavated for the work shall be used to
construct the fill and backfill embankments, roads and storage areas, where required.
The useful rock available shall be stacked at the locations as decided by the Engineer
and the cost of this work is deemed to have been included in the Unit rate of
excavation.
Materials containing brush roots or other perishable materials shall not be considered
suitable. The suitability of the materials and their disposition in the work shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
10.4.10 Disposal of Surplus material
All surplus materials shall be carried away from the site and disposed at dumping
sites selected by the Engineer, up to a lead as indicated in the relevant items of the
schedule of rates. The Engineer may ask the contractor to dump the excavated
materials in regular heaps, bunds, blankets', riprap with regular slopes as directed by
the Engineer and levelled so as to provide natural drainage. As a rule, all softer
material shall be laid along the centre of heaps, with the harder and more weather
resisting materials forming the casing on the sides and the top. Excavated rocks,
which can be used in soling as road metals or for making concrete aggregate shall be
stacked separately, as directed by the Engineer. All such works as mentioned above
is deemed to have been taken into account while. quoting for the excavation and the
contractor for the above works shall claim no extras.
0
2.1
PAGE 13 OF 14
All rock excavated from the pits shall be the property of the Owner.
10.4.11 Stock Piles
When the removal of material from excavation progresses at a faster rate or at

different times than placement in backfill is being accomplished, such excavated
materials shall be stock piled at approved locations adjacent to the work until their use
is authorised.
10.4.12 Spoil Areas
Material excavated for the works, which is rejected as unsuitable or not required by
the Engineer, shall be disposed of in spoil areas as specified-by the Engineer.
The spoil areas shall be left in a neat and sight condition and sloped to drain properly
as may be directed by the Engineer.
10.5 Control Blasting
10.5.1 General
This specification lays down .the requirements for control blasting for rock
excavations wherever required.
Wherever required by the Engineer, the rock blasting shall be controlled, so that
vibration generated during the blasting do not cause damage to the buildings and
installation around built up areas. Similarly the rock pieces should not fly off the pits
and thus damage the buildings and installation around. Apart from the general
precautions mentioned in the preceding paragraphs, following protective measures
are suggested as guidelines. Tenderers are requested to carefully check the site
conditions and submit the details of the scheme they propose to adopt for controlling
the blast.
10.5.2 Protective Measures
a.Short delay blasting with light charges shall be used.

b.The blast hole shall be covered with 0.6 to 1.0 sqm. Mild steel plate of
minimum 6mm thickness.
c. Reinforcement rod mesh, not less than 20mm dia at 150mm centres in
both directions, shall be put over the steel plates.

d. Steel plate and reinforcements shall be inspected after every blasting
operation and all twists shall be removed before reuse, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer-in-Charge.
e.The thickness of the covering plate and the kind of dead weight shall be duly got
0
2.1
PAGE 14 OF 14
approved from the Engineer-in-Charge.
When blasting is necessary adjacent to partially or completely built structures, the

contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent flying rock from causing
damage to the structures.
In no case shall blasting be allowed closer than 15m to any structure after concrete
placing has started.
The contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by blasting, whether
permanent or temporary structure and shall replace or repair the structures at his own
cost.
10.6 Classification of soil
If soil of any classifications other than that specified in the Schedule of Rates is met
during excavation, the decision of the Engineer-in-charge as to the classification of
soil, levels of the strata of different classifications and their locations shall be binding.
In above case, the total quantity of Excavation shall be computed from the
measurement of the area excavated. The hard rock and soft rock shall be measured'
separately from the relevant stacks and each shall be reduced by fifty percent for
voids, and paid under the relevant items. The balance, that is the total quantity of
excavation minus the reduced (for voids) quantity of excavation for rocks shall be paid
as soil as per the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge. However, the maximum
payment shall be limited to the volume of the area excavated, as approved by
Engineer-in-charge.

PNPM/PC
NIT FOR 150/E/112/SEC –VI- 0
DOC. NO. REV.
TALCHER PAGE 1 of 36
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL
AND
OTHER ALLIED WORKS
0 25.09.19 ISSUED FOR TENDER PURPOSE SK SS UPT

P 18.02.19 FOR REVIEW SK SS UPT
REV REV DATE PURPOSE PREPD REVWD APPD
PNPM/PC 150/E/112/SEC
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL & –VI- 2.2
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 2 of 36
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NUMBER

1. GENERAL 3
2. REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS 3
3. EARTH WORK 5
4. PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK 9
5. STEEL REINFORCEMENT 14
6. FORM WORK 15
7. BRICK WORK 16
8. WOOD WORK 18
9. STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 18
10. PAINTING ON STRUCTURAL STEEL 23
11. M.S. GALVANISED GRATING 28
12. ALUMINIUM GRATING 28
STEEL/ALUMINIUM DOORS,WINDOWS AND

13. 28
VENTILATORS
14. NON-ASBESTOS SHEETS FOR ROOFING AND 28
CLADDING.
15. FLOORING AND PAVING 29
16. PLASTERING 30
17. WHITE & COLOUR WASHING, CEMENT PAINTING 30
18. GLAZING 32
19. PROTECTIVE COATING AND LINING SYSTEM 32
20. HYDRO TESTING 35

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 3 of 36
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Specifications of materials and workmanship shall be as described in the Central

Public Works Department Specifications Vol. I to VI (latest) including latest
amendments, unless otherwise specified. These CPWD Specifications shall be
deemed to form part of this contract. The CONTRACTOR shall procure and maintain
copies of the latest CPWD Specifications at site for reference.
1.2 These technical Specifications shall be supplementary to the specifications contained

in the CPWD specifications, wherever at variance, these Particular Specifications
shall take precedence over the provisions in the CPWD Specifications.
1.3 Site clearing - Site clearing means the cutting of trees, bushes, shrubs etc. and the
pulling out of roots and stumps to effect a general cleaning of the site area. All these
materials shall be removed from the site area at the CONTRACTOR's expenses and
responsibility and shall be disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Trees,
bushes, roots, stumps and other materials shall not be disposed off by burning within
the site boundaries unless the Engineer-in-Charge permits.
2.0 REFERENCE CODES & STANDARDS
2.1 Wherever reference of BIS Specifications/ or BIS Codes of Practice are made in the
Specifications/ Schedule of Rates or Preambles, reference shall be to the latest
edition of BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards).
BIS - 109 Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming, plaster to Indian Standard
colour No. 631 & 361 white and off-white.
BIS - 248 Sodium bisulphite, technical (sodium metabisuphite).
BIS- Specification for Ordinary Portland Cement
269(2015)
BIS - 383 Coarse & Fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
BIS - 419 Putty, for use on window frames.
BIS - 427 Distemper, dry, colour as required.
BIS - 432 Mild Steel & Medium tensile steel bars.
BIS - 456 Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete.
BIS - 515 Natural and Manufactured aggregates for use in mass concrete
BIS - 730 Hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing
BIS - 800 Code of Practice for General Construction in Steel
BIS - 814 Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of carbon and
carbon manganese steel.
BIS - 815 Classification coding of covered electrodes for metal arc welding of
structural steels.
BIS - 816 Metal Arc Welding for General Construction of Mild Steel.
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 4 of 36
BIS - 817 Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders.
BIS - 883 Code of practice for structural timber in building.
BIS - 1038 Steel doors, windows and ventilators
BIS - 1079 Hot rolled carbon steel sheets & strips
BIS - 1081 Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel & aluminium)
doors, windows and ventilators.
BIS - 1161 Steel tubes for structural purposes.
BIS - 1285 Wrought aluminium & aluminium alloy extruded round tube and
hollow sections
BIS - 1361 Steel windows for Industrial Buildings.
BIS - 1363 Hexagon head bolts, screws & nuts of product grade C : Part - I
Hexagon head bolts ( size range M5 to M64)
BIS - 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners
BIS - 1566 Hard - Drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.
BIS - 1786 High strength deformed steel bars & wires for concrete
reinforcement.
BIS - 2062 Steel for general structural purposes.
BIS - 2116 Sand for masonry mortars.
BIS - 2212 Code of practice for brickwork.
BIS - 2386 Methods of test for aggregates.
BIS - 2553 Safety glass: Part-I General purpose.
BIS - 2835 Flat transparent sheet glass
BIS - 3007 Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement sheets.
BIS - 4021 Timber door, window and ventilator frames
BIS - 4923 Hollow Steel sections for structural use.
BIS - 4925 Concrete batching and mixing plant.
BIS - 5410 Cement Paint
BIS - 6477 Dimensions for wrought aluminium & aluminium alloys, extruded
hollow sections.
BIS - 7318 Fusion welding of steel.
BIS - 10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.
IS - 14871 Products in Fibre Reinforced Cement – Long Corrugated or

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 5 of 36
Asymmetrical Section Sheets and Fittings for Roofing and Cladding

- Specification
3.0 EARTHWORK
3.1 EXCAVATION
3.1.1 Excavation shall be carried out in soil of any nature and consistency, in the presence
of water or in the dry, met on the site to the lines, levels and contours shown on the
detailed drawings and CONTRACTOR shall remove all excavated materials to soil
heaps on site or transport for use in filling on the site or stack them for reuse as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.1.2 Surface dressing shall be carried out on the entire area occupied by the buildings
including plinth protection as directed without any extra cost. The depths of
excavation shown on the drawings are the depths after surface dressing.
3.1.3 The site around all buildings and structures to a width of 3 metres beyond the edge of
plinth protection, ramps, steps, etc. shall be dressed and sloped away from the
buildings.
3.1.4 Black cotton soil, and other expansive or unsuitable soils excavated shall not be used
for filling in foundations, and plinths of buildings or in other structures including
manholes, septic tanks etc. and shall be disposed off within the contract area marked
on the drawings, as directed, leveled and neatly dressed.
3.1.5 In case of trenches exceeding 2 metres depth or where soil is soft or slushy, the sides
of trenches shall be protected by timbering and shoring. The CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible to take all necessary steps to prevent the sides of trenches from caving in
or collapsing. The extent and type of timbering and shoring shall be as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.1.6 Where the excavation is to be carried out below the foundation level of adjacent
structure, the precautions to be taken such as under pinning, shoring and strutting
etc. shall be determined by Engineer-in-Charge. No excavation shall be done unless
such precautionary measures are carried out as per directions of Engineer-in-
Charge.
3.1.7 Specification for Earth work shall also apply to excavation in rock in general. The
excavation in rock shall be done such that extra excavation beyond the required width
and depth as shown in drawings is not made. If the excavation done in depth greater
than required /ordered. The CONTRACTOR shall fill the extra excavation with
concrete of mix 1:5:10 as the foundation concrete at his own cost.
3.1.8 CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements for dewatering / defiling as
required to carry out proper excavation work by bailing or pumping out water, which
may accumulate in the excavation pit from any cause/ source whatsoever.
3.1.9 CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable draining arrangements at his own cost to
prevent surface water entering the foundation pits from any source.

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 6 of 36
3.1.10 The CONTRACTOR is forbidden to commence the construction of structures or to

carry out concreting before Engineer-in-Charge has inspected, accepted and
permitted the excavation bottom.
3.1.11 Excavation in disintegrated rock means rock or Boulders including brickbats which
may be quarried or split with crow bars. This will also include laterite and hard
conglomerate.
3.1.12 Excavations in hard rock - meant excavation made in hard rock to be done manually,
or by blasting using only explosives and / or pneumatic hammers. In case of blasting,
control blasting should be adopted depending on site conditions. For using explosives
CONTRACTOR shall follow all provisions of Indian Explosives Act / Rules 1983,
corrected / revised up to date.
3.1.13 In case of hard rock excavation to be carried out using explosives the,
CONTRACTOR shall obtain the written approval in advance.
3.1.14 The measurements for excavations shall be restricted and limited to minimum
excavation line as per drawing for payment purposes.
3.1.15 Adequate protective measures shall be taken to see that the excavation does not
affect or damage adjoining structures. The CONTRACTOR shall take all measures
required for ensuring stability of the excavation and safety of property and people in
the vicinity. The CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain during progress of work,
temporary fences around dangerous excavations at no extra cost.
3.1.16 Excavation in ordinary soil means excavation in ordinary hard soil including stiff
heavy clay, hard shale, or compact murum, or any material, which can be removed
by the ordinary application of spades, shovels, picks and pick axes. This shall also
include removal of isolated boulders each having a volume not more than 0.50m³.
3.1.17 Excavation in soft rock includes limestone, sandstone, laterite, hard conglomerates,
etc. or other rock which can be quarried or split with crowbars or wedges. This shall
also include excavation of tarred pavements, masonry work and rock boulders each
having a volume of not more than 0.25m³.
3.1.18 Excavation in hard rock includes any rock bound in ledges or masses in its original
form or cement concrete for which in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge,
requires the use of compressed air, equipment, sledge hammer and blasting or non-
explosive materials viz. Acconex manufactured by A.C.C. Ltd. Specifications and
instructions for use shall be as per manufacturer.
3.1.19 In case of any difficulty concerning the interpretation of type of soil as mentioned
above, the Engineer-in-Charge shall decide whether the excavation in a particular
material is in ordinary soil, soft rock or hard rock and his decision in this matter shall
be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR and without appeal.
3.2 FILLING
3.2.1 Back filling of excavations in trenches, foundations and elsewhere shall consist of one
of the following materials approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 7 of 36
i. Soil
ii. Sand
iii. Moorum
iv. Hard-core
v. Stone/gravel
All back filling material shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2.2 Soil filling - Soil material shall be free from rubbish, roots, hard lumps and any other
foreign organic material. Filling shall be done in regular horizontal layers each not
exceeding 20 Cm. depth.
3.2.3 Back filling around completed foundations, structures, trenches and in plinth shall be
done to the lines and levels shown on the drawings.
3.2.4 Back filling around pipes in the trench shall be done after hydro testing is done.
3.2.5 Back filling around liquid retaining structures shall be done only after leakage testing
is completed and approval of Engineer-in-Charge is obtained.
3.2.6 Sand used for filling under foundation concrete, around foundation and in plinth etc.
shall be fine/ coarse, strong, clean, free from dust, organic and deleterious matter.
The sand filling under foundation shall be rammed with Mech. compactor. Sand
material shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2.7 Moorum for filling, where ordered, shall be obtained from approved pits and quarries
which contain siliceous material and natural mixture of clay. Moorum shall not contain
any admixture of ordinary earth. Size of moorum shall vary from dust to 10 mm.
3.2.8 Hard-core shall be of broken stone of 90 mm to 10 mm size suitable for providing a

dense and compact sub grade. Stones shall be sound, free from flakes, dust and
other impurities. Hard core filling shall be spread and leveled in layers, 15 cm thick,
watered and well compacted with ramming or with mechanical / hand compacts
including hand packing wherever required.
3.2.9 If any selected fill material is required to be borrowed, CONTRACTOR shall make
arrangements and procure such material from outside borrow pits. The material of
source shall be subject to prior approval of Engineer-in-Charge. CONTRACTOR
shall make necessary access roads to borrow areas and maintain the same, if such
access roads do not exist, at no extra cost.
3.2.10 Plinth filling shall be carried out with approved material as described earlier, in
layers not exceeding 150mm, watered and compacted with mechanical compaction
machines. Engineer-in-Charge may however permit manual compaction by hand
tampers in case he is satisfied that mechanical compaction is not possible. When
filling reaches the finished level, the surface shall be flooded with water, unless
otherwise directed, for at least 24 hours, allowed to dry and then the surface again

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 8 of 36
compacted as specified above to avoid settlements at later stage. The finished

level of the filling shall be trimmed to the level specified. Compacted surface shall
have at least 95% of laboratory maximum dry density. A minimum of one test per
500 sq. meters of compacted area shall be done.
3.2.11 Whenever the fill material (earth or soil) is purchased, CONTRACTOR shall get the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange to determine
the following properties of the soil and shall get the approval of Engineer-in-
Charge.
Clay content : 15% to 20%
Laboratory dry density : Not less than 1600 kg/m³
Plasticity Index : Not more than 20.
3.2.12 The fill shall be compacted using a vibrating compactor of not less than 1.5 tonne.
The fill shall be thoroughly compacted in layers as directed but not more than 200
mm thick. Adequate water shall be used for compaction and the density after
compaction shall be not less than maximum dry density obtained in test of BIS:
2720 Part-8. Compacted surface shall have at least 90% of laboratory maximum
dry density. A minimum of one test per 500 sq. meters of compacted area shall be
done.
3.2.13 The Gravel fill shall be non plastic granular material, well graded, strong, with
maximum particle size of 50 mm, with not more than 15% passing a 4.75 mm BIS
sieve, free of all debris, vegetable matter and chemical impurities.
3.2.14 All clods, lumps etc. shall be broken before compaction.
3.2.15 In case of grading/banking successive layers of filling shall not be placed, until the
layer below has been thoroughly compacted to satisfy the requirements laid down
in this specification.
Prior to rolling, the moisture content of material shall be brought to within +/-2% of
the optimum moisture content as described in BIS 2720 Part-7. The moisture
content shall preferably be on the wet side for potentially expansive soil.
After adjusting the moisture content as described, the layers shall be thoroughly
compacted by means approved by Engineer-in-Charge, till the specified maximum
laboratory dry density is obtained.
General, fill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 300 mm thickness and shall be
thoroughly compacted to achieve a compaction of at least 90% of laboratory
maximum dry density up to a depth of 600 mm below finished grade. Final fill of
600 mm thickness shall consist of preferably natural material in, as dug condition
except that stones larger than 100 mm shall be removed. It shall be placed in
layers not exceeding 150 mm thickness and compacted to achieve of at least 95%
of laboratory maximum dry density. Each layer shall be tested in field for density
and accepted by Engineer-in-Charge, subject to achieving the required density
before laying the next layer. A minimum of one test per 500 sq meters for each
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 9 of 36
layer shall be conducted.
If the layer fails to meet the required density, it shall be reworked or the material
shall be replaced and method of construction altered as directed by Engineer-in-
Charge to obtain the required density.
The filling shall be finished in conformity with the alignment, levels, cross-section
and dimensions as shown in the drawing.
Extra material shall be removed and disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
4.0 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK
This specifications deals with cement concrete, plain or reinforced, for general use,
and covers the requirements for concrete materials, their storage, grading, mix
design, strength & quality requirements, pouring at all levels, reinforcements,
protection, curing, form work, finishing, painting, admixtures, inserts and other
miscellaneous works.
4.1 MATERIALS
4.1.1 Cement: Any of the following cements may be used as required.

BIS - 269 Ordinary Portland cement, 33 grade
BIS - 8041 Rapid hardening Portland cement
BIS - 455 Portland slag cement
BIS - 8112 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement
BIS - 12330 Sulphate resistant ordinary Portland cement
BIS - 12269 53 Grade ordinary port land cement
BIS - 6909 Specifications for super Sulphate cement
4.1.2 Water: Water used for mixing and curing concrete and mortar shall conform to the
requirements as laid down in BIS: 456. Sea water shall not be used for concrete work.
4.1.3 Aggregates: Coarse and fine aggregates for cement concrete plain and reinforced
shall conform to the requirements of BIS 383 and / or BIS 515. Before using, the
aggregates shall be tested as per BIS: 2386.
Coarse aggregate: Coarse aggregate for all cement concrete work shall be broken or
crushed hard stone, black trap stone obtained from approved Quarries or gravel.
Sand: Fine aggregate for concrete work shall be coarse sand from approved
sources. Grading of coarse sand shall be within grading zones I, II or III laid down in
BIS: 383, table 4. If required the aggregates (both fine and coarse) shall have to be
thoroughly washed and graded as per direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2 MIXING
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 10 of 36
All cement concrete plain or reinforced shall be machine mixed. Mixing by hand may
be employed where quantity of concrete involved is small, with the specific prior
permission of the Engineer-in-Charge. 10% extra cement shall be added in case of
hand mixing as stipulated in BIS-456.
For large and medium project sites the concrete shall be sourced from ready- mixed
concrete plants or from on site or off site batching and mixing plants (BIS 4926)
4.3 WATER CEMENT RATIO
Once a mix, including its water-cement ratio, has been determined and specified for
use by the Engineer-in-Charge, that water cement ratio shall be maintained.
4.4 LAYING
Concreting shall be commenced only after the Engineer-in-Charge has inspected

and passed the sub-base / base or the centering, shuttering and reinforcement.
Concrete in slab beams, columns, footings etc. shall be laid gently in layers not
exceeding 15 cm and shall be properly consolidated by means of approved
mechanical vibrators.
4.5 CURING
a. After the concrete has begun to harden, it shall be protected with moist gunny
bags, sand or any other material approved by the Engineer-in-Charge against
quick drying. After 24 hours of laying concrete, the surface shall be cured by
flooding with water or by covering with wet absorbent materials for 7 days as per
the direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
b. Approved curing compounds may be used in lieu of moist curing with the
permission of the Engineer-in-Charge. Such compounds shall be applied to all
exposed surfaces of the concrete as soon as possible after the concrete has set.
No extra payment shall be made for the same.
4.6 GRADES OF CONCRETE

4.6.1 Grades of cement concrete shall be as given below:
Characteristic compressive strength at 28
Grade Specified
days ( N/mm2)
i. M 7.5 7.5 ( 75 Kg/cm2 )
ii. M 10 10 ( 100 Kg/cm2 )
iii. M 15 15 (150 Kg/cm2 )
iv. M 20 20 ( 200 Kg/cm2 )
v. M 25 25 (250 Kg/cm2 )
vi. M 30 30 ( 300 Kg/cm2 )
4.6.2 Grades lower than M 20 shall not be used in reinforced concrete or as specified in
SOR.
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 11 of 36
4.6.3 M 10 grades of concrete may be used for lean concrete bases & M 15 for simple
foundation of masonry walls.
4.6.4 A sieve analysis test of aggregates shall be carried out as and when the source of
supply is changed without extra charge not withstanding the mandatory test required
to be carried out as per CPWD specification.
4.6.5 All tests in support of mix design shall be maintained as a part of records of the
contract. Test cubes for mix design shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR under
his own arrangements and at his costs, but under the supervision of the Engineer-in-
Charge.
4.7 DESIGN MIX CONCRETE
4.7.1 Design mix shall be allowed for major works where it is contemplated to be used by
installing weigh batch mixing plant as per BIS 4925. At the time of tendering, the
CONTRACTOR, after taking into account the type of aggregates, plant and method
of laying he intends to use, shall allow in his tender for the design mix i.e.,
aggregate/cement and water/cement ratios which he considers will achieve the
strength requirements specified, and workability for concrete to be properly finished.
4.7.2 Before commencement of concreting, CONTRACTOR shall carry out preliminary

tests for design mix on trial mixes proposed by him in design of mix to satisfy the
Engineer-in-Charge that the characteristic strength is obtained. In this regard,
CONTRACTOR may consult govt. approved/reputed institute to get design mix done
as per BIS 10262 at his own cost. The concrete mix to be actually used shall be
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.7.3 Notwithstanding the above, the following shall be the maximum combined weight of
coarse and fine aggregate per 50 kg of cement.
Maximum weight of fine & coarse

aggregates together per 50 kg of
Grade of Concrete
cement
(for nominal mix only)
i. M - 10 480 kg
ii. M - 15 350 kg
iii. M - 20 250 kg
4.7.4 The workability of concrete produced shall be adequate, so that the concrete can be
properly placed and compacted. The slump shall be as per BIS 456.
4.7.5 The minimum consumption of the cement irrespective of design mix shall not be less
than the following:
M 7.5 170 kg/cu m
M 10 240 kg/cu m
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 12 of 36
M 15 300 kg/cu m
M 20 330 kg/cu m
M 25 350 kg/cu m
M 30 400 kg/cu m
4.8 TESTING OF CONCRETE
4.8.1 Testing of concrete, sampling and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with BIS
456.
4.8.2 A slump test shall be taken at each mixer at least once in every fifty batches mixed.
Any batch for which a slump test is being made shall not be transferred to the place of
laying until the slump test has been completed. Any batch which gives a slump in
excess of that described at the time of preliminary tests shall be rejected and
removed from the site.
4.8.3 At least six cubes shall be taken for every 30 cu. metres of concrete or part thereof
deposited in the work on any day. Three cubes shall be tested for 28 days strength.
4.8.4 If a test for particular work does not meet the specified requirements, the Engineer-
in-Charge, in his absolute discretion may accept the work at a correspondingly
reduced rate provided the average strength at 28 days is not less than 85% of the
specified strength.
4.8.5 If the results are poorer than 85% of the specified strength, the Engineer-in-Charge
may order further testing of any kind as may be deemed necessary in his opinion,
including load tests. The load tests shall be carried on the portion of the structure
involving concrete represented by the unsatisfactory works test and such other
adjoining elements of a building as the Engineer-in-Charge may decide. If the results
of the load tests are not satisfactory, the CONTRACTOR shall at his own cost
undertake remedial measures including dismantling and reconstruction according to
the directions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. If the load test is
successful, the Engineer-in-Charge may exercise his judgment before accepting or
rejecting the work and shall still have the power to apply a reduction in rate as herein-
stated before, in case the work in question is accepted.
4.9 PROPORTIONING
Mixes of cement concrete shall be as ordered. Where the concrete is specified by

grade, it shall be prepared by mixing cement, sand and coarse aggregate by weight
as per mix design. In case the concrete is specified as volumetric mix, then dry
volume batching shall be done, making proper allowances for dampness in
aggregates and bulking in sand. Equivalent volume batching for concrete specified by
grade may however be allowed by the Engineer-in-Charge at his discretion.
4.10 PRE CAST CONCRETE

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 13 of 36
The specifications for pre cast concrete will be similar as for the cast in situ concrete.
All pre cast work shall be carried out in a yard made for the purpose. This yard shall
be dry, properly leveled and having a hard and even surface. If the ground is to be
used as a soft former of the units, shall be paved with concrete or masonry and
provided with a layer of plaster (1:2 proportion) with smooth neat cement finish or a
layer of MS sheeting. The casting shall be over suitable vibrating tables or by using
form vibrators as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
The yard, lifting equipment, curing tank, finished material storage space etc. shall be
designed such that the units are not lifted from the mould before 7 (seven) days of
curing and can be removed for erection after 28 (Twenty Eight) days of curing. The
moulds shall preferably be of steel or of timber lined with G.I.sheet metal. The yard
shall preferably be fenced.
Lifting hooks, wherever necessary or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge shall be

embedded in correct position of the units to facilitate erection, even though they may
not be shown on the drgs. and shall be burnt off and finished after erection.
Pre cast concrete units, when ready shall be transported to site by suitable means
approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Care shall be taken to ensure that no damage
occurs during transportation. All adjustments, leveling and plumbing shall be done as
per the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge. The CONTRACTOR shall render all
help with instruments, materials and staff to the Engineer-in-Charge for checking the
proper erection of the pre cast units.
After erection and alignment the joints shall be filled with grout or concrete as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge. If shuttering has to be used for supporting the pre cast unit
they shall not be removed until the joints has attained sufficient strength and in no
case before 14 (fourteen) days. The joint between pre cast roof planks shall be
pointed with 1:2 (1 cement : 2 sand) mortar where called for in the drgs.
4.11 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE
All concrete shall be protected from damage by rain or by workmen, equipment,

overload or any other causes. All edges, corners and projections of concrete
members likely to be damaged, shall be protected by means of wooden cover fillets.
4.12 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the drawings or as approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge. The procedure given in clause 13.4 of BIS: 456 shall be
followed for general guidance.
4.13 SEPARATION JOINT

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 14 of 36
Separation Joint shall be obtained by using an approved alkathene sheet struck on

the surface against which concrete shall be placed. Adequate care should be taken to
cause no damage to the sheet.
4.14 DAMP PROOF COURSES
Damp proof course shall consist of cement concrete of specified proportions and
thickness. Surface of brick or stone masonry shall be leveled and prepared before
laying the cement concrete.
4.15 SAMPLING OF CONCRETE
Sampling & strength Test of concrete, Acceptance criteria and Inspection & Testing of
Structure: This shall be as per the requirements laid down in clause Nos: 14, 15 & 16
of BIS: 456.
5.0 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
5.1 Steel reinforcement shall comprise of hot rolled, cold twisted, weldable high yield
deformed CRSD (Corrosion Resistance Steel with Fe500D properties) rebar having
Characteristic yield strength 500N/mm²,in accordance with table I of IS:1786. Binding
wire used for tying the reinforcement shall conform to IS: 280 unless specifically
mentioned herein or in engineering drawings.
5.2 All joints in reinforcement shall be lapped adequately to develop the full strength of
the reinforcement as per provision of BIS: 456 or as per instruction of Engineer-in-
Charge.As and when required, welded laps shall be provided as specified by
Engineer-in-Charge. Following procedure shall be followed for welding of Tor steel
reinforcement bars.
1. Welding of Tor steel reinforcement bars shall be taken up only after specific
approval by Engineer-in-Charge.
2. Lap welding with longitudinal beads shall only be adopted.
3. Welding shall be carried in accordance with BIS 2751 & 9417. Only qualified
welders shall be permitted to carry out such welding.
4. For cold twisted reinforcement, welding operations shall be controlled to prevent a

supply of large amount of heat, larger than can be disspated. The extreme non-
twisted end portion shall be cut off before welding. Electrodes with rutile coating
should be used.
5. Welding procedure shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge and tests shall be

made to prove the soundness of the welded connection
6. Stripper at closer spacing shall be provided in the lap welded joints as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge.
5.3 M.S. round bars shall be hooked at ends as specified. Ribbed Tor-Steel shall be bent
at right angles at ends as indicated or directed.
6.0 FORM WORK

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 15 of 36
6.1 The shuttering or form work shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as
shown on the drawings and be so constructed as to remain sufficiently rigid during
placing and compacting of the concrete and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss
of liquid from the concrete. The surface that becomes exposed on the removal of
forms shall be examined by Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative
before any defects are made good. Work that has sagged or bulged out, or contains
honey combing, shall be rejected. All shuttering shall be plywood or steel shuttering.
6.2 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sufficiency and adequacy of all form
work. Centering and form work shall be designed & detailed in accordance with BIS
14687 and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, before placing of reinforcement and
concreting.
6.3 STRIPPING TIME
Forms shall not be struck until the concrete has reached a strength at least twice the
stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal of form work.
The strength referred to shall be that of concrete using the same cement and
aggregates, with the same proportions and cured under conditions of temperature
and moisture similar to those existing on the work. Where possible, the form work
shall be left longer as it would assist the curing.
Note 1 - In normal circumstances and where ordinary Portland Cement is used, forms
may generally be removed after the expiry of the following periods:
a. Walls, columns and vertical faces of all 24 to 48 hours as may be
structural members decided by the Engineer-in-
Charge
b. Slabs (props left under) 3 days
c. Beam soffits (Props left under) 7 days
d. Removal of props under slabs
1. Spanning up to 4.5 m 7 days
2. Spanning over 4.5 m 14 days
Removal of props under beams and
e.
arches :
1. Spanning up to 6 m 14 days
2. Spanning over 6m 21 days
For other types of cements, the stripling time recommended for ordinary Portland
Cement may be suitably modified.
Note 2 - The number of props left under, their sizes and disposition shall be such as
to be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slab, beam or arch as the case may
be together with any live load likely to occur during curing or further construction.
7.0 BRICK WORK

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 16 of 36
This specification covers the construction of brick masonry in foundations, arches,

walls, etc. at all elevations. The provision of BIS: 2212 shall be complied with unless
permitted otherwise.
7.1 Bricks
All Bricks shall be of non modular fly ash bricks conforming to IS: 12894, Class
Designation 10 average compressive strength.
7.2 Mortar
7.2.1 Cement and water shall conform to the requirements laid down for cement concrete
work.
7.2.2 Sand for masonry mortar shall be coarse sand conforming to BIS: 2116. Maximum
quantities of clay, fine dust shall not be more than 5% by weight. Organic impurities
shall not exceed the limits laid down in BIS: 2116.
7.2.3 Mix of mortar for building brick work shall be as specified in the item of work.
7.2.4 Mixing of mortar shall be done in a mechanical mixer. When quantity involved is
small, hand mixing may be permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge. Any mortar
remaining unused for more than 30 minutes after mixing shall be rejected.
7.3 Brick Masonry
Brick work shall be built in English bond, unless otherwise specified. The thickness of
joints shall be 10 mm + 3 mm. Thickness of joints shall be kept uniform. In case of
foundations and manholes etc. Joints up to 15 mm may be accepted.
7.4 Half Brick Masonry
All courses shall be laid with stretchers. Reinforcement comprising 2 Nos.6 mm dia
MS bars shall be provided over the top of the first course and thereafter at every third
course.
7.5 Fixtures
All iron fixtures, pipe spouts, hold fasts of doors and windows, which are required to
be built into the wall shall be embedded in cement concrete blocks 1:2:4 mix (1
cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) of size
indicated in the item.
7.6 Curing
Brick work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when the mortar is green.
Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of
seven days.
7.7 Cement Concrete Block

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 17 of 36
Cement concrete block shall be machined made in the proportion of such that mix
shall not be leaner than one cement to Twelve combined aggregates ( by volume )
but having minimum strength of M 7.5. Combined aggregate shall be graded as near
as possible to BIS : 383. The fineness modules of combined aggregate shall be
between 3.6 and 4. The concrete block shall be properly cured as per BIS-456. The
surface of conc. block shall have even face without any honeycomb and free from
cracks.
7.7.1 Mortar
Cement and water shall confirm to the requirements laid down for cement concrete
work.
7.7.2 Sand for concrete block masonry mortar's shall be coarse sand generally conforming
to BIS: 2116. Maximum quantities of clay, fine dust, shall not be more than 5% by
weight. Organic impurities shall not exceed the limits laid down in BIS: 2116.
7.7.3 Mix of mortar for building concrete block shall be as specified in the item of work.
7.7.4 Mixing of the mortar shall be done in a mechanical mixer. When quantity involved is
small hand mixing may be permitted by Engineer-in-Charge. Any mortar remaining
unused for more than 30 minutes after mixing shall be rejected.
7.8 Concrete Block Masonry
The thickness of joints shall be 10 mm +- 3mm. Thickness of joints shall be kept

uniform. In case of foundation and manholes etc. joints up to 15 mm may be
accepted.
7.9 Half Concrete Block
All courses shall be laid with stretchers. Reinforcement comprising 2 nos. 6 mm dia
MS bars shall be provided over the top of the first course and thereafter at every
fourth course.
7.10 Fixtures
All iron fixtures, pipes spouts, hold fasts of doors and windows which are required to
be built into the wall shall be embedded in cement concrete blocks 1:2:4 mix (1
cement :2 coarse sand :4 graded stone aggregate. 20 mm nominal size) of size
indicated in the item.
7.11 Curing
Concrete block masonry shall be protected from rain by suitable covering when
mortar is green. Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a
minimum period of seven days.
8.0 WOOD WORK

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 18 of 36
All materials workmanship for wood work shall conform to BIS : 883, it shall be good
quality well seasoned second class Teak / Sal wood as approved by Engineer-in-
Charge. The wood work shall conform to BIS: 4021.
9.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
This specification covers the technical requirements for the preparation of shop
drawings, supply, fabrication, protective coating, painting and erection of all structural
steel rolled sections, built up sections, plates and miscellaneous steel required for the
completion of the work.
9.1 Steel
All structural steel used in construction within the purview of this contract shall,
comply with one of the following Bureau of Indian Standard Specifications, whichever,
is appropriate or as specified.
BIS – 2062 Hot rolled sections and plates
BIS – 1079 Cold formed light gauge sections
BIS – 1161 Tubular sections
BIS – 4923 Hollow sections (rectangular or square)
9.2 Smithy Works
All smithy work shall be accurately made as shown on the drawings and shall be
clean and sound. The metal shall not be burnt or injured in any way.
9.3 Fabrication
Fabrication of steel structure shall be carried out in conformity with the best modern
practices and with due regard to speed with economy in fabrication and erection and
shall conform to BIS-800. All members shall be so fabricated as to assemble the
members accurately on site and erect them in correct positions. Before dispatch to
site the components shall be assembled at shop and any defect found rectified. All
members shall be free from kink, twist, buckle, bend, open joints etc. and shall be
rectified before erecting in position. Failure in this respect will subject the defective
members to rejection.
9.4 Fabrication Drawings
9.4.1 Fabrication and erection drawings shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR on the
basis of design issued to the CONTRACTOR in stages. These drawings shall be
prepared by the CONTRACTOR or by an agency approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge.
9.4.2 Fabrication drawings shall be thoroughly checked, stamped "checked" and signed by
the CONTRACTOR's own responsible Engineer irrespective of the fact that such
drawings are prepared by the CONTRACTOR or an approved agency, to ensure
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 19 of 36
accuracy and correctness of the drawings. Unchecked or unsigned drawing shall not
be submitted to Engineer-in-Charge for approval.
9.4.3 Fabrication drawings duly checked by the CONTRACTOR shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge for checking & approval within 30 days from receipt of design
drawings.
9.4.4 The approval accorded by Engineer-in-Charge on fabrication drawings shall not

relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility of fabricating and erecting safe and
technically sound steel structures as per design drawings.
9.4.5 Fabrication drawings shall be drawn to a suitable scale large enough to convey the
information clearly and shall include the following:
 Reference to design drawing number (along with revision number) based on which
fabrication drawing has been prepared.
 Structural layout plans, elevations, & sections with distinct erections, & sections
with distinct erection marking of all members.
 Framing plans, member sizes, orientations.
 Fabrication detail of each and every member.
 Details of Shop / field joints, connections and splices.
 Location, type and size of welds and bolts.
 Shape and size of edge preparation for welding.
 Bill of material including bolts for connections.
9.4.6 The CONTRACTOR shall however ensure accuracy of the following and shall be
solely responsible for the same.
i. Provision for erection and erection clearance.
ii. Marking of members.
iii. Cut length of members.
iv. Matching of joints and holes.
v. Provision kept in the members for other interconnected members.
vi. Bill of materials.
9.4.7 Connections, splices and other details where not shown on the design drawings shall
be suitably designed and shown on the fabrication drawings based on good
Engineering practice, developing full member strength.

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 20 of 36
9.4.8 The CONTRACTOR shall incorporate all the revisions in his fabrication drawings
resulting from revision in design drawings during the course of execution of work at no
extra cost.
9.4.9 The CONTRACTOR shall supply three (3) prints of each fabrication drawing
submitted for checking to Engineer-in-Charge. After approval of fabrication drawings
CONTRACTOR shall supply six (6) prints and two (2) reproducible of each approved
fabrication drawing to Engineer-in-Charge. The rates quoted by the CONTRACTOR
shall include the same.
9.5 Welding
Welding shall be adopted in most of the cases for fabrication of steel structure.
Welding work shall be carried out as shown in relevant drawings as per BIS-816 or as
required and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Welding of joints shall be so
arranged that the resulting tensile and compressive stresses produced by each part of
weld tend to balance each other.
The step back method of welding shall be adopted for continuous runs. Members
which offer greater resistance to compression shall be welded first. The work shall be
securely held in position by means of tack weld, clamps or jig before commencing of
welding work so as to prevent relative movement due to distortion or other cause. All
welds with blow holes, slag-intrusion and other defects must be removed from each
run before another run is super imposed and also from the final run. Any defects in
the work shall be rectified by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. Bends, twists
or distortion caused in any member due to faulty workmanship and method adopted
during welding or in transit will be rejected and will have to be replaced / rectified by
the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. According to the size of electrodes used, the
CONTRACTOR is expected to adjust the current rating in the welding generators.
9.6 The Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right to have test done at any time for any
welding and the cost of the test shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
9.7 Wherever continuous plates are used in built up member such as girders, columns,
etc. the continuity of such plates shall be first ensured by full strength butt joints
before welding such plates with the main member to form part of the built-up member.
9.8 All connection / joints made in shop shall wherever possible be welded connections
and connections / joints made at site shall be bolted connections / site welded
connections, continuous welding shall be done for all box members even if it is not
required from design point of view.
9.9 Electrodes
Electrodes used for welding shall comply with BIS-814 or BIS - 815 or any
specification provided to the CONTRACTOR from time to time. No electrodes
remaining in open containers for more than 72 hours shall be used.
9.10 No welder shall be employed to carry out welding in any position except those who
are fully qualified to weld in that position as per BIS -7318, part-1 qualifying tests for
metal arc welders. Welders employed shall be required both before commencing work
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 21 of 36
and at intervals during the progress of work to make test pieces as laid down in BIS -
817 and 7318, part-1 for the purpose of grading of welders and according to the said
grading, welders will be employed on jobs. Welders are to be got approved by
Engineer-in-Charge before engaging on work.
9.11 MS Black/High Strength Bolts and Nuts
M.S.Black or high strength bolts, nuts and washers etc. shall be as per BIS-800, BIS-
1363 and BIS-1367. Manufacturer's test certificate shall be made available to the
Engineer-in-Charge or his representative, when called for. For bolted joints, shanks
and threaded bolts are to be used to ensure that threaded length do not encroach
within the thickness of connected members of dimension beyond the following limit:-
a. 1.5 mm for connected members of thickness below 12 mm and
b. 2.5 mm for connected member of thickness 12 mm and above and that adequate
shearing and bearing values required as per design are achieved.
9.12 Every portion work shall have its erection mark or number stenciled on the member
for guidance in erection and bears all necessary marks of erections as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
9.13 No part of the work is to be oiled, painted (except contact surfaces) packed, bundled,
crated or dispatched until it has been finally inspected and approved by the Engineer-
in-Charge or his authorized representative. The whole steel work before being
dispatched from the CONTRACTOR's shop shall be dry and after being thoroughly
cleaned from dust, mills scale, rust etc., and shall be given two coats of primer and
one coat of final paint as per painting specification attached in this
enquiry. Unless otherwise specified, all surfaces inaccessible after welding shall be
given two coats of primer and two coats of paints as per painting specification
Annexure attached in this enquiry.
9.14 The Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative shall have free access at
all reasonable time to all places where the work is being carried out, and shall be
provided by the CONTRACTOR at his own expenses all necessary facilities for
inspection during fabrication and erection. The Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized
representative shall be at liberty to reject the work in whole or in part if the
workmanship or materials do not conform to the terms of the specifications mentioned
herein. The CONTRACTOR shall remove, replace or, alter any part of the work as
ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative.
9.15 Erection and Setting of Steel Structure
The erection of steel work shall be in accordance with Bureau of Indian Standard
Specifications Nos. BIS-800 and BIS - 816.
9.16 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the suitability, safety and capabilities of
all plant and equipment used for erection.

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 22 of 36
9.17 Prior to starting erection of fabricated structure, defects if any shall be rectified. The
CONTRACTOR shall give to the Engineer-in-Charge not less than 24 hours notice
of his intention to set out or give levels for any part of works, in order that
arrangements may be made for checking. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all
necessary arrangements and assistance which the Engineer-in-Charge may require
for checking the setting out.
9.18 The CONTRACTOR shall erect the structural steel members in position, to
dimension, and levels, as in relevant drawings and shall take care to see that
component parts are not interchanged. Girders, stanchions etc., must rest fairly on
their beds and will not be taken as erected until completely plumbed, aligned leveled,
bolted or welded and strengthened, in every respect. The camber, if any, is to be
maintained as shown in relevant drawings.
9.19 Particular care should be taken to ensure free expansion and contraction wherever
provided in the relevant design / drawings or so directed on site.
9.20 While erecting, the holes in different component parts of structure should be made
concentric with the use of drifts before any service bolts are fitted. No drifting shall be
allowed except for bringing together several parts forming a member but the drifts
must not be driven with such force as to disturb or damage the metal above the holes.
Hammering of bolts to make holes concentric shall in no case be allowed. No nuts
should be allowed to become loose and no unfilled bolt holes are to be left in any part
of the structure unless otherwise specified in the relevant drawings. Welding should
be adopted wherever specified in the drawings. Wooden rams or mallets shall be
used in forcing members to position, in order to protect metal from injury or shocks,
chipped edges shall be finished off smooth and all concave surface rounded off.
9.21 All erection tools and plants viz. derricks, cranes etc. will have to be provided by the
CONTRACTOR as required in the erection work. All erection devices must be
removed after the work is over, in such a way that no damage is done to the erected
structures. Any damages, in this respect must be rectified by the CONTRACTOR at
his own cost.
9.22 The maximum tolerance for line and level of the steel work shall be + 3.0 mm on any
part of the structure. The structure shall not be out of plumb more than 3.5 mm on
each 10 M. Section of height and not more than 7.0 mm per 30 metre section. These
tolerances shall apply to all parts of the structure unless mentioned in the drawings
issued for erection purposes.
9.23 Match Marking & Stamping
i. All materials shall be match marked to facilitate erection.
ii. All pieces shall be stamped on at least two sides with erection marks as per
fabrication drawings to facilitate identification on receipt and assembly.

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 23 of 36
10.0 PAINTING ON STRUCTURAL STEEL
The following specification shall be used for painting of structural steel work.
10.1 SCOPE
This specification shall be used in non coastal area.
Surface Preparation
The surfaces to be painted shall be sand blasted to Sa - 2.5 as per Swedish Standard
SIS 05-59-00. Air used for sand blasting must be dry and oil free. Sand used for sand
blasting shall be good quality river sand suitable for achieving the required surface
finish. For optimum results pressure of sand blasting gun should be maintained at
around 7 kg/cm2 and maximum height of profile should be kept around 50 microns.
Sand blasted surfaces must be coated with primer within 4 hrs in dry climate.
Moreover it is not advisable to carry out sand blasting when humidity exceeds 85%
(RH).
10.1.1 Painting system to be used are indicated below:
a. Epoxy Painting:
Primer P 1-2 coats + finish paint FP1 (2 coats) where P1 is epoxy polyamide
cured zinc chromate primer having DFT of 35 micron per coat and FP1 is epoxy
polyamide cured finish paint having DFT (Dry Film Thickness) of 35 micron per
coat.
b. For chlorinated rubber paint.
Primer P2 - 2 coats - finish paint FP2 - 2 coats. Where P2 is high chlorinated zinc
phosphate primer having DFT of 50 microns per coat and FP2 is chlorinated
rubber based paint having DFT of 50 microns per coat.
10.1.2 Equivalent product chart for approved paint manufactures for primer P1 and P2 finish
paint FP1 and FP2 indicated above is enclosed.
10.1.3 All the surfaces must be sand blasted and 2 coats of primer plus 1 coat of finish paint
applied in the shop before the same are shifted to site for erection. All the members
must be suitably match marked for facilitating proper assembly.
After erection is over all surfaces shall be washed up as follows:
a. Washing with clean water (pressure 7 kg/cm2) using suitable nozzles. During
washing broom corn brushes shall be used to remove foreign matters.
b. Solvent washing if required to remove traces of oil grease etc.
After washing the surface as indicated above, the surfaces shall be suitably
touched up to the extent required so that all the damages to the premiered
surfaces caused during erection are done up.

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 24 of 36
The surfaces affected by welding and / or gas cutting during erection shall also
be suitably touched up. Before touch up is taken up surfaces shall be prepared
by mechanical means such as grinding, power brushing etc. to achieve surface
finish to ST-3.
After touch up work is over as indicated above, all the surfaces shall be given
one coat of finish paint to the required specification.
10.1.4 The following points must be observed for painting work:
a. Primer and paint shall be compatible to each other and should be from the same
manufacturer.
b. The recommendation of the paint manufacturer regarding mixing, matching and

application must be followed meticulously.
c. Technical representative of paint manufacturer should be available at site as and

when required by Engineer-in-Charge for their expert advice as well as to
ensure that the painting work is executed as per the instruction of paint
manufactures.
Paints and primers shall be supplied at site in original container with factory seal
otherwise such paints and primers shall not be allowed to be used. Mode of
application i.e. by spray, brush or roller shall be strictly as per recommendation of
paint manufacturer.
Painting materials must be used before the expiry date indicated on the
containers.
Number of coats and DFT per coat must be strictly followed as indicated above. If
the desired DFT is not achieved for primer and finish paints in two coats (each),
CONTRACTOR shall be required to apply extra coat (s) to achieve the desired
DFT without any extra cost to Engineer-in-Charge.
Colour shade for each coat of primer and finish paint must be different to identify
the coats without any ambiguity.
Shade for the final finish coat shall be decided by Engineer-in-Charge at site.
All painting materials must be accompanied by manufacturers test certificates.

However, Engineer-in-Charge has any doubt regarding quality of materials, he
shall have the right to direct CONTRACTOR to get the doubtful material tested or
and provided (by CONTRACTOR) testing agencies for which no extra payment
shall be made to the CONTRACTOR and the charges shall deemed to be
covered in the unit rates quoted for fabrication and erection of structural work.
DFT for paint shall be measured at least 20 points and mean DFT shall not vary
by more than 10% than specified in DFT.
Instrument for measurement of DFT shall be arranged and provided by

CONTRACTOR at his cost.
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 25 of 36
Thickness of each coat shall also be checked regularly to ensure uniformity in

DFT.
10.1.5 Measurement
For purpose of payment, structural work so painted shall be measured and paid on
MT basis. The weight for this item shall be taken from any of the following documents
in the following order of priority:
i. Weights mentioned on the approved drawings.
ii. Weights paid to fabrication CONTRACTOR for structural fabrication work.
10.1.6 Sand blasting and painting works, being a specialized job must be carried out through
the approved agencies only.
10.1.7 EQUIVALENT CHART FOR VARIOUS PAINT MANUFACTURERS
SHALIMA
ASIAN G&N J&N BERGER BOMBAY
R
APCODUR - EPIGARD-4 EPILUX-4
EPILAC ZINC PENTADUR
Epoxy Zinc AMERCOA ZINC ZINC
P1 CHROMATE PRIMER
Chrome T-71 CHROMATE CHROMATE
PRIMER 1532
Primer PRIMER PRIMER
KANGARO
O HB ZINC
ASIOCHLOR CHLOROKOT LINOSOL HB
NEROLAC PHOSPHAT
HB ZINC E ZINC JENSOLAC ZINC
P2 PHOSPHAT E OR
PHOSPHAT PHOSPHATE CR PRIMER PHOSPHATE
E PRIMER HEMPATEX
E PRIMER PRIMER PRIMER
PRIMER
1632
NEROLAC PENTADUR
APCODUR EPIGARD XL EPILAC 974 EPILUX-4
FP1 TWO COMP ENAMEL
CF 692 FINISH ENAMEL ENAMEL
EPOXY 5534 GRAY
JENSOLAC LINSOL PENTACHL
ASIOCHLOR NEROLAC CHLOROKOT CHLORINAT CHLORINATE OR GP
FP2
CF 625 CR PAINT E FINISH D. RUBR. D ENAMEL
PAINT RUBR.PAINT 5638
10.2 SCOPE
This specification shall be used for the painting of structural steel in coastal area in
saline atmosphere.
10.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
Surface preparation for all items to be painted shall be done by sand blasting to Sa
2.5 as per Swedish Specification SIS 05-59-00. Air used for sand blasting must be
dry and oil free. Sand used for sand blasting must be of good quality river sand
suitable for achieving required surface finish for optimum results. Pressure at sand

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 26 of 36
blasting gun should be maintained at around 7 kg/cm2 and max. height of profile
should be kept around 50 microns.
Sand blasted surfaces must be coated with primer within 2 hrs in dry climate.
Moreover it is not advisable to carry out sand blasting when humidity exceeds 50%
RH.
10.2.2 Painting systems to be used are as indicated below:-
a. FOR UNPAINTED SURFACES
i. P1-One coat of Ethyl silicate inorganic zinc primer having DFT of 70

microns per coat.
ii. IP1-One coat of Epoxy MIO having DFT of 70 microns per coat.
iii. FP-1 One coat of finish epoxy paint using two pack Polyamide cured epoxy
having DFT of 40 microns per coat.
iv. FP-2 One coat of Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane paint having DFT of
40microns per coat.
10.2.3 The following points must be observed for painting work:-
a. Only the approved paints/primers as indicated in the equivalent product chart

(attached herewith) are to be used.
b. All the surfaces must be sand blasted and one coat of primer including one coat
of MIO are to be applied in the fabrication shop at project site before lifting the
components for erection. After erection is over all the surfaces must be washed
as indicated below:-
i. Wash with clean water (pressure approx. 7 kg/cm2) using suitable nozzles.
During washing, broom corn brushes to be used to remove foreign matter, if
any.
ii. Solvent washing if felt necessary to remove traces of oil, grease etc.
iii. After washing surfaces as indicated above, shall be suitably touched up to the
extent required, so that all the damages to the primed surfaces caused during
erection are taken care off.
c. Surfaces effected by welding and/or gas cutting or handling during erection shall
also be suitably touched up after preparing the damaged surfaces by mechanical
means such as grinding, power brushing etc. to achieve surface finish to ST-3.
d. Application of ethyl silicate inorganic zinc primer must be under taken by spray
method. Other application methods such as brush/roller application are not
permitted.
e. Primers and paints for a particular system must be purchased from same
manufacturer for compatibility.
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 27 of 36
f. Recommendation of the paint manufacturer regarding mixing, maturing,

application (except as indicated specially in this specification) must be followed
meticulously.
g. Technical representative of the paint manufacturers at site must be made

available as and when required by PDIL for their expert advise as well as to
ensure that painting work is executed as per instructions of paint manufacturer.
h. All paints, primers must be supplied to site in original containers with factory seal.
Otherwise paints, primers shall not be allowed to used.
i. Mode of application for other primers and paints except ethyl silicate inorganic
zinc primer shall be strictly as per recommendation of paint manufacturer.
j. All painting materials should be consumed within expiry date indicated by

manufacturers on the containers.
k. Number of coat and DFT per coat must be strictly followed as indicated in the
specification above and if the desired DFT is not achieved in the specified
number of coat, CONTRACTOR shall be required to apply extra coat(s) to
achieve desired DFT without any additional cost to PDIL/owner. It may be noted
here that multi coat is not allowed for ethyl silicate inorganic zinc primer and
therefore extreme care is to be taken for assuring desired DFT in single coat.
Unless it is not practical to do so, colour shades for primer, intermediate coat and
finish paints must be different to identify each coat without any ambiguity.
l. All painting materials must be accompanied by manufacturers test certificate.

However, if PDIL has any reasonable doubt regarding quality of the materials
then, CONTRACTOR shall be required to get doubtful materials tested by PDIL
approved testing agencies and nothing extra shall be paid for carrying out above
testing and testing charges shall be deemed to be included in the rates quoted for
painting work.
m. DFT for painting shall be measured at least 20 points and mean DFT shall not
vary by more than 10% of the specified DFT.
Reliable and calibrated instrument for measurement of DFT shall be arranged

and provided by CONTRACTOR at his cost at site.
n. Sand blasting, painting work being a specialized job must be carried out through
approved agencies only. List of approved agencies is as indicated below:
10.2.4 EQUIVALENT CHART FOR VARIOUS PAINT MANUFACTURERS
DFT Per
CODE ITEM Coat(Micr ASIAN G&N SHALIMAR J&N BERGER BOMBAY
ons)
ETHYL J&N
HEAPEL’S
SILICATE TUFFKOTE INORGA ZINC
APCOSIL DIMETCO GALVOSIL
P1 INORGA 70 NIC ZINC ANODE
601 TE9 ZILICATE
NIC ZINC SILICATE 304 1570
PRIMER PRIMER

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 28 of 36
PENTADU
EPILUX-
EPIGUARD EPILAC R
EPOXY APCODU AMERCO 4
IP1 70 HB-MIO
MIO R MIO T 385 HB MIO HB MIO
HB MIO
4567
TWO
PACK NEROLA PENTADU
EPIGAURD EPILUX-
POLYAMI APCODU C TWO EPILAC R
FP1 40 4
DE R CF 692 COMP XL 974 ENAMEL
ENAMEL
CURED EPOXY 5534
EPOXY
ALILHATI
JN 992
C APCOTH AMERCO PENTO-
PU BERGAT
ACRYLIC ANE AT SHALITHA THANE
FP2 40 FINISH HANE
POLYUR NE
674 450 GL ENAMEL 4513
ETHANE PAINT
PAINT
11.0 MS GALVANIZED GRATINGS
MS Galvanized gratings shall be made out of M.S.flats and Tor steel round bars of
approved pattern and thickness. All joints are welded together to form a perfect mesh.
The details of gratings shall be as per specification.
12.0 ALUMINIUM GRATING
12.1 Aluminium grating shall be made out of aluminium flats of approved pattern and
thickness. All joints welded / reverted together to form a perfect mesh including
necessary steel fasteners as required.
13.0 STEEL / ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
13.1 The Steel doors, windows, ventilators and sashes shall be of the size and type as
shown on the drawings and/or of the approved make conforming to BIS-1361 and
BIS-1038 Fixing and glazing shall be done as per BIS-1081 and as per manufacturers
instructions. The putty of approved make such as special gold size or equivalent
conforming to BIS-419 shall be used.
13.2 Aluminium doors, windows and ventilators shall be manufactured from wrought
aluminium and aluminium alloy extruded round tube and / or hollow rectangular /
square sections conforming to BIS: 1285 & BIS : 6477 or equivalent as approved by
Engineer-in-Charge.
14.0 NON-ASBESTOS HIGH IMPACT POLYPROPYLENE REINFORCED CEMENT

CORRUGATED SHEETS FOR ROOFING AND CLADDING
All non asbestos high impact polypropylene reinforced cement 6mm thick corrugated
sheets shall be of the specified approved quality and shall be in accordance with IS-
14871 and fixing accessories such as J-bolts, L-bolts, roofs washers, etc. shall
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 29 of 36
conform to BIS-730. Laying and fixing of sheets used as covering for roofs and wall
shall conform to BIS-3007 part-I. Holes for receiving the fixing accessories in the
crown of corrugation must be drilled and not punched and diameter should be 3 mm
greater than the diameter of the bolts to be used. Bolts and screws should be 8 mm
or more in dia. and the nuts of the hook bolts, crank bolts should bear a gal vanished
iron limpet washers. The screw or bolts should be tightened sufficiently only to seat
the bitumen washer over the corrugations so that the natural movement in the
substructure of the roof may not damage sheeting. It is essential that the bolt holes
are made water tight by the use of bitumen washers in conjunction with suitable
G.I.washer. These form essential accessories to good fixing work. A cracked sheet
should never be used.
15.0 FLOORING AND PAVING
15.1 Sub Base of floor
15.1.1 The area to be paved shall be divided into suitable panels. Form work shall be
provided. The boarding / battens shall be fixed in position with their toe at proper
level, giving slope where required. Alternatively base concrete may be deposited in
the whole area at a stretch.
15.1.2 Before placing the base concrete the sub-base shall be properly wetted and rammed.
The concrete of the specified mix shall then be deposited between the forms where
provided, thoroughly tamped and the surface finished level with the top edge of the
forms. The surface of base concrete shall be spreader uniformly. The surface shall be
finished rough to provide adequate bond for the topping. Two or three hours after
concrete has been laid the surface shall be brushed with wire brush to remove any
scum or Latinate and swept clean so that coarse aggregate is exposed.
15.2 Cement Concrete Floor Finish
15.2.1 The surface of base concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned by scrubbing with coir or
steel wire brush. Before laying the toping, the surface shall be soaked with water at
least for 12 hours and surplus water mopped up immediately before the toping is laid.
15.2.2 The forms shall be fixed over the base concrete dividing into suitable panels. Where
glass dividing strips are provided, thickness of glass dividing strips shall be 4 or as
indicated. Before placing the concrete toping, neat cement slurry at the rate of 2
kg/sq.m shall be then thoroughly brushed into the base concrete just ahead of the
finish. The topping shall then be laid, thoroughly compacted by using screed
board/plate vibrator. The surface floated with a wooden float to a fair and even
surface shall be left for some time till moisture disappears from it. Junctions with
skirting / dado or wall surfaces shall be rounded off using cement mortar 1:2 curing
shall be carried out for a minimum of 7 days.
16.0 PLASTERING

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 30 of 36
16.1 Sand for plastering: shall be 50% fine sand and 50% coarse sand from approved
sources.
16.2 Preparation of surface shall be done as per CPWD specifications.
16.3 Cement mortar shall be of the mix as indicated in the items and shall be mixed as
specified in the CPWD specifications.
16.4 Joints in walls etc. shall be raked to a depth of 12 mm, brushed clean with wire
brushes dusted and thoroughly washed before starting the plaster work.
16.5 The surface shall be thoroughly washed with water cleaned and kept wet to saturation
point before plastering is commenced.
16.6 Cement mortar as indicated, shall be firmly applied to the masonry walls in a uniform
layer to the thickness specified and will be pressed into the joints. On concrete
surfaces rendering shall be dashed to the roughened surface to ensure adequate
bond. The surface shall be finished even and smooth. Hectoring wherever required
shall be done as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge. Nothing extra shall be paid on
this account.
16.7 All plaster work shall be cured for at least 7 days.
16.8 Integral water proofing compound shall be mixed with cement in the proportion
recommended by the manufacturer. Care shall be taken to ensure that the water
proofing material gets well and integrally mixed with cement. All other operations are
the same as for general plaster work.
16.9 For sand face plaster undercoat of cement plaster 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) of
thickness not less than 12 mm shall be applied similar to one coat plaster work.
Before the under coat hardens the surface shall be scared to provide for the top coat.
The top coat also of cement mortar 1:4 shall be applied to a thickness not less than 8
mm and brought to an even surface with a wooden float. The surface shall then be
tapped gently with a wooden float lined with cork to retain a coarse surface texture,
care being taken that the tapping is even and uniform.
17.0 WHITE & COLOUR WASHING AND CEMENT PAINTING
17.1 White Washing
17.1.1 Where white wash is indicated, 3 coats of white wash shall be applied. The surface
shall present a smooth and uniform finish.
17.1.2 White wash shall be prepared from lime slaked at site and mixed and stirred with 5
litres of water for one kg. of unsalted lime to make a thin cream. The cream shall be
screened through a clean, coarse cloth and suitable adhesive such as DDL or
equivalent as per manufacturer specification. About 1.3 kg of sodium chloride in hot
water shall also be added for every 10 kg. of lime for making the coat hard and rule
resistant. Indigo shall also be mixed @ 3 gm/Kg of lime. Each, coat shall be allowed
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 31 of 36
to dry before next coat is applied. When dry, the wash should show no sign of
cracking. One coat consists of application with brushes in horizontal stroke followed
by vertical stroke.
17.2 Colour Washing
17.2.1 Where colour wash is indicated, one coat of white wash and two coats of colour of
tints approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be applied. Dados and skirting shall
not be white washed, colour washed or distempered or painted.
17.2.2 Only Colour stainer of approved brand not affected by lime, shall be added to colour
wash. Indigo (Neel) shall, however, not be added in colour wash.
17.2.3 The colour wash shall be applied as described for white wash. After the surface has
been prepared the first primary coat shall be of white wash. Minimum two coats of
colour wash shall then be applied. The entire surface shall present a smooth and
uniform finish of even tint or shade.
17.3 Distempering
17.3.1 Where distempering is indicated, two coats of distemper oil emulsion or dry distemper
over a priming coat as specified in the item shall be applied. Each coat of distemper
shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before next coat is applied.
17.3.2 Distemper oil emulsion shall be as per BIS: 248 of approved brand and manufacture.
The distemper shall be diluted with water or a prescribed thinner in the proportion of 4
parts of paste by weight to one part of cold water or in the proportion specified by the
manufacturer, which shall be invariably followed.
17.3.3 The surface to be distempered shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, chalking and other
foreign matter. All cracks, holes and surface defects shall be repaired with gypsum to
give a smooth surface, and papered and wiped clean. The surface shall then be
rubbed down again with sand paper and made smooth. The surface thus prepared
shall be given a coat of alkali resistant, priming paint conforming to BIS: 109 or any
other primer as specified by the manufacturer and allowed to dry at least for 48 hours.
17.3.4 Dry distemper shall be of approved make and shade conforming to BIS 427 and
shall be prepared as per manufacturer's specification. The surface to be distempered
shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, chalking and other foreign matter. All cracks, holes and
surface defects shall be repaired with gypsum to give a smooth surface, and papered
and wiped clean. The surface shall then be rubbed down again with sand paper and
made smooth. The surface thus prepared shall be given a coat of alkali resistant,
priming paint conforming to BIS: 109 or any other primer as specified by the
manufacturer and allowed to dry at least for 48 hours.
17.3.5 After the primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand
papered to make it smooth for receiving the distemper, taking care not to rub cut the
priming coat and then dusted off. Prepared distemper shall then be applied with
brushes in horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical ones which together
constitute one coat.
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 32 of 36
17.3.6 Subsequent coats shall be applied in the same way, with time intervals of at least 24
hours between consecutive coats.
17.3.7 A uniform finished surface without patches, brush marks, or distemper drops shall be
obtained.
17.4 Cement Painting
17.4.1 Cement paint: Cement paint shall comply with BIS: 5410 specification for cement
paint, of colour as required.
17.4.2 Where shown on drawings for external surfaces of sand faced plaster, or any other
surface, two coats of cement paint shall be applied of tint and shade as approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
17.4.3 The surfaces shall be prepared as specified for white washing. Before applying
cement paint the surface shall be thoroughly wetted to control surface suction. The
surface shall be moist but not dripping wet, when the paint is applied. Not less than 24
hours shall be allowed between the two coats. In hot weather the first coat shall be
slightly moistened before applying the second coat.
17.4.4 On external plastered surfaces, sand faced or plain plastered and concrete surfaces,
cement paint shall be vigorously scrubbed on to work the paint into the voids and
provide a continuous paint film free from pin holes and other openings. Curing shall
be done between the coats and for at least 2 days following the final coat.
18.0 GLAZING
18.1 Sheet glass glazing of doors, windows etc. shall be of selected quality glass
conforming to BIS: 2835. Toughened splinter proof industrial safety glass shall
confirm to BIS: 2553. No cracked chipped or disfigured glass shall be accepted Glass
shall be in one piece for each pan.
18.2 Glazing shall be fixed with timber or steel / aluminium beading as called for. Glass
shall be back puttied and fixed with beading for a water tight and rattle free
installation. Sizes of timber/ steel / aluminium beading shall be as directed.
19.0 PROTECTIVE COATING AND LINING SYSTEM
19.1 Application of Brick Layers
For laying of bricks on horizontal surface, a bedding mortar of 5 mm thick k-based

silicate cement must be laid in parallel strip of maximum 1 m width. Bricks must be
laid down leaving space of about 5 mm. This has to be followed by 5 mm wide k-
based silicate cement jointing for full depth of brick and to be finished by 20 mm deep
pointing with phenolic based cement. For vertical surface lining, it is preferable to
apply the mortar by trowel on backside of brick.

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 33 of 36
Setting of lining takes place in approximately 1-7 days and during this time it is
necessary to keep the bricks undisturbed.
19.2 Acid proof Brick lining
25/40/65 mm thick acid resisting bricks shall be used.
19.3 Fire proofing of steel structure
This specification covers materials and methods of application for fireproofing of

steel structures and equipment supports.
BIS 1566 -1982 : Hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.
BIS 6433 - 1972 : Specification for guniting equipment.
BIS 9012 - 1978 : Recommended practice for shotcreting.
A minimum of 2 hours fire resistance shall be applied, unless specified otherwise.
19.3.1 Fireproofing by guniting
Material, equipment and method of application shall be in accordance with BIS –

9012 and BIS – 6433. Placement shall be done only by skilled operators as
approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Hard drawn steel wire fabric of 2.5 mm dia, 50 x 50 mm mesh conforming to

BIS1566 shall be used as reinforcement. The fabric shall be secured by 18 SWG
galvanized tie wire to studs or spacers. Spacers shall be 5 mm thick. Steel wire
fabric reinforcement shall be placed, to maintain a clearance of not less than 20
mm from the face of the member. Adjacent sheets shall be lapped at least 75 mm
and securely tied together.
Shooting strips shall be used to obtain proper thickness and true lines over flanges,
angles and re-entrant corners. Strips shall be designed to permit escape of
rebound.
The finish shall be wooden float or sponge trowelled sufficient to obtain a uniform
appearance without attracting excessive laitance to the surface.
Immediately after final finishing, surfaces shall be given a one spray coat of an
approved curing compound.
Brand name, name of manufacturer and test results shall be submitted for approval
from the Engineer-in-Charge prior to procurement and use of curing compound.
Shotcrete thus applied shall develop not less than 24 N/mm² compressive strength
in 28 days.
19.3.2 Fire proofing by in-situ concrete (Encasing)

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 34 of 36
Concrete for fire proofing shall be M20 grade. Mixing and placing shall be same as
for concrete work
Minimum thickness of concrete coating over the steel shall be 50 mm.
Concrete shall be poured into forms properly oiled and made to correct dimensions.
Concrete shall be vibrated as necessary to ensure smooth surface, free from voids
and irregularities. Any defects, honey comb etc. shall be rectified by
CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
19.3.3 Vermiculite cementitious coating
Design Specification
Vermiculite cementitious coating shall restricted the temperature of a vessel /

structure below 427º C for vessel supports & skirts and 550º C for structural steel
members, for a minimum time of 2 hours. The material shall not fail till the end of
specified time period.
The coating shall be strong enough to withstand thermal shock and impingement of
water from fire hoses and / or monitors.
The coating shall be asbestos free and shall be non corrosive to steel members
and shall not be affected by environmental conditions, or from local leakages,
spillage or pollution.
The coating material shall be easily repairable and shall be durable.
Application procedure of the coating shall be non hazardous, shall not interface
with the working of adjoining areas and shall be easy.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit calculation for the thickness of coating for all
structures to be fireproofing for approval from the Engineer-in-Charge for the
particular branded product he is going to use, but in no case the coating shall be
less than 40 mm.
APPLICATION
Vermiculite cementitious coating shall be mixed with water in a suitable mixer or on

clean platform as per manufacturer’s specifications. Water cement ratio shall be
adjusted so that vermiculite cementitious coating adheres properly to steel surface

and does not sag or slide after applying.
Application of primer suitable with vermiculite cement coating as specified by

manufacturer shall be applied over the steel surface after cleaning the shop primer,
it required as per the manufacturer’s specifications.
Generally spray gun shall be used for the application of the mixed vermiculite
cementitious coating, except for small or inaccessible locations, where application

with hand tools shall be permitted. Mixed vermiculite shall be used within the pot
0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 35 of 36
life specified by manufacturer. Under no circumstances rebound material shall be

used.
The full specified thickness shall be developed in three successive coats.
Initial Coat : Thickness between 8 mm to 12 mm.
Intermediate Coat : Thickness between 18 mm to 22 mm to give total

thickness of 30 mm upto Intermediate coat.
Final Coat : Not less than 8 mm thick.
Each successive layer shall only be applied after the previous layer has developed
its initial set and is also properly scratched with steel brush to roughen the surface
to develop proper bond. If the application is interrupted and does not satisfy
successive layers criteria, the coating shall be cut back to the steel surface
proceeding layer with a trowel at an inclined angle. Exposed surface of this coating
shall be thoroughly wetted before resuming the work.
Application of mixed vermiculite shall not be carried out if the air temperature is 4º
C or less. Provision shall be made for adequate ventilation during and after
application, until the coating is dry.
Two coats of micro-porous exterior top coat, compatible to cement surfaces, of

approved make & colour conforming to BIS specification, should be applied, over
the fire proof coating.
Sealing with minimum 10 mm thick bitumen mastic flashing, shall be carried out at
all exposed joints between fire proofing material coating & steel.
19.3.4 HDPE LINING
Base of Reservoir Area including the embankment will be lined with the HDPE lining.
Geo-membrane of following specifications:
The reservoir structures will be lined with 1.0 mm black HDPE Geo-membrane sheet.
The Bed of the reservoir will be lined with HDPE 1.0 mm thick smooth lining, where as
the slope will be lined with one side textured HDPE 1.0 mm thick. The membranes will
be anchored on the berms with a suitably designed anchor trench and will be
backfilled after the anchoring of the membrane is completed.
20.0 HYDRO TESTING
Testing of Raw water reservoir shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 10430. The
details are as follows:-
1. On completion of the work, the reservoir shall be filled with water up to max. Water
level.
2. Level of water shall be recorded for a period of 3 days at interval of 24 hr.

0
STRUCTURAL WORKS
DOC. NO. REV.
PAGE 36 of 36
3. The average water loss shall not be more than 0.60 m3/sec. per million square
meter of wetted perimeter.
4. Any defect noted or pointed out by the engineer-in-charge shall be rectified by

contractor at his own cost of the satisfaction of engineer-in–charge.
Testing of Fire water reservoir shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 3370.

PC150/E/112/SEC-VI-3 5
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD. DOCUMENT NO REV
SHEET 1 OF 3
PART II: TECHNICAL
SECTION: VI-3.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – PROCESS
CONSTRUCTION
OF
RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER RESERVOIR,
PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES
FOR
INTEGRATED COAL BASED FERTILIZER COMPLEX
AT
TALCHER, ANGUL DISTRICT, ODISHA (INDIA)
5 20.09.19 20.09.19 ISSUED FOR ENQUIRY SKK RSB/SK SCK

4 08.04.19 08.04.19 ISSUED FOR ENQUIRY HK RSB/SKK SCK
1 15.03.19 15.03.19 ISSUED FOR ENQUIRY SKK/HK RSB/SK SCK
0 25.02.19 25.02.19 ISSUED FOR ENQUIRY (Draft) SK RSB SCK
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER PC150/E/112/SEC-VI-3 5
RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES
TALCHER FERTILIZERS ltd. DOCUMENT NO REV
PERFORMANCE & GUARANTEE TESTS SHEET 2 OF 3
3.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY:
3.1 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY PROCESS
Raw water of 7 days normal capacity shall be stored in Raw Water reservoir in the plant site. One Pump
sump shall be provided to install three numbers (2W + 1S) of Vertical Turbine type raw water pumps to
transfer raw water to Raw Water Treatment Plant, one number of vertical turbine type fire water make up
pump. The Pump sump shall be provided with necessary arrangement for maintenance of the pumps.
Additional space for ready hook up & pump installation to be provided in pump house to install one more
pump of same capacity for future requirement.
The raw water shall be pumped by raw water pumps to the raw water treatment plant.
3.1.1 RAW WATER PUMP DETAILS WHICH WILL BE MOUNTED ON THE RAW WATER
RESERVOIR
Fluid = Water
Type of Pump = Vertical Turbine Pump (suitable strainer to be provided)
No. of Pumps = 2W+1S
Pump Flow-rate/ pump = 1200 m3/hr
Pump Disc. Press. at pump Disc. Flange = 2.5 Kg/cm2g
Pump NPSHa (approx.) = Flooded
Estimated absorbed power/pump = 137 KW (Final to be furnished by vendor)
Fluid Property:-
Density = 990 kg/m3 at Amb. Temp.
Viscosity = 0.653 CP at Amb. Temp.
Vapour Pressure = 0.07 Kg/cm2a at Amb. Temp.
3.1.2 FIRE WATER

Bidder to provide fire water reservoir of storage capacity 25000 m3. Provision for fire water make-up to
fire water reservoir also to be furnished by the bidder. This facility is to be arranged in such a way that,
raw water coming from river site should first to be filled in fire water reservoir. After filling the Fire water
reservoir, raw water to be routed to Raw Water Reservoir with the help of Manual valves. Bidder to
ensure that either fire water reservoir or raw water reservoir to be filled at a time.

CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER PC150/E/112/SEC-VI-3 5
RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES
TALCHER FERTILIZERS ltd. DOCUMENT NO REV
PERFORMANCE & GUARANTEE TESTS SHEET 3 OF 3
Water will be routed to the reservoir & fire water reservoir through manual valve. Fire water reservoir
high level & Low level alarm shall be provided.
FIRE WATER MAKE-UP PUMP DETAILS WHICH WILL BE MOUNTED ON THE RAW WATER
RESERVOIR.
This pump will be used dedicated for fire water make up service in case any fault happens in normal
system as mentioned above.
Fluid = Water
Type of Pump = Vertical Turbine Pump (suitable strainer to be provided)
No. Of Pumps = 1W+0S
Pump Flow-rate/ pump = 1200 m3/hr
Pump disc. Press. at pump disc. Flange = 2.5 Kg/ cm2g
Pump NPSHa = Flooded
Estimated absorbed power/pump = 137KW (Final to be furnished by vendor)
Fluid Property:-
Density = 990 kg/m3 at Amb. Temp.
Viscosity = 0.653 CP at Amb. Temp.
Vapour Pressure = 0.07 Kg/cm2a at Amb. Temp.
Pump to be supplied with emergency power connection also.
Attachments:-
1. Preliminary Instrument datasheet.
2. Kindly refer schematic P&ID – Annexure II of NIT (This P&ID is indicative and shall finally be
developed during detail engineering by the contractor).

Preliminary instrument data for Raw water pump & Fire water Pump, Fire water storage tank
PUMPS
P‐101A/B/C P‐102
Data VALUE VALUE UNIT
FLOW 1200 1200 m3/h
DIFFERENTIAL HEAD 25 25 m
0 0 0
PUMPING TEMPERATURE 40 C 40 C C
PUMP DESIGN PRRESSURE AS PER STANDARD AS PER STANDARD kg/cm2g
0 0 0
DESIGN TEMPERATURE 75 C 75 C C
SUCTION PRESSURE FLOODED FLOODED kg/cm2g
NPSHa FLOODED FLOODED m
CASING MOC CS CS
IMPELLER CS CS
1. PUMP DRIVER SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR FULL VALVE OPEN CONDITION
2. PUMP IS NON HAZARDOUS. HOWEVER, SAME SHALL BE FINALIZED DURING DETAIL ENGINEERING BY
DETAIL ENGINEERING CONTRACTOR.
FLOW TRANSMITTER
Data FT‐101 UNIT

FLOW (min./Normal/max. ) 1200/‐/3600 m3/h
PRESSURE DROP at (Min./ Nor/ Max.) flow (‐)/0.2/0.3 kg/cm2
DESIGN PRESSURE 15 kg/cm2g
0
DESIGN TEMPERATURE 75 C
0
OPERATING TEMPERATURE 40 C
OPEARTING PRESSURE(min./Normal/max.) 1.5/1.0/0.8 kg/cm2g
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
PT‐105 PI‐101/102/103/104 UNIT
PRESSURE (min./normal/max ) (‐)/2.5/3.0 (‐)/2.5/3.0 kg/cm2g
0
OPERATING TEMPERATURE 40 40 C
DESIGN PRESSURE 3.5 3.5 kg/cm2g
0
DESIGN TEMPERATURE 75 75 C
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
LT‐101 LT‐102 UNIT
LEVEL HIGH/LOW 5000/200 5000/200 mm
OPERATING PRESSURE Atm Atm kg/cm2g
DESIGN PRESSURE Atm. + static head Atm. + static head kg/cm2g
0
OPERATING TEMPERATURE 40 40 C
0
DESIGN TEMPERATURE 75 75 C
FLUID PROPERTIES
UNIT Value
DENSITY kg/m3 990
VISCOSITY cP 0.653
VAPOR PRESSURE kg/cm2a 0.07
Above Mentioned data is preliminary. However, same shall be finalized during detail engg. By detail engg.
Contractor.
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC-VI- 0
4.0
PAGE 1 OF 12
PART II: TECHNICAL
SECTION : VI- 4.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – ROTATING EQUIPMENTS & EOT CRANE
PLANT: RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR,

PROJECT: INTEGRATED COAL BASED FERTILISER

COMPLEX AT TALCHER, ANGUL DISTRICT,
ODISHA (INDIA)
0 27.03.2019 27.03.2019 ISSUED FOR ENQUIRY NY ASR GC
P1 07.03.2019 07.03.2019 ISSUED FOR ENQUIRY NY ASR GC
P 08.02.2019 08.02.2019 ISSUED FOR ENQUIRY NY ASR GC

CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER & FIRE PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC-VI- 0
4.0
WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND
DOCUMENT NO REV
SERVICES, TFL, TALCHER
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – ROTATING EQUIPMENTS & PAGE 2 OF 12
EOT CRANE
CONTENTS
Sl. No. SECTIONS
1. GENERAL
2. DESIGN REQUIREMENT
3. INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
4. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
5. EOT CRANE
6. VENDOR’S DATA
7. SPARE PARTS
DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
NOTES: This document shall be used with relevant information contained in the
documents listed below (in order of priority) :
1. Letter for invitation of bid or succeeding official confirmed order.

2. Specification sheet of particular pump with relevant drawings, if any, for the project in
question.
3. This document.
4. Codes & Standards referred in the above mentioned documents and in this document.

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This Philosophy states that contractor’s scope of work shall include detailed
engineering, procurement, supply, manufacturing, fabrication, transportation,
inspection & testing, loading, unloading, insurance during transit, storage,
construction, erection/ installation of all Mechanical Rotating Equipments with
allied electrical, instrumentation and civil works, obtaining all necessary statutory
approvals from concerned government authorities as applicable, testing,
mechanical completion, pre-commissioning, commissioning, performance
guarantee test runs including total project management and handing over of Raw
Water Reservoir and allied services of prescribed capacity for M/s Talcher
Fertilizer Limited ( TFL).
2.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENT
2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENT FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
2.1.1 This standard shall be followed in establishing the minimum engineering

requirements for centrifugal pumps for non-critical services / water handling
services.
2.1.2 The pumps shall be designed, manufactured and supplied as per Hydraulic
Institute Standard / DIN 24256 / ISO-2858 /IS-1520/ IS-13518/ IS-5120/ equivalent
national & international Standard. Latest codes& standards shall be followed.

2.1.3 The pump shall be designed to develop the specified differential head at rated
capacity, suction pressure and specific gravity while running at the rated speed.
Rated speed of pump shall be full load speed of the drive motor. The pump
characteristics shall be guaranteed / tested with reference to the full load speed of
motor.
2.1.4 Guarantee point shall refer to the differential head, rated capacity, specific gravity,
and full load speed of the driver.

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
2.1.5 The pump and accessories shall be suitable for outdoor, unsheltered installation
and continuous duty unless otherwise specified in the respective specification
sheets.
2.1.6 The pumps shall be supplied complete with all the accessories as specified in the
respective specification sheets inclusive of necessary appurtenances, auxiliary
piping, special tools, spares etc.
2.1.7 Accessories required / recommended by pump vendor other than those specified
in the pump specification sheet for safe and efficient operation of the pump unit
shall be included in the pump vendor’s scope of supply and the same shall be
identified in the bid separately with adequate justification.
2.1.8 Deviations and/or exceptions to the enquiry specification sheet, enclosures,

applicable standards, etc., must be listed for each document, clausewise with
proper reason in a separate annexure in the bid. Otherwise it shall be assumed
that all the requirements of the enquiry are acceptable without any reservation and
shall be binding to the bidder.
2.1.9 Pumps shall have SI dimensions, comply with applicable ISO standards except for
piping connections which shall be as per ANSI/ASME standard.
2.1.10 Reference list of pumps which are in operation for similar service conditions shall be
furnished with the offer indicating broad specifications, purchase order number, date
and name & address of user.
2.2 BASIC DESIGN FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
2.2.1 The shut off head of the pump shall be 105% to 120% of the head at rated
capacity.
2.2.2 Maximum allowable noise level shall be within 85 dBA measured at a distance of
1.0 meter.

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
2.2.3 It should be possible to increase the head minimum by 5% by installing higher size
impeller.
2.2.4 In addition to static balancing, impellers shall be dynamically balanced as per G6.3
of ISO-1940.
2.2.5 Pump inlet, outlet and auxiliary connections shall be flanged. All connections shall
be provided with companion flanges, nuts, bolts and gaskets as per piping design
philosophy of the ITB/NIT.
2.2.6 Non-Standard Connections of 11/4, 21/2, 31/2, 5, 7 nominal pipe sizes shall not be
used.
2.2.7 When specified, pump shall be provided with drip tray under the stuffing box and
leak-off line with flange, companion flange, nuts, bolts and gaskets. Material
composition shall be same as that of pump casing. Leak - off piping shall be
arranged upto the edge of the base plate.
2.2.8 Pump inlet, outlet and auxiliary flanged connections shall confirm to the facing and
drilling requirements of ANSI / ASME B 16.1 or ANSI / ASME B16.5.
2.2.9 All equipment shall be designed to permit rapid and economical maintenance.
Major parts such as casing components and bearing housings shall be designed
(shouldered or dowelled) to ensure accurate alignment on reassembly.
2.2.10 Impeller shall be keyed to the pump shaft. Impeller nut shall be used to secure the
impeller and a positive mechanical locking method shall be adopted.
2.2.11 The pump shaft shall be one piece for horizontal pumps. For vertical pumps
number of shafts shall be minimum .
2.2.12 Shafts for horizontal pumps shall be fitted with deflectors. Deflectors shall be
made of suitable non-sparking material.

2.2.13 Pump alignment with its corresponding driver/motor to be carried out for all

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
2.2.14 condition i.e. without process piping & with process piping, Cold & Hot alignment.
No residual stresses due to piping shall occur in the complete system. Vibration
while pre-commissioning / commissioning and handing over of system to owner
must be within limit as in specified codes & standards.
2.2.14 Replaceable wear ring surfaces shall be furnished on impeller and casing. Mating wear
surfaces of hardenable materials shall have a difference in Brinell hardness number of
at least 50.
2.2.15 Radial and thrust bearings shall be rolling element type. These shall be designed
for 24,000 hours bearing life.
2.2.16 For between bearing pumps arrangement, bearing housing shall be cast integral
with the lower half of the pump casing or bolted to it. Bearing housing should be
provided with stiffening brackets and be sufficiently rigid to resist the dynamic
loads during operation.
2.2.17 Castings shall be sound and free from shrink holes, blow holes, cracks, scale,
blisters and other similar injurious defects. Ferrous pressure casting shall not be
repaired by peening, plugging, burning in or impregnating. When weld repairs to
castings are authorized by ASTM specification for the material, repair welding shall
be carried out in accordance with that specification. Unless otherwise specified,
weld repairs shall be inspected according to the same quality standards used to
inspect the casting.
2.2.18 Material of construction of various pump parts shall be as per pump specification
sheet. If the vendor considers other materials better, the same shall be offered as
an alternative only. Materials not specified in the specification sheet shall be
selected by the vendor in accordance with the service conditions. Chemical
composition and physical properties of the special materials, wherever used, must
be furnished along with the offer.
2.2.19 A name plate of 18 Cr - 8 Ni Stainless Steel or Monel, securely attached by

stainless steel pins at an easily accessible point on the pump body shall be
furnished. The name plate shall be stamped with following information:

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
- Purchaser’s item number

- Pump serial number
- Capacity in m3/h
- Differential head in meters
- Revolution per minute
- Casing hydrostatic test pressure in kg / cm2g
- Absorbed power in kW
In addition to above an arrow shall be cast / attached at a reasonably observable

point on the pump to indicate direction of rotation.
2.2.20 Motor shall have power ratings including service factor at least equal to following
percentage of pump rated absorbed power. :
Pump absorbed power ( in kW ) Motor rating percentage of absorbed power

< 22 125
22 - 55 115
> 55 110
2.2.21 Vendor shall indicate for vertical pumps, minimum liquid level for pump operation /
startup in the offer.
2.2.22 For vertical pumps, a hole shall be provided in the column pipe above the
maximum liquid level to relieve pressure on stuffing box.
2.2.23 For vertical the specified head shall be measured at the discharge flange, at pump
mounting level. Pumps shall be suitable to develop specified discharge head in
addition to column losses and vertical distance, between minimum level in the
sump tank and center line of the discharge flange. Pump vendor shall indicate
total head to be developed by the pump in the offer.
2.2.24 Vertical pumps taking suction from sump / vessel shall be furnished with corrosion
resistant suction strainer. Perforation / mesh size shall be suitable for proper
operation of pump. Sufficient free flow area of the strainer shall be provided.

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
2.2.25 Pumps shall be provided with shaft sleeve under mechanical seal.
2.2.26 Shaft sleeves shall be hard chrome oxide coated under flexible member of
mechanical seal.
2.2.27 Gland Packed pumps shall not be offered.
2.2.28 When pumps are specified with mechanical seals
2.2. 28.1 Make of mechanical seal shall be Flowserve, Eagle Burgmann, John
Crane make.
2.2.28.2 Mechanical seal shall be inside mounted, balanced type with Carbon
versus Tungsten Carbide faces or Carbon versus Silicon Carbide faces.
Suitable flushing plan shall be provided.
2.2.29 Coupling make shall be as follows:
Driver rating up to 25 kW : Lovejoy (RRL), Pinbush type

Unique, Flender
Driver rating more than 25 kW : Pinbush type/All metallic type

Rathi-Discoflex type M, Euroflex,
Triveni-Flexibox
3.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
3.1 All pumps shall be subjected to inspection by Owner / inspector of owner/

purchaser or authorized third party inspecting agency as defined in the purchase
order. Test and inspection plan shall be submitted to the inspector for approval.
The inspector shall indicate additional test to be witnessed over and above the
once specified in the pump specifications.
3.2 Inspector shall have free access at all reasonable times to the vendor’s / sub
vendor’s shops. Vendor shall furnish to the inspector all necessary information and
assistance to verify that the requirements of the order specifications have been

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
met. The vendor shall give 2 weeks notice regarding readiness of material for
inspection to the inspector.
3.3 Acceptance of shop test shall not relieve the vendor of this responsibility in any
way.
3.4 Inspector (TPI) shall witness / inspect the following :
3.4.1 Review of material test certificate for casing, impeller, shaft, shaft sleeve, wearing
rings etc., and for spare parts.
3.4.2 Dynamic balancing of impeller as per ISO-1940
3.4.3 Hydrostatic test.
3.4.4 NPSHR test
3.4.5 Performance test and Complete unit test with Job motor including vibration check
3.4.6 Disassembly / strip down test.
3.4.7 Visual inspection and dimensional check.
3.5 Applicable national/ international standard shall be applied with respect to the
tolerances of each dimension.
3.6 All casting shall be visually inspected before machining for surface defects and
irregularities.
3.7 All repairs of defects found on inspection shall be subjected to prior approval of
purchaser’s inspector.
3.8 PERFORMANCE TEST
3.8.1 Performance test of each pump in the manufacturer’s shop shall be carried out.
3.8.2 Pumps shall be operated in shop for a period sufficient to obtain complete test
data. Unless otherwise agreed, the test speed shall be the rated speed of the
pump.

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
3.8.3 Test procedure shall be as per Hydraulic Institute Standard / IS - 5120.
3.8.4 During the performance test, pump when operated at rated speed and rated
capacity shall give guaranteed characteristics of total head, efficiency, brake kW
and NPSH within the following tolerances.
Rated differential head : + 5%, - 2%
Rated kW : + 4%
NPSHR :0
3.8.5 During performance test, pump shall operate without undue heating of bearings,
excessive vibration, noise or other mechanical faults. Such defects if noticed shall
be promptly rectified to the satisfaction of the inspector.
3.8.6 Instruments (if any) measurement tolerance shall be as per accuracy class I of IS-
1520.
3.8.7 When operating fluid has viscosity appreciably higher than test fluid, test values of
capacity, head, efficiency and power input shall be corrected to specified viscosity
of operating fluid as per IS - 5120 / Hydraulic Institute Standard. Characteristic
curves shall be plotted accordingly.
3.8.8 Job driver shall be used during performance test .
3.8.9 NPSHR test shall be conducted. Test shall be done at 5 points from shut off to
110% of rated capacity.
3.9 HYDROSTATIC TEST
3.9.1 Each pressure casing shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the maximum
allowable casing pressure. Multistage pumps may be segmentally tested at appropriate
section pressure.
3.9.2 Test pressure shall be maintained for a minimum period of 30 minutes during
hydrostatic test.

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
3.9.3 Vendor shall compile all the tests & inspection reports relevant to purchase order
scope of supply in folder(s). Following reports must be included:
- Material certificates (chemical analysis, chemical test & impact test)
- Results of non destructive inspection
- Results of hydrostatic test
- Records of performance test
- Records of NPSH test
- Records of dimensions
- Other test conducted by vendor as per specification
- Guarantee certificates
4.0 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
4.1 Pumps shall be despatched only after the shop test data and performance test
curves are approved by the inspector.
4.2 The unmachined exterior surfaces shall be sand blasted, descaled and cleaned.
The surface must be free from foreign material before paint is applied.
4.3 The external surface subject to atmospheric corrosion shall be painted with two
coats of primer and two coats of epoxy based finish paint.
4.4 All the internal parts and machined unpainted exterior surfaces shall be protected
with suitable rust preventive.
4.5 When driver is supplied with pump, the same shall be duly mounted on a common
base frame.
4.6 Both halves of the coupling shall be supplied by vendor in machined condition.
4.7 Each unit shall be suitably packed for outdoor storage for at least six months.

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
5.0 EOT CRANES
LSTK Contractor to provide EOT Cranes of adequate capacity in Pump House, wherever
required for ease in operation and maintenance activities. EOT crane shall be selected for
cater access to the maximum area of the pump house. Cranes to be provided in nearest
multiple of 5 Metric Tonnes considering maximum Safe weight to be lifted. Relevant
Indian/ ISO Standards applicable for EOT Crane shall be followed . All statutory
guidelines to be complied by the LSTK contractor. Double Rail travel EOT crane having
capacity minimum 1.4 times of maximum weighted part to be selected and also
complying to IS: 3177 and statutory guidelines.
6.0 VENDOR’S DATA

6.1 The vendor shall supply the drawings and documents as per NIT
6.2 Each drawings / documents shall have the following information in a separate
block :
Owner’s Name :
Name of the Project / Plant
Consultant Name :
Purchase Order Number
Equipment Code Number / Name
Drawing Number / Revision Number
Supplier Reference Number
6.3 Contractor to furnish Complete List of all rotating equipment with their quantity, tag
numbers and Power consumption along with the bid. Material Requisition (MR)
for all machinery/ equipment to submitted by contractor for Owner’s review &
approval. Owner’s/ PMC comments are to be duly incorporated by contractor
and afterwards contractor shall proceed with procurement activity with
respective OEMs. Technical Bid Evaluation (TBE) documents are to be
furnished by bidder to Owner for information.
The un-priced copies of purchase requisition / purchase orders detailing both
technical and commercial aspects for all items shall be submitted to Owner for
review & comments. Contractor to proceed for placement of order on
corresponding successful OEM only after receipt of CLEARANCE from Owner
against the subject PR/PO.
7.0 SPARE PARTS

7.1 Spare parts as per NIT and shall be quoted in the proforma enclosed with enquiry.

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
With Bid For Review/ For Final/

A Pumps (Y/N) Approval Information Approved/ As-
built
List of drawings / documents
including drawing number,
1.0 N Y - Y
revision number, description and
approval status
Detailed manufacturing
2.0 N Y - Y
programme (Time bar chart )
Certified dimensional outline
3.0 Y Y - Y
drawing
Cross sectional drawing and bill
4.0 N Y - Y
of material
Shaft seal drawing and bill of
5.0 N Y - Y
material
Shaft coupling assembly
drawing and bill of materials
including allowable
6.0 misalignment clearances, shaft N Y - Y
bores & key ways dimensions
with tolerances and the style of
coupling guard
Primary & auxiliary sealing
schematic and bill of materials
including seal fluid, fluid flows,
7.0 pressure pipe and valve sizes, N Y - Y
instrumentation, orifice sizes,
and piping arrangement
drawings
Cooling or heating schematic
and bill of materials including
cooling & heating media, fluid
8.0 flows, pressure, pipe and valve N Y - Y
sizes, instrumentation, orifice
sizes and piping arrangement
drawings
Lube oil schematic and bill of
9.0 N Y - Y
materials
Lube oil system arrangement
drawing including sizes, rating
10.0 N Y - Y
and location of all customer
connections
Lube oil component drawings
11.0 N Y - Y
data
Electrical and instrumentation
12.0 N Y - Y
schematics, wiring diagrams and
4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
bill of materials
Electrical and instrumentation

13.0 arrangement drawing and list of N Y - Y
components
14.0 Performance curves N Y - Y
Pump specification sheet with

15.0 complete details in Performa N Y - Y
enclosed with enquiry / order
Certified foundation assembly
drawing of pump with driver & all
accessories mounted on base
plate with load diagram for
16.0 foundation design (In case of N Y - Y
motor being procured by
purchaser, motor frame details
will be supplied to vendor within
4 weeks.)
Engineering flow diagram
showing:
17.0 - Lubrication & sealing lines N Y - Y
- Flushing / washing lines
- Cooling / steam lines
Reference list for pumps
supplied in past for similar duty
conditions. Reference list shall
18.0 contain complete address of Y - - Y
user, user’s purchase order
number, brief specifications and
date of commissioning
19.0 Lube oil schedule N - - Y
Automatic recirculation valve

20.0 assembly drawing, sectional N Y - Y
drawing with bill of material
21.0 Quality Assurance Plan. N Y - -
Material test certificates and
Inspection & performance
22.0 test report along with dispatch N - - Y
clearance certificates from
inspector
Instruction manuals describing
23.0 installation, operation and N - - Y
maintenance procedures
24.0 Spare parts recommendations Y
and price list Y - -

4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
Parts catalogue complete with

25.0 reference drawing nos. and N - - Y
sketches etc.
With Bid For For Final/

B EOT Crane / Hoist Review/ Informatio Approved/
(Y/N) Approval n As-built
Data sheets – completely filled

1 Y Y
Information to be supplied by
2 Y Y
manufacturer / Vendor
General arrangement Drg.
showing various details & all
principal dimensions of the
3 Y Y
assembled unit, horizontals and
vertical clearances and
approaches.
List of spare parts with individual
4 Y Y
part Nos. and prices.
5 Descriptive literature / catalogue Y Y
Detailed manufacturing
6 Y Y
programme Time-Bar Chart.
Individual structural drgs. For
7 Y Y
main girders and End-carriages.
Mechanical calculations
(Brakes, Gear boxes, gears,
8 Y Y
pinions coupling, Bearing, Rope-
drum, Wire-rope etc.
Civil load data drawing, Cross-
sectional detailed drawings of
sub-assemblies part nos.,
9 materials of construction and Y Y
heat treatment details wherever
applicable :
a) General Assembly Drg.

10 Showing the complete Y Y
mechanical details.
Crane rail & end stops fixing
11 Y Y
arrangement.
Material test certificates
12 (including the originals) of load Y Y
bearing parts e.g.
Crane rail & end stops fixing
13 Y Y
arrangement.
Material test certificates
14 (including the originals) of load Y Y
bearing parts e.g.
4.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
EOT CRANE
Test certificates of motors

15 Y Y
(including the originals)
Certificates of No load, load,
16 over load defection Test duly Y Y
witnessed by the Inspector
Operation & Maintenance
17 Manual (including the lubrication Y Y
schedule also.)
Drg. Showing the supporting
18 arrangement of flexible cable Y Y
with main bridge and trolley.

EM0000-PNMP-TS951 P1

PAGE 1 OF 34
PART II: TECHNICAL
SECTION – VI-5.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – PIPING OSBL
PLANT: CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER & FIRE

SERVICES

ODISHA (INDIA)

DESIGN PHILOSOPHY-PIPING
OSBL PACKAGE UNIT DOCUMENT NO REV
TFL, TALCHER PAGE 2 OF 34
CONTENTS
SECTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1.0 Scope
2.0 Design Philosophy
3.0 Codes, standards and supplementary specifications
4.0 General Design
5.0 Design Philosophy / Criteria General
5.1 Equipment Layout
5.2 Unit Piping
5.3 Offsite & Yard Piping
5.4 Flare Piping
5.5 Underground Piping
5.6 Air Systems
5.7 In-Line Instruments
5.8 Sample Connections
5.9 Vents and Drains
5.10 Line Strainers
5.11 Spectacle Blinds
5.12 Flexibility Analysis and Supporting
5.13 Personnel Protection
5.14 Mechanical Handling
6.0 Materials
7.0 Painting
8.0 Welding

LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
ANNEXURE /
ATTACHMENT NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 Table Of Basic Span
2 Accessibility For Valves & Instruments
3 Vertical And Horizontal Guides Spacing
4 Clearances
1.0 SCOPE

The scope of this document is pertaining to the design philosophy, norms .and specific
requirements which shall be adhered to by contractor or his associates and representatives
during the course of the project in designing, procurement & construction of piping material.
1.1 APPLICABLE STANDARD & CODES
Standard No. Title
ASME/ANSI B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME/ANSI B16.9 Steel Butt-Welding Fittings
ASME/ANSI B16.10 Face to Face and End to End Dimensions of Valves
ASME/ANSI B16.11 Forged Fittings Socket Welded and Threaded -
ASME/ANSI B16.20 Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges – Ring Joint, Spiral
Wound, and Jacketed.
ASME/ANSI B16.21 Non-Metallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME/ANSI B16.25 Butt-Welding Ends
ASME/ANSI B16.34 Valves – Flanged, Threaded Welding End.
ASME/ANSI B16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges
ASME/ANSI B31.1 Power Piping
ASME/ANSI B31.3 Process Piping.
ASME/ANSI B31.5 Refrigeration Piping
ASME/ANSI B36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
ASME/ANSI B36.19M Stainless Steel Pipe
API 6D Specification for Pipe Line Valves (Gate, Plug, Ball and
Check Valves).
API 6FA Fire Test for Valves.
API 501 Specifications for Metallic Gaskets for Refinery Piping.
API 594 Check Valves:, Wafer-Lug and double flanged type
API 598 Valve Inspections and Testing.
API 599 Steel Plug Valves Flanged and Butt-weld ends
API 600 Steel Gate Valves Flanged and Butt-welding ends, Bolted Bonnets
API 602 Gate, Globe, and Check Valves for Sizes DN 100
(NPS 4) and Smaller for the Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries
API 603 Class 150 – Corrosion Resistant Flanged End gate valves.
API 604 Ductile Iron gate valves – flanged ends.
API 606 Compact C.S. Gate Valve extended body.
API 607 Fire Test for soft seated Ball Valve.
API-608 Metal Ball Valves, Flanged, Threaded & BW Ends.
API 609 Butterfly Valves, Lug type & Wafer type.
API 623 Steel Globe Valves—Flanged and Butt-welding Ends, Bolted
Bonnets
IBR Indian Boiler Regulations
AWWA C207-D Large Dia. Steel Flanges (Ring Type).
EJMA Expansion Joints Manufacture Association.
MSS SP 6 Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges and
Connecting End Flanges of Valves and Fittings.
MSS SP 25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges & Unions
MSS SP 43 Wrought Stainless Steel Butt-weld Fitting
MSS SP 45 By-pass and Drain Connection.
NACE MR0175-94 Sulphide Stress Cracking resistant Metallic Material

NFPA National Fire Protection Association.

EN 10204 Metallic Products - Types of Inspection documents
ASTM D3035 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
ASTM D3261 Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
2.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
2.1 Piping systems shall be in accordance with Clause 1.1, which permits the use of the
following specifications:
ASME B31.1 Power Piping
ASME B31.3 Process Piping
Materials, design, construction, testing and inspection shall be fully in accordance with the
selected specification.
2.2 The dimensions, manufacturing tolerances and marking of ferrous and non ferrous piping
components shall conform to the applicable standards .The design shall comply with all
applicable codes, laws and statutory regulations. The Contractor shall optimize the layout
with the approval of the owner and include any changes resulting from HAZOP studies
and taking into consideration the following :
i) General site layout taking into account the topographical geo-technical aspect of the
site.
ii) Access for maintenance and fire appliances.
iii) The interdependency of units and buildings with each other within the complex.
iv) Safety escape routes for personnel based on emergency or disaster management
plans in the event of environmental upset or fire.
v) Suitable drainage system of Project site.
2.3 Material of construction shall be suitable for specified process duty (both normal and
abnormal operations) and have a projected life and corrosion/ erosion allowance in
excess of minimum life of the project. Piping materials specified in piping materials
specification shall be used for selection of material of construction of major services.
All materials under steam service shall be supplied with proper certificates in prescribed
forms.
3.0 CODES, STANDARDS AND SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS:

3.1 The latest edition of codes shall be applicable for piping system design, materials,
fabrication, manufacture, erection, construction and inspection etc. For any item not
covered in the list of codes and standards / International Standards / proven design
may be finalized based on discussion with OWNER/Consultant.
3.2 Where conflict occurs, the order of precedence shall be:
a) Statutory Regulations
b) National, International and Industry Standards and Codes of Practice.
c) Technical Specifications
3.3 Standards, Codes and Supplementary Specifications for piping design shall be applied as
follows:
i) Process and utility piping to ASME B31.3 Process Piping
ii) Power Plant piping to ASME B 31.1

Fire protection system shall be designed and installed in accordance with applicable
NFPA (National Fire Protections Associations) Codes.
4.0 GENERAL DESIGN
4.1 Flanges for process and utility piping shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.5 and ANSI
B16.47.
4.2 Wherever possible all purchased equipment shall be supplied with flanges that comply with
ANSI B16.5/B16.47.
4.3 The minimum size of piping to be used in pipe-racks shall be 2” NB.
4.4 With the exception of equipment connections the minimum size of piping shall be ½” NPS.
4.5 Pipe sizes 1 ¼”, 2 ½”, 3 ½” 5” and 22” NPS shall not be used except as connections to
purchased equipment.
4.6 Threaded pipe nipples between headers and vent, drain and instrument isolation valves shall
be Schedule 160 for CS and Schedule 80S for SS in the size range ½” to 2” NPS.
4.7 Piping 2” NPS and above shall be butt-welded. All weld joints in piping 1½” NPS and below
shall be socket welded using socket weld fittings.
4.8 In Class 600 and higher pressure rating double block valves shall be used for systems open
to atmosphere, such as vents and drains. Piping in hazardous service shall have vents,
drains and bleeds routed to a safe location. Category ‘M’ substances shall be vented to the
flare system.
4.9 When a line of one material specification is connected to a line of higher material
specification, the connecting line shall be constructed of the higher material specification or
pressure rating up to & including the first block valve.
4.10 As a minimum, piping systems shall have isolation facilities as follows:
ASME B31.3 Category ‘M’ service and Normal service (Class 900 and above) shall have
double block isolation valves with a downstream drop-out spool.
ASME B31.3 Normal service (Class 150 and 600) shall have a valve and downstream
spectacle blind.
ASME B31.3 Category ‘D’ service shall have a valve and downstream spectacle blind.
Generally, equipment shall have provision for isolation of piping to each equipment
connection by means of valving and /or blinds as determined by service conditions.
5.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY / GENERAL CRITERIA
5.1 Equipment Layout
5.1.1 Basis of Equipment Layout

Equipment Layout shall be finalised based on the following data:
a) Overall Plot Plan
b) P&I Ds
c) Equipment Data Sheets
d) Wind Direction
e) Safety Distance and Specific Distance mentioned in Piping Design Basis and as
per statutory requirements.
5.1.2 Development of Equipment Layout

The following aspects shall be considered during development of equipment layout.
a) Process Requirement -Proper interconnection between equipment as per P&I Ds
to achieve the intended process parameters.
b) Economy of piping material- Minimize the quantity of costly piping.
c) Erection & Construction requirements:
Erection scheme and schedule of all equipment must be considered during
equipment layout to have smooth erection mainly in case of tall columns, heavy
equipments like thick walled reactors, space for laying tall columns, approach roads
for cranes / derricks for lifting the column or reactors and requirement of special
foundation / pile etc.
d) Operation and Maintenance Requirement
- Overhead and side clearances for exchangers and pumps
- Horizontal & overhead clearances for easy movement of working personnel.
- Crane approaches for air coolers/fired heaters.
- Provision of monorail for pumps and exchangers
e) Similar equipment grouping - All columns, exchangers, pumps etc. should be
grouped together for convenience of maintenance and safety wherever feasible.
f) The technological structures should be interconnected for easy movement of
operational personnel.
g) U/G piping corridors for main headers should be marked in equipment layout for all
under ground piping.
5.1.3 Plant Layout & Design guidelines
5.1.3.1 General
The plant layout shall be based on ensuring adequate access, to allow construction,
inspection, maintenance and operation to be performed in a safe and efficient manner. The
alignment of equipment and pipe shall offer an organised appearance. The layout shall be in
accordance with, but not limited to the design practices described in this criteria.
Where dynamic loading, limited pressure drop or other severe service condition applies,
particular care shall be taken in routing pipe lines.
Flushing connections shall be provided on all lines containing flammable or toxic material,
slurries, and materials which solidify when the line is dead. Sufficient Nitrogen purging
points shall also be provided. Supply piping of fuel gas shall be arranged for equal flow
distribution.
Trolley beams, pipe davits, shall be provided with appropriate removable hoists mechanism
for charging and discharging catalysts, chemicals, packing rings etc.
Piping and all other services shall be arranged so as to permit ready access of Cranes for
removal of Equipment for inspection and servicing.

All utility and process piping shall be located above ground, and major lines shall be located
in overhead pipe ways.
Lines that must be run below grade, and must be periodically inspected or replaced, shall be
identified on the P & ID’s; these lines must be placed in covered concrete trenches. Sleeper-
ways shall not be used in process areas where they may block access for personnel and
equipment.
Drip legs and dead ends shall be avoided, especially for piping where solids or fluids may
congeal from corrosive condensate.
Where sleeper ways are used the elevations shall be staggered to permit ease of crossing or
change of direction at intersections. Flat turns may be used when entire sleeper ways
change direction. Flat turns must not be used within pipe racks.
Spacing and routing of piping shall be such that expanding/contracting lines (including
insulation) will not clash with adjacent lines, structures, instruments and electrical equipment
during warm up and cool down.
Piping to be sloped shall be indicated on the P&I D’s.
5.1.3.2 Pipe-Rack/T-Post/Small Portals

In general, equipment layout shall be prepared considering straight pipe rack, however other
shapes like L / T / U / H / Z etc can also be considered based on area available.
The width of the rack shall be 4M, 6M, 8M, 10M or 12M for single bay having four (4) tiers
maximum. In general, the spacing between pipe rack portals (span) shall be taken as 8 M for
main rack. However it can be decreased to 6 M depending on the size/number of the pumps
to be housed below pipe rack. Intermediate Beams between two portals shall be provided to
support smaller pipes <= 2". 20% extra space shall be provided on the pipe rack and portals
on each tier for future expansion/modifications.
-Clearance beneath pipe rack shall be 3.8 M minimum.

-Height between two pipe rack tiers shall be 2.0M minimum.
-Road clearance shall be 9 M minimum wherever heavy duty crane movement is required
during construction and future maintenance.
-Road clearance shall be 7.5 M minimum for main roads.
-Road clearance shall be 5 M minimum for secondary roads.
-T-Portal's width shall not be more than 2.5 M and height shall not be less than.3.0 M
5.1.3.3 Pumps
Wherever practicable pumps shall be arranged in rows with the centre line of the discharge
on a common line. In general, pumps shall be kept inside the pipe rack. However in case of
smaller racks, pumps shall be kept on one side or outside the pipe rack to provide clear
access under the rack as per clause applicable.
Pump foundation height shall be 300 mm above H.P.P.
Gap between each pump foundation / and foundation of technical structure should be
sufficient for easy removal of equipment after piping. Clearance between two adjacent pumps
shall be such that clear 900 mm aisle is available.

All pumps not open to sky with motor rating >= 45 KW shall be provided with monorail. No
monorail should normally be provided for pumps outside rack and sufficient space below rack
shall be available for pump maintenance.
5.1.3.4 Clearance and Accessibility
5.1.3.4.1 Access to Pumps

Clear access of 3.8M vertically and 4.5M horizontally shall be provided centrally under main
pipe rack for small mobile equipment to service pumps, wherever these are put under pipe
ways with prior specific approval. Pumps outside rack shall be approachable by small cranes
etc. from under the pipe rack.
5.1.3.4.2 Access to lower items to grade (Lowering Area)
Clear access shall be provided at grade on the access side for lowering external and internal
fittings from tall elevated equipment by providing pipe davits.
5.1.3.4.3 Layout & Access Requirements for Platforms ladders and Stairs
For providing platform ladder & staircase following guidelines shall be followed.
- Two means of access (i.e. two ladders or one ladder and one stair case) shall be
provided at any elevated platform which serves three or more vessels & for B/L valves
operating platform.
- Platforms, ladders and stairways shall be the minimum, consistent with access and
safety requirements.
- Stairway for tanks to be provided on upstream of predominant wind direction.
i) Platform at elevated structure
a) Dual access (i.e. one staircase and one ladder) shall be provided at large elevated
structure if any part of platform has more than 22.65M (75 ft) of travel.
ii) Platforms with stair access shall be provided for:
a) Location at which normal monitoring (once a day or more) is required or where
samples are taken.
b) Locations where vessels or equipment items need operator attention "such as
compressors, heaters, boilers etc.
iii) Platforms with ladder access shall be provided for:
a) Points which require occasional operating access including valves, spectacle blind
and motor operated valves, heater stack sampling points.
b) Man ways above grade on equipment.
iv) Ladder location
a) Wherever practicable, ladder shall be so arranged that users face equipment or
platform rather than facing open space.
b) Landings shall be staggered. No ladder shall be more than 6 M in one flight.
5.1.3.5 Clearances
Minimum clearances shall be as indicated in Annexure.

5.2 Unit Piping
5.2.1 Basis of Unit Piping

- Piping & Instrument Diagram
- Equipment layout
- Equipment Data sheet & Setting plan
- Line list
- Instrument Data sheet
- Structural & building drawings
- Topography of the plant
- Piping material specification
- Overall plot plan
- Tie in point drawing.
The following objective shall be ascertained during piping layout.
- Proper access to all operating points including valves, and for all orifice tapping points
and instruments in particular.
- Proper access to interrelated operating points for specific purpose and for maintenance.
5.2.2 Pipe Ways/Rack piping
5.2.2.1 Racks shall be designed to give the piping shortest possible run and to provide clear head
rooms over main walkways, secondary walkways and platforms.
5.2.2.2 Predominantly process lines are to be kept at lower tier and, utility & hot process lines on
upper tier.
5.2.2.3 Generally the top tier is to' be kept for Electrical (if not provided in underground trench as per
electrical design basis) and Instrument cable trays. Cable tray laying to take care of
necessary clearances for the fire proofing of structure.
5.2.2.4 Generally the hot lines and cold lines shall be kept apart in different groups on a tier. .
5.2.2.5 Generally the bigger size lines shall be kept nearer to the column.
5.2.2.6 Minimum spacing between adjacent lines shall be decided based on O.D of bigger size
flange'(minimum rating 300# to be considered), O.D of the smaller pipe, individual insulation
thickness and additional 25 mm clearance, preferably. Wherever even if flange is not
appearing the minimum spacing shall be based on above basis only. '
5.2.2.7 Actual line spacing, especially at 'L' bend and loop locations, shall take care of thermal
expansion / thermal contraction / non expansion of adjacent line. Non expansion / thermal
contraction may stop the free expansion of the adjacent line at "L' bend location.
5.2.2.8 Anchors on the racks are to be provided on the anchor bay, if the concept of anchor bay is
adopted. Otherwise anchors shall be distributed over two to three consecutive bays.
5.2.2.9 Anchors shall be provided within unit on all hot lines leaving the unit.
5.2.2.10 Process lines crossing units (within units or from unit to main pipe way) are normally provided
with a block valve, spectacle blind and drain valve. Block valves are to be grouped and
locations of block valves in vertical run of pipe are preferred. If the block valves have to be
located in an overhead pipe way, staircase access to platform above the lines shall have to
be provided.
5.2.2.11 Provision of block valves, blinds etc. shall be as per Process Design Basis and P & IDs.

5.2.2.12 All small bore piping shall be designed in a way so as to ensure adequate space for
maintenance and operation. For small bore piping intermediate support shall be provided in
between portals.
5.2.2.13 Stubs on saline water (if applicable) service shall be from top of main header.
Minimum branch size for tapping including for instruments e.g PG/ PTI TE etc. shall be of 3"
NPD and 150 mm height on internal cement lined pipes.
5.2.2.14 Aboveground lines shall be grouped to run on pipe racks or sleepers in so far as practicable.
5.2.2.15 Hot lines on pipe racks or sleepers shall be grouped and expansion loops shall be nested
together. The number of expansion loops shall be kept to a minimum.
5.2.2.16 Piping handling corrosive fluids shall be run under piping handling non corrosive fluids, and
shall not, where possible, be run overhead across walkways or normal passages for
personnel.
5.2.2.17 All process and utility piping will be located aboveground within the plant battery limit, except
water mains.
5.2.2.18 All piping shall be arranged in horizontal banks, where possible, to facilitate supporting.
Banks running north-south shall be at different elevations from banks running east-west.
Exceptions are permitted to avoid unnecessary change in elevation at change of
direction or where essential to avoid pockets.
5.2.2.19 All piping shall be routed for the shortest possible run and have the minimum number of
fittings consistent with provision for expansion and flexibility. All piping shall be arranged in a
neat manner, providing free access around all operating equipment.
5.2.2.20 Vertical lines at vessels shall run close to the vessel shell to facilitate supporting. The line
shall be arranged and grouped to allow the use of single support.
5.2.2.21 Lines carrying molten solids, slurries or highly viscous liquids shall have a sufficient
slope for each gravity flow.
5.2.2.22 The shortest and most direct layout possible shall be provided for gravity flow lines,
especially when the fluid is subject to solidification and when the differential pressure is
small.
5.2.2.23 Piping shall be arranged to facilitate handling of equipment for inspection or
maintenance.
5.2.2.24 Vapor collecting system shall be routed so that the vapor rises continuously from the vessel
being vented to a higher point without pocketing.
5.2.2.25 Pockets shall be avoided in lines, particularly those carrying corrosive chemicals, slurries,
vents, blow down lines, etc.
5.2.3 Column / Vessel Piping Control Valves

5.2.3.1 Piping shall be supported from cleats welded on the vessel as far as possible.
5.2.3.2 Proper guides at intervals shall be provided for long vertical lines.
5.2.3.3 Access platforms/ladders shall be provided along the column for valves and instruments.
5.2.3.4 For ease of operation and maintenance, column and vessels which are grouped together,
shall have their platforms at the same elevation interconnected by walkways wherever
feasible. However each column \ vessel shall have an independent access also. Column
vessel platforms should be designed in such a way so that all the nozzles should be
approachable from platforms.
5.2.3.5 Unless specifically indicated in P&ID’s control valves shall preferably be kept at grade
instead of platform.
5.2.3.6 Piping intended for vacuum services shall be routed as short as possible, with minimum
bends and flanged joints.
5.2.3.7 Piping support cleats shall be designed for safety valves considering impact loading during
popping off.
5.2.4 Pump Piping

5.2.4.1 Pump drives shall have clear access.
5.2.4.2 Pump suction piping shall be as short as possible and shall be arranged with particular care
to avoid vapor pockets.
5.2.4.3 Reducers immediately connected to the pump suction shall be eccentric type flat side up to
avoid the accumulation of gas pocket. For end suction pumps, elbows shall not be directly
connected to the suction flange. A straight piece minimum 3 times the line size shall have to
be provided at the suction nozzle.
5.2.4.4 Pump discharge check valve if installed in vertical lines shall be fitted with a drain connection
as close as possible downstream of the valve.
When a suction vessel operates under vacuum, the vent connection of the pump has to be
permanently connected to vapour space of the suction vessel to allow possible filling of the
pump with liquid before it is started.
5.2.4.5 Unless otherwise specified T -type strainers shall be used on pump suction piping for sizes 2"
and above.
5.2.4.6 Y-type strainers to be used for all sizes in steam services and for pump suction lines 1½ and
below.
5.2.4.7 All small bore piping connected to pump (drain to OWS & CBD, seat and gland leak drain)
shall have provision for break up flanges for removal of pumps.
5.2.4.8 Piping shall be so arranged that forces and moments imposed on the pump nozzle do not
exceed the allowable values as per API 610.
5.2.4.9 Pump discharge should preferably be routed away from the pump rather than towards the
motor side.
5.2.4.10 Pump cooling water connection shall be taken from the top of circulating cooling water
header.
5.2.5 Steam Header & Supply Lines / Steam and Condensate Systems
5.2.5.1 Steam piping shall be designed to have complete condensate removal. Drip legs shall be
provided with steam traps at low points in the system.

5.2.5.2 All steam branch connections shall be taken from the top of the header.
5.2.5.3 Return exhaust steam / condensate lines shall connect to the top of the exhaust steam
Condensate header.
5.2.5.4 Where block valves have been installed in the main steam header such that condensate can
collect either side of the valve when closed, a safe means of draining the condensate prior to
opening the valve shall be provided.
- Steam header shall be located generally on the upper tier and at one end of the rack
adjacent to columns.
- Branch lines from horizontal steam header, except condensate collection points, shall
be connected to the top of the pipe header.
- Isolation valves (if provided) on the branch line shall preferably be provided on the
horizontal run and outside the pipe rack.
- All branch lines shall be drainable.
- Drip legs & steam traps shall be provided at all low points and dead ends of steam
header. Drip legs at low points shall be closer to downstream riser and shall be
provided to suit bidirectional flows, if applicable.
- All turbines on automatic control for startup shall be provided with a steam trap in the
steam inlet line.
- All traps shall be provided with strainers if integral strainers are not provided.
- Steam traps discharging to atmosphere shall be connected to storm water drain/storm
sewer, in case of open system. In case of condensate recovery, traps shall discharge
into condensate header.
- Expansion loops are to be provided to take care of the expansions within units.
- Wherever condensate is to be drained, proper condensate draining facility shall be
provided.
5.2.6. Water Piping

5.2.6.1 Water piping shall be designed to minimize the possibility of water hammer.
5.2.6.2 Water main headers may run underground to prevent freezing.
5.2.6.3 Unless local code or regulation prohibits, firewater lines shall be underground to prevent
freezing. Firewater piping system shall conform to egulations of the competent governmental
authorities.
5.2.7 Instrument Air Piping

5.2.7.1 Instrument air lines shall not be connected to process lines, service lines, and other
equipment.
5.2.7.2 Instrument air shall not be used as plant air or service air.
5.2.7.3 Branch lines form the instrument air header shall be taken from the top of the header and
shall be provided with a block valve close to the header. Also in the upstream of Instrument
manifold, Gate valve has to be provided.

5.2.8 Supports and Anchors

5.2.8 1 Supports and/or anchors shall be provided close to changes in direction of lines, branch lines
and, particularly, close to valves to prevent excessive sagging, vibration and strain.
5.2.8 2 Allowable spans between pipe supports shall be determined to keep the maximum deflection
within 16 mm.
5.2.8 3 In cases where periodic maintenance requires removal of equipment, such as pumps and
relief valves, and where lines must be dismantled for cleaning, piping shall be supported to
minimize the necessity of temporary supports.
5.2.8.4 Spring-loaded hangers may be used on piping subject to thermal expansion or
contraction. In cases where the movement is very large, or the limitation of reaction and
stress are very severe, constant support spring hangers shall be used.
5.2.8.5 Suction and discharge lines of rotating equipment shall be supported as close as possible to
equipment nozzles, and shall be relieved of excessive strains by using proper pipe supports.
5.2.8.6 Supports shall not be directly welded to pipes. Where welding is unavoidable, supports
having the same chemical composition as pipe shall be carefully welded.
5.2.8.7 All piping shall be properly supported to minimize vibration.
5.2.8.8 Outlet piping of safety and relief valves shall be supported so that the inlet piping is capable
of withstanding the reaction caused by operation of safety and relief valves. Furthermore, the
supports shall be designed to minimize the stresses due to thermal expansion and the
stresses in the valve body due to the weight of piping.
5.2.8.9 Expansion joints shall be guided and anchored to the extent necessary for their proper
operation and alignment.
5.2.8.10 Anchors shall provide sufficient fixation to substantially transmit all load effects into the
foundations.
5.2.8.11 Underground piping shall be given special anchoring consideration for differential settlement.
5.2.9 Utility Stations

Requisite number of utility stations shall be provided throughout the unit to cater for the utility
requirement. Utility stations shall have four connections one for LP steam (SL), one for Plant
Air (AP), one for Service Water (WS) and one for nitrogen each of 1.0" with isolation valves
unless otherwise specified in P&ID.
Utility connection with nitrogen shall be provided with NRV along with isolation valve kept at a
separate location other than this cluster @ 15 M
Air and water lines shall have quick type hose connection and steam line shall have flanged
type hose connection. All connections shall be directed downward. All connections shall have
globe valve for isolation purpose. An inter connection with valve shall be provided between
steam and service water lines shall be provided. Inert gas hose, when required, shall have
built in non return valve in quick connection coupling of piping end.
Number of utility stations shall be such that all equipments shall be approachable from at
least one utility station. The approach of utility station shall be considered 15 M all around the
station location.
The Utility stations shall generally be located adjacent to pipe-rack column.

The utility stations shall also be provided on elevated structures like - technological structure,
operating platforms of vertical equipments etc.
Operating platforms having manholes must have a utility station. Utility station locations shall
be limited to a height of 35 M from H.P.P.
5.3 Offsite & Yard Piping

In general, offsite piping (except tank ages area), electrical cable and instrumentation cable
shall also be laid either on pipe rack or pipe sleepers.
Wherever piping is laid on pipe sleepers, it shall have hard surfacing below it keeping a gap
of 300 mm from the bottom of the pipes. Hard surfacing should be completed before start of
pipe laying. Width of hard surfacing shall be about 1.0 meter more than the piping corridor.
This extra hard surfacing shall be for movement of operating personnel along the piping
corridor.
Pipes at road crossing shall be under culverts in general. Overhead pipe bridges may be
used for areas where pipe racks are provided. Where culverts are not provided, pipe sleeves
shall be used for underground road crossing. Culverts / overhead pipe bridges shall be
adequately designed to take care of future requirements. Minimum 20% extra width shall be
provided in all such structures.
Clearances between lines shall be minimum "C" as given below:
C=(Do+Df)/2 + 25 mm + Insulation thickness(es) where,
Do - outside diameter of smaller pipe (mm)
Df - outside diameter of flange of bigger pipe (mm)
However this 'C' spacing between the offsite piping on the rack/sleeper can be suitably
increased so that the lines should not touch each other after insulation / lateral thermal
expansion.
Adequate clearance shall be provided for every long & high temperature lines to avoid
clashing at the bends. See 5.2.2 also for line spacing at 'L' bends and loops.
Expansion loops for all lines shall generally be kept at the same location.
Vents shall be provided on all high points & drains shall be provided at all low points. Drain
valves at sleeper piping shall be kept outside the sleeper way if the same is not accessible
and valves shall be put in horizontal only.
Places where piping is extended to make drain valves accessible - 2 nos. of stiffeners,
irrespective of pipe rating, shall be provided as per 5.13.1. Spacing of guides on each line on
a pipe bay shall not exceed the value given in clause 5.13.1
5.4 Flare Piping

Flare header shall be sloped towards flare knock-out drum. Only horizontal loop shall be
provided as per requirement to accommodate thermal expansion. The desired slope shall be
ensured throughout including flat loop. Flare header shall be supported on shoe of height
ranging from 100mm to 300mm.

Proper thermal analysis temperature shall be established including the possibility of

temperature gradient along the line before providing expansion loops. Efforts shall be made
to minimize the number of loops. Flare line between knock out drum and water seal drum
shall be designed for pressure fluctuations and adequately supported to avoid vibrations.
5.5 Underground Piping
5.5.1 Underground steel piping shall be protected from electric corrosion.
5.5.2 Underground piping passing under loaded areas, such as main roads in the plant, shall
be protected from heavy traffic by casing pipes or covers extending at least 1 m on either
side of the area or having the wall thickness sufficient to bear earth pressure.
5.5.3 Underground piping shall be sloped to all drain points with a downward slope of not less than
1 m in 150 m.
5.5.4 Expansion elbows or joints of underground piping for hot fluids, such as steam or heated
heavy oil, shall be enclosed in a conduit from which they are separated to allow free
longitudinal expansion.
5.5.5 Where it is impossible to run pipe aboveground or underground, trenches may be used.
5.5.6 Trenches for piping close to process equipment should be avoided, whenever possible.
5.5.7 All underground pipe work shall be provided with following protection:
a) At location where Underground Piping becomes above ground, INSULATING GASKET
with material Glass Filled Teflon or equivalent shall be provided.
b) CATHODIC PROTECTION (CP) shall be provided to all underground piping.
Specification shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR & shall be approved by the
OWNER.
c) Underground piping shall be wrapped & coated by “PYP KOTE” or equivalent tapes /
sheets, 4.00 mm thick & shall be “HOLIDAY TESTED” before Hydro Test.
d) All underground pipes shall have Sand Bed, at least 150 MM all around the pipe.
e) All road crossings by Underground piping shall be through Hume Pipe Sleeves.
5.5.8 Buried Pipes

The following points to be considered in designing of buried pipes
i) All underground metallic piping shall be coated and wrapped and provided with
cathodic protection system. If sacrificial metal is used, permanent testing
arrangement shall be provided.
ii) All cooling water distribution headers 18" and higher shall be laid underground.
iii) All Sewage lines (oily and chemical) from catch basin to mains and manholes shall be
laid underground.
iv) Underground pipe crossing roads, access ways and rails shall have casing pipe
(R.C.C or C.S).
v) Valve chamber wherever required shall be made of brick or concrete. Valve chamber
should be spacious to attend valves during operation/Maintenance.
vi) All U.G. headers shall clear equipment foundations as far as possible. Under special
cases, the C.W. header may be laid over the footing of foundations.
vii) Provide break flange at + 500 MM from floor level connection with cathodic protection
to isolate underground pipe from above ground piping with insulating gasket KIT.
viii) Pipes shall be laid below electrical cables if any.
ix) Top of underground piping shall be below grade level at least 1 meter deep in case of
open areas and 1.5 meter deep for roads.
5.5.9 Piping in Trenches
The following points to be considered in designing of trench pipes
i) Piping located below grade, requiring inspection, servicing or provided with
protective heating.
ii) Fire water lines/Process lines.
iii) Drain lines requiring gravity flow trenches.
iv) Sump for valves and trenches shall be provided.
v) Suitable draining scheme for trenches shall be provided.
5.6 Air Systems

5.6.1 Branch connections shall be taken from the top of the header.
5.6.2 Low points shall be fitted with drains.
5.7 In-Line Instruments

5.7.1 Liquid level controllers and level glasses shall be located so as to be accessible from grade,
platform or permanent ladder. The level glass shall be readable from grade wherever
possible.
5.7.2 Relief valves shall be accessible. Relief valves with a centre line elevation over 4.5 M above
grade (expect in pipe racks) shall be accessible from a platform or permanent ladder.
5.7.3 Relief valves that discharge to a closed system shall be installed higher than the collection
header, with no pockets in the discharge line.
5.7.4 Relief valves that discharge to atmosphere shall have tail-pipes extended to a minimum of
3.0 M above the nearest operating platform that is within a radius of 8 M.
5.7.5 Provide steam traps at pocketed low points and at dead ends of steam headers. Provide
steam traps on excessively long runs of steam piping to ensure dry quality steam at
destination. Steam traps located more than 4.5 M above grade, except in pipe racks, shall be
accessible from a platform.
5.7.6 Control valves shall be accessible from grade or platforms. In general, the instruments or
indicators showing the process variables shall be visible from the control valve.
5.7.7 Orifice runs shall be located in the horizontal. Orifice flanges with a centre line elevation over
4.5m above grade, shall be accessible from a platform or permanent ladder.
5.7.8 Orifice taps shall be located as follows:
i) Air, Gas and steam
Top vertical centreline (preferred)
45 degrees above horizontal centreline (alternate)
ii) Liquid

Horizontal centreline (preferred)

45 degrees below horizontal centreline (alternate)
iii) Tap orientation shall be shown on piping isometrics.
5.8 Sample Connections
Sample connections shall be accessible from grade or platforms. In general, where liquid
samples are taken in a bottle, locate the sample outlet above a drain funnel to permit free
running of the liquid before sampling.
5.9 Vents and Drains

5.9.1 The minimum size of vent and drain connections in shall be as follows:
For process & utilities lines :
4” & Below NPS ¾”
6” & 10” NPS 1”
12” & above NPS 11/2”
Vent & Drain shall be provided with the valve & blind flange. For all vents / drains of process
lines / utilities lines, double valves shall be required for 600 # & more rating.
Process vents and drains shall be indicated on the P&ID’s
5.9.2 Vent, drain and sampling valves on process lines, not connected to a piping system, shall be
provided with appropriate end closures.
5.9.3 Vents shall be located at high points of pipelines when necessary.
5.9.4 Drains shall be located at low points to empty pipelines or equipment after testing or during
maintenance (i.e for every loop).
5.9.5 All drains and vents shall be provided with valve, except that vents for test purpose for flare
liens (header), may be plugged. Exposed threads shall generally be seal welded.
Low-point hydrostatic drains and high-point hydrostatic vents shall be added as required;
locations to be determined during the design review.
5.9.6 Vent valves shall be the globe or gate type and drain valves the gate type.
5.9.7 Valved bleeds shall be provided at control valve stations, level switches, level controllers,
and gauge glasses.
5.10 Line Strainers
5.10.1 Provide temporary conical type strainers in 2” NB and above butt weld pump suction lines for
use during start-up. Arrange piping to facilitate removal.
5.10.2 Provide permanent Y-type strainers for pump suction piping below 2” NB Thd or SW.
5.10.3 Provide temporary basket type strainers located at the suction pulsation device inlet for start-
up of reciprocating compressors. Arrange piping to facilitate removal of the filter.
5.10.4 Provide temporary basket type strainers and locate them as close as possible to the
compressor inlet flange for start-up of centrifugal compressors. Arrange piping to facilitate
removal of the filter.
5.10.5 Allowable pressure drop when specified shall be certified by vendor along with the offer. If
asked specifically, vendor shall furnish pressure drop calculations
5.10.6 All 2" & higher sized Y type strainers shall be provided with 3/4" threaded, tap and solid
threaded plug as drain connection. For less than 2", this shall be ½ " size.
5.10.7 Bottom flange of Y-type strainer shall not have tapped hole. Full length standard size studs
shall be used for joining blind flange.
5.10.8 For fabricated strainers, all BW joints shall be fully radiographed and fillet welds shall be
100% DP/MP checked.
5.10.9 All the strainers shall be hydrostatically tested at twice the design pressure.
5.11 Spectacle Blinds

5.11.1 Spectacle blinds shall be provided to isolate equipment. In hazardous service flanged drop-
out spools shall be provided for safety purposes. Both shall be shown on the P&ID’s.
5.11.2 Spectacle blinds shall be accessible from grade or platforms. Blinds located in a pipe-rack
are considered to be accessible. Blinds that weigh over 40kg shall be accessible by mobile
equipment. Where this is not possible davits or hitching points shall be provided.
5.12 Flexibility Analysis and Supporting
5.12.1 Pipe Supporting Criteria & General Guidelines.

Piping system shall be properly supported taking into account the following points:
1. Load of bare pipe + fluid + insulation (if any).
2. Load of bare pipe + water fill.
3. Load of valves and online equipment and instrument.
4. Thermal loads during operation.
5. Steam-out condition, if applicable.
6. Wind loads for piping at higher elevation, e.g. transfer lines, column over head lines,
flare headers, etc.
7. Forced vibration due to pulsating flow.
8. Vibration due to two phase flow.
9. Loads due to internal pressure.
10. Any external loads/concentrated loads and cold load of springs.
Pipe supporting shall preferably follow the minimum basic span as given in Annexure-1
except for flare line in off site on trestles in which case the maximum basic span shall be
restricted to 18.0 meters, irrespective of line size.
For sizes not covered in Annexure-1, basic span shall be established based on project
requirement. For piping on rack or sleeper, as a minimum, providing resting support on every
grid of pipe rack / sleeper is mandatory. Depending on the pipe size, as a rule, guides shall
be provided on straight run of pipes at intervals as specified in Annexure-3 unless specifically
becomes non-viable due to flexibility problems.
Additional supports, guides, anchors, special supports like spring supports and sway braces
shall be provided after detailed analysis of piping system to restrict the forces experienced on
nozzles of critical items like pumps, compressors, turbines, exchangers, air fin coolers etc.

For lines which do not need any support otherwise but become unsupported by opening of
flange, etc, during maintenance and thereby may transfer the total load on a small branch off,
a permanent support shall be suitably provided which may be a spring support also. Bare
pipes of size 14" and above on elevated structures shall be supported with pad or shoe.
While bare pipes of size 6" and' above, on sleepers, corrosion pads shall be provided.
Pads shall be provided for insulated pipes before welding the shoes for sizes 8" & above.
Adequate stiffening shall be provided for the following:
a) Lines in above 600#,
b) Lines having two phase flow,
c) Lines having Pulsating flow such as discharge of reciprocating compressors &
reciprocating pumps,
For pulsating flow lines detailed thermal and vibration analysis by analog study shall be done
to decide location of anchor supports and guides etc. Pulsating flow lines shall be as
identified by licensor/owner.
Wherever two phase flow in piping is expected, piping design shall be checked by dynamic
analysis to prevent vibrations.
Pipe support design shall be such that deflection in piping systems due to sustained loads
shall not exceed 15mm, in any case, between two adjacent supports.
As far as possible long trunnion types of supports (more than 0.5 metre) are to be avoided. In
case long trunnion support is unavoidable in straight length of pipe, trunnion height to be
restricted to 0.5 M and balance height to be made up by providing extended structure.
In the heaters where steam air decoking provision is there, the main lines and decoking lines
should be supported in a way so that either of the lines should not be in the hanging position
while connected to other one. Same philosophy shall be adopted for similar type of switch
over arrangement.
Piping passing through the technology structure or passing near the concrete column etc.
should have adequate annular space to avoid restriction of line movement during thermal
expansion. The gap should take care the thermal expansion along with insulation thickness.
High density PUF blocks shall be considered for cold piping supports. Use of wood blocks
shall be avoided.
All pipes supports shall be so designed that there is no undue tension on equipment flanges.
Flange joints should not move away from each other in case of unbolting of the joint.
5.12.2 Flexibility Analysis Criteria & General Guidelines

5.12.2.1 Formal computer analysis shall be performed on piping systems as per design philosophy for
stress analysis (Refer annexure)
5.12.2.2 The directions of forces and moments shall be in accordance with Welding Research Council
Bulletin 107 (WRC 107), with the exception that the radial force (P) shall be away from the
vessel. All forces and moments shall be assumed to act simultaneously and apply at the
nozzle/vessel interface.

5.12.2.3 Air coolers to API 661 shall be specified with Fx forces and Mz moments increased to 1.2
times the value shown in Figure 8 of API 661 for nozzle sizes 6”NPS and larger to simplify
piping flexibility analysis and facilitate piping layout.
5.12.2.4 Piping stress analysis and equipment nozzle loading analysis shall be in accordance with
ASME B31.3 and the relevant API, ANSI/ISO and NEMA Codes.
5.12.2.5 API 610 Pumps
The allowable nozzle loads on centrifugal pumps shall meet the load criteria of API 610.
Heavy duty base plate shall be specified where the pump design temperature is in excess of
150C.
ASME or Manufacturer’s Standard Pumps
The allowable nozzle loads on horizontal centrifugal pumps design to ASME B73.1 shall be
specified by the manufacturer. For preliminary layout and analysis NEMA SM 23 criteria shall
be used for individual nozzles.
Other Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps
The allowable nozzle loads shall meet the load criteria specified by the manufacturer.
Vertical Turbine, Can-Types Pumps
The combined bending and tensional thermal stress in the piping attached to the nozzle shall
be limited to 25 percent of the allowable stress range shown in ASME B31.3. The combined
stress due to dead load and other sustained loads shall be limited to 25 percent of the
allowable hot stress.
5.12.2.6 For piping design purposes, differential settlement between items of major equipment on
separate foundations shall be taken as 10 mm.
5.12.2.7 Cold springing in piping shall not be permitted without written permission from the Owner.
Cold springing of piping directly connected to rotating equipment is not permitted under any
circumstances.
Piping shall be analyzed for expansion, contraction, differential settlement, relief, valve
reaction and effects mentioned at CI. 5.12.1.
The design of piping systems shall take into account the different conditions expected during
operation, start-up, shut-down, cold branch in case of standby pump, tracing, etc.
Hydrocarbon lines shall be designed for steam-out conditions, if specified in line schedule.
The use of expansion joints shall be considered only when space oar pressure drop
limitation does not permit pipe bends. Expansion joint of axial type shall be avoided.
Forces and moments due to weight, thermal loads and other imposed loads on the
equipment nozzle must not exceed the allowed loads for the equipment.
Minimum analysis temperature shall be the design temperature of the line as per line list.
5.12.3 Method of Analysis

Formal computer analysis shall be performed on piping systems as per design philosophy for
stress analysis

The package used shall be latest version of CEASER / AUTO PIPE / SIMPLEX / CAEPIPE.
Only one of these packages shall be used for the project & not a combination of the above
packages.
All lines shall be analyzed at design I analysis temperature. In the absence of analysis
temperature lines shall be analyzed at design temperature.
However in case of wide difference in design and operating temperature, temperature for
analysis shall be established in process documents. (e.g. flare line)
All non-critical lines may be analyzed using other methods.
Special analysis methods shall be followed for lines involving pulsating flow such as those
connected to reciprocating pumps & compressors which require acoustical plus analog study
by approved agencies and shall require entire system analysis along with piping I
equipments.
Seismic analysis shall be done for line sizes 12” and above.
5.13 Personnel Protection
5.13.1 Eyewash and emergency safety showers shall be provided in areas where operating
personnel are subject to hazardous sprays, emissions or spills.
5.13.2 Personnel protection shall be provided on un-insulated lines and equipment operating above
70 deg C when they constitute a hazard to the operators during normal operation of the
facility.
5.13.3 Leakage indicating tape and spray impingement shrouds shall be provided at flanged joints
in hazardous service.
5.14 Mechanical Handling
5.14.1 Handling facilities such as davits and monorails shall be provided on vessels over 10m in
height where the weight of removable internal and/or external equipment is greater than 35
Kg.
6.0 MATERIALS
6.1 General
6.1.1 Basic material selection of particular line depending on its service, temperature and
corrosivity shall be spelt out in process package. Material specification shall follow the
requirements as per process parameters & attached PMS / VMS.
6.1.2 Only piping materials listed in ASME B31.3 shall be used for Category ‘M’ and Normal
Service piping. Unless otherwise specified in PMS, For Category ‘D’ utility piping, where
scaling and impurities are to be avoided (such as instrument air, potable water and deluge
water) hot dipped galvanised and threaded fittings may be used in sizes up to and including
4” NB. Galvanised piping shall not be used in environments containing acids or other
corrosive commodities. In corrosive environments stainless steel piping material shall be
used for such utility systems.
6.1.2 All items/parts of Austenitic Stainless Steel shall be supplied in solution annealed condition.

For all Austenitic Stainless steels, Inter granular Corrosion' (IGC) Test shall be conducted.
6.1.3 In absence of specific requirement, Natural Rubber shall be used for lining in rubber lined
piping items, wherever applicable. The Vendor shall confirm the suitability of Rubber Material
for specified service. Unless otherwise specified, rubber lining shall be in accordance with
IS4682 Part-I.
6.1.4 Unless otherwise specified, HDPE pipes & fittings shall be in accordance to ASTM D3035/
ASTM D3261/ASTM D3350 or equivalent.
6.1.5 Specification for FRP material
6.1.5.1 Anticorrosion Barrier of Polymer veil having minimum thickness 2.5 mm shall be provided for
chemical resistance. Mechanical resistance to be sustained by FRP.
6.1.5.2 The selected nominal pipe wall thickness will include manufacturers full under tolerance, and
the specified corrosion and/or erosion allowance. The pipe thickness will be adequate to
resist all external loads from thermal, mechanical and other sources in addition to the
process pressure-temperature requirements. However the pipe thickness will be according to
vendor’s norms and standard calculations but not be lower than indicated in DIN 16965 Part
4. External FRP layer shall be protected against ultra-violet light.
6.2 Pipe
6.2.1 Calculation of pipe thickness and branch reinforcement shall be based on requirements of
ASME B31.3. Proper corrosion allowance and mill tolerance shall be considered to achieve
the selected thickness.
6.2.2 Unless specifically exempted, welded pipes shall be acceptable only with longitudinal weld
made employing automatic welding. 100% radiography for all welds except for pipes for
category D service.
6.2.3 Double seam 180˚ apart is allowed for sizes 36" and larger only.
6.2.4 Galvanized Pipes shall be only Hot Dip galv. to ASTM A53.
6.2.5 Hydrostatic tests shall be applied to each length of pipe and be in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM A530/A530M, unless otherwise specified.
6.2.6 Check analysis shall be carried out as per ASTM-A-530 for pipes as per ASTM-A-312 and
pipe size > 8” and thickness > Sch.120, Check analysis shall also be carried out as per
supplementary requirement S1 of ASTM-A-312.
6.3 Fittings
6.3.1 Type of fittings shall be equivalent to pipe type. All fittings shall be seamless similar to pipe
specification in construction unless otherwise specified.
6.3.2 Thickness of fittings at ends to match pipe thickness for BW fittings. For reducing BW fittings
having different wall thicknesses at each end, the greater one shall be employed and the
ends shall be matched to suit respective thickness.
6.3.3 Unless and otherwise specified in the requisition all socket weld and screwed fittings shall be
in accordance with ANSI B16.11 to the extent covered in the specification except for unions
which shall be in accordance with MSS-SP-83.

6.3.4 Special fittings like Weldolet, Sockolet, Sweepolet etc. which are not covered in ANSI , MSS-
SP shall be as per Manufacturer’s Std. Contours of these fittings shall meet the requirements
of ANSI 31.3. Manufacturer shall submit drawings/catalogues of these items along with the
offer & also shall be submitted for approval before manufacturing.
6.3.5 All pipes employed for manufacturing of fittings shall be required to have undergone Hydro
test to ASTM A530 to the extent so as to produce wall stress of 75% of SMYS of the material.
6.3.6 All welded fittings shall be 100% Radio-graphed by X-Ray on all welds.
6.4 Flanges
6.4.1 All flanges shall be of forged one piece material (seamless), and plate may not be
substituted without written approval from the Purchaser.
6.4.2 All flange joints on piping system including flanges on the equipment, manholes, etc shall be
tightened using Torque wrench I hydraulic bolt tensioner depending upon service criticality.
6.5 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be as per piping material specification/ applicable standard.
6.6 Stud, Bolts, Nuts and Jack Screws

6.6.1 All bolting shall be as per ASME/ANSI 818.2.1 for Studs, M/C Bolts and Jack screws, and
ASME/ANSI B18.2.2 for nuts. Machine Bolts shall not be used in piping flange joint, except
for Butterfly Valves, which shall be lug type, having UNC Threads in lugs facilitating opening
of flanges from both sides.
6.6.2 Screw threads of bolting shall be unified coarse threads in accordance with ANSI / ASME
B1.1 having Class 2A for bolts and Class2B for nuts. Screw threads in sizel-1/8 and larger
shall be 8 threads per inch.
6.7 Valves
6.7.1 General
All flanged valves (except forged) shall have flanges integral with the valve body.
Valve Castings/Forgings purchased shall be from Local approved foundries/forging shop.
Yoke material shall be at least equal to body material.
Forgings are acceptable in place of Castings but not vice-versa.
No cast iron valves to be used in firewater or any other service.
Valves in saline water (if applicable) service shall be with non ferrous trims and all wetted
parts other than trims shall be epoxy coated.
6.7.2 Ball/Plug/Butterfly Valves
Use of soft seated ball/plug/butterfly valves shall be suitably selected based on temperatures
handled.
Butterfly valves shall be suitable for throttling application.
As a rule, they shall be limited to water services only. Lug type Butterfly valves shall be with
threaded lugs only. Each butterfly valve shall be provided with the Bolts to be installed from
both sides separately.
PN equivalent rating for Class150# valves shall be minimum PN16.

Ball valves may be used in place of gate or plug valves with the following limitations:
i) Operating conditions are within the permissible pressure - temperature range of seat
materials.
ii) Fire safe type to be used for hydrocarbon services.
6.7.3 Valve Dimensions
Face-to-Face/End-to-End dimension shall be as per ANSI B16.10. In case the same is not
covered under B16.10, the dimension shall be as per BS 2080/manufacturer standard.
Hand wheel diameter shall not exceed 750mm and lever length shall not exceed 500 mm on
each side. Effort to operate shall not exceed 35 kgf at hand wheel periphery. However, failing
to meet the above requirement, vendor shall offer gear operation.
Quarter-turn valves shall have "open" position indicators with limit stops.
6.7.4 Non Destructive Testing of Valves

6.7.4.1 Radiography procedure, areas of casting to be radiographed, and the acceptance criteria
shall be as per ASME/ANSI B16.34.
All valve castings shall be of radiographic quality.
The minimum requirement of radiography shall be as under:
Class Size Qty
150 Up to 24” 5%
150 26” & above 100%
300 Up to 16” 10%
300 18” & above 100%
600 & above All 100%
6.7.4.2 The welds of body-to-bonnet and body-to-end flange shall be subjected to 100% NDT; both
radiographic and magnetic or liquid penetrant examinations.
6.7.4.3 Beveled ends on each butt welding end valve shall be subjected 100% magnetic particle or
liquid penetrant examination.
6.7.4.4 Each valve shall be pressure tested in accordance with API 598.
6.7.5 Criteria for Isolation Valves
Process Drain/ Pressure Level Flow Safety Control

Installation
Isolation Vent Taping Taping Element Valve Valve
150 / 300# Single Single Single Single Single Single Single
600 # Single Double Double Single Double Single Single
Above 600# Double Double Double Double Double Double Single
Note: For S/D & at battery limit, it will be as per process requirements.

6.8 Traps
Vendor shall also furnish the performance curve indicating the capacity in mass/hour at
various differential pressures across the trap.
Parts subject to wear and tear shall be suitably hardened. Traps shall function in horizontal
as well as in vertical installation.
Traps shall have integral strainers.
All traps shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the design pressure.
6.9 Hoses
Manufacturer shall guarantee suitability of hoses for the service and working conditions
specified in the requisition, if the material is not specified in the Material Requisition for any
particular service.
All hoses shall be marked with service and working pressure at minimum two ends clearly.
Hoses shall be resistant to ageing, abrasion and suitable for outdoor installations.
Complete Hose assembly shall be tested at two times the design pressure
Steam hoses shall be subject to steam resistance test.
6.10 Expansion Joints(Metallic)
The applicable codes are ASME B31.3 and EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturer's
Association).
Bellows shall be formed from solution annealed sheet conforming to the latest ASTM Spec.
Any longitudinal weld shall be 100% radiographed. The finished longitudinal weld must be of
the same thickness and same surface finish as the parent material.
Circumferential welds are not permitted. Bellows are to be hydraulically or expansion
(punched) formed. Rolled formed bellows are not acceptable. Noticeable punch or die marks
resulting from expansion operation are not acceptable.
No repairs of any kind are allowed on the bellows after forming. Deep scratches and dents
are not acceptable.
The out of roundness shall be limited to ± 3mm. This is the max deviation between the max &
min diameter.
The actual circumference of the welding end shall be maintained to ± 3mm of the theoretical
circumference.
Apart from the usual requirements, the vendor shall also furnish
a) Design calculations to justify stiffness and fatigue life.
b) Axial, lateral stiffness, angular stiffness, effective pressure thrust area.
c) Installation/maintenance manual.
6.11 Supports & Spring Assemblies
The Material, Design, Manufacture and Fabrication shall be generally as per MSS-SP-58/
MSS-SP-89 and/or BS 3974.

Testing of springs shall be as per BS1726.

6.12 Non Destructive Examination
10% radiography of butt welds and 10%DP/ MP test of fillet welds shall be done for pipe
Classes in 150# & 300#.
100% radiography on butt weld joints and 100% DP/MP for fillet welds test shall be done for
Pipe Classes in 600# & above.
7.0 PAINTING
Painting shall be as per attachment provided elsewhere in NIT.
8.0 WELDING
Welding shall be as per ASME BPV- Sec. IX
ANNEXURE – 1
TABLE OF BASIC SPAN
PIPE- VAPOR PIPE- LIQUID BARE PIPE BARE PIPE
INSULATION INSULATION EMPTY WATER FILLED Pipe size in.
Pipe SCH/Th
BASIC SPAN (L)M BASIC SPAN (L)M
Size k
0 0 0 0
176 C 316 C 176 C 316 C
In. (in) UPTO UPTO SPAN(L) WEIGHT SPAN(L) WEIGHT
0
TO TO 0
TO TO
175 C 0 0
175 C 0 0
M KG/M M KG/M
315 C 400 C 315 C 400 C
3/4" SCH 40 3.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 2.0 4.5 1.68 4.0 2.04 3/4"
1” SCH 40 4.5 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.5 3.0 5.0 2.52 4.5 '3.07 1"


Pipe SCH/Th
Size k
0 0 0 0
176 C 316 C 176 C 316 C
0
TO TO 0
TO TO
175 C 0 0
175 C 0 0
M KG/M M KG/M
315 C 400 C 315 C 400 C
1-
SCH 40 5.0 5.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 3.5 6.0 4.08 5.0 .5.4 1-1/2"
1/2"
2" SCH 40 5.5 5.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 3.5 8.5 5.47 5.5 7.65 2"
2-
SCH 40 6.5 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.5 4.5 7.5 8.7 6.5 11.79 2-112"
112"
3" SCH 40 7.5 6.5 5.5 6.5 6.0 5.0 8.0 11.35 6.5 16.15 3"
4" SCH 40 8.0 7.5 6.5 7.5 7.0 6.0 9.0 16.2 7.5 24.45 4"
6" SCH 40 10.0 9.5 8.5 9.0 8.0 7.5 10.5 28.3 9.0 46.7 6"
8" SCH 40 12.0 11.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 12.0 42.84 10.0 75.22 8"
10" SCH 40 13.5 13.0 12.0 11.5 10.5 10.5 14.0 60.74 11.5 111.9 10"
12" 3/8" w 14.5 13.5 13.0 12.0 11.5 11.0 15.0 74.40 12.0 147.5 12"
14" 318"w 15.0- 14.5 13.5 12.0 12.0 11.5 16.0 82.5 12.5 172.05 14"
16" 318"w 16.0 15.5 14.5 13.0 12.5 12.0 17.0 94.5 13.0 213.15 16"
18" 3/8" w 17.0 16.5 15.0 13..5 13.0 12.0 18.0 106.5 13.5 258.3 18"
20" 318" w 18.0 17.5 16.0 14.0 13.5 12.5 19.0 118.5 14.0 307.5 20"
24" 3/8"w 20.0 19.0 17.5 14.5 14.5 13.0 21.0 1425 15.0 418.2 24"
3/4" SCH 80 3.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 3.0 2.0 4..5 2.20 4.0 2.49 3/4"
1" SCH 80 4.5 4.0 3.0 4.5 3.5 3.0 5.0 3.25 4.5 3.72 1"
1-
SCH 80 5.0 5.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 4.0 6.0 5.45 5.0 6.60 1-112"
112"
2" SCH 80 6.0 5.0 4.5 5.5 5.0 4.0 6.5 7.53 6.0 9.45 2"
2-
SCH 80 6.5 6.0 5.5 6.0 6.0 5.0 7.5 11.49 6.5 14.25 2-1/2"
112"
3" SCH 80 7.5 6.5 6.0 6.5 6.5 6.0 8.0 15.37 7.0 19.66 3"
4" SCH 80 8.0 8.0 7.0 7.5 7.5 6.5 9.0 22.47 8.0 29.94 4"
6" SCH 80 10.5 10.0 9.0 9.5 9.0 8.5 10.5 42.90 9.5 59.85 6"
8" ½” w 12.0 11.5 10.5 10.5 10.0 10.0 12.0 65.10 11.0 94.8 8"
10" ½” w 13.5 13.0 12.0 11.5 11.5 10.5 14.0 82.20 12.0 130.69 10"
12" ½” w 14.5 13.5 ./, 3.0 12.5 12.0 11.5 15.0 98.13 13.0 168.64 12"
14" ½” w 15.0 14.5 13.5 13.0 12.5 12.0 16.0 108.15 13.5 194.4 14"
16" ½” w 16.0 15.5 15.0 13.5 13.0 13.0 17.0 124.2 14.0 240.0 16"
18" ½” w 17.5 17.0 .16.0 14.5 14.0 13.5 18.0 140.25 14.5 286.64 18"
½” w ..:.17.
20" 18.0 17.5 15.0 14.5 14.0 19.0. 157.5 15.0 341.8 20"
0.
24" ½” w 20.0 19.0 . 18.5 16.0 15.0 15.0 21.0 188.25 16.0 458.44 24"
1" 10S 4.0 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 2.5 4.5 2.08 4.0 2.7 1"


Pipe SCH/Th
Size k
0 0 0 0
176 C 316 C 176 C 316 C
0
TO TO 0
TO TO
175 C 0 0
175 C 0 0
M KG/M M KG/M
315 C 400 C 315 C 400 C
1- 10S
5.0 4.5 3.5 4.5 4.0 3.0 5.5 3.12 5.0 4.57 1-112"
112"
2" 10S 5.0 4.5 3.5 4.5 4.0 3.0 6.0 3.94 5.5 6.33 2"
2- 10S
6.5 5.5 4.5 5.5 5.0 4.5 7.0 5.26 6.0 8.85 2-1/2"
112"
3" 10S 7.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.5 5.0 7.5 6.45 6.0 11.91 3"
4" 10S 7.5 7.0 6.0 6.p 6.0 6.0 8.0 8.34 7.0 17.87 4"
6" 10S 9.5 9.0 8.0 8.0 7.5 7.5 10.0 13.82 8.5 34.54 6"
8” 10S 11.0 10.5 10.0 9.5 9.5 8.5 11.5 19.94 10.0 55.5 8"
10" 10S 12.5 12.0 11.0 10.5 10.0 9.5 13.0 27.S3 11.0 83.4 10"
12" 10S 14.0 13.0 12.0 11.0 11.0 10.0 14.5 36.00 11.5 114.6 12"
14" 105 14.5 14.0 13.0 11.5 11.0 11.0 15.5 41.18 11.5 132.6 14"
16" 10S 16.5 14.5 14.0 12.0 11.5 11.5 16.5 47.33 12.5 172.2 16"
IS" 10 S 16.5 15.5 14.5 12.5 12.5 11.5 17.5 53.18 13.0 212.1 18"
20" 10 S 17.5 16.5 15.5 13.0 13.0 12.0 18.5 68.50 13.0 264.5
20"
24” 10 S 19.0 18.0 17.0 14.0 13.5 12.5 20.5 94.37 14.0 376.8 24”
ANNEXURE – 2
ACCESSIBILITY FOR VALVES AND INSTRUMENTS

VALVES, INSTRUMENTS, CENTRELINE OF ITEM TO BE CENTRELINE OF ITEM TO BE

EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED OPERATED, LOCATED LESS THAN OPERATED, LOCATED MORE
3.6m ABOVE GRADE, 2.75 m ABOVE THAN 3.6m ABOVE GRADE,
FLOOR OR PLATFORM OR 1.8m 2.75m ABOVE FLOOR OR
ABOVE WING PLATFORM PLATFORM OR 1.8m ABOVE
WING PLATFORM
EXCHANGER HEADS NIL PLATFORM
OPER.VALVES 2" & SMALLER FIXED LADDER FIXED LADDER
OPER. VALVES 3" & ABOVE PLATFORM PLATFORM

MOTOR OPERATED VALVES PLATFORM PLATFORM
CONTROL VALVES PLATFORM PLATFORM
RELIEF VALVES 2" & SMALLER FIXED LADDER FIXED LADDER
RELIEF VALVES 3" & ABOVE PLATFORM PLATFORM
BLOCK VALVES 2" & SMALLER PORTABLE LADDER PLATFORM
BLOCK VALVES 3" & ABOVE PLATFORM (NOTE-1) PLATFORM (NOTE-1 )
BATTERY LIMIT VALVES PLATFORM PLATFORM
PRESSURE INSTRUMENT FIXED LADDER IF ABOVE 2.2m FIXED LADDER
HEIGHT
TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT FIXED LADDER IF ABOVE 2.2 M Ht FIXED LADDER
SAMPLE POINTS PLATFORM PLATFORM
GAUGE GLASSES FIXED LADDER FIXED LADDER
LEVEL CONTROLLERS PLATFORM PLATFORM
PROCESS BLINDS AND SPACERS PORTABLE LADDER I PLATFORM PLATFORM
2" & SMALLER
PROCESS BLINDS AND PLATFORM PLATFORM
SPACERS 3" & ABOVE
MANWAYS/MANHOLES PLATFORM PLATFORM
HANDHOLES/INSPECTION HOLES PLATFORM PLATFORM
NOZZLES (process} PLATFORM PLATFORM

VESSEL VENTS PORTABLE LADDER FIXED LADDER
LINE DRAINS & VENTS PORTABLE LADDER PORTABLE LADDER

ORIFICE FLANGES PLATFORM (NOTE-1) PLATFORM (NOTE-1)
NOTE -1:-BLOCK VALVES / ORIFICE FLANGES, IF LOCATED, WITH CENTRE LINES GREATER
THAN 2 METER FROM THE OPERATING FLOOR / OPERATING PLATFORM, SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH PORTABLE PLATFORM OR CHAIN FOR OPERATION.
NOTE -2 : PLATFORM SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE ORIFICE FLANGES ON PIPE RACK.
ANNEXURE-3
MAXIMUM SPACING OF GUIDES FOR VERTICAL & HORIZONTAL PIPES

NOM PIPE SIZE VERTICALSPACING HORIZONTAL SPACING

IN INCHES METRES METRES
1 6.0 6.0
1½ 6.0 6.0
2 6.0 6.0
3 8.0 12.0
4 8.0 12.0
6 8.0 12.0
8 8.0 12.0
10 12.0 18.0
12 12.0 18.0
14 12.0 18.0
16 12.0 18.0
18 12.0 18.0
20 16.0 18.0
24 16.0 18.0
26 & ABOVE 16.0 18.0
NOTES:-
1. These spacings may be varied to suit column spacing of rack. The above spacing is for straight
runs of pipe & does not include guides which are used for control of thermal movements, as
decided by stress group.
2. The guide spacings given in the above table are indicative only.

ANNEXURE – 4
CLEARANCES
Minimum clearances for piping, equipment, structures, platforms, and supports shall be in accordance
with the following table:
Item Description
Headroom for primary access roads wherever heavy duty

Roads 9M
crane movement is required.
Headroom for primary access roads 7.5 M
Width of primary access roads excluding shoulders. Refer Civil
Headroom for secondary roads 5M
Width of secondary roads excluding shoulders. Refer Civil
Clearance from edge of road shoulders to platforms,

equipment, pipe associated with equipment, or similar 1.5 M**
features.
Maintenance Aisles at Horizontal clearances for equipment maintenance by
3M
Grade hydraulic crane (12t capacity)
Vertical clearance for equipment maintenance by hydraulic
3.6 M
crane (12t capacity)
Horizontal clearance for fork lift and similar equipment (2500
2.4 M
kgs capacity)
Vertical clearance for fork lift and similar equipment (2500
2.4 M
kgs capacity)
Horizontal clearances for equipment maintenance by
portable manual equipment (A-frames, hand trucks, dollies 1 M
or similar equipment)
Vertical clearances for equipment maintenance by portable
manual equipment (A-frames, hand trucks, dollies or similar 2.4 M
equipment)
Walkways Horizontal clearance (not necessarily in a straight line) 750 mm
Headroom (except for hand wheels) 2.2 M
Platforms Minimum width 1200mm

Item Description
Headroom from stairwell treads. 2.2 M
Minimum clearance around any obstruction on the platform. 500 mm
Platforms Headroom 2.2 M
Maximum vertical distance between platforms 6M
Minimum toe clearance behind a ladder. 210 mm
Minimum handrail clearance. 100 mm
Minimum maintenance space required between flanges of

Equipment 500 mm
exchangers or other equipment arranged in pairs.
Minimum maintenance space required for structural
300 mm
members or pipe.
Clearance from edge of road shoulder (the extreme
1.5 M
projection)
Horizontal clearance from hydrocarbon equipment (shell to
Fired Equipment 15 M
shell)
Exception: Reactors or equipment in alloy systems shall be
located for the most economical piping arrangement.
Clearance from edge of road to heater shell. 3M
Clearance between the outside of the hand wheel and any

Valve Hand wheels 25 mm*
obstruction.
Clearance between the outside diameter of the flange and
Pipe (aboveground) 25 mm*
the outside diameter of pipe insulation.
Clearance between the outside diameter of the pipe, flange
50 mm*
or insulation and a structural member.
Clearance between the outside diameter of the flange and
25 mm*
the outside diameter of bare pipe.
Minimum distance from underside of pipe to grade or
300 mm
platform.
Control Valve Arrangement Centreline of control valve above grade or platform. 450 mm
Minimum centreline of control valve from face of column or

600 mm
wall.

Item Description
Where process conditions require steam or hydrocarbon

vapours to be discharged to atmosphere at a safe location,
the tail pipe shall terminate as below:
Distance above nearest operating platform. 3M
Within radius of nearest operating platform. 7.5 M
** Verify conformance with local regulations.

* With full consideration of thermal movements

PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC-VI- P1
5.1
SHEET 1 OF 6
PART-II: TECHNICAL
SECTION – VI-5.1
DESIGN SPECIFICATION - PIPING
PLANT: RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP

HOUSE AND SERVICES

ODISHA (INDIA)

RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR PUMP PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC-VI- P1
HOUSE AND SERVICES 5.1
TALCHER FERTILIZER LTD. DOCUMENT NO REV
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY – PIPING SHEET 2 OF 6
CONTENTS
SECTION
DESCRIPTION SHEET NUMBER
NUMBER
1.0 GENERAL PIPING SCOPE OF WORK 3
2.0 DESIGN & DETAILED ENGINEERING 3
3.0 PROCUREMENT & SUPPLY BY BIDDER 4
4.0 INSPECTION 4
5.0 PAINTING 5
6.0 CONSTRUCTION 5
7.0 BIDDER’S RESPONSIBILITY 5
8.0 DRAWING/ DOCUMENTATION SCHEDULE 6
9.0 PACKAGING 6
10.0 DOCUMENTATION WITH BID 6
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
SL NO.OF
DOC.NO. DESCRIPTION
NO. SHEETS
1 EM0000-PNMP-TS951 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY - PIPING 34
2 B20, B24, D24 PIPING MATERIAL CLASS 15
3 PC150-0000-0002 SCHEMATIC LAYOUT 1

1.0 GENERAL PIPING SCOPE OF WORK

1.1 The detail scope of work includes such as but not limited to complete management,
Design, Detailed Engineering , to provide all the necessary data, drawings, documents
required as per the project requirements, Procurement, Supply, Transportation of
materials, shop & site Fabrication, Erection, Installation, Supporting, Non-Destructive
Testing (NDT) & required Inspection , pre-heating, dye-penetrant test, Magnetic Particle
Test, post weld heat treatment, radiography, Testing, Flushing, Air drying, blowing ,
cardboard-blasting , seal/leak-testing, Pre-Commissioning, Trial run, Commissioning and
Guarantee of all the associated works pertaining to complete piping system and related
facilities for RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND
SERVICES at TFL, TALCHER.
1.2 Design, material, fabrication and erection shall be in accordance with latest edition of
ASME B31.3 chemical plant and petroleum refinery piping code. The dimensions,
manufacturing tolerances shall conform to applicable standards.
1.3 All works described in this package shall be performed in accordance with the design-
basis, specifications, drawings, and other requirements of NIT and shall be subject to
Owner’s review and approval.
1.4 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
Materials as per internationally acceptable code shall be used for piping based on service
requirement. All materials for piping Components shall conform to ASTM or API
Specifications as per enclosed piping specifications. All piping materials and valves shall
be procured from the reputed approved suppliers/vendors.
1.5 Cost of piping job shall also include the cost of supervision, Labour, overheads / profits,
materials, consumables, scaffolding and all other associated arrangements required to
execute the related activities of this package.
1.6 PIPING INTER - CONNECTION
Piping lines as per P&ID shall be provided at battery limit which shall be indicated later by
Owner. Bidder shall provide valve at battery limit for respective piping system of the
package unit.
1.7 SPARES
Two years operation spares shall be quoted as recommended by bidder for this package
unit.
1.8 After completion of erection jobs, all piping system will be suitably hydraulically tested as
per the test pressure indicated in the line list / relevant document approved by owner.
2.0 DESIGN AND DETAILED ENGINEERING BY BIDDER

2.1 Collection of all data/ information furnished in the NIT and additionally collected/
generated by Bidder.
- Finalization of design data/ basis for carrying out design, detailed Engineering for
complete scope of work as per project specifications, contained in the NIT.
2.1.1 Performing design and detailed engineering of the following:
a) Complete piping system for the package unit.
b) Carry Out all necessary calculations in accordance with approved design basis, drawings
/ documents and requirements of the NIT.
c) Finalization of layouts for the unit and preparation of construction drawing, preparation of
piping drawings, equipment layouts, piping general layout drawings (GAD’s) , pipe
supports, piping isometrics. Typical indicative sketches/drawings included in NIT
document shall be taken as broad basis for developing the layouts. Since the availability
of free space is limited, Bidder shall plan his piping layouts in such a way so as to
minimize the area requirement while giving due importance to ease of access, operation
and maintenance of the facilities installed by the Bidder. The fabrication/erection & all
other piping jobs shall be carried out as per drawings/documents approved by Owner.
d) Carrying out Material Take Off for the entire piping system for the package unit.
e) The detail design shall take into consideration of local Statutory Regulation, if
any, for the package unit.
3.0 PROCUREMENT & SUPPLY BY BIDDER

3.1 Bidder shall procure and supply all materials whatsoever required for
temporary/permanent installation of piping system in sequence and at appropriate time.
All equipments, materials, components etc shall be suitable for the service and the
design life of the system.
3.2 Bidder shall procure all materials, components, equipments, consumables etc required
for successful completion of the piping system. Bidder shall also procure spares required
for pre-commissioning and commissioning/start-up the as recommended for all the items
supplied by him as per specifications provided in the NIT. Where no specifications are
available in the contract, the same shall be prepared by the Bidder, and shall be subject
to Owner’s approval.
3.3 Material take-off with complete description of size, rating, material, thickness and
specifications.
3.4 Preparation and finalization of data sheets for all piping materials e.g. all valves etc. All
data-sheets shall be subject to review and approval by Owner.
3.5 Preparation of Material requisitions, Request for Quotation & its evaluation and
recommend Bidders for Owner’s approval. Preparation of purchase requisitions, review of
Bidder’s drawings and calculations, approval of manufacturing procedures wherever
necessary, and the party inspection at manufacturer’s works of the materials by reputed
agencies as required. Quality control and expediting of all procured items at Bidder’s
shop or at fabrication yard.
3.6 Bidder shall procure materials as per specifications and list of approved
Vendors/Suppliers (for major Items) included in the bid document.
3.7 Carry out proper documentation of inspection and quality assurance programs for all
equipment and bulk materials duly approved by Owner. Bidder shall maintain an accurate
and traceable listing of procurement records for the location, quality and character of all
permanent materials in the Project.
3.8 Bidder shall immediately report to the Owner of all changes which will affect material
quality, and take necessary corrective actions. Purchase requisitions including Purchase
Orders of all major items shall be approved by Owner. For balance items, records shall
be furnished for information only.
3.9 Compliance with Bidders and supplier’s instructions and recommendations for
transportation, handling, installation and commissioning.
4.0 INSPECTION
4.1 Inspection authority means the Third Party Inspection Agencies (TPIA) approved by the
Owner to carryout inspection of materials.
4.2 The inspecting authority shall have the right to select random samples for check test and
reject materials, if samples furnished as above and tested as per the specifications fail to
meet the requirement specified.
4.3 All the items shall be inspected and tested in the presence of one or more
representatives of the purchaser during various stages of manufacturing. Material shall

be considered acceptable for dispatch only after final certificate of acceptance is issued
by the Inspector.
4.4 Testing performed in the presence of the purchaser’s representatives shall not relieve the
supplier of their own responsibilities and guarantees and any other contractual
obligations.
4.5 Quality Assurance plan (QAP) / Inspection Test Plan (ITP) shall be submitted by bidder
for approval by Third Party Inspection Agency (TPIA).
4.6 Scope of Inspection by TPIA:
Review of MTC (all batches).
Visual check for surfaces, external appearance (10% random witness).
Dimensional check (10% random witness).
Positive Material Identification (PMI) for alloy steels (10% random witness).
Hydrostatic test (10% random witness).
Packing: Report review.
Documentation (MTC, Inspection Release Note): 100% Review
5.0 PAINTING
Painting shall be as per specification attached elsewhere in NIT.
6.0 CONSTRUCTION
All construction works be carried out as per “Approved for Construction” drawings,
procedures, specifications and applicable codes and standards. Any changes at site shall
also need prior approval from the Owner and revision of drawings.
Bidder shall procure and supply all materials whatsoever required for
temporary/permanent installations of piping system in required and at appropriate time.
All equipment, materials, components etc. shall be suitable for the intended service and
the design life of the system. Wherever no specification is available in the contract, the
same shall be prepared by the Bidder and shall be subject to Owner approval.
7.0 BIDDER’S RESPONSIBILITY

All works shall be carried out by Bidder in accordance with the drawings / documents /
specifications indicated in the subsequent paragraphs.
7.1 Specifications
7.2 Standards
7.3 Piping Support Standards
7.4 Drawings
7.5 Design Review
7.6 Bidder shall submit all proposal designs, analysis, drawings, installation and testing
procedure for review & approval by Owner as mentioned in the scope work. Bidder shall
as a minimum, provide above deliverables for Owner’s information / records & review /
approval.
7.7 Typical Plot Plan drawing of package unit is attached in the NIT. This drawing is
INDICATIVE only and is furnished for Bidder’s information. Issued for construction (IFC)
drawings shall be prepared by Bidder after detailed engineering being done by him and
shall be subject to approval by the Owner.
7.8 The Bidder shall submit separately, the material take off for piping, valves, fittings and all
other accessories as per requirements.
7.9 Bidder shall obtain statutory approval from various authorities having jurisdiction over the
area, as necessary, for construction of the unit package.
8.0 DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTATION SCHEDULE

Bidder shall furnish all the drawings/ documents to Owner for comments/ approval. He
shall incorporate all comments/ modification suggested by Owner. The
drawings/documents should be properly organised, supplied & submitted as per
documentation schedule of NIT.
9.0 PACKAGING
9.1 Items shall be thoroughly dried, cleaned and shall be free from moisture, dirt & loose
foreign materials, with ends protected from mechanical damage during transportation,
shipment & storage.
9.2 For transportation overseas, protection and packing shall be adequate to prevent
damage from sea atmosphere.
10.0 DOCUMENTATION WITH BID

Following drawings/documents must be submitted along with the bid.
i) Proposed equipment layout drawing.
ii) Proposed piping Layout drg.
iii) Quality control procedure & plan for piping system.
iv) Completion schedule of piping job in Bar-chart format.
v) List of all construction equipments, tool-tackles & man power resources proposed to
be used.
vi) Clause wise list of deviations / exclusions, if any, to bid requirements shall be
furnished. Bidder is cautioned that exclusions and deviations listed elsewhere in bidder’s
offer shall not be considered for evaluation.

PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION CLIENT : M/S..TFL Project .:TFL
PROJECT : AMMONIA/UREA COAL BASED FERTILIZER PROJECT. DOC. No.PC150-PDS-600
LOCATION : TALCHER ,ODISHA.
Rev.:0.
Class: B20 PROJECTS AND DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED
SERVICE TEMPERATURE LIMITS (Deg.C) INSPECTION CLASS
CW(UG)
Ref.SI Ref.SI
RATING ASME CORROSION ALLOWANCE MATERIAL VALVE TRIM STRESS RELIEF

150# RF 1.5 MM(MIN.) CS
ITEM NOTES SIZE (NPS) SCH/ RAT END DESCRIPTION COMM CODE SPCL REV
PIPE
PIPE 2 - 6 SCH 40 BE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,C&W,ASME B36.10, PPX111300
PIPE 40 - 42 10.00 MM BE ERW,IS 3589 GR.FE410 C&W.,ASME B36.10, PP6511300
PIPE 8 - 10 SCH 10 BE ERW,API 5L GR.B,C&W,ASME B36.10, PPX411300
PIPE 1/2 - 3/4 SCH 80 PE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,C&W,ASME B36.10, PPX121300
PIPE 1 - 11/4 SCH 80 PE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,C&W,ASME B36.10, PPX121300
PIPE 11/2 - 11/2 SCH 80 PE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,C&W,ASME B36.10, PPX121300
FLANGE
FLANGE 1/2 - 24 150# SO-RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.5,SLIP ON FL0260801
FLANGE 26 - 72 150# SO-FF IS2062 GR.B,AWWA C207-D,RING TYPE,SLIP ON FLA452701
SPACER AND BLIND 14 - 24 150# RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.48, RS022PO01
SPECL BLIND 1/2 - 12 150# RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.48, SP022PO01
BLIND FLANGE
BLIND FLANGE 1/2 - 24 150# RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.5, BF0220801
BLIND FLANGE 26 - 72 150# FF IS2062 GR.B,AWWA C207-D, BFA412701
GASKET
GASKET 1/2 - 24 150# SPRL-WND RF TP304 SS WDG;GPH FLR;TP304 SS INR RNG;CS OTR RNG,ASME B16.20, GSQN30301
GASKET 26 - 72 150# 3.0 MM THK FF GSKT FLAT RNG,GARLOCK 3000(SYN FBR W/NBR BDR),ASME GSTO8QS01
B16.21/AWWA C207-D,RING TYPE
STUD & NUTS

STUD & 2NUTS HVY - ASTM A193 GR.B7/ASTM A194 GR.2H,, SNDE00000
HEX
FITTING (BW)
BRANCH WELD 2 - 48 BW CARBON STEEL,ASME B31.3, RWOJ11200
BRANCH WELD WITH 2 - 48 BW CARBON STEEL,ASME B31.3, WBOJ11200

RP
CAP 2 - 24 BW ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,ASME B16.9, CP7310900
ELBOW 8 - 24 BW ASTM A234 WPB-WLDD,ASME B16.9, ELOY10900
ELBOW 2 - 6 BW ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,ASME B16.9, EL7310900
ELBOW 26 - 48 BW IS2062 GR.B,ASME B16.9, ELA410900
REDUCER CONC. 2 - 6 BW ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,ASME B16.9, RC7310900
REDUCER CONC. 8 - 24 BW ASTM A234 WPB-WLDD,ASME B16.9, RCOY10900
REDUCER CONC. 26 - 48 BW IS2062 GR.B,ASME B16.9, RCA410900
REDUCER ECC. 2 - 6 BW ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,ASME B16.9, RE7310900
REDUCER ECC. 8 - 24 BW ASTM A234 WPB-WLDD,ASME B16.9, REOY10900
REDUCER ECC. 26 - 48 BW IS2062 GR.B,ASME B16.9, REA410900

Rev.:0.
CW(UG)
Ref.SI Ref.SI

150# RF 1.5 MM(MIN.) CS
TEE 2 - 6 BW ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,ASME B16.9, TE7310900
TEE 8 - 24 BW ASTM A234 WPB-WLDD,ASME B16.9, TEOY10900
TEE 26 - 48 BW IS2062 GR.B,ASME B16.9, TEA410900
WELDOLET 2 - 48 BW CS ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, WL0213300
FITTING (SW)
CAP 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CP0230207 W
COUPLING 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CN0230207
ELBOW 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, EL0230207
SOCKOLET 1/2 - 48 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, SL0233307
TEE 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, TE0230207
FITTING (THD)
CAP 1/2 - 11/2 3000# THD CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CP0240207 T
PLUG 1/2 - 11/2 THD CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11,ROUND HEAD PG0240200
THREDOLET 1/2 - 48 3000# THD CS ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, TL0243307
NIPPLE
NIPPLE 1/2 - 11/2 SCH160 PLN-PLN SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, NPA151312 1
NIPPLE 1/2 - 11/2 SCH160 PLN-THD SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10,NPT NPA161312 2
NIPPLE 1/2 - 11/2 SCH160 THD SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10,NPT NPA141312 3
SWAGE NIPPLE
SWAGE (CONC) 1/2 - 11/2 PE ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NC73J4500
SWAGE (ECC) 1/2 - 11/2 PE ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NE73J4500
VALVES
GATE VALVE 1/2 - 11/2 800# SOCW CS BODY ASTM A105,GAV201, GAV201
GATE VALVE 2 - 48 150# FLG CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,GAV210, GAV210
GLOBE VALVE 1/2 - 11/2 800# SOCW CS BODY ASTM A105,GLV201, GLV201
GLOBE VALVE 2 - 10 150# FLG CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,GLV210, GLV210
BUTTERFLY VALVE 2 - 24 150# RF CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,BUV203,LUG TYPE BUV203
:
Rev.:0.
BF,CW,ES,FG,FN,NG,PN,PV,SA,SW,VS,PA ETC.
Ref.SI Ref.SI

150# RF 1.5 MM(MIN.) CS
PIPE
PIPE 2 - 6 SCH 40 BE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA111300
PIPE 8 - 10 SCH 20 BE ERW,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA211300
PIPE 1/2 - 3/4 SCH 80 PE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA121300
PIPE 1 - 11/4 SCH 80 PE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA121300
PIPE 22 - 24 SCHSTD BE ERW,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA211300
PIPE 26 - 28 SCHSTD BE ERW/SAW,ASTM API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPTM11300
PIPE 36 - 38 SCH XS BE ERW/SAW,ASTM API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPTM11300
PIPE 48 - 50 14.27 MM BE ERW/SAW,ASTM API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPTM11300
FLANGE
FLANGE 1/2 - 24 150# SO-RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.5,SLIP ON FL0260801
W.N.FLANGE 26 - 48 150# WN-RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.47 SR.B,WELD NECK WN0270701
SPACER AND BLIND 14 - 24 150# RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.48, RS022PO01
SPECL BLIND 1/2 - 12 150# RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.48, SP022PO01
BLIND FLANGE
BLIND FLANGE 26 - 48 150# RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.47 SR.B, BF0220701
BLIND FLANGE 1/2 - 24 150# RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.5, BF0220801
GASKET
GASKET 26 - 48 150# SPRL-WND RF TP304 SS WDG;GPH FLR;TP304 SS INR RNG;CS OTR RNG,ASME GSQN3QJ01
B16.20/B16.47 SR.B,
STUD & NUTS

HEX
DRIP RING
DRIP RING 3 - 3 150# RF 125 AARH CS ASTM A105,PDIL-PDS-600, DR022QK01
FITTING (BW)

RP
ELBOW 8 - 48 BW ASTM A234 WPB-WLDD,ASME B16.9, ELOY10900
REDUCER CONC. 8 - 48 BW ASTM A234 WPB-WLDD,ASME B16.9, RCOY10900
REDUCER ECC. 8 - 48 BW ASTM A234 WPB-WLDD,ASME B16.9, REOY10900
TEE 8 - 48 BW ASTM A234 WPB-WLDD,ASME B16.9, TEOY10900
WELDOLET 2 - 48 BW CS ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, WL0213300
FITTING (SW)
CAP 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CP0230207 W
Rev.:0.
BF,CW,ES,FG,FN,NG,PN,PV,SA,SW,VS,PA ETC.
Ref.SI Ref.SI

150# RF 1.5 MM(MIN.) CS
COUPLING 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CN0230207
ELBOW 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, EL0230207
HALF COUPLING 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, HF0230207
SOCKOLET 1/2 - 48 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, SL0233307
TEE 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, TE0230207
FITTING (THD)
CAP 1/2 - 11/2 3000# THD CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CP0240207 T
PLUG 1/2 - 11/2 THD CS ASTM A105,ASME B16.11,ROUND HEAD PG0240200
THREDOLET 1/2 - 48 3000# THD CS ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, TL0243307
NIPPLE
SWAGE NIPPLE
SWAGE (CONC) 1/2 - 11/2 PE ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NC73J4500 P
SWAGE (CONC) 1/2 - 11/2 PLN-THD ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NC7364500 T
SWAGE (ECC) 1/2 - 11/2 PE ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NE73J4500 P
SWAGE (ECC) 1/2 - 11/2 PLN-THD ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NE7364500 T
STRAINER
T-TYPE STRAINER 2 - 24 150# FLGD CS ASTM A216 GR WCB,TTS210, TTS210
Y-TYPE STRAINER 1/2 - 11/2 600# SOCW CS ASTM A105,YTS201, YTS201
Y-TYPE STRAINER 2 - 24 150# FLGD CS ASTM A216 GR WCB,YTS210, YTS210
VALVES
CHECK VALVE 1/2 - 11/2 800# SOCW CS BODY ASTM A105,CHV201, CHV201
CHECK VALVE 2 - 24 150# FLG CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,CHV210, CHV210
BALL VALVE 1/2 - 11/2 800# SOCW CS BODY ASTM A105,BAV201, BAV201
BALL VALVE 2 - 24 150# FLG CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,BAV210, BAV210
BUTTERFLY VALVE 2 - 24 150# RF CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,BUV203,LUG TYPE BUV203
BUTTERFLY VALVE 26 - 48 150# FLG CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,BUV204, BUV204
PLUG VALVE 1/2 - 1 600# THRD CS BODY ASTM A105,PLV201, PLV201
PLUG VALVE 11/2 - 24 150# FLG CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,PLV202, PLV202
:
2
2
24”
24”
2.
2.
PC150-PDS-600 0
BRANCH TABLE : TABLE-A1

APPLICABLE PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATIONS:B20,B22G,B22IS,B24,D24,B24S,D24S.
PRESSURE RATING <= 300#
<-----------------------B R A N C H S I Z E---------------------------->
3 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5
M Q 1 Q M 2 M 3 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8 0 2 4 6 8
M T
3Q E T
1 E E T
1Q
1M E E E T
2 S S S E T
2M S S S E E T
3 S S S E E E T
4 S S S S E E E T
6 S S S S W W E E T
8 S S S S W W W E E T
10 S S S S W W W W E E T
12 S S S S W W W W W E E T
14 S S S S W W W W W W E E T
16 S S S S W W W W W W P E E T
18 S S S S W W W W W W P P E E T
20 S S S S W W W W W W P P P E E T
22 S S S S W W W W W W P P P P E E T
24 S S S S W W W W W W P P P P P E E T
26 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
28 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
30 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
32 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
34 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
36 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
38 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
40 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
42 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
44 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
46 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
48 S S S S P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P E E T
50
52
54
56
58
A-
E TE REDUCING TEE
P WB BRANCH WELD WITH RP
S SL SOCKOLET
T TE EQUAL TEE
W WL WELDOLET
GRAFOIL
207
201
sw
THD
Rev.:0.
Class: D24 PROJECTS AND DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED
AG,AL,AW,FG,FN,HG,IAH,IAW,NG,NI,PA,PN,VS
Ref SI Ref SI
ETC.

300# RF 1.5 MM(MIN) CS
PIPE
PIPE 1 - 11/4 SCH 80 PE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA121300
PIPE 16 - 18 SCH XS BE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA111300
PIPE 20 - 20 SCH XS BE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA111300
PIPE 22 - 22 17.48 MM BE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA111300
PIPE 26 - 28 17.40 MM BE SMLS,API 5L GR.B,ASME B36.10, PPA111300
FLANGE
LONG W.N.FLANGE 11/2 - 11/2 300# WN-RF 125 AARH ASTM A105,ASME B16.5,38mmBORE,200mmLONG LN0270802
W.N.FLANGE 26 - 28 300# WN-RF 125 AARH ASTM A105,ASME B16.47 SR.B,WELD NECK WN0270702
W.N.FLANGE 1/2 - 24 300# WN-RF 125 AARH ASTM A105,ASME B16.5,WELD NECK WN0270802
SPACER AND BLIND 14 - 24 300# RF 125 AARH ASTM A105,ASME B16.48, RS022PO02
SPECL BLIND 1/2 - 12 300# RF 125 AARH ASTM A105,ASME B16.48, SP022PO02
BLIND FLANGE
BLIND FLANGE 26 - 28 300# RF 125 AARH ASTM A105,ASME B16.47 SR.B, BF0220702
BLIND FLANGE 1/2 - 24 300# RF 125 AARH ASTM A105,ASME B16.5, BF0220802
GASKET
GASKET 26 - 28 300# SPRL-WND RF TP304 SS WDG;GPH FLR;TP304 SS INR RNG;CS OTR RNG,ASME GSQN3QJ02
B16.20/B16.47 SR.B,
STUD & NUTS

HEX
DRIP RING
DRIP RING 3 - 3 300# RF 125 AARH ASTM A105,PDIL-PDS-600, DR022QK02
FITTING (BW)

RP
WELDOLET 2 - 28 BW ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, WL0213300
FITTING (SW)
CAP 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CP0230207 W
COUPLING 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CN0230207
ELBOW 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, EL0230207
HALF COUPLING 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, HF0230207
SOCKOLET 1/2 - 28 3000# SOCW ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, SL0233307
TEE 1/2 - 11/2 3000# SOCW ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, TE0230207
FITTING (THD)
CAP 1/2 - 11/2 3000# THD ASTM A105,ASME B16.11, CP0240207 T
PLUG 1/2 - 11/2 THD ASTM A105,ASME B16.11,ROUND HEAD PG0240200
THREDOLET 1/2 - 28 3000# THD ASTM A105,MSS SP 97, TL0243307

Rev.:0.
Class: D24 PROJECTS AND DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED
AG,AL,AW,FG,FN,HG,IAH,IAW,NG,NI,PA,PN,VS
Ref SI Ref SI
ETC.

300# RF 1.5 MM(MIN) CS
NIPPLE
SWAGE NIPPLE
SWAGE (CONC) 1/2 - 11/2 PE ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NC73J4500 P
SWAGE (CONC) 1/2 - 11/2 PLN-THD ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NC7364500 T
SWAGE (ECC) 1/2 - 11/2 PE ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NE73J4500 P
SWAGE (ECC) 1/2 - 11/2 PLN-THD ASTM A234 WPB-SMLS,MSS SP 95, NE7364500 T
VALVES
CHECK VALVE 1/2 - 11/2 800# SOCW CS BODY ASTM A105,CHV201, CHV201
CHECK VALVE 2 - 24 300# FLG CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,CHV211, CHV211
BALL VALVE 1/2 - 11/2 800# SOCW CS BODY ASTM A105,BAV202, BAV202
BUTTERFLY VALVE 3 - 24 300# RF CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,BUV202,WAFER TYPE BUV202
PLUG VALVE 1/2 - 1 600# THRD CS BODY ASTM A105,PLV201, PLV201
PLUG VALVE 11/2 - 6 300# FLG CS BODY ASTM A216 GR WCB,PLV205, PLV205
:
(NO CASTING)
GRAFOIL /GRAPHITE
(NO CASTING)
GRAFOIL /GRAPHITE
(NO CASTING)
GRAFOIL /GRAPHITE
(NO CASTING)
GRAFOIL/GRAPHITE
GRAFOIL
(NO CASTING)
GRAFOIL/GRAPHITE
GRAFOIL
(NO CASTING)
GRAFOIL
PC150-PDS-600 0
DOCUMENT NO REV
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD
OTHER STANDARDS/DATASHEETS
PC161-PDS-600 P1
MITER BENDS WITH 5SEGMENTS
DOCUMENT NO REV
PROJECT:HURL PLANT:OSBL SHEET 1 OF 1
MITRE BENDS
45° 45°
TYPE A TYPE B 60° TYPE C
30° 221/2°
111/4°
221/2°
/2°
E
221
E
15°
F
30°
F
1/2 E
F
1/2E
1/2 F
1/2E
R
1/2F
R R
NOM OUTSIDE R 221/2o DIMENSION

o
SIZE DIAM =1.5D 30 45o 90o
INCH D mm 60o
mm
TYPE A TYPE B TYPE C
E F E F E F
mm mm mm mm mm mm
2 60.3 76 B A A C 88 38 57 24 42 18
3 88.9 114 B A A C 131 58 85 37 63 28
4 114.3 152 B A A C 173 79 112 51 83 38
6 168.3 229 B A A C 259 120 168 78 125 58
8 219.1 305 B A B C 343 162 222 105 165 78
10 273.1 381 B A B C 429 203 277 131 206 97
12 323.9 457 B A B C 513 244 332 158 246 117
14 355.6 533 B C B C 381 190 283 141
16 406.4 610 B C B C 436 218 323 162
18 457 686 B C B C 490 245 364 182
20 508 762 B C B C 544 272 404 202
22 559 838 B C B C 599 300 445 222
24 610 914 B C B C 654 327 485 243
26 660 991 B C C C 707 354 525 263
28 711 1,067 B C C C 762 381 566 283
30 762 1,143 B C C C 817 408 606 303
32 813 1,219 B C C C 871 436 647 323
34 864 1,295 B C C C 926 463 687 344
36 914 1,372 B C C C 980 490 727 364
38 965 1,448 B C C C 1,034 517 768 384
40 1,016 1,524 B C C C 1,089 544 808 404
42 1,067 1,600 B C C C 1,144 572 849 424
44 1,118 1,677 B C C C 1,198 599 890 445
46 1,168 1,752 B C C C 1,252 626 929 465
48 1,219 1,829 B C C C 1,307 653 970 485
52 1,321 1,982 B C C C 1,416 708 1,051 526
56 1,422 2,134 B C C C 1,524 762 1,131 566
60 1,524 2,286 B C C C 1,633 817 1,213 606
64 1,626 2,439 B C C C 1,743 871 1,294 647
68 1,727 2,591 B C C C 1,851 925 1,374 687
72 1,829 2,743 B C C C 1,960 980 1,455 728
76 1,931 2,897 B C C C - - 1536 768
P1 27.12.2017 FOR REVIEW/COMMENT NAZ NS GL/HOD

P 21.10.2017 FOR REVIEW/COMMENT NAZ NS DM
REV REV DATE EFFDATE PURPOSE PREPD REVWD APPD
T T
PNPM/PC150/E/112/P-II/Sec-
0
VI-6.0
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED Document No. Rev
Sheet 1 of 42
SECTION – VI-6.0
FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PLANT : RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER RESERVOIR,

PROJECT : INTEGRATED COAL BASED FERTILISER

COMPLEX, AT TALCHER, ANGUL DISTRICT,
ODISHA (INDIA)
CONTENTS
0 06.12.2019 06.12.2019 Issued for Enquiry RK SS SKB

RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, PNPM/PC150/E/112/P-
0
PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES II/Sec-VI-6.0
TALCHER FERTILIZERS LIMITED Document No. Rev
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION : ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Sheet 2 of 42
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
1.0 Scope
2.0 Statutory requirement, Codes and Standards
3.0 System Details and Utilization Voltages
4.0 General Instructions To Bidder
5.0 Equipment Specification
6.0 Power & Control Cables Cabling
7.0 Cable Tray
8.0 Mounting Structure
9.0 Earthing
10.0 Painting
11.0 Testing & Inspection
12.0 Drawing & Documents
13.0 Make of Electrical Equipment
14.0 Spares
15.0 Erection, Testing and Commissioning
16.0 Coordination with Other Contractors
17.0 Deviations
-- Specification Sheet – Induction Motor

-- Technical Particulars – Induction Motor
-- Specification Sheet – Lighting Sub Distribution Board
-- Specification Sheet – LT Power & Control Cables
-- Technical Particulars – Cables
-- Specification Sheet – Interlocking Switch Socket & Plug
-- Specification Sheet – Lighting Fixtures & Accessories
-- Specification Sheet – Local Control Station
-- Technical Particulars – Local Control Station
-- Annexure-A (Documentation for Electrical Items)
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
0
Technical
Description
Specification No.
PC150-TS-0801 Lighting Sub Distribution Boards
PC150-TS-0802 Induction Motors
PC150-TS-0803 Interlocking Sw. Socket and Plug
PC150-TS-0805 Cables
PC150-TS-0806 Prefabricated Ladder Type Cable Racks
PC150-TS-0807 Local Control Stations
PC150-TS-0808 Junction Box
PC150-TS-0809 Electricals for Over Head Cranes and Hoists
Electrical Sketches Description

PC150-PDS:E 510 Details of Concrete Cable Trench
PC150-PDS:E 511 Cable Rack Arrangement in Trenches
PC150-PDS:E 516 Typical Arrangement of Cables buried in slit
PC150-PDS:E 530 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray Straight Run
PC150-PDS:E 531 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray Horizontal Tee
PC150-PDS:E 532 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray Horizontal Cross
PC150-PDS:E 533 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray 900 Horizontal Bends
PC150-PDS:E 534 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray 900 Vertical Bend Bending Rad. 1000 mm
PC150-PDS:E 535 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray 900 Vertical Bend Bending Radius 600 mm
PC150-PDS:E 536 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray Coupling Arrangement
PC150-PDS:E 537 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray Fixing Arrangement
PC150-PDS:E 538 Pre-Fabricated Cable Tray Reducing Coupler Plate
PC150-PDS:E 602 Earthing Conductor Details
PC150-PDS:E 603 Arrangement of Connections of Earth Conductors
PC150-PDS:E 604 Typical Details of Connection in Earth Pit
PC150-PDS:E 605 Earth Pit Details
PC150-PDS:E 606 Typical Arrangement of Earthing for Motor and Start Stop Push Button
PC150-PDS:E 610 3.8 M GI Electrode for Earthing
PC150-PDS:E 611 GI/Al Accessories for Earth Electrode
PC150-PDS:E 613 Earthing of storage tank & vessel
PC150-PDS:E 615 GI Earth Bus
PC150-PDS:E 617 Typical Arrangement for Neutral and Equipment Earthing

0
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The scope includes work/service for the complete design, engineering, manufacture, testing
at works , supply of all electrical equipment, dispatch, storage, handling, erection, testing at
site and commissioning of complete electrical system required for ‘Construction of raw Water
Reservoir and allied Services’.
1.2 This specification shall be read in conjunction with all drawing and documents attached and
other relevant reference as specified therein
1.3 The scope shall include but not limited to the following:
a. Motors as required.
b. Local Control Stations
c. Lighting Sub-Distribution Board
d. Cables (as required) viz
 Power Cables (3.3 kV, 1.1 kV)
 Control Cables,
 Earthing cables,
e. Illumination System
f. Earthing of equipment & structures.
g. Cable trench/Cable tray with supporting structure.
h. Any and all other Materials, Equipment and Services so as to make a totally integrated
and functional system together with all accessories and associated equipment, ensuring
safety, maintainability and reliability in compliance with all applicable codes, standards,
guidelines, statutory regulations and safety requirements in force.
i. Any other equipment, not specified, but required for safe, proper, trouble free and
efficient operation of the system
1.4 The scope shall also include the erection, testing, commissioning of above equipments.
The contractor shall arrange all the necessary erection tools, tackles, testing and measuring
instruments and shall supply erection materials and consumables.
The contractor shall clear the site after commissioning of the equipments / system and
obtain the Site Clearance Certificate from owner’s Engineer-in-charge
1.5 The scope of work shall also include digging of earth and refilling for directly buried cables,
earth strips, cable protection pipes, earth pits, ground mounted lighting pole foundations; civil
works such as making earth pit inspection chambers with covers, grouting of equipment
base plate, channels, supports and foundation bolts, chipping of concrete or in brick work for
earth strips, pipes or other minor chipping for foundation preparation, if required, cutting
holes in walls for racks, risers, light fitting brackets, sealing of cable entries and making good
the same after installation of the equipment and levelling, and other minor similar jobs as per
directions of Owner / Engineer-in-Charge.
1.6 All major Civil work (like making all foundations and cable trenches etc) and minor civil work
(like cutting, chipping, grouting, making opening in floor / wall etc. for equipment foundation
and cabling work) pertaining to electrical equipment are in the scope of work of the
contractor and shall be done as per technical specification of civil enclosed elsewhere in the
NIT.

0
1.7 Construction power shall be arranged by contractor.

Contractor shall provide adequate area lighting at site of construction, fabrication yards,
storage yard and office etc. by means of suitable lighting fixture, lighting masts, flood
lighting poles etc. which are to be supplied and maintained by the contractor as per safety
aspect.
2.0 Statutory requirement, Codes and Standards
2.1 The design, manufacture and testing of the equipment as well as installation, testing &
commissioning shall conform to comply with the latest issue of relevant Indian Standard
specification and codes of practices / relevant IEC and compliance of following statutory
requirements :
- Indian Electricity Act
- Indian Electricity Rules
- The Indian Factories Act
- Statutory requirement of Govt of Odisha and Govt. of India.
- Any other applicable Rules / Acts / Regulations
2.2 The supplier shall, whenever necessary, make suitable modification in the equipment to
comply with the above mentioned rules.
2.3 Wherever any requirement, laid down in this Technical specification / Specification Sheet,
differs from that in IS, the requirements specified in this specification / Specification Sheets
shall prevail.
2.4 In case of any conflict/deviation amongst various documents the order of precedence shall
be as follows:
 Statutory Rules / Regulations
 Design Philosophy
 Datasheets
 Technical specification/ /Installation Standards, etc.
 Applicable IS/IEC Standards
In case of contradiction / conflict among documents and statutory requirement, Contractor
shall refer to Owner for clarification. However, most stringent specification shall be followed
with Owner’s approval. Owner decision shall be considered as final.
2.5 Site Conditions
The equipment shall be designed for the following site conditions:-
 Minimum ambient Temperature 1 deg.C
 Maximum ambient Temperature 46 deg.C
 Design Reference Temperature 50 deg.C
 Relative Humidity 100%
 Altitude above mean sea level Lower than 1000 Mtrs.
 Atmospheric pollution Dusty due to presence of Coal Dust & Urea
Dust and corrosive due to presence
vapours of Ammonia and Sea-chlorides
3.0 SYSTEM DETAILS AND UTILIZATION VOLTAGES
3.1 The various voltage levels for in plant power distribution shall be as follows:
A. Distribution Equipment a) 11KV ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 5%, 3 Ph, 3 W with

0
resistance earthed neutral

b) 3.3KV ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 5%, 3 Ph, 3 W with
resistance earthed neutral
c) 415V±10%, 3 Ph, 4 W/240V ± 10%, 1 Ph,
2W, 50 Hz ± 5% solidly grounded neutral.
Combined variation in voltage ± 10%
& frequency
Control Supply for:
- 415V motors AC 240V ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 5%, 1Ph (For
contactor controlled motors)
DC 110V ± 5% (For breaker controlled
motors)
- Switch Gear (Breaker
Controlled feeders) :
DC 110V ± 5%, 2 W
a. Closing & tripping
AC 240V ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 5%, 1Ph, 2W
b. Auxiliary power
Voltage Ratings
- Motors above 1000 KW 11 KV, 3 Ph AC
- Motors above 150 KW up to 3.3 KV, 3 Ph AC
1000 KW.
-Motors up to150 KW 415 V, 3 Ph AC
- Space heaters 240V, 1 Ph AC
- Lighting 415V/240V AC
- Panic Lights 110V DC
- Power Sockets/Receptacle 415V, 3 Ph AC/240V, 1 Ph AC
.
4.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDER
4.1 .The electrical equipment shall be designed as per latest practice to provide maximum
reliability, flexibility, safety to personnel and equipment and ease of operation and
maintenance.
4.2 All equipment shall have adequate and standard ratings.
4.3 Power Supply.
4.3.1 Feeders shall be made available at Water Treatment Plant Substation Switchgear (3.3 KV
Switchboard, 415 V PMCC, MLDB, ASDB). Power shall be tapped from these feeders to the
Motors, LCS, LSDB, Switch Sockets, EOT etc.
4.3.2 Supply, Laying, termination, supporting, Erection, Testing and Commissioning of all power,
control and lighting cables from Switchgears to equipments shall be in Contractor’s scope.
Cables shall be laid in overhead cable trays to the extent possible, cables may also be laid in
cable trench where space constraint for structure is there. Cable trench/ cable tray for all
power, control & lighting with support structure shall be in Contractor’s scope.
4.3.3 The entry of cables in the switchboards shall be from bottom only.
0
5.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION

5.1 General Constructional Features
5.1.1 The equipment shall be suitable for tropical climate conditions and corrosive and saline
atmosphere.
All electrical equipment accessories and wiring shall have fungus protection involving special
treatment of insulation and metal against fungus, insects and corrosion.
Fine mesh screen of corrosion resistant material shall be furnish on all ventilating openings
to prevent entry of insects.
5.1.2 The equipment to be installed in indoor plant area shall be enclosed in dust, damp and
vermin proof enclosure equivalent to IP 54 as per relevant Indian Standards/IEC.
5.1.3 The equipment excluding motors to be installed in outdoor plant area shall have IP 65
enclosure. Motors shall have IP 55 enclosure.
5.1.4 4 mm FRP (fire retardant and UV stabilized) canopies shall be provided for all outdoor
equipments like motors, starters, LCS, LSDBs, sw. sockets etc.
5.2 Motors
5.2.1 Motors shall conform to IS/IEC 60034-1:2004 and Specification Sheet enclosed.
5.2.2 The rating of LV and HV motors shall be selected from the sizes as recommended in
relevant Indian Standard/IEC.
5.2.3 The margin between the installed power and absorbed power shall be as recommended by
the driven machine supplier but shall not be less than the following:-
Motor Rating Margin above Driven M/C Absorbed Power
Less than 22 KW 25%
22 KW to 55 KW 15%
75 KW and above 10%
5.2.4 Voltage Ratings:
Voltage rating for the motors of different ratings shall be as below:
Upto 150 KW: 415 V, 3-phase, 50 Hz AC
Above 150 KW - 1000 KW: 3.3 KV, 3-phase, 50 Hz AC
Above 1000 KW: 11 KV, 3-phase, 50 Hz AC
5.2.5 The motors shall have maximum rated duty as per relevant Indian Standard/IEC.
Consideration shall be given for special duty motors wherever required e.g. cranes etc.
5.2.6 All LV motors shall be TEFC type as per relevant Indian Standards/IEC while HV motors
shall be TEFC/CACA type. All motors shall be Class-F insulated with temperature rise limited
to that of Class-B.
5.2.7 Normally the motors shall be suitable for DOL starting..
5.2.8 All motors 30 KW and above shall have space heater provision.
5.2.9 All HV motors shall have winding, hot air and bearing RTDs. All the temperature signals shall
be terminated to DCS as well as LMS.
5.2.10 All LV motors shall be of efficiency class 'IE3' as per latest applicable version of IS: 12615.
All HV Motors shall be of high efficient and high power factor type.
5.2.11 The starting current i.e. breakaway current of 415 V Motors shall not exceed the values
indicated in IS: 12615. Also there shall be no further positive tolerance on the values of
breakaway current.
0
5.2.12 The starting current of 11 KV & 3.3 KV motors shall not exceed 550% of FLC. No positive
tolerance is acceptable over 550% FLC.
5.2.13 Type test certificate of similar motor for use in specified hazardous area (if applicable) shall
be furnished.
5.2.14 The duty cycle of the motor shall meet the process and driven machine requirement.
5.2.15 In case of 11 KV & 3.3 KV motor, the terminal box shall be suitably designed for proper
termination of XLPE insulated cables through heat shrink termination kit.
5.2.16 The mechanical parameters such as duty, mounting type, shaft extension, direction of
rotation, starting torque requirements etc. shall be adequate for the application. Sleeve or
anti friction type bearings shall be used. Vertical motors shall have thrust bearings suitable
for the load imposed by the driven machinery. Motors with sleeve bearings may require
proximity probes to measure shaft vibration adjacent and relative to the bearings. Generally,
all motors, except for application such as crane, hoist, turbine/engine starting, shall be
designed for continuous duty with rated load.
5.2.17 Motor rated above 30 KW shall have on line greasing provision and for motor rated above 45
KW, grease outlet feature shall be provided.
5.2.18 All HV motors shall have safety factor not less than 1.1.
5.2.19 Motors rated 1000 kW and above shall have suitable measures to prevent flow of shaft
currents and shall have 2 sets (i.e. 6 nos.) of PS class CTs for differential protection
5.2.20 The motor shall be capable of withstanding the electro dynamic stress and heating imposed
if it is started along with the driven equipment at voltage of 110% of the rated value.
5.2.21 During starting of large motor, the voltage may drop to 80% of the rated voltage for a period
of 60 seconds. All electrical equipment, while running, shall successfully ride over such
period without affecting system performance.
5.2.22 The motor may be subjected to sudden application of 150% rated voltage during bus
transfer, due to the phase difference between the incoming voltage and motor residual
voltage. The motor shall be designed to withstand any torsional and/or high current stresses,
which may result, without experiencing any deterioration in the normal life and performance
characteristics.
5.2.23 In case of motors greased for the life, the guaranteed life of the bearings shall not be less
than 30,000 hours.
5.2.24 Motor terminal box shall be designed to rotate at 90° at site.
5.2.25 All external hardware shall be made of stainless steel SS-304/316.
5.2.26 For all other specifications, refer PC150-TS-0802.
5.2.27 Specification Sheet duly filled in with balance data for motors shall be furnished with bid.
5.2.28 Filled in Technical Particulars of motors shall be furnished by the Contractor for approval
after order in line with ITB/PO requirement before commencement of manufacturing.
5.3 Local Control Stations
5.3.1 Local Control Stations shall be provided for all motors for testing and maintenance purpose
when the selection is made is "LOCAL MODE" Operation. Each LCS shall have provisions as
indicated in specification sheet of LCS. The essential features of the LCS shall be as given below:
5.3.2 LCS shall be pressure die cast aluminium housing (preferably), dust & vermin proof, suitable
for wall or pedestal mounting with equipment mounted on a base plate inside and behind a
concealed hinged lockable front door. Double door shall be provided wherever required/ for
those components which are not to be approached for safety considerations and/ or daily
use.
5.3.3 Provision for pad locking in OFF position shall be provided.
0
5.3.4 Trip-Neutral-Close control switch shall be three position control switch with spring return
from CLOSE to NEUTRAL position and lockable in TRIP position by means of padlock.
5.3.5 The switches shall have sliding contact between ’NEUTRAL’ and ‘CLOSE’ position. In ‘TRIP’
position the contact shall be completely broken from ‘NEUTRAL’ position.
5.3.6 Local control stations for breaker controlled HV and LV motors shall be provided with T-N-C
switch, Ready to Start Indication, ON indication, OFF indication, Space Heater ON
Indication, Trip Indication and ammeter. Moreover, space heater ON indication lamp, trip
indication lamp shall also be provided at the switchgear panel.
5.3.7 Local control stations for contactor controlled LV motors shall be provided with start/stop
push buttons, ON indication, OFF indication , ammeters and Space Heater ON Indication (for
motor rated 30KW and above) for the motors having rating 5.5 KW and above.
5.3.8 Local control stations for contactor controlled LV motors shall be provided with start/stop
push buttons, ON indication, OFF indication for the motors having rating below 5.5 KW.
However, if required from process point of view, ammeter shall be provided for motors below
5.5 KW also.
5.3.9 Local/Remote (Lockable) selector switch shall be single pole stay put type having three
positions LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE’’
5.3.10 Each element for start and stop shall be provided with 1 NO + 1 NC contact. The push
button construction shall be such to avoid mal-operation due to vibrations.
5.3.11 All local control stations shall have weather proof IP-65 enclosure. Canopies of suitable size
shall be provided with all local control stations.
5.3.12 All components shall be completely wired up to terminal block and also provided with
earthing terminals.
5.3.13 Inscriptions on corrosion resistant metal strips giving drive description, mechanism number
and functional requirement shall be provided.
5.3.14 The ammeter shall be flush mounting, moving iron spring controlled type, of accuracy class
1.5 as per IS: 1248, with square face of minimum size 72 mm × 72 mm having scale range
0-90 degree. The ammeter shall be provided with uniform scale up to CT primary current and
compressed end scale up to the 7.7 times the C.T. primary current. Adjustable red pointer
shall be provided to indicate the full load current of the motors. Zero adjusters shall be
provided for operation from the front of the meter. All ammeters shall be operated through 1
Amp. CTs only.
5.3.15 For all other specifications, refer PC150-TS-0807.
5.4 Interlocked Type Switch Sockets
5.4.1 Interlocked type switch socket shall be of the types as specified in specification sheet
(attached in this specification).
5.4.2 Supply to switch-sockets shall be taken from Raw Water Substation Switchgear through
suitably rated RCCB.
5.4.3 25A, 3 pin, 240V Inter Locked Type Switch Socket & Plug (2 Nos.) and 63 A 5 pin, 415V
Inter Locked Type Switch Socket (1 No.) shall be provided in the Pump House. .
5.4.4 For all Other Specifications, Refer PC150-TS-0809.
5.5 Conduits
5.5.1 Conduits shall be of heavy gauge with minimum wall thickness of 1.4 mm (upto 25 mm dia)
and 2 mm (above 25 mm dia) rigid steel, hot-dip galvanized, cut square, reamed, threaded
and screwed tight at all joints.
5.5.2 Conduits entrances to pull boxes and switches shall have double lock nuts & insulating
bushings. No running thread shall be used.
0
5.5.3 Flexible metallic conduit shall be used for connection to equipment which are subject to
vibration and also for connection to level /limit/pressure switches. Conduit runs shall be
supported at an interval of 750 mm for vertical run and 1000 mm for horizontal run.
Conduits shall be sized so that conduit fill (ratio of total cable area to conduit area) shall not
exceed the following :
One Cable : 53%
Two Cable : 31%
Three Cables & Up : 40%
5.6 Lighting Sub Distribution Board

5.6.1 LSDB shall be provided with incoming and outgoing feeders as indicated in specification
sheet having IP-65 degree of protection.
5.6.2 Incomer feeder shall be provided with 63A TP and Switched Neutral SFU and 3 nos. feeder
circuit of 63A DP MCB with ELCB of 300/100mA having 9 Nos. outgoing of 16 A/25 A DP
MCB (i.e. 3 nos. 16 A/ 25 A DP MCB per circuit).
5.6.3 The LSDB shall have top entry arrangement for outgoing cables and bottom entry for
incoming cable provided with heavy-duty double compression type aluminium cable glands
suitable for 1.1 KV XLPE-A-FRLS PVC outer-sheathed cables.
5.6.4 All Lighting fixtures of Pump House etc. shall receive power from Indoor/Outdoor Lighting
Sub-distribution Boards.
5.6.5 For all Other Specifications, Refer PC150-TS-0801.
5.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES
5.7.1 The fixtures shall be complete with all accessories including the control gear box / ballast,
lamps and all accessories. The lighting fixtures shall also conform to the specification sheet
(attached in this specification).
5.7.2 The fixtures shall be provided with cable glands and a terminal block suitable for termination
of copper conductor up to 2.5 sq. mm size.
5.7.3 The fixture shall be so designed that it shall be possible to maintain or replace different
accessories without difficulty, including replacement of lamps.
5.7.4 LED shall conform to the following types and standards:-
Product Type Safety Standard Performance Standard
Self ballasted LED lamps for IEC 62560 Latest Edition IEC 62612 / PAS Publicly
general lighting services > 50 V available specification
Control gear for LED modules IEC 61347-2-13 Latest IEC 62384 Latest Edition
Edition
LED modules for general IEC 62031 Latest Edition IEC / PAS 62717 Latest
lighting Edition
LED luminaries IEC 60598-1 Latest IEC / PAS 62722-2-1 Latest
Edition Edition Luminaries
performance – Part 2-1:
particular requirements for
LED
LEDs and LED modules IEC TS 62504 Terms and Definitions for LEDs and LED
modules in general lighting.
5.7.5 The lumen maintenance shall be 70% i.e. L 70 at EOL (end of life) & 90% i.e. L 90 at 25% of
its rated life or 6000 hours whichever is higher.
5.7.6 The colour rendering index shall not be less than 90%.
0
5.7.7 The LED lights shall work satisfactorily at the design temperature of 50 Degree Celsius.
5.7.8 The life assessment of LEDs shall include control gears/ driver as well.
5.7.9 The driver shall be mounted internally and be replaceable with the aid of commonly available
hand tools.
5.7.10 The LED module or array shall be designed in such a way that the failure of one LED shall
not affect additional LED’s.
5.7.11 Life expectancy of LED Luminaries shall be minimum of 50000 hrs with greater than 70% of
rated lumen output.
5.7.12 Min. efficiency of LED driver: The minimum efficiency of LED driver shall be 85% for driver
power output rating <=40W and 87% for driver power output rating> 40W.
5.7.13 Short circuit protection /Open load protection shall be required for LED fixtures.
5.7.14 Color temperature of LED Luminaries: 5700K
5.7.15 Cover type for outdoor type fittings shall be Toughened glass or UV stabilized polycarbonate
whereas, whereas, for indoor and non-weather proof items, UV stabilized Poly Carbonate
can be used.
5.7.16 Lighting circuits shall be single phase (Phase & Neutral) rated 240 V AC. Each circuit shall
be rated to 16A but not loaded more than 8A. A minimum of 25% of MCBs of each board
shall be left as spares. The load on one lighting sub-circuit of lighting sub-distribution board
and junction box shall be limited to 1000W approx.
5.7.17 LED Tube Lighting Fixtures
a) High quality LED fluorescent tube twin batten type complete with 2 X 20W tube (T5)
eco friendly, no UV radiation as per the specification tabulated below:
Sl. No. Parameter Technical Specification
1. Degree of Protection IP-20
2. Lumen output per Lamp ≥ 2000
3. CCT 6500K
4. Luminous efficacy ≥ 100 lm/watt
5. CRI >80
6. Life ≥ 40000 burning hours
7. PF >0.95
8. THD <10%
5.8 JUNCTION BOXES
5.8.1 Junction boxes shall be used for looping of lighting cables in the lighting circuit of fluorescent
fixtures. Junction boxes shall be made of cast aluminium having IP55 degree of protection as
per IS: 2147.
Junction boxes shall be liberally dimensioned having minimum internal dia. of 120 mm.
The junction boxes shall be 4 way, dome cover type, suitable for mounting on surface or wall
complete with mounting accessories, 6 nos. 16 A terminals fitted on DMC moulded terminal
block with shorting links, 3 nos. cable glands suitable for 3x2.5 sq. mm2 copper conductor
XLPE-A-FRLS PVC cable, one no. threaded plug and two external earthing terminals.
Cable glands & plugs shall be of hose proof, single compression type and shall be of rolled
aluminium.
5.8.2 For all Other Specifications, Refer PC150-TS-0808..

0
6.0 Power & Control Cable

6.1 All HT power cables shall be made of stranded aluminium conductor with XLPE insulation,
PVC inner sheathed FRLS type, armoured, PVC outer sheathed FRLS type, conductor
screen, insulation screen and construction as per IS: 7098 (Part 2). HT cables shall be of
unearthed type.
6.2 All LT power cables shall be with stranded aluminium/copper conductor with XLPE
insulation, PVC inner sheathed FRLS type , armoured, PVC outer sheathed FRLS type and
construction as per IS: 7098 (Part 1).
6.3 All control cables shall be with 2.5 sq. mm, stranded copper conductor with XLPE insulation,
PVC inner sheathed FRLS type, armoured, PVC outer sheathed FRLS type and construction
as per IS: 7098 (Part 1). Control cables shall be twisted pair or shielded wherever electro-
magnetic/electrostatic interference is anticipated
6.4 All control cables cores shall be identified with numerical core numbers printed on core
instead of colours.
6.5 All cables shall be armoured and shall have extruded inner and outer sheath.
6.6 All cables shall be terminated using suitable cable lugs.
6.7 All HT terminations and joints shall be of RAYCHEM make only.
6.8 Bimetallic lugs shall be provided , as required.
7.0 Cable Trays
7.1 The cable racks shall be ladder type, pre-fabricated from suitable hot dip galvanized
steel/heavy duty FRP material. Maximum cable tray size shall be 600mm wide. Maximum
supporting span shall be 2 Mtrs. The cable trays and their accessories shall be hot dip
galvanized after fabrication. The galvanizing shall be uniform, clean, smooth, continuous and
free from pores. The amount of zinc deposit at any point shall not be less than 610 gm per
sq. meter
7.2 The finished tray and accessories shall be free from sharp edges and corners, burrs and
unevenness.
7.3 Each straight length and bed shall be supplied with two coupling plates fitted at each side
channel at one end. The couplings plates shall be complete with bolts, nuts and washers
fitted at other four holes for fixing to adjoining member. Coupling plate shall be designed to
permit longitudinal adjustment up to ±10 mm and skew up to 10°.
8.0 Mounting Structures
Switch sockets, cable trays, DBs etc. shall be mounted / supported on suitable structure
fabricated out of standard sections of mild steel, i.e. channels, angels, flats etc conforming to
IS: 266
9.0 EARTHING
9.1 Earthing rings shall be provided around Pump ouse which in turn shall be inter-connected.
Minimum size of main grid shall be 75mm×10mm.
9.2 Earthing grid/ring shall comprise of buried GI earth strips and GI pipes/electrodes.
9.3 As far as possible, the reinforcement rods inside concrete column shall be connected to the
earthing grid/ring to reduce the overall earth resistance.
9.4 Individual electrical equipment shall be earthed by GI strip/GI wire/Cu/Al cable. Earth buses
shall be provided for earthing groups of electrical/non-electrical equipment to earthing
grid/rings.
9.5 Size of earthing grid/ring and earth conductors of equipment for sub-stations shall be as per
relevant standards..

0
9.6 All equipment rated above 250 V shall have two external earth connections and those rated
up to 250 V shall have one external earth connection. However, for lighting fixtures, earthing
shall be done through 3rd core of the cable in safe as well as in hazardous area.
9.7 Minimum sizes of earth conductors to be used shall be as given below.
Sl.No. Equipment GI conductor size Al conductor Size
1. LV switch board, 75mm×10mm 150 sq. mm
2. Motors rated 75 KW and above 50mm×6mm 150 sq. mm
Motors rated 30 KW to less than 75
3. 35mm×6mm 95 sq. mm
KW
Motors rated 5.5 KW to less than
4. 25mm×6mm 25 sq. mm
30 KW
5. Motors less than 5.5 KW 8 SWG 10 sq. mm
All minor equipment rated 250V &
6. 10 SWG 10 sq. mm
above.
All GI conductors shall meet the galvanizing requirement as per IS.
10.0 PAINTING
10.1 The equipment surfaces to be painted shall be pre treated to remove all dust, scale and
foreign adhering matter by suitable treatment.
10.2 All steel surfaces shall be painted with two coats of suitable anti-rust paint followed by two
coats of anticorrosive epoxy paints.
10.3 All paints shall be carefully selected to withstand tropical heat and extremes of weather. The
paint shall not scale off, crinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal handling.
10.4 Unless otherwise specified, the finishing shade shall be light grey having No.631 as per IS-5.
11.0 TESTING & INSPECTION
11.1 Testing of all electrical equipments shall be done in accordance with relevant IEC/BIS codes.
11.2 The Contractor shall submit the certificates of type tests performed on identical equipment
as evidence of the compliance of the equipment with the type tests.
11.3 The Contractor shall submit the certificates of routine and acceptance tests conducted on
the purchased equipments.
11.4 All the routine/acceptance tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s works in the
presence of owner’s representative.
11.5 Stage Inspection of Electrical Equipment shall be considered. The owner or their
representative shall be allowed to visit the manufacturing works for stage inspection during
manufacturing stage.
11.6 The Contractor shall intimate the owner 4 weeks in advance of the tests and submit the
detailed schedule of tests.
12.0 DRAWING & DOCUMENTS
12.1 All drawings and documents shall have the following descriptions written boldly:
-- Name of Client.
-- Name of Consultant i.e. PDIL.
-- Enquiry / Order Number with Project/Plant name.
-- Equipment Code No. and Description.

0
12.2 At the time of handing over of the installation, the contractor shall supply as built drawings
taking into consideration the actual execution carried out at site.
12.3 The contractor shall furnish a Bill of Materials covered in their offer. However, this shall be
treated for information only and shall not absolve them from his obligation to supply the
required items and quantities for making the plant complete as per intent of the specification.
12.4 Drawings and documents shall be submitted as per Annexure-A in number of copies as
indicated below:
i) With bid: 4
ii) For approval: 6
iii) For information: 8
iv) Final: 8+1CD (CD of contractor generated documents shall only be furnished)
13.0 MAKE OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS
13.1 Make of all electrical items shall be as per Section 9.0.
13.2 Bidder shall indicate the make of all the equipments in their offer.
13.3 Any other item for which vendors are not mentioned in NIT, Contractor shall furnish list of
proven suppliers with PTR subject to Owner’s/ Consultant’s approval during detailed
engineering. Document(PTR) shall be in English language only.
14.0 SPARES
14.1 For two years operation and maintenance, item wise unit prices of spares shall be quoted by
the bidder as per Section 8.0.
14.2 Any other spare parts required, but not specified, shall also be offered.
14.3 Spare for commissioning as required shall be supplied without any extra cost.
14.4 All spare parts shall be identical to the parts used in the offered equipments
15.0 ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING SPECIFICATION
15.1 Scope of Work
15.1.1 The scope of work shall include storage, handling, transportation, unpacking, checking,
reporting of damages / defects, assembling, erection, installation, including fabrication,
alignment, levelling, grouting, welding, bolting, painting (wherever specified), etc., testing
and commissioning of various electrical equipment supplied by the contractor, earthing
system, fabrication & installation of steel structural etc. as per drawings & documents,
specifications, standards & codes, prevalent rules & regulations and best engineering
practices.
15.1.2 The scope shall also include obtaining approval from statutory authorities, as required.
15.2 Scope Of Erection
15.2.1 The scope comprises of erection / installation, testing and commissioning of electrical
equipment / items.
15.2.2 Laying of cables in excavated / RCC trenches and on cable trays as required.
15.2.3 Supply of double compression aluminium cable glands and crimping type tinned copper
cable lugs, shall be provided by the contractor.
15.2.4 Excavation and back filling of cable trenches.
15.2.5 Termination of power, control and lighting cables.
15.2.6 Fabrication with supply of MS material, consumable and hardware of frames, supports, cable
racks etc. as required.

0
15.2.7 Supply, laying & connection of the complete earthing system including supply of GI earth
electrode, GI earthing strips, flexible earthing conductors etc.
15.2.8 Minor civil works such as digging of earth and refilling for directly buried cables, earth
strips, cable protection pipes, earth electrode pits, ground mounted lighting pole foundations,
civil works such as making earth pit inspection chambers with covers, grouting of base plate,
channels, supports and foundation bolts, including chipping of concrete or in brick work for
earth strips, pipes and other minor chipping for foundation preparation, if required, cutting
holes in walls for racks, risers, light fitting brackets, sealing of cable entries and making
good the same after installation of the equipment and levelling and other minor similar jobs
shall be in contractor’s scope.
15.2.9 Making / providing canopies / rain hoods.
15.2.10 All hardware required for successful commissioning, whether specifically mentioned or not
in the specification.
15.2.11 Concrete foundations for pedestals, lighting poles, grouting of equipments etc., including
supply of grouting materials.
15.2.12 Removal of materials / scraps to the scrap yard and stores etc. as per instructions of
Owner / Consultant.
15.2.13 Supply and installation of any other item not specifically mentioned but found necessary by
the engineer-in-charge for satisfactory completion of job.
15.2.14 All letter writing on switchboards, danger boards, sign etc shall be done by the contractor.
15.2.15 “AS BUILT” drawings with all site modifications
15.2.16 All major civil engineering works pertaining to electrical equipment as per Technical
Specification of Civil enclosed elsewhere in the tender.
15.3 Codes and Standards
15.3.1 The design, manufacture, testing, installation of the equipment shall comply with the latest
issue of all relevant Indian Standards and codes of practices and all applicable Statutory
Acts & Regulations.
15.3.2 The contractor shall have valid “A” class licence from the Director of Electrical Safety to the
Govt. of Odisha. The contractor must have PF & ESI codes covering all persons hired by
him for carrying out the job.
15.3.3 The contractor shall observe safety rules and take all necessary safety precautions to
carry out the work in the plant.
15.4 General Procedure for Erection
15.4.1 The general procedure governing storage, handling, erection and final acceptance of
owner / consultant are given below:
15.4.2 Storage of equipment at site
a. All equipment and materials shall be properly stored by the contractor at site
Contractor shall arrange to draw the necessary equipment / materials in the
sequence required for erection and transport the same from contractor's store to
erection point.
b. The contractor shall keep proper record of the materials supplied by him / owner.
c. The contractor shall ensure that all the materials drawn / supplied by him are stored
indoor / under shade. However, if a package is temporarily stocked outdoor due to
unavoidable reasons, this shall be ensured that the storage area is dry, hard and
well-drained.
d. Goods must not be placed directly on the floor / ground but shall be kept on blocks,
60 mm to 120 mm above the floor level such that the bottom is well ventilated.
0
e. In case of outdoor storage, the contractor at his own cost shall provide waterproof
PVC sheets/ tarpaulin to cover all goods so as to protect them from rain etc. These
sheets / tarpaulin shall be removed for inspection once in a week and if found moist
or mouldy, shall be dried in direct sunlight.
f. In addition to the above, the equipment manufacturer's storage instructions, if any,
shall be strictly followed.
15.4.3 Contractor's inspection at site
a. On receipt of any material (supplied by the contactor) at site, contractor shall fully
unpack and inspect all equipment received for completeness, signs of damages,
defect etc. in the presence for owner’s representative. Any damage / short supply
detected shall be recorded immediately. The contractor shall be required to make
good / replace / repair the defective / damaged items at no extra cost to the owner.
15.4.4 Handling and cleaning
a. The contractor shall be responsible for proper handling and cleaning of all materials /
equipment drawn / supplied by him until owner / consultant finally accepts the
erected equipment.
b. Equipment shall be handled with care by experienced riggers under guidance of
competent supervisors and as per rigging marks given on cases. Dragging on floor
shall be avoided and crane / suitable rollers shall be used for moving the equipment
at any times.
c. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the safe keeping of equipment issued to
him till these are erected, tested, commissioned by him and accepted by owner /
consultant.
15.4.5 Transportation
This involves transportation of various electrical equipments / materials from contractor’s
store to erection site. When transporting the equipment, it shall be loaded on suitable
trailer / trucks as per capacity and size of equipment, and shall be properly supported on
the trailers / trucks by means of ropes / stoppers to avoid damage or tilting due to heavy
jerks and vibration. Precautions, if any, displayed on equipment shall be strictly observed.
15.4.6 Erection Requirements
a. All work shall be carried out as per drawings. Placing on foundation, aligning,
grouting, connecting, fixing danger notice plate / board on equipment as specified,
meggering, labelling and painting shall form part of erection requirements.
b. Fixing of supporting frames / pedestals, grouting, cutting and dressing holes in walls /
ceiling and any other minor civil work necessary for installation and levelling of
electrical equipment are included in electrical erection scope.
c. The scope of erection also includes cable dressing / clamping / minor rerouting,
minor relocation of fittings, internal cleaning of equipment, overhauling and minor
repairs.
d. Fabrication of clamps from the materials specified and clamping of cables on racks,
trays etc. fixing of single core cables in tri-foil formation in aluminium clamps,
earthing of cable armour and lead sheath, wherever necessary (and as per the
details given by Consultant) fall under erection scope of work.
e. Marking of cables by fixing / grouting the cable marks / number tags at every 25
metres along entire route of cables are included in the scope of work. The tags shall
be made of Aluminium Strips.
f. The contractor shall without any extra cost, touch up with paint all electrical
equipment which are damaged / scratched during handling, erection or repair. The

0
paint used shall match exactly the painted surface of the equipment on which touch-
up is done, and shall be epoxy based.
g. The descriptions given above are only to give a preliminary idea about the scope of
work and they do not limit the entire scope to these descriptions only. Hence all other
parts of the tender document shall be read in conjunction with the referred standards,
associated drawings, specification sheets and schedule of materials & services to
assess actual scope of work.
h. The contractor shall undertake erection of all equipment specified herein in
accordance with good engineering practices in conformity with statutory regulations
and Code of Practice and to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser / owner.
i. The contractor shall arrange all the necessary erection tools, tackles, testing and
measuring instruments and shall supply all erection materials as required.
15.5 Specification For Electrical Erection
15.5.1 General
15.5.1.1 These specifications lay down the erection procedures to be followed for each type of
equipment, over and above the general "Erection Requirements".
15.5.1.2 The contractor shall also follow manufacturer’s instructions and any other instructions of
consultant / Principal / Statutory bodies during erection.
15.5.1.3 As-Built Drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor and supplied to owner/ consultant.
15.5.2 Cable Installation
15.5.2.1 General
a. All fabrication, cutting, laying, spacing, fixing etc. of cables, trays, supports, hangers
etc. shall be as per instructions of Owner / Engineer-in-Charge.
b. The contractor shall keep accurate record of cable drums supplied by owner, the drum
nos. and actual length of cable taken out of each drum. Each cable length shall be
cut from a specific drum as per approved schedule of cable. Lengths of cable runs
shown in the cable schedule are calculated lengths only, hence the actual lengths
shall be measured at site before laying and cutting the cable. The contractor shall
take extreme care to adjust cable runs from drums so that joints in the cable are
avoided and wastage reduced to minimum.
c. For purpose of measurement of cable run for payment the length of cable between
and terminations only shall be considered.
15.5.2.2 Laying
a. The cable drums should be properly mounted on jack / cable wheel. Make sure that
the spindle is suitable for carrying weight of the drum without bending. Check that
spindle is laying horizontal on the bearing so as to prevent the drum creeping to one
side or to the other while rotating.
b. Unroll the cables from the drum in correct direction. Rotate drum only as per arrow
mark given in the cable drum. Ensure that the end protection box attached to the
flange of the drum is removed and securing rope cut to allow cable and move freely.
Rotate the cable drum and simultaneously pull cable steadily and with even pulls and
not with unnecessary jerk or strain. In no case the cable shall be allowed to twist or
kink since this is likely to spring the armour and fracture the insulation and outer
serving of the cable.
c. Do not drag the cable on floor or hard surface. Use only wooden / steel cable rollers
for this purpose.
d. Cable should not be bent sharply to a small radius. The cable bending radius shall be
as large as possible and will not be less than 15 times the outside diameter for XLPE
0
cables. At joint termination the individual core of cable shall not be bent with bending
radius of less than 15 times the diameter over the insulation.
e. Where cables are laid on the MS racks, trays etc. ensure that trays / racks / supports
are fixed properly in an approved manner.
f. In sub-station where large no. of cables rise to panels/ switchboards, it shall be
ensured that these risers do not interfere with cables on racks and rising cables do not
interfere with cables on racks and rising cables do not cross the other cables in
horizontal runs. Risers are to be properly supported so that weight of cable does not
fall on terminations. All cable crossings shall be avoided.
g. Cable laid in trenches should be sealed at the entry to hazardous area / non-
hazardous area as per direction of owner / engineer-in-charge.
h. Openings in substation basement and floors for entry of cables shall be sealed after
the cables are laid.
i. Cables shall be clamped by taking care to be taken to space clamps at such intervals
as to prevent buckling of cables.
j. The laying of the cable on the racks shall be done in an approved manner.
k. Where cables are laid in cable slits, the slits after laying of cables shall be filled with
sand & lean cement mixture and plastered so that surface flushes with top of slit.
15.5.2.3 Directly Buried Cables
a. Laying of under ground directly buried cables shall include excavation of earth along
the cable route, laying of Hume / GI pipes for road crossing, back filling, ramming,
removing of extra earth including supply of bricks, sand etc. as per drawing and
instruction of Owner / Engineer-in-Charge.
b. Where cables are directly laid into ground, trenches should be dug up to such a depth
as to ensure that the depth of the top of the entire cable below the ground level is min.
750 mm for medium and low voltage cables. Before laying of cables at these
trenches, bottom of the trench should be properly levelled up and all odd and sharp
materials removed. Trench bottom then should be bedded with a 75 mm thick layer of
sand. Approval of Owner / Engineer-in-Charge shall be taken for preparation of this
bed before laying of cables. Cables shall be laid in the trenches in straight runs. Care
shall be taken so that any kinds or bends are not formed. After laying of the cables,
bricks shall be placed length wise on both the sides of the cables along the entire
length to form trough.
c. Fill up space between bricks with sand up to height of the bricks. Then place bricks
closely width wise on top of the sand layer throughout the length. Fill up loose earth in
trench, ram properly to compact, remove extra earth from site. Broken bricks shall not
be use for brick working. Only Class-I bricks shall be used.
d. If new cables are laid to cross existing cables, the new cable shall be laid under
existing cables at depth of not less than 200 mm from the existing cable. It shall be
ensured that the approach of new cable to the crossing is uniform and gradually
sloped.
e. Fix cable markers at 100 Mtrs. apart and at joints on the entire cable route length of
the cables. The cable markers shall be made of pre-cast concrete blocks of 300 mm x
350 mm x 350 mm size with markings of “LT CABLE”, “Depth of Cable”, “Arrow
Marks” etc. inscribed. These shall be supplied by the contractor at no extra cost and
fixed as per directions of the Owner / Engineer-in-Charge. The top of the above
concrete slabs shall have a smooth finish with cement only.
f. Laying of cables under road crossings etc. shall be done in pipes, and pipe ends shall
be sealed with bitumen compound and sand as required after cables are laid.

0
Backfilled soil shall be rammed thoroughly to prevent road surface cracking due to
settlement of loose soil.
15.5.2.4 Laying in Readymade Trenches
a. RCC slabs / chequered plates lifted from trenches for laying cables shall be put back
in position at close of work every day to avoid accident & damage to cables in the
trench.
b. When cables pass through pipes, pipe ends shall be sealed with bitumen compound
and sand as required.
c. Protection pipes shall be provided, whenever cables enter from the floor, trench etc. in
the equipment and sealing in and around these pipes shall be done.
15.5.2.5 Cable Termination
a. General
i. The scope of work shall include but not limited to the followings:
ii. Soldering / crimping of sockets / ferrules and connections at terminations as per
specifications. Sockets shall be provided at all terminations except where pressure
clamp type terminals are provided.
iii. Glanding of cable and fixing of cable boxes.
b. Specifications
i. HT XLPE cables shall be terminated by use of heat shrink type termination kits.
ii. All LT XLPE power and control cables shall be terminated through compression
type gland.
iii. In case of LT XLPE cables, armours shall be suitably earthed in compression type
glands. For HT XLPE cables, this shall be done either in glands or by any other
suitable means like bonding the armour with suitable wire and connecting same to
the earth terminals inside cable box.
iv. All lighting and control cables shall be provided with crimped Al / Cu Sockets before
termination in junction boxes.
c. Crimping
i. For all power cables, crimping type Al lugs for Al cables and tinned Cu lugs for Cu
cables shall be provided. These lugs shall be crimped on the cable conductors by
means of special hand/ hydraulic crimping tools. Before crimping the socket inhibiting
grease shall be smeared over the conductor. Conductor shall be shaped properly
before sliding the socket over it. Crimping shall be done in an approved manner.
ii. All the control cables, which shall be of copper conductor, shall be terminated without
any additional lugs in screwed type terminals provided in various equipments.
15.5.2.6 Jointing
a. The jointing shall be done in an approved manner. Care shall be taken not to damage
the insulation when opening the cable for jointing.
b. Before commencing soldering of the socket, conductor shall be thoroughly cleaned
and insulation protected. The ferrules shall be thoroughly cleaned. Ferrule and each
strand of the cable shall be thoroughly sweated with solder to tin them and fill the
conductor gaps to remove all air pockets. Soldering materials of approved quality as
per ISS practice shall be used. Taping of the conductors shall be done in an
approved manner after crimping / soldering.

0
c. Filling up compound and sealing the cable box shall never be done in one operation.
After the first pouring of compound, it should be topped up again with compound and
then sealed.
15.5.2.7 STRAIGHT THROUGH JOINTS
a. Jointing of XLPE & XLPE cables shall be done with extreme care and manufacturer’s
instructions shall be strictly followed. Soldering of sockets shall also be done with
extreme care as indicated above.
Earth continuity wire shall be plumbed and / or clamped. Compound shall be filled
according to the instructions of manufacturers of terminating kit / cable. Joints made
inside trench or on rack shall be properly supported. Wherever joints are made inside
ground, brick masonry work shall be done around the joint box and filled with sand,
and there after covered with earth at no extra cost.
b. A tent shall be used in all circumstances where jointing work is being done outdoor,
for protection against rain and to prevent dust from being blown in to exposed joints
and jointing materials. Extreme care shall be taken to maintain proper phase
sequence while terminating at equipment ends. Records of connection details shall
be maintained. Conductors shall be shaped properly while terminating and no sharp
bends shall be given. Where numbers of cables are to be connected in parallel,
proper tests shall be done before connection, so that no cross connection shall be
made. No phase crossings shall be allowed for making the connections.
c. Cables shall be supported adequately at the entry to cable box / equipment so that
load of cable does not come on cable glands.
d. All cables shall be meggered before and after jointing and insulation values recorded.
e. While terminating at equipment end, each core shall be properly tagged with
numbering ferrules as per nomenclature given in the drawings. Wires should be
dressed and clamped neatly, bolting shall be done properly.
15.5.3 Earthing
15.5.3.1 General
a. Painting of all earth strip joints with anti-corrosive paints flat after necessary finishing
and priming treatment shall be carried out as per instruction of Owner / Engineer-in-
Charge.
15.5.3.2 Specifications
a. Types and sizes of earthing conductors shall be as indicated. All earthing
installations shall conform to IS-3043.
b. Underground conductors shall run at a depth of 600 mm below ground level. Where
these conductors run along with cables, they shall be laid at the same depth as
cables. Where conductors run on wall, ceilings, they shall be laid on clamps or
brackets made out of Al/GI strips.
c. Wherever, earthing conductor is passing through floor, walls etc. the conductor shall
be taken through PVC / GI pipes.
d. All paints, enamel etc. shall be removed from point of contact before making
connections.
e. Connections between G.l. strips shall be done by welding. For connecting Al
conductor / G.I. wire, Al socket shall be crimped on the conductor / wire. At the
equipment end, connections shall be done by bolting.
f. Connection between Al & GI shall be done by bolting. Graphite grease shall be
applied on contact surfaces.

0
g. Epoxy resin paint or bitumen shall be applied on welded or bolted joints to prevent
corrosion and taping done as indicated in the drawing. Connections between Al wires
shall be done by crimping back to back Al ferrule.
h. Earth electrodes - Earth electrodes shall be provided as per drawings / specification.
Work includes excavation of earth, installation of electrodes and test links etc., supply
and filling of charcoal and common salt, back filling of earth and removal of extra
earth as specified earlier. It also includes making brick wall around the electrode and
cover as per drawings / specifications. The testing links shall be grouted on brick wall
and connections with earth electrode and conductors shall be made. Distance
between two electrodes shall not be less than 10 meters and may be located 4 M
away from building foundation.
i. Earth pits shall be inter-connected.
15.5.4 Plant Lighting
15.5.4.1 The electrical installation covered by this specification shall conform to relevant Indian
Standards & codes of practices.
15.5.4.2 Erection of light fittings, plug sockets etc.
Fabrication of supports for lighting fittings, sockets, junction boxes shall be done as per the
relevant drawings / instructions given by the owner / engineer-in-charge. These shall be
grouted to walls, ceiling or welded to insert plates, steel structures etc. Insert plates on
ceilings shall normally be provided. However, if required, the contractor shall weld such
supports to the reinforcement rods after exposing by chipping off concrete at no extra cost.
Installation of lighting fittings includes control boxes, where supplied separately and shall
be done as per drawings. Before installation, checking of internal parts, assembly of
accessories shall be done as per manufacturer's instruction.
15.5.4.3 Installation of explosion proof equipment shall be done strictly following manufacturer's
instruction or relevant Standards. Cable termination shall be done as per relevant
drawings. No drilling of holes or any change in construction of equipment or part thereof
shall be done.
15.5.4.4 Wiring for normal AC supply light points and plugs shall be taken on the same brackets but
wiring for emergency DC supply lights shall be taken separately. Location of fittings and
wiring route shall be decided in consultation with owner / engineer-in-charge. Wiring shall
follow shortest possible route and no. of circuit shall be bunched together to the extent
possible in the same route. For wiring and laying of cables, Cl. 15.5.2.2 shall be referred.
15.5.4.5 Cable for wiring light points and socket outlets shall normally be laid along wall, ceilings,
structures, on suitable brackets made out of M.S. / Al sheets or strips. Connections to the
points with fluorescent fixtures in one circuit shall be taken through junction boxes.
Junction boxes shall be suitably located for branching off from the circuit to the individual
point. Wherever indicated, cables may be laid directly on walls, ceilings etc. by clamping
on saddles.
15.5.4.6 Terminations shall be done in a manner as detailed in Cl. 15.5.2.5. Wherever indicated,
the wire can be drawn through PVC bushings provided in the fittings.
15.5.4.7 Lamps shall be installed after installation of fittings and wirings.
15.5.4.8 All light fittings and corresponding control switches shall be numbered in a permanent way
as instructed by owner / engineer-in-charge.
15.5.5 Erection Of Structures
15.5.5.1 Specification
The fabrication work shall be done as per specifications / sketches in an approved manner
and to the entire satisfaction of owner / engineer-in-charge.
15.5.5.2 Erection of racks, risers, supports etc.
0
a. Erection of racks and risers for cable supports shall be done along the cable routes
as required. The contractor before erection shall check the route for any obstruction
like process pipe lines, structures, equipment etc. In case of obstructions, the matter
shall be brought to the notice of owner / engineer-in-charge in writing and racks shall
be re-routed as per his instructions.
b. Supports for racks, risers etc. shall be welded on the steel structure, such as MS
beams, pipe trestles, insert plates provided in the RCC column etc. for erection of
racks.
c. Wherever indicated, supports for racks, risers, shall be grouted on walls. The racks,
risers etc. shall be installed on such supports and those properly welded.
d. Opening on walls / floors shall be provided where racks / risers are crossing floors/
walls.
e. Heavy channels, risers may also be grouted on the floors in addition to supports
provided from walls, ceilings, steel structures etc.
15.5.5.3 Erection of supports in trench
a. Supports and Hangers shall be grouted with rag bolts on the walls of readymade
concrete trench.
b. In existing trench wall, contractor may be required to provide pockets for grouting
cable supports at some points. This shall be done without any extra cost to the
owner.
c. In case of requirement of insert plates for support of cable rack, the contractor shall
weld such plates to the reinforcement MS rods. This shall be done by chipping the
concrete for exposing the reinforcement MS rods and thereafter welding the plates
and making good the concrete chipping by plastering.
15.5.5.4 The pipes will have to be bent (wherever required) and fixed / embedded in floor, wall and
ground for laying the cables. Neoprene bushes shall have to be fixed at the end of such
pipes.
15.5.5.5 GI trays of different sizes shall be cut in size and fixed on racks and risers. Fixing of trays
shall only be done after erection / welding / painting of the supports as required.
15.5.5.6 Erection of support frames for miscellaneous equipments, base channels for switchboards
etc. shall be carried out at no extra cost.
15.5.5.7 Dismantling of steel fabrication and re-erecting as required by owner / engineer-in-charge
shall have to be carried out by the contractor without any extra cost.
15.5.5.8 Dismantling of cable racks and re-erecting as required by owner / engineer in charge shall
be carried out by the contractor without any extra cost.
15.6 General Procedure for Testing & Commissioning
15.6.1 Before proceeding with the work, contractor shall fully inspect all installed Electrical
Equipment for completeness, signs of damages, defects etc. and record all discrepancies
noticed. The contractor shall be required to make good / repair / replace the damaged
components at no extra cost.
15.6.2 Testing and Commissioning Requirements
a. All works shall be carried out in accordance with the drawings, supplier’s instructions
/ manuals for equipment and as per relevant ISS & Code of Practices.
b. Before conducting test on any equipment, the contractor shall obtain permission from
owner / engineer-in-charge and all tests shall be conducted in their presence.

0
c. Results of each test shall be recorded by the contractor immediately after the test on
approved format and counter signed by the owner’s authorised representative. The
test results shall be furnished in four copies in the form of ‘Test Certificates’.
d. Copies of the record shall be handed over to owner / engineer-in-charge.
e. The Contractor shall commission all electrical equipment and carry out all pre-
commissioning / commissioning tests inclusive of no-load and on-load tests on
motors, and shall be responsible for final adjustments of relays, motors, instruments,
starters, etc. as per operational data supplied and as per directions of Engineer-in-
Charge.
f. All terminals, cable joints, earth terminals which are opened for testing purposes shall
be re-terminated and re-insulated by the Contractor to restore their original state.
g. Painting
The contractor shall without any extra cost, touch up with paint all electrical
equipment which are damaged/ scratched during testing and commissioning work.
The paint used shall match exactly painted surface of the equipment on which touch
up is done.
15.6.3 Cleaning and Regular Maintenance.
Till the commissioned equipment is finally accepted by owner / engineer-in-charge,
Contractor shall be responsible for regular cleaning and maintenance of all electrical
equipment. The maintenance job is to be done in consultation with or on advice from the
Owner/ Consultant.
15.7 Testing & Commissioning Specifications
15.7.1 These specifications lay down the testing and commissioning procedures to be followed for
each type of equipment, over and above the general requirements laid down in
specifications for erection.
Manufacturer's instructions and any other instructions of owner / engineer-in-charge /
statutory bodies shall also be followed by the contractor during testing and commissioning.
The contractor shall maintain and furnish the records of all equipments i.e. HT/LT panels,
motors, transformers, CT, PT, relays etc. including any special test as per manufacturer’s
manual..
15.7.2 Cables
a. All LT cables shall be tested for insulation resistance with 1000 V megger after
termination. IR shall be measured between phases and between phase & earth. The
voltage shall be applied for 1 minute.
b. All HT cables (11KV & 3.3KV) shall be tested for high voltage as per IS: 1255 after
making all termination and joints followed by IR test.
15.7.3 Lighting
Before energising any lighting circuit, the IR values (phase to phase and phase to earth)
shall be recorded for entire wiring installation. The testing shall be done with 500 V
megger. After switching on the power supply, load of each circuit shall be measured.
15.7.4 Earthing
The continuity of earthing and resistance of each earth pit and grid shall be measured with
earth megger.
15.7.5 Motors
15.7.5.1 General Checks
15.7.5.1.1 The alignment of the motor shall be checked with the driven equipment.
0
15.7.5.1.2 Safety switches, bearings, air temperature indicators, winding temperature

indicators, water/air flow pressure meters, lubricating oil pump motors etc. of the
motor shall be checked and calibrated.
15.7.5.1.3 Operation of the space heaters shall be checked.
15.7.5.1.4 For motor standing for a long time, overhauling, regreasing and drying out shall be
carried out as below.
15.7.5.1.5 Condition of grease in bearings shall be checked and if required it shall be
replaced completely with fresh grease (as recommended by vendor) after proper
cleaning of bearings. This work shall preferably be taken up before final alignment
of motor with driven equipment.
15.7.5.1.6 In case of oil lubricated bearings, bearing housing shall be flushed with oil and
then filled upto the specified level. It shall be checked that oil ring rotates freely
alongwith motor. In case of pedestal type journal bearing it may be necessary to
open the top cover, and bearings shall be checked.
15.7.5.1.7 All accessories like technogenerators, water pressure relay, temperature detectors
and any other safety switches shall be fixed after calibration.
15.7.5.1.8 It shall be checked that shaft rotates freely. This shall be done after decoupling the
motor from driven equipment.
15.7.5.1.9 Air gap between rotor and stator (wherever possible) shall be checked at three
places at 120 degre apart on both sides of drive and shall be verified with the
figures furnished by the manufacturers. The variation should not exceed 10% of
average value.
15.7.5.1.10 The tightness of the foundation bolts shall be checked. It shall be ensured that the
pins are fitted before commissioning of the motor.
15.7.5.1.11 Power and control cables shall be checked that they are properly connected. All
earth connection of the motors shall be checked.
15.7.5.1.12 In case of forced ventilated motor, ventilation duct shall be cleaned. It shall be
ensure that recommended flow and pressure of air is available to produce the
required cooling effect. If the motor is provided with air to water heat exchanger,
adequate flow of water shall be checked. If necessary exchanger shall be cleaned
to remove any obstruction to water flow. Leakage from water cooler, pipe
connections etc. shall be checked.
15.7.5.1.13 Space heater circuit shall be checked. (Space heaters shall be provided on all
H.T. and special type LT motors). Space heater supply shall be switched on at
least one week before the commissioning of the motor. Water accumulation in side
motor shall be checked by opening the drain plugs provided on the motor body.
15.7.5.2 Drying
For the purpose of drying winding, heat can be applied in the following four ways :-
15.7.5.2.1 By providing a flow of hot air after suitable covering with tarpaulin. The heaters can
be arranged so that by means of suitable covers, the winding being heated is in
hot air stream without concentrating the heat to be extent that excessive
temperature are reached. This requires that the contineous circulation and
replacement of the air takes place. This method can be applied where any other
facilities are not available/applicable.
15.7.5.2.2 By placing heater or lamps around and inside, in case of small motors after
making suitable guarding and covering arrangement so as to conserve that heat.

0
15.7.5.2.3 By producing heat losses in the machine itself i.e. by operating the machine on
short circuit. During short circuit drying, rotor is blocked to avoid rotation. A
balance three phase very low voltage (about 10% of normal stater voltage) supply
shall be applied across stater terminals. In the first 6 to 8 hrs. (depending on the
size of the machines) increase the stater current from about 0.5 times the rated
current to a value such that the winding temperature does not exceed 60 Deg.C.
Progress of drying process shall be monitored by repeat measurement of
insulation resistance and also observing the winding temperature.
15.7.5.2.4 By feeding current from external easy sources to produce heat losses in
the winding e.g. with the aid of welding sets or controllable current rectifiers. D.C.
welding sets method for drying machine windings requires certain precaution
before connecting them. Because there is no ventilation, the maximum possible
current for winding phase shall be adjusted to 0.5 times the rated current. The
individual phase of the winding shall be connected either in series or parallel. With
series connection, unsystemetically (e.g. phase to U1, U2 to VI. V2 to W2 W1 to
minus) in order to keep axial magnetic flux in the shaft low.
When the neutral point is not brought out, two phases must inevitably be parallel
and connected in series to third phase. The connection order shall be changed in
about every hours so that the winding is evenly heated. Insulation resistance shall
be measured hourly. Before switching off a D.C. the current should be gradually
reduced to prevent winding inductance to cause arcing. Since the temperature
distribution of the machine at stand still is different from that on running condition,
a winding temperature of 60 Deg.C. should not be exceeded and rotor turned
through 90 degree every hour.
Precautions during drying of the winding must be taken. Air circulation as must
naturally be provided to allow the moisture to escape. The magnitude of the
current in the winding or the guantity of heat applied should be controlled so as to
fulfill the requirement i.e. starting with low values and regulated according to
temperature rise. Winding cable leads in terminal boxes should be cleaned with
dry rags before drying. Temperature variations shall be avoided during the drying
process. With totally enclosed machines, provision shall be made (by removing
covers etc.) to permit the moisture to escape and for clean and dry air to enter. If a
drain plug is provided for water condensation on the underside of the machine, the
same should be opened.
Motor shall not be kept unattended during drying process. In case of smaller motor
reading of IR shall be recorded 1/2 hourly. For checking of polarisation index of
HT motors electric driven megger shall be used. P.I. value shall be compared with
the data supplied by the manufacturers (P.I. shall not be less than 2.5) Time VS
temperature and time VS IR curve shall be drawn on the basis of the data
generated and shall be submitted as a record.
15.7.5.3 Testing
15.7.5.3.1 Insulation Resistance Test :
Before starting measurement the IR value motor must be disconnected from the
supply source, and there shall not be a possibility of energisation of the winding.
Phases shall be grounded and short circuited too.
a) LT Motors : It shall be measured between the winding & its frame by means of
500/1000 V megger. A minimum value of 1 meg ohrn. for 415V motors shall be
considered a safe value.
b) H.T. Motors : 3.3. KV and 11 KV motors shall be tested for insulation by

1000/5000 V megger and its value shall not be less than 1 meg ohm. for each KV

0
However, it is desirable that before commissioning the motors, the insulation

resistance shall be improved substantially above the lower limits. Dry new winding
have insulation resistance between 100 Mega Ohm to 2000 mega Ohm or higher.
If the insulation resistance value is in the region of minimum value.
If desired minimum value is not obtained after checking of the IR, drying of winding
can be taken up.
LIMIT VALUE AT RATED VOLTAGE

< 2 KV > 2 KV
Measuring Voltage 500 VDC 500 VDC
(Min.100 V DC) (Max.1000 V DC)
Minimum insulation resistance with 10 M.OHM 100 M. OHM
new cleared or repair winding
Electrical special Insulation 0.5 Mega Ohm/ kV 5 Mega ohm/KV
resistance after long period
operation.
15.7.5.3.2 Polarization Index Test :

It is a figure of merit for dryness and cleanliness of the winding insulation. P.I. is
ratio of two measurement of insulation resistance taken at specified time interval
employing the same measuring condition (i.e. Identical winding temperature and
measuring voltage).
IR 10 Minute.
P.I. ----------------------
IR 1 Minute.
Inspite of polarization index and insulation resistance value if moisture is visible on

winding drowing of motor winding is also necessary.
Evaluation of insulation P.I. Drying

condition based on P.I
Hazardous <1 Mandatory
Bad 1.- 1.5 Mandatory
Doubtful 1.5-2 Recommended
Adequate 2 -3 No
Good 3-4 No
Excellent >4 No
15.7.5.3.3 Operational Test.

a) Motor control cable/CB shall be checked and protective relays shall be set as
per design data. Setting may be kept lower than loo% before first no load run.
However, during load running, setting shall be restored to normal. Simulation test
shall be conducted on motor starter, CB (main fuse removed and CB at test
position). All interlock, should be incorporated in the control system. Testing shall
be done from local and remote control station and shall be ensured that the control
system works satisfactorily. In case of any defect in the integrated control wiring, it
shall be located and such defects shall be rectified.
b) Any other tests recommended by the manufacturers for special type

equipment like variable speed motors etc. shall be done accordingly.
15.7.5.3.4 No- Load Test.

0
This test can be conducted when motor is decoupled from the main drive. In first
kick of motor, direction of rotation shall be checked and changed, if required. The
motor shall be run for 8 hours. Voltage, starting current, and starting time shall be
noted. Hourly reading of current, winding and bearing temperature , (for small
motors body temperature shall be measured by thermometer) should recorded.
Vibration & excessive noise shall also be recorded. In case of variable speed
motor, variation of speed shall be checked and regulation of speed shall also be
noted.
After switching of the motor, IR shall be measured under hot and cold condition.
15.7.5.3.5 Load Test

If the No Load trial run is found satisfactory, the motor should be run on load after
adjusting the protective relay settings to 100% value. Starting time, load current,
winding temperature etc. shall also be recorded. The temperature rise should not
be more than as pecified in data sheet of motor. Excessive vibration and noise
shall also be noted.
15.7.6 Miscellaneous Equipment
Under this are included, exhaust fans, blowers, limit switches, vibrators, electro-magnets,
air pressurisation unit etc. The following tests shall be conducted.
a. Measurement of insulation resistance
b. Check up the direction of rotation.
c. Operational test
15.8 Handing Over to Owner
15.8.1 The contractor shall hand over the complete installation as a whole. Minor works not
specified but required to complete the job as a whole will have to be done by the contractor
without extra cost. Any equipment / installation shall not be deemed as handed over to
Owner until the same is complete in all respect and is accepted in writing by the Owner /
Engineer-in-charge.
15.8.2 The final acceptance of the work shall be after the demonstration of guarantees by the
Contractor. Owner shall issue the final acceptance / taking over certificate upon fulfilment
of the guarantees.
15.9 Obligations & Responsibilities of Contractor
The contractor's obligations and responsibilities shall include but not limited to the
following:
15.9.1 To deploy skilled, semi skilled and unskilled personnel in requisite numbers and as per
scheduled programme so as to complete the WORK as per overall project schedule.
15.9.2 To deploy suitably qualified supervisors and engineers in requisite numbers to assure
execution of good quality job as per best engineering practices and to the full satisfaction
of Owner / Consultants.
15.9.3 Safety supervisor shall be deployed at site that monitors safety aspect during the site
construction work. Contractor to note that all workers shall use PPE (helmet, safety shoes,
hand gloves, goggles, double lanyard safety belt etc. and they shall be medically tested
before putting into the job.
15.9.4 To prepare detailed planning and execution schedule considering the availability of fronts
and materials. This shall be reviewed by Owner / Engineer-in-charge and Contractor shall
be required to keep updating the same (as per the instructions of Owner / Engineer-in-
charge) to take care of any changes in the availability of fronts and materials and to

0
complete all jobs as per the overall project schedule. Owner / Engineer-in-charge shall in
no way be held responsible for such changes.
15.9.5 Construction power arrangement shall be done by the contractor at their own and
distribution to various areas for construction shall be in the scope of the contractor.
15.9.6 To arrange all required tools and tackles, consumables, instruments, erection materials &
machineries etc. for handling erection, testing & commissioning of complete electrical
installation.
15.9.7 To provide proper storage and security arrangements for his tools, tackles, equipments,
materials etc. as well as equipment and materials issued by Owner / Engineer-in-charge to
Contractor. Owner / Engineer-in-charge shall not be responsible for any loss or damage to
items in the custody of Contractor at site for any reason whatsoever.
15.9.8 Completion of all repairs arising out of defective work done by Contractor, Owner /
Engineer-in-charge may at his discretion require the Contractor to rectify certain defects in
materials caused due to bad workmanship of supplier and / or during transportation. For
such work of course, the payment modalities shall be settled by mutual agreement before
starting such rectification jobs.
15.9.9 To maintain all the records for men, materials and execution of job as required by law as
well as Owner / Engineer-in-charge.
15.9.10 To get his work inspected by Owner / Engineer-in-charge and get approved from statutory
agencies such as but not limited to Electrical Inspector, Factory Inspector, Odisha State
Pollution Control Board etc., as required.
All co-ordination with Statutory Authorities shall be contractor’s responsibility. Only
statutory fee required for approval shall be paid by the owner.
15.9.11 In addition to safety regulations indicated in this enquiry, Owner / Engineer-in-charge may
issue certain safety directives, which shall have to be followed meticulously without any
reservation.
15.9.12 To undertake and execute work and supply as per scope follow Technical Conditions
including specification for electrical erection, specification for electrical testing and
commissioning.
15.9.13 Reconciliation of all materials issued by owner / supplied by contractor.
15.9.14 Handing over of the completed works to owner / engineer-in-charge as per procedure laid
down by Consultant.
15.9.15 To submit documentation forming part of request for issue of completion certificate.
15.9.16 Clearing the site after cleaning the areas where the Contractor executed the job, stored the
materials and built his office, fabrication shop etc.
16.0 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS
16.1 Contractor shall coordinate with Owner’s other Contractors and shall freely exchange all
technical information required for this purpose.
16.2 All civil works connected with electrical installation shall be under the LSTK Contractor’s
scope.
17.0 DEVIATIONS
17.1 Deviations, if any, from this specification (clause wise) shall be clearly indicated in the offer
with reasons thereof. Deviations from the data indicated in Data Sheet shall be shown clearly
by encircling it and indicating the revised data in Data Sheet. In the absence of any such
activities, compliance with the clauses shall be deemed automatically.
17.2 Successful Bidder shall also note that all those deviations mentioned in bid but not accepted
by Owner/Consultant in writing shall be considered as withdrawn by bidder.
0
17.3 Any and all deviations mentioned anywhere else in the bid but not specifically and
unambiguously mentioned under specific section ‘List of deviations’ shall not be considered.
17.4 The bidder shall submit the duly signed and stamped copies of all the NIT documents as a
token of compliance to NIT.

0
SPECIFICATION SHEET - INDUCTION MOTOR

CLIENT : TFL, Talcher PROJECT : Coal Based Fertiliser Plant PLANT : Raw Water Reservoir
ISSUED FOR : PROPOSAL ENQUIRY ORDER FINAL
GENERAL
Item No. : Ref. Stds. : IS IEC
Quantity : . Encl. Docs. : Tech Specifications for Motors
Description : Motor for Raw Water Pumps and Fire Water Make :
Make-up Pumps
Code No. : Maker’s Type. :
TESTS: Routine Type Others
SERVICE CONDITIONS
SYSTEM DETAILS AMBIENT CONDITION
0 0 0
Rated Voltage with + % : 3.3 kV  10% / 415V  10%. Temp. Max./Min./Design Ref. : 46 C / 1 C / 50 C
No. of phases : 3 Relative Humidity : 100% Alt. above sea : <1000 M
Rated Frequency With + % : 50 Hz  5% Dusts : Coal, Ash, Urea
ATMOSPHERIC
Combined V & F variation :  10% POLLUTION Vapour : Ammonia
Fault Level : 150 MVA (3.3kV) / 36 MVA (415V), Area Safe Hazardous
Space Heater Supply : Haz. Area class: Temp. Class: Encl.Gr. :
Low Voltage Heating Supply : Location : Indoor Outdoor
INSTRUMENT A.C. : COOLING WATER
O
CONTACT RATING D.C. : Inlet Press. : Kg/sq.m. Inlet Temp. C
O
Aux. Motor Supply : Fouling Factor : Outlet Temp. C
BASIC DATA
RATING & DUTY DRIVEN M/C DATA
Rated Output : Type :
Syn. Speed : Make :
Duty : Continuous Absorbed Power :
Rotor Type : Squirrel Cage Coupling :
Starting Method : DOL Torque-Starting / Max. :
2
Max I Start/I Rated : GD at Motor Speed :
Min. V Start at Terms: 80% of rated voltage. Thrust - Radial / Axial :
Min. Starting Torque at VR : Addl. Data :
EXECUTION ACCESSORIES
Degree of Protection : IP-55 Foundation Bolt Space Heater
Refer Technical Specification
Addl. Degree of Protection : Lifting Eye Bolt Drain Plug
Mounting Arrangement : Cable Glands Cable Lugs
Direction of Rotation : Bi-directional Diff. C.T.s C.W. Flow Indicator
Insulation Class: ‘F’ with temp. rise limited to ‘B’ RTDs for Wdgs. Hot Air Bearings
Cooling Method : Thermometer For Hot Air Bearings
Stator Connection : Earthing Terminals On Body In T.B.
CABLING DATA Name Plate : Addl. name plate :
Power cable : Shall be indicated ion the receipt of motor rating Rain Protecting Hood : Thermistor
Heater cable :3x2.5 Sq.mm (Cu) SPARE PARTS
C.T. cable : Required For Period of 2 Years

R.T.D. cable : Later Bearings (DE & NDE) : Cooling Fan
Alarm cable : Grease Nipple & Plug : Fan cover
CABLE Type : Double Compression RTD for: winding and bearing
GLAND Material : Rolled Aluminium Terminal Plate complete with stud & shorting link :
Inner & Outer covers for DE & NDE bearing:
Type : Epoxy Terminal Block
PAINTING
Shade : 631 of IS : 5
Note: 1) All unfiled data shall be filled by bidder and submitted with bid.
2) Power and space heater cables shall be of XLPE-A-FRLS PVC.

0
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS - INDUCTION MOTOR

GENERAL
Item No.
Quantity
Description
Code No.
Ref. Standard
Make
Maker’s Type
ELECTRICAL DATA
Rated Output
Rated Voltage
No. of Starts - Hot / Cold
Torque - Starting / Pull Up / Pull Out
Starting Time at min. V Start (Hot / Cold)
Safe Stall Time at VR / 1.1VR
Stator Time Constant
Temp. Rise at Full Load - Wdg. / Hot Air / Brg.
TEMP. RISE OF STATOR 3 Starts From Cold
/ ROTOR AFTER 2 Starts From Hot
Current at FL / 0.85 FL
Efficiency at FL / 0.85 FL
Speed at FL / 0.85 FL
Power Factor at FL / 0.85 FL / Start
Push Pull Voltage withstand Capacity
Max. V dip for 1 sec. / 10 sec. / 60 sec.
Losses - Fixed / Copper / Total
Space Heater Rating
Suitable for Low Voltage Heating
C.T. Ratio & Accuracy Class
C.T. VK & Imag. at VK / 2
Heating Time Constant
Cooling Time Constant
MECHANICAL DATA
Frame Size / Ref. Dimensional Drg.
Weight - Stator / Rotor / Total
Heaviest Weight to be Lifted
2 2
Rotor GD in Kgm
S/C Condition
REACTION AT Starting Condition
SUPPORTS FOR Running Condition
Push Pull Condition
Max. Vibration Limit
Max. Noise Level
Suitable for Outdoor Use Yes No
Suitable for Bi-directional Rotation Yes No
Material of Insulation
Treatment of Insulation
Winding Coils Replaceable at Site
Type & Material of Fan
Material & Thickness of Cooler Tube
Cooling Water Required in M3 / hr
Lubrication Type
Lubricant Specn.
Interval of Lubrication
BEARING DE
NDE
NOS. & TYPE
GUIDE
On Line Lubrication
Type & Rating of Main Cable Box
No. of Cable Glands in Control Cable Box
Note: Technical Particulars for each rating and type of Motor shall be filled by bidder separately and submitted
for approval after order in line with ITB/PO requirement before commencement of manufacturing.

0
LIGHTING SUB DISTRIBUTION BOARD

Ref. Stds. : IS/IEC Temp. Max./Min./Design Ref.: 46 / 1 / 50C

Encl. Docs. : Relative Humidity: 100%; Alt. above sea : <1000 M
Vendor : Atmospheric Dusts : Coal, Ash, Urea
Vendor Ref. No. : Pollution Vapour : Ammonia
Area Safe Hazardous
Nominal Voltage with ± % : 415V ± 10%, Hazardous Zone : Encl. Gr. :
Rated Frequency with ± % : 50 Hz ± 5%, Area Class Temp. Class :
Combined V & F Variation : ± 10%, Location Indoor Outdoor
No. of Phases & Wires : 3-Phase, 4-wire
TESTS TO BE WITNESSED: Routine Type Others
Item No. :
Quantity : 3 Nos.
Description : LSDB
Code No.
Incoming & Outgoing feeders 1 No. Incoming (63 A TPN SFU) and 3 nos. feeder circuit of 63A DP MCB having 9
Nos. outgoing of 16/25 A DP MCB
Degree of Protection : IP55

Addl. Degree of Protection : --
Cable Type Incoming (Al) 1.1 KV, 3.5X50 sq. mm (Al) XLPE-A-FRLS PVC
& Size Outgoing (Cu) 1.1 KV, 3X2.5 sq. mm. (Cu) XLPE-A-FRLS PVC
Painting Type & Shade : Epoxy based, 631of IS:5
Period for which Spares required : 2 years
SWITCH : Refer Make of Electrical Items

M.C.B. : -do-
CABLE GLANDS : -do-
TERMINAL BLOCKS : -do-
Item No. :
Make & Maker’s Type
Material & Thickness of Enclosure
Gasketing Material
COVER Internal :
General TYPE External :
PAINTING Pre treatment
Shade
Material of Ext. Hardware < 8mm / > 8mm
Dimensional Drawing Reference No. :
Weight :
Reference Standards
M.C.B. Category of Duty :
Rated Current :
No. of Poles :
Type of Neutral :
Terminal Block Make & Type
Rated Current
Cable Gland Type :
Material :
NOTE: Completely filled in Technical Particulars Sheet shall be furnished along with the bid and for owner/consultant
approval before commencement of manufacturing.

0
SPECIFICATION SHEET
HT CABLES
GENERAL AMBIENT CONDITION
Encl. Docs. : Temp. Max./Min./Design Ref. 46 / 1 / 50C
Vendor : Relative Humidity: 100 % Alt. above Sea Level < 1000M
Vendor Ref. No. : Atmospheric Dusts : Coal, Ash, Urea
Pollution Vapour : Ammonia
TESTS TO BE WITNESSED: Routine Type Acceptance Others
Type Tests Certificate of Similar Cable : Required Not required
BASIC DATA
Item No. 1
Ref. Stds. IS:7098 (PART-2)
Voltage Grade 3.3 KV POWER CABLE
System Earthing UE
Type of Cable POWER
ALUMINIUM ALUMINIUM
CONDUCTOR
STRANDED STRANDED
Insulation Type XLPE EXTRUDED
Inner Sheath Type EXTRUDED PVC (ST2)
CONDUCTOR YES YES
SCREEN -- --
Material of Conductor Screen AS PER IS
YES YES
GALVANISE GALVANISED STEEL
ARMOURING D STEEL STRIP
STRIP
SINGLE SINGLE
Outer Sheath Type EXTRUDED FRLS PVC
TYPE-ST2
Special Requirements INSULATION SCREEN
REQUIRED
Drum Material WOOD
BILL OF QUANTITY
Item No. No. of Core & Cross-Sectional Area in sq. mm. Qty. in Mtr. Preferred Drum Remarks
Length
3.3 KV XLPE insulated, armoured, FRLS PVC outer sheathed power cable of following sizes:
1. 3CX240 sq. mm (Al) Refer SOR LATER

0
SPECIFICATION SHEET
LT POWER & CONTROL CABLES
Encl. Docs. : Temp. Max./Min./Design Ref. 46 / 1 / 50C
Vendor : Relative Humidity: 100 % Alt. above Sea Level < 1000M
Vendor Ref. No. : Atmospheric Dusts : Coal, Ash, Urea
Pollution Vapour : Ammonia
TESTS TO BE WITNESSED: Routine Type Acceptance Others
Type Tests Certificate of Similar Cable : Required Not required
BASIC DATA
Item No.
Ref. Stds. IS:7098 (PART-1) IS:7098 (PART-1) IS:7098 (PART-1)
Voltage Grade 1.1 KV POWER CABLE 1.1 KV CONTROL CABLE 1.1 KV EARTHING CABLE
System Earthing NEUTRAL SOLIDLY NEUTRAL SOLIDLY NEUTRAL SOLIDLY
EARTHED EARTHED EARTHED
Type of Cable POWER CONTROL EARTHING
ALUMINIUM/ ALUMINIUM / COPPER COPPER ALUMINIUM

CONDUCTOR COPPER
STRANDED STRANDED STRANDED STRANDED
Insulation Type XLPE EXTRUDED XLPE EXTRUDED XLPE EXTRUDED
Inner Sheath Type EXTRUDED PVC (ST2) EXTRUDED PVC (ST2) --
CONDUCTOR Required -- -- --
SCREEN Not Required -- -- --
Material of Conductor Screen -- -- --
Required YES YES --
Material GALVANISED STEEL GALVANISED STEEL WIRE --
ARMOURING
STRIP / WIRE
No. of Layer SINGLE SINGLE --
Outer Sheath Type EXTRUDED FRLS PVC EXTRUDED FRLS PVC EXTRUDED FRLS PVC
TYPE-ST2 TYPE-ST2 TYPE-ST2
Special Requirements -- -- --
Drum Material WOOD WOOD WOOD
BILL OF QUANTITY
Item No. No. of Core & Cross-Sectional Qty. in M. Preferred Remarks
Area in Sq. mm. Drum Length
1.1 KV XLPE insulated, armoured, FRLS PVC outer sheathed, Power cables
1.
2.
3.
1.1 KV XLPE insulated, armoured, FRLS PVC outer sheathed, Control cables
4.
5.
6.
Single Core 1.1 KV XLPE insulated, unarmoured FRLS PVC outer sheathed cable for earthing
7.
8.

0
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS - CABLES

GENERAL
Make
Ref. Standard
Item No.
Voltage Grade
Suitable For Earthed / Unearthed System
No. of Cores & Size of Conductor
CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS
Material
CONDUCTOR Construction
No. & Dia of wires per Core
CONDUCTOR Material
SCREEN Thickness
Material
INSULATION Thickness
Core Identification Method
Material
INSULATION SCREEN
Thickness
Type & Material
INNER SHEATH
Thickness
Type & Material
ARMOURING
Dia of Wire / Strip Thickness
Material
OUTER SHEATH
Thickness
ELECTRICAL DATA
CONTINUOUS CURRENT Ground At 300 C
0
RATING WHEN LAID IN Air At 40 C
Short Circuit Current For 1 sec.
Continuous
CONDUCTOR TEMP.
Short Time
Resistance At Operating Temp. (Ohm / KM)
Reactance At 50 C/S (Ohm/KM)
Capacitance (F/Km)
Insulation Resistance
Polarisation Index
DERATING FACTOR Temperature
CHART ATTACHED Grouping
FOR Exposure to Sun
MECHANICAL DATA
Over Inner Sheath
DIAMETER WITH
TOLERANCE Over Armour
Overall
Weight Of Cables Per KM
Minimum Bending Radius
Maximum Pulling Tension
Standard Drum Length
Tolerance On Drum Length
Notes: Completely filled in Technical Particulars Sheet shall be furnished separately for each type & size of cable and
submitted with the bid and for owner/consultant approval before commencement of manufacturing in line with
NIT/PO.

0
INTERLOCKING SWITCH SOCKET & PLUG

Ref. Stds. : IS / IEC Temp.- Max / Min / Design ref.: 46 / 1 / 50C
Encl. Docs. : Max Relative Humidity 100% Alt. above sea : <1000 M
Sample Reqd. : Area Safe Hazardous
Hazardous Zone : Encl. Gr. :
Area Class Temp. Class :
Location : Indoor Outdoor
TESTS TO BE WITNESSED : Routine Type Others
BASIC DATA
Item No.
Quantity
Rated Voltage & Frequency 415V ± 10 %, 50Hz ± 5% 240V ± 10 %, 50Hz ± 5%
Rated Current 63 Amp 25 Amp
No. of Phases & Pins 3 Ph, 4 Pin 1 Ph, 3 Pin
Degree of Protection IP55 IP55
Addl. Degree of Protection -- --
2 2
Cable Size Supply 3.5CX50 mm (Al) 3CX2.5 mm (Al)
2 2
Plug 3.5CX25 mm (Al) 3CX2.5 mm (Al)
Period for which Spares required 2 Years 2 Years
MAKE OF COMPONENTS
SWITCH : Refer Make of Electrical Items
FUSE: -do-
SOCKETS : -do-
PLUG : -do-
CABLE GLANDS : -do-
TERMINAL BLOCKS : -do-
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
Material & Thickness of Enclosure
Gasketing Materials
General Material of Ext. Hardwares < 8mm / > 8mm
Cable glands Type & Material
Painting Pre treatment
Shade
Dimensional Drawing Reference No.
Weight of Switch Socket / Plug
Reference Standards
Switch Rated Current
Utilisation Category
Fuse Reference Standards
Rated Current
Socket Reference Standards
Rated Current
Plug Reference Standards
Rated Current
approval before commencement of manufacturing.

0
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES


Ref. Stds. : IS / IEC Temp.- Max / Min / Design ref. 46 / 1 / 50C
Encl. Docs. : Max Relative Humidity: ≤ 100% Alt. above sea : <1000 M
Vendor : Atmospheric Dusts : Humid & Dusty
Vendor Ref. No. : Pollution Vapour : Highly corrosive
SYSTEM DETAILS Area Safe : Hazardous :
Nominal Voltage : 240V ± 10% Haz. Area class Zone Encl. Gr. :
Rated Frequency: 50Hz ± 5% Temp. Class :
Combined V & F variation : ± 10% Location: Indoor Outdoor
TESTS TO BE WITNESSED : Routine Acceptance Type Others
BASIC DATA
Item no. 1 3
Degree of Protection IP65 IP20
Addl. Degree of Protection -- --
Material of Housing Cast Aluminium alloy CRCA sheet steel
CONTROL Separate Yes --
GEAR Integral -- Yes
Cable Type & Size 3 x 2.5 mm2 (Cu) 3 x 2.5 mm2 (Cu)
Looping facility Required in control gear box only No
CABLE Required Yes Yes

GLANDS Type Rolled Al Rolled Al
MOUNTING Required Yes Yes
BRACKET Not Required -- --
PAINTING Type Epoxy Epoxy
Shade 631 as per IS: 5 631 as per IS: 5
LOCATION Indoor -- Yes
Outdoor Yes --
SAMPLE Required -- --
Not Required Not Required Not Required
Period for which Spares Required 2 years 2 years
BILL OF QUANTITY
Item No. Lamp Type & Wattage Description of Fixtures Qty. Remarks
1. 120 W LED Flood Light
2. 2X20W LED tube Channel/Rail Mounting Industrial

0
SPECIFICATION SHEET
LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS
Ref. Stds. : IS/IEC Temp.- Max / Min / Design ref.: 46 / 1 / 50C
Encl. Docs. : Max Relative Alt. above sea : <1000 M 100%

Humidity 100%
Area Safe : Hazardous :
Sample : Reqd. : Not Reqd. : Haz. Area Zone 2 Encl. Gr. : IIC
Tests : Routine :  Others : l
Class Temp. Cl. T3
Location : Indoor  Outdoor 
( for motor 75 KW and above)

As per SOR (supply)
Rated Control Voltage with ± % 240V + 10%
Rated Frequency with ±
Enclosure for Hazardous Area
Provisions required in LCS
--
PUSH --
BUTTON --
--
--
Lock / Service --
CONTROL TRIP/NEUTRAL/CLOSE 
SWITCH Auto / Manual --
ON 
OFF 
INDICATION Ready for Service 
LAMP Space Heater ON 
Trip 
Ammeter 
Range To be indicated later
METERS
C.T. Sec. Current 1 Amp

RAIN HOOD
--
Control Cable Size XLPE-A-FRLSPVC (Cu) 16 CX2.5 mm2
Painting Type & Shade Epoxy, 631as per IS-5, Light grey
Period For which Spares Reqd. 2 Years

0
LOCAL CONTROL STATIONS
GENERAL
Maker’s Type
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
Material of Construction
Thickness of Enclosure
IP Class of Enclosure
Mounting Arrangement
Door hinged or not
Gasketing Material
External Hardwares
Rainhood reqd. or not
On Door
Component On Base Plate
Padlocking provided with
LxBxH / Dimensional Drg. Ref. No.
ertificate No.
WIRING
Wiring Material & Size
External Cable Size
TERMINATION ARRANGEMENT
Termination Arrangement
Cable Glands Material
Types
Make
Terminal Type
Rating
PUSH BUTTONS
Ref. Standards
Rated Voltage
No. of Contacts N.O. / N.C.
Contact Rating ( V / A )
AMMETER
Ref. Standards
Rated Current / VA
Accuracy Class
CONTROL SWITCHES
Ref. Standards
Rated Voltage
No. of Contacts N.O. / N.C.
Contact Rating ( V / A )
Utilization Category
SIGNAL LAMPS
Ref. Standards
Rated Voltage / Watts
Type of Holder
Safety Resistor
Note: To be filled by the bidder.

0
SPECIFICATION SHEETS
JUNCTION BOX
CLIENT: M/s TFL, Talcher PROJECT: Coal Based Fertilizer Plant PLANT: Raw Water Reservoir
GENERAL
Ref. Stds. IS / IEC
Encl. Docs.
Make
Maker’s type
Sample Required Yes No
AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Temp. Max. / Min. / Design Ref. 46 / 1 / 50C
Rel. Humidity 100%
Alt. Above Sea Level <1000M
ATMOSPHERI Dusts Coal, Ash, UREA (CORROSIVE)
C POLLUTION Vapours Ammonia
Area Safe Hazardous
Hazardous area classification Zone: Encl. Gr.: Temp. Class:
Location Indoor Outdoor
TESTS Routine Type Others
BASIC DATA
Item No. 1
Quantity Refer SOR
Rated Voltage 240V±10%
Rated Frequency 50Hz±5%
Rated Current 16A
No. of Phases & Wires 1Phase / 3wires (PNE)
Application For looping of cable
Material of Enclosure LM-6
Shape of Enclosure Round
Degree of Protection IP-55
Addl. Degree of Protection --
Type of Cover Dome
No. of Outlets 3 nos. + one plug
Type: Epoxy based

PAINTING
Shade: 631 as per IS: 5
Required: Yes
SPARE
Duration: 2 Years
No. of Terminals: As required
Cable gland: 4 nos.
Stopping Plug: 1 no.
2
CABLE Incoming -- 3Cx2.5 mm (Cu) 1.1 KV XLPE ARMOURED FRLS PVC
2
SIZE Outgoing -- 3Cx2.5 mm (Cu) 1.1 KV XLPE ARMOURED FRLS PVC

0
JUNCTION BOX
CLIENT: M/s TFL, Talcher PROJECT: Coal Based Fertilizer Plant PLANT: Raw Water
Reservoir
GENERAL
Item No.
Ref. Std.
Type of Junction Box
Make
Maker’s type
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
Thickness of Enclosure
Enclosure Protection Class
Mounting Arrangement
Cover Fixing Arrangement
Gasketing Material
External Cable Sizes
Dimensions LX B X H / Dimensional Drg. Ref. No.
Weight
Painting
Type Test Certificate No.
CABLE GLAND
Type
Make
TERMINAL BLOCK
Nos. of Terminals
Material
Type
Current Rating
Fixing Arrangement
Make
approval before commencement of manufacturing in line with NIT/PO.

0
ANNEXURE - A
DOCUMENTATION FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS
Documents Required (Y / N)
Sl.
Document Description For For
No. With Bid Final
Approval Information
1. Specification Sheet and Technical N Y -- Y
Particulars completely filled-in
2. Dimensional Drawings N Y -- Y
3. Characteristic curves of Motor --
a) Thermal withstand curve N Y -- Y
b) Load Vs FL current N Y -- Y
c) Load Vs Efficiency N Y -- Y
d) Load Vs Power factor N Y -- Y
e) Load Vs Speed N Y -- Y
f) Voltage Vs Thermal Withstand N Y -- Y
time
g) Starting current Vs Time N Y -- Y
4. Terminal Box drawings for motor N Y -- Y
5. General arrangement and Foundation --
N Y Y
Drgs.
6. Cable Rack / Cable Trench Layout N Y -- Y
7. Earthing Layout N Y -- Y
8. Lighting Layout N Y -- Y
9. Cable schedule N Y - Y
10. Bill of Materials N Y -- Y
11. Illustrative and Descriptive N - Y Y
catalogues
12. Catalogues of bought out N N Y Y
accessories
13. Spare parts list Y N Y Y
14. Installation, Operation and N N Y Y
Maintenance manual
15. Test certificates
a) Routine N -- Y Y
b) Type N -- Y Y
16. Guarantee Certificates N --- Y Y
17. Construction & Commissioning N -- Y Y
specification and procedure for all
equipment.
Notes :
1. 4 hard copies & 1 soft copy shall be supplied with bid.
2. 4 hard copies & 1 soft copy shall be supplied for approval after order as per approved Drawing &
Document Schedule.
3. 8 hard copies & 2 soft copies in CD shall be submitted as final documents prior to despatch of the
equipment. These shall be made in sets and supplied in fine plastic coated folder.
Y - Yes, N - No
NIT FOR PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - VI 0
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE DOC. NO. REV.
Page 1 of 29
SERVICES AT TFL, TALCHER
PART-II: TECHNICAL
SECTION - 7
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY - INSTRUMENTATION
0 29.03.2019 29.03.2019 Issued for Review GAP RA SKT

P 19.03.2019 19.03.2019 Issued for Review HK RA SKT
NIT FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - VI
0
TALCHER
CONTENTS
CLAUSE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE

NO
1.00 Scope 3
2.00 Applicable Standards / Codes / Rules 5
3.00 Technical Conditions 5

4.00 Works Included 6
5.00 Deleted
6.00 Execution Methodology (Site ) 9
7.00 Painting 15
8.00 Calibration, Testing And Functional Checking 15
9.00 Loop Checking 17
10.00 Commissioning 18
11.00 Scope Of Supply For Erection Material, Structural Steel & Consumables 19
12.00 Tools And Tackles 20
13.00 Obligations Of Principal 20
14.00 Obligation And Responsibilities Of Contractor 21
15.00 Documentation 23
16.00 Material Reconciliation And Wastage Allowance 24

Annex-1 Vendor List

NIT FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - VI
0
TALCHER
1.0 SCOPE
Scope of work for instrumentation shall include the instruments as shown in the P& I diagram no: PC150-
1000-0020 but not limited to the following.
Design, engineering, procurement, fabrications, supply, inspection, testing, painting, transportation, storage
& handling at site, calibration, erection and commissioning of complete instrumentation including all erection
material as shown in the P& I diagram along with accessories as per the scope. Based on their experience,
bidder may indicate additional instrumentation, which is required for orderly functioning of the package.
Deviations/ proposed inclusions to the basic specifications shall be clearly listed out in the bid.
Bidder to note that all the instruments shall be connected to DM water Control system for Control &
shutdown, all the cables shall be laid and glanded up to the marshalling cabinets of DM plant, the location
and panel numbers shall be provided later during detail engineering.
Bidder shall be responsible for all local instruments, field instruments and installation within the battery limit.
[As per scope].
PDIL shall review all documents generated by bidder and shall approve some document to be mutually
agreed during discussion.
In brief, the bidder shall be responsible for supply, erection, testing and commissioning of complete
instrumentation with erection material and spares as per scope.
The Contractor’s scope for all the above facilities shall cover design, engineering, procurement,
installation, testing, calibration and commissioning etc. as detailed below:
a) All the instruments shall b connected to DM water control system , which will be provided at the
time of detail engineering , bidder scope is limited to Supply, erection ,installation of
instruments , JBs , lying of cable trays and cables from Field to marshalling cabinet, Glanding
,termination, ferruling on both sides ( Panel side & JB side, instrument side etc)

NIT FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC -
0
RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES AT TFL, 7
TALCHER
Instruments
Marshalli
ng
cabinet
JB
(DM Plant)
Bidder’s scope By Others
Field instruments, branch cable, JB, multi-core cable, Glanding, ferruling, termination etc shall
be in bidders scope, necessary cable shall be supplied accordingly.
b) Site supervision of construction, erection, testing and commissioning activities.
c) Erection and commissioning activities at site should be carried out strictly as per the Quality
Assurance Plan (QAP) approved by Owner/PMC. Bidder shall be responsible for obtaining the
approval of QAP prior to start of site activities.
d) All erection material required for installation and commissioning of the instruments within the
battery limit shall be included in the scope of bidder. Bidder shall arrange necessary tools and
tackles required.
e) During the plant start up all the instruments calibration, testing & loop checking shall be co
ordinate with DM water Package Vendor.
In case of contradiction/conflict among documents, Bidder shall refer to Owner for clarification. However,
most stringent specification shall be followed with Owner’s approval. Owner decision shall be
considered as final.
1.01 Unpacking, handling, physical checking, cleaning and drawal of instruments, instrument
accessories and erection materials from Principal's stores and/or from places of storage anywhere
within the boundary wall of project/plant premises and return of the leftover materials to Principal's stores
with suitable return notes.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
1..02 Transportation and Handling of instruments, instrument accessories and erection materials at
Principal's stores and/or at places of storage anywhere within the boundary wall of project/plant premises
and existing factory and transporting from there to work sites and/or contractor's stores.
1.03 Dust free and air conditioned storage of electronic instruments is essential at Contractor's Stores.
Air-conditioning need not be provided for fully mechanical type of instruments, accessories and erection
materials.
1.04 The scope of work also includes supply of erection materials like Cable tray, Junction box & cable
gland, Instrument valves, Pipe fittings ,Compression fittings, and other related hardware’s including
consumables as mentioned in this document
1.05 Vendor is expected to visit the site, ascertain the location, environment, rules/regulations/laws of the
plant/Municipal Corporation/State.
1.06 Contractor is also expected to utilize their expertise / experience in assessing the extent of
Engineering involved including likely variations in locations of Installations.
1.07 The prices quoted shall be inclusive of above factors.
2.00 APPLICABLE STANDARDS / CODES / RULES –
The instrumentation including erection, calibration and testing shall be carried out in accordance with national,
international and Indian Standards & Good Engineering Practices .The Standards referred herein and
mentioned below shall be of the latest edition valid on the date of issue of this DOCUMENT :-
♦ AS Indian standards
♦ API American Petroleum Institute RP -- Recommended Practices
♦ ISA Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society. Standards, Recommended Practices and
Technical Reports
♦ ASME / ANSI American Society of Mechanical Engineers
♦ PDIL standards and drawings attached with this DOCUMENT (1065-0207-0784-A01)
♦ Manufacturer’s Standards and Practices
♦ Factories and Labour Act and other statutory requirements, acts and rules of India
3.00 TECHNICAL CONDITIONS
3.01 The complete job shall be in accordance with good international practice following local Indian standards &
regulations and latest relevant drawings and documents of Principal and reference standards mentioned in
the attached sheet, to the full satisfaction of the Principal.
3.02 The scope of work may vary by + 25% of the total contract value and shall be done as per the rates quoted
by Contractor and accepted by Principal or the rates derived as per the terms and conditions of this
DOCUMENT.
3.03 Deleted

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
3.04 Deleted
3.05 Deleted
3.06 Deleted
3.07 The contractor shall quote the schedule of Supply/labour rates in accordance with Performa attached in
Schedule of Rates
3.08 For field checking and calibration of the instruments, the contractor shall arrange nitrogen gas cylinders if dust
and moisture free instrument air is not available.
3.09 The Contractor shall obtain in writing the clearance from Principal for any portion of work before its
execution. Any change in the drawing/documents arising out of locational requirements will be made available
by Principal’s Engineer and to be obtained in writing before the execution of a job.
3.10 The Contractor shall supply instrument air from his own compressor for pre-erection calibration. The
compressor should be able to produce 7 bar g dry air pressure, otherwise Nitrogen cylinders shall be
used as mentioned above. These Nitrogen cylinders shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.
3.11 Manpower will be arranged as per requirement of the job whenever needed. No substitution or the reduction
of the staff will be accepted without prior approval of the PMC/Owner. Engaging any Sub-contractor's shall be
with Principal's approval.
3.12 Any minor modification job during erection, calibration and loop checking of instruments will be done without
any extra cost to Owner. Major modification job, reading job if certified by Engineer- in-Charge will be done by
Contractor on per diem rate basis.
4.00 WORKS INCLUDED
4.01 Contractor scope shall also include, (but not limited to) the following jobs –
4.01.01 To make arrangements for services such as transport, medical, lighting, canteen etc. for working round the
clock for own staff. To arrange, store in tanks and supply drinking water to the contractor’s own staff .
4.01.02 To arrange at own cost , all tools, tackles , jigs , fixtures etc. including heavy lifting equipments like cranes etc.
4.01.03 To make arrangement and supply of consumable like welding electrodes, industrial gases, cleaning fluids (such
as CTC, Kerosene etc.), primer for structural, Teflon tape, insulation tapes, sealing compound;
4.01.04 Supply of erection materials such as MS structural; Inst supports ; clamping materials like aluminium strips,
screws, washers, clamps, GI nuts and bolts of different sizes, for cables, tubes, trays, racks, impulse tubes ;
cable lugs, all identification ferrules for cables/wires, etc. In addition to other erection materials as per
DOCUMENT attached.
4.01.05 For the instruments installed during the erection period, proper protection should be given to the
instruments. Contractor is responsible to replace damaged Insts/items till handing-over to Principal. Liability
for damages in non-protected instruments will be debited to contractor.
4.02 ERECTION OF FIELD MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS -

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
4.02.01 Installation of field mounted instruments such as pressure/vacuum gauges, dial thermometers, pressure
switches, blind switches, manometers, differential pressure indicators, local flow indicators/recorders, local
indicating controllers, different transmitters, level gauges, level switches, etc. whichever is applicable.
4.02.02 Installation of instruments on vendor's equipment.
4.02.03 Deleted
4.02.04 Installation of miscellaneous instruments with accessories such as flame safeguard instruments, changeover
switches, air sets, T/C assemblies, thermo-resistance assemblies, purge type level measuring systems,
electronic level instruments, solenoid valves and transducers, local panels etc.
4.02.05 Deleted
4.02.06 Installation of vessel mounted instrument such as ordinary level gauge, torque tube level instruments,
biocolour level gauge, mechanical and electronic type transmitters, level switches, dial
thermometers, pressure gauges, thermocouples (including skin type) etc. Contractor shall check & ensure the
centre to centre distance of level instrument and nozzle provided on equipment.
4.02.07 Deleted
4.02.07 installation of Canopies for erected instruments.
4.02.08 Installation of Instrument Panels

4.02.09 Arranging all necessary test and calibration equipment as per details provided in this specification.
4.02.10 Fabrication of pipe nipples, as necessary including threading as per installation standards.
4.02.11 Drilling of holes in blind flanges including cutting threads as required.
4.02.12 Cutting of gaskets of various materials to suitable sizes including making additional cut outs on panels ( if
required) at no extra cost.
4.02.13 Filling of seal pots with filling liquids as per the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.02.14 Back/seal welding of screwed fittings as required by standards or as per the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
This may involve welding of dissimilar materials using appropriate electrodes.
4.02.15 Civil works including the casting of foundation as required for instrument supports where paved surfaces do not
exist. (Including cementing works)
4.02.16 Minor civil works like chipping of pavement, grouting of instrument panels/supports/stanchions on the
pavement, laying of conduits below pavement after chipping and refinishing of pavement as necessary.
4.02.17 Degreasing of hand wheels of control valves, stud bolts, nuts of side and bottom flange of control valves, skid
bolts and flanges of orifice plates/or other primary elements and degreasing of any other instrument as per
manufacturers instructions or as required by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.02.18 Degreasing of impulse lines, valves, instruments and other instrument items in Oxygen and Chlorine service as
per manufacturer’s instructions or as required by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.02.19 Rotation of top works of Displacer type level instruments wherever required.
4.02.20 Rotation of control valve bonnet wherever required.
4.02.21 Reversing the action of control valves either by replacement of actuator springs, accessories or Electro-
Pneumatic (Pneumatic) positioner wherever required as per manufacturer’s instructions.
NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
4.02.22 Minor modification/repairs (restricted to insts listed in SOR/specs ) required to be carried out on the instruments
namely, replacement of dial, glass for pressure gauges / temperature gauges or any other similar instrument,
replacement of rotameter tubes and level gauge glass; replacement of damaged signal tubes on control valves;
tapping of damaged threads on couplings, tees and other fittings; cleaning of nozzles and relays in pneumatic
instruments.
4.02.23 The Structural work includes, Fabrication, Erection of supports with structurals (M.S) like flats, plates,
angles, channels etc. for trays, pipes, junction boxes, instruments, ducts, mounting stand, JB etc..
4.02.24 Painting of all structural supports for trays, pipes, junction boxes, instruments, ducts, mounting stand, JB etc..
as per painting specification or as instructed by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.02.25 Identification of instruments / impulse lines/manifold connected with alarm/trip circuit with approved colour of
paint.
4.02.26 Punching of tag numbers on items or tag plates wherever required as per instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.02.27 Fabrication and installation of pipe stanchion as per Instrument support standards including casting of concrete
pedestal, grouting, welding etc. as necessary.
4.02.28 Drilling holes for providing glands/grommets on panels, shut down cabinets, power supply cabinets, local
control panels, pneumatic enclosures, junction boxes etc. wherever required for cables entry.
4.02.29 Installation cable tray, cable, junction box, air distribution pot, multicable transit inlet system etc.
4.02.30 Grounding of shields of shielded cables to respective instrument earth bus provided in the control room/local
panel/thermocouple head etc. as required and instructed by Engineer-in-Charge, if required.
4.02.31 Laying and termination of Earthing Cable at both ends between instrument earth bus provided in
control/room/local panel / Instrument to instrument earth pits provided by other contractors unless specified
otherwise, if required.
4.02.30 Grounding of one of the thermocouple lead in the head using 10 K Ohm resistance including of supply of
resistance for grounded thermocouples , if required.
4.02.31 Supply of all types of consumables required for the execution of the job without any exception.
4.02.32 Sealing of safety valves with standard lead seals after final setting in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.02.33 Whenever stand pipe is to be installed for level installation the following requirements are mandatory –
stand pipe isolation valves shall be provided ,
stand pipe bottom drain and top vent shall be provided,
stand pipe bottom connections shall be taken from side , not from the bottom of Vessel.
The contractor shall check the above requirements are met.
4.02.34 Terminal Connection Diagram wrapped in cover shall be provided inside J.B.
4.02.35 Coordination during installation, pre-commissioning and commissioning with mechanical and other sub-
contractors for proper installation of in-line mounted instruments like control valve, orifice assemblies, turbine
meters, PD (positive displacement) meters, magnetic flowmeters, mass flowmeters etc. which involve removal
of instruments, disconnection of tubes/cables; reconnection of same for alignment and proper installation.
4.02.36 Coordination during pre-commissioning/commissioning with mechanical and other contractor for proper
installation of vessel/equipment mounted instruments like level transmitters, level gauges, level switches etc.
which involves removal of instruments, disconnection of tubes/cables, reconnection of the same for alignment
and proper installation etc.
4.02.37 Coordination during pre-commissioning/commissioning with System Vendors for DCS , PLC/ESD etc. for proper
functioning of the Control & Instrumentations.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
4.02.38 Submission of final material appropriation statements for all the materials issued by the Principal.
4.03 Additional Work:
Where requested by Principal /Engineer-in-Charge or his Authorized representatives, all or any of the works not
detailed shall also be executed
5.00 Deleted
6.00 EXECUTION METHODOLOGY (SITE)
6.01 IMPULSE TUBING / PIPING
6.01.01 Fabricating, laying and supporting of impulse tubing/piping and sample lines for the analysers etc.
Laying of level gauge drain pipes (if required).
6.01.02 All impulse lines of the instruments shall be subjected to hydraulic test with pressure modality required
for the test line. Every impulse line is to be tested before preparation of inspection report. In case of
repairs of any line the tests will be repeated again.
6.01.03 Deleted
6.01.04 All impulse lines shall be installed in the best workman like manner and shall follow installation standards in
each case. Where there is no installation standard, the instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be followed.
6.01.05 Horizontal and vertical lines shall be installed using levels and plumb bobs.
6.01.06 Unless otherwise specified in the drawings, impulse lines shall have a slope of not less than 1 in 12 on the
horizontal runs.
6.01.07 All welding shall be carried out as per welding procedures and codes approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Welding Electrodes shall be as per approved vendors only. Only qualified welders approved by Engineer-in-
Charge shall carry out welding.
6.01.08 Deleted
6.01.09 However, any materials like electrode, equipments, testing charges for various tests etc. required for initial
qualification of the welder/welders shall be borne by the contractor.
6.01.10 Wherever welding of dissimilar materials are envisaged for any process hookup, the contractor’s scope
includes these welding alongwith supply of weld materials.
6.01.11 Impulse pipes/tubes shall be bent using pipe/tube benders only ; hot bending will be prohibited. Pipes/tubes
shall be cut using pipe cutting device. Hot cutting will not be allowed.
6.01.12 Piping/tubing for steam tracing shall be installed according to the standards without any pocket so as to avoid
formation of the condensate pockets.
6.01.13 All threaded joints shall be jointed with PTFE tape only. No other pipe jointing compound shall be used except
on high temperature service where graphited sealing compounds shall be used.
6.01.14 All impulse lines shall be properly supported at regular intervals of 1 metre. Wherever insert plates are not
available, supports on concrete structures or on ceilings shall be fixed with a minimum of 10 mm expansion
bolts.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
6.01.15 Angle supports shall be fabricated from 50 mm x 50 mm x 6 mm MS angles, as a minimum. Channels shall be
ISMC 100.
6.01.16 Measurement of impulse tube / pipe work for billing purpose will be done from joint to joint basis
starting after the first/2nd isolation valve (Installed by mechanical contractor) to the instrument
including the vents and drain piping. Charges for fixing of fittings and valves, syphons, condensate
pots etc. will not be paid separately but they will be included in the impulse piping / tubing
work. The same shall include hydrostatic test/pmi as per specifications.
6.01.17 Impulse tubing / piping erection rate will be on meter basis inclusive of all fittings, valves, syphons and
condensate pots etc. used for erection and for testing.
6.02 AIR HEADER PIPING, SS TUBING AND ADP
6.02.01 Air supply from the main air header take off valve to individual instruments/AD pots shall be through SS pipes
and tubes as per drawings.
6.02.02 Individual take off valves shall generally be located on top of the main air header. Hook-up points to be
considered as per the Layout Drawings.
6.02.03 Supporting of instrument air headers piping from header to air distribution pot -The pipe shall be supported at
a minimum interval of 1.5 meters with MS angles.
6.02.04 There shall be one isolation valve at each instrument end. Final connection to the instrument shall be SS tubing
as per tubing hookup/ secondary dwgs.
6.02.05 Identification tag plates shall be provided on either side of tubing as per AD pot drawing.
6.02.06 Laying and supporting of single run tubing on racks/trays inclusive of connecting of tubes with connectors.
Tube laying rate shall include connection by connectors.
6.02.07 The practice of flattening tubes for clamping purposes shall not be permitted.
6.02.08 Instrument air tubing connections are mainly by connectors. The Contractor shall quote the same in the
Schedule of rates.
6.02.09 Cleaning and blowing of air distribution lines, pneumatic tubing, impulse tubing, piping and sample lines for
analysers etc. ( jobs on main air header are not included in scope of work of instrument contractor).
6.02.10 Testing of air distribution lines, pneumatic tubing , impulse tubing / piping and sample lines for any leakage and
proper connection (only air shall be used for testing air/pneumatic lines) shall be done.
6.02.11 Mounting of air distribution pot ( the mounting U clamp, nut, bolt and washers in Contractor's scope).
6.02.12 Laying of distribution air header, supporting, fixing, cleaning and painting of distribution air header lines and
its testing (the rate shall be inclusive of fittings, flanges, valves, etc. on the air header).
6.02.12 Deleted
6.02.13 SS tubing supply line leakage shall be tested Pneumatically at 10 bar.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
6.02.14 SS tubing signal line leakage shall be tested with bubbler.
6.03 CABLE LAYING WORK
6.03.01 Laying and supporting of multicore and single core power cables, multpair / triad and single pair signal /
extension cables, optical fibre cables and any other special cables on racks/trays.
6.03.02 All cable routes shall be carefully measured and cables cut to the required lengths, leaving sufficient amount for
the final connection of the cable to the terminals on either end. The various cable lengths cut from the cable
reels shall be carefully selected to prevent undue wastage of cables.
6.03.03 Before laying, cable/multicable on drums shall be meggered and tested to ascertain the transit
damages
6.03.04 Contractor to consider provision of tray in general for branch cable above ground line. Due to site requirement if
cables are crossing road , laying underground etc. , proper protection to be provided .
6.03.05 A detailed planning shall be submitted prior to cable laying, giving drum number, cable number, lengths which
shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
6.03.06 Cables shall have complete uncut lengths from one termination to the other.
6.03.07 All cables shall be indicated close to their termination point by cable number as per cable schedules/junction
boxes schedules. PVC ferrule/tag plate shall be used and these identification tags shall be securely fastened to
the cables.
6.03.08 All cores of electrical cables shall be identified by their wire numbers by means of the PVC ferrules. Wire
numbers shall be as per dwgs. All temporary ends of cables shall be protected against dirt and moisture. For
this purpose, ends of all PVC insulation cables shall be taped with an approved PVC or rubber insulating tape.
6.03.09 The bending radius of cables shall be maintained as per manufacturer’s recommendation. Cables
installed above ground shall be run exposed on walls, ceilings, structures and shall run parallel or at
right angles with beams, walls or columns
6.03.10 Glanding and termination of all field/MCC cables including its ferruling and fixing of lugs, thimbles
etc. of proper sizes in Marshalling/Auxiliary Cabinets located in main control rooms, in local
control panels and panels in various substation / MCC rooms.
6.03.11 The testing of the field cables and cables coming from MCC and checking of the voltage for
healthiness of the signals. However, this job will be carried out by Instrument Contractor in
control room.
6.03.12 Intrinsically and non-intrinsically safe circuits to be separated in wiring.
6.03.13 Testing of power cable, extension / compensating cable, signal cables and any special cables
for proper connections, continuity and insulation shall be done.
6.03.14 Sealing of cable and tube entries to control panel/control rooms to be done.
6.03.15 Any minor modification job during installation of instruments at no extra cost to Principal. Major
modification jobs, major redoing of jobs ( if certified by engineer-in-charge as major ) will be done by
Contractor on existing or per diem rate basis.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
6.03.16 Power supply cable to individual instruments, instrument local panel and other location in the field
shall be done by the Contractor , if required.
6.03.17 Identification and proper ferruling of individual cores during field cable termination.
6.03.18 Dressing, Clamping and termination of control/instrument cables to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-charge. Cables shall be rigidly supported on structural steel and masonry individually or in
groups as required using PVC covered galvanised clips, multiple cable supports or cable trays
material to be used for tying of cables with trays must be corrosive resistant. If drilling of steel must be
resorted to approval must be obtained and steel must be drilled where the minimum of weakening of
the structured wall result. Cables shall be supported at every 500 mm on vertical runs and every 100
mm on horizontal .Cable tag list shall be put at every 50 meter.
6.03.19 All special cables and power supply cables will be laid direct to the field instrument without any
junction boxes, unless otherwise specified
6.03.20 Charges for laying cables shall be inclusive of glanding, terminations and identification ferrules etc.
at both ends and megger testing of field cables and clamping also.
6.03.21 Co-ordination and interconnection of all cables coming from MCC/field to control room, megger
testing of field cables and induced voltage checking especially for cables coming from Electrical
Terminal Board.
6.03.22 Final Covering of false floor after removing as per original floor plan.
6.03.23 Any modification required prior to commissioning.
6.03.24 Final termination drawing with all modification is to be done by the Contractor and handed over to
Owner
6.03.25 Burying /Ducting:

Where laying above ground is not possible /advisable , cables may have to be laid below ground either in
concrete trenches or buried.
Making Concrete trenches are outside This contractor’s scope.
Ducting shall be applicable only while laying in Hazardous area if specifically asked .
Sufficient separation also shall be maintained among low signal cables , control cables and H.T. Electrical
Cables . For this purpose Vendor shall develop necessary cable layout drawings approved by Principal.This is
essential in view of possibilities of presence of existing pipes /cables.
Each underground cable (either in concrete trenches or buried) shall be provided with identifying SS tag plate
securely fastened every 30 m of its underground length with at least one tag at each end before the cable
enters the ground.
Directly buried cables shall be laid underground wherever required.
On completion of every group of cable laying, every cable shall be subjected to insulation test in the presence
of Engineer-in-Charge. Defective cables shall be replaced.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
Cable route markers of SS 100mm dia,2mm thk indicating number of cables, depth and direction will be placed
enroute,at appr 30 meter intervals ,on crossovers/ turnings etc, to mark the cable route; without Obstructing
passage.
Cable Markers / Flag Plate, at both ends to be provided by contractor. Plates of 304 SS 100x100x2 mm bolted
to 50x50x6 Ms painted angle using SS bolts,Nuts. Plates shall have details such as depth of burial & type of
cables punched /engraved.
Engineer-in charge to be consulted as to locations .
At each road crossings and other places, where cables enter pipe sleeves, adequate bed of sand shall be given
so that the cables do not slack and get damaged by pipe ends after back filling. After laying, the pipe sleeves
shall be sealed using sealing compounds.
At the entry into concrete blocks at road crossings cable loops shall be provided at either ends to prevent any
damage to cables. Each cable shall have one tag at each end before the cable enters/leaves conduit pipes.
6.04 MULTI-CABLE TRANSIT (MCT)
6.04.01 MCT supply and its installation in not in Bidders scope, After laying of all the cables, the cable entry to control
room shall be suitably filled with MCT Blocks with Frames and sealed so as to achieve a positive seal against
the entry of gas, water. On completion of cable laying in case of concrete trenches, the trenches shall be
filled with sand and pre cast concrete slabs shall be placed on the trench.
6.04.02 Bidders scope includes installation/laying of cables through MCT, as per instruction from Engineer
incharge , MCT supply will be done by others.
6.04.03 Vendor shall take care of all type of cables entering into Control Room. The installation shall be complete with
Frames , insert blocks of each cable type, of each cable outer diameter (O.D.) and all other necessary
hardwares like myler tape etc. necessary to fit the supplied MCT blocks in frames.
6.04.04 The power cables for instruments 115 V A.C shall be suitably separated from other cables within the MCT
frame.
6.04.05 In general , MCT frame considered for instruments shall not be used for electrical cables. Separate MCTs shall
be used for electrical cables coming and from/going to MCC.
6.04.06 The earthing cables for instrument Panels shall be suitably separated from other cables within the MCT frame.
6.05 ALUMINIUM PERFORATED CABLE TRAY
6.05.01 Perforated trays/angle trays shall be used for cable run. Laying, supporting, alignment of cable trays to
be done by contractor.
6.05.02 Fabrication of frames, supports, mounting stands, clamps, brackets, cable racks, cable trays and
corners, Tees and crossings etc. for the racks and trays.
6.05.03 Laying, supporting of tray cover
6.05.04 Laying alignment & supporting alignment of cable racks and trays. The Contractor shall quote the
unit rate per meter length of cable tray.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
6.05.05 Generally supports for cable trays are provided by other agency However, in critical areas, where
additional supports are required to be provided in the opinion of the site-in-charge ,the same shall
be provided by contractor free of charge. It should be covered in quoted price.
6.05.06 The perforated trays/angle trays shall be properly supported at a regular interval of maximum of 500
mm centres,
6.05.07 Trays themselves may be supported by structures used for above ground cables/trays from insert plates or
steel structures. Wherever insert plates are not available supports on concrete structures and ceilings shall be
fixed with minimum 10 mm diameter expansion bolts. Angle supports for perforated trays/angle trays shall be
fabricated from 50 mm x 50 mm x 6 mm MS angles as a minimum.
6.05.08 All supports shall be cut with hacksaw only. Any work executed by gas cutting for making holes or cutting
pieces will be totally rejected. Free ends of angle support shall not have sharp edges and shall be properly
rounded off.
6.05.09 Width of trays shall be selected according to number of tubes and cables. Trays shall be laid generally as per
site conditions with the approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.05.10 Weldings of structures shall be full welding on all sides so as to avoid entry of moisture through gaps.
6.05.10 For welding, if required, following procedure shall be followed as a minimum:
After welding, clean the welded portion for any slug and sharp edge.
Welded portion and supports shall be painted as per painting specification.
6.06 INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOX
6.06.01 Fixing in position flameproof junction boxes, electrical junction boxes, distribution boxes and relay
boxes in the field and behind control panels, conduit pipes, fittings and flameproof boxes are to be
ensured. Drilling/tapping of junction boxes, selector switch casings, fixing of terminals in the JB
shall also be a part of job of installation of junction boxes/panel as the case may be.
6.06.02 Cables shall enter into the J.B. through double compression type Ex-proof cable glands or non-
exproof cable Gland as specified.
6.06.03 Proper care to be taken to be taken for sealing of Cable entries after proper insertion , installation &
terminations of cables. Special care in this regards to be taken for the installations in Hazardous Area.
6.06.04 The unused spare entries of the J.B. are to be plugged properly as per the practice and norms of J.B.
installation.
6.06.05 Any civil jobs involved are to be attended in the installation of supports mounting stands,
control panels, junction boxes and relay boxes.
6.07 Deleted
6.07.07 Minor civil jobs involved in this regard are to be attended in the installation of panel.
NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
6.07.08 Grounding
Each cabinet, console and other equipment supplied as a part of system shall have earthing lugs which shall be
secured to the ‘AC mains earthing grid’.
All circuit grounds, shields and drain wires shall be connected to the ‘system ground’ bus which is isolated from
‘AC mains earth’.
Contractor scope includes making system earthpit(s) and inter connecting as needed, as per system vendor
recommendations. The total resistance of system ground shall be less than 1 ohms unless otherwise
recommended by system manufacturer.
Earthing cables shall be stranded Tinned Cu conductors min 10 sq.mm, Green outer sheath.
Safety barriers, if used, shall be secured to ‘Safety ground’ which shall have typically ground
resistance of less than 1 ohm. The bus shall be designed considering a fault level of 0.5 A at 250 V
r.m.s. per barrier
7.00 PAINTING
7.01 This part of the specification is applicable to cable ducts. MS cable ways, angle trays, instrument
supports/perforated trays, all structural supports for the above items etc.
7.02 The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush, sand paper to remove all scales.
After cleaning, the surface is painted as per specifications for painting enclosed.
7.03 Paints shall be epoxy based and corrosive resistant.
7.04 It shall be noted that final second coating on external surfaces not covered by cables, copper tubes etc.
shall be applied just before handing over the plant or commissioning of the plant whichever is earlier.
7.05 The name of manufacturer, colour and quality of all types of primer paint shall be as per standards
enclosed elsewhere in DOCUMENT (1065-PNMP-TS-0904) and subjected to approval of Engineer-in-
Charge.
7.06 Transportation of structural steel for sand blasting to sand blaster's shop and bringing
it back to erection site is responsibility of Contractor.
8.00 CALIBRATION, TESTING AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKING
8.01 Contractor shall have a dust free and air conditioned room for the calibration of all electronic
Instruments. Before start of the calibration, Contractor shall get approval for testing
facilities, and accuracy of test instruments etc. from the Engineer-In-Charge of Principal.
8.02 Calibration, testing and functional checking of all instruments and its accessories to the entire
satisfaction of Principal.
8.03 Contractor shall remove the instruments supplied in mounting condition on machinery, equipments,
local panel etc. for calibration and install it back after calibration. No separate charge shall be paid for
removal of Instruments.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
8.04 Contractor shall make arrangement for transportation of the safety valves and control valves from
Principal's store, mechanical Contractor's store/Yard and return it back to Owner/Mechanical Contractor's
store after calibration.
8.05 A suitable sticker shall be fixed on the instruments after calibration, that will indicate the date of calibration,
instrument range, Sr.No. etc.
8.06 Calibration test proforma duly filled and witnessed by Principal's representative shall be provided by the
Contractor to Engineer-in-Charge of Principal.
8.07 All impulse lines shall be tested hydrostatically at 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure. Ensure that
instrument and vessel/piping is isolated during this test.
8.09 In case of special instruments/items where hydrotesting is not permitted due to service conditions, the impulse
lines testing shall be carried out by using air or Nitrogen.
8.10 All external case type level instruments shall be tested upto 1.5 times operating pressure by using Nitrogen
only.
8.11 After pressure testing, all these impulse lines shall be drained and dried with dry air to remove any traces of
moisture, oil and dust.
8.12 All instrument cables shall be tested for continuity and insulation. While meggering the cables for insulation
testing, ensure that all instruments and barriers are isolated at both ends.
8.13 Calibration & test equipments shall be traceable to Indian standard with valid certification. Accuracy of standard
inst. shall be at least two times better than inst. under test.
8.14 All instruments shall be calibrated for 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% and vice versa.
8.15 All transmitters shall be calibrated as per instrument ranges.
8.16 Safety valves and relief valves shall be set/tested by using dry air/nitrogen. For high set pressure hydraulic test
bench shall be used. Leakage if any shall be removed by proper lapping of seat and disc.
8.18 All pressure and differential pressure transmitters shall be calibrated to the settings as per instrument
data/specification sheets and instruction of Engineer-in-Charge.
8.19 Receiver instruments programmed shall be calibrated and aligned using test hook-up as per instructions from
manufacturer/Engineer-in-Charge.
8.20 Tank level indicators shall be calibrated at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% and vice versa of ranges wherever
practicable.
8.41.01 All the system functions shall be checked thoroughly for proper functioning, whenever required and specifically
asked for. These shall include but not limited to the following tests :-
Visual and Mechanical
Complete system configuration loading
Demonstration of all system functions
Checking of all systems displays
Checking of correct functioning of all keyboards
Demonstration of all system diagnostics
Checking of proper functioning of all printers, hardcopy unit and printing of all reports.
Checking of all disc drives

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
Complete checking of logic system, loading of under’s program and checkout of results.
Checking of correct change-over of the back-up / redundant units in case of failure of main units.
8.41.02 The input signals shall be simulated by disconnecting the field wires for all inputs. Wherever control room
mounted Transmitters/Converters/ Receiver switches are used the functioning of same shall also be checked.
8.41.03 All test results shall be recorded in the approved format.
8.41.04 Conversion from one unit to another for the purposes of calibration is not allowed.
9.00 LOOP CHECKING
9.01 Testing of complete loops (open, close) from field instrument end to control room and back to control
valve.
9.02 Open/Close loop shall be checked by giving actual input to the instrument end and check the
readings in display instrument in control room and back to control valve. Contractor shall re-
calibrate the loop instrument, if found any error in reading during loop checking. No separate charge
for re-calibration of instrument shall be paid.
9.03 The accuracy of overall loop shall be within + 1% .

9.04 After performing the calibration of all instruments, the entire loop shall be checked for proper operation.
9.05 Simulation checking of alarms and safety interlocks by simulating all input parameters, creating a
fault and checking the output status. The entire shutdown scheme shall be simulated from the
process trip switches and the scheme shall be tested for its proper operation prior to start up of the
unit.
9.06 Loop checking Performa duly filled and witnessed by Principal's representative shall be submitted
to Engineer-in-Charge.
9.07 Loop checking shall be performed after calibration, interconnection and leak testing of signal lines is carried out
for all instruments. Loop tests are conducted to check the functional performance of all elements comprising the
loop, thereby ensuring proper interconnections and operations.
9.08 Before proceeding for loop checking, the calibration results of individual elements shall be recorded on the
Performa and shall be approved by Engineer-in-Charge for correctness of installation, measurements and
calibration results.
9.09 Loop testing for all control loops shall be generally by simulating process conditions for at least 0%, 25%, 50%,
75% and 100% of full scale inputs. Detailed procedure shall be submitted to Engineer-in-Charge for approval
before proceeding with the loop checking.
9.10 Deleted..
9.11 Performance of individual loops shall be accepted for an overall accuracy of + 1.5%. Where deviation is found
to exist more than specified limit, contractor shall recalibrate the instruments which shall also form part of loop
testing, at no extra cost.
9.12 After the loop test is complete, the contractor shall connect back any terminations and connections removed for
loop checking.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
9.13 A loop shall be considered as handed over only after measurements in that particular loop are completed and
certified by Engineer-in-Charge, in addition to loop sheets being duly filled in all respects, approved and
accepted by Engineer-in-Charge .
9.14 In case of loops in which certain instruments of the loops are calibrated by other agency, loop checking shall be
performed in coordination with the agency involved. If a defect in the calibration of the instruments in
contractors scope is observed, same shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. However, if
defect is detected in the calibration of the instruments in the scope of other agency, same shall be rectified by
the agency involved. After the calibration has been rechecked by other agency/agencies, the loop checking
would be performed to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. This is part of the contractor scope of work.
9.15 Final certified loop sheets shall be submitted in required copies to the Engineer-in-Charge.
9.16 Whenever the installation of central control system like Distributed Control System/Programmable logic
controllers etc. in control room is carried out by any other agency, contractor scope of work for the loops
connected to these system shall include the following :-
9.16.01 Laying of all related cables upto the designated panel/cabinets/console, dressing , glanding & terminations of
cables as per Terminal Connection Diagram, identification of cables and cores/pairs of each cable,
coordination with control system vendor during glanding and termination.
9.16.02 Calibration of all field instrument independently.
9.16.03 Providing all assistance to control system vendor during loop checking. This shall include providing signals from
the field instruments and checking all operations with the output provided from control system to enable control
system vendor to verify loop performance.
9.16.04 Coordination with control system vendor to meet loop checking schedule. It shall be contractor’s responsibility
to demonstrate/ prove measuring signal levels of field instrument output in control room in the respective
identified pair in case of any problem.
9.16.05 Rectification/recalibration of field instruments if found defective during loop checking.
9.16.06 However, checking of interconnection between instrument/equipments inside control room, ferruling/tagging of
interconnecting cables inside control room and performing loop checking with cooordination of contractor shall
be in the scope of control system vendor.
9.16.07 It shall be contractor’s responsibility to complete all entries in the ‘Loop Sheet’ related to field instrumentation
including calibration, installation checks, interconnection of tubing and cabling, hydrotest etc. and get it duly
signed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All loop sheets duly filled and signed shall be handed over to control system
vendor for overall loop checking records.
9.16.08 In some of the cases the Control Panel / System checking to be carried out by the contractor. In those cases all
the above activities as mentioned for the System Vendors to be carried out by the Contractor.
9.16.09 It shall be vendor’s responsibility to complete the loop check column in loop sheet after Engineer-in-Charge
accept the loops and hand over the sheets in required copies to Principal. All field related assistance shall be
provided by contractor during all these activities.
10.00 COMMISSIONING
10.01 This activity shall be carried out in a systematic manner so as to avoid any accident to plant and operating
personnel.
10.02 During the plant start up all the instruments calibration, controller alignment, trip point settings shall be
trimmed so as to meet the operation requirements.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
10.03 Prior to guarantee run of any package unit, the vital instruments as required by vendor have to be
recalibrated and the results recorded.
11.00 SCOPE OF SUPPLY FOR ERECTION MATERIAL, STRUCTURAL STEEL & CONSUMABLES
The procurement and supply in sequence and at the appropriate time of all materials as per SOR &
Engineering Drawings, consumables except for the materials specifically enlisted under Principal’s
scope of supply shall be entirely the contractor’s responsibility and his rates for execution shall be
inclusive for all these items.
11.01 SUPPLY OF INSTRUMENT ERECTION MATERIAL
Procurement and supply including proper storage and handling till the erection of following Instrument erection
material shall be included in the scope of erection contractor.
All Instrument Erection materials to be supplied by the Contractor shall be as per Scope of Work &
Technical Conditions and conform to the Specifications mentioned in the DOCUMENT.
11.02 SUPPLY OF STRUCTURAL STEEL

a) Supply of structurals (M.S) like flats, plates, angles, channels etc. will be in the scope of supply of
the Contractor. For structurals the contractor shall quote for supply in Schedule of Rates.
b) Structural will mean angles, channels, flats, plates and structural, pipes of all sizes used for making
and supporting tray/racks, mounting and supporting of instruments and its accessories. Structurals will be
measured and paid on metric ton basis. MS angles shall be used to support single pair cables and
instrument tubing.
11.03 SUPPLY OF CONSUMABLES MATERIALS

These are as but not limited to the following :-
11.03.01 Materials to be supplied by the contractor at his own cost, as part of this specification - Construction power,
water shall be given at a single point only and shall be provided by Principal on chargeable basis. Further
distribution shall be arranged by construction contractor.
11.03.02 All industrial gases like Oxygen, acetylene or inert gases, compressed air and all types of electrodes, brazing
rods, flux etc. for welding purpose with necessary facilities for testing the welded joints.
11.03.03 PTFE tape and other pipe jointing compounds for threads and material for sealing of cable entries to control
room, local panels, insulation tapes, sealing compounds for flame proof conduit fittings.
11.03.04 Bolts and nuts for supports, U-bolts with nuts, clamps for tubes and pipes, anchor bolts for panels, expansion
bolts (pinch anchor/ rawl bolts) of various sizes for fixing to concrete structures. Materials for Protection of
instruments against rain.
11.03.05 Paints, primers and solvents.
11.03.06 Tags for identifications of tubes/wires at panel junction boxes.
11.03.07 All materials for minor civil works like grouting etc.
11.03.08 Pipe etc. required for fabrication or instruments supports and tray supports wherever required.
11.03.09 All accessories for electrical wiring like cable lugs, ferrules for identification etc.
NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
11.03.10 Stanchions for Instrument mounting
11.03.11 Mounting accessories for the above like bolts, supports etc.
11.03.12 Spool pieces and blinds for testing wherever required.
11.03.13 Any other item not specified, but required for the completion of the job.
11.03.14 The contractor shall submit in sealed packets samples of all consumables like bolts, nuts, lubricants, ferrules
lugs and any other materials included in their scope of supply for approval of Engineer-in-Charge which then
forms the standards for erection work.
12.00 TOOLS AND TACKLES
12.01 Tools, tackles and calibrating instruments have to be arranged by the Contractor
The contractor shall furnish complete information regarding tools, tackles and testing equipment that will
be deployed for the job. All test equipments and kits shall be approved by competent Indian authorities
and shall have valid calibration report:-
Accuracies of Test equipment shall be at least Two times better than Inst under Test
13.00 OBLIGATIONS OF OWNER
13.01 To allot a plot of land near working SITE to enable the Contractor to build his office, store,
fabrication shop, urinal and latrine etc. at his own cost.
13.02 To provide construction power at site as per the provisions of Site Working and Safety Conditions
13.03 To provide construction water at site as per the provisions of Site Working and Safety Conditions
13.04 To issue hot and cold work permits to Contractor if and when required.
13.05 To facilitate issuance of gate passes and night/special passes to workmen of Contractor, for their
entry to work site through security gate.
13.06 To facilitate issuance of gate passes to Contractor for entry of his materials and equipment including
tools and tackles etc. for entry to work site through security gate.
13.07 To function as a medium of co-ordination between various Contractors for facilitating smooth progress
of work.
13.08 To provide all clarifications and technical matter for expediting the job.
13.09 To lay down the system for issue of materials from Principals Stores/ Storage Yard.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
13.10 To provide information regarding availability of fronts and materials to be issued by Principal so as
to enable the Contractor to plan and organise the execution of work under his scope as per the
overall project schedule.
13.11 To provide necessary drawings and documents to Contractor for execution of the work.
14.00 OBLIGATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR
14.01 Completeness of job -

Contractor shall ensure that system is complete in all respect, the models and prices quoted include all
components, accessories, services, documentation and other cost required to meet these specification, so
that the system can be commissioned and put in line without any further additional accessory/ service(s).
If after placement of order, it is found necessary that vendor has to change the model number, add
accessories/components or additional services are required to meet the requirements, Contractor shall do so
at their cost, even if model nos. might have been approved.
Contractor alone is fully responsible for correctness of the models offered.
Contractor shall include any work, not specifically listed, but necessary for the successful completion of
instrumentation work defined in this specification. If after getting the order it is found that Contractor has
missed to take into account cost of any item(s) necessary to complete the work ,he shall complete the work as
per specifications without any cost implication to Principal .
14.02 The Contractor's obligations and responsibilities shall include but not limited to the following:
14.02.01 To prepare detailed planning and execution schedule considering the availability of fronts and
materials. This shall be reviewed by Principal and Contractor shall be required to keep updating the same
(as per the instructions of Principal ) to take care of any changes in the availability of fronts and materials
and to complete all jobs as per the overall project schedule. Principal shall in no way be held responsible for
such changes because such changes are deemed quite a common feature in any project of this size.
14.02.02 To dispatch all materials well within the schedule & to receive at Site. After receipt, Contractor must
store all the items properly till their use or handing over (of balance items) to Principal after
completion of work.
14.02.03 To check for quantity compliance between bill of materials and drawings for cable, structurals,
earthing materials etc. and intimate Principal sufficiently in advance regarding discrepancies, if any.
14.02.04 To arrange and supply all tools and tackles, which are required for the execution of jobs as
per the best engineering practices and within the targeted schedule.
14.02.05 To arrange and supply storage tanks for drinking water so as to avoid any inconvenience which
may be caused due to interruption in water supply at times.
14.02.06 To provide proper storage and security arrangements for Contractor's tools, tackles,
equipments, materials etc. as well as equipment and materials issued by Principal to Contractor.
NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
Principal shall not be responsible for any loss or damage to items in the custody of Contractor at site
for any reason whatsoever.
14.02.07 Completion of all repairs arising out of defective work done by Contractor. Principal may at his discretion
require the Contractor to rectify certain defects in materials caused due to bad workmanship of supplier
and/or during transportation. For such work of course, the payment modalities shall be settled by mutual
agreement before starting such rectification jobs.
14.02.08 To maintain all the records for men, materials and execution of job as required by law as well as
Principal.
14.02.09 In addition to safety regulations indicated elsewhere in the tender document, Principal may issue
certain safety directives which shall have to be followed meticulously without any reservation.
14.02.10 To undertake and execute work and supply as per scope of work, scope of supply, to follow
Technical Conditions including Instrument erection specification for Instrument testing
and commissioning and as per schedule of . To honour all other obligations listed in other
sections and sub-sections of this DOCUMENT.
14.02.11 Reconciliation of materials issued to Contractor as directed by Principal.
14.02.12 Handing over of the completed works to Principal as per procedure laid down by Principal.
14.02.13 To submit documentation forming part of request for issue of completion certificate as per the
instructions of Principal.
14.03 Protection
14.03.01 Contractor shall protect all Instruments supplied by them or free-issued to them from damages which may
occur due to bad site conditions.
14.03.02 Contractors responsibility shall be upto the hand-over of complete instrumentation within their scope of supply
and works as per the documents / specs given.
14.03.03 Contractor alone shall be fully responsible for protection of the Instruments.
14.03.04 Contractor shall supply necessary commissioning spares for all Instruments supplied by them, without any
additional cost implication.
14.03.05 In case of damage, contractor shall replace the Instruments / components damaged upto the period of
handing – over, without any further cost implications . These shall be limited to the Instruments supplied by
them.
14.04 Progress monitoring

14.04.01 If any time in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge, the contractor has fallen behind the construction schedule,
the Engineer-in-Charge may, without any extra cost to PRINCIPAL require the contractor to take such steps
as may be necessary to improve his progress (such as but not limited to) (i) employ additional man-power,
resources (ii) work additional hours, (iii) increase the number of shifts, (iv) work on Sundays and Holidays.
14.04.02 The contractor in such case, shall demonstrate to PRINCIPAL. The manner in which he proposes to meet the
construction schedule and make up the loss time.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
14.04.03 Failure of the contractor to comply with the above shall be considered a failure to execute the contract with
due diligence. Then Principal has the right without prejudice to any other right or remedy which shall have
accrued or shall accrue thereafter, may offload the balance job in part or in full to others at Contractor’s risk &
Cost.
15.00 DOCUMENTATION
15.01 ERECTION / EXECUTION DOCUMENT
Contractor shall prepare and hand over the following documents as per performa approved by
Engineer-in-Charge when work/activity is completed.
i) Erection completion report

ii) Calibration report
iii) Loop Checking report
iv) Hydrotest report of Impulse piping
v) Leak list report of air header & tubing
vi) Cable meggar listing for insulation and core to core.
15.02 DOCUMENTS FOR SUPPLY ITEMS
a) Unpriced copies of all the purchase orders should be submitted to Principal as well as
identified inspection agency for further necessary action regarding inspection.
b) Copies of all the supplier's drawings for valves, strainers, traps etc. which are to be
approved by Contractor must be marked to Principal for information and comments, if any.
c) Approval from Principal must be obtained before accepting any deviations/substituted

materials or items even if the alternative material or item is superior to the original
material/item.
d) All the materials must be procured from any of the Vendors specified by Principal.
Procurement from vendor's other than approved vendor is not allowed.
e) Material/item test certificate/inspection reports must be submitted .
f) Manufacturers installation, operation & Maintenance manuals.
g) Release Note - Materials must be dispatched to Site only after inspection and issue of
release note from concerned Inspection agency.
15.03 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS TO BE SUPPLIED after EXECUTION

Contractor to modify / update all documents and Drawings incorporating changes made during
execution including filling up terminal details & making addl, dwgs.as required.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
Contractor scope includes preparation & submission to Engineer-In-Charge As-built drawings and
documents as detailed below:
a) General layout plan for all units.
b) Installation , hook up ,Terminal Connection, Loop, Wiring dwgs
c) Control Room Layout Drawing showing Equipments, False Floor , False Ceilings .
d) The drawings for materials that are included in their scope of supply namely trays, junction boxes,
local cabinets.
e) Bill of Materials.
f) Final material appropriation statement for all the free issue instruments & materials indicating shortages
if any in the Performa duly approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
g) Final material reconciliation statement for erection materials – indicating shortages if any in the
Performa duly approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
All materials must be dispatched to & received by Contractor at Site. After receipt, Contractor must
store all the items properly till their use or handing over (of balance items) to Principal after
completion of work.
16.00 MATERIAL RECONCILIATION AND WASTAGE ALLOWANCE
16.01 The following shall be treated as usable balance material and will be accepted by Principal
provided that they are returned in good condition :
Pipes and tubes - 1M and above

Cables - 5M and above
Structurals - 2M and above
Structurals Plates - 0.25 sq.m and above
Aluminium trays/flats - 0.5M and above
The Contractor must return surplus and left over materials to Principal's Stores.
16.02 Unaccountable wastage shall not be more than -
a) 1/2% of the executed length for S.S. and alloy steel pipes and tubes, cables.
b) 1% of the executed length for G.I. Pipe, C.S. Pipe, flexible conduits and aluminium flats
and aluminium trays.
c) 2% for structural materials, G.I. machine screws/flats, nuts, bolts and washers.
No wastage will be allowed on valves, fittings, cable glands, anchor fasteners and terminal
blocks.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
16.03 No scrap will be taken out of the project premises. The use of gasket material shall be economical and
the Contractor shall ensure that no undue wastage is permitted. Wastage over and above that
mentioned above shall be charged at prevailing market price + 20& handling charge.

NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
ANNEXURE -4
1 (Instrumentation Vendor List to be followed)
Sl.No Vendor’s Name Country

Flow Element: Orifice/ Venturi/ Flow Nozzle
1. Baliga Lighting (only Orifice) India
2. Chemtrol Industries Ltd. India
3. DELTA ENGINEERING, PUNE India
4. Eureka Industrial Equipments Pvt. Ltd. India
5 FORBES MARSHALL India
6 Flowtech Instruments (Orifice/Venturi) India
7 General Instruments Consortium India
8. Instrumentation Ltd. India
9. Micro Precision Products Private Ltd. India
10. Micro India Flow Elements Pvt. Ltd. India
11 Minco(India) Flow Instruments Pvt. Ltd. India
12 Unicontrols Instrument Pvt. Ltd. India
13 Bopp & Reuther Messtechnik GMBH Geramny
14 Daniel Measurement & Control USA
15 ISA Controls Limited U.K
16 Technomatic SPA Italy
Pressure Gauges
1. Ashcroft India(P) Ltd. (standard normal type) India
2. A.N. Instruments Pvt. Ltd. India
3. Baumer Technologies India Pvt . Ltd India
4. Forbes Marshall India
5. General Instruments Consortium, India
6. H.Guru Industries India
7. Peejee Engg. Works India
8. Precision Industries Ltd. (standard normal type) India
9. Premium Instrument & Controls Ltd. India
10. Manometer (India) Pvt. Ltd. India
11. Walchandnagar Industries Ltd. India
12. Wika India
13. Budenberg Gauge Co. Ltd U.K
14. Dresser Europe S.A Germany
15. Nagano keiki Seisakusho Japan
16. Rueger Sa Switzerland
17 Spriano Spa Italy
18 WikaAlexenderWiegardGmbh& Co. Germany
Pressure & D/P Transmitters
1. ABB India Ltd. India
2. Emerson Process Management (I) Pvt. Ltd. India
3. Endress + Hauser (India) Pvt.Ltd. India
4. Honeywell Automation India Limited India
5 Siemens Ltd. India
6. Yokogawa Limited India
7. Azbil Corporation Japan
8. Emerson Process Mgt Singapore Ltd Singapore
NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
9. Honeywell Inc. U.S.A

10 Moore Products Company U.S.A
11 Siemens Ag, Germany Germany
12 Smar Singapore Pte. Ltd. Singapore
13 VEGA Grieshaber KG Germany
14 Yokogawa Electric Corporation Japan
Radar LT
1. Endress + Hauser ( India) Pvt. Ltd India
2. Forbes Marshell India
3 Magnetrol India
4 Vega Grieshaber KG Germany
Instrument Power & Control Cables
1. Associated Cables Ltd. India
2. Associated Flexibles & Wires Pvt. Ltd. India
3. Cords Cable Industries Ltd. India
4. Delton Cables Ltd India
5. Insucon Cables & Conductors (P) Ltd. (For Smaller Non-Critical India
Projects)
6. J K Cables Limited India
7. Kei Industries Limited India
8. Leoni cable solutions India
9. Paramount Cable Corporation India
10. T C Communications Pvt Ltd India
11. Thermo Cables Limited India
12. Toshniwal Cables India
13 Udey Pyro Cables Pvt Ltd India
Cable Trays & Accessories (Al./Gi)
1. D-Y Engineers India
2. Globe Electrical Industries India
3. HOPPES India
4. Indiana Engg Works Pvt Ltd India
5. Metalite Industries India
6. Parekh Engineering Company India
7 Sadhana Engineering Corporation India
8 Steelite Engineering Limited India
9 Parmar Metals Pvt Ltd
Junction Box & Cable Gland
1. Baliga Lighting Equipments Limited India
2. Ceag Flameproof Control Gears Pvt.Ltd. India
3. Ex-protecta India
4. Flameproof EquipmentsPvt. Ltd. India
5. Flexpro Electicals Pvt. Ltd. India
6. TAN SWA technologies Inc (Junction Box) India
7. Trinity Touch Pvt. Ltd. (Only cable Glands upto size 25M) India
8 Stahl-Und Apparatebau Hans LefferGmbh Germany
CS Seamless Pipes –As per Piping list
1 Indian tube Co.(Tata Div of tubes & pipes) India
2 ISMT limited India
3 Maharasthra seamless limited India
4 Dalmine SPA Italy
5 ETS Trouvay & Cauvin France
6 Horst kurvers Gmbh Geramny
NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
7 Hyundai Corporation Korea

8 IBF seamless pipes SPA Italy
9 Mannesmann Hnadel AG Geramny
10 Marubeni Itochu Steel Japan
11 Nippon steel corporation Japan
12 Nissho IWAI Corporation Japan
13 Okura & Co. Ltd. Japan
14 Sojitz Corporation Japan
15 Sumitomo metal industries Ltd. Japan
16 Phoceenne France
17 Vomal International Limited UK
SS Seamless Pipes-As per piping list
1 Choksi tube company limited India
2 Maxim tubes company pvt. Ltd. India
3 Nuclear fuel complex India
4 Ratnamani metals & tubes limited India
5 Remi edelstahl tubular ltd. India
6 Dalmine SPA Italy
7 Phoceenne France
8 TPS technitube Rohrenwerke Germany
9 T.T.I tubecex tubos inoxidables S.A. (1/2” NB SS pipe) Spain
SS Tubes
1. Choksi Tube Company Ltd. India
2. Matim Tubes Company Pvt. Ltd. India
3. Nuclear Fuel Complex India
4. Ratnamani Metals & Tubes Limited India
5. Sandvik India
6 Itochu Corporation (Rep.KubotaCorpn.) Japan
7. Nishitani& Co. Ltd. Japan
8 Sumitomo Metal Industries Ltd. Japan
Pipe Fittings
1. Eby industries India
2. Excel hydropneumatics pvt. Ltd. India
3. Micro precision products pvt. Ltd. India
4 Precision engineering industries India
5 Tecnomatic (india) pvt. Ltd. India
6 Wesmec engineering pvt. Ltd. India
7 Celleir France
8 Cesare bonetti SPA Italy
9 Dewrance & Co. Ltd. U.K.
10 Hopkinsons Ltd. U.K.
11 Siemens AG PGI germany
12 Sumitomo metal industries ltd. Japan
13 Thysen krupp stahlunion Gmbh germany
14 Tecnomatic SPA Italy
Instrument Miniature Valves
1. Audco India Limited(L&T Valves Divn.) India
2. Aura Inc India
3. Bhel (valves division) India
4. Chemtrol Industries Ltd India
5. Chemtrols Samil(India) Pvt Ltd India
6. Comfit & Valves Pvt. Ltd. India
NIT FOR
0
TALCHER
7. Excel Hydro-Pneumatics Pvt Ltd, India

8. Excelsior Engg Works India
9. Hyd- Air Engineering works Lonavla India
10. Ksb Pumps Limited (Valves Divn) India
11 Panam Engineers India
12 Tecnomatic (India) Pvt. Ltd. India
13 Anderson Greenwood & Co. U.S.A
14 BFE boneey forge valve License Italy
15 Celleir S.A. France
16 Crane Company International Sales U.S.A
17 Dewrance & Co. Ltd. U.K.
18 Euromisure Cremona Italy
19 Hopkinsons Ltd. U.K.
20 Kosei Sanyog Ltd. Japan
21 Swagelok company/creximco U.S.A
22 Sumitomo metal industries ltd. Japan
23 Technomatic SPA Italy
24 Velan engineering Co. Limited U.K.
25 Wesmec engineering pvt. Ltd India
Valve manifolds
1 Comfit & Valves Pvt. Ltd. India
2 EXCEL HYDROPNEUMATICS PVT. LTD. India
3 HYDER India
4 INSTRUMENTATION LTD. India
5 MICRO PRECISION India
6 NORDIVAL (SWAGELOC)
7 PARKER India
8 TECHNOMATIC India
9 Wesmec engineering pvt. Ltd. India

NIT FOR
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - 7 0
SERVICES AT TFL, TALCHER Page 1 of 2
ENQUIRY SPECIFICATION
FOR
PRESSURE GAUGE
0 29.03.2019 29.03.2019 ISSUE FOR ENQUIRY GAP RA RA

O: 02-0000-0021F1 REV2 All rights reserved
NIT FOR
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - 7 0
LIST OF PRESSURE GAUGE
SL. NO. TAG NO. QTY
1 PI-101 1
2 PI-102 1
3 PI-103 1
4 PI-104 1
5 SPARE 1

ES-7303 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED SHEET 1 OF 5
ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION FOR
PRESSURE GAUGES
FORM NUMBER 02-0000-0021 F1 REV O
S.K TRIPATHI C.BHATTACH R.N SINGH

ARYA
0 10.02.99 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION DDCPN CISC DHPV
REV DATE PURPOSE PREPARED REVIEWED APPROVED
ES-7303 0
ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENT NO. REV
PRESSURE GAUGE
SHEET 2 OF 5
CONTENTS
SECTION NUMBER DESCRIPTION SHEET NUMBER
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.0 INSPECTION, FACTORY TESTS
4.0 PACKING
5.0 IDENTIFICATION & MARKING
6.0 SPARES
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
ATTACHMENT NUMBER DESCRIPTION NUMBER OF SHEETS

FORM NUMBER 02-0000-0021 F2 REV 0
ES-7303 0
PRESSURE GAUGE
SHEET 3 OF 5
1.00 General
1.01 This Engineering specification together with the Instrument specification attached
herewith define the technical requirement for the supply of pressure gauges, their
accessories, name plate marking, documentation, testing-inspection, packing and
transportation.
1.02 In the event of any conflict between Engineering specification and Instrument
specification the later shall prevail.
2.00 General Requirements
The supply shall be strictly in line with the technical requirements specified in the
Instrument specification. In addition the supply must comply with the following.
2.01 In general , construction , design and testing of the pressure gauges shall be as per
IS 3624, unless otherwise deviations stated in the enclosed Instrument specification.
2.02 All equipment shall be weather proof to IP-55, antifungus and tropicalised.
2.03 All the wetted parts, movements, casing shall be of stainless steel unless otherwise
specified deviation in the Instrument specification. No component and accessories
should be of copper and its alloys.
2.04 The dial shall be white, non rusting metal or plastic with black figures.
2.05 Blow out devices shall be optional below 25 kg/cm2 g. However, as a standard, blow
out devices shall be provided for all ranges unless otherwise deviations specified in
the Instrument specification.
2.06 All gauge casing shall be of safety pattern design. Baffle/solid front between dial and
sensor shall be provided for ranges 25 kg/cm2 g and above. Below 25 kg/cm2 g is
optional.
2.07 IBR certificate shall be required for accessories like pig tail syphon for steam,
condensate & BFW services. For items of foreign origin the certification shall be
done by Lloyds or any other IBR approved authorities in specific IBR format.
2.08 Wherever NACE certificate requirement has been specified in Instrument

specification, the material composition & hardness tests shall be conducted only as
per MR-0175 latest edition. The tests shall be carried out in an approved laboratory.
2.09 Components made of copper and copper alloys exposed to atmosphere and coming
in contact with the operating fluid must not be used for ammonia & urea services.
3.00 Inspection, Factory tests and approval
The Routine and type tests requirement shall be as per IS 3624 as a minimum.
Within two weeks of receipt of the LOI/order the vendor must contact the Inspection
Agency specified in the order and finalise with them the Quality Assurance Plan for
carrying out Inspection and test. In absence of any Inspection Agency the vendor
must submit the quality Assurance Plan for PDIL/OWNER’s approval. All tests, in
such cases, shall be conducted by vendor’s Quality Department and the results of
ES-7303 0
PRESSURE GAUGE
SHEET 4 OF 5
tests shall be forwarded alongwith the supply.
The manufacturer shall give clear 15 days notice informing readiness of the gauges
and its accessories at manufacturer’s works. The vendor shall permit the authorised
representative of PDIL/OWNER to inspect the manufacture and assembly of the
gauges and its accessories in various phases in compliance with mutually agreed
quality assurance plan, standards and specifications.
The vendor shall make available to the authorised representative of PDIL / OWNER
the results of all the checks/calibrations conducted before presenting for
PDIL/Owner’s inspection.
The vendor to provide all necessary facilities free of cost to PDIL/Owner’s

representative for carrying out the checks/calibration as per standard/approved
quality assurance plan. Under no condition inspection can be waived off without the
written permission of PDIL.
No instrument/accessory shall be shipped until all the required tests are successfully
completed and certified “Cleared for despatch” by the inspection authority.
4.00 Packing
Each gauge and its accessories i.e. syphon, snubber, gauge saver etc. wherever
applicable shall be suitably packed and protected from damage due to
transportation, loading and unloading.
5.00 Identification and Marking
5.01 Self adhesive tapes or signs are not permissible for permanent marking of any
instrument.
Each gauge to have a separate circular tag number plate in stainless steel with
engraved tag no and range and attached securely to the gauge with a soft stainless
wire. The size of letters and figures shall be minimum 4 mm and the plate should be
25 mm diameter with 1-2 mm thick. This shall be in addition to manufacturer’s
standard name plate.
6.00 Spares
All untagged instruments in the individual instrument specification sheets are spare
instruments. In addition if Component Spares are required then the same shall be as
per enclosed spares list.
ES-7303 0
PRESSURE GAUGE
SHEET 5 OF 5
7.00 Documentation
The following documents (Technical) are required to be submitted by the

vendor alongwith bid, after placement of order for approval purposes and final
documentation before despatch of consignment.
SL. DESCRIPTION OF ALONGWITH AFTER PLACEMENT OF ORDER

NO. DOCUMENT BID
FOR APPROVAL/ FINAL
INFORMATION DOCUMENTS
WITHIN SIX BEFORE
WEEKS DESPATCH OF
CONSIGNMENT
1. Consolidated list of drawing & Yes Yes (I) Yes
documents supplied by vendor.
2. Catalogue & technical literature Yes x Yes

of pressure gauges alongwith
their accessories.
3. Deviation if any, from the Yes x x
technical spec. giving
justification for the same.
4. Dimensional and sectional x Yes(A) Yes
drawing against each tag
showing material of construction
of each part and complete
assembly.
5. Chemical analysis and material x x Yes
test certificates from an
approved laboratory
6. IBR certificate for syphon, x x Yes
where applicable.
7. NACE certificate for wetted x x Yes
parts from an approved
laboratory, where applicable.
8. Certificates from competent Yes x Yes
authority for degree of
protection against environment.
9. Instruction Manual for x x Yes
maintenance.
10. Calibration and performance x x Yes

test certificates.
11. Quality Assurance Plan. x Yes(A) x
(within 2 weeks)
(A) for Approval (I) for Information.

Sl. no. 1 to 10 shall be forwarded to PDIL/OWNER as per details outlined in enquiry / order.
Sl. no. 11 shall be mutually finalised with Inspection Authority specified in the order.
Number of sets alongwith bid for approval and as final documentation shall be supplied as
stipulated in the purchase order.
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION FOR PC150-E-7153-ISP-7303
PRESSURE GAUGE DOCUMENT NO.

SHEET 1 OF 1 Rev P
PROJECT NO. : PC-150
PROJECT : TFL RAW & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR
PLANT : TFL RAW & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR
CLIENT : TFL
REQ. NO. :
ORDER NO. : 0 15.04.2019 ISSUE FOR ENQUIRY GAP RA RA
MANUFACTURER : REV DATE PURPOSE PREP CHKD APPD
GENERAL OPTIONS
1. TYPE : Direct reading
2. MOUNTING : Local A. PIG TAIL SYPHON ASTM A TP 304 SS, 1/2" NB Sch. 80s
3. DIAL SIZE : 150mm Seamless pipe, Both ends Plain with IBR
4. DIAL COLOUR : Black numerals on white background B. Snubber
5. CASE MATERIAL : SS 316 C. SS 304 Gauge Saver, 1/2" NPT(F) Gauge Side, 1/2" NPT(M) Process
6. BEZEL RING : SS 316 Side
7. BLOW OUT PROTEC. : Required - Back Side D.Movement Damping
8. LENS : Shatter Proof / Toughned Glass
9. ACCURACY : ± 1% on full scale E. Safety Pattern Gauge-Required with SS Solid Front With Baffle Wall
10. OVER RANGE PROTEC. : 150% of SPAN
11. ENCLOSURE PROTEC. : IP 65 NOTE:- ALL PRESSURE GUAGES SHOULD BE SILICON FILLED.
PRESSURE ELEMENT
12. SEAMLESS BOURDON SIZE : 110mm dia. (minimum)
13. MOVEMENT MATL. : SS 316
14. PROCESS CONN. : 1/2" NPT(M) Bottom
15. POINTER TYPE : Micrometer screw type
16. ZERO ADJUSTMENT : Required
FACILITY
PHULPUR-I
Pressure ( Temperature (deg

Kg/cm2g) C) ELEMENT
TAG NO. QTY. P&ID NO. SERVICE RANGE (kg/cm2g) ELEMENT MAT. OPTIONS
TYPE.
Operating/Desig
Operating/Design
n
PC150- SEAMLESS
PI-101 01 RAW WATER PUMP 2.5/3.5 40/75 0-5 SS316
1000-0020 BOURDON
PC150- SEAMLESS
1000-0020 BOURDON
PC150- SEAMLESS
1000-0020 BOURDON
PC150- SEAMLESS
1000-0020 BOURDON
PC150- SEAMLESS
SPARE 01 RAW WATER PUMP 2.5/3.5 40/75 0-5 SS316
1000-0020 BOURDON
NIT FOR
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - 7 0

TECHNICAL SPECIICATION FOR TRANSMITTERS

NIT FOR
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - 7 0

LIST OF PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
SL. NO. TAG NO. QTY
1 PT-105 1
LIST OF FLOW TRANSMITTER
SL. NO. TAG NO. QTY
1 FT-101 1
LIST OF LEVEL TRANSMITTER
SL. NO. TAG NO. QTY
1 LT-101
1
2 LT-102
1

ES-7308 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION
FOR
PRESSURE
AND
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
01.04.19 01.04.19 Issued for tender GAP RA SKT

ES-7308 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
PRESSURE & DIFF. PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SHEET 2 OF 6
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
AND APPROVAL
4.0 PACKING
5.0 IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING
6.0 SPARES
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

ES-7308 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
1.00 General
herewith define the technical requirement for the supply of Pressure and
Differential Pressure Transmitters, its spares, documentation and testing.
1.02 In the event of any conflict between this Engineering specification and Instrument
2.01 Pressure Transmitters
2.01.01 Flanged integral type 2-valve manifold shall be used with transmitters having
either flanged or oval flanged adopter with 1/2” NPT(F) process connection.
Otherwise , 1/2” NPT(F) screwed 2 valve manifold shall be used.
2.01.02 One complete bolt sets shall be provided for flanged connections at both ends.
2.02 Differential Pressure Transmitter
2.02.01 Flanged integral type 3-valve manifold shall be used with transmitters having
either flanged or oval flanged adopter with 1/2” NPT(F) process connection.
Otherwise , 1/2” NPT(F) screwed 3 valve manifold shall be used.
2.02.02 One complete bolt sets shall be provided for flanged connections at both ends.
2.03 For all applications, the transmitter shall be supplied with “smart electronics”. The
feature of “smart electronics” shall include selectable analog/digital output mode,
remote re-ranging, self checking, diagnostics and configuration from hand held
configurator or remote HART maintenance system. The transmitter must have
provision for upgrading the communication protocol to ‘Foundation fieldbus’ in
future.
2.04 Studs & nuts for flange adapter & oval flanges shall be of stainless steel if
otherwise not specified in the data sheet. If no special requirements are stipulated
all gaskets/’O’ rings in contact with process fluid shall be of teflon or equivalent.
For liquid ammonia service low temp application (sub-zero temp.), gaskets/’O’
rings shall be EP-851 or equivalent.
2.05 The transmitter shall have protection against reverse polarity connection.
2.06 The transmitter shall be unaffected due to radio frequency interference. The
supplied electronic part shall have susceptibility of less than 0.5% of span for a
frequency range of 20-500 MHZ in a field strength of 20 volts/metre.
2.07 Cable entries shall be plugged during transit to avoid damage.
2.08 Mounting accessories shall be suitable for 2 inch NB vertical pipe.
2.09 Digital output gauge shall be integral with electrical housing but there shall be
partition between electronics & output meter.
ES-7308 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
2.10 The electrical terminals shall be vibration proof . The transmitter terminals shall
preferably be located in a compartment separated from field electronics. Flying
leads are not acceptable.
2.11 All transmitters without chemical seal shall have 1/2” NPT(F) connection on oval
flange.
2.12 The scope as per enclosed instrument specification sheets may include either
Pressure or Differential pressure Transmitters or combination of any. Relevant
portion of the general requirement (item 2.01 to 2.02) shall be applicable for the
items covered in the instrument specification sheets.
2.13 Transmitters in hazardous areas shall either be ex-proof/flame proof or intrinsic

safe conforming to area classification, execution and execution standard specified
against each item in the individual specification sheets. Indian Standard(IS)
certification IS 2148 for Ex-proof certification must be supplemented with the
temperature classification certification conforming to IS - 8239. Intrinsic safe
certification shall conform to CENELEC standard EN 50014 and EN 50020 if
otherwise not specified in the individual specification sheets.
2.14 Components made of copper and copper alloys exposed to atmosphere and
coming in contact with the operating fluid must not be used for ammonia & urea
services.
3.01 Within two weeks of receipt of the LOI/order the vendor must contact the Inspection
such cases, shall be conducted by vendor’s Quality Department and the results of
tests shall be forwarded alongwith the supply.
The manufacturer shall give clear 15 days notice informing readiness of the
instrument at manufacturer’s works. The vendor shall permit the authorised
instrument in various phases in compliance with mutually agreed quality assurance
plan, standards and specifications.
the results of all the checks/calibrations conducted before presenting for
PDIL/Owner’s inspection. The vendor to provide all necessary facilities free of cost
to PDIL/Owner’s representative for carrying out the checks/calibration as per
standard/approved quality assurance plan. Under no condition inspection can be
waived off without the written permission of PDIL.
3.02 No instrument/accessory shall be shipped until all the required tests are
successfully completed and certified “Cleared for despatch” by the inspection
authority.
3.03 The following physical checks, routine tests, shall be in line with ISA S 55.1 The
procedure & extent of test shall be governed by Quality Assurance Plan mutually
agreed and approved by Inspection Authority.
ES-7308 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
A. Physical Checks
1. Name Plate details

- Tag no.
- Model no.
- Range
- Execution (IP, IS, Ex’d’ etc.)
2. Process connection
3. Manifold
B. Routine Tests
1. Calibration check for Linearity, Accuracy, Hysteresis, Repeatability

2. Zero-shift
3. Hydraulic test.
4.00 Packing
Each transmitter and its accessories shall be suitably packed and protected from
damage due to transportation, loading and unloading.
The transmitter and their accessories alongwith spares (commissioning spares and 2
years spares for maintenance) shall be despatched as a single consignment.
Commissioning and 2 years operation spares shall be packed separately.
5.01 Self adhesive tapes or signs are not permissible for permanent marking of any
instrument.
5.02 All instruments shall have a tag plate in SS screwed to the transmitter case indicating
make, model no., sl.no., tag no., adjustable range, set range etc. Besides the above
each instrument to have a separate circular tag number plate in stainless steel with
engraved tag number and calibration range and attached securely to the instrument
with a soft stainless wire. The size of letters and figures shall be minimum 4 mm and
the plate should be 25 mm diameter with 1-2 mm thick.
5.03 All spare parts to be supplied alongwith the main consignment shall be fitted with
identification plate with the following data clearly printed and easily readable.
- Spare parts name, model number as per purchaser’s Instrument specification

sheet.
- Serial no.
6.00 Spares
Complete untagged transmitter of each type & range is included as spare in the
specification sheet. In addition component spares shall be supplied as per enclosed
ES-7308 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
spares list.
7.00 Documentation
The following documents (Technical) are required to be submitted by the vendor

alongwith bid, after placement of order for approval purposes and final

NO. DOCUMENT BID FOR APPROVAL/ FINAL
WITHIN SIX BEFORE
WEEKS DESPATCH OF
CONSIGNMENT
1. Consolidated list of drawing & Yes Yes (I) Yes
documents.
2. Catalogue & technical literature Yes x Yes

of Pressure transmitter
alongwith their accessories.


test certificates from approved
laboratory.
5. Certificates from recognised Yes x Yes

authority for (a) degree of
protection against environment
(b) for Intrinsic safety/ Ex-proof
execution.

maintenance.
7. Calibration and performance x x Yes

test certificates.
8. Quality Assurance Plan. Yes Yes(A) x

(within 2 weeks)
(A) for Approval (I) for Information
Sl. no. 1 to 7 shall be forwarded to PDIL/ OWNER as per details outlined in Enquiry/ order.
Sl. No. 8 shall be mutually finalised with Inspection Authority specified in the order.
Page 1 of 1
DOC NO:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PC150-7044-ISP-7308
1 FUNCTION
PRESSURE
2 FILL FLUID SILICON OIL

3 VERSION/COMMUNICATION SMART WITH HART PROTOCOL
4 MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE/TYPE CAPACITANCE/ PIEZORESISTIVE (VENDOR TO SPECIFY).
5 POWER SUPPLY
24 V DC 2 wire from panel instrument/ DCS as standard through isolator/ barrier
6 TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
4-20 mA DC with digital communication through HART protocol as standard.
7 LOAD RESISTANCE 600ohm when powered with 24 V DC.

8 INTEGRAL DIGITAL OUTPUT INDICATOR with configurable facility for digital indication of pressure, temperature, percentage value,current
for SMART digital is must.
9 Continiously adjustable externally, non interacting type as standard.
ZERO & SPAN ADJUSTMENT
10 ZERO SUPRESSION/ ELEVATION 100% of ,max. range in case of SMART.
11 DAMPING 0-32 sec adjustable in various steps of time constants
12 ACCURACY ± 0.050% of span within TD ratio of 1: 100 or better
13 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 1/2" NPT (F) WITH SS PLUG
14 MOUNTING ON 2" NB VERTICAL PIPE MOUTING WITH SS CLAMPS and bolts
15 HUMIDITY 0-95 % RH
16 STABILITY equal to or better than +0.1% of span for a period of
minimum 5 years, as a minimum.
17 OVER PRESSURE a) PR. TRANSMITTER: Minimum 1.5 TIMES OF DESIGN PRESSURE
b) DP TRANSMITTER: 300 Kg/ Cm2g
18 PROCESS CONNECTION 1/2” NPT F through oval flanges
19 O' RING PTFE/ FOR AMMONIA EP851
20 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION CLASS IP-67 min.
21 AREA CLASSIFICATION ZONE 2
2, GR IIC ,T1
T1
22 TURNDOWN RATIO 100:1
23 STATIC PR. COMPENSATION YES
24 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION YES
25 STATIC PR. SHIFT vendor to specify
26 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SHIFT vendor to specify
27 AMB. TEMP. LIMIT -5 TO +60 DEG C
28 DRAIN OR VENT ARRANGEMENT YES
29 MATERIAL A.) SENSOR(CAPSULE): SS316L/HASTELLOY C
B.) PROCESS COVER:SS316
C ) OTHER WETTED PARTS:SS316
30 EXECUTION Ex (ia)
31 SELF TEST/ DIAGNOSIS YES,WRITE PROTECTION SWITCH,NON VOLATILE MEMORY
32 TRANSMITTER housing Polyurethin covered Die cast Aluminum or BETTER
33 TRANSMITTER DRAIN & VENT VALVE MATL. SS 316
34 TRANSMITTER BOLTS/NUTS/SCREW MATL. YES ,SS 316 / ABOVE 100 Kg/Cm2g SUS 610
35 SQUARE ROOT EXTRACTION All flow transmitters shall have square root extraction function
36 LIGHTENING PROTECTION YES
37 OPTIONS
(A) MOUNTING ACCESSORIES YES ( 2" NB VERTICAL PIPE MOUNTING WITH CLAMP & SS NUT BOLT)
(B)THREE VALVE MANIFOLD YES, Integral 3 Way Valves for Diff. Pr. Tr.
(C) CABLE GLAND 1/2" NPT SS , DOUBLE COMPRESSION TYPE, Ex- Proof
(D) TWO VALVE MANIFOLD YES,Integral 2 Way Valves for Pr. Tr.
NOTES :
1. Manufacturer to specify.
2.Body rating selected by manufacturer shall be suitable for the given pressure & temp.
3. Yes, Mounting Bracket for mounting on 2" pipe with U-clamp & bolts, Matl.SS.
4. Deleted
5. Each transmitter shall be supplied with ½” NPT SS plug for auxiliary electrical connection.
6. Vendor shall indicate full model codes for the transmitters offered and shall submit relevant decoding sheet also
7. Valve manifold & transmitter body shall be tested Hydraulically separately
8.Transmitter process connection for both PT and DPT shall be 1/4",NPT (F), however it may be noted that the impulse pipe and oval flange will be 1/2".
Accordingy supporting manifold of ss316 shall be provided.
9. Drain/vent plug shall be integerated with transmitter. Vendor should not mak any external arrangement for the same as it will not be accepted.
10 Vendor to note that Co-planer type models of transmitters are not acceptable. Bottom entry is not acceptable. Process connection type of both PT and DPT should be side entry
11 Maximum working pressure for PT will be 1.5
11.Maximum 1 5 times of design pressure and for DPT it should be 300kg/cm2g
300kg/cm2g.
12. Burnout direction /fail safe feature should be specified by vendor.
13.vedor to specify short circuit current limits.
DOC NO:
LIST OF PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS PC150-7044-ISP-
7308
Calibration MODEL NO.
operating COVER/ BODY/
Tag P&ID NO Line Number/ Instr Type Fluid State MEDIUM operating Temp. Design temp. Design pressure Range Sensor VENDOR DEVIATIONS
Pressure WET PARTS
Kg/Cm2 g
MATL
Number Equip. Number DEG C KG/CM2 G DEG C KG/CM2 G Material
SMART
PC150-1000-
PT-105 36"-RW-002-24 PRESSURE WATER LIQUID 40.0 2.5 75 3.5 0-5 SS316L SS316 NOTE-1
0020
XMTR
NOTE‐1 : VENDOR TO SPECIFY
LIST OF FLOW TRANSMITTER
corrosive operating operating design MODEL NO.

Tag P&ID NO Service Description Line Number/ Instr Type Fluid MEDIUM density viscosity Flow Range calibration design temp. Sensor VENDOR DEVIATIONS
component temp. pressure pressure COVER/ BODY/ WET
PARTS MATL
Number Equip. Number DEG C KG/CM2 G kg/m3 cP M3 /Hr mm H20 DEG C KG/CM2 G Material
PC150-
FT-101 1000- WATER FROM BL 36"-RW-001-24 SMART FLOW TX WATER LIQUID NO 40.00 1.5 990 1 0-5000 3000.00 75.00 3.50 SS316 SS 316 NOTE-1
0020
NOTE‐1 : VENDOR TO SPECIFY
ES-7288 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED
SHEET 1 OF 8
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
(GUIDED WAVE RADAR)
P 18.09.10 ISSUED FOR COMMENTS AS MN MN

ES-7288 0
LEVEL TRANSMITTER (GUIDED WAVE RADAR)
SHEET 2 OF 8
CONTENTS
1 GENERAL 3
2 CODES AND STANDARDS 3
3 DESIGN DATA & CONSTRUCTION 3
4 INSPECTION, FACTORY TEST & 6
APPROVAL
5 PACKING 7
6 IDENTIFICATION & MARKING 7
7 SPARES 7
8 DOCUMENTATION 7
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

ES-7288 0
SHEET 3 OF 8
1.0 General
herewith defines the requirement for the supply of Guided wave Radar type Level
Transmitter, its spares, documentation and testing.
1.02 In the event of any conflict between Engineering specification and Instrument specification
the later shall prevail.
2.00 CODES AND STANDARDS
Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitters covered by this specification shall conform to the
latest requirements of the following codes and standards.
API MPMS Petroleum measurement Standards, part 3, “Tank Gauging” (1992)

ANSI/ ASMEB16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
IEC-801 Electronic Compatibility for Industrial Process Measurement and
Control Equipment
IBR Indian Boiler Regulations
IEC 60079 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere.
IEC 60529 Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures.
WHG 19 Standard for Overfill Protection.
3.0 DESIGN DATA AND CONSTRUCTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 The level transmitters shall be designed and constructed according to data sheets listed
in the requisition. Deviations/additions, if any, shall need approval from
contractor/client.
3.1.2 Measurement should not be affected by changing specific gravity of process fluid and
should be insensitive to gas-phase pressure.
3.1.3 The Guided Radar Level Transmitter is a "downward-looking" measuring system that
functions according to the time difference method. The distance from the reference
point to the product surface is measured. High-frequency pulses are injected to a
probe and led along the probe. The pulses are reflected by the product surface,
received by the electronic evaluation unit and converted into level Information. This
method is also known as TDR (Time Domain Reflectometry).
3.1.4 The reflected pulses are transmitted from the probe to the electronics. There, a
microprocessor analyses the signals and identifies the level echo, which was
generated by the reflection of the high- frequency pulses at the product surface.
3.1.5 The Guided Radar shall have the facility to suppress interference echoes on-site or via
remote operation.
3.1.6 For level range calculations, the density of the upper medium shall be considered for
Interface Level Measurement.
3.1.7 To enable the correct operation and service of the level devices, all installation
requirements shall be adhered to (transmitter positions, etc.) as outlined in
manufacturer’s manuals. The level instruments shall be suitable for their intended
process duty and also for the environmental and hazardous area classification of the
plant area they are to be installed in.
ES-7288 0
SHEET 4 OF 8
3.2 APPLICATIONS:
3.2.1 Guided Wave Radar Level transmitter shall be applicable for liquids or slurries,
hydrocarbons and water- based media.
3.2.2 In absence of dielectric constant for the process fluid, Manufacturer shall confirm the
suitability of Guided Wave radar Level Transmitter for such applications and
manufacturer shall suggest the suitable model for the same.
3.2.3. Manufacturer shall suggest the suitable model for Interface applications like oil on water,
Hydrocarbon on water, etc.
3.2.4 Electronics shall be capable of measuring upper liquid and interface level simultaneously.
3.2.5 Selection shall be available for analog output signal from level transmitter corresponding
to upper liquid or interface.
3.3 PROBE:
3.3.1 Probe shall be of rugged construction without any mechanical moving part and shall not
be affected by abrasion because of fluid turbulence.
3.3.2 Deposits, dust, noise, foam or turbulence in the fluid, on the probe shall not affect the
performance of the level transmitter.
3.3.3 The probe length and diameter shall be decided based on the application and process
parameters.
3.3.4 Probe length shall be suitable for the entire measuring range as specified in the data
sheets.
3.3.5 Unless otherwise specified, all wetted parts (probe or other) material shall be of SS 316
as minimum. Hastelloy C or Monel shall be considered for the applications where SS
316 is not suitable.
3.3.6 Manufacturer shall provide suitable sealing between process fluid and probe housing.
3.3.7 Connection between probe and chamber/ cage shall be flanged type and shall be as per
the data sheets.
3.4 TRANSMITTER:
3.4.1 Level Transmitter shall not be affected by radio frequency interference such as Walkie-
Talkie, wireless paging system, and other power and communication equipment.
3.4.2 The Probe and electronics head shall be suitable for area classification indicated in the
data sheets. Unless otherwise specified, the enclosure shall be whether proof to IP 65,
flame proof Eexd and intrinsically safe (Exi).
3.4.3 Unless otherwise specified, the pre-amplifier shall be integral to the probe. In case of
remote electronics interconnecting cable between probe and transmitter shall be
supplied by the manufacturer.
3.4.4 The Protocol used for communication shall be HART (4-20mA)
3.4.5 The Power supply shall be 24 V DC, 2-wire loop powered.

ES-7288 0
SHEET 5 OF 8
3.4.6 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) type display shall be available on top of the instrument
mounted integrally.
3.4.7 The Hazardous certification for the transmitter & its electronics shall comply with ATEX
standards.
3.4.8 Transmitter shall be supplied with cable entries of ½” NPT.
3.4.9 The Transmitter shall have inbuilt “Overfill” protection in accordance with WHG 19
standard.
3.5 CAGE / CHAMBER:
3.5.1 Cage/ chamber shall be mounted externally on the vessel side or on stand pipe with two
nozzles of 2” size.
3.5.2 Process connection of Level Transmitter shall be of 2” flange with rating mentioned in the
data sheets.
3.5.3 Cage / chamber to vessel /equipment / standpipe shall be either side – side, side –
bottom. Top Connection shall not be used.
3.5.4 MOC of Cage/ chamber shall be as per the vessel/ piping material Specification.
3.5.5 Drain and vent end connection shall be ¾ “ flange and shall be as per the datasheet.
3.5.6 The size of cage/ chamber shall be 2 “as minimum.
3.5.7 In case of Top Mounted Measurement, minimum 2” Flange size shall be considered for
transmitter Mounting.
3.6 PERFORMANCE:
• Accuracy for Non Interface Level Measurement: ± 3 mm.

• Accuracy for Interface Level Measurement: ± 25 mm.
• Response time : < 1 second. • Resolution: ± 2.5 mm.
• Repeatability: < 2.5 mm
3.7 NAMEPLATE:
A permanently attached (with drive pins or equal) stainless steel tag(s) stamped with the
following information shall be provided on each instrument:
Tag Number
Manufacturer’s Name of Trademark

Model Number
Serial Number
Calibrated span and units
Power Supply, Output signal
Area Classification
Process connection,
Drain and Vent size & Rating.
MOC
ES-7288 0
SHEET 6 OF 8
4.01 Within two weeks of receipt of the LOI/order the vendor must contact the Inspection
carrying out Inspection and test including tests to be conducted by independent
agencies. In absence of any Inspection Agency the vendor must submit the quality
Assurance Plan for PDIL/OWNER’s approval. All tests, in such cases, shall be
conducted by vendor’s Quality Department and the results of tests shall be forwarded
along with the supply.
The manufacturer shall give clear 15 days notice informing readiness of the instruments at
manufacturer’s works. The vendor shall permit the authorised representative of
PDIL/OWNER to inspect the manufacture and assembly of the instruments in various
phases in compliance with mutually agreed quality assurance plan, standards and
specifications.
The vendor shall make available to the authorised representative of PDIL / OWNER the results
of all the checks / calibrations conducted by them on the basis of approved Quality
Assurance Plan for PDIL/Owner’s inspection.
The vendor has to provide all necessary facilities free of cost to PDIL/Owner’s representative
for carrying out the checks/calibration as per standard/approved quality assurance
plan. Under no condition inspection can be waived off without the written permission
of PDIL/ OWENER.
4.02 The following physical checks, routine tests as a minimum shall be witnessed by PDIL
/ owner inspection authority. The procedure & extent of test shall be governed by
Quality Assurance Plan mutually agreed and approved by Inspection Authority.
A. Physical Checks
1. Name Plate details

- Tag no.
- Model no.
- Range
- Execution (IP, IS, Ex’d’ etc.)
2. Process connection
B. Routine tests
1. Calibration check for accuracy, linearity, hysteresis and repeatability

2. Zero-shift
3. Hydraulic test.
4.03 Other Tests
Vendor shall submit following certificates from a approved laboratory or from statuary
bodies, as applicable.
1. Chemical Analysis
2. ‘Huey’ test where applicable
3. Radiography/Ultrasonic examination of welded joints for rating 900# and above
ES-7288 0
SHEET 7 OF 8
4. Any other test applicable to particular equipment to establish its quality of

construction & performance.
5.00 Packing
Each instrument and its accessories shall be suitably packed and protected from damage due
to transportation, loading and unloading.
The instrument and their accessories along with spares shall be despatched as a single
consignment. Commissioning and 2 years operation spares shall be packed
separately with proper identification marking.
6.01 Self adhesive tapes or signs are not permissible for permanent marking of any instrument.
6.02 All instruments shall have a tag plate in SS screwed to the instrument body indicating
make, model no., sl.no., tag no., adjustable range, set range etc. Besides the above
each instrument to have a separate circular tag number plate in stainless steel with
engraved tag number and calibration range and attached securely to the instrument
with a soft stainless wire. The size of letters and figures shall be minimum 4mm and
the plate should be 25mm diameter with 1-2mm thick.
6.03 All spare parts to be supplied along with the main consignment shall be fitted with
identification plate with the following data clearly printed and easily readable.
- Spare parts name, model no. as per purchaser’s Instrument specification sheet.
- Serial no.
7.00 Spares
Spares shall be as per enclosed spares list.
87.00 Documentation
The following documents (Technical) are required to be submitted by the vendor along with
bid, after placement of order for approval purposes and final documentation before
despatch of consignment.
Sl. Description Of Along with After Placement Of Order

No. Document Bid For Approval/ Final Documents
Information Before Despatch
Within Six Of Consignment

Weeks
1. Consolidated list of drawings & Yes Yes (I) Yes
documents.
2. Catalogue & technical literature of Yes x Yes
Guided Wave Radar Level
Transmitter along with their
accessories.
3. Deviation if any, from the technical Yes x x
spec. giving justification for the
same.
4. Dimensional and sectional x Yes(I) Yes

ES-7288 0
SHEET 8 OF 8
drawing against each tag showing

material of construction of each
part.
test certificates from an approved
laboratory.
6. Certificates showing radiography/ x x Yes
ultrasonic examination of welded
joints, corrosion test (Huey test),
and Ferrite content on finished
product where applicable from an
approved laboratory.
7. Radiography/Ultrasonic tests, if x x Yes
applicable for 900# & above
8. NACE certificate (where x x Yes
applicable) from an approved
laboratory.
9. Certificates from recognised Yes x Yes
authority for (a) degree of
protection against environment (b)
Intrinsic safety/ Ex-proof
execution.
maintenance.
11. Calibration and performance test x x Yes
certificates.
12. Quality Assurance Plan. Yes Yes(A) (within 2 x
weeks)
(A) For Approval (I) for Information only
Sl. no. 1 to 11 shall be forwarded to PDIL/ OWNER as per details outlined in enquiry / order.
Sl. no. 12 shall be mutually finalised with Inspection authority specified in the order. Number of
sets along with bid for approval and as final documentation shall be supplied as stipulated in the
purchase order.
RADAR TYPE LEVEL TRANSMITTER
This document is the property of Projects & Development India Limited(PDIL) and not to be copied or reproduced or exhibited t o third parties without the written permission of PDIL. PROJECT NO. : PC150
PROJECT : TALCHER RAW WATER & FIRE WATER SYSTEM
PLANT : TFL
CUSTOMER : M/S.TALCHER FERTLIZERS LTD
REQ. NO. : PC150-E-7048
ORDER NO. : 0 15.04.2019 Enquiry GAP RA RA
MANUFACTURER : REV DATE PURPOSE PREP CHKD APPD
1. TAG NO./ QTY. LT-101/LT102 2 Nos Vendor Deviations
2. SERVICE FIRE WATER TANK LEVEL
GENERAL
3. P&I NO./ VESSEL NO. PC150-1000-0020

4. AREA CLASSIFICATION ZONE 2, Gr.IIC, T1
5 PRINCIPLE Time Domain Reflectrometry (Non Contact Type)
5 CERTIFICATION -
6 UPPER FLUID/ LOWER FLUID AIR ATMOSPHERE/ WATER
7 DIELECTRIC CONSTANT UPPER/ LOWER -/-
PROCESS
8 DENSITY UPPER FLUID/ LOWER FLUID 1.225 / 990 kg/m3

9 VISCOSITY UPPER FLUID/ LOWER FLUID ATMOSPHEREIC AIR / 0.653 cP
10 PRESSURE OPERATING./DESIGN. ATM
11 TEMPERATURE OPERATING./DESIGN. ATM
12 TANK TYPE / TANK SKETCH SKETCH ATTACHED ITB
TANK / VESSEL DATA
13 TANK HEIGHT/ TANK DIA. 5500 mm/ AS PER DWNG

14 UPPER BLOCKING DISTANCE Note 1
15 EMPTY SPACE (contractor to mount the system considering Upper blocking distance)
16 PROCESS CONNECTION Mounted over firewater reservoir (open)
17 C-C DISTANCE 5500 mm
18 INSTRUMENT CONNECTION (contractor to mount the system connction shall be selected accodingly)
19 CHAMBER TYPE & SIZE NA
20 DRAIN / VENT CONNECTION NA
21 FLANGE SURFACE FINISH NA
22 TYPE OF APPLICATION Continuous Level Measurement
23 ANTENNA TYPE Non Contact type
24 OPERATING FREQUENCY By Vendor
PROBE
25 ROD LENGTH
26 LOCATION Top Mounted
27 OUTPUT SIGNAL 4-20 mA, HART
28 POWER SUPPLY 24VDc, Two Wire Loop Powered
29 TRANSMITTER TYPE Integral type with DualCompartment
TRANSM I TTER
30 CABLE ENTRY 1/2" NPT(F) - 2 Nos with Cable Gland(Note-1)

31 CALIBRATION RANGE 0 - 5500 mm
32 INDICATOR Integral Digital- LCD (Configurable) , In 0-100%
33 ENCLOSURE CLASS IP-67 or better
34 MOUNTING Top Mounted
35 ACCURACY +/-2 mm
36 BODY FLANGE ( IF ANY) SS 316
MATERIAL
37 TRANSMITTER ENCLOSURE Die Cast Aluminium with Epoxy Painting

38 EXTERNAL CHAMBER / GASKET NA
PDS7287.01 REV 0
39 PROBE/ ANTENNA SS316

40 LIGHTINING PROTECTION Required
ACCESSORIES
41 MOUNTING BRACKET Required

42 EXTERNAL CHAMBER NA
43 CENTERING DISK NA
44 IBR CERTIFICATION NA
FORM NUMBER
NOTES: 1. Cable Gland shall be SS316 Double Compression Type.

2. Spare connection shall be plugged. MoC of plug shall be SS316L
LIST OF SPARES PC-150-E7287/7308-SPARE
Sl Item Item Description Qty

No
LIST OF SPARES
1 Main Transmitter FT‐101 FULL TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY 1
1a Spare Transmitter Spare for FT-101 FULL TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY 1
2 Main Transmitter PT‐105 FULL TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY 1
2a Spare Transmitter Spare for PT‐105 FULL TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY 1
3 Main Transmitter LT‐101/102 FULL TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY 1
3a Spare Transmitter Spare for LT‐101/102 FULL TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY 1
Page 1 of 1
NIT FOR
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - 7 0
TECHNICAL SPECIICATION FOR CABLES

NIT FOR
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - 7 0
LIST OF PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
SL. NO. TAG NO. QTY
1 12P X1.5SQMM AS PER SOR

2 1PX 1.5SQMM AS PER SOR

ES-73332 0
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED DOCUMENT NO. REV

SHEET 1 OF 7
INSTRUMENT CABLE
0 26.02.02 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION

ES-7332 0
INSTRUMENT CABLES
SHEET 2 OF 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
AND APPROVAL
4.0 PACKING
5.0 IDENTIFICATION & MARKING
6.0 SPARES
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

1.00 General
ES-7332 0
INSTRUMENT CABLES
SHEET 3 OF 7
1.01 This Engineering specification together with the Technical specification attached
herewith define the technical requirement for the supply of signal, power, grouping
, extension/compensating cables, marking, documentation, testing-inspection and
packing.
2.01 Overall Drain wire shall be of annealed copper wire in continuous contact with
aluminium side of shield. No of strands, dia and cross sectional area shall be 7,
0.3mm and 0.5mm respectively.
2.02 Communication pair shall be placed in central position with the bundle of pairs.
Material of conductor shall be bare copper, no of strands-7, size-0.5mm insulation
PVC and colour-white.
2.03 Cables shall be supplied strictly as per the technical specification enclosed.
Relevant IS standards shall be applicable.
2.04 Tolerances in supply quantity and standard length on a drum shall be as follows:
- Vendor shall ensure that each drum shall have around 1000 meters (5%), if not
otherwise specified in the technical specification.
- Negative tolerance in total length is not acceptable.
- The positive tolerance in total length shall be limited.
Upto 1KM + 10%

Between 1 to 5 KM + 5%
Between 5 to 10 KM +4%
Above 10 KM + 2.5%
2.05 Cable drum used shall be of high quality. Second hand drum or recycled drum is
not acceptable. The vendor shall submit a detail sketch of each type of drum
intended to be used for this order. It should indicate clearly the designed load of
the drum and the factor of safety considered for transportation and shipment.
Protective coating shall be applied on the outer surface of cable drum to protect
against rain/weather.
In case the cable is received at site in damaged drums, a penalty as indicated in

the special clause shall be levied.
2.06 Special clauses:
- In case at any stage during cable/laying/installation, if it is noticed that there is a

joint in a cable drum the entire cable with cable drum shall be replaced by vendor,
free of charge to the purchaser.
- In case after receipt of material at site it is noticed that the quality/condition of

cable drums is not good, drum and cable shall be replaced free of charge by the
ES-7332 0
INSTRUMENT CABLES
SHEET 4 OF 7
vendor. The site engineer’s decision in this matter
shall be treated as final and binding on the vendor.
The general criteria for decision regarding quality of drum shall be :

- The flanges, nut bolts, inner mandrel and outer protection cover should be
intact without damage.
- The cable drum should freely roll and the drawing of cable out of drum be easy.
3.01 Within two weeks of receipt of the LOI/order the vendor must contact the
Inspection Agency specified in the order and finalise with them the Quality
Assurance Plan for carrying out Inspection and test. In absence of any Inspection
Agency the vendor must submit the quality Assurance Plan for PDIL/OWNER’s
approval. All tests, in such cases, shall be conducted by vendor’s Quality
Department and the results of tests shall be submitted to the representative of
PDIL/OWNER during inspection.
The manufacturer shall give clear 15 days notice informing readiness of the
material at manufacturer’s works. The vendor shall permit the authorised
material in various phases in compliance with mutually agreed quality assurance
plan, standards and specifications.
The vendor shall make available to the authorised representative of PDIL /

OWNER the results of all the tests conducted before presenting for PDIL/Owner’s
inspection.
Normally the vendor shall have their own quality control requirements and
procedures for conducting the type tests. If the same is not acceptable by PDIL/
OWNER representative, the procedure & extent of type test requirement shall be
mutually discussed and agreed upon by vendor & PDIL/OWNER representative
and shall be covered in Quality Assurance Plan. Vendor must submit to the
Inspection authority all the results of the type tests conducted by them for their
approval. However, if the PDIL/OWNER representative is not satisfied with the
results, he may ask for witnessing the specific test(s) at vendor’s cost.

representative for carrying out the tests as per standard/approved quality
assurance plan. Under no condition inspection can be waived off without the
3.02 No material shall be shipped until all the required tests are successfully completed
and certified “Cleared for despatch” by the inspection authority.
3.03 The procedure & extent of the following physical checks, routine & type test shall
be governed by Quality Assurance Plan mutually agreed and approved by
Inspection Authority.
TESTING AND INSPECTION PROCEDURE
- Dimensional check
ES-7332 0
INSTRUMENT CABLES
SHEET 5 OF 7
- Type tests for physical properties of PVC compound
as per IS 1554 PART-1, 1976
- Polyethylene insulation tests as per IS-6474 1984
- AC voltage test
The test shall be carried out at room temperature. AC voltage shall be
gradually increased and maintained at full value for specified time without
breakdown of insulation.
I) Between cores: 1500v for 10 minutes
ii) Between core and shield: 1000v for 1 minute
I) Between armour and shield: 500v for 1 minute

ii) Between adjacent shields: 125v for 1 minute
(for individual shielded cables only)
- Cable electrical parameter tests

I) Conductor resistance test
ii) Mutual capacitance test
iii) Mutual inductance test
iv) Insulation resistance test
v) Drain wire resistance including shield < 30 ohm/km
- Electrostatic Noise rejection ratio shall be over 76 db
- Spark test
Cable shall be subjected to AC voltages of 5000 volts.
- FRLS PVC tests for sheathing PVC compound.
I) Oxygen index : as per ASTM D2863.77

: 29 Min, at room temperature.
ii) Temp. index : As per ASTM D2863.77

: 250 deg c (min)
iii) HCL gas emission: As per IEC -754-1

: 20% (max.)
iv) Flammability: As per IEC 332 (part-1)
v) Smoke density: As per ASTM D2863.77

: 60% (max.)
vi) Armour test: As per IS 3975

Note:
a) The cables shall be submitted at manufacturer’s expenses to all the tests and
inspection required by this specification and standards mentioned herein.
b) Manufacturer shall obtain the approvals from the inspector for test house/
laboratories.
c) One sample of each lot of production shall be type tested in house or at a

laboratory approved/suggested by the inspecting agency at manufacturer’s
expenses.
ES-7332 0
INSTRUMENT CABLES
SHEET 6 OF 7
d) Certificates for PVC quality, galvanising of armour wire etc. to be furnished by

vendor.
4.00 Packing
Each cable drum shall be suitably packed and protected from damage due to
transportation, loading and unloading.
Sealing
Both the ends of the cable shall be sealed using PVC or Rubber caps,
additionally sealing tapes can be used if required. The caps should not be easily
removable during transportation. Main purpose of the sealing caps is to avoid
ingress of moisture during transportation and storage.
5.01 Marking on the cables
On the outer sheath of the cable, the PDIL code (part no.) shall be printed at 1
meter interval (letter size 3mm). The colour of marking ink shall be in contrast
with the outer sheath colour.
The pair numbers shall be printed on the multipair cables at 50mm interval (letter
size vendor to indicate.) Printing on tape is not acceptable.
Similarly the core numbers shall be printed on the multicore cables at 50mm
interval in case of unpaired cables (letter size vendor to indicate). The printing ink
to be used shall be of high quality and the marking should be visible inspite of
multiple handling.
5.02 Marking on the drum
2mm thick aluminium plate of dimension 300mm x 200mm shall be fixed with screws
on both sides of each drum. The following informations shall be punched/written by
dark ink on the plate.
- P.O. number and Mfr’s job no.
- Name of supplier and name of customer
- Drum No.
- Length of cable in the drum
- Resistance in ohms (this is to be measured by sorting two cores at one end.)
- Code no./type (e.g. 2 pair x 1.5mm2)
- Weight of drum with and without cable.
The letter size shall be 20mm (height) and between two lines the gap shall be 10mm.
6.00 Spares
Spares quantities are included in the main item quantity.
7.00 Documentation

ES-7332 0
INSTRUMENT CABLES
SHEET 7 OF 7

NO. DOCUMENT BID FOR FINAL
APPROVAL/ DOCUMENTS
INFORMATION BEFORE
WITHIN SIX DESPATCH OF
WEEKS CONSIGNMEN
T
1. Consolidated list of drawing & Yes Yes Yes
documents supplied by vendor.
2. Catalogue/leaflets/ technical Yes x Yes
literature giving details of
different cables manufactured
their specification, cross-
sectional details, dimensions,
RLC values, weights, bending
radius etc.
4. Certified cross-sectional x Yes(A) Yes
dimensional details of each type
of cable indicating tolerance
and minimum bending radius.
5. Test certificates of each cable x x Yes
parameters dimensional details
and FRLS quality certificate for
the lot(s).
6. List of cable drum indicating x x Yes
drum nos. with actual length in
each drum.
7. Quality Assurance Plan x Yes(A) x
(within 2 weeks)
(A) for Approval (I) for information
Sl. no. 1 to 6 shall be forwarded to PDIL/ OWNER as per details outlined in ITB/Order.
12P X1.5SQMM IS CABLE
EM0191-7064-ISP7332-00
INSTRUMENT CABLE
DOCUMENT NO.
PROJECT NO. PC150
PROJECT TFL P 25.05.2018 FOR COMMENTS GAP VS RKR
CUSTOMER M/s TFL REV DATE PURPOSE PREP CHKD APPD
Extruded HR PVC Type

1. PART NO. 9500 32. SHEATH MATL.
ST-2 Conf.to IS : 5831/84
INNER SHEATH
GENERAL
2. CABLE TYPE SIGNAL CABLE 33. THICKNESS (MIN) 0.6 mm
3. NUMBER OF PAIR 12 PAIR 34. COLOUR Black
4. VOLTAGE GRADE 1.1KV 35.
CONDUCTOR MATL. Electrolytic Annealed tinned 36.

5. copper conf. to
IS ; 813084 37. ARMOURING MATERIAL Hot dipped galvanised steel wire
CONDUCTOR
ARMOURING
ARMOURING
6 NUMBER OF STRANDS 7 38 WIRE DIA/THICKNESS (MM) As per IS 1554 part 1/88.
7 DIA OF EACH STRAND 0.54 mm (Appx.) 39. DIA 1.6 mm (Nom.)
9. CROSS SECTION AREA 1.5 mm2 40. Type Single Layer
Extruded HR PVC Type ST-2

OUTER SHEATH
10. INSULATION MATL. XLPE 41. OUTER SHEATH MATL. Conf.to IS : 5831/84 with FR
Properties.
INSULATION
11. INSULATION TYPE Extruded 42. OUTER SHEATH THK. (MM) 1.4 mm (Min.)
12. MIN.INSULATION THK. 0.6 mm 43. TEMPERATURE LIMIT 90 degC
13. TEMPERATURE LIMIT 90 degC 44.
At every meter, drum rolling to start

COLOUR CODE
14. ELEMENT FORMATION Pair Twisted,13-15 twists/m 45. CABLE LENGTH MARKING
from 0 mtr.
15. CABLE FORMATION Pair Twested & laidup 46 EACH PAIR COLOUR CODE Light blue, White
FORMATION
16. CORE/PAIR NUMBER At 100 mm interval 47 OUTER SHEATH COLOUR LIGHT BLUE
Annealed Bare Copper. 7

strand/0.5
strand/0 5 mm2/ 0
0.4
4 mm
17. COMMUNICATION PAIR 48
F
(Nom.) HR PVC insulated

/Green & red
18. SHIELD MATERIAL Helical Al-myler Tape 49
Max. Drain Wire resistance

19. THICKNESS (MM) 0.05 mm 50 30 Ohm/ Km / Note-1
including shield at 20 Deg.C
INDV. PAIR SHIELD
20. Overlap(Min.) /Coverage 30% / 100% 51 CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE AT 20°C<12.2 Ohm/ Km / Note-1
Annealed Tinned Copper. 7 MUTUAL CAPACITANCE between <250 pico farad/meter at a

21. DRAIN WIRE 52
strand / 0.5 mm2 adjacent cores frequancy of 1 KHz / Note-1
<400 pico farad/meter at a

22. INSULATOR/BINDER Polyester 53 CAPACITANCE CORE& SHIELD
frequancy of 1 KHz / Note-1
MECH. & ELEC. PROPERTIES
23. 54 MUTUAL INDUCTANCE <4 mH/Km / Note-1
24. SHIELD MATL. Helical Al-myler Tape 55 L/R RATIO <40 microH/ohm / Note-1
OVERALL SHIELD.
25. MIN. THICKNESS(MM) 0.075 mm 56 INSULATION RESISTANCE at 20°C >5 Gohm/Km/Note-1
Appx. DIA OVER / UNDER

26. Overlap(Min.) /Coverage 30% / 100% 57 18.6/21.8/Note-1
ARMOUR DIA. (MM)
Annealed Tinned Copper. 7

27. DRAIN WIRE 58 OVERALL DIA. 25 +/- 2.0 MM / Note-1
strand / 0.5 mm2
28. BINDER Polyester 59 MIN. BENDING RADIUS 15XOD / Note-1
NET WT. OF CABLE

29. 60 NOTE 1
(KG/KM)(Appx.)
DRUM LENGTH ( Non Returnable

30. 61 As per DRUM Schedule
Wooden Drum)
31. 62 TOTAL QUANTITY AS BOM

Note 1: Vendor to Specify. Vendor to offer as per standards.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Manufacturer's name , Year of manufacture, No. of Pair , Cross sectional area of conductor, Voltage Grade shall be
1 Marking on outer sheath embossed on outer sheath of cables. Also Sequential length marking shall be printed on outer sheath of cables within
every 1 meter interval.
2 Overall Quantity Tolerance +1.5 %
Electrostatic Noise
3 76 dB(min)
rejection ratio test
4 FR PROPERTIES (For outer sheath)
Minimum oxygen index as

a) 29% (Min.) as per ASTM D-2863
per ASTMD 2863
Minimum temperature index
b) 250 Deg.C (Min.) as per ASTM D-2863
as per ASTMD 2863
Max. HCL emission as per
c) 20 % (Max.) as per IEC-60754-1
IEC-754-1
Max. Smoke Density rating
d) 60 % (Max.) as per ASTM D-2863
as per ASTMD - 2843
Flammability test on
e) IEC-332-1
completed cable
5 High Voltage Test between :
a) Cores 1500 V for 10 minutes
b) Core & Shield 1000 V for 1 minutes
c) Armour & Shield 500 V for 1 minutes
d) Adjacent Shield 125 V for 1 minutes
6 Spark Test 4 kV rms
2 mm thick aluminum plate of dimension 300mm x 200 mm shall be fixed with screws on both sides of each drum. P.O
number & Manufacturer's Job no. , Name of supplier & name of customer , Drum No., Length of cable in the drum, /
7 Marking on Drums
Type & Weight of drum with & without cable shall be punched / written by dark ink on the plate . The letter size shall
be 20 mm (hight) & between two lines the gap shall be 10 mm.
IP X1.5SQMM IS CABLE
EM191-7064-ISP7332-00
INSTRUMENT CABLES DOCUMENT NO.
PROJECT NO.: PC150

PROJECT TFL 0 08.01.18 FOR COMMENTS AA HS SKT
CUSTOMER M/s TFL REV DATE PURPOSE PREP CHKD APPD
1 CABLE TYPE SIGNAL CABLE 32 SHEATH MATL.
ST-2 Conf.to IS : 5831/84
GENERAL
2 PART NUMBER 9501 33 THICKNESS (MM) 0.6 mm (Min.)
INNER
3 NUMBER OF PAIR 1 PAIR 34 COLOUR Black
4 VOLTAGE GRADE 1.1K V 35
Electrolytic Annealed Tinned

5 CONDUCTOR MATL. 36
Copper conf. to IS ; 813084
CONDUCTOR
6 NUMBER OF STRANDS 7 37 ARMOURING MATERIALS Hot dipped galavised steel wire
1.4 mm(Nom.) as per
ARMOUR
7 DIA OF EACH STRAND 0.54 mm (Appx.) 38 WIRE DIA/THICKNESS (MM)
IS 1554 part 1.
8 CROSS SECTION AREA 1.5 mm

2
39 Type Single Layer
9 40

10 INSULATION MTLS. XLPE 41 OUTER SHEATH MATL. ST-2 Conf.to IS : 5831/84 with FR
properties.
INSULATION
11 INSULATION TYPE Extruded 42 OUTER SHEATH THK. (MM) 1.4 (Min.)

OUTER
0
12 MIN. INSULATION THK. 0.6 mm 43 TEMPRATURE LIMIT 90 C
13 TEMPERATURE LIMIT 44
90 degC
At every meter, drum rolling to start
14 CABLE FORMATION Pair Twisted 45 CABLE LENGTH MARKING
from 0 mtr.
15 NO. OF TWISTS/METRE 13 - 15 Twist/mtr. 46 EACH PAIR COLOUR CODE Light blue, White
16 CORE/PAIR NUMBER - 47 OUTER SHEATH COLOUR Light Blue

COLOUR
17 COMMUNICATION PAIR N/A 48
18 BINDER - 49
MAX. DRAIN WIRE RESISTANCE

19 SHIELD MATERIAL - 50 30 Ohm/Km / Note-1
HIELD
0
INCLUDING SHIELD AT 20 C
INDV. PAIR SH
0
20 THICKNESS - 51 CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE AT 20 C < 12.2 Ohm/ Km core / / Note-1
<250 pico farad/meter at a frequancy

21 Overlap(Min.) /Coverage - 52 CAPACITANCE ADJ. CORES
of 1 KHz / Note-1
<400 pico farad/meter at a frequancy
22 53 CAPACITANCE CORE & SHIELD
of 1 KHz / Note-1
23 DRAIN WIRE - 54 MUTUAL INDUCTANCE at 1 KHz < 4.0 mH/km/ Note-1

ELEC.
55 L/R RATIO < 40 mH/ohm/ Note-1
0
25 56 INSULATION RESISTANCE AT 20 C >5 Gohm/Km/Note-1
MECH.
Appx. DIA OVER / UNDER ARMOUR DIA.

26 SHIELD MATERIAL Helical Al-myler Tape 57 7.5/ 10.95 Note-1
(MM)
OVERALL SHIELD.
27 MIN. THICKNESS (MM) 0.075 58 OVERALL DIA. 13.5 +/-2.0 MM/ Note-1
28 Overlap(Min.) /Coverage 30% /100 % 59 MIN. BENDING RADIUS 15 XOD/ Note-1
Annealed Tinned Copper. 7

29 DRAIN WIRE 2 60 NET WT. OF CABLE (KG/KM)(Appx.) NOTE-1
strand / 0.5 mm
DRUM LENGTH ( Non Returnable
30 BINDER Polyester 61 As per Drum Schedule
Wooden Drum)
31 62 TOTAL QUANTITY AS PER BOM

Note 1: Vendor to Specify. Vendor to offer as per standards.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Manufacturer's name , Year of manufacture, No. of Pair , Cross sectional area of conductor, Voltage Grade shall be
1 Marking on outer sheath embossed on outer sheath of cables. Also Sequential length marking shall be printed on outer sheath of cables within every 1
meter interval.
2 Overall Quantity Tolerance +1.5 %
Electrostatic Noise rejection ratio

3 76 dB(min)
test
4 FR PROPERTIES (For outer sheath)
Minimum oxygen index as per

a) 29% (Min.) as per ASTM D-2863
ASTMD 2863
Minimum temperature index as
b) 250 Deg.C (Min.) as per ASTM D-2863
per ASTMD 2863
Max. HCL emission as per IEC-754-
c) 20 % (Max.) as per IEC-60754-1
1
Max. Smoke Density rating as per
d) 60 % (Max.) as per ASTM D-2863
ASTMD - 2843
Flammability test on completed
e) IEC-332-1
cable
5 High Voltage Test between :
a) Cores 1500 V for 10 minutes
b) Core & Shield 1000 V for 1 minutes
c) Armour & Shield 500 V for 1 minutes
6 Spark Test 4 kV rms
2 mm thick aluminum plate of dimension 300mm x 200 mm shall be fixed with screws on both sides of each drum. P.O
number & Manufacturer's Job no. , Name of supplier & name of customer , Drum No., Length of cable in the drum, Code no.
7 Marking on Drums
(ie. 937164001) / Type & Weight of drum with & without cable shall be punched / written by dark ink on the plate . The letter
size shall be 20 mm (hight) & between two lines the gap shall be 10 mm.
NIT FOR PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - 7 0
Page 1 of 7
SERVICES AT TFL, TALCHER
FOR
JUNCTION BOXES & ACCESSORIES
P 15.04.2019 15.04.2019 ISSUED FOR ENQ GAP RA RA

All rights reserved
PDIL DOC. NO. PC150-0000-7069
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Date 15.04.2019
REV P SHEET 2 OF 7
TABLE OF CONTENT
1. INTRODUCTION
2. SCOPE
3. REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
4. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
5. INSPECTION AND TESTING
6. DOCUMENTATION
7. IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING
ATTACHMENTS:-
 JUNCTION BOXES DATA SHEETS

 CHECK LIST
 ITP
PDIL DOC. NO. PC150-0000-7069
REV P SHEET 3 OF 7
1. INTRODUCTION
DEFINITIONS
The following definition shall apply:
OWNER : TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD

BIDDER: Bidder who is opting to quote for the supply as specified in this document
SITE : TALCHER
2. SCOPE
2.1 These specifications and the data sheet cover requirement for design, engineering,
manufacturing, assembly, and supply, documentation, testing at manufacture’s works, packing
and shipping of the JUNCTION BOXES & ACCESSORIES , In case of any conflict between
these specifications, the data sheets, related codes and standards etc. bidder shall refer the
matter in writing to the purchaser, and shall obtain clarification in writing before submitting the
offer.
2.2 Enclosed data sheets specify the material for junction boxes. Unless specifically indicated
otherwise, alternate superior material of construction shall also be acceptable provided vendor
assumes complete responsibility for the selected materials for their compatibility with the
specified fluid and its operating conditions.
3. REFERENCE CODES & STANDARDS
a. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads General purpose (Inch)
b. EN European Standards
10204 Inspection Documents For Metallic Products
c. IS/IEC Indian Standard/International/Electro-technical Commission

IS/IEC 60529 Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
IS/IEC 60079 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere.
IS-5 Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels.
4. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
Design Requirements for Junction Boxes
4.1 Junction boxes, Cable Glands and Plugs shall be of the following type:-
a. Weather proof and flameproof
PDIL DOC. NO. PC150-0000-7069
REV P SHEET 4 OF 7
4.2 Unless otherwise specified, the Junction Box, Cable Glands and Plugs shall conform to the
Following standards:
a. Weatherproof housing: IP 65 to IS/IEC -60529 and
b. Flameproof housing: Flameproof/Ex (d) (to Zone-1 IIA/B as minimum) as per IS/IEC-60079.
4.3 Number of entries and their location shall be as per data sheets. Junction boxes with top entries
shall not be offered. The size of cable entries shall be as per the cable sizes / Cable gland sizes
indicated in the data sheet.
4.4 Junction boxes shall be provided with telephone sockets and plugs for connection of Hand
powered telephone set.
4.5 The materials of construction of junction boxes shall be cast light metal alloy preferably die
cast aluminium (LM6).
4.6 Flameproof junction box shall have detachable cover, which shall be fixed to the box by means of
cadmium plated triangular head/ hexagonal head screws.
4.7 Terminals shall be spring loaded, vibration proof, screw type, mounted on nickel plated steel rails
complete with end cover and clamps for each row.
4.8 All terminals used in the junction boxes shall be suitable for accepting cable sizes between 0.5
mm2 and minimum 6mm2.
4.9 Junction Boxes shall have 2 entries for Multi pair/ triad and 12 entries for single pair/
triad cables. The junction boxes shall be supplied with cable glands with PVC sleeves/
shrouds and plugs for all the entries.
4.10 All Cable glands shall be double compression type for use with armoured cables. The
cable glands shall be of nickel plated brass, as a minimum.
4.11 Unless higher number of terminals are specified in the purchaser's data sheet, the number of
terminals in the junction boxes shall be 48 Nos in two rows duly numbered.
4.12 The colour of the terminals shall be Blue/ Grey.
4.13 Junction boxes shall be provided with external earthing lugs.
4.14 Sizing shall be done with due consideration for accessibility and maintenance in accordance
with the following guidelines:
a) 50 mm (minimum) gap shall be maintained between terminals/ terminal strip and sides/
top/ bottom of the Junction box.
b) 100 mm (minimum) gap shall be maintained between the terminal strips
4.15 Surface shall be prepared for painting. It shall be smooth and devoid of rust and scale.
4.16 Two coats of lead‐free base prim er and two final coats of lead free epoxy based paint shall be
Applied both for interior and exterior surfaces. The colour shall be Light Blue/ Light Gray as
per datasheet.
5.0 INSPECTION & TESTING

PDIL DOC. NO. PC150-0000-7069
REV P SHEET 5 OF 7
The detailed scope of Third party inspection and testing is as given below:
5.1 The Bidder shall develop inspection and testing procedure (ITP) for each type of item with
respect to all specific requirements as applicable to ensure compliance with codes and
applicable standards .Bidder shall submit ITP for approval from client.
5.2 Bidder shall carryout 100% inspection for compliance with requirements of specifications at
every stage of manufacturing. Bidder shall maintain records / documents of all the inspection
/ tests carried out and shall satisfy itself about the acceptability of the item before offering for
third party inspection.
5.3 Immediately after the completion of electrical tests , the ends of the cable shall be sealed to
prevent ingress of moisture with suitable PVC/ rubber caps.
5.4 CLIENT/PMC reserves the right to review / inspect / witness the items at any stage of
inspection.
5.5 The list of approved inspection agency Is:-
a) Engineering India Limited
b) Lloyds Register of Shipping
c) Project & Development India Limited
d) Mecon Limited
e) SGS India Pvt. Ltd.
f) RITES Limited
g) Det Norske Veritas
h) TUV Rhineland (I) Pvt. Ltd.
i) TUV India Pvt. Ltd
6.0 DOCUMENTATION
6.1 All the data sheet , documents and drawings etc. shall be submitted to client. The purchase
order initiation will not be considered complete until all the documentation has been
submitted by the Bidder and has been accepted by the client/PMC.
6.2 All the documents shall be A4 or A3 size only; all the document prints larger than A4 shall be
folded to A4 size with identification data visible at the bottom right.
6.3 All the documents submitted shall be clearly marked with following information;-
a) CLIENT/PMC purchase order number, item no. and identification tag no.
b) Bidder job no., document no. and revision no.
7.0 IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING

Name Plate on Junction Boxes Consist of
a. Tag No. as per purchaser's datasheet
b. Manufacturer's name.
c. Manufacturers serial no. and model no.
PDIL DOC. NO. PC150-0000-7069
REV P SHEET 6 OF 7
d. Type of protection for use in hazardous area (This should be stamped on individual cable
glands and plugs also)
e. Junction box shall have a warning engraved on cover as “ISOLATE POWER SUPPLY
ELSEWHERE BEFORE OPENING
Other details as per MR shall also be suitably indicated on the Junction Box.
8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDER
8.1 In case of any conflict between “Technical Specifications for JUNCTION BOXES &
ACCESSORIES" and the data sheets, the latter shall govern.
8.2 Bidder to submit documents (as specified in this specification) along with the offer
submitted for technical evaluation.
8.3 Bidder to submit soft copies of all document & drawing . Bidder shall not be proceeding
with manufacturing without document approval from Client/PMC.
8.4 Bidder to submit soft copies of the catalogues, manufacturer material test certificates,TPI
test certificates to Client/PMC one week before dispatch of material for
review/verification.
8.5 The owner reserves the right to reject or accept any tender without assigning any reasons
whatsoever.
The offer shall be in following format only. Each section shall be separately segregated &
highlighted with distinct Marker / Flags between the sections. Offer submitted in any other format
shall not be considered for evaluation & summarily rejected.
Section 1: Signed and stamped (on each page) copy of complete specifications shall be
submitted as a confirmation of acceptance of this tender specification without any deviations.
Section 2: Deviations to specification if any shall be clearly listed under this section. If there are
no deviations, Bidder shall say “NO DEVIATIONS” under this section. Deviations mentioned
elsewhere in the offer shall be considered null and void and shall not be considered for offer
evaluation. In absence of any written deviation clearly specified in the offer under this section, it
will be assumed that all the specifications and requirements of the subject tender are complied
with and No deviations whatever will be accepted after the placement of order.
Section 3: Complete technical catalogues, calculation sheets, dimensional and installation

drawings of the offered instrument shall be attached against this section. Wherever asked to
furnish details under the technical specifications, the same shall be included in this section. Offer
without calculation sheets (if applicable) & Dimensional drawings of each item shall not be
accepted.
Section 4: The offer shall only be submitted in the SOR Format provided. Offer submitted in any
other format is not acceptable & may be liable for rejection.
PDIL DOC. NO. PC150-0000-7069
REV P SHEET 7 OF 7
Section 5: Check list confirmation

JUNCTION BOX (Ex PROOF)
DATA SHEET & BOQ
1 TAG NO. JB-01/ JB-02/ SPARE

2 QTY 3
3 APPLICATION IS
4 AREA CLASSIFICATION Zone-1,Gr.IIA/IIB, T3 as per IEC
GENERAL 5 ENCLOSURE WP (IP-66) & EExd IIC T3
6 MOC Die cast aluminium (LM6).
7 OVERALL DIMENSION As Minimum
8 COVER Screwed
9 GASKET Neoprene / Silicon Gasket
10 NO . OF ENTRY (Only Bottom) 12
11 CABLE GLAND Double compression SS316 , IP66 & Ex Proof as area classification
SINGLE CABLE
12 SIZE M20
13
14 NO . OF ENTRY (Only Bottom) 1
Double compression SS316 , IP66 & Ex Proof as area classification ,
Bidder to note that Cable glands shall be as follows
15 CABLE GLAND 12 Nos of Blid plugs( SS304MOC) with Each JB
MULTIPAIR 12 Nos Of Double compression gland with each JB suitable for brach cable
M32
16 SIZE
01 No of Double compression Cable Gland Suitbale for Multi pair cable
17
18 TYPE Dinrail mounting
19 QUANTITY 54
TERMINALS 20 NO. OF ROWS DOUBLE
21 NUMBERING SYSTEM As per BOQ
22
23 STOPING PLUG WITH NUT LOCK REQUIRED
24 BREATHER REQUIRED
25 TAG LABEL REQUIRED
OPTIONS
26 RAIL FOR TERMINAL REQUIRED
27 EARTHING 10mm SS internal/external earth stud.
28 All MOUNTING ACCESSORIES REQUIRED
29 MANUFACTURE
OTHER
30 MODEL
PDIL DOC. NO. JUNCTION BOXES &
CHECK LIST EM0240-CKL-001
ACCESSORIES

Sr. DESCRIPTION Bidder’s
NO Response
1 Have you any deviations to the following:
i) Technical Specifications (clausewise)
ii) Data sheet & Tag List
iii) BOQ
If `yes' have you included
the list of deviations? (If no deviations are furnished, it will be assumed
that all the specifications and requirements of the subject requisition are
complied with and no deviations whatever will be accepted after the
placement of order.)
2 Signed and stamped copy of the tender document to be submitted by the
bidder along with the quote.
3 Have you enclosed the relevant technical catalogue/Literature in
ENGLISH language including model decoding details, drawings etc.
necessary for the evaluation of your offer?
4 Have you furnished, separately the `Shop inspection charges, if any, for
inspection at your works by Third party? (The details of the tests to be
carried out on the instruments during shop inspection are to be furnished)
5 Have you furnished the certificates from statutory bodies vis. BASEEFA,
FM, CSA etc. for the Explosion proof construction / intrinsically safe
design of the instruments, wherever specified?
6 Have you furnished the certificates from statutory authority i.e., CCOE
certificate for all electrical equipments for intrinsically safe/ explosion
proof design wherever specified?
7 Have you furnished the customer reference list in India/Abroad.
8 Standard ITP is attached for reference. Have you furnished detailed ITP.

IF the answer is 'NO' , then furnish reasons thereof.
JUNCTION BOX -CONVENTIONAL
INSPECTION TEST PLAN
INSPECTION TEST PL AN provides the necessary tests / measurements to be carried out on raw materials used for manufacture /
assembly and on finished products to ensure the deliverable products meet the customer requirements. All test results of Inward
materials and finished products are recorded in specified formats. All testing and records are traceable as per QMS standards.
Product Terminal Junction Box Order No
Type Code Project No
Customer End User

Item Quantum Acceptance AGENCY
No Type Category Reference document Remarks
Description check Criteria D R W
I INWARD INSPECIFICATION
As per manufacturer As per approved

I Junction Box Visual Major 100% M C -
data sheet drawings
2 Terminal Blocks Visual Minor Sample M C -
data sheet drawings
Din Rail & As per manufacturer As per approved
3. Visual Minor Sample M C -
Hardware data sheet drawings
Cable Glands & As per manufacturer As per approved
4. Visual Minor Sample M C -
Plugs data sheet drawings
II FINAL TESTS

1. Physical Test Visual Major 100% M C -
data sheet drawings
D – Done By, R – Reviewed By, W – Witnessed By, M – Manufacturer, C – Customer / Third Party
NOTE :
1. Sample tests wherever specified will be carried out as per Inspection guide lines.
Rev. Revised By Date Prepared GAP Title: Page

0 05.01.2018 05.01.2018 Approved RKR QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
0
Issued PDIL Document No.: ITP-7069
NIT FOR
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC - 7 0
ENQUIRY SPECIFICATION
FOR
FLOW ELEMENTS
0 15.04.2019 15.04.2019 ISSUED FOR ENQ GAP RA RA

PC150-E-7036
ENQUIRY SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENT NO
FLOW ELEMENTS
SHEET 2 OF 2
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
ATTACHMENT No of Sheets
DRAWINGS/
SL. NO. NO. /
DOCUMENTS.DESCRIPTION
DOCCUMENT NO
ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS 07
1. ES-7261
FOR FLOW ELEMENTS
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION FOR PC150-7036-ISP- -

2.
FLOW ELEMENTS 7261
SPARE PART LIST 01
3.
LIST OF FLOW ELEMENT ORIFICE TYPE (AONLA-1)
SL. NO. TAG NO. QTY

1.0 FE-101 1

ES-7261 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
FLOW ELEMENTS
S.K TRIPATHI C. R.N SINGH

BHATTACHA
0 05.02.99 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION DDCPN CISC DHPV
ES-7261 0
FLOW ELEMENTS
SHEET 2 OF 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
AND APPROVAL
4.0 PACKING
5.0 MARKING & IDENTIFICATION
6.0 SPARES
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS

ES-7261 0
FLOW ELEMENTS
SHEET 3 OF 7
1.00 General
herewith define the technical requirement for the supply of Flow elements, their
accessories, name plate marking, documentation, testing-inspection and packing.
2.01 Orifice Assemblies
2.01.01 Orifice plates shall be designed in accordance with ISO 5167 unless otherwise
specified with vent/ drain calculation. The orifice assembly will include orifice plate,
flanges, studs, nuts, gaskets, plugs, jack bolts and spacer ring.
2.01.02 The construction of orifice assemblies shall be as per standard sketches mentioned
in the Instrument specification sheets, wherever the drawings are not indicated in
the specification sheets the construction shall be in accordance with ASME
B16.36(latest edition). The order scope includes submission of orifice assembly
construction drawing prepared by vendor on the basis of above.
2.01.03 Small precision bore orifices shall be calculated and manufactured as per ASME”
Fluid meters, Their theory and Application”. Pressure tappings shall be of 1/2”
NPT(F). If not otherwise specified against individual orifice specifications.
2.01.04 The orifice plate shall be of the square edge concentric type unless otherwise
specified and material shall be 304SS or 316SS if otherwise not stated in the
instrument specification sheet. For temperature above 300°C the plate material shall
be selected with respect to the thermal expansion, so that it is not greater than the
thermal expansion of the flange.
2.01.05 Orifice flanges shall have ½” NPT(F) flange taps unless otherwise specified and
have a minimum rating of 300lbs flanges with taps shall be in accordance with ANSI
B 16.36
2.01.06 Wherever welded type orifice with branch pipe has been specified, the branch pipe
length shall be designed considering minimum 10D upstream & 5D downstream
lengths.
2.02 Nozzles Assemblies

2.02.01 Nozzle sizing, design & construction shall as per ISO 5167/ ISA 1932 with corner
taps. The order scope includes submission of nozzle assembly construction drawing
prepared by vendor on the basis of the above or any sketch and guidelines
furnished with the enquiry.
2.02.02 For Butt welded flow sections of full welded type nozzles i.e. without flanges the
length of flow sections or branch pipes shall be as follows :
ES-7261 0
FLOW ELEMENTS
SHEET 4 OF 7
PIPE SIZE SECTION LENGTH PIPE SIZE SECTION LENGTH

NOMINAL BORE (BRANCH PIPE) NOMINAL (BRANCH PIPE)
BORE
2” 600 mm 8” 1300 mm
3” 700 mm 10” 1600 mm
4” 800 mm 12” 1900 mm
6” 1000 mm 14” 2200 mm
2.02.03 The distances from inlet flow section to nozzle inlet plane shall be 2/3 of the total
flow section.
2.02.04 Bevelled ends for butt welding shall be as per ASME B 16.25
The material of the nozzle shall normally be 316 SS, if not otherwise stated in the
instrument specification sheet and the flow section of the same material and
schedule as the process pipe. Pressure tappings shall be corner taps with 1/2” NPT
(F) threads. Tapping shall be 900 apart.
2.03 Venturi Tube
2.03.01 The venturi tubes shall be “Herschel type” conforming to ISO5167. The order scope
includes submission of venturi assembly construction drawing prepared by vendor
on the basis of the above or any sketch and guidelines furnished with the enquiry.
2.03.02 The venturi shall be either one piece type, welding in insert type or fabricated type
with flow sections in line with the instrument specification sheet.
2.04 Each pair of flanges for orifice & nozzle assemblies shall be assembled, inserting a
disc of suitable soft material for protection of gasket bearing surface with relevant
studs-bolts and nuts slightly tightened complete with extraction screws and plugs.
2.05 Each pair of flanges for orifice & nozzle assemblies ( except those of austentic
stainless steel ) shall be protected with a suitable anti rust coating, removable by tri-
chloro ethylene or petroleum.
2.06 Wherever orifices or flow nozzles are specified with branch pipe, the pipe inner
surface shall have mirror finish. The branch pipes shall have higher schedule so that
the I.D. of branch pipes shall be less than the nozzle I.D. The inner surfaces of
branch pipes then shall be machined with mirror finish to match with the I.D. of flow
nozzle. In case higher schedule for pipes are not available then the branch pipes
shall be machined from forged pieces.
2.07 If NACE certification is specified in the Instrument specification sheet then the
material composition and hardness tests shall be carried out for the components
coming in contact with the fluid as per MR-0175-94 or latest edition. The tests shall
be carried out in an approved laboratory.
2.08 For Steam, BFW & condensate services the flow elements shall be IBR certified. For
items of foreign origin the certification shall be done by Lloyds or any other IBR
approved authorities in specific IBR format.
2.09 Radiography Ultrasonic tests shall be done for all flange assemblies of rating 900#
& above. Concentric serrated facing shall be provided for flanges upto 600# ratings.
Flanges of rating 900# and above shall have RTJ facing with octagonal grove as per
ES-7261 0
FLOW ELEMENTS
SHEET 5 OF 7
ASME B16.20.
2.10 The exact value of β shall be decided after calculation based on selected pressure
drop across the flow element. The bore and differential pressure shall be selected
so that the ratio of bore diameter and ID of pipe (d/D) does not exceed 0.70 and fall
below 0.25, otherwise change in process line size need be considered. Sizing ∆P at
max. flow has been given in the specification sheet.
2.11 For superheated steam service refer steam table for degree of super heat.
2.12 Components made of copper and copper alloys exposed to atmosphere and coming
in contact with the operating fluid must not be used for ammonia & urea services.
The inspection and testing requirement shall be as per the relevant ASTM
standards. The procedure & extent of checks shall be governed by Quality
Assurance Plan mutually agreed and approved by Inspection Authority.
Within two weeks of receipt of the LOI/order the vendor must contact the Inspection
such cases, shall be conducted/agreed by vendor’s Quality Department and the
results of tests shall be forwarded alongwith the supply.
The manufacturer shall give clear 15 days notice informing readiness of the material
at manufacturer’s works. The vendor shall permit the authorised representative of
PDIL/OWNER to inspect the manufacture and assembly of the flow assemblies in
various phases in compliance with mutually agreed quality assurance plan,
standards and specifications.
the results of all the checks/tests conducted before presenting for PDIL/Owner’s
inspection.

representative for carrying out the checks/calibration as per standard/approved
quality assurance plan. Under no condition inspection can be waived off without the
4.00 Packing
Each orifice assembly shall be packed in assembled condition as follows:
For Raised Face Assembly
With the required nos. of studs and nuts, 2 nos. of gaskets, 2 nos. of extraction
screws, 4 nos. of hexagonal headed plugs (2 per flange) and spacer ring ( in place
of orifice plate ) having the same thickness as orifice plate.
For Ring Joint Assembly

ES-7261 0
FLOW ELEMENTS
SHEET 6 OF 7
With the required nos. of studs and nuts, 2 nos. of extraction screws, 4 nos. of
hexagonal headed plugs (2 per flange) and ring joint spacer( in place of ring-joint
holder with orifice plate ) having the same dimensions of the orifice ring joint holder.
Each orifice plate shall be separately packed taking due care against damage of
plates during, handling, transportation and storage.
The flow measuring assemblies, the orifice plates and the spares (gaskets) shall be
despatched as a single consignment.
The following information are required to be stamped on flow measuring assembly

and accessories.
On Flange Periphery
1. Tag no.
2. Nominal size in inches & rating
3. Type of flange i.e. weld neck (WN) on slip-on (SO) & facing i.e. RF / FF / RJ
4. Flange material & group
5. Identification for IBR (wherever applicable)
6. Manufacturer’s stamp
On Orifice Plate
1. Tag no.
2. Orifice bore
3. Pipe nominal bore
4. ASME rating & facing
5. Material of orifice
6. Inlet
On Spacer Ring
1. Tag no.
2. Pipe nominal bore
3. ANSI rating & facing
4. Material of spacer
On Nozzle/ Venturi
1. Flow direction
2. Tag no.
3. Nozzle bore & material
4. Pipe schedule, material and heat no.
6.00 Spares
Spares shall be as per enclosed spares list.
7.00 Documentation
ES-7261 0
FLOW ELEMENTS
SHEET 7 OF 7


NO. DOCUMENT BID FOR APPROVAL/ FINAL
WITHIN SIX BEFORE
WEEKS DESPATCH OF
CONSIGNMENT
1. Consolidated list of Yes Yes (I) Yes
drawing & documents.

3. Dimensional and sectional x Yes(I) Yes

drawing against each tag
showing material of
construction of each part.
4. Chemical analysis and x x Yes

material test certificates
from an approved
laboratory.
5. IBR certificate (wherever x x Yes
applicable)
6. NACE certificate (where x x Yes
applicable) from an
approved laboratory.
7. Bore calculations as per x Yes(A) Yes
relevant standards.
8. Quality Assurance Plan. x Yes(A) x

(within 2 weeks)
(A) for Approval (I) for information.
Sl. no. 1 to 9 shall be forwarded to PDIL/ OWNER as per details outlined in Enquiry/ order.

PC150-7036-ISP-7261
FLOW ELEMENT ORIFICE
DOCUMENT NO
PROJECT NO. : PC150 4

PROJECT : RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR 3
PLANT : RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR 2
CUSTOMER : TFL 1 27.08.15 CLIENTS COMMENTS INCORPORATED KM VS RKR
REQ. NO. : PC150-E-7036 0 22.08.15 CLIENTS COMMENTS INCORPORATED KM VS RKR
ORDER NO. : P 19.06.15 DRAFT ENQUIRY KM AA MN
MANUFACTURER : REV DATE PURPOSE PREP CHKD APPR.
1. TYPE OF ELEMENT : SQUARE EDGED ORIFICE PLATE OPTIONS
2. CONSTRUCTION STANDARD : ASME B16.36 A) FLANGED TAP
B) CORNER TAP
3. CALCULATION STANDARD : ISO-5167 C) D/ D/2
D) CARRIER RING
4. BASE TEMPERATURE ( DEG. C ) : 15.56 E) 1/2" NPT(F) TAP SIZE
F) 1/2" SW TAP SIZE
5. BASE PRESSURE ( KG/ CM2 ) : 1.03323 G) VENT HOLE
H) DRAIN HOLE
I) IBR/ LLYOD'S CERTIFICATE
J) NACE CERTIFICATE
TAG. NO. QTY. P&I LINE ASSEMBLY OPTG./DEGN OPTG./DEGN MOL. OPTG. ELEMENT LINE NPS
NO. NUMBER DIFF.
FLANGE MATL / NO. SIZE & PLATE FLUID FLOW TEMP. PRESS. WT. /
VISCOSITY
TYPE in " /THK d/D
/ SCHEDULE OF TAPPING RATING MATERIAL / FLOW(Kg/h) DEG C Kg/ DENSITY Cp/Cv RANGE in inch VENDOR'S OFFER /
/FLUID RANGE (BETA) OPTIONS
THICKNESS MIN /NOR./MAX Cm2 g Kg/m3 (IN cP) IN /Sch DEVIATION
STATE (Kg/hr) RATIO
KG/CM2
SS316 /
PC150- 36"-RW-
1 A350-LF2/ 1 SET + 3.18 MM , AMMONIA/ 36"/__/ SCH by
FE-101 1000- 36"-5:% 001- 1500/3300/4500 0-5000 40/75 1.5/15 990 18 1 ORIFICE 0.3 C,E
1 SET SPARE NOTE 2 & LIQUID XS vendor
0020 B24
4
NOTE :
1. ORIFICE SHALL BE SUPPLIED AS A COMPLETE ASSEMBLY WITH FLANGES, GASKETS , SPACER RINGS, JACK BOLT WITH NUT ETC.
2.VENDOR TO SUPPLY ORIFICE CALCULATION SHEET & ASSEMBLY DRAWING ALONG WITH THE QUOTATION.
3.VENDOR TO CONFIRM TO ES - 7261.
4. Vendor to Specfiy Plate thickness suitable according to Linesize, Pressure, temp and rating.
8' Drain/Vent hole where applicable and Plate thickness shall be in accordance with ISO-5167/ISA-RP-3.2/API-2530/ IS-2952/ASME-MFC-3M requirements
SHEET 1 OF 1
PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC-VI-8.0 0
SHEET 1 OF 12
SECTION: VI-8.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
CONSTRUCTION, ERECTION, PRECOMMISSIONING,
COMMISSIONING & START-UP
PLANT: CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER RESERVOIR,

FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND
SERVICES

ODISHA (INDIA)
1 15.04.19 ISSUED FOT IMPLEMENTATION DILIP DILIP GC

0 14.03.19 FOR REVIEW DILIP DILIP GC
P 19.02.19 FOR REVIEW DILIP DILIP GC
REV EFF DATE PURPOSE PREPD REVWD APPD
CONSTRUCTION/ ERECTION, PC150/E/112/SEC-8.0 1
PRECOMMISSIONING, COMMISSIONING
FOR DOCUMENT NO REV
PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES AT TFL SHEET 2 of 12

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Sl. No. DESCRIPTION

1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS AND SERVICES – CONTRACTOR
2.0 SCOPE OF WORKS AND SERVICES PRE-COMMISSIONING
3.0 MECHANICAL COMPLETION
4.0 COMMISSIONING


CONSTRUCTION/ ERECTION, PC150/E/112/SEC-VI-8.0 1
FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK AND SERVICES – CONTRACTOR
This section of the Tender Documents deals mainly with the Scope and general
Specifications needed for the execution and construction of Raw Water and Fire Water
Reservoir, Pump House and Services. Contractor shall be responsible for supply of
materials, construction and erection of the system including but not limited to the following.
Contractor shall ensure that Construction Sub-Contractor delivers and responsible for:
1.1 Provide and supply in due course all Construction & Erection Equipments \ Machineries,
tools and tackles, consumables, manpower and Temporary Facilities necessary for
implementation of the Work but not limited to following:
1. Construction sheds.
2. Construction offices.
3. Temporary Communication facilities.
For Office / Store etc. only Pre-Engineered/Pr-Fab fire rated panels Porta
Cabins to be considered and shall be arranged by the contractor at his own
cost.
1.2 Establish and operate adequate material control system at site for materials from
Contractor and its receipt, loading/unloading, inspection, maintenance, handling, storage
and utilization to ensure all Equipment and Materials are preserved and available as
necessary for completion of the system. The Material Control System of Contractor and
Sub-Contractor shall be aligned for efficient and smooth flow of materials.
1.3 Provide and supply all staff, tradesmen and labours for implementation & control of the
Construction & Erection Works. Contractor shall follow the prevailing state labour laws and
shall be responsible for all the legal and statutory compliances.
1.4 Contractor shall be responsible for labour verification / reference checks to ensure that
unscrupulous elements do not enter the project site.
1.5 Establishment and monitoring of overall construction policy and procedures for the system
as implemented time to time.
1.6 Provision of overall management and control of construction phase of the system.
1.7 Ensuring that all parts of the system are constructed and tested strictly in accordance with
the specifications and applicable codes and standards asked for in the project documents.
1.8 Ensuring that construction is accomplished in accordance with the schedules.
1.9 Provide transportation of all Equipment and Materials under the Contract from storage point
to Site.

CONSTRUCTION/ ERECTION, PC150/E/112/SEC-VI-8.0 1
FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

1.10 Construct, operate and maintain all temporary facilities required for its personnel involved
in the Work.
1.11 Provide transportation in the area of the Site and between Site and temporary facilities for
all its personnel involved in the implementation of the Work, including field labour,
administrative staff, etc.
1.12 Recruit field staff and organize, manage and supervise its Construction Subcontractors and
field labour for the Work.
1.13 Provide liaison with Contractor to ensure that the system is constructed in accordance with
the respective standard and specifications, set forth in the Contract.
1.14 Establish with Contractor adequate procedures, control and reporting systems to provide
close control of the progress of the Work.
1.15 Provision of labour and facilities for loading, unloading and transportation of the Equipment
within the site area.
1.16 Performance and / or provision of all other works and / or services required for performance
of the Work.
1.17 Prefabrication of piping spools in a shop on the Site.
1.18 Erection and installation of Equipments and auxiliary facilities associated with system.
1.19 Field fabrication of structural steelwork, ladders, handrails, stairs and platform of the
system.
1.20 Erection of all structural steelwork.
1.21 Installation of pipe work including field fabrication of the system.
1.22 Installation and testing of all instrumentation network and equipment of the system.
1.23 Installation and testing of electrical system and equipment of the system.
1.24 Painting of steelworks, piping, Equipment and of the system
1.25 Pre-commissioning of the system.
1.26 Carrying out Mechanical Completion as per finally approved P&ID after HAZOP Study.
1.27 Perform all material identification as per applicable codes and standards.
1.28 Deleted
1.29 Contractor Provides drawings and documents as required.
1.30 Supply to OWNER through Contractor complete test records within three (3) days after
completion of actual testing.

FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

1.31 Installation and testing (hydro testing, radiography, holiday test) of all underground /above
ground piping.
1.32 Contractor shall ensure and shall be solely responsible for safety in all activities.
1.33 Supply the materials in order to execute Work as per Contract.
Contractor shall be responsible for providing services and materials for construction of all
temporary facilities, which are essential for successful completion of construction and
erection.
The Contractor shall establish, operate and maintain all temporary facilities, such as, but
not limits to:
a) Labour camp / officers camps
b) Fabrication shops / yard
c) Workshop for maintenance of construction / testing equipment.
d) Field drawing office
e) Temporary warehouses, including open storage yards.
f) Construction offices (including facilities for photocopying of A3 size, email,

drawing reproduction, printer etc.)
g) First aid and Basic Medical Facilities.
h) Drinking water facilities, toilets etc.,
i) All temporary or approach roads for carrying out the Work including temporary
approach roads for access to contractor’s site office / workshop / camp, etc.
ground preparation for heavy lifts including approaches to cranes for heavy lifts.
Owner does not take any responsibility for making temporary roads. Canteen &
catering facilities for all Contractor’s work force. All drainage around the facilities
created for his Work, and sewage disposal arrangements for labour camps /
officers camps, site offices, etc. All winterization requirements for personnel /
materials & equipment, Necessary transport for movement of its personnel,
construction Equipment and Materials, consumables, etc,
j) Watering of roads through water tankers for dust suppression.
k) All temporary lighting for working during night. (Electrical network for construction
workshop & site, and Construction contractor shall be responsible for paying
electricity bill for his site electrical facilities and network)
1.34 All excess soil shall be disposed off, leveled and compacted by Contractor outside / inside
the premises in a location designated by Owner’s representative.

FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

1.35 Perform all nondestructive, hydrostatic and pre commissioning testing required.
1.36 Perform all welding including radiography required.
1.37 Provide drawings and documents as required.
1.38 Provide mobilization and demobilization, temporary material and temporary facilities and
utilities required executing work. Provide winterization during construction. Provide
scheduling, planning and reporting as per contract. Contractor shall keep complete
administration and control of work, specified in contract. Contractor shall provide
maintenance on all construction and permanent plant material as required during the
Contract period. Perform all material identifications as per Contract. Perform all
transportations as required. Perform quality assurance, control and supply quality control
documentation. Contractor shall take full responsibility for the work performed for all pre-
commissioning activities as defined in the Contract. The Contractor shall provide and
supply all procedures for execution of the work in accordance with drawings specifications,
and applicable codes and standards duly approved by Contractor. The Contractor shall
perform all other works and activities and supply all other materials which are required for
completeness of the Work either mentioned in the Contract or they are necessary for
completeness of the Work, in compliance with highest available standards and good
quality.
1.39 Comply with OWNER’s safety procedures at site and ensure safe working practices among
its workers. Contractor shall ensure that no worker works without the necessary Personal
Protective Equipment appliances. Supply of all Personal Protective Equipments appliances
shall be in contractor’s scope.
1.40 Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of its personnel at site and safety of
equipment and systems being erected / constructed by him.
1.41 Contractor shall ensure that his work or workmen do not cause any safety hazard to the
OWNER’s personnel and the operating plant and facilities.
1.42 Contractor shall be liable to make good any damage caused by him or his personnel to the
existing facilities.
1.43 The scope of work under this includes construction/ execution, providing necessary
engineering supervision through qualified and technical personnel, skilled and unskilled
labour, etc. and mobilization of all relevant and adequate plants, tools and tackles,
equipment, machineries, etc., to carry out all activity for successful completion of the
works.

FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

1.5 SUPPLY, FABRICATION & ERECTION OF SUPPORTS

Supports falling under the scope of this enquiry shall consist of:-
a. Resting supports
b. Guide supports
c. Anchor supports
d. Axial stopper support
All structural steels required for fabrication of above supports shall consist of angles,
channels, beams, plates, flats etc. including bolts, nuts and washers to be in the
Contractor’s scope of supply.
1.6 The scope of work shall include, but not limited to, the following
Unloading of equipment/materials from trailer/trucks etc., by Contractor, if required by

Owner/Consultant and transportation from place of unloading or equipment Vendor’s site
shop to the place of erection. The Contractor shall submit and got approved from Owner /
Consultant the procedure in detail for transportation of heavy items before start of work.
As far as possible the equipment shall be delivered to Contractor within 100 Meters from
its place of erection. The cost related to transportation shall be deemed to be included in
the quoted rates. However in case the equipments are received in Owner / Consultant’s
stores/storage yard, the same shall be unloaded from trailers/trucks etc., and transported
by Contractor up to the erection point, if required by Owner/Consultant. In such cases
payment shall be made as per S.O.R. In case of transportation of equipment to erection
site, any minor removal of existing structure / railing etc is required, the same shall be in
scope of contractor, and restoration of same shall also be done at no cost to owner
Before start of any erection activities the following shall be checked by Contractor:
a. Thorough initial surveying of the SITE shall be done with regard to the proper laying/
routing of the equipment/pipe lines and instrumentation work. It is responsibility of
contractor to generate the fabrication & erection front depending on availability of
Drawings, material and site condition to co-up the progress of the work. Any delays due to
this reason are solely attributable to the contractor.
b. Checking of foundations/structures including anchor bolts for their correct dimension,
levels, co-ordinates etc., with reference to bench marks, well before the actual erection is
planned. Discrepancies, if any, are reported to Owner/Consultant for his decision so that
any rectification, if required, can be carried out earlier than planned erection date. Anchor
bolt’s sleeves shall be free of water and debris.
c. Chipping (up to 100 mm) & removal of old grouting materials, wherever required and
cleaning the top of foundation and pocket for equipments, machinery, structural and
pipe supports, etc. In case where epoxy grouting is required, the pockets are to be cleaned
first with water and then with dry air. Compressor required for this purpose shall be
arranged by the Contractor. For supports coming directly on floor, the Contractor shall be
required to chip the floor and then make necessary pipe support pedestals (of concrete) as
per drawing/ specification and instruction of Owner/Consultant.
d. Prior to installation of Equipment, Machineries, Piping & structural etc., the Contractor shall
ensure the following:
i) Foundation bolts are clean.
ii) Nuts fit properly over the entire threaded length.
iii) Foundation bolts are coated properly with GREASE MIXED WITH GRAPHITE
POWDER and wrapped with polythene (Threaded part only).

FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

iv) To ensure the correctness of existing holes/slots in structure and to rectify existing
holes/slots or to make new ones, if required.
e. Necessary grouting space shall be maintained by Contractor by putting packing plates (to
be supplied by Contractor) as per requirement. If more than one packing plate is used to
build up the required thickness, the packing plates must be tack-welded to each-other.
The packing plate may be retained in their place by grouting or by tack welding (using
MS/TOR steel rods) to each other. Number of packing plates should be kept as minimum
as possible. Packing plates shall be free from burrs and high spots.
1.6.1 The following activities shall also be covered under the scope of this contract. These activities
shall be covered in the unit rate of erection of equipments as the case may be and nothing
extra shall be paid on this account unless indicated otherwise specifically:
a. First maintenance of Equipments & Machinery.
b. Flushing of lube oil and Seal oil piping
c. Marking and cutting of gaskets from asbestos sheets, if required.
d. Fixing of loose components like davits, man-holes etc.
e. Cutting of lifting lugs and grinding off the surface
f. Taking the equipments, machineries
If required and structures components to and collecting from Contractor’s painting yard/
shop. This activity shall be required for those components only which need to be sand
blasted and painted at site. Contractor shall not be paid on this account.
g. Supply and application of anti-seize lubricating compounds such as MOLYKOT/
NEVERSIEZE etc. for bolts and nuts of equipment.
1.7 For machineries, leveling, alignment, grouting, dowelling, drilling tapping in base plate,
installation of sight glass/gauges/safety valves directly mounted on machinery supplied by
vendors, coupling and decoupling from machineries for no load testing/repair by vendors,
etc shall be in the scope of contractor. Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
First filling of Lubricating oil in the console is to done by the contractor. Lubricating oil shall
be provided by TFL but shifting of oil from stores shall be in the contractor scope.
An execution of rotary equipment job is a very specialized job and requires a very skilled
manpower, contractor to specify the methodology by which they propose to execute the
Rotary equipment erection, commissioning jobs. For this specialized job, contractor to hire
an agency who have a very good track record in Executing rotary equipment, erection ,
commissioning and overhauling job. The details of the agency is to be furnished by the
contractor in their technical bid , only the acceptable agency by TFL / Consultant shall only
be allowed to execute this job.It is contractor responsibility to maintain cleanliness while
executing erection & piping for rotary equipment. In case any forign material goes inside
the machine, the same needs to be reported and if necessary arrangement to be made to
remove the foreign material at no cost to Owner / consultant

FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

1.7 TECHNICAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
WELDER'S QUALIFICATION
Welders proposed to be deployed at SITE shall be tested for welding procedure

qualification and welder performance qualification in the presence of
Owner/Consultant or his representative or any statutory authority whenever
required strictly as per standards, codes and specifications.
1.7.1 ELECTRODES AND FILLER WIRES
Electrodes and filler wires to be used at site in this job shall be procured from the
approved vendors only. Electrodes and filler wires shall be D&H, Advani Orlikon or
ESAB, Mailam and Voestalpine Bohler group make only.
Selection of electrodes and filler wires shall be as per standards, codes and
specifications. Tests required, if any, to satisfy the technical suitability of these
electrodes/filler wires shall be arranged by Contractor at his own cost. All electrodes and
filler wires shall be supplied by Contractor within their quoted rates. All welding of
materials shall be as per enclosed Engineering/Technical Standard “General Welding
Requirement” and shall be of radiographic quality. Electrodes shall be baked as per
manufacturer’s catalogue at suitable temperature for the requisite time before these are to
be used. The ovens (mother as well as field) are to be arranged by the Contractor.
1.7.2 ROOT RUN USING TIG
All piping root run for Carbon Steel & LT Carbon Steel weld joints shall be done using TIG
welding. Further to this if butt weld joints are required to be done by TIG welding; only
Argon gas shall be used both for shielding and purging wherever required.
a) Radiography camera, Radiography source (For radiography use of Close Proximity

Camera with Selenium Source is preferred), washing & developing facilities for
radiographs. To carry-out the radiography activities the Contractor shall fulfill the criteria
as follows: -
1. The Contractor’s NDT Engineers / Specialists must be fully qualified by the competent
authority i.e. at least ASNT / ISNT Level II in UT, MPT, DPT, RT for carrying out statutory
NDT inspection as per Rule 19 of SMPV (U) Rules 1981. The copy of certificates must be
submitted to Owner/Consultant for verification.
2. The Contractor must have adequate qualified and experienced manpower to undertake
the NDT jobs and should be capable to carry out the jobs on round the clock basis, if
required.
3. The Contractor shall have adequate number of NDT equipments and all equipments must
be calibrated and in good condition.
4. Central and portable electric ovens for electrode’s baking & heating.

FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

1.8 In addition to safety regulations listed elsewhere in the NIT, Owner /Consultant
may issue certain safety directive which shall have to be followed meticulously
without any reservation.
For executing Hot Job the party should possess the following –
a. Suitable provision for Water Curtain
b. DCP Cylinder.
c. Non-asbestos fire blankets
d. Plant Air Connectivity system to the booths.
e. For working within booths the contractor should have suitable metallic planks / gratings
etc which will serve as the working platform for the executing team. Use of Bamboo or
any wooden structure is strictly prohibited.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK AND SERVICES- PRE-COMMISSIONING
Contractor shall be responsible for management and assistance of following pre-

commissioning activities. Contractor shall arrange & provide adequate resources.
Scope of pre-commissioning of the system shall be under Contractor scope of work.

Contractor shall provide at site an adequate number of qualified pre-commissioning
engineers and personnel. To perform pre-commissioning activities, Contractor shall also
ensure that all special tools and test equipment required for pre-commissioning are
available at its own cost. Contractor shall provide adequate construction labour,
construction tools and equipment for pre-commissioning.
Pre-commissioning which shall be performed by Contractor shall include, but not limited to,
the following:
2.1 Cleaning, flushing, draining, drying and purging of Equipment and their linings and piping
systems, including the installation and removal of temporary equipment, piping, blinds,
strainers, screens etc., and the replacement of all permanent items removed while the
Work is in progress.
2.2 Checking, Testing, calibration simulation test and adjustment of instruments, equipment
and systems including control valves and safety devices, and installation and checking of
orifices plates and other sensor devices in so far as this can be done before actual
operation of the item concerns of complete system and loops.
2.3 Function test and checking out of electrical systems including substations, transformers,
cables and switchgear, checking and simulation of all interlocks and setting of all relays.
This shall include drying out operations, filtering of oil if required.
2.4 For motor driven equipment, amperage checking of motors and removal of temporary
safety screens.
2.5 Introduction of lubricants, spares and oil flushing for machinery.

FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

2.6 To arrange and supply all consumables, the cost of which shall be included in quoted rates
and nothing extra shall be paid to bidder for them, required in sufficient quantity, of required
quality and in time to meet the job schedule for executing the job covered under this
enquiry such as but not limited to the following :
Electrodes, water soluble paper; grease, petroleum oil, cloth/cotton waste; emery papers;
wire brush, grinding wheel, cutting wheel ; teflon sealing tapes , sponge, cardboard, non-
asbestos gasket sheets , temporary fasteners, clips, cleats, packing materials, gaskets,
etc., as necessary.
2.7 To deploy skilled, semiskilled and unskilled manpower in requisite numbers and to
ensure that the work is done correctly, properly and expeditiously as per time schedule and
according to specification and direction of owner’s representative.
2.8 To check for quantity compliance between bill of materials and drawings for piping,
structurals etc. and intimate to owner sufficiently in advance regarding discrepancies, if
any.
2.9 For all piping systems, installation and removal of temporary blinds as required, circulation
and commissioning of systems.
2.10 Test running of all other rotating equipment for 24 hours wherever possible.
2.11 Adjustment of all piping expansion and support devices.
2.12 All such further works which Contractor judges to be necessary or in the reasonable
opinion of OWNER is necessary to bring the system to a state of readiness.
3.0 MECHANICAL COMPLETION
Mechanical Completion means the time when all construction, erection & installation work
as per finally approved P&ID and pre-commissioning related to the system is completed in
accordance with the Approved Project drawings and specifications, and all mechanical and
pressure tests, including but not limited to hydro-testing, non- operating adjustments, cold
alignment checks, final cleanup, field calibration of safety valves, calibration of all
instruments, instrument loop checking and testing, monitoring / control / safety systems
checking and testing, and all pre-commissioning activities have been completed.
When OWNER is satisfied that Mechanical Completion of the system has been achieved,
OWNER shall issue certificate of Mechanical Completion to Contractor in accordance with
the Contract.
In order to meet this, Contractor shall perform all necessary mechanical works, tests and
checks.

FOR DOCUMENT NO REV

4.0 COMMISSIONING
4.1 SCOPE OF WORK AND SERVICES - COMMISSIONING
Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring and control of all activities under the scope
of work of Construction contractor in addition to the activities directly under the scope of
Contractor.
Commissioning which shall be performed by Contractor shall include, but not limited to, the
following.
4.2 Schedule for Commissioning
Contractor shall prepare a schedule for commissioning, and performance testing in

conjunction with OWNER. This shall be issued at least three months before pre
commissioning of the first facility.
This schedule shall include all activities as detailed herein and any other special activities,
which require to be performed during commissioning.
4.3 Commissioning
Contractor shall be responsible to perform commissioning of the system and to provide

necessary facilities during commissioning of the system including the Performance Tests.
Contractor shall provide commissioning engineers and supporting staff and adequate
commissioning labour. Contractor shall associate OWNER’s engineers and operating staff
with the commissioning work. All the required materials like fuel, engine oil or any other
facilities etc. shall be provided by contractor.
4.4 STATUTORY APPROVALS

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for whatsoever required for obtaining
necessary & different local authority approval for Fabrication & Erection of Complete
Piping network & Equipments.
.


PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD. DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 1 OF 9
SECTION -8.1
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL CONDITIONS
OF
UNDER GROUND PIPING WORKS

PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
SCOPE OF WORK & TECHNICAL
DOCUMENT NO. REV
SPECIFICATION FOR U/G PIPING
SHEET 2 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This Construction specification covers excavation in all kind of strata, lifting backfilling, stacking
& disposal, within specified limit & as directed by Engineer-in-Charge .
1.2 This also covers dewatering, shoring, strutting & timbering, safety of workman/ pedestrians,
equipment or adjoining structures.
1.3 This specification shall be applied to field construction of various chambers, pits, trenches etc.
which becomes the part of work during the alignment of U/G piping or as specified in drawing
or as directed by Engineer-In–charge.
1.4 This specification shall not apply to the followings
a) Work, not covered under above Scope of work.
b) Temporary installation.
c) Specific job requirement, where job requirements are in contradiction to this

specification.
1.5 Reference documents
The work shall be compliances with all applicable governmental, local laws & regulations,
codes & standards, specifications & drawings or as directed by Owner/Consultant.
1.6 Earthwork excavation for U/G Piping
Excavation work shall be carried out in all kind of strata for excavation work.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 The scope of work to be performed by the Contractor shall include but not limited to the
following: -
a) Transportation of materials such as pipes, valves, fittings, etc., from stores to

Contractor’s shop/site.
b) Piping fabrication, shot blasting, supply and application of primer/painting as per

specification enclosed in NIT, supply and application of wrapping/ coating as per spec
enclosed in NIT, laying of U/G piping, inter-connection with the existing system/unit,
excavation, backfilling, sand filling compaction, hydro test of piping & other works related
to UG piping to complete the system in all respect is in scope of contractor.
2.2 Fabrication of fittings such as miter bends, reducers etc. from pipes:
I. Contractor shall be required to fabricate miter bends and reducers etc. out from pipes as
per engineering standards/specification attached with this tender document. Miter bends
shall be 3 Miters for 900 and 2 Miters for 450.
PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 3 of 9
II. Fabrication of Tees is not envisaged. All tapings shall be taken by stub-in connection
(with or without reinforcement pads), and these shall be considered part of the piping
work and no extra compensation shall be made for making stub-in connections.
3.0 PRE FABRICATION OF SPOOLS
3.1 Pipes shall be pre-fabricated in convenient spools in accordance with ANSI-B-31.3 category
‘D’ Service.(Services related to U/G Piping).Site fabrication shall meet all the requirements of
ANSI B 31.3 and ASME Section IX. Prior to start of pre-fabrication, Contractor shall check
and ensure that actual site requirements match with the drawings. Discrepancies observed, if
any must be brought to the notice of the Owner/Consultant for their appropriate decision
before execution of work. While doing spool pre-fabrication, extra lengths shall be kept to
facilitate site adjustments.
The prefabricated piping spool shall be Hydrotested prior to wrapping coating and
lowering in trenches.
3.2 The following dimensional tolerances shall govern pre-fabrication and erection work:
a. Plus/minus max. 3 mm on all dimensions from:
i) Face to face
ii) Centre to face
iii) Ref. line to attachment.
b. Out of roundness: Not to exceed + 3 mm and – 1.5 mm (In diameter)

c. Circumference: 0.5% of nominal outside circumference.
d. ± maximum 3mm lateral translation of branches, flanges or connections for normal
services
e. Straightness shall not deviate 3.2 mm from a 3m Straight edge.
f. Flanges bolt holes to be symmetrically out of centre line.
Flanges rotation shall not exceed 1.5 mm measured on the bolt circle.
g. Flange faces misalignment: Max. (1:250) measured across any diameter from normal
service (flange connections total 1:125).
4.0 EARTHWORK EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES FOR PIPELINES
4.1 Trenching work shall be carried out in all cases of soil.
4.2 For Underground piping, earth excavation work shall also be referred the Document ES 6018 –
Engineering Standards for Underground Piping.

PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 4 of 9
4.3 In case of pressure piping, the trench shall be excavated generally as to provide a cover of
600 mm or dia. of pipe whichever is more. In case of gravity sewers / pipes, the trench shall
be excavated to confirm to invert levels as per drawings. However in certain cases the pipes
may run shallower levels or at deeper levels depending upon drawing, site condition, etc. This
4.4 Work shall be deemed to cover all work connected with trenching, whether trenches with
single pipeline or pipelines in common trenches including road cutting.
4.4 The width of the trench shall be sufficient to give free working space on each side of the pipe.
The free working space shall be as per work instruction. Generally it shall not be less than 150
mm on either side or 1/3 dia. of pipe, whichever is greater.
4.5 When pipeline are running parallel whether the trenching shall be individual or common shall
be decided by Engineer-in-charge and the Contractor shall follow accordingly.
4.6 Excavated materials shall not be deposited within 1.5m from the top edge of the excavation, or
within a distance equal to the depth of excavation whichever is greater.
4.7 The Contractor shall maintain excavated pit in a dry and trim condition.
4.8 In case of road cutting, all material i.e. metal, soling stone etc., shall be taken out carefully and
kept separately for reuse and road work shall be redone up to the original level with the
excavated road materials, after laying and testing of the pipeline, within 10 days from the date
of starting this work. The Contractor shall construct a bye pass road when the road cutting work
is been carried out. All this work shall be covered under laying of pipe works.
4.9 The trench shall follow the gradient of pipeline as specified in the drawing. The Contractor shall
keep the trench in good condition until the pipe is laid and tested and it shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor to prevent caving or settling down either before or after the pipe
is laid.
In case pipe is lowered in caved trench and backfilled before being inspected by the Engineer-
in-charge, the Contractor shall re-excavate the trench for inspection and backfill the same
under his own responsibility.
5.0 Wrapping and coating
Coating and wrapping shall be as per Technical specification attached with this tender doc
using the following specifications:
5.1 Surface cleaning and preparation shall consist of cleaning and degreasing by Grit / Shot
blasting and or power scraping, using most suitable method or a combination therefore, both
followed by carefully removal of the dust according to the specification ISO 8501-1: 1988 SA
2.5.
5.2 One coat of primer shall be applied immediately after surface preparation as per specification.
5.3 Application of wrapping on underground piping shall be carried out as per PDIL Standard
(Attached herewith) Test certificate of materials used for this work shall be submitted to
Owner’s for verification and acceptance prior to be used.
PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 5 of 9
5.4 Coating and wrapping job shall only be done by experienced personal for this job, by which
speed of wrapping and application of enamel can be controlled so as to achieve uniform
thickness of coating and wrapping.
5.5 To check the quality of coating and wrapping shall be done by high voltage spark tester
equipped with a positive signaling device to indicate any faults, holes, breaks or conductive
particles in coating thickness, as per specifications.
5.6 Coating and wrapping for the field joints to be under taken inside the trenches shall be
executed using the same specification and workmanship as indicated above. After coating
and wrapping operation is over the total surfaces coated in the trench shall be checked for
defects using high voltage spark tester as indicated above.
6.0 PIPE LAYING AND WELDING IN TRENCHES
6.1 Pipes shall be laid in trenches after:
- Pipes have been coated and wrapped in the shop and/or at site.
- Coating and wrapping has been tested using high frequency high voltage spark tester
(using 12000-16000 voltage)
6.2 Pipe laying shall be undertaken as per specifications, Using of suitable capacity cranes only,
taking sufficient care while handling (use of suitable belt type slings is essential) Coated pipe
to ensure zero damages during handling.
6.3 Excavation shall be carried out strictly as per specification. Moreover excavation shall be
carried out only by suitable excavators with ripper arrangement and not manually unless it is
not possible to excavate with excavators.
Vol. of surplus excavated materials = vol. of piping + vol. of sand filled.
Vol. of sand filled = the min base width x vertical depth of sand filled – vol. of piping.
No additional payment shall be made for excavation done for welding of field joints.
6.4 Excess earth shall be carted to a place specified by Owner / Consultant (as decided by EIC).
Owner / Consultant may direct the Contractor to transport part of earth even before backfilling
is done. The carted earth shall be stacked, spread and leveled properly in the area
earmarked.
6.5 The trenches shall be filled with fine sand from River up to centre line of pipe line over which
ordinary excavated earth (excluding stones, boulders and any other hard materials) shall be
used for filling balance portion of the trench taking sufficient care to achieve proper
compaction. Before back filling, piping shall be hydrotested; area near field welded joints shall
be coated and wrapped as per specifications and to meet quality requirements for coating and
wrapping. Only after satisfactory testing of coating and wrapping of the field joints, back filling
shall be started.

PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 6 of 9
6.6 For welds inspection shall be carried out by Owner/Consultant in accordance with the
following:
Visual examinations: All finished welds shall be visually examined 100 percent to check the
profile and smoothness of the weld, root penetration etc. visual examination shall show the
following features:
a) Welds shall blend smoothly and gradually into the parent metal with no significant
undercutting or overlapping at the sides of the groove. The depth of local undercut shall
not exceed 10 percent of pipe thickness of 0.8 mm whichever is smaller.
b) The welds shall be reasonably smooth and uniform with no excessive high or low spots.
External weld reinforcements shall not exceed the following limits:
Component Reinforcement
Thickness thickness (max)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 12 mm 1.6 mm
Over 12 to 25 mm 2.4 mm
Over 25 mm 3.2 mm
---------------------------------------------------------------------
c) The stop and start of each run of weld shall merge smoothly and shall show no
pronounced hump or crater on the weld surface.
d) The weld shall fuse the pipe / pipe fitting at the root suitably without penetrating
excessively into the bore of the pipe. The maximum permissible penetration of the root
bead into the bore shall be within the limits specified below:
N.B Maximum penetration Maximum restriction

In bore in bore
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Under ½” 1.6 mm 1.6 mm
½” – 2” 3.2 mm 3.2 mm
Over 2” 3.2 mm 4.8 mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
e) The root concavity shall not exceed 1.2 mm and at no point shall the weld be thinner than
the calculated design thickness of the pipe.
f) The root bead shall merge smoothly into the adjacent surface.
g) All the materials which are in Contractor’s scope shall be inspected and tested as per
relevant material specifications.
h) All weld joints made after hydrotest, whether in shop or in the field or in the trenches,
shall be kept uncoated and accessible without backfilling till final hydro test is completed.

PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 7 of 9
7.0 HYDROTESTING OF PIPING SYSTEM
After all the piping have been laid in the trenches field joints welded, radiograph found OK, the
system shall be pressurized and hydro tested as per work instruction of EIC or as per EIC
guidelines in convenient loops (as per mutual agreement between Owner / Consultant and
Contractors, so as to avoid inconvenience of Owner/other agencies working at site) shall be at
a test pressure of 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure in the system. After hydro
testing has been completed successfully, the area in the vicinity of the field joints (left
uncoated for welding) shall be coated and wrapped with the same specifications and
workmanship as defined for the shop coating and wrapping. This coating and wrapping
executed in the field must be thoroughly checked using high voltage spark testing to ensure
defect-free coating and wrapping.
All materials required for hydrotesting such as but not limited to hydrotest pump, temporary
piping, pressure gauges (duly calibrated), blanks, blind flanges, temporary bolts, nuts, vents
and drain connection etc shall be supplied by Contractor at his cost. After completion of
hydrotesting, blanks and blind flanges shall be removed and ends of pipes, fitting and piping
spools shall be suitably prepared.
This hydrotest shall be undertaken in convenient loops as per the directions of

Owner/Consultant, without obstructing the other agencies working at site.
8.0 ELECTRODES
For welding of root run, electrodes to confirm AWS specifications. However, in case it is all
welding shall be as per specifications and shall be of radiographic quality. Electrodes and filler
wires to be used at site in this job shall be procured from the approved vendors only.
Electrodes and filter wires shall be D&H, Advani Orlikon or ESAB, Mailam and Bohler
group make only
Electrodes shall be baked at suitable temperature for the requisite time before they are used
strictly as per manufacturer.
9.0 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
10% of the welded joints shall be radiographed. Location of radiography weld joints shall be
selected by Engineer-in-Charge. The cost of defective radiograph and its repair shall be to
Contractor’s account and payment shall be made by Owner / Consultant for only for those
joints, which are found acceptable refer S.O.R.
Spark testing of 100% area of wrapping coating to be done. Even field joints to be tested,
contractor to make necessary arrangement.

PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 8 of 9
10.0 WELDERS QUALIFICATION
Welders proposed to be deployed at site shall be tested for procedure and quality in the
presence of Owner/Consultant strictly as per ASME Section IX. All such materials and
facilities as required for this test shall be arranged by Contractor at his own cost.
11.0 MISMATCHING
For making weld joint end preparation shall be carried out as per work instruction of EIC.
During end preparation and while making the joint, if internal diameters of pipe and pipe
fittings/ valves / flanges etc. do not match with each other for any reasons what-so-ever,
Contractor shall be required to undertake necessary rectification for matching internal
diameters without any extra cost to Owner/Consultant.
12.0 ROAD CROSSINGS
At road crossing, Contractor may be required to provide casing pipe and / or suitable road
culverts. At such road crossing number of pipe lengths depending upon the width or road,
shall be aligned, welded, hydrotesting and erected independently of the total system to avoid
blockages for longer duration.
13.0 METHOD FOR MEASUREMENT
13.1 For payment purposes actual measurement shall be taken along the centre line of the pipe
line system from end to end which will include pipe fittings, flanges, valves, etc. No additional
payment shall be made for instrument tappings.
13.2 Measurement for branch connection shall be taken from the root of stub in connection.
13.3 No additional payment shall be made for instrument tapings.
13.4 Reducers shall be paid along with piping of larger diameter.
13.5 Payment for radiography shall be made on the basis of actual weld length radiographed and
payment shall be made for the joints found acceptable. Radiography for defective joints shall
not be paid.
13.6 Measurement and payment for excavation shall be worked out based on trench dimensions as
mentioned without slope i.e. as per base Width x Depth.
13.7 No additional payment shall be made for excavation done for the welding of field
welding/wrapping coating.
13.8 Measurement and payment for sand filling shall be worked out as per work instruction of EIC.
14.0 LIST OF STANDARDS & DRGS & DOCUMENTS
The following standards, drawings & documents form part of this enquiry:

PC150/E/112/SEC-8.1 1
DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 9 of 9
INTERNATIONAL STANDARD
i) ANSI B 31.3 : Process Piping
ii) ASME Sec. IX : Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures,
Welders, Brazers, Welding and Brazing Operators.
a. NDT work, being on specialized job, must be carried out through approved agencies only.
b. The works of underground piping is of specialized nature and as such the same has to be
got done through agency specialized in such works. The agency shall be as approved by
Owner / Consultant.
c. Coating and wrapping being a specialized job must be getting done through approved
agencies only.
d. Contractor shall be required to submit the following documents as and when asked for by
Owner / Consultant:
i) Material certificate for materials supplied by Contractor

ii) Radiography report with radiographs
iii) Test Certificates for coating and wrapping materials
iv) Welders performance qualification report part
15.0 BACKFILLING FOR TRENCHES FOR PIPELINES
a. The Backfilling of underground pipe trenches shall be done as per scope of work,
Technical specification and instruction of Owner / CONSULTANT.
b. The filling shall commence only after approval by Engineer-in-charge is obtained and
after the structures or pipes getting buried are tested and approved. Otherwise it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to uncover the buried portion and refill the same.
c. Care must be exercised to protect cables, pipes, joints and other features from damage
due to backfilling and consolidation.
16.0 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EARTH
a. This work shall be performed according to scope of work, specification and instruction of
Owner /Consultant’s Engineer-in-charge.
b. The surplus earth to be transported / disposed shall include the earth generated due to
voids in the backfilled volume of earth.

PNCN-TS-601 0

SHEET 1 OF 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATON
OF
WRAPPING & COATING
(TAPE TYPE)
0 30.10.17 FOR ISSUANCE DILIP DILIP/GC SM

REV REV ATE PURPOSE PREPD REVWD APPD
PNCN-TS-601 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
FOR
WRAPPING COATING (COLD TAPE TYPE) SHEET 2 OF 7
INDEX OF CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 GENERAL
3.0 MATERIALS
4.0 CLEANING
5.0 APPLICATION
6.0 INSPECTION AND TEST
7.0 REPAIRS TO COATING

PNCN-TS-601 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
FOR
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements for application and inspection of protective coating for
underground steel piping.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 Protective coating shall consist of a coating system employing Primer, Inner Wrap and
Outer Wrap.
2.2 The coating system shall be mechanically applied by an approved type of wrapping
machine utilizing constant tension brakes except at tie-in welds, repair patches and at
other locations where mechanical application is not practicable. Wrapping machine shall
normally be used for pipe size 10” and above. For pipe sizes below 10” wrapping shall be
done manually.
2.3 Coating and wrapping materials shall be handled, transported, stored and applied strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.
2.4 Wrapping Coating material is Cold tape type from Polyken/Denso/Atla shall be used.
3.0 MATERIALS
Materials for line coating and wrapping shall be of Tape coating system (Polyethylene backed
tape with butyl rubber based adhesive system) as described below :-
(A) Primer
Base : Rubber and Synthetic Resins
Solvent : Heptane
Total Solids : 20%
Weight / Gallon (Weight / litre): 6.4 lbs (0.77 kg)
Viscosity : Thin Syrup
Flash Point : + 10°F (-12°C)
Color : Black
Shelf Life : Excellent
(B) Inner Wrap ( 3 PLY)

BACKING:-
Polyethylene, high/low density Colour: Black
ADHESIVE:-
Butyl Rubber (to be applied on both sides of the PE backing ), Synthetic Resin
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ENGLISH
Total Thickness 30 mils
Backing Thickness 12 mils
Adhesive Thickness 9 mils (each)
Tensile Strength 30 lb/in width
Elongation 200%
Adhesion to Primed Steel 200 oz/in width
ELECTRICAL AND MOISTURE RESISTANCE:-

Dielectric Strength 22

PNCN-TS-601 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
FOR

Insulation Resistance 1,000,000 megohms
Water Vapor Transmission Rate < 0.2g / 100 in2/24hr
TEMPERATURE RANGE:-
Normal Application (ambient) -30° to 160°F (-34° to 71°C)
Normal Service (operating temperature) -30° to 185°F (-34° to 85°C)
TEST METHODS: (Latest Version)

1. ASTM D-257 2. ASTM E-398
(C) Outer Wrap (2PLY)
BACKING : Polyethylene, low density.

Colour: White
ADHESIVE : Butyl Rubber, Synthetic Resin( on one side of the PE backing)
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ENGLISH

Total Thickness 20 mils
Backing Thickness 15 mils
Adhesive Thickness 5 mils
Tensile Strength 25 ib/in width
Elongation 200%
TEMPERATURE RANGE:-
Normal application (ambient) -30° to 160°F (34° to 71°C)
Normal Service (operating temperature) -30° to 185°F (34° to 85°C)
TEST METHODS : ASTM D – 1000
4.0 CLEANING
4.1 The external surface of all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned before application of the
protective coating by shot blasting to the specification ISO 8501-1: 1988 SA 2.5.
4.2 The cleaning process shall remove all oil, grease, loose mill scale, weld spatter, weld
slug, rust, paint, dirt, dust, weeds and any other foreign matter from the pipe external
surface.
4.3 Oil and grease shall be removed using suitable solvent.
4.4 Mechanical cleaning wherever applicable (field joints and tie-in joints) shall be carried out
by means of portable power driven wire brushes, flexible sanding discs etc. which are
capable of producing a surface finish to SA - 3
4.5 Mechanical cleaning machines shall not employ knives or other tools which may produce
notches or gauges on the pipe surface and shall be fitted with a device to prevent of
foreign matter on the pipe surface.
4.6 Mechanical cleaning machines shall be maintained in correct adjustment and
replacement tools shall be available throughout the cleaning process.
4.7 The cleaning method employed shall not result in visible thinning of the pipe wall.

PNCN-TS-601 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
FOR

4.8 Cleaning shall be carried out immediately before application of the priming coat. If,
before the priming coat is applied, the outside of the pipe becomes contaminated with any
foreign matter, the outside surface shall be re-cleaned.
5.0 APPLICATION
5.1 Prime Coat

a) After Surface Preparation as detailed above, apply one coat of Zinc Rich Epoxy
primer (50-75micron) allow it to dry.
b) Apply Polyken primer #1027 (in shop) / primer # 1029 (at site) WFT 60 micron or
Equivalent.
c) Primer shall be thoroughly stirred before drawing from the drum.The approved
thinners may only be added to the primer an proper mixing and blending of thinner
when primer thinner is essential
d) Primer shall be applied to the piping system by means of rollers or brushes. The
priming coat shall be continuous and free form holidays, runs and globules, and
special care shall be taken to ensure continuity of primer film at welds.
e) Primer shall be applied at an average rate of 0.12 litre per square meter to give dry
film thickness of between 0.05 and 0.08mm.
f) Primed pipe shall be protected from contamination by moisture, dust and foreign
matters before application of the tape wraps.
5.2 Tape Wrapping

a) Immediately after application of the primer, the piping shall be coated with Inner Tape
Wrap(3ply) and Outer Tape Wrap(2 ply). Before applying inner tape wrap, it shall be
ensured that the Polyken primer or Equivalent is wet condition( touch dry condition).
The tape wraps shall be applied with constant tension controlled to provide a uniform,
tightly adhering coating free of wrinkles, packers, voids or breaks. Minimum tension
shall be 0.1 kg per mm of tape width.
b) The tape wrapping shall be provided with the following minimum overlap under
conditions stated :
CONDITION MIN. OVERLAP
(i) Tape is applied on the line with a 1 inch
mechanical wrap – around machine
with constant tension brakes in normal
soil conditions.
(ii) Tape is applied on irregular sections of 2 inch
The line with hand wrap machines.
(iii) Same as (i) above except pipe is laid in 50% overlap
swampy areas where water is standing in
the ditch (no concrete coating)
(iv) Pipe is laid in swampy areas but is
Weight coated:

PNCN-TS-601 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
FOR

20 mils Inner Wrap 1 inch
40 mil Outer Wrap 1 inch
Applied as in (i) above.
5.3 Polyken wrapped pipes shall not be exposed to direct sun light over a long time. It
shall be ensured that Polyken coated pipe spools are covered to wand off damage
due to exposure to sun light.
5.4 The details of Polyken tapes to be used as given below.
Pipe Size Tape Size
3” and below 2”
4” to 6” 4”
Above 6” 6”
6.0 INSPECTION AND TEST

6.1 All coating shall be subjected to 100% visual inspection and 100% inspection with an
electrical holiday detector (6000 – 8000 volts) before being lowered into the trench or
before back filling the existing UG pipe line.
6.2 Visual inspection shall ensure that the coating is continuous that the overlap is correctly
maintained and that there are no wrinkles in the tape.
6.3 The Holiday Detector shall be used to check that there is a continuous coating over the
pipe surface, Particular attention shall be given to bends and to areas where the tape has
been spliced or repaired.
6.4 The holiday detector setting shall be checked at least twice per day while it is in use.
6.5 The Holiday Detector shall be operated strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction at all times.
6.6 At no time shall the Holiday Detector be permitted to remain stationary around a coated
pipeline with the operating voltage switched on.
6.7 All defects, whether discovered visually or by means of the Holiday Detector, shall be
clearly marked.
6.8 After acceptance of holiday test, the coated pipes shall be transported to site. Proper care
shall be taken during handling /transportation. The coated pipes always be kept on sand
bags during transportation.
6.9 Holiday test shall be conducted again at site and after acceptance the coated pipes shall
be lifted / lowered in to the trench using nylon belts.
7.0 REPAIRS TO COATING

7.1 All defects in the coating shall be made good immediately after their detection.
7.2 Holidays (Pin holes / minor defect)
After cleaning the affected area Inner tape wrap and Outer tape wrap shall be carried out
over the affected area on the existing wrapping by ensuring that wrapping covers the
extended surface area around the defect (Min 150mm). Use Holiday detector for locating
pinholes / other defects before erection of pipe in trench / back filling of existing pipe line.
7.3 Holidays or localized defects in the Inner Tape Wrap shall be repaired by the following
procedures :

PNCN-TS-601 0
DOCUMENT NO. REV
FOR

(a) Strip off Outer Wrap from affected area after ensuring that completed coating on
either side is properly secured.
(b) Strip off Inner Wrap and primer from the affected area and thoroughly clean the
pipe surface.
(c) Re-prime in accordance with this specification.
(d) Apply patch of Inner Wrap not smaller than 150mm s 150mm.
(e) Test for repaired Inner Wrap with Holiday Detector before replacing Outer Wrap.
(f) Replace Outer Wrap and secure firmly.
(g) Conduct holiday test before erection of the pipe in trench / back filling of existing
pipe.

TS-2001 0

SHEET 1 of 31

PAINTING SPECIFICATION
(TS-2001)

0 24.10.18 FOR ISSUANCE JKY DILIP GC
REV REV ATE PURPOSE PREPD REVWD APPD


TS-2001 0
PAINTING SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT NO. REV
SHEET 2 of 31

CONTENTS

Section Description Sheet Number
Number
1.0 GENERAL 4
1.1 Scope 4
1.2 Definitions 4
1.3 Safety Regulations 4
1.4 Material Safety Data Sheet 4
1.5 Materials 4
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS 5
2.1 Indian Standards 5
2.2 International Standards 5
2.3 Other Standards 5
3.0 SURFACE PREPARATION 6
3.1 Metal Surface Preparation 6
3.1.1 Safety 6
3.1.2 Pre-cleaning 6
3.1.3 Surface Decontamination 6
3.1.4 Abrasive Blasting 6
3.1.5 Alternate Methods of Surface Preparation 7
4.0 APPLICATION 8
4.1 General 8
4.1.1 General Requirements for Shop Application 8
4.1.2 General Requirements for Site Application 9
4.1.3 Qualifications and Materials 10
4.1.4 Handling and Transport 10
4.2 Application of Coatings 10
4.2.1 General 10
4.2.2 Atmospheric Conditions 11
4.2.3 Conventional or Airless Spray 11
4.2.4 Brush Application 11
4.2.5 Roller Application 12

TS-2001 0
SHEET 3 of 31

Section Description Sheet Number
Number
4.2.6 Thickness of Coatings 12
4.2.7 Multiple Coat Applications (Except Wet-on-Wet) 12
4.2.8 Protective Coating for Fasteners 14
4.3 Hot Dip Galvanising 12
4.4 Damaged or Inaccessible Surfaces 13
4.4.1 Damaged Paint Surface 14
4.4.2 Damaged Galvanised Surfaces 14
4.4.3 Inaccessible Surfaces 14
4.5 Surfaces Not to be Coated 14
4.6 Wash-up 14
4.7 Touch- up Painting 14
4.8 Paint Storage 15
5.0 COATING SYSTEM SELECTION 15
6.0 MACHINERY, ELECTRICAL AND INSTUMENT EQUIPMENT 23
6.1 Machinery 23
6.2 Electrical And Instrument Equipment 23
7.0 COLOURS 23
8.0 PARTICULAR DESCRIPTION 25
9.0 INSPECTION & TESTING 25
10.0 ADHESION TEST RESULTS 26
11.0 SUBMISSION OF DATA 27
12.0 LETTER AND NUMBER INSCRIPTION 27
13.0 COLOUR BAND FOR PIPING 28
14.0 LIST OF MANUFACTURERS 28


TS-2001 0
SHEET 4 of 31

1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the technical requirements for shop and site application of paint
and protective coatings and includes; the surface preparation, priming, application, testing
and quality assurance for protective coatings of mechanical equipment, structural
steelwork, plate work, tankage, guards, pipe work, handrails and associated metal
surfaces, which will be exposed to atmospheric for the Project.
1.2 Definitions
C.S - Carbon steel and low chrome (1-1/4 Cr through 9 Cr) alloys
S.S - Stainless steel, such as 304,316, 321, 347,
Non-ferrous - copper, aluminium and their alloys.
High Alloy - Monel, Inconel, Incoloy, Alloy 20, Hastelloy, etc.
DFT - Dry Film thickness, the thickness of the dried or curved paint or
coating film.
1.3 Safety Regulations

Protective coatings and their application shall comply with all national, state, and local
codes and regulations on surface preparation, coating application, storage, handling,
safety, and environmental recommendations.
Sand or other materials producing silica dust shall NOT be used for any open-air blasting
operations.
1.4 Material Safety Data Sheets
The latest issue of the coating manufacturer’s product datasheet, application instructions,
and Material safety data Sheets shall be available prior to starting the work and shall be
complied with during all preparation and painting / coating operations.
1.5 Materials
All paints and paint materials shall be obtained from the company’s approved
manufacturer’s list. All materials shall be supplied in the manufacturer’s containers, durably
and legibly marked as follows.
Specification number
Colour reference number
Method of application
Batch number
Date of Manufacture
Shelf life expiry date
Manufacturer’s name or recognised trade mark.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 5 of 31

2.0 CODE AND STANDARDS:
Without prejudice to the provision of Clause 1.1 above and the detailed specifications of the
contract, the following codes & standards shall be followed. Wherever reference to any
code is made, it shall correspond to the latest edition of the code.
2.1 Indian Standards:
IS-5: 1994 Colors for ready mixed paints and enamels.

IS-2379: 1990 Color codes for identification of pipe lines.
IS-2629: 1985 Recommended practice for hot-dip galvanizing on iron and steel.
IS-2633: 1986 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc-coated articles.
IS-8629: 1977 Code of practice for protection of iron and steel structures from
atmospheric corrosion.
IS:110 Specification for Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Grey Filler, for
Enamels, for Over Primers
IS:101 Methods of test for ready mixed paints & enamels.
2.2 Other Standards:
2.2.1 Swedish Standard: SIS-05 5900-1967 / ISO-8501-1-1988

(Surface preparations standards for Painting Steel Surface).
This standard contains photographs of the various standards on four different degrees of
rusted steel and as such is preferable for inspection purpose by the Engineer-in-charge.
2.2.1 DIN: 53151 Standards for Adhesion test.
2.3 The paint manufacturer’s, instructions shall be followed as far as practicable at all times.
Particular attention shall be paid to the following:
a) Instructions for storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of temperature.
b) Surface preparation prior to painting.
c) Mixing and thinning.
d) Application of paints and the recommended limit on time intervals between coats.


TS-2001 0
SHEET 6 of 31

3.0 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.1 Metal Surface Preparation
3.1.1 Safety
All work in adjacent areas, which may negatively affect the quality of blast cleaning, and/or
impose safety hazards, must be completed or stopped before the blasting operation starts.
3.1.2 Pre-cleaning
Prior to surface preparation all weld spatter shall be removed from the surface, all sharp
edges ground down and all surfaces cleaned free of contaminants including chalked paint,
dust, grease, oil, chemicals and salt. All shop primed surfaces shall be water washed by
means of suitable solvent, by steam cleaning, with an alkaline cleaning agent if necessary
or by high-pressure water, to remove contaminants prior to top-coating
3.1.3 Surface Decontamination
Surface decontamination shall be performed prior to paint application when uncoated

surface is exposed to a corrosive environment or existing paint work is to be repaired.
Existing coatings shall be removed by abrasive blast cleaning, and then high pressure
potable water shall be used to clean steel surfaces.
Prior to application of coatings, the surface shall be chemically checked for the presence of
contaminants. A surface contamination analysis test kit shall be used to measure the levels
of chlorides, iron salts and pH in accordance with the kit manufacturer’s recommendations.
Swabs taken from the steel surface, using cotton wool test swabs soaked in distilled water
shall not be less than one swab for every 25m2 of surface area to be painted.
Maximum allowable contaminant levels and pH range is as follows:
Sodium chloride, less than 50 microgram / cm2;
Soluble iron salts, less than 7 microgram / cm2; and
If the results of the contamination test fall outside the acceptable limits, then the wash
water process shall be repeated over the entire surface to be painted, until the contaminant
test is within the specified levels.
3.1.4 Abrasive Blasting
All C.S. materials shall be abrasive blast cleaned in accordance with Codes (Ref. Clause
2.0). To reduce the possibility of contaminating S.S., blasting is not usually specified.
However, for coatings which require a blast-cleaned surface for proper adhesion, S.S. may
be blast cleaned using clean aluminium oxide or garnet abrasives (Free from any chloride
or Iron / Steel contamination).When hand or power tool cleaning is required on S.S., only
S.S. wire-brushes (including 410 S.S.) which have not been previously used on C.S.
surfaces may be used.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 7 of 31

The surface profile of steel surfaces after blasting shall be of preparation grade Sa 2-1/2
of Swedish Standards SIS-05-5900 (Latest Revision) or better according to ISO 8501-1 and
shall be measured using the replica tape method or the comparator method.
The roughness (profile) of blast-cleaned surfaces shall be Medium (G) according to ISO
8503-2: 1988 (appendix 1) unless otherwise specified. Medium defines a surface profile
with a maximum peak-to-valley height of 60-100 microns, and G indicates that the surface
profile is obtained by grit blasting. For the evaluation of surface roughness Comparator G
shall be used.
Abrasive blast cleaning shall NOT be performed when the ambient or the substrate
temperatures are less than 3o C above the dew point temperature. The relative humidity
should preferably be below 50% during cold weather and shall never be higher than 60% in
any case.
Abrasive blast cleaning shall be performed with a clean, sharp grade of abrasive. Grain
size shall be suitable for producing the specified roughness. Abrasives shall be free from
oil, grease, moisture and salts, and shall contain no more than 50ppm chloride. The use of
silica sand, copper slag and other potentially silica containing materials shall not be allowed
The blasting compressor shall be capable of maintaining a minimum air pressure of 7 kPa
at the nozzle to obtain the acceptable surface cleanliness and profile.
The blast cleaning air compressor shall be equipped with adequately sized and properly
maintained oil and water separators. The air supply shall be checked to ensure no oil and
water contamination at the beginning of each work shift.
Blast cleaning abrasive shall be stored in a clean, dry environment at all times. Recycling of
used abrasive is prohibited.
After blast cleaning, the surfaces shall be cleaned by washing with clean water (Pressure
7kg/Cm2 using suitable nozzles. During washing broom corn brushes shall be used to
remove foreign matter.
Assessment of the blast cleaned surfaces shall be carried out in accordance with reference
code.
Blast cleaned surfaces which show evidence of rust bloom or that have been left uncoated
overnight shall be re-cleaned to the specified degree of cleanliness prior to coating.
All grit and dust shall be removed after blasting and before coating application. Removal
shall be by a combination of blowing clean with compressed air, followed by a thorough
vacuum cleaning with an industrial grade, heavy duty vacuum cleaner.
All cleaned surfaces shall have protection from atmospheric corrosion as per IS8629:1977
3.1.5 Alternate Methods of Surface Preparation
When open air blasting is not permitted on site, or when space limitations or surface
configurations preclude blasting, the alternate cleaning methods listed below may be used
with prior approval. Alternate cleaning methods shall consider the degree of surface
cleanliness and roughness profile required by the specified coating system.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 8 of 31

- Vacuum or suction head abrasive blast-cleaning,
- Wet jet abrasive blast-cleaning,
- Compressed-air wet abrasive blast cleaning,
- Pressurized liquid blast-cleaning,
- Power tool cleaning,
- Hand or power tool cleaning,
Hand and/or power tool cleaning shall only be used for spot repair where abrasive blasting
is not permitted or is impractical, and on items which could be damaged by abrasive
blasting. Power tool cleaning shall not be carried out with tools which polish the surface,
e.g. power wire brushes.
The surfaces of equipments and prefabricated piping etc. which are received at site
Primerised or with finish paints, depending upon their conditions, shall be touched up
and painted at site. For these surfaces sand blasting is not envisaged and these
surfaces shall be prepared using power brushes, buffing or scraping, so as to achieve a
surface finish to St-3 as per SIS-05-5900 . After wash-up the area to be touched up shall
be jointly marked, measured and recorded for payment purposes. The type of system &
nos. of coat (primer and/or finish paint) to be applied after touch up, which shall be decided
by OWNER/CONSULTANT in writing before taking up the job.
When paint is to be applied on damaged painted surfaces of equipments all loose and
flaking paint work should be removed to a firm feathered edge. Rusted spots should be
cleaned by one of the methods specified in the clauses 4.4.1 & 4.4.2 above. In case the
previous paint work is not compatible to the specified one the entire coating must be
removed.
It shall be ensured that sand blasted surface/machine cleaned surface is not contaminated
with oil and grease. Water shall also not be allowed to come in contact with sand blasted
surface.
4.0 APPLICATION
4.1 General
The final specification of paint systems to be used to suit the exposure conditions of
equipment and steelwork, shall be as specified on the scope of work, equipment data
sheets or the drawings.
All coatings shall be in accordance with Indian / International Standards, the coating
manufacturer’s product data sheets and application instructions and the requirements
contained in this specification.
4.1.1 General Requirements for Shop Application
All work areas which facilitates shop paint application shall be surface prepared for painting
and have the paint system applied before installation.
Equipments assembled at site shall only receive primer coat in the shop and finish coatings
will be applied at site.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 9 of 31

In all cases, where surfaces will be inaccessible after shop assembly, they shall be
prepared and have the paint system applied before assembly is carried out. Drying times
between successive coats shall be at least those recommended by the manufacturer.
All known field weld areas shall be given the specified abrasive blast surface preparation
but left uncoated for a distance of 50mm from the weld line. Such areas shall be given the
appropriate touch-up treatment after installation.
The manufacturer's directions for preparation and application of coatings shall be followed
to ensure that the durability of the coating system is not impaired.
The Contractor shall submit the full details of the proposed surface preparation and paint
systems prior to the commencement of any surface preparation.
4.1.2 General Requirements for Site Application
Paint shall be stored only in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
All materials used for the specific system being applied shall be products supplied by one
manufacturer and details of such product shall be submitted for approval before
commencement of work.
The contents of cans shall be thoroughly stirred before being poured into paint pots and
shall be thinned only in the specified proportions in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Finish coats may be applied by spraying except where any over spray is likely to affect
finished surfaces or where spraying constitutes a health hazard to workmen in the other
areas. Brush and roller application will require multiple coats to achieve the specified dry
film thickness.
Brush application may be used only with the approval of the company.
Roller application shall only be used on relatively large surface areas ( i.e. > 50m2) and
only if spraying is not an option.
The Contractor shall complete the application of any one type of paint or each coat thereof,
before beginning the next coat on that section.
In cases nominated as critical, the application of each coat shall be approved before
application of the next coat can proceed, in accordance with ‘hold’ points nominated in the
Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs)
All fittings within any given area are to be painted with the same system as the area unless
otherwise specified.
Where 2 coat of finish paint are indicated they shall be applied in two different shades to
ensure that two coat are applied.
Paint shall not be applied in rain, snow, fog or mist or when the relative humidity is such as
to cause condensation on metal surface.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 10 of 31

The CONTRACTOR must ensure the availability of a specialist from the paint
manufacturer, at SITE during pendency of CONTRACT within his quoted rates to ensure
the quality of painting & procedure. Addition of drying agents, pigments or other
substances is not allowed unless specifically prescribed or approved by paint
manufacturer's specialist.
Name plates/tags attached to the equipments/machineries shall not be painted or removed

during painting job. Failing to comply with above, the CONTRACTOR may be required to
replace name plates/tags at his cost.
4.1.3 Qualifications and Materials
All surface preparation, coatings application and inspection, shall be carried out by
personnel experienced in that particular field. Contractors shall submit the names of
subcontractors to be employed for the specific work together with the brand names of
coating materials for approval prior to commencement of application.
4.1.4 Handling and Transport
All pipe work, steelwork and equipment that have been finish coated shall be handled with
care to preserve the coating in the best practical condition.
Painted materials shall not be handled until the coating has completely cured and dried
hard Supports in contact with coated steel during transport and storage shall be covered
with a soft material to prevent damage to the coating. Appropriate materials shall be used
during transportation between coated steelwork and holding down chains to prevent
damage to the coating.
4.2 Application of Coatings
4.2.1 General
The application method and type of equipment to be used shall be suitable for the paint
specified and the surface being painted.
Paints and thinners shall be brought to the point of usage in unopened original containers
bearing the manufacturer's brand name and colour designation and ready-mixed unless
otherwise specified. Two-pack systems shall be mixed at the site of application to the paint
manufacturer's recommendations. The mixed amount prepared shall be no more than the
amount that can be applied during the stated pot life.
Paint shall be applied so that an even film of uniform thickness, tint and consistency covers
the entire surface and is free of pin holes, runs, sags or excessive brush marks. Film finish
shall be equal to that of first class brushwork.
Unless it is practical to do so colour shades for primer, intermediate coat and finish coat
must be different to identify each coat without any ambiguity
Paint ingredients shall be kept properly mixed during paint application.
Equipment shall be kept clean to ensure dirt, dried paint and other foreign materials are not
deposited in the paint film. Any cleaning solvents left in the equipment shall be completely
removed before painting.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 11 of 31

To ensure the required film thickness is achieved on angles, welds, sharp external edges,
nuts and bolts, a coat shall be applied to such items/locations immediately prior to the
application of each coating to the whole area.
Care shall be taken to ensure paint application into all joints and crevices.
The contact surfaces between steelwork to be fastened by means of friction grip bolting
shall be abrasive blast cleaned and prime coated only, prior to erection.
4.2.2 Atmospheric conditions
Surface preparation and coating shall not be carried out in inclement weather and shall be
carried out such that the surface being coated is free of moisture, wind-borne or blast
cleaning dust.
Coatings shall not be applied if:

- The relative humidity exceeds 85%.
- The ambient temperature is less than 50C (depending on local condition)
- The metal temperature is less than 30C above the dew point.
- There is likely hood of an unfavourable change in weather conditions within two
hours after painting.
As a general rule, sufficient ventilation, dehumidification and heating capacity to cope with
local climatic conditions must be secured before any coating – related work is started.
In any case, humidity, ambient and surface temperature conditions at the time of paint
application, and curing and drying time before application of the next coat, shall be in
accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. These conditions shall be
recorded in the Inspection Test Record (ITR) by the Contractor and be available for review.
4.2.3 Conventional or Airless Spray
Spray equipment shall be equipped with accurate pressure regulators and gauges. Spray
gun nozzles and needles shall be those recommended by the paint manufacturer.
Air from the spray gun shall be clean and dry with no traces of oil or moisture.
Coatings shall be wet on contacting the painted surface. Areas of dry spray shall be
removed and the correct system re-applied.
4.2.4 Brush Application
The method of "laying-off" shall be suited to the paint specified and shall ensure minimum
brush marking.
4.2.5 Roller Application

TS-2001 0
SHEET 12 of 31

A uniform method of application shall be adopted when painting large areas. The rolling
direction shall minimise paint joint build up. Edges and areas subject to possible roller
damage shall be brush-painted prior to rolling.
4.2.6 Thickness of Coatings
The maximum thickness DFT in any one application shall not exceed that specified in
Technical specifications/ recommended by the paint manufacturer.
Wet film thickness gauges shall be used to make frequent checks on the applied wet film.
The Contractor shall maintain at the site of painting operations, a dry film thickness tester of
an approved type with a valid current calibration.
Coating thickness checks in accordance with reference code shall be performed, and the
Contractor shall undertake remedial action if the measured thickness is less than specified.
Build up of each material to required thickness shall be made prior to the application of the
subsequent coat; final film build shall be the minimum specified.
4.2.7 Multiple Coat Applications (Except Wet-On-Wet)
Before successive paint coats are applied, intermediate coats shall be inspected for
surface contamination. The presence of any grease or oil, shall be removed by a suitable
solvent, and any salt and dirt adhering to the surface shall be removed by scrubbing with a
solution of non-toxic detergent (except those prescribed by the manufacturer as “wet-on-
wet"). Removal of contaminants shall only be performed after an intermediate coat has had
sufficient time to cure.
The surface shall then be pressure hosed or dusted down by brush to disturb and remove
deposits not apparent on visual inspection.
Coatings shall be applied only under the following conditions:

- The surface has been cleaned and is dry;
- The manufacturer's stated minimum time for re-coat has elapsed;
- The manufacturer's stated maximum time for re-coat has not elapsed. If the
maximum time has elapsed then pre-treatment shall be in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's recommendations; and
Damaged areas in preceding coat have been made good in accordance with this
Specification.
When multiple coat of finish paint are indicated, they shall be applied in different shades to
ensure that multiple coats have been applied.
4.2.8 Protective Coatings for Fasteners
Black and galvanised erection bolts/nuts and galvanised holding down bolts/nuts shall be
prepared and painted in accordance with Section 4.4 of this Specification.
TS-2001 0
SHEET 13 of 31

Black high tensile bolts/nuts shall be painted after erection to the same paint system
specification as the surrounding structural steel.
4.3 Hot Dip Galvanising
All galvanising shall be carried out by the hot dipping process and conform to the
requirements of IS-2629:1985 and uniformity of coating shall confirm to IS 2633:1986.
All welding slag shall be removed by chipping, wire brushing, flame cleaning or abrasive
blast cleaning where necessary prior to galvanising
For temporary identification, either water-soluble marking paints or detachable metal labels
shall be used. For permanent identification, figures/labels shall be heavily punched or
embossed by the fabricator.
For galvanised items after pickling, the work shall be inspected and any defects that render
the work unsuitable for galvanising shall be repaired. After such repairs, the work shall
again be cleaned by pickling.
The coating mass of zinc shall be as specified on equipment data sheets and the Drawings.
Galvanised coatings shall be tested by the methods described in referred code.
After galvanising all material shall be cooled to air temperature in such a manner that no
embrittlement occurs.
Galvanised coatings shall be smooth, uniform, adherent and free from stains, surface
imperfections and inclusions.
All gratings and fixtures including nuts, bolts and washers that are required to be
galvanised, shall be hot dipped galvanised and all nut threads shall be re-tapped after
galvanising and a lubricant applied on Cold working of galvanised steelwork shall be
avoided.
4.4 Damaged or Inaccessible Surfaces
4.4.1 Damaged Paint Surface
Repair of damaged painted surfaces, as well as painting of galvanised and black bolts, and
galvanised holding down bolts after erection shall comply with this Clause. The treatment
shall be:
- Pre-clean the damaged or unpainted areas in accordance with Section 4.2.1 of this
Specification;
- Disc or hand sand to clean bright metal;
- Inorganic zinc primers subject to mechanical damage or weld etc shall be power
tool cleaned
- Feather backs by sandpapering or whip blasting the original coatings surrounding
the damaged area over a 50mm distance. A rough surface shall be obtained on
epoxy coatings;

TS-2001 0
SHEET 14 of 31

- Clean surface to remove all dust;
- Conduct surface contaminant test in accordance with Section 4.2.2 of this
document; and
Build up a new paint system over the affected area with paints equal to those
originally used and having the same dry film thickness for each coat. As an
exception, damaged inorganic zinc primers shall be repaired with epoxy organic
zinc rich paint and shall be applied within four hours of blast cleaning.
The new coatings shall overlap the original coating over the 50mm prepared distance and
shall be colour matched to the specified colour of the original coating.
4.4.2 Damaged Galvanised Surfaces
Damaged areas caused by oxy-cutting, welding or physical impact shall be treated as

follows:
- Prepare the surface by removing any weld slag followed by vigorous power wire
brushing of the coating surrounding the damaged area over a 50mm distance;
- Clean surface to remove all dust; and
- Apply two coats of organic zinc-rich primer to a minimum DFT of 100 microns.
The area to be reinstated shall be colour matched to the surrounding finish colour with 40
microns of aluminium paint to the manufacturer's written instructions.
4.4.3 Inaccessible Surfaces
Surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection of other elements of the structure, shall be
fully painted prior to the installation of the obstructing item.
4.5 Surfaces Not To Be Coated
The following surfaces shall not be blasted or coated unless specifically directed:
Machined surfaces, bearings, seals, grease fittings, adjusting screws and name plates, and
identification tags.
- Valve stems;
- Raised faces on pipe and equipment flanges;
- Electrical cabling;
- Instrumentation, gauges and sight glasses;
- Titanium, stainless steel and non-metallic surfaces; and
Field weld margins, 50mm either side of weld, on tankage and piping, prior
welding.
The rear face of piping flanges shall be shop prime coated only. Flange holes for fasteners
shall be fully coated.
4.6 Wash-Up

TS-2001 0
SHEET 15 of 31

All surface of equipments/prefabricated piping etc. Primerised / painted at Vendor shop and
received at site if required shall be washed up as follow:
a) Washing with clean water (Pressure 7 Kg/cm2) using suitable nozzles. During
washing, broomcorn brushes shall be used to remove foreign matter.
b) Solvent washing, if required , to remove traces of wash up as per above procedure

of all surfaces of equipment, piping, structure etc. completely painted at
contractor's shop shall be included in the quoted rates of oil, grease etc. Wash up
as per above procedure of all surfaces of equipment, piping, structure etc.
completely painted at contractor's shop shall be included in the quoted rates.
4.7 Touch-Up Painting
Prior to the application of any coat, all damage to the previous coat(s) shall be touched-up.
Damage to finished work shall be thoroughly cleaned and re-coated.
Surface preparation shall be done as per clause no. 3.0..........................
Items supplied with the manufacturer’s standard coating system shall be touched-up with
the same generic coating system or recoated.
4.8 Paint Storage
The following must be ensured:
a) All paints and painting material shall be stored only in such rooms assigned for the
purpose. All necessary precaution shall be taken to prevent fire. The Storage
building shall preferably be separate from adjacent buildings. A sign-board bearing
the Words "PAINT STORAGE- NO NAKED LIGHT" shall be clearly displayed
outside. The building shall be properly ventilated and shall be adequately protected
with fire fighting equipment.
b) Storage shall be far away from heated surface open flames, sparks & well protected
from sun rays.
c) Ambient temperature at which paints are stored shall be intimated to paint

manufacturer & their advice sought regarding precautions to be taken if any,
regarding flammability, explosiveness & toxicity.
d) Maximum allowed storage time for various paint materials shall be clearly indicated
on individual containers. Materials which have passed expiry date shall not be used.
e) Paints in non-original containers and/or in containers without seals, shall not be

used.
5.0 COATING SYSTEM SELECTION

TS-2001 0
SHEET 16 of 31

Coating Systems for Structures Piping and Equipment
The following Table 1 shall be used as a general guide for the selection of a paint system
suitable for a particular plant area application. Paint systems specified on equipment data
sheets and the Drawings shall take precedence over the general paint system area
applications listed in Table 1.
TABLE - 1
Ref Application Surface Generic Coating Minimum Remarks

No. Preparation System DFT
01 Structural Steel work Blast cleaning to P2 : ONE coat of two P2 : 60 Total dry Total dry
with operating temp. near white metal pack zinc rich epoxy microns film film
Up to 90O C (Steel grade 2 ½, of Primer meeting SSPC thickness thickness
structures, Piping Swedish Paint 20 level 1 F1 : 120 – of paint of paint
support, uninsulated Standards SIS- 200 system: system:
CS piping, flanges, 05-5900 F1 : One coat of two microns 240 320
valves, stairways, (Latest). packs. Polyamide microns microns
walkways etc. except Cured Epoxy. F5 : 60 as per C4 as per C5
grating). microns – High – High
F5 : One coat of two durability durability
pack aliphatic acrylic
polyurethane
02 Uninsulated CS Blast cleaning to P1 : One coat of Ethyl P1 : 75 Total dry film thickness
piping, flanges, near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
valves with operating grade Sa-2½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
temp. From Above Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F3 : 2 x 25
90O C to 200O C. Standards SIS- microns for
05-5900 (Latest) F3 : Two coats of single each coat
pack special Oleo Total - 125
resinous based heat microns.
resistant ready mixed
Aluminium Paint.
piping, flanges, near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
valves with operating grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
temp. Over 200O C. Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F4 : 2 x 25
Standards SIS- microns for
05-5900 F4 : Two coats of Heat each coat
(Latest). Resisting Silicon Total - 50
Aluminium Paint. microns.
04 Insulated CS piping Blast cleaning to F8 : One coat of high F8 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
flanges, valves with near white metal temperature epoxy 125 of paint system: 250
operating temp up to grade 2 ½, of phenolic microns microns.
90O C Swedish
Standards SIS-
05-5900
(Latest).
05 Insulated CS piping, Blast cleaning to F8 : Two coats of high F8 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
flanges, valves with near white metal temperature epoxy 125 of paint system:250
operating temp. From grade Sa-2½, of phenolic (novolac) microns microns
O O
90 C to 200 C. Swedish
Standards SIS-
05-5900

TS-2001 0
SHEET 17 of 31

06 Insulated CS piping, Blast cleaning to F9 : Two coats of F9 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
flanges, valves with near white metal Inorganic Co-polymer 150 of paint system: 300
operating temp. Over grade 2 ½, of based coating With an microns microns.
200O C. Swedish Inert Multipolymer
Standards SIS- Matrix.
05-5900
(Latest).
07 Uninsulated CS Blast cleaning to P2 : ONE coat of two P2 : 60 Total dry Total dry
equipment with near white metal pack zinc rich epoxy microns film film
operating temp. Up to grade 2 ½, of Primer meeting SSPC thickness thickness
90O C, to be treated Swedish Paint 20 level 1 F1 : 120 – of paint of paint
at Manufacturer’s Standards SIS- 200 system: system:
shop. 05-5900 F1 : One coat of two microns 240 320
(Latest). packs. Polyamide microns microns
Cured Epoxy. F5 : 60 as per C4 as per C5
microns – High – High
F5 : One coat of two Durability Durability
polyurethane
equipment with near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
operating temp. From grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
91O C to 200oC, to be Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F3 : 2 x 25
treated at Standards SIS- F3 : Two coats of single microns for
Manufacturer’s shop. 05-5900 pack special each coat
(Latest). Oleouresinous based
heat resistant ready
mixed Aluminium Paint.
equipment with near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
operating temp. Over grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
200oC, to be treated Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F4 : 2 x 25
at Manufacturer’s Standards SIS- F4 : Two coats of Heat microns for
shop. 05-5900 Resisting Silicon each coat
(Latest). Aluminium Paint. Total - 50
microns.
10 Insulated CS Blast cleaning to F8 : Two coats of high F8 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
equipment with near white metal temperature epoxy 125 of paint system:250
operating temp. Up to grade 2 ½, of phenolic (novolac) microns microns
90O C, to be treated Swedish
at Manufacturer’s Standards SIS-
shop. 05-5900
(Latest).
11 Insulated CS Blast cleaning to F8 : Two coats of high F8 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
equipment with near white metal temperature epoxy 125 of paint system:250
operating temp. From grade 2 ½, of phenolic (novolac) microns microns
91O C to 200oC, to be Swedish
treated at Standards SIS-
Manufacturer’s shop. 05-5900
(Latest).

TS-2001 0
SHEET 18 of 31

12 Insulated CS Blast cleaning to F9 : Two coats of F9 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
equipment with near white metal Inorganic Co-polymer 150 of paint system: 300
operating temp. Over grade 2 ½, of based coating With an microns microns.

200oC, to be treated Swedish Inert Multipolymer
at Manufacturer’s Standards SIS- Matrix.
shop. 05-5900
(Latest).
13 Surface of structural Blast cleaning to P1 : One coat of Ethyl P1 : 75 Total dry film thickness
steel for furnaces, near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
external surface of grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
furnaces, external Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F3 : 2 x 25
surface of flue duct, Standards SIS- microns for
metal stacks and 05-5900 F3 : Two coats of single each coat
similar with operating (Latest). pack special Oleo
temp. Up to 200oC. resinous based heat
(With exclusion of resistant ready mixed
stair ways, walk ways Aluminium Paint.
etc.).
14 For external surfaces Blast cleaning to P1 : One coat of Ethyl P1 : 75 Total dry film thickness
of flue ducts, metal near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
stacks, and similar grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
with operating temp. Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F4 : 2 x 25
Above 200oC. Standards SIS- microns for
05-5900 F4 : Two coats of Heat each coat
(Latest). Resisting Silicon Total - 50
Aluminium Paint. microns.
15 For surfaces of air Blast cleaning to P2 : ONE coat of two P2 : 60 Total dry Total dry
cooler heads not near white metal pack zinc rich epoxy microns film film
galvanized with grade 2 ½, of Primer meeting SSPC thickness thickness
operating Swedish Paint 20 level 1 F1 : 120 – of paint of paint
temperature up to 900 Standards SIS- 200 system: system:
C, treated at 05-5900 F1 : One coat of two microns 240 320
manufacturer’s shop. (Latest). packs. Polyamide microns microns
polyurethane
NOTE: All surfaces shall be galvanized at manufacturer’s shop with exception of
the end header of air cooled heat exchangers that shall be treated as
described above at Manufacturer’s shop. In case the same surfaces shall
not be treated at shop, they shall be treated at site according to
environmental and operating conditions.
16 For surfaces of air Blast cleaning to P1 : One coat of Ethyl P1 : 75 Total dry film thickness
cooler heads not near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
galvanized with grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
operating Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F3 : 2 x 25
0
temperature up to 91 Standards SIS- F3 : Two coats of single microns for
O
C TO 200 C, treated 05-5900 pack special each coat
at manufacturer’s (Latest). Oleouresinous based

TS-2001 0
SHEET 19 of 31

shop. heat resistant ready
NOTE: All surfaces shall be galvanized at manufacturer’s shop with exception of

the end header of air cooled heat exchangers that shall be treated as
described above at Manufacturer’s shop. In case the same surfaces shall
not be treated at shop, they shall be treated at site according to
environmental and operating conditions.
18 STORAGE TANKS
a) Acid / Alkali CS Blast cleaning to P2 : ONE coat of two P2 : 60 Total dry Total dry
Storage Tank near white metal pack zinc rich epoxy microns film film
(External Surface grade 2 ½, of Primer meeting SSPC thickness thickness
including all stair Swedish Paint 20 level 1 F1 : 120 – of paint of paint
ways) Standards SIS- 200 system: system:
05-5900 F1 : One coat of two microns 240 320
polyurethane
b) CS Storage Tanks, Blast cleaning to P1 : One coat of Ethyl P1 : 60 Total dry Total dry
Excluding indicated in near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns film film
Sl. No. (a) grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting thickness thickness
Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F1 : 120 - of paint of paint
Standards SIS- 200 system: system:
(Latest). pack Polyamide Cured microns microns
Epoxy. F5 : 60 as per C4 as per C5
F5 : Two-pack aliphatic Durability Durability
Isocyanate cured acrylic
finish paint
19 Cold Insulated Blast cleaning to F7 : Two coats of Tar F7 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
Carbon Steel and low near white metal Free Epoxy paint 125 of paint system: 250
alloy Steel (1-1/4 Cr grade 2 ½, of suitably pigmented microns microns.

through 9 Cr) Piping Swedish
and Equipment. Standards SIS-
(Upto 60 Deg. C) 05-5900
(Latest).
20 Cold Insulated high Lightly Blast F8 : Two coats of high F8 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
alloy Steel piping cleaned as per temperature epoxy 125 of paint system:250
and Equipment Sa 1.0 Swedish phenolic (novolac) microns microns
(Upto 200 Deg. C) Standards SIS-
05-5900
(Latest).
21 DELETED
22 Surface (CS) with Blast cleaning to P1 : One coat of Ethyl P1 : 75 Total dry film thickness
Equipment with temp. near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
Indicating paint from grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
220oC to 240oC Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F6 : 2 x 25
treated at Standards SIS- F6 : Temperature microns for

TS-2001 0
SHEET 20 of 31

Manufacturer’s shop 05-5900 indicating paint each coat
(Latest). Total - 50
microns.
23 PACKAGE:
a) Surface(CS) with Blast cleaning to P2 : ONE coat of two P2 : 60 Total dry Total dry
operating near white metal pack zinc rich epoxy microns film film
temperature upto grade 2 ½, of Primer meeting SSPC thickness thickness
90oC treated at Swedish Paint 20 level 1 F1 : 120 – of paint of paint
Manufacturer’s shop Standards SIS- 200 system: system:
polyurethane
b) Surfaces (CS) with Blast cleaning to P1 : One coat of Ethyl P1 : 75 Total dry film thickness
operating near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
temperature upto 910 grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
C TO 200OC, treated Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F3 : 2 x 25
at manufacturer’s Standards SIS- F3 : Two coats of single microns for
shop. 05-5900 pack special each coat
(Latest). Oleouresinous based
heat resistant ready
c) Surface (CS) with Blast cleaning to P1 : One coat of Ethyl P1 : 75 Total dry film thickness
operating temp. Over near white metal Silicate zinc rich with microns of paint system: 125
200oC, treated at grade 2 ½, of solvent Primer meeting microns.
manufacturer’s shop. Swedish SSPC Paint 20 level 1 F4 : 2 x 25
Standards SIS- F4 : Two coats of Heat microns for
05-5900 Resisting Silicon each coat
(Latest). Aluminium Paint. Total - 50
microns.
d) Package in Carbon Blast cleaning to F7 : Two coats of Tar F7 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
Steel and low Alloy near white metal Free Epoxy paint 125 of paint system: 250
Steel (1-1/4 Cr grade 2 ½, of suitably pigmented microns microns.
through 9 Cr) with Swedish
cold insulated surface Standards SIS-
treated at 05-5900
manufacturer’s shop (Latest).
(Upto 60 Deg. C)
e) Package in Cold Lightly Blast F8 : Two coats of high F8 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
Insulated high alloy cleaned as per temperature epoxy 125 of paint system:250
Steel. Sa 1.0 Swedish phenolic (novolac) microns microns
(Upto 200 Deg. C) Standards SIS-
05-5900
(Latest).
f) DELETED
24 For internal surface Blast cleaning to F2 : Two coats of two F2 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
of shell, roof of CS near white metal pack amine adduct 150 of paint system: 300
tanks, with operating grade 2 ½, of cured Phenolic microns for microns.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 21 of 31

temp. Upto 110oC Swedish (Novolac) epoxy each coat
Standards SIS- (immersion grade)
05-5900
(Latest).
25 For underside (soil Blast cleaning to F7 : Two coats of Tar F7 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
side) of the tank near white metal Free Epoxy paint 200 of paint system: 400
bottom (CS) below grade 2 ½, of suitably pigmented microns microns.
only of the fixed Swedish
tanks, bottom & shell Standards SIS- OR OR OR
shall be treated as 05-5900
follows: (Latest). F8 : Two coats of high F8 : 2 x Total dry film thickness
temperature epoxy 150 of paint system: 300
phenolic (novolac) microns microns.
26 CS Equipment and Blast cleaning to Primer: One coat of Primer: 125 Total dry film thickness
associated piping near white metal Thermal spray microns of paint system 250
subject to cyclic, grade 3, of Aluminium paint and microns.
intermittent or Swedish sealed with a Silicon Finish:
regeneration Standards SIS- Aluminium seal 125
operating condition 05-5900 Finish Coat: One coat of microns
(e.g. Molecular Sieve (Latest). Thermal spray
Driers) subjected to Aluminium paint and
very severe corrosion sealed with a Silicon
with wide operating Aluminium seal.
temperature range.
NOTES:
Primers
ZINC ETHYL SILICATE PRIMER – P1

The zinc ethyl silicate consists of two packs. One pack contains the ethyl silicate binder
with suitable solvents. The other pack contains zinc dust (NOT Paste). Zinc dust shall be
ASTM D 520 Type II. They have to be mixed in suitable proportions before application as
recommended by manufacturer.
Volume solids : Min.64% ±2

DFT Range : 50 – 75 microns
Theoretical Spreading Rate : 12.8 – 8.53 sqm/litre
Colour : Grey
Application : Spray (airless/air)
Drying time ( dry to handle ) : < 45 mins. @ 30 Deg. C and 65% RH
Curing : <16 hrs @ 30 Deg. C and 65% RH
% of total metallic zinc in dry film : (SSPC SP 20 Level 1) >85% by wt.
(As per the ASTM D520 – Spherical
size)
Specific Gravity : 2.5 Kg/Litre min.
Storage life : 6 months under sealed conditions
Zinc silicate Material curing shall be checked using ASTM D 4752, minimum Acceptable
value is 4.
TS-2001 0
SHEET 22 of 31

ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER – P2

The zinc rich epoxy consists of two packs. One pack contains the epoxy binder with
suitable solvents. The other pack contains zinc dust as per ASTM D520 Type II. They
have to be mixed in suitable proportions before application as recommended by
manufacturer.
Volume solids : 65% min. ±2

DFT : 50 – 100 microns
Theoretical Spreading Rate : 13 – 6.5 sqm/litre
Colour : Grey
Application : Airless spray/air spray/brush
Drying time ( dry to handle ) : <10 min. @ 30 Deg C
Hared Dry : < 1.5 hrs @ 30 Deg C
% of total metallic zinc in dry film : (SSPC SP 20 Level 2) 81% by wt. min.
(As per the ASTM D520 –
Spherical size)
Specific Gravity : 2.3 Kg/Litre min.
Finish Paints
HIGH BUILD EPOXY FINISH – F1

This finish paint is fast drying, high build, Two-pack polyamide cured epoxy resin
Colour : As per Manufacturer List
Binder : Polyamide cured epoxy resin, Lead &
Chrome Free
Application : Brush or spray
Drying time : < 2 hrs @ 30 Deg C
Over coating time : < 2 hrs @ 30 Deg C
HIGH BUILD EPOXY FINISH (Immersion Grade) – F2
This finish paint is high build, Two-pack phenolic (novolac) epoxy

Colour : As per Manufacturer List
Binder : Amine adduct cured epoxy resin
Drying time : < 1.5 hrs @ 30 Deg C
Over coating time : < 6.5 hrs @ 30 Deg C
HEAT RESISTANT ALUMINIUM FINISH PAINT : F3

TS-2001 0
SHEET 23 of 31

It is a single pack system based on oleo resinous general purpose aluminium paint with
good heat resistance upto 250 Deg. C. and light reflection.

DFT Range : 25 microns
Theoretical Spreading Rate : 10 sqm/litre
Main pigment : Aluminium (ASTM 962), Lead & Chrome
Free
Colour : Metallic Aluminium
Pigment Volume Concentration : 15 – 20%
Drying time : Surface dry <1hr. @ 30 Deg. C
Hard dry < 3 hrs. @ 30 Deg. C
HEAT RESISTANT SILICON ALUMINIUM FINISH PAINT : F4
It is a single pack system based on ambient curing silicone aluminium pigmented

polysiloxane paint with maximum heat resistance of upto 600 Deg. C.
Main pigment : Aluminium (ASTM 962), Lead & Chrome
Free
Pigment Volume Concentration : 15 – 20%
Drying time : Surface dry < 1hr. at 30 Deg. C
Hard dry < 3 hrs. at 30 Deg. C
TWO PACK ALIPHATIC ACRYLIC POLYURETHANE FINISH PAINT – F5
It Consists of Acrylic Resin in Part A. Part B consists of an aliphatic poly-isocyanate with

appropriate solvents and additives.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 24 of 31

DFT range : 50 – 100 microns
Main pigment : Suitable pigments to get the desired colour,
Lead & Chrome Free
Binder : Shall not contain any binder other than
acrylic resin; should not contain any alkyd /
acrylate alkyds / esters.
Drying time : Surface dry < 1hr. @ 30 Deg. C
ISO 11507/ASTM G 154, QUV A ‐ : Gloss retention: approx. 80 % and colour
change approx. DE 1.2 after 3000 hours
Accelerated weathering
exposure
TEMPERATURE INDICATING PAINT : F6
It is a single pack temperature indicating system based on silicone binder. Pigments change colour
by heating. The colour change of the coating is permanent. At approximately 200°C, the colour
changes from green to blue, above 310°C, the colour changes from blue to greyish white.
Maximum service temperature is 400°C.
Volume solids : 40% min.

DFT : 25 microns
Main pigment : As per shade requirement, Lead & Chrome
free
Colour : As per manufacturer
Binder : Based in silicone Resins
Drying time : Surface dry < 1hr. @ 30 Deg. C
TAR FREE EPOXY – F7 (Coal Tar is Banned Globally being Carcenogic)

TS-2001 0
SHEET 25 of 31

A high build two component abrasion resistant, pure epoxy with anti-corrosive properties
meant for excellent performance.
Volume solids : Minimum 72%

DFT Range : 150 – 200
Application : By brush or airless spray
Drying time : Touch Dry within 4 hrs. @ 30 Deg C
Hard dry < 9 hours @ 30 Deg. C
EPOXY PHENOLIC (NOVOLAC) – F8
Two Pack epoxy-phenolic (novolac) cured with amine adduct used as an External coating for
the protection of insulated (CUI) equipment.

Binder : Epoxy phenolic (novolac)
Dry Temp. Service : Min. -196 to max. 205 Deg. C.
Application : Airless Spray / Brush Touch up
Drying Time : Surface dry < 1.5hr. @ 30 Deg. C
Hard dry < 6 hours @ 30 Deg. C

INORGANIC CO-POLYMER COATING – F9
MIO pigmented single component inorganic copolymer coating which cures to form an inert
polymer matrix able to resist temperatures up to 650°C/1202°F and thermal shock/cycling in
dry or dry/wet service.


Binder : Inorganic copolymer coating
Dry Temp. Service : Min. -196 to max. 650 Deg. C.
Application : Airless Spray / Brush Touch up
Drying Time : Surface dry < 0.5hr. @ 30 Deg. C
Hard dry < 1.5 hours @ 30 Deg. C

6.0 MACHINERY, ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENT EQUIPMENT:
6.1 Machinery

TS-2001 0
SHEET 26 of 31

Steel surfaces shall be treated with complete paint system at Manufacturer’s shop. The
paint system shall be according to Manufacturer’s Std. However, suitable for operating
condition and the environmental condition where the machinery will operate. Where
necessary machinery shall be restored at site by Contractor with suitable finish.
6.2 Electrical and Instrument Equipment
Steel surfaces shall be treated with complete paint system at Manufacturer’s shop. The
paint system shall be according to Manufacturer’s Std., however suitable for operating
condition and the environmental condition where the electrical and instrument equipment
will operate. Where necessary Electrical and Instrument Equipment shall be restored at site
by Contractor with suitable finish.
7.0 COLOURS:
These shall be as required by specification and in particular for:
Description Colour Ra1 Correspond. Asian

Paint colors to be
defined – See Note-2
- Piping with temperature less than GREY 7035
90oC
- Piping, hot surface, flue gas ducts SMOOTH ALUMINIUM “
and stacks with temperature above
90oC
- Cooling Water Piping SEA “
GREEN
- Fire fighting Piping Red 3002 “
- Structures upto 2 MT BLACK 9005 “
- Structures above 2 MT GREY 7010 “
- Stair cases – ladders BLACK 9005 “
- Walkwais GREY 7010 “
- Handrails assemblies YELLOW 1004 “
- Equipment GREY 7035 “
- Hot equipment SMOOTH ALUMINIUM “
- Fire fighting equipment RED 3002 “
- Valves in general GREY 7035 “
- Hot valves SMOOTH ALUMINIUM “
- Safety and Fire fighting valves RED 3002 “
- Valves handwheels BLACK 9005
- Electric Rotary Machines SKY BLUE 5012
- Electric Static Machines GREY 7035
- Machinery (compressors & pumps) GREY 7035 “
with operating temperature less than
90oC
- Machinery (compressors & pumps) SMOOTH ALUMINIUM “
with operating temperature above

TS-2001 0
SHEET 27 of 31

Description Colour Ra1 Correspond. Asian
Paint colors to be
defined – See Note-2
90oC
FURNACES
- Cassing and connected steel works SMOOTH ALUMINIUM “
- Steel work not connected to casing SMOOTH ALUMINIUM “
AIR COOLER
- High Temperature Surfaces (Temp. SMOOTH ALUMINIUM
> 90oC)
- Low Temperature surface (Temp. < GREY 7035 “
90oC)
- Flare < 90oC GREY 7035 “
o
- Flare > 90 C) SMOOTH ALUMINIUM “
TANKS
- Shell of fixed roof WHITE 9010 “
- Roof of fixed roof tank WHITE 9010
- “
- T-303 WHITE 9010 “
NOTE-1: The colours shall be according to IS2379:1990/International STD. RAL or

BS, proposed by Contractor or Manufacturer

8.0 PARTICULAR DESCRIPTION
The abrasive Grit Blasting shall be used for surface preparation. Sand blasting is
prohibited due to environmental regulations.
Primerized surface shall be faultless and shall not have mud-cracking, dripping over
thickness and dry sprays.
Blast cleaning and painting shall not be carried out on wet surfaces.
Blast cleaning shall not be done when surfaces temperatures are less than 3oC above dew
point, or temperature is below 5oC.
No acid washes or other cleaning solutions or solvents shall be used on metal surfaces
after they have been blasted.
The surface preparation of all steel surfaces to be coated shall be free of all mill scale, rust
corrosion product, oxides, paint, oil or other foreign matter
Only dry abrasive blasting procedures will be allowed. The compressed air supply used for
blasting shall be free of detrimental amounts of water and oil. Adequate separator and
traps shall be provided and these shall be kept emptied of water and oil. Any blast cleaning
set up without functioning moisture separators shall be removed from blast cleaning areas.
All welded areas and appurtenances shall be given special attention for removal of welding
flux in crevices. Welding splatter, slivers, laminations and underlying mill scale exposed
during sand blasting shall be removed or repaired.

TS-2001 0
SHEET 28 of 31

The blast-cleaned or power brushing surfaces shall be coated with primer within four hours
of surface preparation.
No primer or intermediate or finishing coating shall be applied without prior notification to

the Company.
The application of the products shall be carried out in strict compliance with the paint
manufacturer’s recommendation.
The Contractor shall provide suitable protection for all adjacent plants or equipment from
airbone during spraying and sand blasting.
9.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
The inspection and testing requirements outlined in this section shall be performed for shop
and site applied coating systems.
Preference shall be given to manufacturers and applicators that are quality certified to ISO
9001: 2000.
Documentation of coating material manufacturers and applicators shall include daily

inspection reports, equipment reports, and shall clearly identify and trace materials supply
and testing performed on coated items and areas.
Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs), and quality control procedures used for application of
coating systems shall form part of the Method Statement and shall be submitted for
approval by the Principal prior to commencement of work.
The applicator shall appoint a certified inspector of coatings for inspection and testing of
coating systems.
Tests of coated areas and items shall form part of the ITPs.
 Surface Preparation in accordance to Swedish Standard SIS-05-5900 (Latest).
 Blast cleaning profile shall be checked using a suitable profile meter – Acceptable
profile shall be 40 - 60 microns.
 Check of time of top coating and drying in accordance with the direction of the paint
manufacturer.
 Check of dry film thickness by suitable non-destructive Instrument such as

“MIKROTEST”, “DIAMETER” or equivalent.
 Before any coating work is preformed on the site, the contractor shall ensure that
any works applied by others is acceptable.
Any defect that are discovered, are to be notified in writing to the owner before
proceeding with the contract work. To ensure the good execution of painting work
following test shall be performed:
- Surface Preparation
- Surface contaminant tests

TS-2001 0
SHEET 29 of 31

- Surface profile tests
- Coating thickness tests
- Tests for cure of coatings
- Adhesion tests
- Continuity testing
- Iron contamination
- Chloride contamination
- Dust Contamination
All Inspection and Test Records (ITRs) shall be submitted with the Manufacturer’s
Data Report (MDR) at the conclusion of the job.
Defective coated areas shall be suitably marked for rectification work to be

performed in compliance with this specification.
Access shall be granted for inspection of all paint work, and witnessing of test work.
This shall not however relieve the Contractor of their own QA/QC responsibilities.
10.0 ADHESION TEST RESULTS
For all type of primer the Contractor shall guarantee the Classification of Adhesion Test
Results as per ASTM D3359. The acceptable Rate Adhesion Test Results shall be for
sandblasted and primerized surfaces shall be minimum 3A (or Higher)
For primer plus finishing coat(s) the Contractor shall guarantee the Classification of
Adhesion Test Results as per ASTM D 3359. The acceptable Rate Adhesion Test Results
shall be for blast cleaned and painted surfaces shall be minimum 3A ( or higher).
After test, the surface must be repaired according to the system applied.
11.0 SUBMISSION OF DATA

Contractor shall submit in phase of bid the original technical data sheet and system for all
material supplied by him to apply for the permanent works and test report for the paint in
compliance to IS101.This material shall be subject to Owner’s approval.
The test certificates of zinc silicate shall provide the specific gravity of mixed paint.
12.0 LETTER AND NUMBER INSCRIPTION

Inscriptions letters, as herebelow indicated, shall be made on equipments, piping, storage
tanks, machinery etc.
12.1 Geometric forms and dimensions
Letters and numbers dimensions shall be orientativally fixed according to following:
(A – Dimension of side of unitary elements of grid)
a) Storage Tanks A – 60 mm
b) Equipments and piping with O.D. above 600 mm A– 40 mm and
c) Equipments and pipings with O.D. from 300 to 600 mm and for machinery of great
dimensions A – 20 mm
d) Equipments and pipings with O.D. less than 300 mm and for machinery with small
dimensions A – 10 mm

TS-2001 0
SHEET 30 of 31

12.2 Inscription’s Colours
Inscriptions shall be Black ENI 901 (RAL 9005) on light base
Inscriptions shall be White ENI 101 (RAL 9010) on dark base
12.3 Spaces and Interspaces
Spaces between words and assemblage of numbers shall have dimensions equal to 2A
Interspaces between letters or numbers shall have dimensions equal to A.
13.0 Colour Band for piping ;-

As a rule minimum width of colour band shall confirm to the following Table:-
Nominal pipe Size Width L (mm)
3” & below 25
4” NB-6” NB 50
8” NB-12”NB 75
14” OD & above 100
14.0 LIST OF MANUFACTURERS :
1. M/s Berger Paints

2. M/s Jensons & Nickolson
3. M/s Asian Paints
4. M/s Grauer & Weil (India) Limited
5. M/s Shalimar paints
6. M/s Garware Paints
7. M/s Goodlass Nerolac Paints Ltd
8. M/s.HEMPEL Paints
9. M/s International Paints (Akzo Nobel Brand)
10.M/s Jotun Paints
11. M/s Carboline (India) Pvt. Ltd.
12.M/s Mohan Paints
15.0 The contractor shall obtain prior approval from Engineer-In-Charge for the brands of paint
material proposed to be used. The contractor shall submit the following details of paint
material either at the time of bidding or soon after award of work for approval of paints.
a. Technical data sheet

b. Material safety data sheet
c. Finger printing of paint products as per ISO 20340
16.0 Owner reserves the right to take random samples and get it tested through reputed labs.
In case the supplied paint material do not meet the specified performance requirements then

TS-2001 0
SHEET 31 of 31

suitable action shall be taken against the paint supplier. The decision of Engineer-In Charge
shall be final and binding on the Contractor in such cases
17.0 WARRANTY:
Contractor along with Paint Manufacturer jointly shall develop the paint schemes following
the system specification.
They shall jointly provide a performance guarantee for a period 5 years as stipulated below,
After 1 years – Corrosion in 3% of total painted area accepted
where spontaneous visible corrosion has broken down the paint film to a degree exceeding “Ri 3”
(as defined in ISO 4628/3‐2003).

9.0
P1
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LIMITED Document No. Rev
PAGE 1 of 4
PART II: TECHNICAL
SECTION – VI-9.0
SPARE PARTS
PLANT: RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR,


ODISHA (INDIA)

RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, 9.0
P1
TFL, TALCHER
Document No. Rev
SPARE PARTS
PAGE 2 of 4
MACHINERY
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
QUANTITY
S. No. DESCRIPTION No. of Pumps working
1 2 3 4
1. Impeller 1 set 1 set 1 set 1 set
2. Impeller locking nut 2 sets 2 sets 2 sets 2 sets
3. Wear Rings 2 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets
4. Shaft with keys 1 set 1 set 1 set 1 set
5. Shaft Sleeve 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets
6. Interstage sleeves 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets
7. Interstage Bushes 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets
8. Mech. Seal where applicable 1 no. 1 no. 2 nos. 2 nos.
9. ‘O’ Rings / Springs for Mech. Seal 2 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets
10. Mechanical Seal Faces 1 set 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets
11 Constant level Oiler 2 sets 2 sets 2 sets 2 sets
12 Deflectors 2 sets 2 sets 3 sets 3 sets
13 Complete coupling 1 No. 1 No. 1 No. 1 No.
Flexible elements, Bushes, Pins for
14 1 set 1 set 2 sets 2 sets
Coupling
15 Bearings ( DE + NDE ) 1 set 2 sets 2 sets 2 sets
16 Gaskets & ‘O’ Rings 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets 6 sets
17 Labyrinths 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets 5 sets
18 Throat Bushing 1 No. 2 Nos. 3 Nos. 4 Nos.
19 Throttle Bushing 1 No. 2 Nos. 3 Nos. 4 Nos.
20 Oil Seals 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets 6 sets
21 Balancing drum & sleeves 1 set 1 set 2 sets 2 sets
Leak-off valve-gaskets, ‘O’ Rings and
22 2 sets 3 sets 4 sets 5 sets
springs
Spares for gear box (bearings, gears and
23 1 set 1 set 1 set 1 set
seals)
24 All type of Fasteners 200% 200% 200% 200%

P1
TFL, TALCHER
Document No. Rev
SPARE PARTS
PAGE 3 of 4
EOT CRANE
S. QUANTITY
DESCRIPTION
No.
1. Wire rope for main hoist 1 set
2. Wire rope for Auxiliary hoist (if applicable) 1 set
3. Rope guide for main Hoist 1 set
4. Rope guide for Auxiliary Hoist (if applicable) 1 set
5. All type of Bearings 1 set
6. All type of Oil seals, Gaskets , O-Rings 1 set
NOTE:
1. ‘Set’ means complete replacement of particular part in one machine.
2. Item wise price against each item shall be furnished in the Performa enclosed with the
enquiry
3. The quotation should contain sectional drawing showing location & part no. (For exact
identification) & material specification
PIPING ITEMS
Following spares are to be supplied for the Piping Bulk Materials:
Quantity
Sl. Size Range
Part Description Required Remark
No. (NB)
(% of as built)
1 Pipes & Fittings ≤1.5” 5% min. qty. 6 mtr. / 1 No.
2 Pipes & Fittings ≥ 2” 2% min. qty. 6 mtr. /1 No.
3 Flanges ≤1.5” 5% min. qty. 1 No.
4 Flanges 2” to 6” 5% min. qty. 1 No.
5 Flanges 8” to 36” 2% min. qty. 1 No.
6 Valves ≤1.5” 5% min. qty. 1 No.
7 Valves 2” to 14” 5% min. qty. 1 No.
≥16” with rating
8 Valves Note-5
≥900#
Bolts, Nuts & Gaskets (For each
9 10% min. qty. 1 No.
size, rating, material)
Traps (For each size, rating,
10 2% min. qty. 1 No.
material)
Expansion Bellow (For each
11 10% min. qty. 1 No.
size, rating, material)
Strainer element (For each size,
12 10% min. qty. 1 No.
rating, material)

P1
TFL, TALCHER
Document No. Rev
SPARE PARTS
PAGE 4 of 4
Complete Gear Box for gear

13 5% min. qty. 1 No.
operated Valves
Seal ring for the Pressure seal
14 5% min. qty. 10 Nos.
type valves
15 Hose assembly 50% min. qty. 10 Nos.
16 Bolt torque wrenches (Manual) 1 set min. qty. 1 set.
Bolt torque wrenches
17 1 set min. qty. 1 set.
(Hydraulic)
18 Bolt tensioning for equipment 1 set min. qty. 1 set.
Notes(Piping items):
1. Percent of quantity required as mandatory spares is for each and every item/size/material
consumed in as built.
2. No substitution in size, rating and material is allowed.
3. Pipe length in meter and other items in No. or Set shall be supplied.
4. Fractional part of quantity shall be converted into nearest upward whole part.
5. For rating ≥900# and sizes ≥16”, minimum one qty. valve spare shall be supplied for each size,
rating & material.

PNPM/PC150/E/112/SEC-
0
VI-10.0
PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD
Document No Re
Sheet 1 Of 35
SECTION – VI-10.0
VENDOR LIST
PLANTS: CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER & FIRE

SERVICES

ODISHA (INDIA)

CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER & FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, PNPM/PC150/E/112/S 0
EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
VENDOR LIST SHEET 2 OF 35
1.0 CIVIL
GENERAL NOTES:
i. Only ‘First’ Quality materials shall be used
ii. OWNER / CONSULTANT reserve the right to choose any of the approved make / vendor as per
this list. Make of the item not indicated and any other make for the specified item shall be subject
to owner’s / consultant’s approval.
iii. Specifications of manufacturer’s items shall be checked against tender item / specifications
before selecting any product or brand name. In case of any discrepancy, tender item /
specifications shall prevail, and any such brand of item shall not be used which is not
conforming to tender specifications even if it is listed in this vendor list.
iv. In case of non-availability of any material among approved vendors / makes in a particular site /
region, alternate vendor / make conforming to IS / BS etc. Shall be used subject to approval by
OWNER / CONSULTANT.
SL. NO. ITEM NAME
1.0 FLOOR FINISHING
a) EUROCON
b) ALTRA TILE PVT. LTD.
1.1 CEMENT TILES (FLOOR/WALL)
c) DAZZLE
A) NITCO
1.2 TERRAZZO TILES
B) HINDUSTAN TILES
a. SOMANY CERAMICS
b. H&R JOHNSON CERAMICS
1.3 CERAMIC TILES
c. KAJARIA CERAMICS
d. ORIENT CERAMICS
A) BHARAT TILES
B) RESTILE CERAMICS
1.4 HEAVY DUTY FLOOR TILES
C) PELICAN CERAMIC INDUS.
D) PAVIT
E) SONA TILES
a) PIDILITE INDUSTRIES
INDUSTRIAL FLOOR HARDENER b) SIKA
1.5
ADMIXTURE c) CICO.
A) PREMIER VINYL
1.6 PVC ROLLS
B) ARMSRONG INARCO
C) RMG POLYVINYL
1.7 PVC TILES

A) ARMSTRONG

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
A) PREMIER VINYL
1.8 PVC TILES/ROLL ANTISTATIC B) RMG POLYVINYL
C) ARMSTRONG
ACID RESISTANT A) H&R JOHNSON OR APVD. EQUIV.

1.9
TILES(BATTERY ROOM)
MOSSAIC TILE A) ITALIS
1.10 B) SPECIFIC GLASS MUSSAIC INDIA
LTD.
2.0 WOODWORK
A) GREEN
2.1 FLUSH DOOR B) CENTURY DOORS
C) KITPLY PRODUCTS
A) CENTURY
2.2 PLY WOOD/BLOCK BOARD B) KITPLY PRODUCTS
C) GREEN PLY
PARTICLE BOARD (EXTRA A) BHUTAN BOARD
2.3
GRADE) B) NOVAPAN INDIA LTD.
A) NUCHEM LTD.
MDF BOARD/MD PARTICLE B) MANGALAM TIMBER
2.4
BOARD (EXTRA GRADE) PRODUCTS LTD.
C) WESTERN BIO SYSTEMS LTD.
A) CENTURY
B) GREENPLY INDUS. LTD.
2.5 DECORATIVE LAMINATES
C) MERINO
D) ARCHID
A) CENTURY
B) GREENPLY INDUS. LTD.
2.6 MARINE PLYWOOD
C) MERINO
D) ARCHID
2.7.0 DOORS & WINDOWS FITTINGS
A) GODREJ & BOYCE
MORTICE LOCKS WITH
2.7.1 B) EVERITE AGENCIES (P) LTD.
HANDLES
C) DOORSET
A) GODREJ & BOYCE
CYLINDRICAL PIN TUMBLER
2.7.2 B) EVERITE AGENCIES (P) LTD.
LOCK WITH KNOBS
C) DOORSET
A) OZONE
HYDRAULIC DOOR CLOSER
2.7.3 B) EVERRITE AGENCIES (P) LTD.
(OVER HEAD/ FLOOR)
C) HARDWYN
MISC. DOOR FITTINGS HINGLE, A) EVERITE AGENCIES (P) LTD.
2.7.4
TOWER BOLTS, LATCHES, B) EBCO DINSUTRIES

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
SOPPER, STAYS, ALDROPS ETC. D) OZONE

E) HARDWYN
THREE WAY BOLTING LOCKING A) SRIMA SALES & SERVICES
2.7.5
DEVICE HANDLE B) DHIMAN INDUSTRIES
PANIC BAR LATCH (FOR A) SRIMA SALES & SERVICE
2.7.6
EMERGENCY DOOR)
A) FENESTA
2.7.7 UPVC WINDOWS B) ENCRAFT
C) WINDOW MAGIC
A) HILTI INDIA PVT. LTD.
2.7.8 FASTENERS
B) FISCHER
3.0 STEEL / ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS & VENTILATOR
A) RAYMUS ENGINEERS
PRESSED STEEL DOORS B) DHIMAN STEEL
3.1 WINDOWS & SECTION DOORS C) RDG ENGINEERING
WINDOWS/ROLLING SHUTTER D) SUPER STEEL WINDOW CO.
E) SKS STEEL INDUS.
A) JINDAL ALUMINIUM LTD.
ALMUNIUM / DOORS/ WINDOWS
3.2 B) HINDALCO INDUSTRIES
SECTIONS
C) INDAL
FIRE-PROOF A) NAVAIR INTERNATIONAL
3.3
DOORS(APPROVED) B) RDG ENGINEERING
3.4 PVC DOORS / WINDOWS A) SINTEX OR APPVD EQUIV.
3.5 PVC WATER TANKS A) SINTEX OR APPVD EQUIV.
4.0 PLASTERING
A) STRUCTURAL WATER PROOFING
WATERPROOFING/ COMPOUND CO. (P) LTD.
4.1
IN CEMENT PLASTER B) PIDILITE INDUSTRIES
C) SIKA
ROOF TREATMENT (WATER
5.0
PROOFING)
A) INDIA WATER PROOFING CO.
5.1 BRICK BAT COBA B) OVERSEAS WATERPROOFING
CORPN.
CRYLIC BASED CEMENTATIOUS A) STRUCTURAL WATER PROOFING
PRIMER COATING FOR ROOF CO. (P) LTD.
5.2
WATERPROOFING B) SIKA QUALCRETE LTD.
C) PIDILITE INDUSTRIES
APP MODIFIED POLYMERIC A) PIDILITE INDUSTRIES LTD.
5.3 WASTER PROOFING B) SIKA
MEMBRANE
6.0 PAINTING WORKS
PLASTIC EMULSION A) ICI INDIA LTD.
6.1
(INTERIOR/EXTERIOR) B) BERGER PAINTS LTD.

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
C) ASIAN PAINTS LTD.

D) SHALIMAR PAINTS
E) KANSAI NEROLAC PAINTS LTD.
A) ASIAN PAINTS LTD.
6.2 DRY OILBOUND DISTEMBER B) KANSAI NEROLAC PAINTS LTD.
A) ICI/AKZO NOBEL INDIA

B) BERGER PAINTS LTD.
C) ASIAN PAINTS LTD.
D) SHALIMAR PAINTS
INDUSTRIAL / EXPOXY/
6.3 E) INTERNATIONAL MARINE
SYNTHETIC ENAMEL PAINTS
COATINGS PVT. LTD.
F) KANSAI NEROLAC PAINTS LTD.
G) BOMBAY PAINT
WATERPROOFING CEMENT A) KILLICK NIXON LTD.

6.4
PAINT B) RAJDOOT PAINTS
A) ASIAN PAINTS
6.5 WOOD MELAMINE POLISH B) SHALIMAR PAINTS
C) WEMBLY PAINTS
WASTERPROOFING
TRANSPARENT EXTERIOR WALL A) PIDILITE INDUSTRIES
6.6 COATING (OVER PAINTED B) SIKA
SURFACE)
A) NAVAIR INTERNATIONAL OR
6.7 FIRE PROOF COATING APPVD. EQUIV.
7.0 ROOFING SHEETS & ACCESSORIES

A) ETERNIT EVEREST LTD.
7.1 ASBESTOS SHEETS B) CHARMINAR INDUSTRIES
C) VISAKA
A) ISPAT INDUSTRIES LTD.
B) STEEL AUTHORITY OF INDIA
7.2 C.G.I. SHEETS C) TATA STEEL
D) JINDAL
A) ISPAT INDUSTRIES LTD.

PRECOATED G.I. PROFILE B) LLOYD INSULATION (I) LTD.
7.3 SHEETS FOR ROOFING & WALL C) STEEL AUTHORITY OF INDIA
CLADDING D) TATA STEEL
E ) JINDAL
ALUMINIUM SHEET A) INDIAN ALUMINIUM CO. LTD. OR
7.4
(PLAIN/PROFILE) APPROVED EQUIVALENT
7.5 FIBRE GLASS SHEETS & A) SIMBA FRP (P) LTD.

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
PANELS (MACHINE MOULD)ED B) GE INDIA

C) DUROPLAST
PROOFING J/L HOOKS, BOLTS & A) KATALIST CONSULTANT (P) LTD.
7.6 OTHER ACCESSORIES B) ADVANCED MACHINE
(POLYMER COATED)
8.0 SANITARY PLUMBING FITTINGS & FIXTURES
A) HINDUSTAN SANITARY WARE &
INDUS. LTD.
SANITARY FITTINGS (W.C.
8.1 B) PARRYWARE SANITARY WARE
WASH BASIN, URINAL ETC.)
C) MADHUSUDAN CERAMICS
D) NYCER CERAMICS
A) JAGUAR
PLUMBING FITTINGS &
8.2 B) CERA
FIXTURES
C) HINDWARE
GLASS/MIRROR (SHEET/ FLOAT/ A) GUJARAT GUARDIAN LTD.
8.3 TOUGHENED/ LAMINATION B) SAINT GOBAIN
C) ASAHI FLOAT
A) JINDAL
B) SURYA
8.4 GI PIPES
C) PRAKASH
D) SWASTIK
9.0 FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING & UNDERDECK INSULATION
A) INTERARCH BUILDING
FLASE CEILING / WALL
PRODUCTS(P) LTD.
9.1 CLADDING (ALUMINIUM STRIP/
B) HUNTER DOUGLAS
TRAY TYPE)
C) MASCOT OVERSEAS
A) MULTI INTERIORS PVT. LTD.
B) BESTLOCK SYSTEM & CONCEPTS
9.2 FALSE FLOORING C) LLOYD INDUSULATION (I) LTD.
D) UNITED INSULATION
E) A.R. & BROTHERS
A) BAKELITE HYLAM LTD.
UNDERDECK/WALL HEAT B) U.P. TWIGA F.G. LTD.
9.3
INSULATION C) LLOYD INDULATION (I) LTD.
D) SUPEREME
OVERDECK HEAT INSULATION A) LLOYD INSULATION (I) LTD.

9.4
B) BEST PLASTRONICS LTD.
GYPSUM BOARD TILES (FIBRE A) SAINT GOBAIN

GLASS REINFORCED)/ PRIMA
BOARD ARMSTRONG FALSE
9.5
CEILING

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
SPECIALITY PRODUCTS A) PIDILITE INDUSTRIES

(CEMENT ADDITIVES/ B) SIKA
ADMIXTURES/CORROSION
10.0
INHIBITORS/ SURFACE
TREATMENT/ GROUT &
ANCHORS/SEALING/ COASTING
EPOXY FLOOR COATING
10.1 (BATTERY ROOM) A) SIKA
B) FAIRMATE
11.0 MISCALLANEOUS ITEMS
11.1 WOOD PRESERVATIVE A) ASCU HICKSON LTD.
A) JOTUN
WALL SURFACE TEXTURED B) SPECTRUM PAINTS
11.2
COATING C) BAKELITE HYLAM
D) OIKOS
a) SUPREME
PVC PLUMBING FITTINGS
11.3 b) POLYPAC
c) ASTROL
REINFORCED FIBRE GLASS A) SIKA
11.4
WATERPROOFING FELT B) U.P. TWIGA F.G. LTD.
ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT A) PCI OR APPRVD EQUIV.
11.5
A) IIT MADRAS
11.6 MATERIAL TEST HOUSE
B) GOVT APPROVED AGENCY
A) ACC
B) J K CEMENT
C) BINANI CEMENT
D) JP CEMENT
12.0 CEMENT E) GUJARAT AMBUJA
F) ALTRA TECH CEMENT
G) BIRLA CORPN. LTD.
H) GRASIM
I) SHREE
A) SAURASHTRA CEMENT LTD.
12.1 SULPHUR RESISTANT CEMENT
B) SHREE DIGVIJAY CEMENT
13.0 RCC DESIGN MIX AP GOVT APPROVED AGENCY
WRAPPING COATING (I/C TAPE A) IWL OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT
14.0 & PRIMER) IWL OR APPROVED
EQUIPMENT
A) CAFCO
15.O FIRE PROOFING MATERIAL
B) CARBOLINE
HEAVY SECTIONS MORE THAN 150
16.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL / CS PLATE MM
A) SAIL

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
B) TATA STEEL
C) RINL
LIGHT SECTIONS LESS THAN 150 MM
D) JINDAL
E) ESSAR
F) ISPAT INDUSTRIES
a) SURYA
MS PIPES (HAND RAIL
16.1 b) PRAKASH
APPLICATION)
c) JINDAL
A) SAIL
17.0 TIMT BAR / REBAR B) TATA STEEL
C) RINL
A) INDIANA GRATINGS
B) WESTCOAST ENGINEERING
18.0 GRATINGS/HANDRAILS
C) GREATWELD GRATING
D) KANADE ANAND UDYOG
A) ADOR
B) ESAB
19.0 WELDING ELECTRODE
C) D & H
D) HANOVAR
2.0 ROTATING EQUIPMENT :
SL.NO VENDOR’S NAME COUNTRY
PUMPS FOR WATER SERVICE (VERTICAL)
1. FLOWMORE PVT. LTD INDIA
2. JYOTI LIMITED INDIA
3. KIRLOSKAR BROTHERS LTD. INDIA
4. MATHER & PLATT (INDIA) LTD. INDIA
5. KSB PUMPS LIMITED INDIA
6. AKAY INDUSTRIES PVT LTD INDIA
7. KISHORE PUMPS PVT LTD INDIA
8. SAM TURBO INDUSTRIES PVT LTD INDIA
EOT CRANES
1. W.H. BRADY & CO. LTD INDIA
2. AVON CRANES PVT. LTD. INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
3. THE ACME MANUFACTURING CO. LTD INDIA
4. WMI CRANES INDIA
5. SAMCO ENGINEERING PVT. LTD INDIA
3.0 MECHANICAL – PIPING
CS WELDED PIPES TO API 5L SPIRAL LONG. WELDED

SL.NO VENDOR’S NAME COUNTRY
1 HEAVY METAL PIPE CENTRE (UPTO 24" (UPTO SCHXXS) INDIA
2 JINDAL PIPES LTD. (2” TO 14”) INDIA
3 JOTINDRA STEEL & TUBES LTD. (½" TO 14") INDIA
4 KALPESH TUBE(INDIA), (TRADER) INDIA
5 LALIT PIPES & PIPES LTD.. (16" to 64" thickness upto 20mm) INDIA
6 MUKAT PIPES LTD. INDIA
7 P.K.FORGE & FITTING INDUSTRIES INDIA
PRATIBHA INDUSTRIES LTD. (16" to 24" thickness 6mm to
8 INDIA
14.27mm)
9 RATNAMANI METALS & TUBES LTD. INDIA
10 SAGAR STEEL CORPORATION (TRADER) INDIA
11 SAIL INDIA
12 SURINDRA ENGINEERING CO. PVT. LTD. INDIA
13 SURYA ROSHINI LTD (GR. A 3” TO 4”, GR. B, 6” TO 14”) INDIA
14 THE BENGAL MILL STORES SUPPLY CO.(TRADER) INDIA
WELSPUN GUJARAT STAHL ROHREN LIMITED (FOR ANJAR AND
15 DAHEJ PLANTS) (UPTO 72” 50 MM THK FOR DAHEJ PLANT AND INDIA
UPTO 100” 30 MM THK. FOR ANJAR PLANT.)
16 PHOCEENNE FRANCE
17 ETS TROUVAY & CAUVIN FRANCE
18 MANNESMANN HANDEL AG GERMANY
19 THYSSEN-KRUPP STAHLUNION GMBH GERMANY
20 DALMINE SPA ITALY
21 RACCORTUBI SRL ITALY
22 KOSEI SANGYO LTD JAPAN
23 MARUBENI ITOCHU STEEL JAPAN
24 MITSUBISHI CORPORATION JAPAN
25 NIPPON KOKAN JAPAN
26 NIPPON STEEL CORPORATION JAPAN

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
27 NISHITANI & CO. LTD. JAPAN

28 NISSHO IWAI CORPORATION JAPAN
29 OKURA & CO. LTD. JAPAN
30 SOJITZ CORPORATION JAPAN
31 SUMITOMO METAL INDUSTRIES LTD. JAPAN
32 HYUNDAI CORPORATION KOREA
33 BRITISH STEEL CORPORATION U.K.
34 CORUS TUBES LIMITED U.K.
35 SAW PIPES USA, INC U.S.A
CS/AS LTCS SEAMLESS PIPES
1 BHEL INDIA
2 CHETAN STEELS (Upto 12”, SCH80) INDIA
3 HEAVY METAL & TUBES (Upto 8”, thickness upto 18.26mm) INDIA
4 HEAVY METAL PIPE CENTRE (UPTO 24" (UPTO SCHXXS) INDIA
5 INDIAN TUBE CO. (TATA DEV. OF TUBES & PIPES) INDIA
6 ISMT LIMITED INDIA
7 JAY LAKSHMI STEEL & ENGG. CO. INDIA
8 JINDAL SAW LTD. INDIA
9 MAHARASHTRA SEAMLESS LTD. INDIA
11 RATNADEEP METAL & TUBES PVT. LTD. INDIA
SAINEST TUBES PVT. LTD. ( ½ “ NB TO 3” UPTO SCH. 160 (ASTM
12 INDIA
A 106 GR. B, A333 GR. 1 & 6 & A335 GR. P11))
13 PHOCEENNE FRANCE
16 HORST KURVERS GMBH GERMANY
18 GAM RACCORDI S.P.A ITALY
19 IBF SEAMLESS PIPES SPA ITALY

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV

30 AB SANDVIK STEEL SWEDEN
31 VOMAL INTERNATIONAL LIMITED U.K.
SS SEAMLESS/ WELDED PIPES
1 APEX TUBES INDIA
BHANDARI FOILS & TUBES LIMITED (SEAMLESS UPTO 4" (SCH.
2 INDIA
80) & WELDED UPTO 20" (THK. <= 8
3 CHOKSI TUBE COMPANY LTD. INDIA
4 CHETAN STEELS ( UPTO 6” SCH. 40 ) INDIA
5 HEAVY METAL & TUBES (UPTO 8" (THICKNESS UPTO 18.26 MM)) INDIA
HEAVY METAL PIPE CENTRE (UPTO 8" ( UPTO SCH80S) (PDIL
6 INDIA
APPROVED MANUFACTURER'S MAKE ONLY))
7 JAY LAKSHMI STEEL & ENGG. CO. INDIA
8 JINDAL SAW LTD. INDIA
KRYSTAL STEEL MANUFACTURING PVT. LTD. (UPTO 2"
9 INDIA
(MATERIAL UPTO GRADE SS 321))
10 MARDALE PIPES PLUS LTD. INDIA
11 MODERN TUBE INDUSTRIES LTD. (Upto 2" (upto SS Grade 321)) INDIA
12 NUCLEAR FUEL COMPLEX INDIA
14 PRAKASH STEELAGE LTD. (Seamless: upto 12” & Welded: upto 24”) INDIA
15 QUALITY STAINLESS PVT. LTD. INDIA
16 RAJENDRA MECHANICAL INDUSTRIES LTD. INDIA
18 RATNADEEP METAL & TUBES PVT. LTD. ( SMLS. 6” , WELDED 2” ) INDIA
19 SANDVIK ASIA PVT. LTD. (¾" TO 2" (THK: UPTO 8.74 MM)) INDIA
20 SANGHVI METALS (TRADER) INDIA
SCORODITE STAINLESS (INDIA) PVT. LTD. (UPTO 2" (UPTO SS
21 INDIA
GRADE 321))
SUBHLAXMI METALS & TUBES PVT. LTD. (Seamless: upto 2” &
22 INDIA
Welded: upto 8”)
23 SURAJ STAINLESS LIMITED INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV

25 ZHEJIANG JIULI STAINLESS STEEL PIPE CO. LTD. CHINA
27 PHOCEENNE FRANCE
H. BUTTING GMBH & CO. (SEAMLESS : UPTO 30" (UPTO 16MM THK)
28 GERMANY
& WELDED: UPTO 72" (UPTO 64MM )
31 THYSSEN-KRUPP STAHLUNION GMBH GERMANY
44 AB SANDVIK STEEL SWEDEN
45 T.T.I. – TUBACEX TUBOS INOXIDABLES, S.A. SPAIN
46 SOSTA BV (UPTO 72" ( THICKNESS UPTO 25.4 MM)) NETHERLAND
SS SEAMLESS TUBES
1 ANIL METAL CORPORATION INDIA
APEX TUBES PVT. LIMITED (UPTO 50.8 MM OD (THICKNESS UPTO
2 INDIA
4.00 MM))
3 BHANDARI FOILS & TUBES LIMITED (UPTO 50MM OD) INDIA
4 HEAVY METAL & TUBES (UPTO 8" (THICKNESS UPTO 18.26 MM)) INDIA
KRYSTAL STEEL MANUFACTURING PVT. LTD. (UPTO 50.8 MM OD
5 INDIA
(MATERIAL UPTO GRADE SS 321))
6 MODERN TUBE INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UPTO 50.80 MM OD (UPTO SS INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
GRADE 321))
PRAKASH STEELAGE LTD. (Seamless: upto114 mm OD, Thickness
7 INDIA
upto 6 mm)
9 SANDVIK ASIA PVT. LTD. (OD UPTO 60.33 (THK: UPTO 8.74 MM)) INDIA
SCORODITE STAINLESS (INDIA) PVT.LTD. (UPTO 50.80 OD (UPTO
10 INDIA
SS GRADE 321))
11 SURAJ STAINLESS LIMITED INDIA
T.T.I.-TUBACEX TUBOS INOXIDABLES, S.A.(OD 15.8 MM TO 250.0
12 SPAIN
MM, WALL THK.1.0 MM)
FITTINGS: CS/AS/SS SEAMLESS & FORGED
1 AMFORGE INDUSTRIES INDIA
2 ANIL METAL CORPORATION INDIA
3 CHETAN STEELS ( UPTO 6” SCH. 80 ) INDIA
4 COMMERCIAL SUPPLYING AGENCY INDIA
CSA FITTINGS (Forged ½” to 2”-upto 900#, Seamless: 2” to 8”- upto
5 INDIA
SCHXXS)
6 EBY FASTENERS INDIA
7 EBY INDUSTRIES INDIA
FIT-TECH INDUSTRIES (Forged ½” to 1 1/2”-upto 900#, Seamless: 2” to
8 INDIA
8”- upto SCHXXS)
FLASH FORGE(P) LTD.(Forged upto 4”-upto 900#, Seamless/welded:
9 INDIA
up to 42”)
10 GUJARAT INFRAPIPES PVT. LTD. INDIA
11 JAY LAKSHMI STEEL & ENGINEERING CO. INDIA
KALPESH TUBE(INDIA),(TRADER) (UPTO A MAX ORDER VALUE
12 INDIA
RS.25.0 LAKH)
13 M.S FITTINGS MANUFACTURING CO. PVT LTD. INDIA
14 MARDALE PIPES PLUS LTD. INDIA

15 NAVKAR FORGINGS & FITTINGS PVT. LTD INDIA
16 NL HAZRA (upto SCH80) INDIA
17 P.K TUBES & FITTINGS PVT. LTD. INDIA
18 P.K FORGE & FITTING INDUSTRIES INDIA
PARAS FITTINGS PVT. LTD. (Forged: CS ½” to 2” & CS Seamless:
19 INDIA
2” to 8”- upto SCHXXS)
PARMAR TECHNO FORGE (Elbow, Tee, Reducer- ½” to 12” & Cap
20 INDIA
upto 18”)
21 PERFECT MARKETTING PVT. LTD. INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
PETROCHEM INDUSTRIES (Seamless: Upto 16" (All Fittings) & upto

22 INDIA
36" (caps) SCH : XXS /80S, Forged: upto 3”-6000#)
RAJENDRA FORGE INDUSTRIES (CS: UPTO 12" SCH 40 & SS: 6" SCH
23 INDIA
40S)
24 S & G ENGINEERS (P) LTD. INDIA
25 SAGAR STEEL CORPORATION (TRADER) INDIA
27 SAWAN ENGINEERS INDIA
28 SHIVANANDA PIPE FITTINGS LTD., INDIA
29 STEWARTS AND LLOYDS OF INDIA LIMITED INDIA
30 TEEKAY TUBES PRIVATE LIMITED INDIA
32 TOPAZ PIPING INDUSTRIES INDIA
33 TUBE BEND (CALCUTTA) PVT. LTD. (CS FITTINGS ONLY) INDIA
34 TUBE PRODUCTS INCORPORATE INDIA
35 ZOLOTO INDUSTRIES (upto 6” (only CS Galv.)) INDIA
36 PHOCEENNE FRANCE
38 VALLOUREC FRANCE
39 SEIKMANN ANLAGEN-TECHNIK GMBH. GERMANY
40 TPS-TECHNITUBE ROHRENWERKE GMBH GERMANY
PETROL RACCORD S.P.A. (Seamless: 1” to 42” (Elbow) & 1” to 56”
43 ITALY
Tee/Reducer/Cap))
47 IND MECCANICA BASSI LUIGI & C. SPA ITALY
48 MANTOVANI SPA ITALY
58 TECHNO FORGE SPA ITALY
52 NIPPON KOKAN JAPAN

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV

58 HAITIMA CORPORATION TAIWAN
61 EUROTUBE LIMITED U.K.
63 BONNEY FORGE U.S.A.
FORGED FLANGES
1 AJAY FORGING PVT. LTD INDIA
2 AMFORGE INDUSTRIES INDIA
3 ANANDMAYEE FORGINGS PVT. LTD. INDIA
4 C D ENGINEERING INDIA
5 CHAUDHARY HAMMER WORKS (P) LTD. INDIA
6 CHETAN STEELS (UPTO 6”, 150#) INDIA
7 `ECHJAY INDUSTRIES LTD INDIA
8 FERROUS ALLOYS FORGING PVT. LTD INDIA
GOOD LUCK ENGINEERING CO. (½"-12" (UPTO 2500#), 14"-16"
9 INDIA
(UPTO 900#), 18"-32" (UPTO 600#), 34"-48" (UPTO 300#),
10 J.K FORGINGS INDIA
KUNJ FORGINGS PVT. LTD.(MATERIAL CS/SS/AS) (upto 60” (upto
11 INDIA
300#) & upto 12” (upto 2500#))
12 MAHESH INDUSTRIES (Upto 8” -150#, material ASTM A105 only) INDIA
P.K TUBES & FITTINGS PVT. LTD. (Upto 24”(upto1500#) & Upto
13 INDIA
12”(upto2500#) Spectacle Blind and Spacer & Blinds only)
PARAMOUNT FORGE (CS,AS & SS : ½” TO 42” (UPTO 600#), ½” TO
14 INDIA
24” (UPTO 900#, ½ “ TO 16” ( UPTO 1500#), ½” TO 12” (UPTO 2500#)).
15 PERFECT MARKETING (P) LTD. INDIA
16 PUNJAB STEEL INDIA
R D FORGE (A UNIT OF R D CHEMICALS PVT LTD) (Upto 54”
17 INDIA
(150#), 42” (upto 600#), 20” (upto 1500#) & 12” (2500#))
18 RAJENDRA FORGE INDUSTRIES (CS & SS : UPTO 12", 300#) INDIA
19 S & G ENGINEERS (P) LTD. INDIA
20 SANGHVI FORGINGS & ENGINEERING LTD INDIA
22 SAWAN ENGINEERS INDIA
TECHNO FORGE LTD. (UPTO 42" (UPTO 300#), UPTO 24" (600#),
23 INDIA
UPTO 20" (900#), UPTO 16" (1500#),

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
24 TUBE BEND (CALCUTTA) PVT LTD INDIA

25 PHOCEENNE FRANCE
28 I.S. INTERNATIONAL ITALY
29 MANTOVANI SPA ITALY
30 OFFICINE NICOLA GALPERTI & FIGLIO S.P.A ITALY
32 NICHINAN SANGYO CO. LTD., JAPAN
GATE/ GLOBE/ CHECK VALVES CS/SS/AS < 900 LBS

AV VALVES LTD. (CAST UPTO 42” ,150#) 28” 300#, 24” (600#) &
1 INDIA
FORGE UPTO 2” (800#)
ADVANCE VALVES (2”-80” (Upto 600#) Dual Plate Check Valves
2 INDIA
only)
3 ASSOCIATED TOOLINGS (I) PVT. LTD. INDIA
4 AUDCO INDIA LIMITED (L&T VALVES DIVN.) INDIA
5 AUTOCAP INDUSTRIES (1/2” to 2” 800# (only CS & SS) INDIA
BELL- O-SEAL VALVES LTD.( FOR ZERO LEAKAGE , HAZARDOUS
6 INDIA
FLUIDS.)
7 BHEL ( VALVES DIVISION) INDIA
8 BRIGHTECH VALVES AND CONTROLS PVT. LTD. (Upto 8” x 300#) INDIA
9 CHEMTECH INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT. LTD. INDIA
CRAWLEY & RAY (FOUNDERS & ENGINEERS) PVT. LTD. (<=300#,
10 INDIA
(only CS))
DATRE CORPORATION LTD. (Upto 300#, 2” to 8” (Gate), 2” to 6”
11 INDIA
(Globe & Check Valves))
12 DEWRANCE MACNEILL & CO. LTD. INDIA
13 ECONO VALVES PVT. LTD. INDIA
14 EXPERT ENGINEERING ENTERPRISES INDIA
15 FLOCON SYSTEMS PVT. LTD. (CS upto 6” – 1500#) INDIA
FLOVEL VALVES PVT. LTD.( SINGLE DISC , DULA PLATE &
16 NOZZLE CHECK VALVES ONLY : UPTO 48” (150#) & 24 (UPTO INDIA
600#)
17 FLUIDTECH EQUIPMENT PVT. LTD. ( CAST # CS & SS 2” TO 12” INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
150# & 2 “ TO 8” 300 # AND FORGED (CS AND SS ) ½” TO 2” (800#)

18 FORWARD ALLOYS & CASTINGS ( UPTO 14”) INDIA
GURU INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT. LTD. (Cast CS only: upto
19 INDIA
24”(150#), 20”(300#), 10” (600#) & Forged : upto 2” (800#)
HAWA ENGINEERS LTD. (Gate Valves: upto 40”(150#), upto 26”
(300#), upto 24” (600#), upto 2” (800#); Globe Valves: upto
20 20”(150#), upto 16” (300#), upto 12” (600#), upto 2” (800#), Check INDIA
Valves: upto 36”(150#), upto 24” (300#), upto 16” (600#), upto 2”
(800#) (Dual Plate: 36” (150#)
21 HAWA VALVES INDIA PVT. LTD. (CS upto 6”, 150#) INDIA
HI-TECH VALVES PVT. LTD. (CS,<=800 #, SIZE ½-2, <=300# FOR
22 INDIA
SIZE 2-6”)
INTERVALVE INDIA LTD. (CAST UPTO 24” (UPTO 300#) & UPTO
23 INDIA
12” 600# , FORGED UPTO 2” (800#))
JC VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. (CAST UPTO 48” (150#)
24 INDIA
& 24” (UPTO 600#) & FORGED UPTO 2” (800#))
25 KIRLOSKAR BROTHERS LTD.( CS UPTO 12” , 300#) INDIA
26 KSB PUMPS LIMITED (VALVES DIVN) INDIA
27 LARSEN & TOUBRO LIMITED (1/2" TO 24") INDIA
LEADER VALVES LTD. (Casting<=20”-600#, 300-150#, Forging<=2”-
28 INDIA
800#)
29 M.H. VALVES PVT. LTD. (1/2” to 1 1/2”-800#, 2” to 6”-600#) INDIA
MICON ENGINEERS (HUBLI) [PVT. LTD.(Cast: Upto 12” (150# &
30 INDIA
300#), 6” (600#) & Forged: upto 2” (800#))
31 MICROFINISH VALVES LTD. INDIA
NSSL LTD. (UPTO 80” (150#), 56” UPTO 600# & FORGED UPTO 2”
32 INDIA
(800 #))
33 NITON VALVES INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD. INDIA
34 OSWAL IND. LTD. (UPTO 48” (150#), 32” (300#) & 24” (600#) INDIA
S & M INDUSTRIAL VALVES LTD. (CS Gate & Globe Valves 2” – 24”
35 INDIA
<=300#)
SHALIMAR VALVES PVT. LTD. (Cast Upto 24” (Upto 600#), Forged:
36 INDIA
½” to 1 ½” (800#))
37 SHREERAJ INDUSTRIES (CS upto 150#) INDIA
38 STEEL STRONGVALVES (I) PVT. LTD. (Upto 42”) INDIA
39 VENUS PUMP & ENGINEERING WORKS. INDIA
40 VIBA FLUID CONTROL INDIA
WEIR BDK VALVES (A UNIT OF WEIR INDIA PVT. LTD.) (Cast
41 INDIA
UPTO 36" (150#); 24" (300#); 12" (600#) & Forged: Upto 2” (800#))
42 ZED VALVES CO. PVT. LTD. (Upto 14” (600#)) INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
43 ZOLOTO INDUSTRIES. ( 40 MM TO 200 MM(ONLY CS & SS)) INDIA

44 VELAN INC. ( UPTO 48” , 600#) CANADA
BOTELI VALVE GROUP CO. LTD.(Cast Upto 56” (150#), 36” (300#),
45 CHINA
24” (600#) & Forged: Upto2” (800#))
46 ZHEJIANG JIEHUA VALVE CO. LTD. CHINA
47 PEMTO VALVE GERMANY
CESARE BONETTI SPA (Cast Upto 42” (Upto 300#), 24” (600#)
48 ITALY
Forged: ½” to 1 ½” (800#))
49 FASANI S.P.A. ITALY
50 FRIULCO SPA (UPTO 48" (150#), 32" (Upto 600#) ITALY
51 GTC ITALIA, S.R.L. ITALY
52 MANTOVANI SpA ITALY
53 OMB S.P.A. ITALY
54 PETROL VALVES S.R.L. ITALY
55 MATSURA H. P MACHINE WORKS CO.LTD. JAPAN
58 REDPOINT ALLOYS BV NETHERLAND
59 WALTHAN & WEIR SPAIN
60 POYAM VALVES (AMPO S.CCP.) (Size upto 60” (Rating upto 800#) SPAIN
61 BABCOCK BORSIG ESPANA , S.A SPAIN
62 SUFA LIMITED U.A.E.
63 BEL VALVES U.K.
GATE/ GLOBE/ CHECK VALVES CS/SS/AS > =900 LBS
A V VALVES LIMITED (Cast Upto 24” (900# & 1500#), 8” (2500#)
1 INDIA
Forged: Upto 2” (2500#))
ADVANCE VALVES (2”-36” (900#) 2”-24” (1500#), 2”-12(2500#)
2 INDIA
Forged: Upto 2” (2500#)) FOR DUAL PLATE CHECK VALVES)
3 ASSOCIATED TOOLINGS (I) PVT. LTD. (½” TO 2” (900# & 1500#)) INDIA
5 BHEL (VALVES DIVISION) INDIA
FLOVEL VALVES PVT. LTD. (Dual Plate Check Valves: Upto 24”
6 INDIA
(900#)
HAWA ENGINEERS LTD. (Gate Valves: upto 20”(900#), upto 10”
(1500# & 2500#); Globe Valves: upto 8”( 900# & 1500#), upto 1”
INDIA
(2500#); Check Valves: upto 10”(900#), upto 6” (1500#), upto 1”
(2500#)
7 HAWA VALVES INDIA PVT. LTD. (Forged upto 2”, 1500#) INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
8 INTERVALVES INDIA LTD.(Forged: Upto 2” (1500#)) INDIA

JC VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. (CAST UPTO 12”
9 INDIA
(1500#),10” (2500#) & FORGED UPTO 2” (2500#))
10 KSB PUMPS LIMITED (VALVES DIVN) INDIA
11 LARSEN & TOUBRO LIMITED (1/2" TO 2") INDIA
LEADER VALVES LIMITED (1500# & 2500# UPTO 12", FORGING
12 INDIA
UPTO 2" 2500#)
13 METROPOLITAN INDUSTRIES (SIZE=200mm, rating=2500 lb) INDIA
MICON ENGINEERS (HUBLI) PVT. LTD. (FORGED: UPTO 2"
14 INDIA
(1500#))
NSSL LIMITED. (CAST: Upto 36"(900#), 24” (upto 2500#) &
15 INDIA
FORGED: Upto 2” (Upto 2500#))
16 OSWAL INDUSTRIES LTD. (Upto 12” (900# & 1500#)) INDIA
SHALIMAR VALVES PVT.LTD.(CAST: UPTO 20"(900#), FORGED: ½" TO
17 INDIA
1 ½" (1500#))
WEIR BDK VALVES (A UNIT OF WEIR INDIA PVT. LTD.) (Cast
18 INDIA
UPTO 12" (upto 2500#) & Forged: Upto 2” (1500#), 1” (2500#))
19 VELAN INC. ( UPTO 24” (Rating upto 2500#)) CANADA
BOTELI VALVE GROUP CO. LTD.(Cast Upto 16” (Upto 1500#), 12”
20 CHINA
(2500#) & Forged: Upto 2” (1500# & 2500#))
22 BFE BONNEY FORGE VALVE LICENSEE ITALY
23 CESARE BONETTI SPA (Upto 24” (Upto 2500#) ITALY
24 FASANI S.P.A. ITALY
25 FRIULCO SPA (UPTO 32" (900#); 24" (1500#); 14" (2500#)) ITALY
26 GTC ITALIA S.R.L. ITALY
27 OMB S.P.A. ITALY
28 PETROL VALVES S.R.L. ITALY
29 VALVITALIA SPA ITALY
30 MATSURA H. P MACHINE WORKS CO.LTD. JAPAN
32 BABCOCK BORSIG ESPANA, S.A. SPAIN
POYAM VALVES, (AMPO S. COOP.) (SIZE UPTO 30" (RATING UPTO
33 SPAIN
2500#))
34 SUFA LIMITED U.A.E.
35 BEL VALVES U.K.
BALL VALVES (SOFT SEATED)
1 A V VALVES LIMITED (Upto 12” (Upto 600#)) INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
2 AIRA EURO AUTOMATION PVT. LTD. (Upto 6”, Rating 150# & 300#), INDIA
3 AQUA VALVES PVT. LTD. INDIA
BRIGHTECH VALVES & CONTROLS PVT. LTD. (4” x 150# for CS,
4 INDIA
AS & SS material)
5 CHEMTECH INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT. LTD. INDIA
6 CRAWLEY & RAY (FOUNDER & ENGINEERS) PVT. LTD. (DN25) INDIA
7 DELVAL FLOW CONTROLS PVT. LTD. (Upto 12” (Upto 900#)) INDIA
8 FLOCON SYSTEMS PVT. LTD. (CS upto 6”, 150#) INDIA
9 FLOW CONTROL INDIA
10 FLOWCHEM INDUSTRIES ( UPTO 300# and upto 10”) INDIA
11 FLUIDTECH EQUIPMENT PVT. LTD( UPTO 4” (300#)) INDIA
12 FORWARD ALLOYS AND CASTINGS (Upto 900#) INDIA
GURU INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT. LTD. (Cast CS only: Upto 12”
13 INDIA
(Upto 300#), 4” (Upto 900#) & Forged: Upto 2” (800#))
HAWA ENGINEERS LTD. (Upto 16" (150# & 300#), Upto 12" (600#
14 INDIA
& 900#))
INTERVALVE INDIA LTD. (Forged: Upto 2" (800#), Cast: Upto 12"
15 INDIA
(Upto 300#))
JC VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. (CAST UPTO 28” (upto
16 INDIA
600#),12” (900# , 1500#) & 10” (2500#))
17 KSB PUMPS LTD. (VALVES DIVN.) (CS upto 100DN, 20 bar) INDIA
LEADER VALVES LTD. (Casting upto 600#, 6” & forging upto 800#,
18 INDIA
2”)
MICON ENGINEERS (HUBLI) PVT. LTD. (Cast: Upto 6” (150# &
19 INDIA
300#) & Forged: Upto 2” (800#)
20 MICROFINISH VALVES (P) LTD. INDIA
21 NSSL LTD. (Upto 12" (150# & 300#)) INDIA
22 OSWAL IND. LTD. (Upto 24" (150#, 300# & 600#)) INDIA
23 SHALIMAR VALVES PVT. LTD. (Upto 18" (600#) Material: CS/AS/SS) INDIA
24 VIBA FLUID CONTROL (Upto 300#) INDIA
25 VIRGO ENGINEERS LTD. (Upto 16" (upto 600#)) INDIA
WEIR BDK VALVES (Cast: Upto 30” (150# & 300#), 20” (600#), 16”
26 INDIA
(900#), 12” (1500#) & Forged: Upto 2” (800#))
27 XOMOX SANMAR LTD.( FISHER XOMOX) INDIA
28 BHDT GMBH AUSTRIA
BOTELI VALVE GROUP CO. LTD. (Upto 32” (150# & 300#), 30”
29 CHINA
(600#), 24” (900#)
31 VELAN INC.( UPTO 16”, 600#) CANADA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV

33 PERRIN GMBH ( 2500#, SIZE UPTO 24”) GERMANY
FRIULCO SPA (UPTO 48" (150# & 300#); 20" (upto 1500#); 12"
34 ITALY
(2500#))
CESARE BONETTI SPA (Cast: Upto 4" (150#) & Forged: Upto 1”
35 ITALY
(800#) Floating only)
36 GTC ITALIA S.R.L ITALY
37 MANTOVANUI SPA ITALY
38 PIBIVESSE SRL (UPTO 48” , 600#) ITALY
39 PETROL VALVES S.R.L ITALY
40 METSO AUTOMATION SINGAPORE
POYAM VALVES (AMPO S. COOP.) (Size upto 42” (Rating upto
41 SPAIN
2500#))
42 HATIMA CORPORATION TAIWAN
BALL VALVES (METAL SEATED)
1 AIRA EURO AUTOMATION PVT. LTD. (Upto 6”, Rating 150# & 300#), INDIA
BRIGHTECH VALVES & CONTROLS PVT. LTD. (4” x 150# for CS,
2 INDIA
AS & SS material)
GURU INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT. LTD. (Cast CS only: Upto 12”
4 INDIA
(Upto 300#), 4” (Upto 900#) & Forged: Upto 2” (800#))
HAWA ENGINEERS LTD. (Upto 16" (150# & 300#), Upto 12" (600#
5 INDIA
& 900#))
6 INTERVALVE INDIA LTD.(UPTO 12” , 150#). INDIA
JC VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. (CAST UPTO 28” (upto
7 INDIA
600#),12” (upto 1500#), 10” (2500#))
MICON ENGINEERS (HUBLI) PVT. LTD. (Cast: Upto 6” (150# &
8 INDIA
300#) & Forged: Upto 2” (800#)
9 MICROFINISH VALVES (P) LTD. INDIA
10 NSSL LIMITED (Upto 12" NB, (150# & 300#)) INDIA
11 OSWAL INDUSTRIES LTD. (UPTO 24" (150#, 300#, & 600#)) INDIA
12 VIRGO ENGINEERS LTD. (UPTO16" (UPTO 600#)) INDIA
WEIR BDK VALVES (A UNIT OF WEIR INDIA PVT. LTD.) (Cast: Upto
13 30" (150# & 300#); 20" (600#), 16” (900#), 12” (1500#) & Forged: Upto 2” INDIA
(800#)
14 VELAN INC. (SIZE UPTO 16" (Rating Upto 600#)) CANADA
BOTELI VALVE GROUP CO. LTD. (Upto 32” (150# & 300#), 30”
15 CHINA
(600#), 24” (900#)
16 ALFA VALVOLE SRL ITALY

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
CESARE BONETTI SPA (UPTO 24" (150#) & 4" (UPTO 1500#)
17 ITALY
TRUNNION MOUNTED ONLY)
18 GE POWER (NUOVO PIGNONE SPA) ITALY
20 PETROL VALVES S.R.L ITALY
21 PIBIVIESSE (48”, 600#) ITALY
22 VALVITALIA SPA ITALY
23 PERRIN GMBH (SIZE UPTO 24" (RATING UPTO 2500#)) GERMANY
24 RED POINT ALLOYS BV NETHERLAND
FRIULCO SPA (UPTO 48" (150# & 300#); 20" (UPTO 1500#); 12"
25 ITALY
(2500#))
POYAM VALVES, (AMPO S. COOP.) (SIZE UPTO 42" (RATING
26 SPAIN
UPTO 2500#))
27 METSO AUTOMATION SINGAPORE
28 ORBIT VALVES PLC SINGAPORE
BUTTERFLY VALVES
1 A V VALVES LIMITED (UPTO 48" (150#)) INDIA
2 ADVANCE VALVES (RUBBER LINED AND METAL SEATED) INDIA
3 AIRA EURO AUTOMATION PVT. LTD. (Upto 48”, Rating upto 300#) INDIA
5 BDK PROCESS CONTROL PVT LTD. (UPTO 1600MM) INDIA
6 CHEMTECH INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT LTD INDIA
CRAWLEY & RAY (FOUNDER & ENGINEERS) PVT. LTD. (40mm-
7 INDIA
1000mm)
9 FLOCON SYSTEMS PVT. LTD. (CS upto 12”, 150#) INDIA
10 FLUIDTECH EQUIPMENT PVT. LTD. (CS upto 12” (300#)) INDIA
11 FOURESS ENGINEERING (I) LTD. INDIA
12 HAWA ENGINEERS LTD. (2" to 48”(PN10/PN16/150#/300#)) INDIA
13 HAWA VALVES INDIA PVT. LTD. (CS UPTO 6", 150#) INDIA
HI-TECH BUTTERFLY VALVES INDIA PVT. LTD
14 INDIA
(<300#,<30"(TEFLON/RUBBER) ,<72"(METAL))
15 INSTRUMENTATION LTD. (PALAKKAD) INDIA
16 INTERVALVE INDIA LTD. (Upto 72” (150#) & Upto 16” (300#)) INDIA
JC VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. (Upto 20” (150#) & 10”
17 INDIA
(300#))
18 L&T LTD (1/2" TO 24") INDIA
19 LEADER VALVES LTD.(150#, upto 16”) INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
MATHER & PLATT (INDIA) LTD. A SUBSIDIARY OF WILO SE

20 INDIA
GERMAN (UPTO DN 1600,PN10, Double flange type)
21 METROPOLITAN INDUSTRIES (SIZE=2000mm) INDIA
22 MICON ENGINEERS (HUBLI) [PVT. LTD.(Upto 24” (PN10 & PN16)) INDIA
23 VENUS PUMP & ENGINEERING WORKS (upto 600NB, 150#) INDIA
VIRGO ENGINEERS LTD. ((Triple offset only): 3” to 24”, Upto 600#
24 INDIA
(CS/SS))
WEIR BDK VALVES (A UNIT OF WEIR INDIA PVT. LTD.) (Upto 56”
25 INDIA
(Upto 250#), 24” (300#))
26 XOMOX SANMAR LIMITED (FISHER XOMOX) INDIA
TOMOE VALVE CO. LTD. (Upto 48”(150# & 300#), Upto 24”(600#,
27 JAPAN
900# & 1500#))
28 BHDT GMBH AUSTRIA
29 VELAN INC. (Size upto 48”(Rating upto 600#) CANADA
30 BOTELI VALVE GROUP CO. LTD. (Upto 36” (150# & 300#) CHINA
32 GRISS SAPAG INDUSTRIAL VALVES FRANCE
33 ADAMS ARMATUREN GERMANY
35 HAITIMA CORPORATION TAIWAN
36 WEIR VALVES & CONTROLS DIVISION. U.K
37 LEEDS VALVE LTD U.K
38 CURTIS WRIGHT FLOW CONTROL CORPOARATION U.S.A.
39 LEAR SIEGLER MEAS. CTRLS. CORP U.S.A.
40 TYCO INTERNATIONAL INC.,U.S.A. U.S.A.
41 EMERSON PROCESS MGT U.S.A.
42 SPX VALVES & CONTROLS U.S.A.
43 XOMOS (CRANE CO.) U.S.A.
PLUG VALVES (NON LUBRICATED)
1 A V VALVES LIMITED (UPTO 48" (150#)) INDIA
2 AUDCO INDIA LTD (L&T VALVES DIVN.) INDIA
AZ ARMATUREN GMBH (1/2” TO 20”(150#, 300# & 600#), Matl. CS,
3 INDIA
AS &SS)
4 BDK PROCESS CONTROL PVT LTD. INDIA
5 CHEMTECH INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT LTD INDIA
6 CRAWLEY & RAY (FOUNDERS & ENGINEERS) PVT. LTD (DN 200) INDIA
7 FLUIDTECH EQUIPMENT PVT. LTD. (Upto 4” (300#)) INDIA
8 GURU INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT. LTD. (Cast CS only: Upto 12” INDIA
EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
(Upto 300#), Upto 4” (Upto 900#)) & Forged: Upto 2” (800#))

9 HAWA ENGINEERS LTD. (1/2” TO 8” (150#)) INDIA
10 JC VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. (Upto 12” (Upto 300#)) INDIA
11 L&T LTD ( 1/2" TO 24") INDIA
12 LEADER VALVES LIMITED (Upto 6” (Upto 300#)) INDIA
WEIR BDK VALVES (A UNIT OF WEIR INDIA PVT. LTD.) (UPTO
13 INDIA
16"(150#), 12" (300#), 3" (600#))
14 XOMOX SANMAR LIMITED (FISHER XOMOX) INDIA
16 O.M.S. SALERI DI SALERI P & FIGLI S.M.C. ITALY
POYAM VALVES, (AMPO S. COOP.) (UPTO 30" (UPTO 900#) FOR
17 SPAIN
LIFT PLUG VALVES ONLY.)
FLAT GASKETS
1 FERROLITE JOININGS (P) LTD. INDIA
2 GASKETS (INDIA) PVT. LTD INDIA
3 GOODRICH GASKET PVT. LTD. (UPTO 24") INDIA
4 HINDUSTAN ASBESTOS & ALLIED PRODUCTS INDIA
5 HINDUSTAN COMPOSITE LTD. INDIA
6 HINDUSTAN FERREDO LTD. INDIA
7 IGP ENGINEERS LIMITED INDIA
8 MADRAS INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS(UPTO 48") INDIA
9 MECHANICAL PACKING INDUSTRIES LTD. INDIA
10 PACKING & JOINTINGS (P) LTD. INDIA
11 PERFECT MARKETING (P) LTD, INDIA
12 PRASHANT ENGG STORES INDIA
13 REIN TALBROS PVT. LTD. INDIA
14 SPIRALSEAL GASKETS PVT. LTD. (CAF & Teflon) INDIA
15 STARFLEX SEALING INDIA PVT. LTD. INDIA
16 THE BENGAL MILL STORES SUPPLY CO. (TRADER) INDIA
17 UNIQUE INDUSTRIAL PACKINGS PVT. LTD. INDIA
SPIRALLY WOUND GASKETS
1 GASKETS (INDIA) PVT. LTD INDIA
2 GOODRICH GASKET PVT. LTD. INDIA
3 IGP ENGINEERS LIMITED INDIA
4 MADRAS INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS INDIA
5 PACKINGS & JOINTINGS PVT. LTD INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
7 PRASHANT ENGG STORES INDIA

8 SPIRASEAL GASKETS PVT. LTD. INDIA
9 STARFLEX SEALING INDIA PVT. LTD. INDIA
10 THE BENGAL MILL STORES SUPPLY CO. (TRADER) INDIA
UNIQUE INDUSTRIAL PACKINGS PVT.LTD. (UPTO 42"(600#) & UPTO
11 INDIA
24" (2500#))
12 ZHEJIANG JIEHUA VALVE CO. LTD. INDIA
EXPANSION JOINTS & BELLOWS
1 CORI ENGINEERS PVT. LTD. INDIA
2 D.WREN & CO. (For Rubber & Fabric) INDIA
FLEXATHERM EXPANLLOW PVT. LTD. (Circular: Upto 240”,
3 INDIA
Rectangular No bar for size, (Upto 600#))
4 FLEXICAN BELLOWS & HOSES PVT. LTD INDIA
5 FLUIDYNE ENGG. (I) PVT. LTD INDIA
6 KELD ELLENTOFT INDIA PVT. LTD INDIA
7 LONESTAR INDUSTRIES INDIA
8 MB METALLIC BELLOWS (INDIA) PVT. LTD INDIA
9 PRASHANT ENGG. STORES INDIA
10 STANDARD PRECISION BELLOWS INDIA
11 TUBOFLEX GERMANY
12 FLEXIDER S.P.A. ITALY
STRAINERS (PERMANENT INCLUDING Y-TYPE)
1 CHEMTECH INDUSTRIAL VALVES PVT. LTD INDIA
FLAIR STRAINERS & FILTERS (SIZE UPTO 42" (RATING UPTO
2 INDIA
1500#))
GRAND PRIX ENGINEERING PVT. LTD. (UPTO 60" PIPELINE, UPTO
3 INDIA
ANSI 1500#)
4 GREAVES LIMITED INDIA
5 GUJARAT OTOFILT INDIA
6 HAWA ENGINEERS LTD. (1/2” to 24”(150# / 300#) INDIA
7 KWIKFLO FILTERS PVT. LTD. INDIA
8 LEADER VALVES LTD. (upto 300# & upto 12” size) INDIA
9 MULTITEX FILTERATION ENGINEERS LTD INDIA
10 MOD FABRICATORS INDIA
11 ZOLOTO INDUSTRIES (15MM TO 100MM) INDIA
BOTELI VALVE GROUP CO. LTD. (Y - TYPE ONLY: 14" (150#) & 3"
12 CHINA
(300# & 600#))

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
STEAM TRAPS
1 GREAVES LTD. INDIA
2 PENNANT ENGINEERING PVT. LTD. INDIA
3 VIRGO ENGINEERS LTD. (1/2” to 4” (upto 600#) (CS/SS)) INDIA
4 YARWAY CORPORATION INDIA
5 ZOLOTO INDUSTRIES (15 mm to 25 mm) INDIA
6 GESTRA AG GERMANY
7 ARMSTRONG INTERNATIONAL INC. U.S.A
8 OGONTZ CORPORATION U.S.A
9 TYCO INTERNATIONAL INC.,U.S.A. U.S.A
SPRING SUPPORTS
1 MYRICS PIPING SYSTEM PVT.LTD. INDIA
2 PIPE SUPPORTS INDIA PVT. LTD. INDIA
3 PIPING & ENERGY PRODUCTS (P) LTD. INDIA
4 SARATHI ENGG. ENTERPRISES PVT. LTD. INDIA
5 SPRING SUPPORTS MFG. CO. INDIA
6 FLEXIDER S.P.A. ITALY
FASTENERS
1 AEP COMPANY INDIA
2 CAPITAL INDUSTRIES INDIA
3 CONSOLE ENGG. & FASTNERS INDUSTRIES INDIA
4 EBY FASTNERS INDIA
5 FIT TIGHT NUTS & BOLTS LTD. INDIA
6 FIX FIT FASTENERS MFG. PVT. LTD. INDIA
7 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING CORPORATION (SIZE UPTO 4" (M100)) INDIA
MEGA ENGINEERING PRIVATE LIMITED (½" TO 3" MATERIAL:
8 INDIA
CS/AS/SS)
9 METRO MECHANICAL PVT.LTD. INDIA
10 NAGBHUSHANAM INDUSTRIES INDIA
11 NIREKA ENGG. CO. PVT. LTD. INDIA
12 PACIFIC FORGING & FASTENERS PVT. LTD. (M 10 TO M125) INDIA
14 PIONEER NUTS & BOLTS PVT. LTD. INDIA
15 PRECISION AUTO ENGINEERS INDIA
16 PRECISION ENGINEERING INDUSTRIES INDIA
17 PTD FASTNERS PVT. LTD. INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV

19 SUNDARAM FASTENERS LIMITED INDIA
20 UDHERA FASTENERS INDIA
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
1 AGNICE FIRE PROTECTION LTD. INDIA
2 BHARTIYA CACCIALANZA FIRE SYSTEMS LTD INDIA
3 BLUE STAR LTD. INDIA
4 DE'S TECHNICO INDIA
5 DE'S TECHNICO PVT. LTD. INDIA
6 FUTECH CONSULTANTS PVT. LTD. INDIA
7 GENERAL MECHANICAL WORKS INDIA
8 HD FIRE PROTECTION COMPANY INDIA
9 LAL ENTERPRISES INDIA
MATHER & PLATT (INDIA) LTD. (A Subsidiary INDIA
10
of WILO SE German)
11 MX SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL PVT. LTD. INDIA
12 NEWFIRE ENGINEERS SERVICES INDIA
13 PRAGATI ENGG. (PVT.) LTD. INDIA
14 PYROTEK INDUSTRIES (INDIA ) PVT. LTD. INDIA
15 RADIANT FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERS INDIA
16 STEELAGE INDUSTRIES LTD. INDIA
17 TECHNOFAB ENGG. INDIA
18 TRI-PARULEX FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS INDIA
19 UNITECH MACHINES LTD INDIA
20 VIJAY FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM LTD. INDIA
HOSE PIPE (METALLIC) & CAM LOCK COUPLING
AEROFLEX INDUSTRIES LIMITED (Size 6mm to 250mm dia. (SS Corrg.
1 INDIA
Flex. Hose with Braid, Braid & Assembly)
2 CHHATARIA RUBBER CHEMICALS INDUSTRIES INDIA
3 D. WREN & CO. INDIA
4 FLEXATHERM EXPANLLOW PVT. LTD. (1/2” to 6”) INDIA
5 GAYATRI INDUSTRIES INDIA
6 GAYATRI INDUSTRIAL CORPORATION (UPTO 6” ID) INDIA
7 HELIFEX HYDRAULICS & ENGG CO. LTD. INDIA
8 SENIOR INDIA PVT. LTD. INDIA
HOSE PIPE (NON-METALLIC) & CAM LOCK COUPLING
1 CHHATARIA RUBBER CHEMICALS INDUSTRIES INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
2 D. WREN & CO. INDIA

3 GAYATRI INDUSTRIES INDIA
4 GAYATRI INDUSTRIAL CORPORATION (UPTO 8” ID) INDIA
5 HELIFEX HYDRAULICS & ENGG CO. LTD. INDIA
6 PADMINI INDUSTRIES LIMITED INDIA
7 PYROTEK INDUSTRIES (INDIA) PVT. LTD. INDIA
8 SENIOR INDIA PVT. LTD. INDIA
4.0 ELECTRICAL
WALL MOUNTING TYPE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

1. ADHUNIK SWITCHGEARS (P) LTD. INDIA
2. ANAND POWER LIMITED INDIA
3. ASSOCIATED SWITCHGEARS & PROJECTS INDIA
LTD.
4. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS CORPORATION INDIA
5. AVONE SYSTEM & CONTROLS INDIA
6. CONTROLS & SCHEMATICS PVT LTD. INDIA
7. C & S ELECTRIC LTD INDIA
8. ELECMECH CORPORATION INDIA
9. GLOBE ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES INDIA
10. HAVELLS INDIA LTD. INDIA
11. HI-TECH ENGINEERS INDIA
12. HINDUSTAN CONTROL &EQPTPV. LTD. INDIA
13. INDIANA CURRENT CONTROL LTD. INDIA
14. INDO ASIAN FUSEGEAR LTD INDIA
15. INTRELEC INDIA
16. JAKSON ENGINEERS LTD INDIA
17. LEGRAND INDIA LTD INDIA
18. LOTUS POWERGEARPVT LTD INDIA
19. REUNION ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS INDIA
(P) LTD
20. SHIVALIC POWER CONTROL (P) LTD. INDIA
21. STANDARD ELECTRICALS LIMITED INDIA
22. TRICOLITE ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES PVT. INDIA
LTD.
23. TRIDENT SWITCHGEARS PVT. LTD. INDIA
24. VENUS CONTROLS & SWITCHGEAR (P) INDIA
LTD.
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)


EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
3. S & S POWER SWITCHGEAR LTD INDIA

5. SIEMENS INDIA
6. ABB INDIA
7. SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC INDIA
ELCB
1. GE POWER CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. INDIA
5. S & S POWER SWITCHGEAR LTD INDIA
6. SIEMENS LTD. INDIA
8. ABB INDIA
LOW VOLTAGE INDUSTRIAL SWITCHES/ISOLATORS

1. ASEA BROWN BOVERI LTD. INDIA
2. GE POWER CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD. INDIA
4. KAYCEE INDUSTRIES LTD INDIA
5. LARSEN & TOUBRO INDIA
LTD.(EL.PRODUCTSDIVN)
CONTACTOR / THERMAL O/L RELAY / FUSES

PUSH BUTTONS
3. ASEA BROWN BOVERI LTD. INDIA
INDICATION LAMP

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
3. BINOY INDIA
INDUCTION MOTORS – HV (11KV & 3.3 KV)

1. BHEL (ELECTRICAL MACHINES DIVN.) INDIA
2. JEUMONTINDUSTRIE FRANCE
3. FUJI ELECTRIC SYSTEMS CO. LTD JAPAN
4. MITSUBISHI CORPORATION JAPAN
5. TOSHIBA CORPORATION JAPAN
6. TOSHIBA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN
INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS CORPORATION
(EXCLUDING FLAME-PROOF MOTORS OF
FRAME SIZE MORE THAN 900)
7. PEEBLES ELECTRICAL MACHINES UK
8. SIEMENS INDIA / GERMANY
9. ABB FINLAND/SWITZERLAND/
INDIA
INDUCTION MOTORS – LV (415 V) ( SAFE AREA)

1. ASEA BROWN BOVERI LTD INDIA
2. BHEL (ELECTRICAL MACHINES DIVISION) INDIA
3. CROMPTON GREAVES LTD INDIA
4. KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC COMPANY LTD INDIA
5. SIEMENS LTD INDIA / GERMANY
6. SIEMENS AG, GERMANY GERMANY
7. ANSALDOROBICON ITALY
8. FUJI ELECTRIC SYSTEMS CO. LTD. JAPAN
9. TOSHIBA CORPORATION JAPAN
10. ASEA BROWN BOVERI INDIA /SWEDEN
11. GENERAL ELECTRIC CO. USA
INDUSTRIAL TYPE SW. SOCKET & PLUG
1. BALIGA LIGHTING EQUIPMENTS LIMITED INDIA
2. CHLORIDE POWER SYSTEMS AND INDIA
SOLUTIONS LTD. (FORMERLY CALDYNE)
3. CROMPTON GREAVES LTD INDIA
4. CYCLO ELECTRIC DEVICES & SERVICES INDIA
CO.
5. EX-PROTECTA INDIA
6. FCG FLAMEPROOF CONTROL GEARS PVT. INDIA
LTD. (FORMERLY CEAG FLAME
7. FCG POWER INDUSTRIES LTD INDIA
8. FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENTSPVT. LTD. INDIA
10. LEGRAND S.A. FRANCE
11. BBC-BROWN BOVERI&CIE AG GERMANY

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
12. R STAHL SCHALTGERATEGMBH GERMANY

13. WEIDMULLER LTD. GERMANY
14. CORTEM S.P.A. ITALY
HOSE PROOF INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
1. BAJAJ ELECTRICALS LIMITED INDIA
2. CROMPTON GREAVES LTD. INDIA
3. KESELECSCHREDER PRIVATE LIMITED INDIA
4. PHILIPS INDIA LTD. INDIA
5. SPACEAGE SWITCHGEARS LIMITED INDIA
6. SURYA ROSHNI LTD. INDIA
7. WIPRO LIGHTING INDIA
HT POWER CABLES
1. CABLE CORPN. OF INDIA LIMITED INDIA
2. DIAMOND POWER INFRASTRUCTURE LTD INDIA
3. KEC INTERNATIONAL LTD. (FORMERLY RPG INDIA
CABLES LIMITED
4. KEI INDUSTRIES LIMITED (UPTO 33 KV) INDIA
5. NICCO CORPORATION LTD INDIA
6. RAVIN CABLES LIMITED INDIA
7. TORRENT CABLES LTD. INDIA
8. UNIVERSAL CABLES LTD. INDIA
9. UNIFLEX INDIA
LT POWER CABLES
2. CORDS CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD INDIA
3. DELTON CABLES LTD INDIA
4. FINOLEX CABLES LTD INDIA
5. INDUSTRIAL CABLES (I) LIMITED (1.1 KV PVC/XLPE INDIA
INSULATED)
6. J K CABLES LIMITED INDIA
CABLES LIMITED
8. KEI INDUSTRIES LIMITED INDIA
10. PLAZA CABLE INDUSTRIES LIMITED INDIA
12. TORRENT CABLES LTD INDIA
14. POLYCAB INDIA
LT CONTROL CABLES (1.1 KV)
2. CORDS CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD. INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV

CABLES LIMITED
6. KEI INDUSTRIES LIMITED INDIA
8. PLAZA CABLE INDUSTRIES LIMITED INDIA
9. RADIANT CABLES PVT. LIMITED INDIA
11. TORRENT CABLES LTD. INDIA
13. MIRACLE CABLES INDIA
14. POLYCAB INDIA
CABLES FOR EARTHING
1. ADVANCE CABLE TECHNOLOGIES (P) LTD. INDIA
4. GUPTA ELECTRIC & MACHINERY STORES INDIA
(GEMSCAB)
5. J K CABLES LIMITED INDIA
6. NETCO CABLE INDUSTRIES (PVT.) LTD. INDIA
8. PRESTIGE CABLE INDUSTRIES INDIA
9. SHYAM CABLES INDUSTRIES INDIA
10. SPECIAL CABLES PVT. LTD. INDIA
11. T C COMMUNICATION PVT LTD INDIA
CABLE JOINTING KITS

1. RAYCHEM RPG LTD. INDIA
PRE-FABRICATED AL-CABLE TRAYS

2. HINDUSTAN VIDYUT PRODUCTS INDIA
3. INDIANA ENGG WORKS PVT LTD INDIA
4. INDMARKFORMTECH PVT. LTD. INDIA
5. JAMNA METAL COMPANY INDIA
6. KANADEANANDUDYOG PVT. LTD. INDIA
7. MAHESHWARI ELECTRICAL MFRS. (P) LTD. INDIA
8. METALITE INDUSTRIES INDIA
9. PAREKH ENGINEERING COMPANY INDIA
10. PREMIER POWER PRODUCTS (CALCUTTA) PVT. INDIA
LTD.
11. RUKMANI ELECTRICALS & COMPONENTS PVT LTD INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
12. SADHANA ENGINEERING CORPORATION INDIA

13. SREEATREYA ENTERPRISES INDIA
14. STEALITEENGG CO INDIA
PRE-FABRICATED G.I. CABLE TRAYS

2. INDIANA ENGG WORKS PVT LTD INDIA
5. KANADEANANDUDYOG PVT. LTD. INDIA
6. MAHESHWARI ELECTRICAL MFRS. (P) LTD. INDIA
8. PAREKH ENGINEERING COMPANY INDIA
LTD.
12. SLOTCO STEEL PRODUCTS PVT. LTD.
13. SREEATREYA ENTERPRISES INDIA
FRP CABLE TRAYS

1. ENERCON INDIA
2. ERCON COMPOSITES (UPTO 600 MM WIDE) INDIA
3. KEMROCK INDIA
4. SATYAM INDUSTRIES INDIA
5. SINTEX INDUSTRIES LTD. INDIA
6. SUMIP COMPOSITES PVT LTD. INDIA
HOSE PROOF LOCAL CONTROL STATION

2. BHARTIA INDUSTRIES LTD. (DIVN. BCH) INDIA
3. C & S ELECTRIC LTD. INDIA
4. EX-PROTECTA
5. FCG FLAMEPROOF CONTROL GEARS PVT. LTD. INDIA
(FORMERLY CEAG FLAME)
6. FCG POWER INDUSTRIES LTD. INDIA
7. FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENTS PVT. LIMITED INDIA
8. HOTLINE SWITCHGEAR & CONTROLS INDIA
9. POWER ENGG CO INDIA
HOSE PROOF JUNCTION BOXES

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV

2. BHARTIA INDUSTRIES LTD. (DIVN. BCH) INDIA
3. EX-PROTECTA INDIA
(FORMERLY CEAG FLAME)
5. FLAMEPROOF EQUIPMENTSPVT. LTD. INDIA
6. FCG POWER INDUSTRIES LTD INDIA
EARTHING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION MATERIAL – (AL) WIRE/STRIP

1. ANAND ELECTRIC TRADING CO. INDIA
2. C & S ELECTRIC LTD. INDIA
4. JAYANT METAL MFG. CO. INDIA
LTD.
7. MAHAVIR INDUSTRIAL CORPORATION INDIA
8. METROPOLITAN INDUSTRIES INDIA
9. SAI GALVANISERS & FABRICATORS PVT LTD INDIA
EARTHING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION MATERIAL – (GI) WIRE/STRIP

1. ANAND ELECTRIC TRADING CO. INDIA
2. CONTROLS & SWITCHGEAR CO. LTD. INDIA
3. JAYANT METAL MFG. CO. INDIA
LTD.
6. JAMNA METAL CO. INDIA
7. MAHAVIR INDUSTRIAL CORPORATION INDIA
8. METROPOLITAN INDUSTRIES INDIA
9. SAI GALVANISERS & FABRICATORS PVT LTD INDIA
10. BHARTI EXPORTS INDIA
GI PIPES & CONDUITS

1. BHARTI EXPORTS INDIA
2. INDIAN TUBE CO. (TATA DIV. OF TUBES & PIPES) INDIA
3. JINDAL PIPES LTD. INDIA
4. MEGHJYOT ENTERPRISES INDIA
6. STEELCRAFT INDIA

EC-10.0
DOCUMENT NO REV
INDUSTRIAL CABLE GLAND

2. COMET BRASS PRODUCTS INDIA
3. COMET INDUSTRIES INDIA
4. DOWELL'S ELECTRICALS INDIA
5. ELECTROMAC INDUSTRIES INDIA
(FORMERLY CEAG FLAME
7. GLAND-MECH. INDUSTRIES INDIA
8. INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT INDIA
10. QUALITY & PRECISION INDL. EQUIPMENT INDIA
11. S J METAL INDUSTRIES (JAINSON) INDIA
CABLE LUGS
1. DOWELL'S ELECTRICALS INDIA
2. FORWARD ENGG INDUSTRIES INDIA
3. KSE ELECTRICAL PVT. LTD. INDIA
4. MG ELECTRICA INDAI
6. S J METAL INDUSTRIES (JAINSON) INDIA
7. USHA MARTIN INDUSTRIES LTD. (ISMALDIVN) INDIA

PNPM/PC‐
CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER RESERVOIR AND PUMP
150/E/112/NCB/ 1
HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIES
SEC‐VII
SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR MECHANICAL WORKS (SUPPLY & ERECTION) Document No. Rev.
SCHEDULE OF RATES (SOR)

FOR
MECHANICAL WORKS (SUPPLY & ERECTION)
FOR
RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER RESERVOIR AND PUMP HOUSE & ALLIED FACILITIES
AT
TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL ODISHA
1 16.12.19 For Issuance JKY JKY GC

0 14.03.19 For Issuance DILIP DILIP GC
P 26.02.19 Issued for review & Comment DILIP DILIP GC
REV DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY
FORM NO: 02‐0000‐0021F2 REV1 SHEET 1 of 1 All Rights Reserved

PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES AT
TFL TALCHER
S. No. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDER
1
The Schedule of Rates is to be read in conjunction with Technical Specification for Electrical System for Construction of Raw Water Reservoir
and Allied Services & its attachments and other relevant sections / sub sections of NIT.
2 The rates shall be applicable for all floors, heights and depths.
3
This being an item rate contract, the unit rate shall prevail, correction of errors (if any) shall be done as per clause no. 30 Section III of ITB.
4 Owner/Consultant reserves the right to interpolate or extrapolate the rate for any item, which is not covered in the Schedule of rates, from the
rates available for similar item / work in the Schedule of Rates.
5 Whenever it is mentioned in the specifications that the bidder shall perform certain work or provide certain facilities/materials or certain item or
activity is in bidder’s scope of services it is understood that the bidder shall do so at his cost within the item rates unless expressly stated
otherwise.
6 Unit rates for erection shall inclusive of Unloading from Truck/ Trailer, transportation from store (at site), handling, the cost of labour,
supervision, all consumables, cost towards providing erection materials & hardware, necessary tools and tackles, and providing all the
required facilities for execution and inspection, testing and commissioning, guarantees etc. Minor repair and touch painting work towards
providing all required facilities for execution shall be in bidder’s scope.
7 Work shall involve, at every stage, correct identification of all equipment including loose equipment from stores, identifying spare items/
excess items, listing the same and carefully storing them under the custody of the contractor. Information to this extent shall be passed on to
the concerned Owner’s Engineer-in-charge / owner. Certification of balance items after erection and return to the Owner’s Engineer in-charge
so assigned.
8 All equipment shall be deemed to have clear tags, descriptive letter writing indicating locations / sources (from - to), cable sizes, circuit no.,
unit no., and any other writing required to make installation completely informative. All costs in view of above shall be deemed to have been
included in installation/ commissioning.
9 All primary & secondary injection tests & testing of relays and other equipment as per relevant IS, code of practice for testing and
commissioning shall be deemed to have been included for testing & commissioning. No extra charges shall be provided for that. Testing of
motors, including re-greasing, and at least 4 hour run shall be included in the motor testing & commissioning.
10 This being a grass root job, the Contractor must visit TFL, Talcher site to assess the quantum and nature of work before quoting. However,
the Contractor shall inform PDIL / TFL, 1 week prior to their visit.
11 Quantities mentioned in the Schedule of Rates are indicative and not exhaustive in nature. Payment shall be made as per actual quantity
used/certified at site by Owner’s Engineer-in-charge.
12
Contractor shall indicate the prices of all electrical items as per attached documents. The quantities indicated in Schedule of Rates are
estimated quantities and may change during detailed engineering as per site condition. Quantity of some or all the items may increase or
decrease up to any extent at the time of actual execution, for variation in value of contract please refers clause no. 60.2 of GCC.
13 The Tenderers shall note that the quantities of the different Items, as given in the "Schedule of Rates" are tentative based on tentative tender
drawings and are subject to variation and they shall not be entitled to claim any higher rate or compensation on this account. Owner /
Consultant reserve the right to change / modify the size and type of sections at any time. Owner / Consultant do not guarantee work under
each item of the Schedule of Quantities. Quantity of some or all the items may increase or decrease up to any extent at the time of actual
execution, for variation in value of contract please refers relevant clause of GCC.
14 Un-priced Price Schedule indicating the word “Quoted” (with prices blanked out) against each item shall be attached with bid documents for
15 Owner reserve their right to execute any additional works / extra works, during the execution of Work, either by themselves or by appointing
any other agency, even though such works are incidental to and necessary for the completion of works awarded to the Contractor. In the
event of such decisions taken by Owner, Contractor is required to extend necessary cooperation, and act as per the instructions of Engineer-
in-Charge.
16 Before procurement of any equipment / material, the Contractor shall submit drawing / document, Compliance Statement supported by
17 Quoted rates shall also cover the cost towards fabrication of steel structure, its painting with two coats of epoxy paint, after surface
18 All GI materials shall have zinc coating of 610 gm/Sq.m at any point on its surface unless indicated otherwise in the schedule of rates.
19 The portion, which is under "HOLD" shown in the approved drawing (if any) or the portion, which would be brought under "HOLD" during
20 Quoted rates shall remain firm till completion of work including all extensions granted for any reasons whatsoever.
21 All heavy machinery including Cranes, Hydra, etc for the job (if required) shall be in the bidder’s scope.
22 Bidders are required to undertake all the safety precautions as deemed fit and necessary by statutory authorities and/or
23
The plans have been evolved tentatively based on information available with Owner / Consultant but the dimensions and details etc. are liable
to changes. The Tenderers shall not be entitled to claim any higher rate or compensation on this account. The tender drawings are intended
mainly to give an indication of the probable type of construction. The successful Tenderers will, however, be required to execute the work as
per detailed approved drawings issued to them from time to time. Steel structures can be changed to R.C.C. or vice versa. Owner reserves
the right to add / delete any of the building works mentioned in the N.I.T., during the currency of the contract..
24 The Tenderers shall be fully responsible for the correct setting out and execution of the work in accordance with approved drawings which will
be supplied to them progressively. All tools, tackles, construction equipments etc., required for the successful execution / construction of the
complete work shall be responsibility of the Tenderers.
25
Quantities indicated in Schedule of Rates are approximate and subject to variation on either side. The quantity of individual item may be
deleted. Contractor shall not be entitled for any compensation on this account and the quoted rates shall hold good for such quantity variations
etc. Payments on bills shall, however, be made on actual measurements of quantities of work done as per approved drawings. Unless
otherwise specified, measurements of civil quantities shall be taken as per Indian Standards IS: 1200.
26 The rates to be inserted in the "Schedule of Rates" are to be inclusive of the value of the work described under several items including all
costs and expenses which may be required for the construction of the work described together with all taxes, general risks, liabilities and
obligations such as temporary buildings / hutments, fencing, watching, lighting, insurance, labour regulations, indemnity, maintenance and the
like. The prices shall be inclusive of all labours, materials, tools, plants, equipment, hoists, tackles, scaffoldings, the sundries, etc., as may be
necessary for the completion of the work in all respects.
27 Any fabrication / construction done before final approval of the drawings shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
28
No work shall be undertaken at site until detailed approved drawings have been issued by the Owner / Consultant in writing. Subsequent
revision in the drawings which become necessary shall be incorporated and revised drawings issued to the Contractor who shall execute the
work as per the latest revised drawings. Nothing extra will be paid on this account and no claim whatsoever will be entertained on this
account. The Owner / Consultant reserves to themselves the right to modify / revise / alter etc. in any drawing supplied to the Contractor.
29
In case of any discrepancy between the description of items given in the "Schedule of Rates" and Specifications, drawings and other
documents, the decision of the Owner / Consultant in writing shall be final, binding and conclusive for the purpose of this contract.
30 The term "Design and drawings" mentioned in the description of Items in the "Schedule of Rates" means the detailed approved design
drawings marked "Good for Construction".
31 The work "As described", "As shown", "As directed" or "As approved", "As mentioned" in the description of Items shall mean as directed in
design or detailed drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Tender Inviting Authority : PDIL on behalf of Talcher Fertilizers Ltd.
Name of Work : CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER AND FIRE WATER RESERVOIR, PUMP HOUSE AND SERVICES AT TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA
NIT Ref. : PNPM/PC‐150/E/112/NCB
Notes :
1 The order will be placed on overall lowest (L‐1) basis.
2 Prices shall be quoted strictly as per the Price Schedule Format made available herein without altering any of the contents of the "Price Schedule Format".
Vendor shall include Prices towards all Mandatory & Commissioning Spares, Special Tools & Tackles, Export Sea‐worthy Packing, Forwarding, FOB Charges, Inland Freight, Testing & Third
3 Party Inspection Charges, Insurance upto Port of Exit, Loading (on ship), all duties and Taxes, other charges payable outside India including Export Licensing etc. Supplier shall be responsible
and no additional cost/ time shall be paid in case commissisonig spares/ special tools & tackles over and above those quoted by supplier are required.
Per diem rates as quoted by the Bidder, shall be basis for payment in case assistance is required during commissioning however actual payment for service shall be based on actual mandays
4
consumed at site.
5 Please submit Unpriced copy of this Price Schedule indicating either "QUOTED" or "NOT QUOTED" against each item.
6 Please enter Value in Cells Highlighted in Yellow only.
7 Price to be entered in Indian Rupees Only
Bidder
Name :
PRICE SCHEDULE
(This BOQ Template must not be modified/ replaced by the Bidder and the same should be uploaded after filling the relevant columns, else the Bidder is liable to be rejected for this Tender. Bidders are allowed to enter the
Bidder Name and Numeric Values only)
PART ‐A
SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR EQUIPMENTS AND PIPING WORKS
BASIC UNIT PRICE In
TOTAL AMOUNT in
Figures To be entered by
Figures TOTAL AMOUNT in Words
APPROX Quoted the Bidder
S.No DESCRIPTION UNITS (Including all taxes, (Including all taxes, duties, levies, etc, except
QTY. Currency (Including all taxes,
duties, levies, etc, except GST )
duties, levies, etc, except
GST )
GST )
1 UNLOADING OF EQUIPMENT
Unloading from trailer, truck, etc. and placing on firm ground over suitable support / sleepers
etc. as desired by Owner/Consultant at a place to be decided by Owner/Consultant of
equipment foundations. However, effort shall be made to erect the equipment directly from
tailor to foundation to avoid unloading for which payment shall not be made against
unloading of equipment.
i Stactic / Moving machineries MT 25 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
2 SUPPLY & ERECTION OF NEW EQUIPMENTS & MACHINERIES ETC.

Complete works of supply & Erection of Pumps, Motors, Machineries, flanges, fittings,
transportation and inspection charges but not limited to, the following items in accordance
with PMS (piping material specification), relevant specifications & drawings indicated in
Technical specification under this tender documents and instructions of Engineer‐in‐charge
and as per all provisions of the CONTRACT.Transportation of Equipments/SKID etc. from
Owner/ Consultant’s stores/storage yard; dismantling & reassembly / reinstatement of
structures, building sheets (if required) etc., to facilitate for erection, assembly of parts / sub‐
assemblies; checking, cleaning, chipping and preparing the top of foundation and cleaning of
pockets for erection; placing the equipments, machinery & SKID etc., on foundation or
structure;
leveling, alignment, bolting, welding, grouting; fixing of internals; first maintenance &
carrying out testing / carrying out alignment, trial runs and start up runs and providing
manpower for testing, rectifying and defect and completion of works in all respects including
earthing protection by way of fixing strips and electrodes as per drawings & specifications.;
completion of all jobs as per drawings, scope of work & technical conditions as defined in the
enquiry specifications, standards, codes and all jobs are to be carried out as per the
instruction and to the full satisfaction of the Engineer‐in‐Charge/Owner. Job also includes
supplying of all types of tools, tackles, lifting arrangements, tractor trolley & equipments,
machineries all consumables and labour to complete the job in a workman like manner,
erection and removal of steel scaffolding wherever required, area preparation for hot job
and area cleaning after completion of work including blinding, deblinding, removal of
insulation, gas cutting of bolts, chipping of foundation, flushing wherever required.
Rates shall include cost of labour, deployment of tools & tackles, consumables, Materials and
other associated arrangements required to execute all activities. Grouting shall be paid as per
Cl. 2.0 of SOR when using SHRINKOMP or equivalent. For cost of grouting using ordinary
grouting, including supply of materials shall be included in the unit rates of erection of
equipments, machinery & SKID etc. without any extra cost to Owner.
MOVING MACHINERY PUMPS WITH ITS DRIVE MOTOR ETC.FOR Water supply to Raw Water
i Reservoir AS PER TS IN NIT Nos 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
MOVING MACHINERY PUMPS WITH ITS DRIVE MOTOR ETC.FOR for makeup water supply to
ii Fire water reservoir AS PER TS IN NIT No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
3 SUPPLY & ERECTION OF EOT CRANE
Supply & Erection of EOT Crane (Double girder) of Suitable capacity including its drives and
all other relevant electrical items as per TS attached elswhere in the tender documents.This
covers the technical requirements of design, engineering,manufacture, testing at works,
supply at site, erection, site testing and commissioning of the complete electrical equipment Lot 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
and accessories as required for the overhead travelling crane and hoists.

4 GROUTING
Grouting works include supply of materials, manpower, and necessary arrangement for
application of grouting as per technical specification, vendor’s requirement and instruction of
Owner/Consultant. Machineries with ≥500 H.P., Araldite of M/s CIBA Geigy or equivalent
shall be used. For tall towers having height more than 10 Meter and weight more than 25
MT, SHRINKOM ‐ 20 or Conbextra GP‐2 shall be used. However, for balance equipments /
machineries and structurals ordinary 1:1:2 cement grout mix added with anti‐shrinkage
compound shall be used without any extra cost to Owner.
i SHRINKOMP‐20 Or Conbextra GP‐2 M3 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
5 SUPPLY OF PIPING ITEMS
FOR U/G PIPING
"Supply , taking over" as defined in the specifications, handling, loading, transportation,
unloading and Laying of bare/coated line pipes and other materials like valve, fittings,
flanges, from Contractors suppliers locations/works etc. to Contractor's stock
yard/workshop/work‐site including preliminary activities, preparation of drawings, wherever
required for crossing etc. Handling, stacking, stringing of the UG pipes ,
Carrying out inspection of materials including line pipes at the time of laying/ installation of
line pipes, associated valves, tees, insulating joints, flanges & fittings for buried application of
all sizes, thickness & ANSI class rating and accessories as per specification wherever required
depending on site condition.
Arrangement of all additional lands required for Contractor's storage, fabrication, access for
construction, etc. procurement and supply of all materials, consumables, equipment, labour
and other inputs, carrying out all temporary, ancillary, auxiliary works, etc. make ready for
commissioning of pipeline as per drawings, specifications, other provisions of Contract
document and instructions of Engineer‐in‐charge, including but not limited to carrying out
the following works.
Barricading the pipeline construction area prior to execution to the entire satisfaction of
Owner / Engineer‐in‐charge.
ITEM SIZE SPECN SCH/THK MATERIAL
5.1 Pipes
i CS PIPES BE 20",OD 508.0 ASME B36.10 SCH 10 ERW,API 5L GR.B MTR. 192 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii CS PIPES BE 20",OD 762 ASME B36.10 SCH 10 ERW,API 5L GR.B ,C & W MTR. 264 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ERW/SAW,ASTM API 5L
iii CS PIPES BE 36",OD 914 ASME B36.10 SCH XS MTR. 114 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
GR.B
5.2 VALVE
GATE VALVE

GATE VALVE
i 1/2” GAV201 800# CS BODY ASTM A105 Nos 5 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
(SOCW)
GATE VALVE CS BODY ASTM A105,
ii 3/4” GAV201 800# Nos 19 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
(SOCW) SOCW
CS BODY ASTM A216 GR
iii GATE VALVE(FLNG) 20” GAV210 150# Nos 11 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
WCB
CS BODY ASTM A216 GR
iv GATE VALVE(FLNG) 36” GAV210 150# Nos 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
WCB
5.3 CHECK VALVE
CHECK VALVE CS BODY ASTM A216 GR
i 20" CHV210 150# Nos 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
(FLNG) WCB
5.4 FLANGES
FLANGE ASTM A105, SO‐RF 125
i 18” ASME B16.5 150 # Nos 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
(SLIP ON) AARH
FLANGE ASTM A105, SO‐RF 125
ii 20” ASME B16.5 150 # Nos 33 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
(SLIP ON) AARH
FLANGE(WELD ASME B16.47 ASTM A105,WN‐RF 125

iii 36” 150 #,SCHXS Nos 13 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
NECK) SR.B AARH
5.5 GASKET
TP304 SS WDG;GPH
GASKET (SPRL‐
i 18” ASME B16.20 150# FLR;TP304 SS INR RNG;CS Nos 12 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
WND RF)
OTR RNG
TP304 SS WDG;GPH
GASKET (SPRL‐
ii 20” ASME B16.20 150# FLR;TP304 SS INR RNG;CS Nos 60 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
WND RF)
OTR RNG
ASME TP304 SS WDG;GPH
GASKET(SPRL‐WND
iii 36” B16.20/B16.4 150# FLR;TP304 SS INR RNG;CS Nos 39 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
RF)
7 SR.B OTR RNG
5.6 STUD & NUTS
STUD & 2NUTS ASTM A193 GR.B7/ASTM
i 11/8" 150 Nos 90 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
HVY HEX A194 GR.2H

ii 11/8" 160 Nos 560 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
HVY HEX A194 GR.2H
iii 11/2" 275 Nos 582 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
HVY HEX A194 GR.2H
5.7 ELBOW
0, 1.5D
i ELBOW 90 20”BW ASME B16.9 SCH 10 ASTM A234 WPB‐WLDD Nos 37 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii ELBOW 900, 1.5D 36”BW ASME B16.9 SCH XS ASTM A234 WPB‐WLDD Nos 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
5.8 TEE
SCH10 X ASTM A234 WPB‐WLDD,
i TEE (BW) 20X20 ASME B16.9 Nos 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
SCH10 BW
SCH XS X ASTM A234 WPB‐WLDD,
ii TEE (BW) 36X36 ASME B16.9 Nos 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
SCH XS BW
5.9 REDUCER
SCH10X SCH
i REDUCER ECC.(BW) 20"X18" ASME B16.9 ASTM A234 WPB‐WLDD Nos 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
10,
5.10 SOCKOLET
SOCKOLET
i 20"X3/4” MSS SP 97 3000# ASTM A105 Nos 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
(SOCW)
SOCKOLET
ii 36"X3/4” MSS SP 97 3000# ASTM A105 Nos 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
(SOCW)
5.11 BLIND FLANGE
SPECL BLIND 150#,RF 125
i 20” ASME B16.48 ASTM A105 No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
FLANGE AARH
ASME B16.47 150#,RF 125
ii BLIND FLANGE 36” ASTM A105 No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
SR.B AARH
ASME B16.47 150#,RF 125
iii BLIND FLANGE 40” ASTM A105 Nos 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
SR.B AARH
5.12 CAP(CS)
i CAP, THD 1/2" ASME B16.11 3000# ASTM A105 No. 5 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii CAP, THD 3/4" ASME B16.11 3000# ASTM A105 No. 18 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

5.13 NIPPLE
NIPPLE, PLN‐THD,
i 1/2" ASME B36.10 SCH160 SMLS,API 5L GR.B Nos 9 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
NPT
ii NIPPLE, PLN‐PLN 1/2" ASME B36.10 SCH160 SMLS,API 5L GR.B Nos 9 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii NIPPLE, PLN‐PLN 3/4" ASME B36.10 SCH160 SMLS,API 5L GR.B Nos 15 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
NIPPLE, PLN‐THD,
iv 3/4" ASME B36.10 SCH160 SMLS,API 5L GR.B Nos 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
NPT
5.14 BRANCH WELD WITH RP
BRANCH WELD SCHXS X
i 36"X20" ASME B31.3 CARBON STEEL BW Nos 6 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
WITH RP SCH10
6.0 FABRICATION & ERECTION OF ABOVE GROUND (A‐G) PIPING
Transportation of all piping materials from storage point to work site/shop including from
shop to work site, cleaning, stacking, surface preparation/shot blasting of piping, supply &
application of paints and primers (including all coats‐primer, intermediate & final coats) for
piping and equipments as per enclosed painting specification in NIT,prefabrication /
fabrication at shop and/or site including marking, cutting, edge preparation, beveling,
bending, etc., providing all branch connections, re‐enforcement pads, threading etc., welding
of all fitting and specials, erection including lifting, placing, installing of supports etc. at all
levels and locations, leveling, aligning, jointing of flanges including insertion of gaskets, orifice
plates, spectacle blinds etc., bolting, joining by threading or welding, ,connecting the system
to the required other system, equipments, pumps, including hook up of new lines with
existing lines, and welding of Tie‐in points as per tie‐in list, installation of all in line fittings /
all type of valves / Instruments / strainers / filters / spray nozzles / traps, safety / control
valves rapture disc, flow meters, flow orifice etc. as applicable including shifting to &
collection from painting contractor’s shop for erection, hydro testing, flushing and blowing,
seal/leak testing and making ready for commissioning as per drawings, specification
,standards ,codes, instructions of Owner/Consultant and scope of work defined in
Tender. Welding shall include all the examination and testing required such as but not
limited to radiography, ultrasonic, magnaflux /dye check etc and pre and post heat
treatment wherever required.
The cost towards radiography only shall be paid separately as per SOR Cl.7.0 . Unit rates shall
include the cost of supervision, labour, overheads/profits, consumables, and other
associated arrangements required to execute all the related activities.
The quoted rates shall include seal welding of thermocouples, Orifice flange plug, nipple, and
hydro testing drain and vents caps.
NB O.D. SCH/THK
6.1 PIPE: SMLS,API 5L GR.B/ERW,API 5L GR.B

i 3/4" 26.7 SCH 80 Mtr. 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii 20" 508 SCH 10 Mtr. 210 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii 36" 762 SCH XS Mtr. 120 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
6.2 UNDER GROUND (U‐G) PIPING WORKS:
A EARTHWORK
Excavation of trenches for pipelines in all kinds of soil including soft and hard rock mixed in
nature both dry and wet conditions including dressing of sides and bottom getting out
i excavated material in the approved dump yard in all leads of 100 meter including spreding M3 500 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
and leveling as per instruction of owner/Consultant.
ii
Same as above but lift from 1.5 Mtr.to 3.0 Mtr. M3 200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii Providing and filling with fine river sand in trenches a layer of 150 mm from BOP(Bottom of
pipe) and 200 mm top of pipes(In case of pipe size>24" NB) and for pipe<24" filling of sand in
trenches shall be 150mm from BOP and 100 mm from top of pipe including watering, M3 200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ramming, consolidating and complete dressing.
iv Filling with available earth excavated without stones & unwanted materials in the treanches
in layer other than Sr. No. III. In depth consolidation each deposited layer by ramming and
M3 250 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
watering all complete.
VI Removal or excess excavated materials after back filling of trenchesfrom site of work to other
area in factory premises, as directed by ownerand spreading and leveling the same. M3 500 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
vi Cutting and disposal of RCC, PCC and paved surface at all level other than I & II
M3 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

FABRICATION & ERECTION OF UNDER GROUND (U‐G) PIPING‐ERW,API 5L GR.B/SMLS,API 5L
GR.B:‐"Taking over" as defined in the specifications, handling, loading, transportation,
unloading and Laying of bare/coated (Wrapping coating shall be paid seperatly as per clause
no‐4c) Piping and other materials like valve, fittings, flanges, from Contractors suppliers
locations/workws etc. to Contractor's stock yard/workshop/work‐site including preliminary
activities, preparation of drawings, wherever required for crossing etc. Handling, stacking,
stringing of the UG pipes , Carrying out inspection of materials including line pipes at the time
of laying/ installation of pipes, associated valves, tees, insulating joints, flanges & fittings for
buried application of all sizes, thickness & ANSI class rating and accessories as per
specification wherever required depending on site condition. Arrangement of all additional
B lands required for Contractor's storage, fabrication, access for construction, etc. procurement
and supply of all materials, consumables, equipment, labour and other inputs, carrying out
all temporary, ancillary, auxiliary works, etc. make ready for commissioning of pipeline as per
drawings, specifications, other provisions of Contract document and instructions of Engineer‐
in‐charge,Barricading the piping construction area prior to execution to the entire
satisfaction of Owner / Engineer‐in‐charge.
NB O.D. SCH/THK
i 20" 508 SCH 10 Mtr. 275 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

C COATING AND WRAPPING OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
Procurement and supply of all Cold Tape type coating and wrapping materials, manpower,
equipments, consumables and necessary arrangements for surface preparation and
application shall be in the scope of Contractor. All oil, grease, rust, mill scale, soil, dust,
previous paint if any or foreign matters shall be completely removed from pipe surface prior
to priming. Surface cleaning and preparation shall consist of cleaning and degreasing by Grit /
Shot blasting and or power scraping, using most suitable method or a combination therefore,
both followed by carefully removal of the dust according to the specification ISO 8501‐1:
1988 SA 2.5.
The coating continuity shall be visually 100% checked by electric Holiday detector to detect
and search of particles and other inclusion, pinholes, cavities, cracks and other ruptures. All
defects visually detected or by Holiday detector shall be clearly marked and all defects in the
coating shall be made good immediately after their inspection.
COATING AND WRAPPING OF UNDERGROUND PIPING: As per C&W‐TS
i Cold Tape Type (Two layer = Inner wrap and Outer wrap.) Sq. M. 500 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
7.0 ERECTION OF VALVES

Transportation from storage points to shop/site, (including testing and setting of safety
valves but excluding testing of control valves which shall be issued from Owner/
Consultant's stores or instrument contractor's shop/stores), installation in position by
threading, bolting or welding as per drawings, specifications, standards / codes,
instructions of Owner/Consultant and scope of work defined in NIT. Welding shall include
all the examination and inspection required such as but not limited to radiography,
ultrasonic, magnaflux, dye check etc, pre and post heat‐treatment wherever required.
The cost towards radiography shall be paid separately as per Cl 7 of Schedule of Rates,
whereas the cost of all other tests is included in the rates quoted as per Cl. 5.0 Of
Schedule of Rates. Rates shall also include the cost of supervision, labour, Overhead /
profits, consumables, statutory approval and conditions listed in preamble to Schedule of
Rates and other associated arrangements required to execute all the related activities.
The quoted rates shall also include tightening of gland packing and bonnet flange of valves if
required during hydro‐testing of piping.
Description
A FLANGED/SCREWED VALVES
i 20” to 24" Nos 15 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii 30” to 36" Nos 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B SW/BW VALVES
i Up to 3/4" Nos 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
NOTES:
i WAFER TYPE VALVES shall be treated as flanged valves
ii Above includes valves of all materials, rating, IBR/Non IBR.
iii Above includes all types of valves.
8.0 PIPE SUPPORTS
A SUPPLY & FABRICATION OF PIPE SUPPORTS
Supply & Fabrication of pipe supports as per drawings, standards, Specifications, NIT
conditions & instructions of Owner/Consultant. The rate shall include the cost of materials
, consumables, surface preparation & application of primer, labour overheads/profits
etc.
CATEGORY MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
PS 1 Means carbon steel supports.
PS 2 Means alloy steel supports (Alloy steel parts of supports only)
PS 3 Means stainless steel supports (SS parts of Support only)

PS 4 PUF supports
PS 5 Means Turn buckles (Forged)
PS 6 Means Spring support (Free Issue)
Category of Supports
i PS 1 MT 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

B ERECTION OF PIPE SUPPORTS
Erection of supports fabricated by Contractor and/or supplied by vendors. The rate shall
include cost of erection as part of piping, welding (including dissimilar welding), labour,
consumables, application of finish paint, overheads/profits etc to complete all related
activities as per ITB and instruction of Owner/ Consultant.
Category of Supports
PS‐1 MT 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Notes for 8 (a) & (b):
Irrespective of whether pipe supports and/or pipe support materials are
supplied by Contractor or Vendor, all fasteners such as bolts, studs, nuts,
i washers etc., are to be supplied by Contractor at his cost.
Welding for supports shall include preheating and all tests (excluding
radiography & stress relieving, which shall be paid separately) such as dye‐
ii penetrent test, hardness test etc. as required by standards, codes, specifications
and instructions of Owner/Consultant.
9.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
All structural work under this enquiry has been divided in to two categories:
Equipment platforms , valve operating platforms, ladders and
hand railing (but excluding gratings) and any other additional
CATEGORY‐A
equipment supports, if required , to be fabricated at site.
CATEGORY‐B Galvanized Gratings (35 mm)
The rates for above items shall be quoted for supply, fabrication and Erection as per the
format below. Structural steel is also to be arranged and supplied by CONTACTOR.
A Supply, Fabrication & Erection of Steel Structure

The rate shall include cost of preparation, submission and obtaining approval of fabrication
drawings from CONSULTANT, labour, materials, consumables, surface preparation &
application of primer, tools & tackles and other associated arrangement required to execute
all the related activities. The cost shall also include cost of bolts, nuts, washers and anchor
bolts. The rate shall include cost of withdrawal and transportation from
OWNER/CONSULTANT’S stores /storage yard (if prefabricated structurals issued by
OWNER/CONSULTANT) or from his own stores/ shop to place of erection, grouting
Description
CATEGORY‐A MT 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
CATEGORY‐B MT 0.5 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Note:
Prior approval shall have to be obtained from OWNER/CONSULTANT, in writing for
making a change in sections due to non‐availability of certain sections or using built‐
1
up section, compound sections, for fabrication of built‐up compound sections either
recommended by CONSULTANT or CONTRACTOR, no extra payment shall be made.
For hand railing under clause 7(c).1 pipes shall also be supplied by CONTRACTOR.
2
During execution of piping etc. gratings may have to be cut and the same shall be
repaired by cold galvanization (Zinc spray) of thickness 80 microns after proper
3 surface preparation. This activity shall be deemed covered within the unit rate of
erection of grating and nothing extra shall be paid for this.
10.0 RADIOGRAPHY (GAMMA RAY)
The unit rate shall include cost of radiograph viewer and films, consumables, scaffolding,
manpower, overheads/profits etc. Payment shall be made only for those films after
examination for joints found acceptable as per codes, standards & NIT. Films for defective
joints shall not be paid. Overlapping Length of radiography film is not payable.
Description
A At outside, the place of erection using film size
i 3" wide film Inches 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii 4" wide film Inches 110 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B In‐situ (Erected position) using
i 3" wide film Inches 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii 4" wide film Inches 110 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
NOTES:
Length and width of film to be used which shall be decided by Owner before
i
execution of radiography.

ii As a guide line the radiography film shall be used as below: ‐
a 3" wide film shall be used up to 4" dia pipes
b 4" wide film shall be used above 4" dia pipes
Payment shall be made on the basis of weld length radiographed & for those
iii
joints which are found acceptable.
iv Length of radiographed film shall be calculated (O.D. x 3.14) in inch.
11.0 Assistance during PRE COMMISSIONING/COMMISSIONING
The rate below shall be inclusive of Contractor's supervision, hand tools, all equipments &
machinery, consumables, contractor's supervision, over‐head and profits.
Category of Personnel
Skilled (with hand tools, equipment/machinery, consumables): Welder, Millwright Fitter
i MANDAY 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Semi Skilled (with hand tools): Pipe Fitter, Gas Cutter, Rigger, Electrician (for welding m/c).
ii MANDAY 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii Unskilled: Helper, Khalasi. MANDAY 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

TOTAL AMOUNT FOR EQUIPMENT & PIPING ERECTION WORKS (IN RS.) 0.00
No Rupees Only
PART B
SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR INSTRUMENT SUPPLY & INSTALLATION WORKS
1 Transmitters Supply & Erection
Supply of pressure transmitter as per specification attached with this tender ( 1 main + 1
1.1 Nos 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
spare)
1.2 Erection of pressure transmitter , this job includes following No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
a Calibration of transmitter
Pressure transmitter erection / installation (Including drilling of blind flange where
b ever required, impulse piping including , glanding, and termination, erection of
Statction & Supports Canopy etc). Supply structural & piping material for this job Is in
c Hydrotest, PMI, DP tests of impulse lines
d functional check, loop checking
Supply of Radar type Level transmitter as per specification attached with this tender ( 2 main
1.3 No 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
+ 1 spare)
1.4 Erection of Radar type Level transmitter , this job includes following No 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

ever required, impulse piping including , glanding, and termination, erection of
b Statction & Supports Canopy etc) Supply structural & piping material for this job Is in
bidders scope , bidder to consider the cost of these items
c Hydrotest, PMI, DP tests of impulse lines,
1.5 Supply of Flow transmitter as per specification attached with this tender ( 1 main + 1 spare) No 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
1.6 Erection of Flow transmitter, this job includes following No 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

ever required, impulse piping including , glanding, and termination, erection of
b Statction & Supports Canopy etc) Supply structural & piping material for this job Is in
bidders scope , bidder to consider the cost of these items
c Hydrotest, PMI, DP tests of impulse lines
1.7 Vibration Switch
Supply of vibration switch/Transmitter along with special cable,( if any) , transmitter (if
any)shall be done by Pump vendor No 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Glanding Termination ,ferruling of Vibration switches to Control system
a
b Functional Check & Loop Testing
2.0 Pressure gauges
Supply Of pressure Gauges as per Specification mentioned in ITB ( 4 main + 1 spare)
2.1 No 5 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Pressure gauge erection / installation (includes impulse piping and necessary support
fabrication & installation as per the hookup attached in ITB.). Supply structural & piping
2.2 material for this job Is in bidders scope , bidder to consider the cost of these items No 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
3.0 Junction Box
3.1 Supply Of Junction Boxes with glands as per Specification mentioned in ITB No 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

Erection/Installation of JB as per specification including glanding termination ,ferruling,
3.2 painting etc. No 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
4.0 Instrumentation Cables
Supply of instrumentation cables ( as per specification provided in ITB)
i 12Px 1.5 Ssqmm Mtr 1000 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii Deleted
iii 01Px 1.5 Sqmm Mtr 500 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iv Cable laying Mtr 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
v 12Px 1.5 Sqmm Mtr 1000 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
vi Deleted

vii 01Px 1.5 Sqmm Mtr 500 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
5..0 Cable Trays
5.1 Supply of cable trays as per specification in ITB
i Aluminum Cable Trays (Perforated) size 2500 x 200 x 55 Mtr 600 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii Aluminum Cable Trays (Perforated) size 2500 x 100 x 55 Mtr 50 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii Aluminum Cable Trays (Perforated) Size2500 x 50 x 55 Mtr 150 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
5.2 Erection Of cable trays including supports
i Aluminum Cable Trays (Perforated) size 2500 x 200 x 55 Mtr 600 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii Aluminum Cable Trays (Perforated) size 2500 x 100 x 55 Mtr 50 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

iii Aluminum Cable Trays (Perforated) Size2500 x 50 x 55 Mtr 150 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
6.0 Cable Glands ( Panel Side )
i Supply Of Cable Glands (1” NPT) No 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

ii Glanding in panel Side (1” NPT) No 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
7.0 Orifice plate with flanges
Supply of Orifice plate with flanges ( 1 pair of gaskets as spare) as per specification attached
i No 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
in ITB Erection will be a part of Piping
TOTAL AMOUNT FOR INSTRUMENT SUPPLY & INSTALLATION WORKS (Rs.) 0.00 No Rupees Only
PART C
SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR ELECTRICAL SUPPLY & INSTALLATION WORKS
1. LOCAL CONTROL STATION ( LCS )
Supply of Weather Proof Local Control Station of following type, as specified in Technical
1.1
Specification PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec 6.0.
LCS with Trip‐Neutral‐Close control switch with Ammeter & 5 nos. indication lamp.
A. Nos. 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Installation, testing and commissioning of weather proof Local control stations of following
type, including shifting of control stations from store to the site of erection, fixing control
stations with nuts & bolts, on already erected supports / nearby structure / walls etc.
connecting control cable for control switch , ammeter & Indication lamp as required and
1.2
testing to make the installation complete in all respect as per approved drawings,
specifications and direction of Owner’s Engineer‐in‐charge. Supply of all required hardware
for mounting shall be in Contractor’s scope.
LCS with Trip‐Neutral‐Close control switch with Ammeter & 5 nos. indication lamp
2. INTER LOCKED TYPE SW SOCKET & PLUG
Supply of Heavy duty Hoseproof & Weather proof interlocking Switch Socket having
enclosure with IP–65 degree of protection with matching Plug of following type as specified
2.1
in Technical Specification PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec 6.0.
A. 63A, 5‐pin, 415V (Weather Proof) Nos. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

B. 25A, 3 pin, 240V (Weather Proof) Nos. 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

Installation, testing and commissioning of interlocked type switch sockets with matching
2.2 plugs complete with cable glands, lugs, terminal blocks etc. of following ratings:
A. 63A, 5‐pin, 415V (Weather Proof) Nos. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

B. 25A, 3 pin, 240V (Weather Proof) Nos. 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
3. Motors
Testing and commissioning of 3‐Phase, Squirrel Cage, Weatherproof Induction Motors of
following ratings excluding cable glanding, cable termination, dehydration of windings but
including checking & replenishment/ replacement of bearing grease/ lubricant; checking of IR
values between each winding & motor frame & checking of continuity of rotation, if required,
3.1 by changing supply connections; trial runs on NO LOAD & ON LOAD; supply of approved
grease/ lubricant & necessary hardware; all work, labour & materials complete as per
specifications, documents, codes & standards & directions of Owner’s Engineer‐in‐charge.
(Contractor to keep proper record of tests on motors for NO LOAD & ON LOAD runs).
A. 3.3 kV Motors of Rating upto 500 kW No. 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

4. G.I. Pipes
4.1 Supply of G. I. pipes; Medium Class as per IS 1239 (part‐1) of following sizes :
A. 100 mm NB Mtrs. 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Installation of G.I. pipes of following sizes for cable protection, floor sleeves etc. fixed on a
steel structure, concrete, laid in trenches including concrete cutting, bending, threading etc.
to a clamp, nuts, bolts sockets, reducers, spacers, plug, bushing, chipping of concrete floor,
4.2
breaking of concrete cable trench, walls and complete with all labour and material as per
directions of engineer‐in‐charge.
B. 100 mm NB Mtrs. 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

5. Cables
Supply of 3.3 KV (UE) Grade, XLPE Insulated, PVC inner sheathed, Armoured, FRLS PVC outer
5.1 sheathed cables as specified in Technical Specification Doc. No. PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec‐6.0 &
its attachments of following sizes
A. 3C x 240 sq. mm (Al) Mtrs. 1200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. 3C x 185 sq. mm (Al) Mtrs. 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Supply of 1.1 KV Grade, XLPE Insulated, PVC inner Sheath, Armoured, FRLS PVC outer
sheathed cables LT Power & Control Cable / Earthing cable as specified in Technical
5.2 Specification PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec‐6.0 & its attachments, of following sizes
D. 3.5 C x 70 sqmm (Al) Mtrs 300 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

E. 3.5 C x 50 sqmm (Al) Mtrs 900 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
F. 3 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Mtrs 1300 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
G. 12 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Mtrs 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
H. 16 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Mtrs 1200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
I. 1C x 10 Sqmm (Al) Earthing Cable Mtrs. 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

Horizontal and vertical laying, testing (before and after laying) and commissioning of above
HV/LV Power & Control cables in readymade trenches, on pre‐fabricated cable trays / racks,
on already installed risers, support hangers, saddles etc. pulling through pipes on walls /
columns, steel structures including transportation, including supply and fixing of necessary
saddles, saddle bars, cable tags, Al clamps for cables laid vertical on walls / columns /
structures, risers with all labour, consumable materials and necessary hardware to make
installation complete in all respect as per approved standard drawings and direction of
5.3 Owner’s Engineer‐in‐charge.
This also includes drilling, taping of cable insulation, crimping of lugs to the conductor,
connection of the lugs to equipment terminal, supply and fixing of G.I. nuts, screws, bolts,
washers and other necessary hardware, PVC tape of required grade for taping, making cable
entries dust and vermin proof, earthing etc. as per instruction of manufacturer, approved
drawings, specifications and directions of Owner’s Engineer‐in‐charge.
3.3 KV (UE) Grade XLPE Insulated, PVC inner sheathed, Armoured, FRLS PVC outer sheathed
A. cables
i. 3C x 240 sq. mm (Al) Mtrs. 1200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii. 3C x 185 sq. mm (Al) Mtrs. 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
1.1 KV Grade XLPE Insulated, PVC inner Sheath, Armoured, FRLS PVC outer sheathed cables
B.
i. 3.5 C x 70 sqmm (Al) Mtrs 300 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

ii. 3.5 C x 50 sqmm (Al) Mtrs 900 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii. 3 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Mtrs 1300 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iv. 12 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Mtrs 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
v. 16 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Mtrs 1200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
vi. 1C x 10 Sqmm (Al) Earthing Cable Mtrs. 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Supply of heavy duty Industrial double compression ET Thread rolled Aluminum cable glands
suitable for 3.3 kV grade / 1.1 KV Grade, XLPE Insulated, PVC inner Sheath, armoured, FRLS
5.4 PVC outer sheathed cables of the following sizes of cables as specified in Technical
Specification Doc. No. PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec‐6.0 & its attachments of following sizes.
3.3 KV (UE) Grade XLPE Insulated, PVC inner sheathed, Armoured, FRLS PVC outer sheathed
A. cables
i. 3C x 240 sq. mm (Al)
Nos. 8 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

ii. 3C x 185 sq. mm (Al)

B.
i. 3.5 C x 70 sqmm (Al) Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

ii. 3.5 C x 50 sqmm (Al) Nos. 6 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii. 3 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Nos. 12 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iv. 12 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
v. 16 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Nos. 8 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
vi. 1C x 10 Sqmm (Al) Earthing Cable Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

Supply of Tinned Copper / Aluminum crimping type lugs of following sizes for termination of
5.5 3.3 kV / 1.1 kV grade cables.
A. 3.3 kV grade cables
i. 240 sq. mm (Al)

ii. 185 sq. mm (Al) Nos. 6 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. 1.1 kV grade cables
i. 70 sqmm (Al) Nos. 6 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii. 50 sqmm (Al) Nos. 18 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii. 35 sqmm (Al) Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iv. 25 sqmm (Al) Nos. 9 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
v. 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Nos. 200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
vi. 10 sqmm (Al) Nos. 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
End termination and subsequent testing of XLPE/PVC insulated single core / multi core
armoured Cables of 3.3 kV/ 1.1 KV grade, Al / Cu cable using suitable excluding supply of
glands & lugs but including Glanding, all labour and consumable materials to make
installation complete in all respect. The rate shall include drilling, taping of cable insulation,
crimping of lugs to the conductor, connection of the lugs to equipment terminal, supply and
5.6 fixing of G.I. nuts, screws, bolts, washers and other necessary hardware, PVC tape of required
grade for taping, making cable entries dust and vermin proof, earthing etc. as per instruction
of manufacturer, approved drawings, specifications and directions of engineer‐in‐charge.
A. 3.3 KV (UE) Grade XLPE Insulated, PVC inner sheathed, Armoured, FRLS PVC outer sheathed
i. 3C x 240 sq. mm (Al)

ii. 3C x 185 sq. mm (Al)
B.
i. 3.5 C x 70 sqmm (Al) Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

ii. 3.5 C x 50 sqmm (Al) Nos. 6 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii. 3 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Nos. 12 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iv. 12 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
v. 19 C x 2.5 sqmm (Cu) Nos. 8 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
vi. 1C x 10 Sqmm (Al) Earthing Cable Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
5.7 Supply of following types of cable termination kit :
Indoor type Heat shrinkable end termination kit of Raychem make suitable for 3.3 KV grade
A. XLPE‐A‐FRLSPVC insulated armoured cables of following sizes
i. 3.3 kV (UE), 3 X 240 sq. mm (Al) XLPE armoured cables

ii. 3.3 kV (UE), 3 X 185 sq. mm (Al) XLPE armoured cables
CABLE RACK (PREFABRICATED LADDER TYPE GI CABLE TRAYS) & ACCESSORIES
6.

Supply of GI ladder type Cable trays and their accessories i.e. supply of all hardware required
i.e. J‐hooks, GI Nut, Bolt, Washers, coupling plate etc. of following sizes and as per Technical
6.1
Specification Doc. No. PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec‐6.0 & its attachments and drawing enclosed.
A. Straight Run Cable Trays
i. 600mm wide Mtrs. 400 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii. 300mm wide Mtrs. 800 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii. 150mm wide Mtrs. 50 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. Horizontal Bends
i. 600mm wide Nos. 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii. 300 mm wide Nos. 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii. 150mm wide Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
C. Vertical Inside Bends
ii. 300mm wide Nos. 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
D. Vertical Outside Bends
E. Regular Tees
i. 600mm wide No. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii. 300mm wide No. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
F. Reducers
i. 600/300mm wide Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii. 300/150mm wide No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Installation, laying and connecting of GI ladder type Cable trays and horizontal & vertical
bends and regular Tees of different radii of various sizes on already erected supports or
risers, including joining various cable trays by bolting with G.I. bolts, nuts & washers as per
6.2 approved drawings (including fixing J‐hooks, reducer coupler plate, adjustable coupler plate
through supply of GI Nut Bolts, Washers etc) as per the desired cable route and as per the
drawings and directions of Engineer‐in‐charge.
A. Straight Run Cable Trays
i. 600mm wide Mtrs. 400 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii. 300mm wide Mtrs. 800 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
iii. 150mm wide Mtrs. 50 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. Horizontal Bends
ii. 300 mm wide Nos. 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
C. Vertical Inside Bends
iii. 150mm wide No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
D. Vertical Outside Bends

E. Regular Tees
i. 600mm wide No. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
G. Reducers
i. 600/300mm wide Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
ii. 300/150mm wide No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
7. DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Supply of 415 V Lighting sub Distribution Board 9‐way wall mounted Sheet enclosed Hose &
Weather Proof Lighting Sub Distribution Board in IP55 degree of protection having 1 No.
Incoming (63 A TP & Switched Neutral Isolator switch) and 3nos feeder circuit of 63A DP MCB
7.1 and ELCB (300/10mA) having 9 Nos. outgoing of 16/25 A DP MCB (i.e. 3 nos. 16 A DP MCB Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
per circuit), as specified in Technical Specification PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec‐6.0 & its
attachments.
Installation, testing and commissioning of 415 V, 9 way wall mounted Lighting sub
Distribution Boards including supply and fabrication of epoxy painted MS frame, operational
and functional checking, drilling of gland plates with requisite holes, fixing of cable glands,
plugging of all unused cable entries and other holes found in the boards to make the same
7.2 dust and vermin proof with all labour and consumable materials to make installation Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
complete as per approved drawings, specifications and directions of engineer‐in‐charge.
8. LIGHTING fixtures & accessories
8.1 Supply of Lighting Fixtures & Accessories
240V AC,1‐Ph, hose and weather proof Lighting fixtures, electronic drivers, cable glands and
other accessories, internal & external reflectors, louvers, etc. suitable for use in safe area
having IP‐65 degree of protection complete with all accessories and all hardware for fixing
A.
the lighting fittings with ceiling / wall / pole/ frame of following types as specified in
Technical Specification Doc. No. PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec‐6.0 & its attachments.
i. 120 W Outdoor LED Flood lighting fixtures Nos. 5 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

240V 1‐ph suspension/ wall mounted T5 type LED Lighting Fixture with/ without reflector
B.
having IP20 Protection
2 x 20 W LED Philips make suspension mounted Lighting Fixture with vitreous enameled
i. Nos. 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
reflector type fixture and lamps.

Installation, connection, testing and commissioning of pre‐wired fluorescent/ LED Lighting
fixtures along with integral /non‐integral control gears, lamps, tubes, chokes, starters,
condensers, mounting accessories, including cable glanding, crimping of lugs on cable
conductor & connecting cables at fixtures, earthing, junction boxes, etc. including supply of
all connecting materials like clamps, supports, conduits, down rods etc. as required as well as
8.2 transportation from store to site of erection with all labour and material to make installation
complete in all respect as per approved drawings, specifications and directions of engineer‐in‐
charge. The rates shall be valid for all mounting heights.
250 W HPSV Hose proof & weather proof Streetlight fixtures with separate control gear
2
i. complete with weatherproof cable glands, plug suitable for 3 X 2.5 mm XLPE‐A‐PVC cable Nos. 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
and stopping plug.
2x20 W LED recess/suspended mounting FTL type Lighting Fixture including supply and
ii. Nos. 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
installation of mounting accessories.
9. JUNCTION BOXES
Supply of 25A, 230V, 1Ph & N 4 Way type hose proof & weatherproof Junction Boxes in cast
aluminium (LM6) enclosure with IP–65 degree of protection and suitable for 3Cx2.5
sq.mm(Cu) cable with cable glands, terminal blocks and threaded plug of suitable size for
9.1 Nos. 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
easy termination of cables and as specified in Technical Specification ‐ Electrical System (Doc.
No. PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec‐6.0 & its attachments).
Installation, connection, testing and commissioning of 25A, 230V, 1Ph & N 4 Way type hose
proof & weatherproof Junction Boxes, including cable glanding, crimping of lugs on cable
conductor & connecting cables, earthing etc. including supply of all connecting materials like
clamps, supports etc. as required as well as transportation from store to site of erection with
all labour and material to make installation complete in all respect as per approved drawings,
specifications and directions of engineer‐in‐charge. The rates shall be valid for all mounting
heights.
10. Wiring
10.1 Point Wiring
A. Primary Point

Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Point Wiring system for primary light
point/ceiling fan point/exhaust fan point/ light plug point inclusive of the cost for providing
circuit wiring from LSDB to switch boards with 2x2.5 sq.mm.,1.1 KV grade PVC multi stranded
fire resistant insulated copper conductor wire for light in required size of heavy duty GI
Conduit with accessories and 14swg bare copper earth wire continuity conductor including
providing/fixing of PVC conduit of required size. Item shall also include wiring from LSDB to
point/fitting with 2x1.5 sq.mm copper conductor PVC insulated wire of 1100V grade with 14
i. SWG copper wire as earth continuity conductor for light in appropriate size of GI conduit Nos. 12 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
including providing & fixing GI conduit with accessories such as bends, JB, sockets etc.
required size of MS zinc passivated modular box with white inner plate and glossy white
outer module plate for housing modular switch, sockets, fan regulators (Electronic heavy
duty step up type) on modular plate etc,The rates shall include cutting and refilling of chases/
Wall etc. including internal connections as required. All switch sockets shall be modular type
fixed on modular plate. Make of modular plate, board, switch, socket etc shall be as per
approved Make
B. Secondary Point
Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Point Wiring system for light point/ceiling fan
point/exhaust fan point/ light plug point from switch boards with 2x2.5 sq.mm., multi
stranded PVC insulated unsheathed copper conductor fire retardant wires of 1100V grade in
recessed GI conduit including providing and fixing heavy duty GI Conduit of required size
complete with accessories such as bends, JB, Pull Boxes etc with plate, switches, sockets,
screws and covers, Zinc Passivated MS modular boxes (16 gauge sheet construction) of
suitable sizes, embedded in wall, concealed and flush with walls including cutting and refilling
i. Nos. 20 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
the chases/ Wall etc and inclusive of 14 SWG bare copper earth conductor for socket outlets
as per specifications & direction of Engineer in charge. All Modular type switch & socket shall
be of approved make with 6A switch mounted side by side with 2x2.5 sq.mm PVC copper
wire with 14 SWG bare copper earth wire.(Actual nos. shall be decided at site).
11. EARTHING MATERIAL
Supply of 3.8M, 100mm dia. heavy G.I. Pipe earth electrode having 100 micron zinc coating
for earthing as per Technical Specification ‐ Electrical System (Doc. No. PC150/E/112/P‐II/Sec‐
6.0 & its attachments). The hot dip galvanizing (minimum Zinc coating of 610 gms/ sq. M as
per IS‐2629) shall be done after all fabrication. The electrodes shall be made from one piece
length of pipe
Installation, testing and commissioning of earth pits as per earthing layout drawings
(excluding supply of safe earth electrodes & accessories) including digging the earth upto
required depth, erecting safe earth electrode, disposal of surplus earth (as directed by
engineer‐in‐charge) and back filling of the pit as required including supply of erection
11.2 material providing necessary brick works and other civil works, fixing G.I. L‐shaped test links Nos. 6 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
and brackets, twisted piece and connecting to it earth electrodes and earth strips with all
labour and materials to complete installation work in all respect as per approved drawings,
specifications and directions of engineer‐in‐charge

Supply of G.I. Earth Bus (50mm x 12mm x 390mm), with 10 Nos earthing holes and as per
PDS: E 615 enclosed.
Installation and commissioning of hot dip galvanised earth bus bar of size 360 mm x 75 mm x
10 mm with 10 holes of 14 mm dia including all labour and materials to complete installation
in all respect as per approved drawings, specifications and directions of Owner’s Engineer‐in‐
charge.
Supply of hot dip galvanized (minimum Zinc coating of 610 gms / sq. M as per IS‐2629)
11.5
Earthing strip / earth wire of the following sizes :
A. 75mm X10mm Mtrs. 200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. 50mm X 6mm Mtrs. 120 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Installation, testing and commissioning of Hot dip galvanised G.I. earthing strip running on
O.H. cable trays / cable trays in underground cable trenches / buried under soil in already
excavated cable trenches of depth 600mm or supported by G.I. saddles & saddle bars as
mentioned below including interconnection between different earth pits, strip / cable for
11.6 connection to various equipments & system neutral, necessary hardware for connection and
interconnection between earth bus bars including all labour and miscellaneous materials to
make installations complete in all respect as per approved drawings, specifications,
instructions and directions of engineer‐in‐charge.
A. 75mm X10mm Mtrs. 200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

B. 50mm X 6mm Mtrs. 120 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
11.7 Supply of GI Links for Earth Pit Connections Nos. 6 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
12. MS Structure
Supply of MS structurals in channels, angles, flats, plates, rods etc. conforming to IS: 226.
12.1 Te 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Fabrication and installation of MS frame supports and brackets for various equipment base
frame, miscellaneous electrical equipment support, made of channels, angles, flats etc. of
different sections including bolting, welding, riveting, supply of necessary anchor bolts and
grouting etc. including 2 coats of zinc rich anti‐rust epoxy primer and 2 finished coats of
12.2 Te 4 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
epoxy paint including breaking wall, floor etc. and making good the same with all labour and
consumable materials to complete installation in all respect as per approved drawings ,
specifications and directions of Owner’s Engineer‐in‐charge
12.3 Supply of 8 mm thick MS Chequered plates. Te 0.1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

Fabrication and Installation of 8mm thick chequered plate in flooring, steps, covers over
cable trenches in switch board room, painting with one coats of bitumen paint in the 50%
12.4 Te 0.1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
thinner with two coats of black bitumen paints including supply of all consumables and
paints.
13. MATERIAL & ACCESSORIES FOR DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES
13.1 Supply of Fine river sand, as required. M3 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
13.2 Supply of approved first class bricks of dimension 230mmx115mmx75mm Nos. 1200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Excavation of soft soil and back filling of trenches for cables and earth strips etc. following
types of soil except rocks for a maximum depth of 1.25 m for cables / 0.6 mtr. for earth strips
13.3 including shoring, strutting, dewatering, consolidation and disposal of surplus earth upto100 M3 30 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
m leads including all labour and materials to complete installation in all respect.

Back filling with excavated earth in trench including consolidating each deposited layer by
13.4 ramming, dressing etc. M3 30 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Spreading of approved fine river sand in cable trenches up to a depth of 250 mm (100 mm
below the centre line of cable and 150 mm above cable the centre line of cable) including all
3
13.5 labour and materials to make the installation complete in all respect as per approved M 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
drawings, specifications and directions of engineer‐in‐charge.
Spreading of approved first class bricks of dimension 230mmx115mmx75mm in cable
13.6 trenches for cable protection including all labour and materials to make installation complete Nos. 1200 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
in all respect.
14. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
Supply of Cable route markers of Round shape made of MS of dia 200mm with suitable
14.1 engraving as of HT/ LT/ Control/ Data Cable jointed with angle of 30X30X5 mm grouted in Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
concrete of size 150mm x150mm x 500mm.
14.2 Grouting and Installation of Cable Route Marker Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Supply, hanging, fixing, connecting of of 240V, 1‐Ph, 50Hz, 1400mm sweep high speed ceiling
fan with electronic regulator.
Supply, hanging, fixing, connecting of single phase 450 mm sweep heavy duty Industrial type
exhaust fan with self opening guards/ louvers. along with necessary brackets, all required
civil works, making good the walls after fixing the fans etc.
Item wise unit prices of following spares for two years operation and maintenance along
15.
with recommended quantity shall be quoted :
15.1 Motor (For each rating)
Bearings housing (complete with End Shield) both Driving End and Non driving end
A. Set 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. Cooling fan No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

C. Space heater Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
D. Terminal box No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
E. Grease nipple & Plug (if installed) Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
15.2 Interlocking switch socket & plug
A. Switch of each rating No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. Fuse base of each rating Nos. 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
C. Fuse of each rating Nos. 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
D. Plug Top No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
15.3 Lighting Fixtures
LED Lighting fixtures (along with Driver) alongwith LED Lamp of each type
B. Terminal block of each type Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

C. Heat resistance toughened glass cover of each type Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
D. Allen keys of different sizes as applicable Set 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
15.4 Local Control Station
A. Trip – neutral – close switch Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. Auto Manual / Local ‐Remote switch Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

C. Ammeters of different ranges No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
D. Terminal block Nos. 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
E. Indicating Lamps of different type Sets 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
F. Push Buttons of different type Sets 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
G. Complete LCS of each type No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
15.5 Junction Box
A. Junction Box of each type Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
15.6 LSDB
A. 63 A TPN SFU No. 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
B. 32 A DP MCB Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
C. 32 A DP ELCB Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
D. 16 A DP MCB Nos. 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
TOTAL AMOUNT FOR SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR ELECTRICAL SUPPLY & INSTALLATION
0.00 No Rupees Only
WORKS
PART D
SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR CIVIL WORKS
Earthwork in excavation in foundations of footings, columns, plinth beams, walls etc., to
the required levels and grades in both dry and wet conditions, including dressing of sides
and ramming of bottoms, getting out excavated earth with lift upto 1.5 M and disposal of
surplus excavated materials within a lead of 50 M including stacking, levelling and dressing
etc., complete as per direction of Engineer‐in‐Charge(E.I.C.) in all kinds of soils as defined in
1 IS: 1200 including providing temporary supports to all service lines such as overhead and Cu. M 126700 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
underground water, sewage and drain pipes, cables etc. and shoring and strutting
wherever necessary, complete in all respects as per direction of Engineer‐in‐Charge.
1.1 Same as Item No.1, but lift from 1.5 M to 3.0 M. Cu. M 115600 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

1.2 Same as Item No.1, but lift from 3 M to 4.5 M. Cu. M 81700 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Earth work in excavation by mechanical means (hydraulic excavator) / manual means over
areas (exceeding 30 cm in depth, 1.5 m in width as well as 10 sqm on plan) including disposal
2
of excavated earth, lead upto 50 m and lift upto 1.5 m, disposed to be levelled and neatly
dressed.
2.1 Ordinary Rock Cu. M 2000 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
2.2 Hard rock (blasting probihited) Cu. M 2000 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Filling with available excavated good earth (excluding rocks / boulders), as approved and
directed by Engineer‐in‐Charge, in trenches, plinth, under floors, sides of foundation etc., at
3 all depths in layers not exceeding 20 cms. in thickness including consolidating and dressing Cu. M 17000 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
each deposited layer by ramming and watering with lead upto 50 metres, complete in all
respects
Same as above with selected good earth brought from source approved by the Engineer ‐in‐
Charge ( Rate shall include Royalty, Taxes, Octoroi, etc., levied by the local authorities,
4 Cu. M 3400 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
all transportation, loading and unloading, etc., and nothing extra will be paid on this
account).

Providing and laying dry rubble stone soling in layers of 300 mm thick hand set in regular
lines, interstices being filled in wit small pieces of stones, thoroughly rammed, consolidated
and watered complete as directed and specified & rolling with 10 MT power roller.
Supplying and filling in plinth with sand under floors, including watering, ramming,
consolidating and dressing complete.
Providing and laying in position cement concrete of specified grade ‐ all work up to plinth
7 level, including the cost of centering, shuttering and finishing :‐ 1:2:4 (1 Cement : 2 coarse Cu. M 780 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
sand (zone‐III) : 4 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size).
Providing and laying in position reinforced cement concrete in foundations, plinth beams
8 etc. including the cost of centering, shuttering, finishing but excluding reinforcement
8.1 Design mix M20 grade concrete ‐ All work up to plinth level Cu. M 13000 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

8.2 Design mix M20 grade concrete ‐ All work above plinth level Cu. M 50 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Steel reinforrcement for R.C.C. work including straightening, cutting, bending, placing in
posision and binding all complete with hot rolled, cold twisted, weldable high yield deformed
9 CRSD (Corrosion Resistance Steel with Fe500D properties) rebar having Characteristic yield Ton 500 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
strength 500N/mm²,in accordance with IS:1786.
Providing and constructing Brick work with non modular fly ash bricks conforming to
IS:12894, class designation 10 average compressive strength in in cement mortar 1 : 6 ( 1
10 cement: 6 coarse sand )inwalls, etc. at all depths, places and positions including raking out Cu. M 110 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
joints, curing, scaffolding etc. complete excluding plastering and painting.
CEMENT PLASTER (IN COARSE SAND): 12 mm cement plaster of mix 1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse
11 sand) Sq.M 2550 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
CEMENT PLASTER (IN COARSE SAND): 15 mm cement plaster on rough side of single or half
12 Sq.M 860 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
brick wall of mix 1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse sand)
13 6mm thick cement plaster to ceiling of mix 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand). Sq.M 600 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Providing and applying plaster of paris putty of 2 mm thickness over plastered surface to
prepare the surface even and smooth complete
Distempering with oil bound washable distemper of approved brand and to give an even
15 shade including water thinnable priming coat with cement primer. Sq.M 845 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Providing and laying in position at all heights cement concrete mix 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2
coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate) in panels of 2 metre square or as directed
and finished with floating coat of neat cement including providing cement slurry ( with
16 cement @ 2.2 kg/sq.m.), rounding of edges and glass strips but excluding the cost of nosing Sq.M 280 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
of steps etc., complete :‐ 40 mm. thick with 20.0 mm nominal size stone aggregate

Making Plinth protection 50mm thick of cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand : 6
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) over 75mm thick bed of dry brick ballast 40 mm
17 nominal size, well rammed and consolidated and grouted with fine sand, including necessary Sq.M 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
excavation, levelling & dressing & finishing the top smooth.
Providing and fixing aluminium work for doors, windows, ventilators and partitions with
extruded built up standard tubular sections/appropriate Z sections and other sections of
approved make conforming to IS: 733 and IS: 1285, fixing with dash fasteners of required dia
and size, including necessary filling up the gaps at junctions, i.e. at top, bottom and sides with
required EPDM rubber/neoprene gasket etc. Aluminium sections shall be smooth, rust free,
18 straight, mitred and jointed mechanically wherever required including cleat angle, Aluminium
snap beading for glazing / paneling, C.P. brass / stainless steel screws, all complete as per
architectural drawings and the directions of Engineer‐in‐charge. Powder coated aluminium
(minimum thickness of powder coating 50 micron)
For Fixed Portion ‐ Anodised aluminium (anodised transparent or dyed to required shade
18.1 according to IS: 1868, Minimum anodic coating of grade AC 15) kg. 250 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
For shutters of doors, windows & ventilators including providing and fixing hinges/ pivots and
making provision for fixing of fittings wherever required including the cost of EPDM rubber /
18.2 neoprene gasket required including necessary fittings:‐ Anodised aluminium (anodised kg. 120 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
transparent or dyed to required shade according to IS: 1868, Minimum anodic coating of
grade AC 15).
Providing and fixing 12 mm thick prelaminated particle board flat pressed three layer or
graded wood particle board conforming to IS: 12823 Grade l Type ll, in panelling fixed in
aluminum doors, windows shutters and partition frames with C.P. brass / stainless steel
19 screws etc. complete as per architectural drawings and directions of engineerin‐charge‐Pre‐ Sq.M. 25 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
laminated particle board with decorative lamination on one side and balancing lamination on
other side
Providing and fixing glazing in aluminium door, window, ventilator shutters and partitions
etc. with EPDM rubber / neoprene gasket etc. complete as per the architectural drawings and
20 the directions of Engineer‐in‐charge. (Including aluminium snap beading)‐With float glass Sq.M. 50 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
panes of 4.0 mm thickness
Providing and fixing double action hydraulic floor spring of approved brand and manufacture
conforming to IS : 6315, having brand logo embossed on the body / plate with double spring
mechanism and door weight upto 125 kg, for doors, including cost of cutting floors,
embedding in floors as required and making good the same matching to the existing floor
21 Each 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
finishing and cover plates with brass pivot and single piece M.S. sheet outer box with slide
plate etc. complete as per the direction of Engineer‐in‐charge‐With brass cover plate
minimum 1.25 mm thickness
Providing and fixing aluminium tower bolts, ISI marked, anodised (anodic coating not less
22 than grade AC 10 as per IS : 1868 ) transparent or dyed to required colour or shade, with
necessary screws etc. complete
22.1 150x10 mm Each 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
22.2 100x10 mm Each 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only

Providing and fixing Brass 100mm mortice latch and lock with 6 levers without pair of
23 handles (best make of approved quality) for aluminium doors including necessary cutting and Each 10 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
making good etc. complete.
Providing and fixing aluminium handles, ISI marked, anodised (anodic coating not less than
24 grade AC 10 as per IS : 1868) transparent or dyed to required colour or shade, with necessary Each 15 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
screws etc. complete ‐100mm
Providing and fixing aluminium sliding door bolts, ISI marked anodised (anodic coating not
25 less than grade AC 10 as per IS : 1868), transparent or dyed to required colour or shade, with Each 15 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
nuts and screws etc. complete : a) 250 mm x 16 mm
Providing and fixing Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pipes, having thermal stability for
hot & cold water supply, including all CPVC plain & brass threaded fittings, i/c fixing the pipe
with clamps at 1.00 m spacing. This includes jointing of pipes & fittings with one step CPVC
26 solvent cement and the cost of cutting chases and making good the same including testing of
joints complete as per direction of Engineer in Charge. Concealed work, including cutting
chases and making good the walls etc.
26.1 15 mm nominal outer dia pipes R.M. 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
26.2 20 mm nominal outer dia pipes R.M. 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Finishing walls with water proofing cement paint of required shade two or more coats
27 applied @ 3.84 kg/10 sqm including one coat of water thinnable cement primer of approved Sq.M 155 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
brand.
Providing and Placing in position suitable PVC water stops conforming to IS: 12200 for
construction/ expansion joints between two RCC members and fixed to the before pouring
28 m 1220 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
concrete etc. complete :reinforcement with binding wire ‐ Serrated with central bulb (225
mm wide, 8‐11 mm thick)
Extra for providing and mixing water proofing material in cement concrete work in doses by per 50 Kg
29 24880 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
weight of cement as per manufacturer's specification. cement
Providing and laying in situ seven course water proofing treatment with APP (Atactic poly‐
propylene) modified Polymeric memberane over roof consisting of first coat of bitumen
primer @ 0.40 Kg per sqm, 2nd, 4th & 6th courses of bonding material @ 1.20 Kg/sqm, which
shall consist of blown type bitumen of grade 85/25 conforming to IS : 702, 3rd and 5th layers
of roofing membrane APP modified Polymeric membrane 1.5 mm thick of 2.25 Kg/sqm
weight consisting of five layers prefabricated with centre core as 20 micron HMHDPE film
30 sandwiched on both sides with polymeric mix and the polymeric mix is protected on both Sq.M. 600 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
side with 20 micron HMHDPE film. 7th, the top most layer shall be finished with brick tiles of
class designation 10 grouted with cement mortar 1:3 (1cement : 3 fine sand) mixed with 2%
integral water proofing compound by weight of cement over a 12 mm layer of cement mortar
1:3 (1 cement : 3 fine sand) and finished neat.

Providing and laying integral cement based water proofing treatment including preparation
of surface as required for treatment of roofs, balconies, terraces etc consisting of following
operations:
(a) Applying a slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75 kg/sqm of cement admixed with water
proofing compound conforming to IS. 2645 and approved by Engineer‐in‐charge over the
RCCslab including adjoining walls upto 300 mm height including cleaning the surface before
treatment.
(b) Laying brick bats with mortar using broken bricks/brick bats 25 mm to 115 mm size with
50% of cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) admixed with water proofing
compound conforming to IS : 2645 and approved by Engineer‐in‐charge over 20 mm thick
layer of cement mortar of mix 1:5 (1 cement :5 coarse sand ) admixed with water proofing
compound conforming to IS : 2645 and approved by Engineer‐in‐charge to
required slope and treating similarly the adjoining walls upto 300 mm height including Sq.M. 50 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
rounding of junctions of walls and slabs.
31 (c) After two days of proper curing applying a second coat of cement slurry using 2.75 kg/
sqm of cement admixed with water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645 and
approved by Engineerin‐ charge.
(d) Finishing the surface with 20 mm thick jointless cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1 cement :4
coarse sand) admixed with water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645 and approved
by Engineerin‐ charge including laying glass fibre cloth of approved quality in top layer of
plaster and finally finishing the surface with trowel with neat cement slurry and making
pattern of 300x300 mm square 3 mm deep.
(e) The whole terrace so finished shall be flooded with water for a minimum period of two
weeks for curing and for final test.“All above operations to be done in order and as directed
and specified by the Engineer‐in‐Charge : ‐ With average thickness of 120 mm and minimum
thickness at khurra as 65 mm.
Providing and fixing in position 12mm thick bitumen impregnated fiber board conforming to per cm
32 IS: 1838, including cost of primer, sealing compound Grade‐A in expansion joints. depth per 290 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
100 m
Supply, Providing and laying 1.0 mm Smooth HDPE Geomembrane Liner conorming to Indian
code of practice to make the under layer of reservior impermeable as per design drawing and
as directed by EIC complete in all rsepects.
Providing and laying in position bitumen hot sealing compound for Expanation / Construction per cm
34 164600 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
joints etc. ‐ Using grade 'A' sealing compound. depth per
Providing & fixing in R.C.C. work, Single Face sluice gate, Class‐1( Rising Type) of 1000 mm
square size, conforming to IS : 3042 (Figure 1‐B) along with hand wheels, spindles, guide
35 Each 2 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
rails& all other fitting accessories required, complete as per drawing and directions of
Engineer‐in‐Charge

Supplying, transporting, de‐rusting, fabricating, erecting, hoisting and fixing in position
with necessary welding and/or bolting with MS bolts conforming to property class 4.6 of IS:
1367 at all heights as per approved fabrication drawings of all types of structural steel work
in columns, portals, girders, lattice girders, beams, crane girders, M.S rails, monorails,
bracings, trusses, purlins, rafters, side runners, sag rods, hand railings, staircase stringers
and steps, walkway, toe‐plates, floor grids, sag rods with M.S. rounds, side walling,
conveyor gantries, trestle for pipe and cable racks, gusset plates, etc., either made of rolled
36 steel joists, channels, angles, tees, flats, plates or built up from plates and/or rolled MT 15 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
steel sections including necessary site and shop fasteners, complete in all respects as per
approved fabrication drawings, standards and direction of Engineer‐in‐Charge :‐ With
providing and applying primer coat, intermediate coats and finish coat after the preparation
of surfaces on structural steel work complete in all respects as per technical specifications
and direction of Engineer‐in‐Charge.
Providing and fixing M.S pipe hand railing (medium grade) conforming to IS‐1239 consisting
of top and middle horizontal rails of 40 mm dia. and 32 mm dia. nominal bore
respectively, 1050 mm high upright members of 40 mm dia. nominal bore at 1500 mm
maximum distance centre to centre of each member including all joints, bends , elbows,
and specials as required and upright members welded or bolted to structural steel work/toe
37 plates or welded to M.S. insert plates with M.S. lugs embedded in R.C.C. works, complete Te 75 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
in all respects and as per direction of Engineer‐in‐Charge :‐ Two coats of chlorinated rubber
based paint at dry film thickness of 40 microns per coat over two coats of high built zinc
phosphate primer compatible to chlorinated rubber based paint at dry film thickness of 25
microns per coat.
Supplying, fabricating, erecting and fixing in position to line and level all M.S Inserts such as
anchor plates, angles, tees, channels, plates with lugs, hooks, sleeves etc. embedding in
cement concrete /R.C.C. works at all levels including welding, bolting, drilling, cutting,
38 scaffolding, holding in position, providing one coat of approved anti‐corrosive paint and / or Kg. 700 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
Bituminous paint on exposed surfaces, etc. all complete in all respects and as per direction of
Engineer‐in‐Charge.(Templates if any required for fixing the inserts will not be paid for).
Supplying, fabricating and fixing in position M.S. holding down bolts assembly consisting
of bolts, heads, nuts, washers etc., and the like including embedding in cement
39 concrete/R.C.C. works as per approved drawings complete in all respects including one Kg. 500 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
coat of approved quality anti‐corrosive paint over a coat of approved quality primer.
Providing and fixing rolling shutters of approved make made of 80 mm wide MS laths and
interlocked together through their entire length and jointed together at the ends by end
locks, mounted on specially designed pipe shaft with bracket plates, guide channels and
arrangement for inside and outside locking with push ‐pull operation complete including cost
40 of wire spring and hood cover for the shutters and painting with synthetic enamel paint of Sq.m 100 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
approved brand and manufacture of required colour to give an even shade ‐ new work with
two coats inculding a coat of approved steel primer and a coat of mordant solution with 38
gms of copper acetate in a litre of soft water.
Extra for providing mechanical device chain and crank operation for operating rolling
41 Sq.m 50 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
shutters.

Supplying , fabricating and erecting M.S entrance gates consisting of M.S pipes of medium
duty frame and M.S rods welded together including heavy duty fittings such as locking
42 arrangement and guide rail embedded in concrete as per drawing and rollersfor Te 3 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
smoothoperation all complete and painting as per technical specifications and as per
directions of Engineer‐in‐Charge. (All material supply is in contractor's scope)
Disposal of building rubbish / malba / similar unserviceable, dismantled or waste materials by
mechanical means, including loading, transporting, unloading to municipal approved
dumping ground or as approved by Engineer‐in‐charge, beyond 50 m initial lead, for all leads
including all lifts involved.
44 RELEVANT GEO‐TECHNICAL TESTS FOR SOIL INVESTIGATION LS 1 INR 0.00 No Rupees Only
TOTAL AMOUNT FOR SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR CIVIL WORKS 0.00 No Rupees Only
GRAND TOTAL OF PART A, PART B, PART C & PART D (INR, In Figures), Including all
A 0.00
Taxes, Duties & Cess, Excluding GST
GRAND TOTAL OF PART A, PART B, PART C & PART D (INR, In Words), Including all
B No Rupees Only
Taxes, Duties & Cess, Excluding GST
C APPLICABLE GST (INCLUDING CESS/SURCHARGE, IF ANY ) 18% (Eighteen Percent)
D BIDDER TO INDICATE APPLICABLE SAC/HSN CODE
E TOTAL GST AMOUNT (in Figures) 0.00
F TOTAL GST AMOUNT (in Words) No Rupees Only
TOTAL AMOUNT IN FIGURES ( A + E ) 0.00
G
TOTAL AMOUNT IN WORDS ( A + E ) No Rupees Only
Signature Not Verified

Digitally signed by SUMIT KUMAR
Date: 2019.12.22 18:09:46 IST
Location: eProcure-EPROC

PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

AT TALCHER FERTILIZERS LTD., ANGUL, ODISHA

NIT NO. : PNPM/PC-150/E/112/NCB

PREPARED AND ISSUED BY

PROJECTS & DEVELOPMENT INDIA LTD.

NIT NO. : PNPM/PC-150/E/112/NCB

NIT DESCRIPTION : TENDER DOCUMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER &

Section-I Invitation for Bid [IFB]

Section-II BID EVALUATION CRITERIA [BEC] & Evaluation methodology

Instructions to Bidders [ITB]

Forms & Format

Section-IV General Conditions of Contract [GCC]

Section-V Special Conditions of Contract [SCC]

Section-VI Specifications, Scope of Work and Drawing

Section-VII Schedule of Rates

FORM NO: 02-0000-0021 F 2 REV 3 All rights reserved

DOC. NO. REV.

(OPEN DOMESTIC COMPETITIVE BIDDING)

INVITATION FOR BID (IFB)

"INVITATION FOR BID (IFB)”

Ref No:______________________________ Date:

SUB: TENDER DOCUMENT FOR ____________________________________

1.0 Projects and Development India Limited (PDIL), hereinafter referred to as

2.0 The brief details of the tender are as under:

CONSTRUCTION OF RAW WATER & FIRE

(B) TENDER NO. & DATE PNPM/PC-150/E/112/NCB Dated 23.12.2019

120 days from the date of Techno-

(Also refer clause no.16 of ITB)

From 23.12.2019 (09:00 Hrs, IST) to

AVAILABILITY OF TENDER (i) Govt. CPP Portal https://eprocure.gov.in

DATE, TIME & VENUE OF PRE-BID

START OF BID SUBMISSION ON

Kind Attention: Mr. R.R.Kumar/Kailash Joshi

Tel No. : 9818804063

i) EMD/Bid Security (if applicable)

8.0 Amendments/Clarification(s)/Corrigendum(s) if any shall also be available on above

This is not an Order.

For & on behalf of

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

BID EVALUATION CRITERIA & EVALUATION METHODOLOGY

BID EVALUATION CRITERIA (BEC) & EVALUATION METHODOLOGY

Construction of RCC/PCC Lined Earthen Water Reservoir alongwith

(iii) Undertaking by Supporting Company to provide a Performance Bank

The Financial BEC of tender is to be met by bidder on their own.

(f) Experience of bidder acquired as a subcontractor can be accepted against

3. DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED FOR COMPLIANCE TO BEC

4. AUTHENTICATION OF DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED IN SUPPORT OF BEC:

i. Technical Criteria of BEC:

Note: All charges of the verification and certification shall be borne by

ii. Financial Criteria of BEC:

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

[B] BIDDING DOCUMENTS:

[C] PREPARATION OF BIDS:

[D] SUBMISSION OF BIDS:

[E] BID OPENING AND EVALUATION:

[F] AWARD OF CONTRACT:

2.4 Bidder shall not be affiliated with a firm or entity: